Contrex CX-1010 Technical Reference Manual

CX-1010
TECHNICAL
REFERENCE
MANUAL
0001-0131 Rev A
i
Technical Assistance
If you have comments or questions concerning the operation of the CX–1010, a member of our Technical
Support Staff will be happy to assist you. Ask for Technical Support:
(763) 424-7800 or (800) 342-4411
Contrex ®
8900 Zachary Lane North
Maple Grove, Minnesota 55369
Copyright © 2001 Contrex
ii
DANGER
Improper installation can
cause severe injury, death or
damage to your system.
Integrate this motion control
unit into your system with
caution.
Comply with the National
Electrical Code and all
applicable local and national
codes.
iii
iv
iv
Table of Contents
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Introducing the CX–1010 ....................................................................................................................1-3
Examples of CX–1010 Applications ...................................................................................................1-4
Installation/Setup ............................................................................................................................... 2-1
Configuration ......................................................................................................................................2-3
Mounting .............................................................................................................................................2-7
Wiring .................................................................................................................................................2-9
Inputs .......................................................................................................................................2-10
Outputs ....................................................................................................................................2-21
Serial Communications ...........................................................................................................2-24
Analog I/O Card (Optional) ..............................................................................................................2-27
Mounting .................................................................................................................................2-29
Wiring ......................................................................................................................................2-35
DeviceNet Card (Optional) ...............................................................................................................2-41
Logic Control ....................................................................................................................................3-43
Operator Interface ............................................................................................................................ 3-1
Keypad Operation ...............................................................................................................................3-3
Screen Operation .................................................................................................................................3-5
Drive Setup/Calibration ................................................................................................................ 4-1
Calibration ...........................................................................................................................................4-3
Direction, Creep and Range Calibration ...................................................................................4-5
Analog Calibration ....................................................................................................................4-8
System Setup/Control Parameters ......................................................................................... 5-1
Introduction to Control Parameters .....................................................................................................5-3
Scaling .................................................................................................................................................5-5
Standard Signals ........................................................................................................................5-7
Monitor Parameters .................................................................................................................5-17
Aux Analog Signals .................................................................................................................5-25
Setpoints ............................................................................................................................................5-35
Run Modes ...............................................................................................................................5-36
Master ......................................................................................................................................5-38
Follower ...................................................................................................................................5-44
Custom .....................................................................................................................................5-50
Direct .......................................................................................................................................5-59
v
Alarms*Ramps*Limits .....................................................................................................................5-63
Alarms .....................................................................................................................................5-64
Run Ramps ..............................................................................................................................5-73
R-Stop and H-Stop Setup ........................................................................................................5-76
Direct Setpoint Ramps .............................................................................................................5-78
Jog Setup .................................................................................................................................5-80
Limits .......................................................................................................................................5-82
Tuning ................................................................................................................................................5-85
Velocity Loop ..........................................................................................................................5-94
Velocity Loop / ZE ..................................................................................................................5-98
Position Loop........................................................................................................................ 5-102
Feedforward .......................................................................................................................... 5-106
Related Items ........................................................................................................................ 5-108
Block Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 5-113
Edit Block Parms ................................................................................................................... 5-116
Edit Block 0 through 7 ......................................................................................................... 5-120
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) ......................................................................................... 5-125
PLC Monitor ......................................................................................................................... 5-143
PLC Timers ........................................................................................................................... 5-151
PLC Event Counters ............................................................................................................. 5-156
PLC Position Counters ......................................................................................................... 5-158
PLC Data Copy ..................................................................................................................... 5-160
Digital I/O ............................................................................................................................. 5-163
PLC Programming ................................................................................................................ 5-166
Device Configure ........................................................................................................................... 5-171
Status Screen Setup .............................................................................................................. 5-172
Load & Save Parms .............................................................................................................. 5-174
Keypad Lockout Setup ......................................................................................................... 5-176
Serial Com Setup .................................................................................................................. 5-180
DeviceNet Setup ................................................................................................................... 5-182
Video Setup .......................................................................................................................... 5-186
Alarm Indicator Mask .......................................................................................................... 5-188
System Monitoring/Monitor Parameters .......................................................................... 6-1
Introduction to Monitor Parameters ....................................................................................................6-3
System Monitor ...................................................................................................................................6-5
Run Monitor ..............................................................................................................................6-6
STD Signal Monitor ................................................................................................................6-12
Limits and Alarms ...................................................................................................................6-18
DIG I/O Monitor .....................................................................................................................6-22
Aux Analog Monitor ...............................................................................................................6-24
Control Overrides ....................................................................................................................6-28
Serial Communications .................................................................................................................. 7-1
Introduction to Serial Communications ..............................................................................................7-3
CX-1010 Serial Communications ASCII Data-Link Protocol ..................................................7-4
CX-1010 Serial Communications ASCII2 Data-Link Protocol ..............................................7-17
CX-1010 Serial Communications Binary Data-Link Protocol ...............................................7-35
vi
Troubleshooting/Diagnostics ...................................................................................................... 8-1
Device tests .........................................................................................................................................8-3
Hardware Tests ..........................................................................................................................8-4
STD Signal Tests ..................................................................................................................... 8-11
Digital I/O Test ........................................................................................................................8-16
Auxiliary Analog Tests ............................................................................................................8-19
Serial Communications Test ....................................................................................................8-32
Device Status ...........................................................................................................................8-34
Device Model & Revision .......................................................................................................8-38
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................8-41
Parameter Load at Power-Up ............................................................................................................8-48
EEPROM chip Replacement .............................................................................................................8-50
Glossaries .................................................................................................................................. Glossary- 1
Acronym Glossary................................................................................................................. Glossary- 3
Glossary ................................................................................................................................. Glossary- 9
Appendices ............................................................................................................................................. A-1
Appendix A: CX-1010 Specifications ................................................................................................ A-3
Appendix B: Formulas ....................................................................................................................... B-1
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference .......................................................... C-1
Appendix D: Control Parameter Reference ....................................................................................... D-1
Appendix E: Monitor Parameter Reference ....................................................................................... E-1
Appendix F: Control Parameter Screen Locator ................................................................................ F-1
Appendix G: Monitor Parameter Screen Locator .............................................................................. G-1
Appendix H: Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference ............................................................................. H-1
Appendix I: Default PLC Program Logic ........................................................................................... I-1
Appendix J: PLC Bit-Map Reference ................................................................................................. J-1
Appendix K: Error Code Definitions .................................................................................................. J-1
Appendix L: Serial Communications Error Code Definitions........................................................... L-1
Appendix M: PLC Program Commands / Serial Communications .................................................. M-1
Appendix N: PLC Program Operands / Serial Communications ...................................................... N-1
Appendix O: Wiring Diagram Examples ........................................................................................... O-1
Appendix P: Fax Cover Sheet ............................................................................................................ P-1
Appendix Q: Revision Log ................................................................................................................ Q-1
Warranty/Service ................................................................................................................ Warranty-1
Service Policy ......................................................................................................................... Warranty-3
Warranty ................................................................................................................................. Warranty-4
Index ................................................................................................................................................................ 1
vii
viii
List of Illustrations
Figure 1-1 CX-1010 Continuous Process Fluid Mixing Application .............................................1-4
Figure 1-2 CX-1010 Follower Constant Speed Windup Application..............................................1-5
Figure 1-3 CX-1010 Follower Windup with Dancer Application ...................................................1-6
Figure 2-1 AC Power Input Voltage Switch ...................................................................................2-5
Figure 2-2 CX–1010 Cutout Dimensions and Mounting Guide ....................................................2-6
Figure 2-3 General Wiring ...............................................................................................................2-8
Figure 2-4 AC Power Input ..........................................................................................................2-10
Figure 2-5 Lead Frequency - Quadrature Differential Sensor ......................................................2-11
Figure 2-6 Lead Frequency - Quadrature Single-Ended Sensor .................................................. 2-11
Figure 2-7 Lead Frequency - Single Channel Differential Sensor ................................................2-12
Figure 2-8 Lead Frequency - Single Channel Single-Ended Sensor .............................................2-12
Figure 2-9 Feedback Frequency - Quadrature Differential Sensor ...............................................2-13
Figure 2-10 Feedback Frequency - Quadrature Single-Ended Sensor ...........................................2-13
Figure 2-11 Feedback Frequency - Single Channel Differential Sensor .........................................2-14
Figure 2-12 Feedback Frequency - Single Channel Single-Ended Sensor .....................................2-14
Figure 2-13 F-Stop ...........................................................................................................................2-15
Figure 2-14 R-Stop ..........................................................................................................................2-15
Figure 2-15 H-Stop ..........................................................................................................................2-15
Figure 2-16 Run .............................................................................................................................2-16
Figure 2-17 Jog ..............................................................................................................................2-16
Figure 2-18 Jog Reverse ................................................................................................................2-16
Figure 2-19 Keypad Lockout ...........................................................................................................2-17
Figure 2-20 Block Select A ............................................................................................................2-17
Figure 2-21 Block Select B ..............................................................................................................2-17
Figure 2-22 Block Select C ............................................................................................................2-18
Figure 2-23 Setpoint Direction ......................................................................................................2-18
Figure 2-24 Increment Batch Count ..............................................................................................2-19
Figure 2-25 Reset Batch Count ......................................................................................................2-19
Figure 2-26 Remote Scroll Up .........................................................................................................2-20
Figure 2-27 Remote Scroll Down ..................................................................................................2-20
Figure 2-28 Speed Command Out .................................................................................................2-21
Figure 2-29 CX-Digital Outputs ....................................................................................................2-23
Figure 2-30 Multidrop Installation ..................................................................................................2-24
Figure 2-31 Serial Communications Connections .........................................................................2-25
Figure 2-32 Removing CPU Board .................................................................................................2-31
Figure 2-33 Mounting the Analog I/O Card on the CPU Board ...................................................2-33
Figure 2-34 CX-1010 Analog I/O Card ...........................................................................................2-36
Figure 2-35 Analog Input 1 (voltage) ............................................................................................2-37
Figure 2-36 Analog Input 2 (voltage) ..............................................................................................2-37
Figure 2-37 Analog Input 1 (current input) ...................................................................................2-38
ix
Figure 2-38 Analog Input 2 (current Input) .....................................................................................2-38
Figure 2-39 Analog Input 1 (potentiometer input) ........................................................................2-39
Figure 2-40 Analog Input 2 (potentiometer Input) ..........................................................................2-39
Figure 2-41 Analog Output (voltage) ............................................................................................2-40
Figure 2-42 Analog Output (current) ...............................................................................................2-40
Figure 2-43 F-Stop Input .................................................................................................................2-44
Figure 2-44 R-Stop Input .................................................................................................................2-45
Figure 2-45 H-Stop Input .................................................................................................................2-46
Figure 2-46 Run Input ......................................................................................................................2-47
Figure 2-47 Jog Forward Input ........................................................................................................2-48
Figure 2-48 Jog Reverse Input .........................................................................................................2-49
Figure 3-1 CX–1010 Front Panel ...................................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-2 Overview of CX–1010 Screen Matrix ..........................................................................3-4
Figure 8-1 Hardware Tests Corresponding Keypad Numbers ........................................................ 8-6
Figure 8-2 Motor Does Not Stop Flowchart .................................................................................8-42
Figure 8-3 Motor Runs Unstable Flowchart .................................................................................8-43
Figure 8-4 Motor Runs at Wrong Speed Flowchart .....................................................................8-44
Figure 8-5 Motor Does Not Run Flowchart .................................................................................8-46
Figure 8-6 Parameter Load at Power-up Corresponding Keypad Numbers .................................8-49
Figure 8-7 EEPROM Replacement ..............................................................................................8-51
Figure O-1 CX–1010 Wiring Connections without Relays ........................................................... O-1
Figure O-2 Relay Start/Stop Wiring Connections ......................................................................... O-2
Figure O-3 Start/Stop for Regen with Armature Contactor .......................................................... O-3
x
List of Tables
Table 5-1
Table 7-1
Table 7-2
Table 7-3
Table 7-4
Table 7-5
Table 7-6
Table 7-7
Table 7-8
Table 7-9
Table 7-10
Table 7-11
Table 7-12
Table 7-13
Table 7-14
Table 7-15
Table 7-16
Table 7-17
Table 7-18
Table 7-19
Table 7-20
Table 7-21
Table 7-22
Table 7-23
Table 7-24
Table 7-25
Table 7-26
Table 7-27
Table 7-28
Table 7-29
Table 7-30
Table 7-31
Table 7-32
Table 7-33
Table 7-34
Table 7-35
Table 7-36
Table 7-37
Table 7-38
Table 7-39
Remote Scroll Rates ................................................................................................. 5-163
Data Read Single Parameter Host Transmission .......................................................... 7-4
Host Transmission ..........................................................................................................7-6
CX-1010 Response ........................................................................................................7-6
Host Transmission .........................................................................................................7-7
CX-1010 Response .......................................................................................................7-7
Host Transmission ..........................................................................................................7-8
CX-1010 Response ........................................................................................................7-9
Host Transmission .......................................................................................................7-10
CX-1010 Response .................................................................................................... 7-10
Host Transmission ........................................................................................................ 7-11
CX-1010 Response ...................................................................................................... 7-11
Host Transmission ........................................................................................................7-12
CX-1010 Response .....................................................................................................7-12
Host Transmission ........................................................................................................7-13
CX-1010 Response ......................................................................................................7-13
Host Transmission ........................................................................................................7-14
CX-1010 Response ......................................................................................................7-14
Host Transmission ........................................................................................................7-19
CX-1010 Response .....................................................................................................7-19
Host Transmission ......................................................................................................7-20
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-20
Host Transmission ........................................................................................................7-21
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-21
Host Transmission ........................................................................................................7-22
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-22
Host Transmission ......................................................................................................7-23
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-23
Host Transmission .......................................................................................................7-24
CX-1010 Response ......................................................................................................7-24
Host Transmission ......................................................................................................7-25
CX-1010 Response ......................................................................................................7-27
Host Transmission ......................................................................................................7-27
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-28
Host Transmission ........................................................................................................7-29
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-30
CX-1010 Response ......................................................................................................7-31
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-32
Data Read Single Parameter Host Transmission ......................................................... 7-35
Host Transmission ......................................................................................................7-37
xi
Table 7-40
Table 7-41
Table 7-42
Table 7-43
Table 7-44
Table 7-45
Table 7-46
Table 7-47
Table 7-48
Table 7-49
Table 7-50
Table 7-51
Table 7-52
Table 7-53
Table 7-54
Table 7-55
Table 7-56
Table 7-57
Table 7-58
Table 7-59
Table 7-60
Table 7-61
Table 7-62
Table 7-63
Table 7-64
Table 7-65
Table 7-66
Table 7-67
Table 7-68
Table 7-69
Table 7-70
xii
CX-1010 Response ......................................................................................................7-37
Host Transmission ........................................................................................................7-38
CX-1010 Response ......................................................................................................7-38
Host Transmission ......................................................................................................7-39
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-39
Host Transmission ......................................................................................................7-40
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-41
Host Transmission ......................................................................................................7-42
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-42
Host Transmission ......................................................................................................7-43
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-43
Host Transmission ......................................................................................................7-44
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-44
Host Transmission ......................................................................................................7-45
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-45
Host Transmission ......................................................................................................7-46
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-46
Host Transmission ......................................................................................................7-47
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-47
Host Transmission ......................................................................................................7-50
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-50
Host Transmission ......................................................................................................7-52
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-52
Host Transmission ......................................................................................................7-53
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-53
Host Transmission ......................................................................................................7-54
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-54
Host Transmission ......................................................................................................7-55
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-55
Host Transmission ......................................................................................................7-56
CX-1010 Response ....................................................................................................7-56
Introduction
Introducing the CX–1010
Examples of CX–1010 Applications
1-1
1-2
INTRODUCING THE CX–1010
The CX–1010 is a quantum leap in user friendly motion control. Its menu-driven screens allow quick and
easy access to multiple Control and Monitor Parameters. In addition, all of the screens and parameters can
access individual “help” screens, that define the functions and display additional options. For those of you
who are familiar with the M-Series, and the single parameter entry, these revolutionary screens will be a
paradigm shift in the way you view motion control.
The CX–1010 is a highly accurate, digital, motion controller. Its advanced internal software is capable of
solving a great variety of speed control tasks. It operates as either a stand alone control of a single motor
(Master mode) or as a part of a complex multi-drive system (Follower mode). It also operates a multifunctional mode that can be custom tailored to your specific system's requirements (Custom Mode). The
CX–1010 can also operate with inverse or offset variations.
The CX–1010 is ideal for motor control applications where your open loop or rudimentary closed loop
operations are inaccurate or where there is inadequate load regulation. The CX–1010 is also ideal for
mixing, blending, extruder or conveyor control applications or any application that requires an accurate ratio
following a lead.
The CX–1010 adds accurate digital control to virtually any AC, DC, Servo Flux Vector or Clutch drives. The
CX–1010 is at the forefront in user friendly, digitally accurate Follower applications. See figure 1-1 through
figure 1-3 for examples of CX-1010 applications.
The CX–1010 preprogrammed internal software integrates with your system with little effort from you. The
CX–1010's user friendly screens will also allow you to enter data that is unique to your system's specific
needs (e.g., maximum RPM, setpoints, acceleration/deceleration ramp rates). Using Code Parameters (CP),
this data is entered through either the CX–1010's screens or through a host computer via the RS485 Serial
Communications port. In addition to the Control Parameters that allow you to customize for your systems
specific needs, the CX–1010's Monitor Parameters (MP) allow you to monitor your system's performance.
The CX–1010 has multiple scaling formats that allow you to enter the setpoints and monitor speed in the
Engineering Units (e.g., RPM, gallons per hour, feet per minute) that are unique to your system. The CX1010 features timer/counter and batching functions. Integrating the CX-1010's applied intelligence with your
system puts closed loop speed regulation with zero accumulative error at your fingertips, quickly, easily and
cost effectively. The CX-1010 is perfect for applications that need to accommodate a wide range of changing
configurations.
1-3
EXAMPLES OF CX–1010 APPLICATIONS
Figure 1-1 is an example of a the Continuous Process Fluid Mixing application. The continuous process fluid
mixing application depends on the ability of the followers to maintain their feedback as a constant percentage of
the total flow rate. As the Lead pump speed changes, the Follower pump's speed change proportionately The
introduction of the CX–1010 to the continuous process fluid mixing process increases control, efficiency and
saves time.
CX-1010
CX-1010
CX-1010
CX-1010
Lead
Follower
Follower
Follower
Figure 1-1 CX–1010 Continuous Process Fluid Mixing Application
1-4
Figure 1-2 is an example of a the Constant Speed Windup application. As the windup role rotates, its diameter
increases. The advanced capability of the CX–1010 senses even the slightest increase in speed and the
CX-1010 reduces output to the drive accordingly. In response, the windup role slows down and an exact
surface speed is maintained. The CX–1010 allows a nearly infinite range of settings, no pinch points and a
significant reduction in mechanical backlash.
LINE FLOW
FEEDBACK
FREQUENCY
CX-1010
Figure 1-2 CX–1010 Constant Speed Windup Application
1-5
Figure 1-3 is an example of a the Windup with Dancer application. The CX–1010's advanced capabilities allow
it to match the surface speed of the windup roll with the surface speed of the Lead encoder. The CX–1010 uses
a signal from the dancer to make the necessary windup speed corrections that assure precise tension or position.
LINE FLOW
AXLE
SENSOR
FEEDBACK
FREQUENCY
DANCER
SIGNAL
0-10 V OR 4-20 mA
CX-1010
Figure 1-3 CX–1010 Windup with Dancer Application
1-6
Installation / Setup
Configuration
Mounting
Wiring
Inputs
Outputs
Serial Communications
Analog IO (Optional)
Mounting
Wiring
DeviceNet (Optional)
Logic Control
2-1
2-2
CONFIGURATION
This section will show you how to re-configure the CX-1010 for electrical compatibility. Complete this
procedure prior to installation. This procedure does not require power to complete.
The area that is involved in re-configuring the CX-1010 is the AC Power Input Voltage switch. This switch
is located in an external location on the CX-1010. You will not be required to access the interior of the
CX-1010.
Figure 2-1 (page 2-5) illustrates the location of this switch.
2-3
WARNING
C ONT
RE
X
me
nu
pag
e
pag
e
sta
tus
7
8
4
par
par
cod
set e
help
9
5
1
6
2
—
3
0
.
cle
ar
ente
r
You will damage the CX-1010 if you
apply 230 VAC to the AC Power input
while theAC Power Input Voltage switch
is in the 1 5 V position.
2-4
The AC Power Input Voltage switch is located on the rear of the CX-1010. The default configuration for the
AC Power Input Voltage switch is 115 VAC.
To re-configure for 230 VAC Input, move the switch from the 115V position (up) to the 230V position
(down).
RS 485
SERIAL
COMM.
TD/RD+
J5
+12 V AUX
150 mA MAX
TD/RD–
FI_1A
COM
FI_1A
FREQUENCY INPUTS
FI_1B
+V_D0
D0_0
D0_1
D0_2
COM
FI_2A
FI_2A
D0_3
FI_2B
D0_4
FI_2B
D0_5
COM
REG. INPUTS
DIGITAL
OUTPUTS
FI_1B
D0_6
D0_7
RI_1
RI_2
J6
COM
DI_0
DI_1
COM
115V
(default)
CONTROL C0_SIG
OUTPUT
TO DRIVE C0_COM
DI_2
DI_3
DI_4
DI_5
COM
INPUT VOLTAGE:
115/230 VAC
115V
INPUT CURRENT:
0.1 AMP
INPUT FREQUENCY:
50/60 HZ
DIGITAL INPUTS
DI_6
DI_7
DI_8
DI_9
L1
115V
AC
POWER
INPUT
COM
L2/NEUT
GND/PE
DI_10
DI_11
230V
USE COPPER WIRE ONLY.
SELECT WIRE SIZE ACCORDING TO AMPACITY
FOR 60/75 C WIRE
TIGHTEN TERMINALS TO 5 IN/LB
DI_12
DI_13
COM
DI_14
DI_15
J7
Figure 2-1 AC Power Input Voltage Switch
2-5
(
CUTOUT "
3.65" .03
m
9.27± .07c
3.6"
(9.1 cm)
(
DOOR PANEL
EX
CONTR
(
)
CUTOUT
7.25" ± .03"
18.41 ± .07 cm
,,
,,
7.2"
(18.3 cm)
7.7"
(19.6 cm)
menu
status
7
4
1
*6.3"
(16.3 cm)
—
page
page
8
5
2
0
par
par
code
set
help
9
6
3
.
clear
enter
4.0" m)
0
(1 .2 c
* From the rear of the door panel to the back of the connectors
Figure 2-2 CX–1010 Cutout Dimensions and Mounting Guide
2-6
MOUNTING
This section contains instructions for mounting the CX–1010 in the door panel of an industrial electrical
enclosure. The CX–1010 is packaged in a compact 1/2 DIN vertical instrument enclosure that mounts easily
in the door of your industrial electrical enclosure. The CX-1010 meets the NEMA 4 and the IP65 standards.
To ensure compliance with these standards, enclose the CX-1010 in a Nema 4 or IP65 industrial electrical
enclosure.
To mount the CX–1010:
1)
The industrial electrical enclosure that will house the CX–1010 must conform to the following
environmental conditions:
Temperature: 0 - 55 degrees C
(Internal enclosure temperature)
Humidity: 0 - 95% RH non-condensing
Environment: Pollution degree 2 macro - environment
Altitude: To 3300 feet (1000 meters)
2)
The dimensions for the door panel cutout are 3.65"+ .03" x 7.25 +.03" (9.27 x 18.41cm). See
figure 2-2. Allow two inches of clearance on both sides of the cutout and four inches of
clearance on the top and bottom of the cutout for mounting clamp attachments, wire routing
and heat convection.
3)
Insert the CX–1010 through the door panel cutout until the gasket and bezel are flush with the
door panel (see figure 2-2).
4)
Slide the two mounting clamp bars into the slots that are located on either side of the CX–
1010. See figure 2-2. Tighten the mounting screws until the CX–1010 is mounted securely in
the electrical enclosure. Do not overtighten.
2-7
RS485
SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS
INTERFACE
TD/ RD –
1
TD / RD +
2
TD/ RD –
3
COMMON
COM
RS485
SERIAL COMM
J1
TD / RD +
FREQUENCY INPUTS
J2
+
ZERO SPEED
HI SPEED ALARM
SUPPLY
(50V MAX)
DO_0
3
DO_1
A
LEAD
FI_1A
3
A
FI_1B
4
B
QUADRATURE
DIFFERENTIAL
SENSOR
FI_1B
5
B
COM
6
COMMON
FI_2A
7
A
FI_2A
8
A
FI_2B
9
B
FI_2B
10
B
COM
11
COMMON
RI_1
12
NC
RI_2
13
NC
DO_2
R
5
DO_3
DEV ALARM 2
R
6
DO_4
BATCH DONE
R
7
DO_5
CNTL OUT DIR
R
8
DO_6
DRIVE ENABLE
R
9
DO_7
J6
10
COM
DI_0
1
F–STOP
R–STOP
SIGNAL INPUT
1
CO_SIG
DRIVE COMMON
2
CO_COM
CONTROL
OUTPUT
TO DRIVE
J3
MOTOR DRIVE
DIGITAL INPUTS
FUSES
1A
150 V
L2
GND/PE GND/PE
DI_1
2
3
DI_2
4
H–STOP
DI_3
5
RUN
DI_4
6
JOG FWD
DI_5
7
JOG REV
COM
8
DI_6
9
DI_7
10
J7
DI_8
1
DI_9
J4
2
3
11
22
L1
DI_10
4
DI_11
5
33
GND/PE
DI_12
6
DI_13
7
COM
8
DI_14
9
DI_15
10
L2/NEUT
+ 12V PWR
COM
COM
AC POWER
INPUT
115 VAC 230 VAC
L1
L1
CX-1010
* Power for frequency input sensors may be supplied by J5, pin 1.
Total current should not exceed 150 mA .
Figure 2-3 CX–1010 General Wiring
2-8
FEEDBACK
QUADRATURE
DIFFERENTIAL
SENSOR
4
–
NEUT
2
R
REG IN
POWER
2
+ 12V PWR
FI_1A
DEV ALARM 1
LOW SPEED ALARM
DC
R
+V_DO
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
EXTERNAL
R
1
J5
* + 12V_AUX 1
KEYPAD LOCKOUT
NC
BLOCK
SELECT A
BLOCK
SELECT B
BLOCK
SELECT C
SETPOINT DIR
INCREMENT
BATCH COUNT
RESET BATCH
COUNT
REMOTE
SCROLL UP
REMOTE
SCROLL DOWN
WIRING
This section contains the input, output and serial communications wiring information for the CX–1010.
Please read this section prior to wiring the CX–1010 to ensure that you make the appropriate wiring
decisions.
NOTE: The installation of this motor control must conform to area and local electrical codes. See The
National Electrical Code (NEC,) Article 430 published by the National Fire Protection Association,
or The Canadian Electrical Code (CEC). Use local codes as applicable
Use a minimum wire gauge of 18 AWG.
Use shielded cable to minimize equipment malfunctions from electrical noise and terminate the
shields at the receiving end only.
Keep the AC power wiring (J4) physically separated from all other wiring on the CX–1010. Failure
to do so could result in additional electrical noise and cause the CX–1010 to malfunction.
Inductive coils on relay, contactors, solenoids that are on the same AC power line or housed in the
same enclosure should be suppressed with an RC network across the coil.
A hand operated supply disconnect device must be installed in the final application. The primary
disconnect device must meet EN requirements.
Install an AC line filter or isolation transformer to reduce excessive EMI noise, such as line notches
or spikes, on the AC power line.
DANGER
Hazardous voltages.
Can cause severe injury, death
or damage the equipment.
The CX–1010 should only be installed by a
qualified electrician.
2-9
INPUTS
NOTE: The installation of this motor control must conform to area and local electrical codes. Refer to page
2-9 before you begin wiring.
AC Power Input
(J4 pins 1, 2,3)
The CX–1010 operates on either a 115 VAC - 10% +
15%, 0.250 Amp., 50/60 Hz or a 230 VAC -10% +15%,
0.125 Amp, 50/60 Hz. Use the separate 3 pin connector
(J4) for the power connection.
* Fuse L1 for 115 VAC applications. Fuse L1
and L2 for 230 VAC applications. Use 1 Amp
250 normal blow fuses.
L1
Neutral (115 VAC)
or L2 (230 VAC)
GND/PE
*
*
1
2
3
J4
Figure 2-4 AC Power Input
WARNING
You will damage the CX-1010 if you apply
230 VAC to the AC Power input
when the AC Power Input Voltage switch
is in the 115 V position.
2 - 10
Lead Frequency
(J5 pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6)
Frequency Input 1
The LEAD FREQUENCY Input acts as the lead signal when the CX–1010 is in the Follower mode. The
wiring for the LEAD FREQUENCY is determined by the sensor. Figures 2-5 through 2-8 illustrate the wiring
for the various sensors. For signal level and performance specifications, refer to Appendices: Appendix A .
*
*+12V_Aux
1
+12V Pwr
FI_1A
2
A
FI_1A
3
A
FI_1B
4
B
FI_1B
5
B
COM
6
Common
Figure 2-5 Lead Frequency
Quadrature Differential Sensor (Bidirectional)
J5
Total currant draw from the +12V_Aux (J5-Pin 1) should not
exceed 150 Milliamps.
*+12V_Aux
1
+12V Pwr
FI_1A
2
A
FI_1A
3
FI_1B
4
FI_1B
5
COM
6
Figure 2-6 Lead Frequency
Quadrature Single-Ended Sensor (Bidirectional)
B
Common
J5
*
Total currant draw from the +12V_Aux (J5-Pin 1) should not
exceed 150 Milliamps.
2 - 11
Lead Frequency continued...
*+12V_Aux
1
+12V Pwr
FI_1A
2
A
FI_1A
3
A
FI_1B
4
FI_1B
5
COM
6
Figure 2-7 Lead Frequency
Single Channel Differential Sensor (Unidirectional)
Common
J5
*
Total currant draw from the +12V_Aux (J5-Pin 1) should not
exceed 150 Milliamps.
*+12V_Aux
1
+12V Pwr
FI_1A
2
A
FI_1A
3
FI_1B
4
FI_1B
5
COM
6
Figure 2-8 Lead Frequency
Single Channel Single-Ended Sensor (Unidirectional)
Common
J5
*
2 - 12
Total currant draw from the +12V_Aux (J5-Pin 1) should not
exceed 150 Milliamps.
Feedback Frequency
(J5 pins 1, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11)
Frequency Input 2
The FEEDBACK FREQUENCY detects the controlled motor speed. The wiring for FEEDBACK
FREQUENCY is determined by the sensor. Figures 2-9 through 2-12 illustrate the wiring for the various
sensors. For signal level and performance specifications refer to Appendices: Appendix A.
*+12V_Aux
1
+12V Pwr
FI_2A
7
A
FI_2A
8
A
FI_2B
9
B
FI_2B
10
B
COM
11
Common
Figure 2-9 Feedback Frequency
Quadrature Differential Sensor (Bidirectional)
J5
*
Total currant draw from the +12V_Aux (J5-Pin 1) should not
exceed 150 Milliamps.
*+12V_Aux
1
+12V Pwr
FI_2A
7
A
FI_2A
8
FI_2B
9
FI_2B
10
COM
11
Figure 2-10 Feedback Frequency
Quadrature Single-Ended Sensor (Bidirectional)
B
Common
J5
*
Total currant draw from the +12V_Aux (J5-Pin 1) should not
exceed 150 Milliamps.
2 - 13
Feedback Frequency continued...
*+12V_Aux
1
+12V Pwr
FI_2A
7
A
FI_2A
8
A
FI_2B
9
FI_2B
10
COM
11
Figure 2-11 Feedback Frequency
Single Channel Differential Sensor (Unidirectional)
Common
J5
*
Total currant draw from the +12V_Aux (J5-Pin 1) should not
exceed 150 Milliamps.
Figure 2-12 Feedback Frequency
Single Channel Single-Ended Sensor (Unidirectional)
*+12V_Aux
1
+12V Pwr
FI_2A
7
A
FI_2A
8
FI_2B
9
FI_2B
10
COM
11
Common
J5
*
2 - 14
Total currant draw from the +12V_Aux (J5-Pin 1) should not
exceed 150 Milliamps.
F–Stop
(J6 pins 1,3)
Digital Input 0
F-STOP is a momentary input. When it is opened, the
CX–1010 commands a zero speed immediately and
ignores the specified deceleration rate. However,
F–STOP does not hold zero speed or position (drive
disabled). As a momentary input, F-STOP is internally
latched and does not need to be maintained open by an
operator device.
F-STOP
DI_0
1
COM
3
J6
Figure 2-13 F–Stop
R–Stop
(J6 pins 2, 3)
Digital Input 1
R-STOP
R–STOP is a momentary input. When it is opened, the
CX–1010 ramps to a zero speed command at the
specified deceleration rate. However, R–STOP does
not hold zero speed after the deceleration ramp has
been completed (drive disabled) . As a momentary
input, R–STOP is internally latched and does not need
to be maintained open by an operator device.
DI_1
2
COM
3
J6
Figure 2-14 R–Stop
H–Stop
(J6 pins 3, 4)
Digital Input 2
H–STOP is a momentary input. When it is opened, the
CX–1010 ramps to a zero speed command at the
specified deceleration rate. In addition, H–STOP holds
zero speed after the deceleration ramp has been
completed (drive enabled). As a momentary input,
H–STOP is internally latched and does not need to be
maintained open by an operator device.
H-STOP
COM
3
DI_2
4
J6
Figure 2-15 H–Stop
2 - 15
Run
(J6 pins 3, 5)
Digital Input 3
RUN
When the RUN input (J6, pin 5) is momentarily shorted
to common, the CX–1010 enters the RUN state. As a
momentary input, RUN is internally latched and does
not need to be maintained closed by an operator
device.
COM
3
DI_3
5
J6
NOTE: Close the R–Stop, H-Stop and F–Stop inputs
prior to entering the Run state. If you are only
using one of the Stop inputs, wire short the
other Stop inputs to the common or the
CX–1010 will not enter run.
Figure 2-16 Run
Jog Forward
(J6 pins 6, 8)
Digital Input 4
JOG FORWARD
JOG FORWARD is a maintained input. When it is
closed, it sends a forward speed command signal to the
drive at the selected Jog Setpoint . As a maintained
input, JOG FORWARD is only active when the operator
device is closed.
NOTE: Close the R–Stop, H-Stop and F–Stop inputs
prior to entering the Jog state. If you are only
using one of the Stop inputs, wire short the
other Stop inputs to the common or the
CX–1010 will not enter Jog.
DI_4
6
COM
8
J6
Figure 2-17 Jog Forward
Jog Reverse
(J6 pins 7, 8)
Digital Input 5
JOG REVERSE is a maintained input. When it is
closed, it sends a reverse speed command signal to the
drive at the selected Jog Setpoint . As a maintained
input, JOG REVERSE is only active when the operator
device is closed.
NOTE: Close the R–Stop, H-Stop and F–Stop inputs
prior to entering the Jog state. If you are only
using one of the Stop inputs, wire short the
other Stop inputs to the common or the
CX–1010 will not enter Jog.
2 - 16
JOG REVERSE
DI_5
7
COM
8
J6
Figure 2-18 Jog Reverse
Keypad Lockout
(J7 pins 8, 9)
Digital Input 6
When the KEYPAD LOCKOUT input is closed, the
Control Parameters that you have selected to "lock out"
are inaccessible from the front keypad. All of the
Monitor Parameters remain enabled.
ENABLE
COM
8
DI_6
9
LOCKOUT
J7
Figure 2-19 Keypad Lockout
Block Select A
(J7 pins 1, 3)
Digital Input 8
Use BLOCK SELECT A in conjunction with BLOCK
SELECT B and BLOCK SELECT C inputs to select one
of the eight Parameter Blocks. Refer to the chart on
the next page.
DI_8
1
COM
3
BLOCK
SELECT A
J7
Figure 2-20 Block Select A
Block Select B
(J7 pins 2,3)
Digital Input 9
Use BLOCK SELECT B in conjunction with BLOCK
SELECT A and BLOCK SELECT C inputs to select one
of the eight Parameter Blocks. Refer to the chart
below.
DI_9
2
COM
3
BLOCK
SELECT B
J7
Figure 2-21 Block Select B
2 - 17
Block Select C
(J7 pins 3,4)
Digital Input 10
Use BLOCK SELECT C in conjunction with BLOCK
SELECT A and BLOCK SELECT B inputs to select one
of the eight Parameter Blocks. Refer to the chart below.
COM
3
DI_10
4
BLOCK
SELECT C
J7
Figure 2-22 Block Select C
PARAMETER
BLOCKS:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Block
Select A
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Block
Select B
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Block
Select C
Open
Open
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Setpoint Direction
(J7 pins 3,5)
Digital Input 11
Use SETPOINT DIRECTION in conjunction with a
positive or a negative setpoint parameter value to select
either a forward or reverse command direction. Refer to
the chart below.
POSITIVE
COM
3
DI_11
5
NEGATIVE
J7
Figure 2-23 Setpoint Direction
2 - 18
Positive
Setpoint Value
Negative
Setpoint Value
Setpoint Direction
Open
Forward
Command
Reverse
Command
Setpoint Direction
Closed
Reverse
Command
Forward
Command
Increment Batch Count
(J7 pins 6, 8)
Digital Input 12
INCREMENT BATCH COUNT is a momentary input.
When it is closed, the CX–1010 increases the internal
batch counter by one increment.
INCREMENT BATCH
COUNT
DI_12
6
COM
8
J7
Figure 2-24 Increment Batch Count
Reset Batch Count
(J7 pins 7, 8)
Digital Input 13
RESET BATCH COUNT is a momentary input. When it
is closed, the CX–1010 resets the internal batch counter
to zero.
RESET BATCH
COUNT
DI_13
7
COM
8
J7
Figure 2-25 Reset Batch Count
2 - 19
Remote Scroll Up
(J7 pins 8, 9)
Digital Input 14
REMOTE SCROLL UP is a maintained input. When it is
closed, any Control Parameter that you enter into the
Remote Scroll Parameter (CP-300) can be incremented
at the Remote Scroll Rate (CP-301). As a maintained
input, REMOTE SCROLL UP is only active when the
operator device is closed.
REMOTE SCROLL
UP
COM
8
DI_14
9
J7
Figure 2-26 Remote Scroll Up
Remote Scroll Down
(J7 pins 8,10)
Digital Input 15
REMOTE SCROLL DOWN is a maintained input. When
it is closed, any Control Parameter that you enter into
the Remote Scroll Parameter (CP-300) can be
decremented at the Remote Scroll Rate (CP-301). As a
maintained input, REMOTE SCROLL DOWN is only
active when the operator device is closed.
REMOTE SCROLL
DOWN
COM
8
DI_15
10
J7
Figure 2-27 Remote Scroll Down
2 - 20
OUTPUTS
NOTE: The installation of this motor control must conform to area and local electrical codes. Refer to page
2-9 before you begin wiring.
Speed Command Out
(J3 pins 1, 2)
SPEED COMMAND OUT is an isolated analog
output signal that is sent to the motor drive to control
the speed of the motor. Wire the SPEED COMMAND
OUT into the speed signal input of the drive. If the
motor drive has a potentiometer speed control,
remove the potentiometer connections and wire the
SPEED COMMAND OUT output to the potentiometer
wiper point. The CX–1010's Isolated Common
should always be connected to the drive common.
Speed Command Out
SIGNAL INPUT
DRIVE COMMON
Isolated Com
*
1
CO_SIG
2
CO_COM
J3
MOTOR DRIVE
* Do not connect the Drive Isolated Common to other Logic Commons.
Figure 2-28 Speed Command Out
Zero Speed
(J2 pin 2)
Digital Output 0
The ZERO SPEED output is activated (driven low) when the feedback is less than or equal to zero speed,
as determined by the value that you enter in the Zero Speed Alarm Control Parameter (CP-270).
Hi Speed Alarm
(J2 pin 3)
Digital Output 1
The HI SPEED ALARM output is activated (driven low) if the system's speed is greater than the speed alarm
value that you enter in the CMPR1 Val Control Parameter (CP-292), See Figure 2-29.
Lo Speed Alarm
(J2 pin 4)
Digital Output 2
The LO SPEED ALARM output is activated (driven low) if the system's speed is lower than the value that
you enter in the CMPR2 Val Control Parameter (CP-293). See Figure 2-29.
2 - 21
Dev Alarm 1
(J2 pin 5)
Digital Output 3
The DEV ALARM 1 output is activated (relay energized) when the Ramped Reference minus the Feedback
is greater than the deviation band that you enter in the CMPR3 Val Control Parameter (CP-294). See
Figure 2-29.
Dev Alarm 2
(J2 pin 6)
Digital Output 4
The DEV ALARM 2 output is activated (relay energized) when the difference between the Scaled Reference
and Feedback is greater than the band that you enter in the CMPR4 Val Control Parameter (CP-295). See
Figure 2-29.
Batch Done
(J2 pin 7)
Digital Output 5
The BATCH DONE output is activated (driven low) when the CX-1010's internal batch counter reaches the
batch count that you enter in the Cntr1 Trig (CP-320). See Figure 2-29.
Control Output Dir
(J2 pin 8)
Digital Output 6
The CONTROL OUTPUT DIR is activated (driven low) when the CX-1010 commands a forward direction to
the motor drive. The CONTROL OUTPUT DIR output is deactivated (driven high) when the CX-1010
commands a reverse direction to the motor drive. See Figure 2-29.
Drive Enable
(J2 pin 9)
Digital Output 7
The DRIVE ENABLE output is activated (driven low) when the CX–1010 signals a run command to the motor
drive. The DRIVE ENABLE output is driven high (relay deactivated) after Power Up and at the completion of
R–Stop and F–Stop. See Figure 2-29.
NOTE: The Digital Outputs are open-collector relay drivers. For specification details, see Appendices:
Appendix A . Use an external DC power supply to power the relays. Free-wheeling diodes are
incorporated internally in the CX-1010 and do not need to be added externally.
2 - 22
+
+V_DO
1
Zero Speed
2
R1
Hi Speed Alarm
3
R2
Low Speed Alarm
4
R3
Dev Alarm 1
5
R4
Dev Alarm 2
6
R5
EXTERNAL
DC
POWER
SUPPLY
(50V Max)
Batch Done
7
R6
Control Output Dir
8
R7
Drive Enable
9
R8
Common
10
–
J2
Figure 2-29 CX-1010 Digital Outputs
2 - 23
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
NOTE: The installation of this motor control must conform to area and local electrical codes. Refer to page
2-9 before you begin wiring.
The Serial Communications interface on the CX–1010 complies with EIA Standard RS–485-A for balanced
line transmissions. This interface allows the host computer to perform remote computer parameter entry,
status or performance monitoring, and remote control of the CX–1010. See Serial Communications for
information on using Serial Communications.
Figures 2-30 and 2-31 illustrate a multidrop installation of the Serial Communications link and Serial
Communications connections.
CONTREX
menu
status
7
4
page
page
par
code
set
par
help
menu
status
8
9
5
6
7
1
2
—
0
CONTREX
CONTREX
4
3
clear
.
enter
page
page
8
5
1
2
—
0
par
code
set
par
help
menu
status
9
7
6
4
3
clear
.
enter
menu
status
7
4
page
page
par
code
set
par
help
menu
status
8
9
5
6
1
2
—
0
7
4
3
clear
.
enter
page
page
par
code
set
par
help
5
6
1
2
—
0
7
4
3
clear
.
enter
Figure 2-30 CX-1010 Multidrop Installation
2 - 24
menu
status
9
page
page
par
code
set
par
help
8
9
5
6
1
2
—
0
5
2
0
CONTREX
8
8
1
Converter
CONTREX
page
—
RS232 to RS485
CONTREX
page
3
clear
.
enter
par
code
set
par
help
9
6
3
clear
.
enter
RS232 to RS485
Converter
TXD/
COM RXD
—
TXD/
RXD
+
J1
1
+ TXD/RXD
2
- TXD/RXD
3
COM
J1
2
CX-1010 #1
CX-1010 #2
1
+ TXD/RXD
2
- TXD/RXD
3
COM
1
1. Shield only at one end of the cable.
2. If you need to terminate the communication line, then
terminate it at the unit which is the furthest away from
the converter. A 100 ohm, 1/2 Watt resistor will usually
terminate successfully. Refer to EIA Standard
RS–485A, for more information.
Figure 2-31 CX-1010 Serial Communications Connections
2 - 25
—NOTES—
2 - 26
ANALOG I/O CARD (OPTIONAL)
This section contains the mounting and wiring information for the Analog I/O Card. Please read this section
prior to mounting or wiring the Analog I/O Card to ensure that you make the appropriate decisions.
The Analog I/O Card is an auxiliary analog card with two analog inputs and one analog output. Both the
inputs and output are factory calibrated for + 12V or 0 to 20 mA signals. Some of the Monitor Parameters
can be used in connection with the analog output for either auxilary control or monitoring. Analog process
signals can be used in connection with the analog inputs to replace the following:
Lead Source
Offset source
V1,V2,V3,V4 Source
Feedback Source
Offset Source
2 - 27
—NOTES—
2 - 28
MOUNTING
This section contains the mounting information for the CX–1010 Analog I/O card. Please read this section as
you mount the Analog I/O card to ensure that the Analog I/O card is mounted correctly. If the Analog I/O
card does not function properly after installation, then verify that the mounting procedure has been
completed accurately. For the specifications on the Analog I/O card, refer to Appendices: Appendix A.
The CX-1010 will support one Analog I/O card in either of the two available slots, however, the upper slot is
preferred.
Warning
The Analog I/O Card should only be
installed by a qualified technician.
Take the proper antistatic precautions.
2 - 29
1)
If the CX-1010 unit has power connected to it, remove the power. If the CX-1010 has been
mounted in your system, disable it from the system.
2)
Remove the connectors on the rear of the CX-1010. Pay careful attention to the location of
each connector so that you can replace them in their proper locations. It is possible to replace
a connector incorrectly.
3)
Remove the earth ground screw and ground connections.
4)
Remove the four machine screws that hold the back plate in place, and set them aside.
Carefully remove the back plate.
5)
Remove the upper option card slot cover plate by removing the two
machine screws.
6)
Remove the CPU Board carefully - pull the CPU board straight out so that you do not bend
the card guides or the CPU board, nor damage the internal backplane card-edge connector.
See figure 2-32.
NOTE: Take the appropriate antistatic precautions when you handle the CPU board and the
Analog I/O card.
7)
Remove the Analog I/O card from it's antistatic bag, holding it by the edges.
8)
Remove the 11-pin terminal strip plug from the 11-pin right angle terminal strip on the Analog
I/O card. Make sure that the screws that hold the round standoffs and the 40-pin connector in
place are secure. Tighten these screws, as needed.
9)
Mount the Analog I/O card to the CPU Board by carefully inserting the three long pins of the
Optional Analog connector to the three corresponding holes on the non-component side of the
CPU board, and insert the 40-pin connector on the Analog I/O card into the 40-pin connector
on the CPU board.
10)
Verify that the standoffs are flush with the CPU board. Make sure that the 40-pin contacts are
properly aligned.
11)
Holding firmly to the edges of both boards to preserve the alignment, carefully flip the boards
so that the component side of the CPU board faces up.
12)
Insert the four screws and the attached lock washers into the round standoff holes and alternate
between the screws as you tighten both screws into place snugly. Verify the alignment of the
boards.
13)
Reinsert the CPU Board into the CX-1010 unit by aligning the CPU board with the top and
bottom card edge connectors and gently push the board straight back until the CPU board card
edge connector tab seats fully into the internal backplane card-edge connector.
(continued)
2 - 30
Power Board
CPU Board
Figure 2-32 Removing the CPU Board
2 - 31
14)
Replace the back plate, making sure that it seats properly and the connectors are all properly
aligned in their slots.
15)
Screw the back plate into place with the four machine screws.
16)
Screw the ground screw back into place snugly. Replace the connectors. Replace the power
connector.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the calibration procedure before engaging the CX-1010. Refer to
Drive Setup / Calibration: Calibration.
2 - 32
Figure 2-33 Mounting the Analog I/O Card on the CPU Board
2 - 33
—NOTES—
2 - 34
WIRING
This section contains the input and output wiring information for the CX–1010 Analog I/O Card. Please read
this section prior to wiring the Analog I/O Card to ensure that you make the appropriate wiring decisions.
The CX-1010 will support one Analog I/O Card in either of the two available slots. The factory calibrated
Analog I/O Card has two inputs and one output available. Both the inputs and output are calibrated for + 12V
or 0 to 20 mA signals. The Analog I/O Card is fully isolated from the CPU core. For the specifications for
the Analog I/O Card, refer to Appendices Appendix A.
Warning
The Analog I/O Card should only be
installed by a qualified technician.
Take the proper antistatic precautions.
2 - 35
J5
1
TD / RD +
2
TD/ RD –
3
COM
RS485
SERIAL COMM
J1
4
2
DO_0
ANALOG INPUT 2
DO_1
DO_2
DO_3
6
DO_4
7
DO_5
8
DO_6
9
DO_7
10
COM
AI_1R
3
AI_1-
4
AI_2+
5
AI_2R
6
AI_2-
7
COM
8
AO_I
9
AO_V
10
COM
11
ANALOG OUTPUT
REG IN
5
AI_1+
+V_DO
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
3
1
FREQUENCY INPUTS
2
+12V_AUX
ANALOG INPUT 1
J2
1
JA
ANALOG OPTION I/O
2
CO_COM
CONTROL
OUTPUT
TO DRIVE
CO_SIG
JB
5
CAN_H
4
DeviceNet
DRAIN
Connector
3
CAN_L
2
V—
1
33
GND/PE
L2/NEUT
AC POWER
INPUT
L1
Input
Power
FI_1A
2
FI_1A
3
FI_1B
4
FI_1B
5
COM
6
FI_2A
7
FI_2A
8
FI_2B
9
FI_2B
10
COM
11
RI_1
12
RI_2
13
DI_0
1
DI_1
2
COM
3
DI_2
4
DI_3
5
DI_4
6
DI_5
7
COM
8
DI_6
9
DI_7
10
J7
DI_8
1
DI_9
NET
STAT
MOD
2
COM
3
STAT
DI_10
4
5
COM
2
DI_11
+5VDC
1
DI_12
6
DI_13
7
COM
8
DI_14
9
DI_15
10
DEVICENET
CX-1010
Figure 2-34 CX–1010 Analog I/O Card
2 - 36
DIGITAL INPUTS
V+
J4
11
22
1
J6
J3
1
+ 12V_AUX
INPUTS
NOTE: Refer to pages 2-9 and 2-35 before you begin wiring.
Analog Input 1:
Voltage Input Wiring
(JA, Pins 2, 4, 8)
The Analog Input 1 can be used with either ±12 VDC or
0-20 mA inputs. Figure 2-35 displays the ±12 VDC
option.
For the differential inputs:
Connect JA pin 2 to the positive differential signal
source.
Connect JA pin 4 to the negative differential signal
source.
Connect JA pin 8 to the common of the differential
signal source.
For the non-differential inputs:
Connect JA pin 2 to the signal voltage source.
Connect JA pin 4 and JA pin 8 to the common of the
signal source.
+
2
±12V Input
3
—
4
Common
8
+
–
JA
Figure 2-35 Analog Input 1: Voltage
Input
Analog Input 2:
Voltage Input Wiring
(JA, Pins 5, 7, 8)
The Analog Input 2 can be used with either ±12 VDC or
0-20 mA inputs. Figure 2-35 displays the ±12 VDC
option.
For the differential inputs:
Connect JA pin 5 to the positive differential signal
source.
Connect JA pin 7 to the negative differential signal
source.
Connect JA pin 8 to the common of the differential
signal source.
+
5
±12V Input
6
—
7
Common
8
+
–
JA
Figure 2-36 Analog Input 2: Voltage
Input
For the non-differential inputs:
Connect JA pin 5 to the signal voltage source.
Connect JA pin 7 and JA pin 8 to the common of the
signal source
2 - 37
Analog Input 1:
Current Input Wiring
(JA, Pins 2,3,4)
The Analog Input 1 can be used with
either ±12 VDC or 0-20 mA inputs.
Figure 2-37 displays the 0-20 mA
option.
0-20 mA Input
2
3
Common
243
Ohm
4
JA
Figure 2-37 Analog Input 1: Current
Input
Analog Input 2:
Current Input Wiring
(JA, Pins 5,6,7)
The Analog Input 2 can be used with
either ±12 VDC or 0-20 mA inputs.
Figure 2-38 displays the 0-20 mA
option.
0-20 mA Input
5
6
Common
243
Ohm
7
JA
Figure 2-38 Analog Input 2: Current
Input
2 - 38
Analog Input 1:
Potentiometer Input Wiring
(JA, Pins 1, 2, 4, 8)
+12V _Aux*
1
The Analog Input 1 can be used with a potentiometer
(e.g., dancer pot). Figure 2-39 displays this option.
2
* The total current from JA pin 1 and J5 pin 1
(+12V_Aux) must not exceed 150 mA.
4
+
3
–
Common
8
JA
Figure 2-39 Analog Input 1:
Potentiometer Input
Analog Input 2:
Potentiometer Input Wiring
(JA, Pins 1, 5, 7, 8)
The Analog Input 1 can be used with a potentiometer
(e.g., dancer pot). Figure 2-40 displays this option.
+12V _Aux*
1
5
* The total current from JA pin 1 and J5 pin 1
(+12V_Aux) must not exceed 150 mA
+
6
–
7
Common
8
JA
Figure 2-40 Analog Input 2:
Potentiometer Input
2 - 39
OUTPUTS
NOTE: Refer to pages 2-9 and 2-35 before you begin wiring.
Analog Output:
Voltage Output Wiring
(JA, Pins 9, 10, 11)
The Analog Output produces either an isolated + 12V
output signal or a 0-20 mA current source analog output
signal into a load resistance of 0-500 Ohms.
Figure 2-41 displays the +12V option.
9
± 12V Out
10
Common
11
JA
Figure 2-41 Analog Output: Voltage
Output
Analog Output:
Current Output Wiring
(JA, Pins 9, 10, 11)
The Analog Output produces either an isolated + 12V
output signal or a 0-20 mA current source analog output
signal into a load resistance of 0-500 Ohms.
Figure 2-42 displays the 0-20 mA option.
0-20 mA Out
0 - 500
Ohm
Common
9
10
11
JA
Figure 2-42 Analog Output: Current
Output
2 - 40
DEVICENET CARD (OPTIONAL)
For the installation, wiring and operation of the optional DeviceNet card, refer to the CX-Series DeviceNet
Card Technical Manual, # 0001-0132.
2 - 41
—NOTES—
2 - 42
LOGIC CONTROL
This section addresses the six digital inputs that control the CX-1010's operating state.
The six digital inputs ( listed in by priority) are:
F–Stop
R–Stop
H-Stop
Run
Jog Forward
Jog Reverse
When the CX-1010 is powered up, it defaults to R–Stop. If either Run or Jog have been hardwired, the CX1010 will operate in either Run or Jog instead of R–Stop. Run is hardwired by shorting Run, R–Stop and F–
Stop to common. Jog Forward or Jog Reverse are hardwired by shorting Jog, R–Stop, and F–Stop to
common.
Run is terminated by activating F-Stop, R-Stop, or H-Stop. The operating state changes to the input that
terminated Run, provided that another input is not subsequently activated. Jog Forward or Jog Reverse are
terminated by deactivating the Jog Forward or Jog Reverse inputs. Jog Forward or Jog Reverse can also be
terminated by activating F-Stop, R-Stop, or H-Stop. The operating state automatically changes to R-Stop
after the Jog ramp is completed. You can not enter Run from Jog with the Jog inputs active. However, you
can enter Run during a deceleration from Jog after the Jog input is deactivated. You can not enter Jog
Forward or Jog Reverse from Run. If two or more inputs become active at the same time, the input with the
highest priority will dictate the operating state.
The sections that follow demonstrate how to use the digital inputs.
Caution
Do not use the AC line power to start or stop the system.
Use the Digital Inputs to start or stop the system.
2 - 43
Logic Inputs
F–Stop (Fast Stop) has priority over the other operating states. F-Stop forces the CO signal to “0” volts and
monitors the feedback. When the feedback is less than the Zero Speed (CP-270), the Drive En (PLC bit 41)
resets to “0”. This PLC bit is routed by the PLC program to an output that disables the drive. If the feedback
does not reach Zero Speed within 1/2 second, the Drive En (PLC bit 41) automatically resets to “0”. The
integral, trim and feedforward are also set to “0” and the loop is set to Open Loop (OL).
To activate F–Stop:
• Activate High (Open), Level Sensitive, Latched
• Wire to F-Stop interconnect
• Use momentary contact - does not need to be maintained to remain active
F-STOP
1
F-STOP
3
COMMON
J6
Open Momentarily
Figure 2-43 F-Stop Input
2 - 44
R–Stop (Ramp Stop) has the second highest operating priority. Use R-Stop to stop the drive with a
deceleration ramp. The velocity command is ramped down to “0”. If the loop is “Closed”, the ramp is
executed with velocity loop control (with feedforward, using Kff ). If the loop is “Open”, the ramp is
executed with feedforward only (using Kff ). The deceleration rate for the ramp is determined by Dcl Tm
RStp (CP-211) and Ref StopRmp (CP-210) or by the Dcl Rt RStp (CP-212). Once the ramp reaches “0”, the
feedback is monitored. When the feedback is less than the Zero Speed (CP-270), the Drive En (PLC bit 41)
resets to “0”. The PLC program routes the PLC bit to an output that is disables the drive. If the feedback
does not reach the Zero Speed (CP-270) within 1/2 second, then the Drive EN PLC bit automatically resets
to “0”. The integral, trim and feedforward set to “0” and the loop sets to “Open Loop” (OL).
To activate R–Stop:
• Activate High (Open), Level Sensitive, Latched
• Use momentary contact - does not need to be maintained to remain active
F-STOP
1
F-STOP
2
R-STOP
3
COMMON
R-STOP
J6
Open Momentarily
Figure 2-44 R-Stop Input
2 - 45
H–Stop (Stop and Hold) has the third highest operating priority. Use H-Stop to stop the drive with a
deceleration ramp. The velocity command is ramped down to “0”. If the loop is “Closed”, the ramp is
executed with velocity loop control (with feedforward, using Kff ). If the loop is “Open”, the ramp will be
executed with feedforward only (using KffL). The deceleration rate for the ramp is determined by Dcl Tm
HStp (CP-213) and Ref StopRmp (CP-210) or by the Dcl Rt RStp (CP-214). H-Stop differs from R-Stop in
its operation after the deceleration ramp. The operation of the “Hold” function is dictated by Hstp
LoopMode (CP-230). In quadrature feedback, when the velocity command reaches “0” and the feedback is
less than the Zero Speed (CP-270), then H-Stop will; hold the CO Signal to “0” volts (Open Loop), hold the
feedback velocity to Zero Speed (Closed Velocity Loop) or hold the feedback position to the position where
the drive stopped (Closed Zero Error or Position Loop).
Note: For Non-Quadrature and Quadrature, see “Additional H-Stop Operating States”,
page 2-50.
To activate H–Stop:
• Activate High (Open), Level Sensitive, Latched
• Use momentary contact - does not need to be maintained to remain active
F-STOP
R-STOP
1
F-STOP
2
R-STOP
4
H-STOP
3
COMMON
H-STOP
J6
Open Momentarily
Figure 2-45 H-Stop Input
2 - 46
Run has the fourth highest operating priority. Run is the primary operating state. Setpoint Mode (CP-102)
determines the mode of operation for Run, using either the master mode, the follower mode, the direct mode
or the custom setpoint mode. The corresponding setpoint for the selected mode determines the operating
speed. RUN Loop Mode (CP-220) determines the control loop that is used during Run. At times, the
selected RUN Loop Mode is overridden. The direct mode will only operate in an open loop. The master
mode and the custom setpoint mode will “Run” in velocity loop if the RUN Loop Mode (CP-220) is set to
either “ZE Pos” or “Pos”. Therefore, the follower mode is the only mode that can “Run” with the “ZE Pos”
or the “Pos loop”.
With the exception of the direct mode, the acceleration and deceleration ramps for the modes of operation are
determined by Acl Tm RUN, (CP-201), Dcl Tm RUN (CP-203) and Ref RUN Rmp (CP-200). The direct
mode ramps are determined by Acl Tm Drct (CP-206), Dcl Tm Drct (CP-208) and Ref Drct Rmp (CP-205).
To activate Run:
• Activate Low (closed to common), Level Sensitive, Latched
• Use momentary contact - does not need to be maintained to remain active
RUN
5
RUN
8
COMMON
1
F-STOP
2
R-STOP
4
H-STOP
3
COMMON
F-STOP
R-STOP
H-STOP
J6
Close Momentarily
Figure 2-46 Run Input
2 - 47
Jog Forward has the fifth highest operating priority. Use Jog Fwd to “Jog” the drive Forward at the rate
indicated in Jog SP (CP-215). The acceleration and deceleration ramps are dictated by Acl Tm Jog (CP-216),
Dcl Tm Jog (CP-218) and Jog SP (CP-215). After the Jog FWD input is deactivated and the ramped
reference has reached “0”, the CX-1010 automatically reverts to the R-Stop operating state.
To activate Jog Forward:
• Activate Low (closed to common), Level Sensitive, Not-Latched
• Use momentary contact - does not need to be maintained to remain active
RUN
5
RUN
6
JOG FWD
8
COMMON
1
F-STOP
2
R-STOP
4
H-STOP
3
COMMON
JOG FWD
F-STOP
R-STOP
H-STOP
J6
Close Momentarily
Figure 2-47 Jog Forward Input
2 - 48
Jog Reverse has sixth (the least) operating priority. Use Jog Revs to “Jog” the drive Forward at the rate
indicated in Jog SP (CP-215). The acceleration and deceleration ramps are dictated by Acl Tm Jog (CP-216),
Dcl Tm Jog (CP-218) and Jog SP (CP-215). After the Jog Revs input is deactivated and the ramped
reference has reached “0”, the CX-1010 automatically reverts to the R-Stop operating state.
To activate Jog Reverse:
• Activate Low (closed to common), Level Sensitive, Not-Latched
• Use momentary contact - does not need to be maintained to remain active
RUN
5
RUN
6
JOG FWD
7
JOG REVERSE
8
COMMON
1
F-STOP
2
R-STOP
4
H-STOP
3
COMMON
JOG FWD
JOG REVS
F-STOP
R-STOP
H-STOP
J6
Close Momentarily
Figure 2-48 Jog Reverse Input
2 - 49
Additional H-Stop Operating States:
H-Stop with Non-Quadrature (INCremental) Feedback
The velocity command is ramped down to “0” and the feedback is monitored. When the feedback is less
than Zero Speed (CP-270), the Drive En (PLC bit 41) is reset to “0”. The PLC program routes this PLC bit
to an output that disables the drive. If the Feedback does not reach Zero Speed within 1/2 second after the
ramp is finished, the Drive En (PLC bit 41) automatically resets to “0”. The integral, trim and feedforward
set to “0” and the loop sets to Open Loop (OL).
H-Stop Quadrature FB and Loop Type H-S set to OL (0):
When the Feedback is less than Zero Speed (CP-270), the Drive En (PLC bit 41) is reset to “0”. The PLC
program routes this PLC bit to an output that disables the drive. The CO SIG is maintained at “0” volts. If
the Feedback does not reach Zero Speed within 1/2 second after the ramp is finished (velocity command has
reached “0”), the Drive EN PLC bit automatically resets to “0”. The integral, trim and feedforward set to “0”
and the loop sets to Open Loop (OL).
H-Stop Quadrature FB and Loop Type H-S set to Vel (1):
When the Feedback is less than Zero Speed (CP-270), the integral, trim and feedforward are reset to “0” and
the Control Loop is set to Velocity. This provides some resistance to motion, but will not necessarily hold
the drive at the current position. If the feedback does not reach Zero Speed within 1/2 second after the ramp
is finished (the velocity command has reached “0”), the Drive En (PLC bit 41) automatically resets to “0”.
The integral, trim and feedforward set to “0” and the loop sets to Open Loop (OL).
H-Stop Quadrature FB and Loop Type H-S set to ZE Pos (2):
When the Feedback is less than Zero Speed (CP-270), the current position becomes the “Hold” position, the
integral, trim and feedforward are reset to “0”, and the Control Loop is set to Zero Error Position (position
plus velocity). The ZE Loop holds the position at or close to the “Hold” position. If the Feedback does not
reach Zero Speed within 1/2 second after the ramp is finished, the Drive En (PLC bit 41) automatically resets
to “0”. The integral, trim and feedforward set to “0” and the loop sets to Open Loop (OL).
H-Stop Quadrature FB and Loop Type H-S set to Pos (3):
When the Feedback is less than Zero Speed (CP-270), the current position becomes the ‘hold’ position, the
integral, trim and feedforward are reset to “0”, and the Control Loop is set to Position. The Position Loop
holds the position at or close to the “Hold” position. If the Feedback does not reach Zero Speed within 1/2
second after the ramp is finished, the Drive En (PLC bit 41) automatically resets to “0”. The integral, trim
and feedforward set to “0” and the loop sets to Open Loop (OL).
2 - 50
—NOTES—
2 - 51
Operator Interface
Keypad Operation
Screen Operation
3-1
LCD
Screen
Display
CONTREX
CX - 1010
MAIN MENU
Menu
Key
TUNING
BLOCK SETUP
SETPOINTS
SCALING
DEVICE CONFIGURATION
ALARMS-RAMPS-LIMITS
PLC
DEVICE TEST
SYSTEM MONITOR
Parameter
Up/Down
Keys
(Par Up)
(Par Dwn)
Menu
Alm
Code
Key
Status
Screen
Key
Page
Up/Down
Keys
Numeric
Keys
MENU
CODE
STATUS
HELP
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
.
-
Help
Screen
Key
Increment
Scroll Up/
Down Keys
CLEAR
ENTER
Clear
Key
Enter
Key
Figure 3-1 The CX–1010 Front Panel
3-2
KEYPAD OPERATION
The CX–1010 operates on a system of screens that are controlled by the front keypad. Figure 3-1 shows the location of
the keys and LCD screen display on the front panel. You will find detailed descriptions of the interactions of the keys
and screens throughout the “Operations” section. The following is a brief summary of how the front panel functions.
LCD Screen Display
The screens are displayed on the LCD Display.
Menu Key
The Menu key accesses the main menu from a sub-menu or status screen, and a sub-menu
from a parameter screen.
Status Screen Key
The Status key will immediately pop-up the status screen from any other screen. To
return to the previous screen, press the Status key again.
Page Up/Down Keys
Some screens have multiple pages. The Page Up/Down keys allow you to scroll through,
one page at a time.
Numeric Keys
Use the Numeric keys to enter the Parameter Code of either a Control Parameter (CP) or
a Monitor Parameter (MP) or to enter a Parameter Value for a Control Parameter. Use the
Enter key to activate the entry. Use the Clear key to delete the entry and clear the
Parameter Value to zero.
Parameter Up/Down Keys
Each time you press the Parameter (Par) up key, the cursor and highlight bar will move
up by one line. Each time you press the Parameter (Par) down key, the cursor will move
down by one line. It will also automatically scroll through the lines if you hold the key
down.
Code Select Key
Use the Code Select key in the Status screen and in the parameter screens to display a
Parameter Code line. When the Parameter Code line appears, you can use it to access a
parameter and its value. Enter a Parameter Code, then press the Enter key and the
parameter and its value will be displayed. You can change a Control Parameter value by
entering a new value or by scrolling with the Increment Up/Down keys. Use the Clear
key to delete the entry and clear the parameter value to zero.
Help Screen Key
The Help key accesses the Help screen and gives you a brief description of the parameter
or subject that is highlighted (active). The Help screen also functions as an options
screen, where you can select Control Parameter data. You can access help from any
screen. Press the Help key again to return to the previous screen.
Increment Scroll/ Up/Down Use these keys in the parameter screens to change the active value. Each time you press
the Increment Scroll Up key, the active value will increase by one increment. Each time
you press the Increment Scroll Down key, the active value will decrease by one decrement. It will also automatically scroll through the increments or decrements if you hold
the key down.
Clear Key
Use the Clear key to delete a value or change which you have entered. However, the
Clear key will not delete the entry or change once the Enter key has been used.
Enter Key
Use the Enter key to accept a value or change which you have entered.
3-3
3-4
Edit Block 7
Edit Block 6
Alm Indicator Mask
Edit Block 5
Fig 3-2 Overview of the CX–1010 Screen Matrix
PLC Programming
Device Model
and Rev.
Device Status
Digital I/O
Limits
Video Setup
Edit Block 4
Serial Comm Test
PLC Data Copy
Direct SP Ramps
DeviceNet Setup
Direct
Edit Block 3
Related Items
Aux Analog Tests
DIG I/O Test
Std Signal Tests
Hardware Tests
Device Tests
PLC Position Cntrs
Jog Setup
Serial Comm Setup
Custom
Edit Block 2
Feedforward
PLC Events Cntrs
Aux Analog Signals
R-Stop H-Stop
Setup
Follower
Keypad Lock Setup
Edit Block 1
Position Loop
PLC Monitor
PLC
PLC Timers
Alarms
Alarms Ramps Limits
Help
Run Ramps
Monitor Parameters
Master
Edit Block 0
Velocity Loop /ZE
Status Screen Setup
Device Configuration
Main Menu
Load & Save Parms
Stanadard Signals
Run Modes
Edit Block Parms
Velocity Loop
Scaling
Setpoints
Block Setup
Tuning
Status
Control Overrides
Aux Analog
Monitor
DIG I/O Monitor
Limits & Alarms
Std Signal
Monitor
Run Monitor
System Monitor
SCREEN OPERATION
The CX–1010 screen matrix has three main screens. These screens are:
Status Screen
Main Menu
Help Screen
There are nine sub-menus that are accessed through the Main Menu screen. These sub-menus are:
Tuning
Block Setup
Setpoints
Scaling
Device Configuration
Alarms Ramps Limits
PLC
Device Test
System Monitor
All of the parameter screens are accessed through these nine sub-menu screens. You can use the parameter screens to
access the parameters. Parameters fall into two classifications; Control Parameters and Monitor Parameters. The
Control Parameters allow you to enter data that is unique to you system. The Monitor Parameters allow you to
monitor your system and diagnose problems.
This Screen Operation section is a basic overview of the three main screens; the Status screen, the Help screen and
Main Menu screen. There is also a sample of a sub menu screen. For specific details on the parameter screens, refer
to System Setup- Control Parameters and System Monitoring-Monitor Parameters. For the instructions to customize
the Status screen, refer to System Setup- Control Parameters :Device Configure/Status Screen Setup.
Refer to Figure 3-2 for an overview of the CX–1010 screen matrix.
3-5
Status Screen
Press the Status key to access the Status screen. The Status screen has a large number display for a quick, visual
reference to a frequently used parameter, as well as its value and E.U. (Scaled Feedback is the default parameter).
Below the large number display, the Status screen lists six frequently used parameters. In addition to the frequently
used parameters, the line at the bottom of the display, called the code select line, allows you to access and display any
parameter and change any Control Parameter's value. The Status screen can be customized to reflect the parameters
that you access most frequently. To customize the Status screen refer to System Setup- Control Parameters: Device
Configure/Status Screen Setup.
The value of
this parameter
is displayed in
the large
number
display.
This bar
displays the
name of the
screen.
Press the Par
keys to scroll
the cursor up
or down and
make the line
active.
The large
number
display.
C X - 1 0 1 0
STATUS
Scaled Fb
The E.U. of the
value in the
large number
display.
RPM
Press the Help
key to go to the
active line's
help screen.
To display the
code select line,
press the Code
key. To display a
parameter and its
value, enter a
parameter code
and press the
Enter key. You
can select and
change any
control parameter
from here.
3-6
Master SPx
Fb EU/Tm
State
Active Block
Misc Status
Std Alarms
0
0
F–STOP
0
00011000
00000000
P1/1
"Alm" will blink
in this bar if
there is an
active alarm
status.
This bar
displays error
and status
messages.
The status
lines display
the current
value or status
of the
parameter .
Also indicates
the number of
characters
allowed. You
can change a
Control
Parameter
when the line
is active.
This bar
displays the
current page &
total pages.
Main Menu Screen
Press the Menu key to access the Main Menu screen. The Main Menu screen displays the eight sub-menus that access
all of the parameter screens.
This bar
displays the
name of the
screen.
Press the Par
keys to scroll
the highlight
bar up or down
the list and
make a sub
menu screen
active.
Press the
Enter key to
go to the
highlighted
sub-menu.
C X - 1 0 1 0
M A I N
M E N U
TUNING
BLOCK SETUP
SETPOINTS
SCALING
DEVICE CONFIGURATION
ALARMS■RAMPS■LIMITS
PLC
DEVICE TEST
SYSTEM MONITOR
Press the Help
key to go to
the help
screen.
Menu
"Alm" will blink
in this bar if
there is an
active alarm
status.
This bar
displays error
and status
messages.
If this bar
displays
"Menu", then
you are in a
menu screen.
3-7
Sub-Menu Screen / Samples
Parameter screens are accessed through the sub-menu screens.
Press the Help
key to go to
the help
screen.
SETPOINTS
Press the
Menu key to
go to the main
menu screen
RUN MODES
MASTER
FOLLOWER
CUSTOM
Press the Par
keys to scroll
up or down the
sub-menu list.
DIRECT
Menu
This bar
displays the
name of the
sub-menu
screen.
This bar
indicates that
you are in a
“Menu” screen.
This bar
displays error
and status
messages.
SCALING
Press the
Enter key to
go to the
highlighted
parameter
screen.
"Alm" will blink
in this bar if
there is an
active alarm
status.
3-8
STANDARD SIGNALS
MONITOR PARAMETERS
AUX ANALOG SIGNALS
Menu
Help Screens
Press the Help key, to access the Help screens for an active (highlighted) Control Parameter line, an active Monitor
Parameter line or an active menu line. You can access “Help” from any screen. To exit the Help screen and return to
the previous screen, press the Help key again. In addition to the help information, the Help screens also function as
an options screen. For more information on the help options, refer to “Help Screen / Sample Options” on the next
page.
This bar
displays the
name of the
screen.
The first line
indicates the
subject of the
help screen or
the parameter
number.
The help text
provides a
brief
description of
the subject
and any
additional
options.
This line
displays the
parameter
number,
HELP
Master SP
Parameter: 110
MASTER SP
is
the
Setpoint Speed in FB
EU/T of T/EU if using
Inverse Master. This
is the speed you wish
to achieve in Master
Run Mode
when the
control is in the Run
state.
Press the Help
key to exit the
help screen.
Menu
P1/2
"Alm" will blink
in this bar if
there is an
active alarm
status.
This bar
displays error
and status
messages.
This bar
displays the
current page &
total pages.
3-9
Help Screens / Sample Options
The Help screens also function as “options” screens where you can select a Control Parameter value. The last page of
many Help screens (usually page 2) have parameter options that have three value lines; current value, backup value
and default value. There are also Help screens that contain a list of options that you can scroll through and select. An
asterisk next to an option indicates that it is the default value. See the samples below. To exit the Help screen and
return to the previous screen, press the Help key again.
For the current
value, press the
Enter key.
HELP
Master SP
Parameter:
110
Select a value below
press ENTER to change
0
0
0
Current Val
Backup Val
Default Val
Min Val
MAX Val
-999999
999999
P2/2
Use the Par key
to scroll to and
select backup
value and press
the Enter key.
Use the Par keys
to scroll to and
select default
value and press
the Enter key.
Fb
HELP
Source
Parameter:
103
Use 'par^ or V'
and
'enter'
to select a
new
Fb Source:
Use the Par key to
scroll to and select
(highlight) a value and
press the Enter key.
2=Analog In 2
1=Frequency In 2
*
P2/3
The asteric
indicates the
default value of
the parameter.
3 - 10
Drive Setup/Calibration
Calibration
4-1
4-2
CALIBRATION
This section contains information to calibrate the motor, drive and CX-1010. If you are uncertain how to use the keypad,
refer to Operator Interface: Keypad Operation. If you are uncertain how to use the screens and parameters, refer to
Operator Interface: Screen Operation.
NOTE:
Before you begin calibration, the motor and drive must be wired and configured per the manufacturers
instructions.
Before you begin calibration, the CX-1010 must be configured and installed in accordance with the installation procedures indicated in the Installation section.
These calibration procedures will allow you to:
• Make sure that motion occurs in the intended direction.
• Verify that the direction indicated by the feedback measurement (FB) is consistent with the motion in
quadrature feedback devices.
• Verify that maximum speed is achievable
• Zero and Span the optional analog inputs and outputs
DANGER
Motion will occur in the calibration procedure.
If possible, disconnect the motor shaft from the
machine or sudden / violent motion could result
and cause damage or personal injury. Make sure
that the motor is secured in place. Take all
possible precautions to ensure your safety.
4-3
DANGER
Hazardous voltages.
Can cause severe
injury, death or
damage
the equipment.
Make adjustments
with caution.
4-4
DIRECTION, CREEP AND RANGE CALIBRATION
Before you check the direction of motion, you need to scale the Controller Ouput Signal (CO SIG). This is
the analog signal that is input to the drive. Make sure the unit is in F-Stop to start out. Make sure the Accel
and Decel pots (or digital settings) on the subject drive are set to minimum times (maximum rates). Make
sure the I.R. Comp, if present, is set to minimum.
1.
Go to the SCALING/SIGNAL SCALING/P2 (CONTROL OUTPUT SIG) parameter screen.
2.
Select CO SIG output format with CO SIG Mode (CP-180). You can use the Help screen to
assist you in your selection. The options are discussed in detail below.
3.
Refer to your drive manual and determine the maximum voltage allowed for the analog
control signal that is input to your drive as the speed (or torque) command. Enter this value
into CO Max Volts (CP-181).
4.
Select CO SIG Polarity (CP-182). This needs to be changed ONLY if your drive expects
negative voltage for forward motion.
5.
a. CO SIG Mode (CP-180) is NOT set to UniBrake. (Optional)
This step was performed at the factory with the default CO Max Volts.
Use a voltmeter to check CO SIG output voltage (J3 1-2). If not within 20
millivolts of 0, enter 0 into the CO SIG Offset (CP-366) and take another voltage
reading from the CO SIG output. Enter the negative of this value into CO SIG
Offset (value is in volts). The CO SIG voltage should now be very close to 0 volts.
b. CO SIG Mode (CP-180) is set to UniBrake.
Use a voltmeter to check CO SIG output voltage (J3 1-2). If not within 20
millivolts of CO Max Volts (CP-181, enter 0 into the CO SIG Offset (CP-366) and
take another voltage reading from the CO SIG output. Enter the negative of the
difference between the CO Max Volts (CP-181) and enter this reading into CO SIG
Offset (value is in volts). The CO SIG voltage should now be very close to CO Max
Volts.
6.
Go to the SETPOINTS/RUN MODE SELECTION/P1 screen and select Direct Mode by
entering a 3 into the Run Mode parameter (CP-102). You can use the Help screen for CP102 to select Direct Mode.
7.
Go to the SETPOINT/DIRECT SETPOINT/P1 screen and make sure the Direct SP = 0.0
(include the decimal point). Make sure that the FB Source (CP-103) is set to FI2 ( = 1).
8.
Put the unit into RUN by activating the RUN input. The F-Stop, R-Stop, and H-Stop inputs
must be closed in order to enter the RUN State. You should have the Drive Enable output
connected to the drive enable input of your drive (or to a control relay that is connected to
the Drive Enable input). If not, enable the drive by some external means.
4-5
9.
If extremely fast motion occurs, F-Stop the unit and/or disable the drive by some means and
check your motor/drive configuation and wiring. If motion occurs, but is relatively slow,
attempt to eliminate it (stop the motion) with the balance pot (also called zero-speed pot) or
digital adjustment in your drive. If there is no pot (or digital adjustment) in the drive, or if
the motion can not be stopped, attempt to use the CO SIG Offset parameter to "offset" the
creep. Be sure to record this parameter and/or make sure it gets into the backup parameter
list at some point.
10.
With the unit in RUN (Direct Mode) and the drive enabled, output a small positive voltage to
the drive by slowly incrementing the Direct SP with the Increment Key“▲” until motion is
detected (above any creep speed). If motion is in the direction that you would consider the
positive (or forward) direction, continue with setup. If not, you must reconfigure the drive
and/or motor to reverse direction, e.g. reverse armature leads, tach leads, etc. if applicable.
Refer to your drive manual for procedure on changing directions. If it is not possible to
reverse the motion by reconfiguring the drive/motor, you can simply set CO SIG Polarity
(CP-182) to the other option, e.g. if NORM (1) results in reverse motion, change CO SIG
Polarity to NEG (2).
Now we must scale the Feedback to monitor motor speed in RPM.
11.
Go to SCALING/SIGNAL SCALING/P1 (FREQUENCY INPUT 2) screen set the Count
Mode for FI2 by selecting either quadrature or incremental mode for Cnt Mode FI2 (CP165). Use quadrature (Quad) if the encoder provides direction information in the form of
two channels that are approximately 90 degrees out of phase. Quadrature mode infers
direction information from two channels and records 4 counts (edges) per pulse. Do not
confuse the two channels with single channel that provides both the signal and its
compliment (refered to as differential line driver output). For single channel encoders, select
Incremental (Inc). Incremental mode can not and does not infer direction information from
the single channel and records only 1 count (edge) per pulse. Do not confuse incremental
count mode with the term incremental encoder. Both quadrature and single channel encoders
must be of the incremental type for this controller.
12.
Set the PPR FI2 (CP-166) to the number of pulses per revolution. Here you want to monitor
"MOTOR" RPM in FI2 RPM parameter (MP-7), so this value should be pulses per motor
revolution. The value can be changed later to pulses per encoder revolution if you are
interested in monitoring encoder speed in RPM.
For quadrature feedback devices complete step 13 to determine if the feedback measurement is consistent
with the direction of motion. For signal channel encoders, skip step 13 and move on to step 14.
4-6
13.
With the motion in the positive direction as done in step 10 above, check the sign of the
feedback by monitoring FI2 Freq (MP-6). This can be accomplished by pressing the Code
key, followed by "6" and Enter. If the value of FI2 Freq is a positive number (positive
frequency), then move on to step 14. If the value is negative, the encoder wires must be
changed. With the power off, move the wire(s) now on channel A (and /A) to channel B (and
/B) and move the wire(s) that were on channel B (and /B) to Channel A (and /A).
Interchanging A with /A should also produce the same result. Power the unit up again and
enter RUN mode. Return to SCALING/SIGNAL SCALING/P1 to verify that the feedback
is positive for a positive (command) motion. FI2 Freq should still be on the code select line.
Next you should see if the motor can reach its Maximum Speed (or your maximum operating speed) in RPM.
DO NOT perform this step if the motor shaft is connected to the machine and you are not sure if the
mechanism is ready for high speed operation. In addition, if there are physical travel limits, DO NOT
perform this test with the motor shaft connected to the machine. In any case, make sure that the motor itself
is securely held in place.
14.
Go to SETPOINT/DIRECT SETPOINT and code select MP-7 (FI2 RPM) to monitor motor
speed in RPM. With the unit in RUN and in Direct Mode, slowly increase the Direct SP
(CP-140) until the FI2 RPM reads the maximum operating speed or the Direct SP exceeds
90% of the CO Max Volts (CP-181), whichever comes first.
If you exceed 90% of the CO Max Volts with the Direct SP before the FI2 RPM reaches the
maximum operating speed, then you need to rescale the drive. With the Direct SP at 90% of
the CO Max Volts, adjust the maximum speed pot on the drive until the FI2 RPM reads your
maximum operating speed. If the maximum operating speed is still not attainable, consult
your drive manual to confirm the drive/motor maximum speed. If you are still not able to
reach this maximum speed, check if anything is loading the motor and if the power line
voltage for the drive is within specification. Confirm also that the PPR FI2 (CP-166) is
correct for motor pulses per revolution.
If you exceed the maximum operating speed before you reach 90% of the CO Max Volts
with the Direct SP, then we should rescale the CO SIG to get better resolution and to prevent
unnecessary integral windup. With the motor/drive running at your maximum operating
speed, record the Direct SP value. Add 10% of this value to itself and enter the result into
CO Max Volts (CP-181) using the code select line.
If you have changed the CO Max Volts (CP-181), you may want to repeat steps 8 and 9 with
the Direct SP = 0.0 to make sure that there is still minimal creep motion.
4-7
ANALOG CALIBRATION
The Analog Calibration allows you to calibrate the auxiliary Analog I/O, AI1, AI2, AO. The boards are
calibrated at the factory and the accuracy should be adequate for most applications. However, you may need
to re-calibrate if your application demands more accuracy in a specific range or if you need to calibrate
directly to EU/T with a known signal level on the inputs. The Analog Calibrtation screen is accessed through
Main Menu/Device Tests/Aux Analog Tests/pg 3.
Analog Output (voltage):
1.
Connect a voltmeter between pins 10 and 11 with the positive lead on pin 10 (pin 11 is
common).
2.
Set AO Mode (CP-185) to “Volts” (1).
3.
Set Analog Cal Sel (CP-361) to AO (3) to Select AO for calibration.
4.
Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “A” (1) to select point A.
NOTE: The old calibration data will be overwritten.
4-8
5.
Set Analog Cal EN (CP-360) to “On” (1) to start calibration.
6.
Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the voltage that you want set for point A.
This is generally your smallest (or negative) voltage point. A -12 volts requires about -29500
bits, -10 volts about -24500 bits, 0 volts about 0 bits. For -12 volts, start with about -29400
and use the incremental scroll “▼” key .
7.
Enter the exact voltage measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
8.
Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “B” (2) to select point B.
9.
Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the voltage that you want use for point B.
This is usually your largest (or positive) voltage point. A +12 volts requires about 30100
bits, 10 volts about 25100 bits, 0 volts about 0 bits. For 12 volts, start with about 30000 and
use the incremental scroll “▲” key.
10.
Enter the exact voltage measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
11.
Set Analog Cal EN to “Off” (0) to disable further calibration.
Analog Output (current):
1.
Connect a current meter in series with a 250 Ohm resistor between pins 9 and 11 with the
positive lead on pin 9 (pin 11 is common). Connect the meter in series with the load.
2.
Set AO Mode (CP-185) to “Current” (2).
3.
Set Analog Cal Sel (CP-361) to AO (3) to Select AO for calibration.
4.
Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “A” (1) to select point A.
NOTE: The old calibration data will be overwritten.
5.
Set Analog Cal EN to “On” (1) to start calibration.
6.
Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the current you want to set for point A.
This is generally your smallest current point. A 4 milliamp setting requires about -14450
bits, 0.5 milliamps about -24000 bits and 1.0 milliamps about -22600. For 4 milliamps, start
with about -14300 and use the incremental scroll “▼” key.
7.
Enter the exact current measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
8
Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “B” (2) to select point B.
9.
Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the voltage that you want to set for point B.
This is usually your largest current point. A 20 milliamp setting requires about 29300 bits,
10 milliamps about 1940. For 20 milliamps, start with about 29200 and use the incremental
scroll “▲” key.
10.
Enter the exact current measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
11.
Set Analog Cal EN to “Off” (0) to disable further calibration.
4-9
Analog Input 1 (voltage):
1.
Connect the Analog Output voltage pins to the Analog Input 1 voltage pins - pin 10 to pin 2,
pin 11 to pin 4. Connect a voltmeter between pins 2 and 4 with the positive lead on pin 2
(pin 4 is at common).
2.
Set AO Mode (CP-185) to “Volts” (1).
3.
Set AI1 Mode (CP-170) to “Volts” (1).
4.
Set Analog Cal Sel (CP-361) to “AI1” (1) to Select AI1 for calibration.
5.
Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “A” (1) to select point A.
NOTE: The old calibration data will be overwritten.
4 - 10
6.
Set Analog Cal EN to “On” (1) to start calibration.
7.
Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the voltage that you want set for point A.
This is generally your smallest (or negative) voltage point. A -12 volts requires about -29500
bits, -10 volts about -24500 bits, 0 volts about 0 bits. For -12 volts, start with about -29400
and use the incremental scroll “▼” key.
8.
Enter the exact voltage measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
9.
Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “B” (2) to select point B.
10.
Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the voltage that you want use for point B.
This is generally your largest (or positive) voltage point. A +12 volts requires about 30100
bits, 10 volts about 25100 bits, 0 volts about 0 bits. For 12 volts, start with about 30000 and
use the incremental scroll “ ▲” key.
11.
Enter the exact voltage measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
12.
Set Analog Cal EN to “Off” (0) to disable further calibration.
Analog Input 1 (current):
1.
Connect a current meter between pin 9 and pin 2 with the positive lead on pin 9. Connect
pin 3 to pin 4 and pin 4 to pin 11.
2.
Set AO Mode (CP-185) to “Current” (2).
3.
Set AI1 Mode (CP-170) to “Current” (2).
4.
Set Analog Cal Sel (CP-361) to “AI1” (1) to Select AI1 for calibration.
5.
Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “A” (1) to select point A.
NOTE: The old calibration data will be overwritten.
6.
Set Analog Cal EN to “On” (1) to start calibration.
7.
Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the current you want to set for point A.
This is generally your smallest current point. A 4 milliamp setting requires about -14450
bits, 0.5 milliamps about -24000 bits and 1.0 milliamps about -22600. For 4 milliamps, start
with about -14300 and use the incremental scroll “ ▼” key.
8.
Enter the exact current measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
9.
Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “B” (2) to select point B.
10.
Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the voltage that you want to set for point B.
This is generally your largest current point. A 20 milliamp setting requires about 29300 bits,
10 milliamps about 1940. For 20 milliamps, start with about 29200 and use the incremental
scroll “ ▲” key.
11.
Enter the exact current measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
12.
Set Analog Cal EN to “Off” (0) to disable further calibration.
4 - 11
Analog Input 2 (voltage):
1.
Connect the Analog Output voltage pins to the Analog Input 2 voltage pins - pin 10 to pin 5,
pin 11 to pin 7 Connect a voltmeter between pins 5 and 7 with the positive lead on pin 5 (pin
7 is at common).
2.
Set AO Mode (CP-185) to “Volts” (1).
3.
Set AI2 Mode (CP-175) to “Volts” (1).
4.
Set Analog Cal Sel (CP-361) to “AI2” (2) to Select AI2 for calibration.
5.
Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “A” (1) to select point A.
NOTE: The old calibration data will be overwritten.
4 - 12
6.
Set Analog Cal EN to “On” (1) to start calibration.
7.
Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the voltage that you want set for point A.
This is generally your smallest (or negative) voltage point. A -12 volts requires about -29500
bits, -10 volts about -24500 bits, 0 volts about 0 bits. For -12 volts, start with about -29400
and use the incremental scroll “▼” key.
8.
Enter the exact voltage measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
9.
Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “B” (2) to select point B.
10.
Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the voltage that you want use for point B.
This is generally your largest (or positive) voltage point. A +12 volts requires about 30100
bits, 10 volts about 25100 bits, 0 volts about 0 bits. For 12 volts, start with about 30000 and
use the incremental scroll “ ▲” key.
11.
Enter the exact voltage measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
12.
Set Analog Cal EN to “Off” (0) to disable further calibration.
Analog Input 2 (current):
1.
Connect a current meter between pin 9 and pin 5 with the positive lead on pin 9. Connect
pin 6 to pin 7 and pin 7 to pin 11.
2.
Set AO Mode (CP-185) to “Current” (2).
3.
Set AI2 Mode (CP-175) to “Current” (2).
4.
Set Analog Cal Sel (CP-361) to “AI2” (2) to Select AI2 for calibration.
5.
Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “A” (1) to select point A.
NOTE: The old calibration data will be overwritten.
6.
Set Analog Cal EN to “On” (1) to start calibration.
7.
Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the current you want to set for point A.
This is generally your smallest current point. A 4 milliamp setting requires about -14450
bits, 0.5 milliamps about -24000 bits and 1.0 milliamps about -22600. For 4 milliamps, start
with about -14300 and use the incremental scroll “ ▼” key.
8.
Enter the exact current measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
9.
Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “B” (2) to select point B.
10.
Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the voltage that you want to set for point B.
This is generally your largest current point. A 20 milliamp setting requires about 29300 bits,
10 milliamps about 1940. For 20 milliamps, start with about 29200 and use the incremental
scroll “ ▲” key.
11.
Enter the exact current measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
12.
Set Analog Cal EN to “Off” (0) to disable further calibration.
4 - 13
Calibrating and Scaling AI1 Together
In some applications you may not know the voltage (or current) to EU/T representation, e.g. you may know
that your flow meter operates from 0 to 10 gallons per minute, but you have no idea the voltage produced by
the meter at either end point. You can ‘calibrate’ the signal directly in terms of EU/T by setting the
calibration references the same as the scaling references, i.e. set AI1 RA (CP-171) equal to Cal Ref A (MP17) for this signal and set AI1 RB (CP-173) equal to Cal Ref B (mp18) for this signal. These two points
should be discretely different from each other and should be reasonable estimates for the actual voltage or
current range. You would then set the EU@ AI1 RA (CP-172) and EU@ AI1 RB (CP-174) to the sensor’s
operating points used during the calibration process for points A and B respectively.
1.
Connect the sensor to the AI1 voltage (or current) pins. Connect pins 3 and 4 together if
using current mode.
2.
Set AI1 Mode (CP-170) to “Volts” (1) or “Current” (2).
3.
Set Analog Cal Sel (CP-361) to “AI1” (1) to Select AI1 for calibration.
4.
Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “A” (1) to select point A.
NOTE: The old calibration data will be overwritten.
5.
Set Analog Cal EN to “On” (1) to start calibration.
6.
Run the sensor at the operating point for calibration point A. This is generally your smallest
(or negative) voltage point (or smallest current point). Record the value of this operating
point as sensor operating point A in EU/T.
7.
Enter an estimate of the voltage (or current) that the sensor is producing at this operating
point into AnalogRef Val (CP-363). Record this value as point A reference voltage (or
current) along side the sensor operating point A.
8.
Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “B” (2) to select point B.
9.
Run the sensor at the operating point for calibration point B. This is generally your largest
(or positive) voltage point (or largest current point). Record the value of this operating point
as point B EU/T.
10.
Enter an estimate of the voltage (or current) that the sensor is producing at this operating
point into AnalogRef Val (CP-363). Record this value as point B reference voltage (or
current) along side the sensor operating point B.
11.
Set Analog Cal EN to “Off” (0) to disable further calibration.
12.
Go to SCALING/SIGNAL SCALING/P1. Enter voltage (or current) that you recorded as
the point A reference voltage (or current) into AI1 RA (CP-171). Enter the sensor operating
point A (EU/T) that the sensor was producing during the point A calibration into EU@AI1
RA (CP-172). This could actually be a time-less unit, but is considered as EU/T scaling
because it assumes speed representation for the velocity loop. Enter voltage (or current) that
you recorded as the point B reference voltage (or current) into AI1 RB (CP-173). Enter the
sensor operating point B (EU/T) that the sensor was producing during the point B calibration
into EU@AI1 RB (CP-174).
Repeat this procedure for AI2 if necessary. Calibrate AI2 and use the corresponding AI2 parameters.
4 - 14
—NOTES—
4 - 15
System Setup/Control Parameters
Introduction to
Control Parameters
Scaling
Block Setup
Edit Block Parms
Edit Block 0
Standard Signals
Edit Block 1
Monitor Parameters
Edit Block 2
Aux Analog Signals
Edit Block 3
Edit Block 4
Setpoints
Edit Block 5
Run Modes
Edit Block 6
Master
Follower
Custom
Direct
Alarms/Ramps/Limits
Alarms
Run Ramps
R-Stop/R-Stop Setup
Jog Setup
Direct SP Ramps
Limits
Tuning
Velocity Loop
Velocity Loop/ZE
Position Loop
Feedforward
Related Items
Edit Block 7
PLC
PLC Monitor
PLC Timers
PLC Event Cntrs
PLC Postion Cntrs
PLC Data Copy
Digital I/O
PLC programming
Device Configuration
Status Screen Setup
Load and Save Parms
Keypad Lock Setup
Serial Comm Setup
DeviceNet Setup
Video Setup
Alm Indicator Mask
5-1
5-2
INTRODUCTION TO
CONTROL PARAMETERS
Parameters are divided into two classifications; Control Parameters (CP) and Monitor Parameters (MP). This
section is about Control Parameters. Monitor Parameters are explained in System Monitoring: Monitor
Parameters.
The parameters appear on the screens by a Parameter Name. The Help screens list the parameters by both
their Parameter Name and by a numbered code, which is called the Parameter Code. The operational data is
the Parameter Value.
Parameter Name
Parameter Code
Parameter Value
Monitor Parameter
Scaled Feedback
MP-40
0.0 (default)
Control Parameter
Master Setpoint
CP-110
0 (default)
Parameters =
Note: All Control Parameters are designated by a small indicator “dot” to the left of the Parameter Name,
as it appears on a screen (unlike Monitor Parameters, which do not have a small indicator “dot” to the left of
the Parameter Name).
The CX-1010 is pre-loaded at the factory with a complete set of default Control Parameter values. The
majority of these default settings are suitable for most applications and do not require modification.
Control Parameters allow you to enter data that is unique to your system (e.g., encoder resolution, Lead to
Follower ratios, maximum RPM, setpoints, acceleration/deceleration ramp rates) by accessing a parameter
screen and entering a parameter value. Once the Control Parameters are entered and the setup for the CX1010 is complete, the Control Parameters can be “locked out” so that they become inaccessible from the
Keypad. This feature prevents an inadvertent accidental entry. For details, refer to the Keypad Lockout
screen in System Setup/Control Parameters: Device Configuration/Keypad Lockout Setup. A synopsis of the
information is also available by referencing Keypad Lockout (CP-29) in Appendices: Appendix C.
The following sections demonstrate how to use the Control Parameter screens. These sections include:
Scaling
Setpoints
Alarms*Ramps*Limits
Tuning
Block Setup
PLC
Device Configuration
5-3
—NOTES—
5-4
SCALING
This section discusses the setup procedures for scaling. The CX-1010 allows you to use Engineering Units
(e.g., feet, inches, revolutions) relative to a specific time (e.g., seconds, minutes) to control and monitor your
system. The scaling screens will walk you through the scaling of:
•
•
•
•
the frequency inputs from the lead and feedback sensors
the control output signal (CO SIG) to the drive
the Auxiliary Analog inputs (2) and output (1) signals
the Scaled Feedback (CP-40); which is the default parameter that appears in the large number display on
the status screen
Caution: To avoid damage to your system, the CX-1010 must be calibrated and the motor drive set up before you
operate your system. Refer to Drive Setup / Calibration: Calibration.
The CX-1010 scaling screens are:
• Standard Signals
• Monitor Parameter
• Aux Analog Signals
5-5
—NOTES—
5-6
STANDARD SIGNALS
The Standard Signals screens consist of the Frequency Input 1 screen (page 1), the Frequency Input 2 screen
(page 2) and the Control Output screen (page 3).
Frequency Input 1
The Frequency Input 1 signal is typically used as the Lead signal. However, it can be used as the Offset for
Offset applications and/or as one or more of the variables in the Custom Setpoint equation.
Go to the page one of the Scaling / Standard Signals screen. FI1 Pulses (CP-162), EU FI1 (CP-163), and
Time Base (CP-109) scale the Frequency Input 1 signal from frequency (pulses per second, Hz) to EU/Tm.
To scale the Frequency Input 1 signal in terms of EU/Tm, determine what Engineering Units per time
representative that you want to use for your feedback and setpoint. When you enter speed Control
Parameters, you will enter them as the EU/Tm that you have chosen. Likewise, when you monitor certain
speed parameters, they will be displayed in the chosen EU/Tm. Your Engineering Units (EU) may be in
feet, inches, pages, cookies, to whatever you choose. Your speed representation for EU/Tm can be in feet/
minute, inches/second, pages per second, cookies per minute, gallons per hour, or pounds. Therefore, your
Engineering Units would be in feet, inches, pages, cookies, gallons or pounds respectively and the time base
would be minute, second, hour (s).
Determine what number of pulses that will occur for a movement of your chosen EU/Tm (e.g., 60 pulses for
every 3 cookies). Typically, you would determine the number of pulses per one Engineering Unit, but it may
be easier to determine the number for multiple Engineering Units. In addition, fractional numbers can be
used for both the number of pulses and the number of EU’s. However, it is highly recommended that you use
integer numbers for each to ensure the highest degree of accuracy. Enter the determined number of pulses
into FI1 Pulses (CP-162) and enter the number of corresponding Engineering Units into EU FI1 (CP-163).
For example, if your Engineering Unit is “Cookie” and 60 pulses occur for every 3 cookies, you would enter
“60” in FI1 Pulses (CP-162) and “3 ” in EU FI1 (CP-163). Refer to Appendices / Appendix B for formulas
for these equations.
The Count Mode FI1 (CP-160) identifies the type of signal (quadrature or incremental) that is connected to
the FI1 input. Quadrature sensors have two frequency signals that feedback information on direction as well
as give you some protection from noise interference and more resolution. Quadrature sensors work well in
bidirectional applications, however quadrature sensor are not required for bidirectional applications.
Incremental sensors have one signal that feeds back speed information and are adequate for most
applications.
The position counters, FI1 Hz (CP-01) and FI1 EU/Tm (CP-03), use the information from Count Mode FI1
(CP-160). These position counters count four edges per pulse and incorporate the directional information, if
a quadrature sensor is used. If an incremental sensor is used, the position counters count one edge per pulse,
and no directional information is available.
Frequency Input 2
The Frequency Input 2 signal is typically used as the feedback signal. However, it can be used as the Offset
for Offset applications and/or as one or more of the variables in the Custom Setpoint equation.
Go to the page two of the Scaling / Standard Signals screen. FI2 Pulses (CP-167), EU FI2 (CP-168), and
Time Base (CP-109) scale the Frequency Input 2 signal from frequency (pulses per second, Hz) to EU/Tm.
5-7
To scale the Frequency Input 2 signal in terms of EU/Tm, determine what Engineering Units per time
representative that you want to use for your feedback and setpoint. When you enter speed Control
Parameters, you will enter them as the EU/Tm that you have chosen. Likewise, when you monitor certain
speed parameters, they will be displayed in the chosen EU/Tm. Your Engineering Units (EU) may be in
feet, inches, pages, cookies, to whatever you choose. Your speed representation for EU/Tm can be in feet/
minute, inches/second, pages per second, cookies per minute, gallons per hour, or pounds. Therefore, your
Engineering Units would be in feet, inches, pages, cookies, gallons or pounds respectively and the time base
would be minute, second, hour (s).
Determine what number of pulses that will occur for a movement of your chosen EU/Tm (e.g., 60 pulses for
every 3 cookies). Typically, you would determine the number of pulses per one Engineering Unit, but it may
be easier to determine the number for multiple Engineering Units. In addition, fractional numbers can be
used for both the number of pulses and the number of EU’s. However, it is highly recommended that you use
integer numbers for each to ensure the highest degree of accuracy. Enter the determined number of pulses
into FI2 Pulses (CP-167) and enter the number of corresponding Engineering Units into EU FI2 (CP-168).
For example, if your Engineering Unit is “Cookie” and 60 pulses occur for every 3 cookies, you would enter
“60” in FI2 Pulses (CP-167) and “3 ” in EU FI2 (CP-168). Refer to Appendices / Appendix B for formulas
for these equations.
Determine the time base for the speed representation. If you want speed represented as EU’s/second for this
signal as well as for Frequency Input 2, set Time Base (CP-109) to “1” (second). If the speed is to be
represented in EU’s/minute, then set Time Base (CP-109) to “2” (minute) If the speed is to be represented in
EU’s/hour, then set Time Base (CP-109) to “3” (hour).
Sometimes a “Timeless” timebase is used if there is an analog feedback. However, a “Timeless” timebase is
rarely used with a frequency feedback. For those infrequent cases when the frequency input for FI1 and FI2
has no time dependency, you can choose “0” (Timeless EU/Tm) for the Time Base (CP-109). In other words,
the frequency, in pulses/second (Hz), represents a physical measurement other than speed. For example, a
frequency could represent pressure in pounds. In this instance, scale pulses/second directly to EU’s. Enter
the number of pulses/sec (Hz) into FI1 Pulses (CP-162) and the number of EU’s this represents into EU FI1
(CP-163). Set Time Base (CP-109) to “0” (Timeless EU/Tm).
The default setting of “Hi to: 130,000” for EU/Tm Range (CO-108) is sufficient for most applications,
however, if the speed of your lead signal, feedback signal or analog signal is greater than 130,000 (e.g.,
145,000 products per hour) then increase the EU/Tm Range (CP-108) setting the “Max to : 9999,9999”.
When you increase the range, you decrease the resolution of the internal representation of speed. Some
applications , such as application that require more accuracy, may require a smaller range to increase the
resolution of the feedback.
The Count Mode FI2 (CP-165) identifies the type of signal (quadrature or incremental) that is connected to
the FI2 input. Quadrature sensors have two frequency signals that feedback information on direction as well
as give you some protection from noise interference and more resolution. Quadrature sensors work well in
bidirectional applications, however quadrature sensor are not required for bidirectional applications.
Incremental sensors have one signal that feeds back speed information and are adequate for most
applications.
PPR FI2 (CP-166) scales the Frequency Input 2 signal from a frequency representation (Hz) to Revolutions
per Minute (RPM). The result is displayed in FI2 RPM (MP-07). Enter the number of pulses per revolution
in PPR FI2 (CP-166) . If you want to monitor the rotational speed of the encoder, this value could be the
5-8
line count of the encoder (pulses per encoder revolution). If you want to monitor motor speed in RPM, this
value could be the number of pulses per motor revolution. If the encoder is not mounted on the motor, then
you need to perform some calculation involving gear ratios, roller/wheel diameters, etc. to determine the
number of pulses per motor revolution.
The position counters, FI2 Hz (CP-06) and FI2 EU/Tm (CP-08), use the information from Count Mode FI2
(CP-165). These position counters count four edges per pulse and incorporate the directional information, if
a quadrature sensor is used. If an incremental sensor is used, the position counters count one edge per pulse,
and no directional information is available.
5-9
Frequency Input 1
FI1 Pulses (CP-162)
Frequency Input 1 Pulses (CP-162) is used to scale the Frequency Input 1 in EU’s and EU/Tm. Enter the number of
pulses that corresponds to the number of EU’s that are entered in EU FI1 (CP-163).
EU FI1 (CP-163)
EU Frequency Input 1 (CP-163) is used to scale the Frequency Input 1 in EU’s and EU/Tm. Enter the number of
EU's that corresponds to the number of pulses that are entered in FI1 Pulses (CP-162).
Cnt Mode FI1 (CP-160)
Count Mode FI1 (CP-160) identifies the type of encoder that is connected to Frequency Input 1. The “Quad x4”
setting is for a quadrature encoder that gives 4 counts per pulse and also gives direction information. The Incremental selection is for a single channel encoder, which gives 1 count per pulse but does not give direction information.
2 = Incremental
1 = Quad x4 (default)
PPR FI1 (CP-161)
Pulses Per Revolution FI1 (CP-161) is the number of pulses that are produced during one revolution of the encoder
(or motor or any other rotating part of your machine) that is connected to Frequency Input 1. This value is only used
to calculate RPM information for FI1 RPM (MP-02).
FI1 Hz (MP-01)
Frequency Input 1 Hertz (MP-01) displays the current frequency of the Frequency Input 1, in Hertz.
FI1 EU/Tm (MP-03)
Frequency Input 1 Engineering Units per Time (MP-03) displays the current speed of the Frequency Input 1 in the
Engineering Units per Time (EU/Tm) relative to the FI1 Pulses (CP-162), EU FI1 (CP-163) and Time Base (CP109). The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of the decimal point in Master SP (CP-110).
5 - 10
The Standard Signal screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / Scaling <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-162)
Enter the pulses.
Press the Enter key.
STANDARD SIGNALS
FREQUENCY INPUT 1
FI1 Pulses
EU FI1
Cnt Mode FI1
PPR FI1
60
1.0
Quad
60
(CP-163)
Enter the EU.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-160)
Enter “1” or “2”.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-161)
Enter the pulses.
Press the Enter key.
FI1 Hz
FI1 EU/Tm
0
0
(MP-01)
Displays the Frequency
Input 1 frequency, in
Hertz.
P1/3
(MP-03)
Displays the Frequency
Input 1 speed in EU/Tm.
5 - 11
Frequency Input 2
FI2 Pulses (CP-167)
Frequency Input 2 Pulses (CP-167) is used to scale the Frequency Input 2 in EU’s and EU/Tm. Enter the number of
pulses that corresponds to the number of EU’s that are entered in EU FI2 (CP-168).
EU FI2 (CP-168)
EU Frequency Input 2 (CP-168) is used to scale the Frequency Input 2 in EU’s and EU/Tm. Enter the number of
EU's that corresponds to the number of pulses that are entered in FI2 Pulses (CP-167).
Cnt Mode FI2 (CP-165)
Count Mode FI2 (CP-165) identifies the type of encoder that is connected to Frequency Input 2. The “Quad x4”
setting is a for quadrature encoder that gives 4 counts per pulse and also gives direction information. The Incremental
selection is for a single channel encoder which gives 1 count per pulse but does not give direction information.
2 = Incremental
1 = Quad x4 (default)
PPR FI2 (CP-166)
Pulses Per Revolution FI2 (CP-166) is the number of pulses that are produced during one revolution of the encoder
(or motor or any other rotating part of your machine) that is connected to Frequency Input 2. This value is only used
to calculate RPM information for FI2 RPM (MP-07).
Time Base (CP-109)
Time Base (CP-109) is the denominator, which represents the time (Tm) in the EU/Tm equation. The equation scales
the Frequency Inputs (FI1 and FI2) to EU/Tm.
3 = per Hour
2 = per Minute (default)
1 = per Second
0 = Timeless EU/Tm
EU/Tm Range (CP-108)
Engineering Units per Time Range (CP-108) identifies the range and resolution (see list below) of your feedback in
Engineering Units per Time (EU/Tm). For the most precise resolution, choose the range that your maximum EU/Tm
falls within. If you need to change the current EU/Tm Range to a lower range, all of your Setpoints, Limits, and
Alarms will also need to be changed to fall within the new range. Position parameters may also be affected when you
change to a lower range.
4 = Max:
3 = Hi:
2 = Mid:
1 = Lo:
range to 999,999
range to 130,000
range to 16,000
range to 1,000
resolution to 0.001
resolution to 0.0001 (default)
resolution to 0.00001
resolution to 0.000001
PPR Mtr (CP-239)
PPR Mtr (CP-239) is the pulses per motor revolution for the FI2 signal. Use PPR Mtr to scale the PID parameters of
the position loop: Kp, PL, Ki PL, Kd PL and Kp ZE.
FI2 Hz (MP-06)
Frequency Input 2 Hz (MP-06) displays the present frequency of the Frequency Input 2, in Hertz.
FI2 EU/Tm (MP-08)
Frequency Input 2 Engineering Units per Time (MP-08) displays the current speed of the Frequency Input 2 in the
Engineering Units per Time (EU/Tm) relative to the FI2 Pulses (CP-167), EU FI2 (CP-168) and Time Base (CP109). The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of the decimal point in Master SP (CP-110).
5 - 12
The Scaling / Standard Signals / Frequency Input 2 screen (page 2).
(CP-167)
Enter pulses.
Press the Enter key.
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-168)
Enter an E/U.
Press the Enter key.
STANDARD SIGNALS
FREQUENCY INPUT 2
FI2 Pulses
EU FI2
Cnt Mode FI2
PPR FI2
Time Base
EU/Tm Range
PPR Mtr
FI2 Hz
FI2 EU/Tm
60
1.0
Quad
60
Minute
Mid
60
0
0
(CP-165)
Enter “1” or “2”
Press the Enter key.
(CP-166)
Enter the pulses.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-109)
Enter a code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-108)
Enter a code.
Press the Enter key.
P2/3
(CP-239)
Enter the pulses.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-06)
Displays the Frequency
Input 2 frequency, in
Hertz.
(MP-08)
Displays the Frequency
Input 2 speed in EU/Tm.
5 - 13
Control Output
CO Mode (CP-180)
Control Output Mode (CP-180) controls the format (see list below) of the CO_SIG Analog Output (J3, pin 1) signal.
This is the control output signal that is input to your drive.
4 = UniBrake = Unipolar Brake ( CO Max Volts - Vout )
3 = BiPolAbs = Bipolar Absolute ( Absolute Value - Vout )
2 = Bipolar (+ Vout)
1 = Unipolar (0 to +Vout) (default)
CO Max Volts (CP-181)
The control signal output is limited to plus or minus Control Output Maximum Volts (CP-181). This value should be
less than or equal to the input spec of the drive or any other device that is connected to this output.
CO Polarity (CP-182)
Control Output Polarity (CP-182) sets the polarity of the CO_SIG Analog Output (J3, pin 1) signal (see list below).
An absolute value is established for the BiPolAbs CO Mode (CP-180) after the negation has been determined by the
PLC bit ‘Negate CO’.
CO Offset (CP-366)
Control Output Offset (CP-366) is the value (in volts) that is added to the CO_SIG Analog Output (J3, pin 1) signal.
Control Output Offset (CP-366) can eliminate any voltage offset present on the DAC output circuitry or it can offset
a motor-creep problem (i.e., a digital balance pot). CO Offset (CP-366) is set at the factory, but can also be verified
with a voltmeter for a “0” volt output. If you change the value, make sure that it gets into the parameter backup.
CO Max Bits (MP-22)
The Control Output Maximum Bits (MP-22) corresponds to the voltage setting in Control Output Maximum Volts
(CP-181) for the CO_SIG Analog Output signal, relative to the Control Output DAC Range (MP-23). This is a
magnitude only.
CO Bits (MP-20)
Control Output Bits (MP-20) displays the present value, in DAC bits, of the CO_SIG Analog Output signal.
CO Volts (MP-21)
Control Output Volts (MP-21) displays he present value, in volts, of the CO_SIG Analog Output signal.
5 - 14
The Scaling / Standard Signals / Control Output screen (page 3).
(CP-180)
Enter a code.
Press the Enter key.
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-181)
Enter the volts.
Press the Enter key.
STANDARD SIGNALS
CONTROL OUTPUT
CO Mode
CO Max Volts
CO Polarity
CO Offset
Unipolar
10.0
Norm
-.082
CO Max Bits
CO Bits
CO Volts
8191
-67
0.0
P3/3
(CP-182)
Enter “1” or “2”.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-366)
Enter the volts.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-22)
Displays the magnitude,
in bits.
(MP-20)
Displays CO_SIG Analog
Output signal value in
DAC bits.
(MP-21)
Displays CO_SIG Analog
Output signal value in
volts.
5 - 15
—NOTES—
5 - 16
MONITOR PARAMETERS
The Monitor Parameters screens consist of the Feedback screen (page 1) and the Selectable screen
(page 2).
Feedback
Scaled Feedback has four possible display formats for the Scaled Fb display: Master, Follower, Inverse
Master, and Inverse Follower. These display formats allow you to display the feedback in the same
representation as the Setpoints. ScFb Eq (CP-190) determines the format. ScFb EU (CP-191) and
Fb @ ScFb EU (CP-192) can be used to change the scale of the feedback. The resolution of the value you
enter for ScFb EU (CP-191) determines the resolution of the Scaled Fb. The following equations define the
four formats. The equations use an average value of the Fb EU/Tm (MP-39) rather than the last sample
value.
In the following formulas, Fb EU/Tm (MP-39) is the current value of the signal that is selected in the Fb
Source (CP-103) and Lead EU/Tm (MP-38) is the current value of the signal that is selected in
Ld Source (CP-104).
For ScFb Eq {CP-190} = Std Master (1)
Scaled Fb {MP-40} = Fb EU/Tm {MP-39}* ScFb EU {CP-191}
Fb@ScFbEU {CP-192}
For ScFb Eq {CP-190} = Std Follower (2)
Scaled Fb {MP-40} = Fb EU/Tm {MP-39}* ScFb EU {CP-191} * Ratio Norm {CP-123}
Lead EU/Tm {MP-38} * Fb@ScFbEU {CP-192}
For ScFb Eq {CP-190} = Inverse Master (3)
Scaled Fb {MP-40} =
Fb @ScFb EU {CP-192}
FbEU/Tm {MP-39} * ScFbEU {CP-191}
For ScFb Eq {CP-190} = Inverse Follower (4)
Scaled Fb {MP-40} = Lead EU/Tm {MP-38} * Fb@ScFbEU {CP-192} * Ratio Norm {CP-123}
FbEU/Tm {MP-39} * ScFbEU {CP-191}
ScFb EU (CP-191) and Fb @ ScFb EU (CP-192) are used to scale the feedback display in a different
representation than Fb EU/Tm. Enter into ScFb EU the desired EU value and resolution when the feedback
is at the value Fb @ ScFb EU. For example, if ScFb Eq (CP-190) is set to “MSTR” and an EU value of
40.00 gallons/minute is desired for a Feedback speed of 2000 RPM, then enter 40.00 into ScFb EU and 2000
into Fb @ScFb EU.
The Scaling/Monitor Parameter/Feedback (page 5-20) displays a graphic representation of the scaled
feedback screen as well as a synopsis of the scaled feedback parameters.
5 - 17
Selectable
Sc Parm Eq (CP-194) has three equation formats (Standard, Inverse 1 and Inverse 2) which scale a selected
parameter and then displays the result in ScParm Val (MP-30). Decide which Monitor Parameter you want
to scale and then select the appropriate equation. The three equation formats are:
1. Standard: y = mx + b
2. Inverse 1: y =
1 .
mx + b
3. Inverse 2: y = m * 1 + b
x
The "x " factor represents the parameter value of the monitor parameter that will be scaled. The "y" term is
the parameter value that is displayed in ScParm Val (MP-30). The “m” factor and “b” term are the constants.
Select an equation format in Sc Parm Eq (CP-194).
Enter the number parameter code of the the monitor parameter that will be scaled in Sc Parm (CP-193).
Enter the value for the “m” constant in SC Parm M (CP-195).
Enter value for the “b” constant in SC Parm B (CP-196).
The resolution of the parameter value that you enter in SC Parm B (CP-196) determines the resolution of the
ScParm Val (MP-30). The resolution of the selected monitor parameter may limit the accuracy of the
ScParm Val (MP-30). Expand the resolution of the selected monitor parameter to improve the accuracy.
The following equations define the three equation formats:
For ScParm {CP-194} = Standard: y = mx+b (1)
Scaled Val {MP-30} = ScParmM {CP-195} * x + ScParm B {CP-196}
For ScParm {CP-194} = Inverse1: y = 1/(mx+b) (2)
Scaled Val {MP-30} =
1
ScParmM {CP-195} * x + ScParm B {CP-196}
For ScParm {CP-194} = Inverse2: (M/x) +b (3)
ScParml {MP-30} = ScParmM {CP-195} / x ) + ScParm B {CP-196}
"x" is the value of the Monitor Parameter selected in ScParm {CP-193}
5 - 18
Example of Follower Setpoint Mode - Percent Draw
The ratio of the faster speed of the feedback (FB) to that of the Lead is displayed as a percent. If the
Follower Ratio is 1.01, the feedback (FB) is operating roughly one percent faster than the Lead. This is
sometimes referred to as percent draw.
The equation for percent draw is :
% draw = 100 * (FB/LD - 1)
This can be written as:
% draw = 100 * FB/LD - 100
Use both the Scaled Fb (MP-40) and the ScParm Val (MP-30).
Set up the Scaled Fb (MP-40) for standard Follower:
ScFb Eq (CP-190)
ScFb EU (CP-191)
Fb @ ScFb EU (CP-192 )
= FOLL (2)
= 1.000 (sets the resolution of Scaled Fb)
=1
Set the Scaled Display to use Scaled Fb (MP-40) in the Standard equation:
Sc Parm (CP-193)
Sc Parm Eq (CP-194)
SC Parm M (CP-195)
SC Parm B (CP-196)
= 40
= STND (1)
= 100
= -100.0 (sets the resolution of ScParm Val)
5 - 19
Feedback
ScFb Eq (CP-190)
Scaled Feedback Equation (CP-190) identifies the scaling format (see list below) for the Scaled Fb (MP-40).
4 = Inverse Follower
3 = Inverse Master
2 = Standard Follower
1 = Standard Master (default)
ScFb EU (CP-191)
Scaled Feedback EU (CP-191) is used to scale the Scaled Fb (MP-40) in conjunction with the Fb @ ScFb EU
(CP-192) and the ScFb Eq (CP-190).
Fb @ ScFb EU (CP-192)
Feedback@ Scaled Feedback EU (CP-192) is used to scale the Scaled Fb (MP-40) in conjunction with ScFb EU
(CP-191) and ScFb Eq (CP-190).
Ld EU/Tm (MP-38)
Lead EU/Tm (MP-38) displays the current lead, in engineering units per time, as determined by the signal scaling for
the selected lead signal (refer to CP-104). The resolution is set the same as that of Master SP (CP-110).
Fb EU/Tm (MP-39)
Feedback EU/Tm (MP-39) displays the feedback, in engineering units per time, that was scaled for the feedback
signal that was selected in Fb Source (CP-103). The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of
the decimal point in Master SP (CP-110).
Scaled Fb (MP-40)
Scaled Feedback (MP-40) displays the scaled feedback , which is scaled per ScFb Eq(CP-190), ScFb EU (CP-191)
and Fb @ ScFb EU (CP-192). The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of the decimal point
in ScFb EU (CP-191).
5 - 20
The Monitor Parameters screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / Scaling <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-190)
Enter a code.
Press the Enter key.
MONITOR PARAMETERS
FEEDBACK
ScFb Eq
ScFb EU
Fb @ ScFb EU
Mstr
1.0
1
Ld EU/Tm
Fb EU/Tm
Scaled Fb
0
0
0.0
(CP-191)
Enter the units desired
for Scaled Fb.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-192)
Enter the FB EU/Tm.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-38)
Displays displays the
lead in EU/Tm.
(MP-39)
Displays the feedback in
EU/Tm.
P1/2
(MP-40)
Displays the scaled
feedback.
5 - 21
Selectable
Sc Parm (CP-193)
Use Scaled Parameter (CP-193) to select the Monitor Parameter that is used in the Scaled Parameter Equation
(CP-194). The results of the equation are displayed in ScParm Val (MP-30).
Sc Parm Eq (CP-194)
Scaled Parameter Equation (CP-194) identifies the scaling format equation (see list below) for ScParm Val (MP-30):
3 = Inverse2:
2 = Inverse1:
1 = Standard:
(M/x) + b
where x = value of selected monitor parameter
1/(M x + b)
M = SC Parm M (CP-195)
M x + b (default)
b = SC Parm B (CP-196)
Sc Parm M (CP-195)
Scaled Parameter M (CP-195) is the slope constant that multiplies the Sc Parm (CP-193) by “M” as specified by the
Sc Parm Eq (CP-194).
Sc Parm B (CP-196)
Scaled Parameter B (CP-196) is the y-intercept constant that is added to the product term as specified by the Sc Parm
Eq (CP-194). The resolution of Scaled Parameter B (CP-196) dictates the resolution of the ScParm Val (MP-30).
Sc Parm Val (MP-30)
Scaled Parameter Value (MP-30) displays the value of the Scaled Parameter (CP-193). The placement of the decimal
point is the same as the placement of the decimal point in Sc Parm B (CP-196).
5 - 22
The Scaling / Monitor Parameters / Selectable screen (page 2).
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
MONITOR PARAMETERS
SELECTABLE
Sc Parm
Sc Parm Eq
Sc Parm M
Sc Parm B
7
Std
1.0
0.0
0.0
ScParm Val
P2/2
(CP-193)
Enter a Monitor Parameter
code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-194)
Enter a code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-195)
Enter a slope constant
multiplier.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-196)
Enter the y-intercept
constant.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-30)
Displays the value of the
Scaled Parameter.
5 - 23
—NOTES—
5 - 24
AUX ANALOG SIGNALS
The Aux Analog Signals screens consist of the Input 1 screen (page 1), the Input 2 screen (page 2) and the
Output screen (page 3).
Input 1
The Auxiliary Analog Input 1 signal (AI1) is typically used as an offset to the Lead signal in Lead plus
Offset applications. It can also be used as the Lead and/or as one or more of the variables in the Custom
Setpoint equation.
Go to the SIGNAL SCALING /Auxiliary Analog Input 1screen. AI1 RA (CP-171), EU@AI1 RA (CP172), AI1 RB (CP-173) and EU@AI1 RB (CP-174) scale the Auxiliary Analog Input 1 signal from volts or
milliamps to EU/Tm.
To scale the Auxiliary Analog Input 1 signal in terms of EU/Tm, you must first determine the Engineering
Units that are relevant to your application and determine how this signal is used. When you enter certain
speed CP’s, you will enter them in the chosen EU/Tm. Likewise, when you monitor certain speed
parameters, they will be displayed in the chosen EU/Tm. If used as an offset in offset applications, this
signal is typically scaled to the same EU/Tm representation as the chosen Feedback. For example, your
EU/Tm ‘speed’ representation for this signal may be in RPM, feet/minute, inches/second, pages per second,
gallons per hour, or simply pounds.
Once you determine the EU/Tm representation for this signal, you need to scale the input voltage (or
current) by means of a linear two point method. Typically, the two points (A and B) are chosen as the
endpoints of the range of operation - the minimum and maximum voltage (or current) and the minimum
and maximum EU/Tm. The two points also determine the ‘polarity’ of the signal by defining either a
positive or negative slope. Enter a reference voltage (or current) for point A into AI1 RA (CP-171). Enter
the EU/Tm that corresponds to this voltage (or current) into EU@AI1 RA (CP-172). Enter a different
reference voltage (or current) for point B into AI1 RB (CP-173) and the corresponding EU/Tm into
EU@AI1 RB (CP-174).
For example, a pot might be used to add an offset to a lead frequency. Your Feedback is scaled for RPM.
The supply voltage on the pot is +10 volts. You want the midpoint (5 volts) to represent “0” EU/Tm
(RPM). A voltage measurement of 10 volts needs to increase the speed by 100 RPM and a voltage
measurement of “0” volts needs to decrease the speed by 100 RPM. Enter “0” into AI1 RA (CP-171) and 100 into EU@AI1 RA (CP-172). Enter 10 into AI1 RB (CP-173) and 100 into EU@AI1 RB (CP-174).
AI1 Mode (CP-170) should be set to volts (1).
The scaled range of the Analog Input 1 signal (e.g., 0 to 10 volts) should be similar to that at which the
input was calibrated. Go to the DIAGNOSTICS/CALIBRATION/P1 screen and select the signal with
Analog Cal Sel (CP-361). Do not enable calibration. The two points for calibration should be displayed at
the bottom of this screen in AnlgCal Ref A (MP-17) and AnlgCal Ref B (MP-18). Verify that the
calibration range is the same range as the operating range. If not, recalibrate the input signal. Refer to
Drive Setup-Calibration: Calibration for additional details.
There may be instances where you do know the voltage (or current) to EU/Tm representation (e.g., you
may know your flow meter operates from 0 to 10 gallons per minute) but you have no idea the voltage
produced by the meter at either end point. You can ‘calibrate’ the signal directly in terms of EU/Tm by
setting the calibration references the same as the scaling references, i.e. set AI1 RA (CP-171) equal to
5 - 25
AnlgCal Ref A (MP-17) for this signal and set AI1 RB (CP-173) equal to AnlgCal Ref B (MP-18) for this
signal. These two points should be discretely different from each other and should be reasonable estimates
for the actual voltage or current range. Now you can perform the calibration procedure with the sensor
connected to this input. Enter you estimates for AI1 RA and AI1 RB into AnalogRef Val (CP-363) for the
two points of operation/calibration. Enter the EU/Tm corresponding to these two points into EU@AI1 RA
and EU@AI1 RB after the calibration is completed. Refer Drive Setup/Calibration: Calibration for
additional details. For the formulas for the Auxiliary Analog Input 1 calculations, refer to Appendices:
Appendix B.
5 - 26
Input 2
The Auxiliary Analog Input 2 signal (AI2) can be used as an offset to the Lead signal in Lead plus Offset
applications as one or more of the variables in the Custom Setpoint equation, or as the Feedback variable.
Go to the SIGNAL SCALING/ Auxiliary Analog Input 2 screen. AI2 RA (CP-176), EU@AI2 RA (CP-177),
AI2 RB (CP-178) and EU@AI2 RB (CP-179) scale the Auxiliary Analog Input 2 signal from volts or
milliamps to EU/Tm
To scale the Auxiliary Analog Input 2 signal in terms of EU/Tm, you must first determine the Engineering
Units that are relevant to your application and determine how this signal is used. When you enter certain
speed CP’s, you will enter them in the chosen EU/Tm. Likewise, when you monitor certain speed
parameters, they will be displayed in the chosen EU/Tm. If used as an offset in offset applications, this
signal is typically scaled to the same EU/Tm representation as the chosen Feedback. For example, your EU/
Tm ‘speed’ representation for this signal may be in RPM, feet/minute, inches/second, pages per second,
gallons per hour, or simply pounds.
Once you determine the EU/Tm representation for this signal, you need to scale the input voltage (or current)
by means of a linear two point method. Typically, the two points (A and B)are chosen as the endpoints of the
range of operation - the minimum and maximum voltage (or current) and the minimum and maximum EU/
Tm. The two points also determine the ‘polarity’ of the signal by defining either a positive or negative slope.
Enter a reference voltage (or current) for point A into AI2 RA (CP-176). Enter the EU/Tm that corresponds
to this voltage (or current) into EU@AI2 RA (CP-177). Enter a different reference voltage (or current) for
point B into AI2 RB (CP-178) and the corresponding EU/Tm into EU@AI2 RB (CP-179).
For example, a pot might be used to add an offset to a lead frequency. Your Feedback is scaled for RPM.
The supply voltage on the pot is +10 volts. You want the midpoint (5 volts) to represent “0” EU/Tm (RPM).
A voltage measurement of 10 volts needs to increase the speed by 100 RPM and a voltage measurement of
“0” volts needs to decrease the speed by 100 RPM. Enter “0” into AI2 RA (CP-176) and -100 into EU@AI2
RA (CP-177). Enter 10 into AI2 RB (CP-178) and 100 into EU@AI2 RB (CP-179). AI2 Mode (CP-175)
should be set to volts (1).
The scaled range of the Auxiliary Analog Input 2 signal (e.g., 0 to 10 volts) should be similar to that at which
the input was calibrated. Go to the DIAGNOSTICS/CALIBRATION/P1 screen and select the signal with
Analog Cal Sel (CP-361). Do not enable calibration. The two points for calibration should be displayed at
the bottom of this screen in AnlgCal Ref A (MP-17) and AnlgCal Ref B (MP-18). Verify that the calibration
range is in the same range as the operating range. If not, recalibrate the input signal. Refer to Drive Setup/
Calibration: Calibration for additional details.
There may be instances where you do know the voltage (or current) to EU/Tm representation, for example,
you may know your flow meter operates from 0 to 10 gallons per minute, but you have no idea the voltage
produced by the meter at either end point. You can ‘calibrate’ the signal directly in terms of EU/Tm by
setting the calibration references the same as the scaling references, i.e. set AI2 RA (CP-176) equal to
AnlgCal Ref A (MP-17) for this signal and set AI2 RB (CP-178) equal to AnlgCal Ref B (MP-18) for this
signal. These two points should be discretely different from each other and should be reasonable estimates
for the actual voltage or current range. Now you can perform the calibration procedure with the sensor
connected to this input. Enter you estimates for AI2 RA and AI2 RB into AnalogRef Val (CP-363) for the
two points of operation/calibration. Enter the EU/Tm corresponding to these two points into EU@AI2 RA
and EU@AI2 RB after the calibration is completed. Refer to Drive Setup/Calibration: Calibration for
additional details. For the formulas for the Auxiliary Analog Input 2 calculations, refer to Appendices:
Appendix B.
5 - 27
Input 1
AI1 Mode (CP-170)
Analog Input 1 Mode (CP-170) identifies the mode of operation and the calibration that are used for the Auxiliary
Board Analog Input 1 signal.
2 = Current
1 = Voltage (default)
AI1 RA (CP-171)
Analog Input 1 Reference A (CP-171) is used to scale the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 1 in EU/Tm. Enter the value
for reference point A that corresponds to the EU/Tm that are entered in EU@AI1 RA (CP-172).
EU@AI1 A (CP-172)
EU at Analog Input 1 Reference A (CP-172) is used to scale the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 1 in EU/Tm. Enter the
number of EU/Tm for point A that corresponds to the reference value that is entered in AI1 RA (CP-171).
AI1 RB (CP-173)
Analog Input 1 Reference B (CP-173) is used to scale the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 1 in EU/Tm. Enter the value
for reference point B that corresponds to the EU/Tm that are entered in EU@AI1 RB (CP-174).
EU@AI1 RB (CP-174)
EU@Analog Input 1 Reference B (CP-174) is used to scale the Auxiliary Board Analg Input 1 in EU/Tm. Enter the
number of EU/T’s for point A that corresponds to the reference value that is entered in AI1 RB (CP-173).
AI1 Bits (MP-11)
Analog Input 1 Bits (MP-11) displays the present value in ADC bits of Auxiliary Board Analog Input 1 signal.
AI1 Signal (MP-12)
Analog Input 1 Signal (MP-12) displays the present value of the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 1 signal in either
volts or milliamps relative to which setting (volts or current) has been entered in AI1 MODE (CP-170).
AI1 Eu/Tm (MP-13)
Analog Input 1 EU/Tm (MP-13) displays the present value of the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 1 signal in Engineering Units per Time (EU/Tm) as relative to the AI1 RA (CP-171), EU@AI1 RA (CP-172), AI1 RB (CP-173),
EU@AI1 RB (CP-174) and Time Base (CP-109). The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement
of the decimal point in EU@AI1 RA (CP-172).
5 - 28
The Aux Analog Scaling screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / Scaling <—
(CP-170)
Enter “1” or “2”.
Press the Enter key.
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-171)
Enter volts or milliamps.
Press the Enter key.
AUX ANALOG SIGNALS
INPUT 1
AI1 Mode
AI1 RA
EU@AI1 RA
AI1 RB
EU@AI1 RB
Volts
0.0
0.0
10.0
100.0
AI1 Bits
AI1 Signal
AI1 EU/Tm
0
0.00
0.0
(CP-172)
Enter EU/Tm.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-173)
Enter volts or milliamps.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-174)
Enter EU/Tm.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-11)
Displays the value of Aux
Board Analog Input 1
signal, in DAC bits
P1/3
(MP-12)
Displays the value of the
Aux Board Analog Input 1
signal, in volts or milliamps
(MP-13)
Displays the value of the
Aux Board Analog Input 1
signal in EU/Tm
5 - 29
Input 2
AI2 Mode (CP-175)
Analog Input 2 Mode (CP-175) identifies the mode of operation and the calibration that are used for the Aux Board
Analog Input 2 signal. Enter “2” for Current or “1” for Voltage (default).
AI2 RA (CP-176)
Analog Input 2 Reference A (CP-176) is used to scale the Aux Board Analog Input 2 in EU/Tm. Enter the value for
reference point A that corresponds to the EU/T’s that are entered in EU@AI2 RA (CP-177).
EU@AI2 RA (CP-177)
EU@Analog Input 2 Reference A (CP-177) is used to scale the Aux Board Analog Input 2 in EU/Tm. Enter the
number of EU/T’s for point A that corresponds to the reference value that is entered in AIN2 RA (CP-176).
AI2 RB (CP-178)
Analog Input 2 Reference B (CP-178) is used to scale the Aux Board Analog Input 2 in EU/Tm. Enter the value for
reference point B that corresponds to the EU/T’s that are entered in EU@AI2 RB (CP-179).
EU@AI2 RB (CP-179)
EU@Analog Input 2 Reference B (CP-179) is used to scale the Aux Board Analog Input 2 in EU/Tm. Enter the
number of EU/T’s for point A that corresponds to the reference value that is entered in AIN2 RB (CP-178).
Time Base (CP-109)
Time Base (CP-109) is the denominator, which represents the time (T) in the EU/Tm equation. The equation scales the
Frequency Inputs (FI1 and FI2) to EU/Tm.
3 = per Hour
1 = per Second
2 = per Minute (default)
0 = Timeless EU/Tm
AI2 Bits ( MP-14)
AI2 Bits (MP-14) displays the present value in DAC bits of Aux Board Analog Input 2 signal.
AI2 Signal (MP-15)
Analog Input 2 Signal (MP-15) displays the present value of the Aux Board Analog Input 2 signal in either volts or
milliamps, relative to which setting (volts or current) has been entered in AI2 MODE (CP-175).
AI2 EU/Tm (MP-16)
Analog Input 2 EU/Tm (MP-16) displays the present value of the Aux Board Analog Input 2 signal in Engineering
Units per Time (EU/Tm) relative to the A2 RA (CP-176), EU@AI2 RA (CP-177), AI2 RB (CP-178), EU@AI2 RB
(CP-179) and Time Base (CP-109). The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of the decimal
point in EU@AI2 RA (CP-177).
5 - 30
The Scaling / Aux Analog Signals / Input 2 screen (page 2).
(CP-175)
Enter “1” or “2”
Press the Enter key.
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-176)
Enter volts or milliamps
Press the Enter key.
AUX ANALOG SIGNALS
INPUT 2
AI2 Mode
AI2 RA
EU@AI2 RA
AI2 RB
EU@AI2 RB
Time Base
Volts
0.0
0.0
10.0
100.0
Minute
AI2 Bits
AI2 Signal
AI2 EU/Tm
0
0.00
0.0
P2/3
(CP-177)
Enter EU/Tm.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-178)
Enter volts or milliamps
Press the Enter key.
(CP-179)
Enter EU/Tm
Press the Enter key.
(CP-109)
Enter a code.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-14)
Displays the value of Aux
Board Analog Input 2
signal, in DAC Bits
(MP-15)
Displays the value of the
Aux Board Analog Input 2
signal in volts or milliamps
(MP-16)
Displays the value of the
Aux Board Analog Input 2
signal in EU/Tm.
5 - 31
Output
AO Mode (CP-185)
Analog Output Mode (CP-185) identifies the mode of operation and calibration that are used for the aux board analog
output signal. Enter “2” for Current or “1” for Voltage (default).
AO Parameter (CP-184)
Analog Output Parameter (CP-184) identifies the Monitor or Control Parameter that is used for the Aux Analog
output (JA, pins 9,10,11) . When the Analog Output Parameter (CP-184) set to “0”, the value of AO DIRECT (CP365) is used as the output parameter.
NOTE: See Appendices: Appendix C for the Monitor Parameters that are not available for the Analog
Output Parameter (CP-184).
AO RA (CP-186)
Analog Output Reference A (CP-186) scales the Aux Board Analog output from the units of the selected parameter to
the units of the output (generally measured in volts or milliamperes).
Val@AO RA (CP-187)
Value@Analog Output Reference A (Value at Analog Output Reference A) scales the Aux Board Analog output from
the units of the selected parameter to the units of the output (generally measured in volts or milliamperes). Enter the
parameter value that corresponds to AO RA (CP-186).
AO RB (CP-188)
Analog Output Reference B (CP-188) scales the Aux Board Analog Output from the units of the selected parameter
to the units of the output (generally measured in volts or milliampere). Enter the parameter value that corresponds to
VAL@AO RB. (CP-189).
Val@AO RB (CP-189)
Value at Analog Output Reference B (CP-189) scales the Aux Board Analog Output from the units of the selected
parameter to the units of the output, (generally measured in volts or milliampere). Enter the parameter value that
corresponds to VAL@AO RB. (CP-187).
AO Direct (CP-365)
Analog Out Direct (CP-365) is the value output (in volts or milliamps) on the Auxiliary Analog Board's analog output
when the AO Parameter (CP-184) is set to a “0”.
AO Bits (MP-24)
Analog Output Bits (MP-24) displays the present value, in DAC Bits, of the Auxiliary Analog Output.
AO Signal (MP-25)
Analog Output Signal (MP-25) displays the present value, in either volts or milliamps of the Auxiliary Analog
Output, relative to AO Mode (CP-185).
5 - 32
The Scaling / Aux Analog Signals / Output screen (page 3).
(CP-185)
Enter “1” or “2”
Press the Enter key.
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-184)
Enter a Monitor Parameter.
Press the Enter key.
AUX ANALOG SIGNALS
OUTPUT
(CP-186)
Enter volts or milliamps.
Press the Enter key.
AO Mode
AO Parameter
AO RA
Val@AO RA
AO RB
Val@AO RB
AO Direct
Volts
7
-10.0
-2000
10.0
2000
0.0
AO Bits
AO Signal
0
0.00
(CP-189)
Enter a parmameter value.
Press the Enter key.
P3/3
(CP-365)
Enter volts or milliamps.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-187)
Enter a parameter value.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-188)
Enter volts or milliamps.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-24)
Displays the value of the
Auxiliary Analog Output.,
in DAC bits.
(MP-25)
Displays the value of the
Auxiliary Analog Output, in
volts or milliamps.
5 - 33
—NOTES—
5 - 34
SETPOINTS
This section discusses the setup procedures for setpoints. The setpoint determines the speed at which you
want your drive to operate when the CX-1010 is in the “Run” mode. The setpoint can be a speed (ft/min), a
ratio (Follower to lead) or a setting that is relative to other factors, such as a dancer position. The CX-1010
can be run in:
• Standard Master Mode, Inverse Master Mode or Master Mode plus Offset.
• Standard Follower Mode, Inverse Follower Mode or Follower Mode plus Offset.
• Direct Mode
• Custom Mode
Use the “Run Modes” screen to select the mode of operation (e.g., Master, Follower. Custom, Direct) as well
as to select the loop mode (e.g., open loop, velocity loop, ZE loop). Once you have selected the mode of
operation, then use the corresponding screen (e.g., Master, Follower. Custom, Direct) to specify how that
mode will operate.
Caution: To avoid damage to your system, the CX-1010 must be calibrated and the motor drive set up
before you operate your system. Refer to Drive Setup / Calibration: Calibration.
The CX-1010 setpoint setup screens are:
• Run Modes
• Master
• Follower
• Custom
• Direct
5 - 35
RUN MODES
There are four modes of operation; the Master Mode, the Follower Mode, the Direct Mode and the Custom Mode. Use
Setpoint Mode (CP-102) to enter the mode of operation that you want to use when your system is in “Run”. The
setpoints that correspond to these four modes of operation are; the Master Setpoint (CP-110), the Follower Setpoint
(CP-120), the Direct Setpoint (CP-130) and the Custom Setpoint (CP-140). Only one of these setpoints is active at any
one time. The active setpoint is determined by the mode of operation that you select in Setpoint Mode (CP-102). The
active Setpoint will also appear as the Setpoint X (CP-101).
The Master Mode is generally used to control the speed of a single drive, but it can also be used to control the Master
(Lead) speed of an entire process line.
The Follower Mode is generally used to control the ratio of one drive to another.
The Direct Mode is used for direct control of the value of CO Volts (MP-21) and consequently the voltage at CO Sig
(J3, pin 1). The Direct Mode is generally used as a diagnostic tool. However, the Direct Mode can also be used to set
the drive's operating speed directly by simulating a pot.
The Custom Setpoint Mode is used in applications where the desired drive operation depends on several signals
(e.g., frequencies, voltages) or where the math is more involved than can be achieved with the Master Mode or the
Follower Mode.
The result of either the Master Mode, the Follower Mode or the Custom Setpoint Mode calculation is displayed in
Scaled Ref (MP-41). The Scaled Ref (MP-41) is the reference speed in feedback Engineering Units per time
(Fb EU/Tm). The Direct Mode caluclation is not displayed in Scaled Ref (MP-41) because the Direct Mode forces the
CO Sig to match the Direct Setpoint (CP-130).
The following graphic matrix displays the interaction between the Setpoint Mode, Setpoint X and the Setpoint. This
example uses the Direct Mode, however the same relationship applies to all four modes and their respective Setpoints:
Then the Setpoint X (CP-101)
changes to Direct SPx
If you enter the Direct Mode
into the Setpoint Mode (CP-102)
RUN MONITOR
SUMMARY
RUN MODES
Direct Mode
Setpoint Mode
RUN Loop Mode
Drct
Follower Mode
State
Cntrl Loop
Direct SPx
F-STOP
OL
10
10
Ramped Ref
RR Error
CO Volts
0
0
0.0
DIRECT
Master Mode
Custom Mode
Direct SP
Min SP Drct
Max SP Drct
Fb Source
P1/1
The Direct SPx (CP-101) and the
Direct Setpoint (CP-130) are identical.
If you change the Parameter Value
of one, the other will also change.
Fb EU/Tm
FI2 Hz
CO Volts
State
P1/3
10
0.0
15.0
FI2
0
0
0.0
F-STOP
P1/1
Setpoint Mode (CP-102)
Setpoint Mode sets the mode of operation and the subsequent setpoint, that are used when your system is in “Run”.
The setpoint and mode of operation combined, determine the Reference Speed and, if applicable, the Reference
Position. The modes of operation are: 4 = Custom Mode 3 = Direct Mode
2 = Follower Mode 1 = Master Mode
Run Loop Mode (CP-220)
RUN Loop Mode (CP-220) identifies the type of control loop (see list below) that is used during “Run” For specific
information about Run Loop Modes (CP-220), refer to System Setup/Control Parameters: Tuning. This Control
Parameter is only included in this screen for quick, convenient access.
3=Position Loop
5 - 36
2=ZE Loop (Psnt + Vel)
1=Velocity Loop
0=Open Loop
The Run Modes screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / Setpoints <—
RUN MODES
Setpoint Mode
RUN Loop Mode
Mstr
Vel
(CP-102)
Use the Increment Up or
Increment Down key to scroll
to the mode of operation that
you want, then press the
Enter key. You can also
access the value options by
pressing the Help key or by
entering a numeric code.
Master is the default mode.
(CP-220)
Enter a code (0-3)
Press the Enter key.
P1/1
If “MIN Error” or "MAX Error” appear in the
error message bar, it means that you can not
scroll any further in that direction.
5 - 37
MASTER
The Master SP (CP-110) is the desired master speed (e.g., feet/minute) at which you want you system to
operate. The Master Setpoint can be used in one of three ways as dictated by Master Equation (CP-113):
The Master Equation (CP-113) is set to “1” (Standard)
The Master Equation (CP-113) is set to “2” (Inverse Master)
The Master Equation (CP-113) is set to “3” (Master + Offset)
When Master Equation (CP-113) is set to “1” (Standard), then the Scaled Reference (MP-41) is equal to the
Master SP (CP-110) when the CX-1010 is in “Run”. This is the most commonly used setting for the Master
Equation (CP-113). The operating speed is determined directly by the Parameter Value that is in the Master
SP (CP-110). The Master SP (CP-110) is represented in EU/Tm and is defined by the feedback signal. The
feedback signal is selected in Fb Source (CP-103). The feedback source is usually set to “FI2” (frequency
input 2) but it can also be “AI2” (analog input 2). The equation that governs this mode of operating is:
For Master Equation {CP-113} = Standard (1)
Scaled Ref {MP-41} = Master SP {CP-110}
When Master Equation (CP-113) is set to “2” (Inverse Master), the Scaled Reference (MP-41) is equal to 1/
Master SP when the CX-1010 is in “Run”. This is an inverse mode and is used to set the Master SP (CP-110)
in units of time rather than speed. The Parameter Value of Master SP (CP-110) is inverted to determine the
operating speed. Inverse Master format is used for applications that require setting a time per EU (e.g.,
time-in-the-oven). The Master SP (CP-110) units are represented as T/EU; inverse of the units defined for
the feedback signal. The Inv M Norm (CP-114) adjusts the Scaled Reference (MP-41) by the number of
EU's (engineering units) per the distance that is being timed. For example, a value of 50.000 would be
entered into Inv M Norm (CP-114) in order to adjust the setpoint for the 50 foot length of the oven. The
equation governing this mode of operation is:
For Master Equation {CP-113} = Inverse Master (2)
Scaled Ref {MP-41} = Inv M Norm {CP-114}
Master SP {CP-110}
Therefore, the example above would be formulated as:
5 feet/min (Scaled Ref)
=
50 feet/Oven Length (Inv M Norm)
10 min in the oven (Master SP)
When Master Equation (CP-113) is set to “3” (Master + Offset), the Scaled Reference (MP-41) is equal to the
Master SP (CP-110) plus the value of the offset signal. The source of the offset signal is selected in Ofs
Source (CP-105). The operating speed is determined directly by the Parameter Value that is in the Master SP
(CP-110) plus the value of the Offset signal is added. The offset signal source is determined in the Ofs
Source (CP-105). The Master SP (CP-110) is represented in EU/Tm, as defined for the feedback signal. The
representation (units) of the offset signal should be of the same scaling as the feedback. This setting for the
Master Equation (113) is generally be used if the system is required to operate at a specific amount above or
below the Master Setpoint (CP-110) . The equation that governs this mode of operation is:
5 - 38
For Master Equation {CP-113} = Master + Offset (3)
Scaled Ref {MP-41} = Master SP {CP-110} + x
“x” is value of the signal that is selected in Ofs Source {CP-105}
.
For example:
110 feet/min. = 100 feet/min. + 10 feet/min
260 feet/min = 250 feet/min + 10 feet/min
180 feet/min = 200 feet/min + -20 feet/min
Use the Max SP Mstr (CP-111) and Min SP Mstr (CP-112) to determine the maximum and minimum value
that can be entered into Master SP (CP-110). The Max SP Mstr (CP-111) and the Min SP Mstr (CP-112)
define the range for positive and negative values ( i.e. they are magnitude limits).
The following pages display graphics of the Master Mode screens as well as a synopsis of the Master Mode
parameters.
5 - 39
Master
Master SP (CP-110)
Master Setpoint (CP-110) is the speed at which you want your system to operate (while in Run) when the Setpoint
Mode (CP-102) is set to "1” (Master Mode). How the Master SP (CP-110) is interpreted (i.e., how the scaled Reference Speed is derived from the Master SP) is determined by the Master Equation (CP-113). When Master Equation
(CP-113) is set to "1" (Standard), then the Master SP is the desired operating speed in EU/Tm . When Master
Equation (CP-113) is set to the "2 ” (Inverse Master), then the Master Setpoint (CP-110) is given in time (e.g.,
minutes) and the operating speed in inversely proportional to Master SP (Tm/EU). When Master Equation (CP-113)
is set to the "3 ” (Offset) then the operating speed is the Master SP plus the current value of the offset signal (which
is selected in (CP-105).
Min SP Mstr (CP-112)
Minimum Setpoint Master (CP-112) is the minimum value that will be allowed for the Master Setpoint (CP-110).
Max SP Mstr (CP-111)
Maximum Setpoint Master (CP-111) is the maximum value that will be allowed for the Master Setpoint (CP-110).
5 - 40
The Master screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / Setpoints <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-110)
Enter the desired E.U.
Press the Enter key.
MASTER
Master SP
Min SP Mstr
Max SP Mstr
(CP-112)
Enter the minimum E.U.
Press the Enter key.
0
0
999999
(CP-111)
Enter the maximum E.U.
Press the Enter key.
P1/2
5 - 41
Master
Master SP (CP-110)
Master Setpoint (CP-110) is the speed at which you want your system to operate (while in Run) when the Setpoint
Mode (CP-102) is set to "1” (Master Mode). How the Master SP (CP-110) is interpreted (i.e., how the scaled Reference Speed is derived from the Master SP) is determined by the Master Equation (CP-113). When Master Equation
(CP-113) is set to "1" (Standard), then the Master SP is the desired operating speed in EU/Tm . When Master
Equation (CP-113) is set to the "2 ” (Inverse Master), then the Master Setpoint (CP-110) is given in time
(e.g., minutes) and the operating speed in inversely proportional to Master SP (Tm/EU). When Master Equation (CP113) is set to the "3 ” (Offset) then the operating speed is the Master SP plus the current value of the offset signal
(which is selected in (CP-105).
Inv M Norm (CP-114)
Use the Inverse Master Norm (CP-114) to define the travel distance (EU) in the time specified in Master Setpoint
(CP-110). Use Inverse Master Norm (CP-114) only in the Inverse Master Mode. In this mode, the setpoint speed is
determined by the INV M Norm (CP-114) over the Master Setpoint (CP-110).
Master Equation (CP-113)
Master Equation (CP-113) allows you to choose a variable (see list below) that will affect the Master setpoint operation.
3 = Master + Offset
2 = Inverse Master
1 = Standard (default)
Fb Source (CP-103)
Feedback Source (CP-103) identifies the source of the feedback signal. The Feedback signal is also used by some of
the Alarms as well as some of the Status Indications (e.g., Zero Speed). Feedback Source is ignored when RUN Loop
Mode (CP-220) is set to "Position Loop" (the Feedback signal defaults to "Frequency Input 2"). The feedback
sources are:
4 = Constant 2
3 = Analog Input 2
2 = Analog Input 1
1 = Frequency Input 2 (default)
Ofs Source (CP-105)
Offset Source (CP-105) identifies the source of the Offset in both the Master plus Offset and the Follower plus Offset
applications. The Offset is added to the Master Setpoint (CP-110) when Master Equation (CP-113) is set to "Master
plus Offset” and Setpoint Mode (CP-102) is set to "Master". The Offset is added to the result of the Lead Signal
multiplied by the Ratio (CP-124) when Master Equation (CP-113) is set to "Follower Plus Offset" and Setpoint Mode
(CP-102) is set to "Follower". The Ofs Sources are:
6 = Frequency Input 2
5 = Analog Input 2
4 = Constant 3
3 = Custom Setpoint (constant)
2 = Analog Input 1
1 = Frequency Input 1 (default)
5 - 42
The Master screen (page 2).
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-110)
Enter the desired E.U.
Press the Enter key.
MASTER
Master SP
Inv M Norm
Master Equation
Fb Source
Ofs Source
0
0
Std
F12
Const3
P2/2
(CP-114)
Enter the desired E.U.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-113)
Enter setpoint type.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-103)
Enter feedback signal
source.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-105)
Enter offset signal
source.
Press the Enter key.
5 - 43
FOLLOWER
Use the Follower mode to follow an external signal at a ratio that you will define. The Follower SP (CP-120)
sets the ratio at which the follower will operate with respect to the Lead. The Ratio (CP-124) is the desired
Feedback EU/Tm per Lead EU/Tm in velocity mode of operation.
Ratio (CP-124) =
Follower speed (feet/min. of the follower)
Lead speed (feet/min. of the lead)
The Ratio (CP-124) is set by the Follower SP (CP-120) and the Ratio Norm (CP-123). When the Fol Equation
(CP-125) is set to “1” (STND or Standard) or “3” (OFST or Follower with offset), the Ratio is equal to the
Follower SP divided by Ratio Norm. This equation is true when the Ratio Norm is set to “1.000”. Since in
most cases, the Ratio Norm is usually set at “1.000”, the Ratio can be considered to be equal to the
Follower SP.
NOTE: Ratio Norm (CP-123) has a default pamareter value of “1.000”
For Follower Equation {CP-125} = Standard (1)
Scaled Ref {MP-41} = Ratio {CP-124} = Follower SP {CP-120}
Ratio Norm {CP-123}
When the Fol Equation (CP-125) is set to “2” (Inverse Follower), the Ratio (CP-124) is equal to the Ratio
Norm (CP-124) divided by Follower SP. Since in most cases, the Ratio Norm is usually set at “1.000”, the
Ratio can be considered to be equal to the 1/Follower SP.
NOTE: Ratio Norm (CP-123) has a default pamareter value of “1.000”
For Follower Equation {CP-125} = Inverse Follower (2)
Scaled Ref {MP-41} = Ratio {CP-124} = Ratio Norm {CP-123}
Follower SP {CP-120}
When the Fol Equation (CP-125) is set to “3” (Follower + Offset), the current value of the offset signal is
added to the product of the Ratio times the current value of the Lead signal. When you enter a new Follower
SP or a new Ratio Norm, the Ratio (CP-124) updates automatically to reflect the new ratio. You can also enter
the desired ratio directly into Ratio (CP-124). In this case, the Follower SP is automatically updated with a
Parameter Value that will establish the new ratio.
NOTE: Ratio Norm (CP-123) has a default pamareter value of “1.000”
For Follower Equation {CP-125} = Follower + Offset (3)
Scaled Ref {MP-41} = Ratio {CP-124} = Follower SP {CP-120} +x
Ratio Norm {CP-123}
“x” is value of the signal that is selected in Ofs Source {CP-105}
The Max SP Fol (CP-121) and Min SP Fol (CP-122) determine the maximum and minimum value that can be
entered into Follower SP (CP-120). They define the range for both positive and negative values; they are
magnitude limits.
5 - 44
Standard Follower format uses the Follower SP (CP-120) and Ratio Norm (CP-123) to determine the ratio of
the Feedback EU/Tm to the Lead EU/Tm. In this equation, the Follower SP (C-120) is the numerator of the
ratio and Ratio Norm (CP-123) is the denominator.
Scaled Reference {MP-41} = Follower Setpoint {CP-120 } * Ld Signal EU/Tm (selected by Ld Source,
Ratio Norm {CP-123}
CP-104)
Inverse Follower Mode is a modification to the standard follower mode to provide for programming
convenience. The Follower SP (CP-120) is the denominator of the ratio while the Ratio Norm (CP-123) is
numerator.
Scaled Reference {MP-41} = Ratio Norm {CP-123} * Lead Signal EU/Tm (selected by Lead Source, CP-104)
Follower Setpoint {CP-120}
Follower plus Offset format is similar to standard follower with the addition of the current value of the selected
Offset signal included. The Offset signal is selected by Ofs Source
(CP-105).
Scaled Reference {MP-41}= Follower Setpoint {CP-120} * Lead Signal EU/Tm (selected by Ld Source, CP-104)
Ration Norm {CP-123} + Offset Signal EU/Tm (selected by Ofs Source, CP-105)
The following pages display graphics of the Follower mode screens as well as a synopsis of the Follower mode
parameters.
5 - 45
Follower
Follower SP (CP-120)
Follower Setpoint (CP-120) sets the ratio at which the Follower will follow the Lead signal (when in Run) when the
Setpoint Mode (CP-102) is set to "2” (Follower Mode). If Follower Equation (CP-125) is set to either "1” (Standard) or "3” (Follower plus Offset), then the Follower SP is the numerator of the ratio. If the Follower Equation
(CP-125) is set to "2” (Inverse Follower), then the Follower Setpoint is the denominator of the ratio.
Min SP Fol (CP-122)
Minimum Setpoint Follower (CP-122) is the minimum value that will be allowed for the Follower Setpoint
(CP-120).
Max SP Fol (CP-121)
Maximum Setpoint Follower (CP-121) is the maximum value that will be allowed for the Follower Setpoint
(CP-120).
5 - 46
The Follower screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / Setpoints <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-120)
Enter a ratio.
Press the Enter key.
FOLLOWER
Follower SP
1.000
Min SP Fol
Max SP Fol
0
999999
(CP-122)
Enter a minimum ratio.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-121)
Enter the maximum ratio.
Press the Enter key.
P1/2
5 - 47
Follower
Follower SP (CP-120)
Follower Setpoint (CP-120) sets the ratio at which the Follower will follow the Lead signal (when in Run) when the
Setpoint Mode (CP-102) is set to "2” (Follower Mode). If Follower Equation (CP-125) is set to either "1”
(Standard) or "3” (Follower plus Offset), then the Follower SP is the numerator of the ratio. If the Follower
Equation (CP-125) is set to "2” (Inverse Follower), then the Follower Setpoint is the denominator of the ratio.
Ratio (CP-124)
Ratio (CP-124) is the ratio at which the Follower will follow the Lead (while in Run) when the Setpoint Mode
(CP-102) is set to "2 ” (Follower Mode).
Ratio Norm (CP-123)
In the Standard and Offset Follower mode, Ratio Norm (CP-123) is the denominator of the ratio at which your
system follows the lead signal. In the Inverse Follower mode, Ratio Norm is the numerator of the ratio at which
your system follows the lead signal.
Fol Equation (CP-125)
Follower Equation (CP-125) allows you to choose a variable (see list below) that will affect the Follower setpoint
operation.
3=Follower + Offset
2=Inverse Follower
1=Standard (default)
LD Source (CP-104)
Lead Source (CP-104) identifies the source of the Lead in Follower applications. This is the signal that the Follower
will follow. The Lead Source is ignored when RUN Loop Mode (CP-220) is set to "Position Loop" (the Lead Signal
defaults to "Frequency Input 1"). The lead sources are:
4 = Constant 1
3 = Custom SP
2 = Analog Input 1
1 = Frequency Input 1 (default)
Fb Source (CP-103)
Feedback Source (CP-103) identifies the source of the feedback signal. The Feedback signal is also used by some of
the Alarms as well as some of the Status Indications (e.g., Zero Speed). Feedback Source is ignored when RUN
Loop Mode (CP-220) is set to "Position Loop" (the Feedback signal defaults to "Frequency Input 2"). The feedback
sources are:
4 = Constant 2
3 = Analog Input 2
2 = Analog Input 1
1 = Frequency Input 2 (default)
Ofs Source (CP-105)
Offset Source (CP-105) identifies the source of the Offset in both the Master plus Offset and the Follower plus Offset
applications. The Offset is added to the Follower Setpoint (CP-120) when Follower Equation (CP-125) is set to
"Master plus Offset” and Setpoint Mode (CP-102) is set to "Follower". The Offset is added to the result of the Lead
Signal multiplied by the Ratio (CP-124) when Follower Equation (CP-125) is set to "Follower Plus Offset" and
Setpoint Mode (CP-102) is set to "Follower". The Ofs Sources are:
6 = Frequency Input 2
5 = Analog Input 2
4 = Constant 3
3 = Custom Setpoint (constant)
2 = Analog Input 1
1 = Frequency Input 1 (default)
5 - 48
The Follower screen (page 2).
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-120)
Enter a ratio.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-124)
Enter a ratio.
Press the Enter key.
FOLLOWER
Follower SP
Ratio
Ratio Norm
Fol Equation
1.000
1.000
1.000
Std
Ld Source
Fb Source
Ofs Source
FI1
FI2
Const3
P2/2
(CP-123)
Enter ratio.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-125)
Enter a code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-104)
Enter lead signal source.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-103)
Enter feedback signal
source.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-105)
Enter offset signal source.
Press the Enter key.
5 - 49
CUSTOM
The Custom mode is used for complex applications that do not fit into the Master or Follower modes. It
can be used when you need to multiply a signal (or setpoint) by another signal to produce the desired speed
command (e.g., FI1 EU/Tm * AI1 Eu/Tm). It can also be used calculate a convenient representation of the
Parameter Value for the Custom Setpoint (CP-140). The Custom Setpoint (CP-140) equation determines
the operating speed that you want your system to operate at when your system is in “Run”. The Custom
Setpoint equation format is fixed, but you can configure the variables.
The equation:
Scaled Reference =
(M1 * V1) + B1
(M2 * V2) + B2
* V4 + (M3 * V3 + B3)
V1 is the value of the signal (or constant) selected by CP-150, V1 Source
V2 is the value of the signal (or constant) selected by CP-151, V2 Source
V3 is the value of the signal (or constant) selected by CP-152, V3 Source
V4 is the value of the signal (or constant) selected by CP-153, V4 Source
To use the Custom Setpoint equation, first determine how the equation will be used to fit your application.
Then select the variable(s) that you will use and set any that you will not use to “0” . Enter appropriate
values for Custom SP (CP-140), for any constants (V1-V4) that are used and for the M1, B1, M2, B2, M3,
B3 constants. The Custom SP (CP-140) can be used as any or all of the variables used in the Custom SP
equation. Often, the variables in the equation are set to either 1.0000 or 0.0 .
The equation is configured by assigning a signal (or constant) to one of the four variables that are labeled
V1, V2, V3, V4, and by defining values for the six other constants; M1, B1, M2, B2, M3, B3.
The (V1-V4) variables will take on the current values of the signal (or constant) that you have selected for
operation. The equation is continually recalculated with the current value of the selected signal and the
constants to update the Scaled Reference value.
There are four constants provided as well as the Custom SP (CP-140) that can be used in place of the
variables V1-V4. If one or more of the variables are not needed for the application, they can be set to “0”.
The result should be in Feedback EU/Tm.
The Max SP Cust (CP-146) and Min SP Cust (CP-147) determine the maximum and minimum value that
can be entered into Custom SP (CP-140). They define the range for both positive and negative values (i.e.,
they are magnitude limits).
The products of M1*V1, M2*V2 and M3*V3 should not exceed the maximum allowable value of EU/Tm
Range (CP-108). The EU/Tm Range is a limit that is related to the number size versus resolution (digits
right of the decimal point).
Constant 1 (CP-141) can be used to replace the variable V1 in the Custom SP equation. The maximum
value and resolution for Constant 1 are determined by EU/Tm Range (CP-108).
Constant 2 (CP-142) can be used to replace the variable V2 in the Custom SP equation. The maximum
value and resolution for Constant 2 are determined by EU/Tm Range (CP-108).
5 - 50
Constant 3 (CP-143) can be used to replace the variable V3 in the Custom SP equation. The maximum
value and resolution for Constant 3 are determined by EU/Tm Range (CP-108).
Constant 4 (CP-144) can be used to replace the variable V4 in the Custom SP equation. The maximum
value and resolution for Constant 4 are determined by EU/Tm Range (CP-108).
The options available for V1 Source (CP-150) are:
6 = FI2 EU/Tm(MP-8)
5 = AI2 EU/Tm(MP-16)
4 = Constant 1(CP-141)
3 = Custom SP(CP-140)
2 = AI1 EU/Tm(MP-13)
1 = FI1 EU/Tm(MP-3)
0 = the value of 0
The options available for V2 Source (CP-151) are:
6 = FI2 EU/Tm(MP-8)
5 = AI2 EU/Tm(MP-16)
4 = Constant 2(CP-142)
3 = Custom SP(CP-140)
2 = AI1 Eu/Tm(MP-13)
1 = FI1 EU/Tm(MP-3)
0 = the value of 0
The options available for V3 Source (CP-152) are:
6 = FI2 EU/Tm(MP-8)
5 = AI2 EU/Tm(MP-16)
4 = Constant 3(CP-143)
3 = Custom SP(CP-140)
2 = AI1 Eu/Tm(MP-13)
1 = FI1 EU/Tm(MP-3)
0 = the value of 0
The options available for V4 Source (CP-153) are:
6 = FI2 EU/Tm(MP-8)
5 = AI2 EU/Tm(MP-16)
4 = Constant 4(CP-144)
3 = Custom SP(CP-140)
2 = AI1 Eu/Tm(MP-13)
1 = FI1 EU/Tm(MP-3)
0 = the value of 0
M1, B1, M2, B2, M3, B3 are constants, coefficients and offsets, that provide a linear mapping for each of
the respective V1-V3 variables. However, they need not be used in such a dedicated manner. They can be
used in any way that best fits the equation to your application, within some computational constraints. The
products M1*V1, M2*V2 and M3*V3 should not be allowed to exceed the maximum allowable Feedback
given by EU/Tm Range (CP-108). The maximum value for M1, M2, M3 is 32767. The resolution is given
by 0.000015. The maximum value and resolution for B1, B2, B3, B4 are determined by EU/Tm Range
(CP-108). The EU/Tm Range is a limit related to the number size versus resolution (digits right of the
decimal point.
The following pages display graphics of the Custom Mode screens as well as a synopsis of the Custom
Mode parameters.
5 - 51
Custom
Custom SP (CP-140)
Custom Setpoint can be any or all of the “V” variables in the Custom Setpoint Equation below and Custom Setpoint
can also be a constant for a Lead or an Offset operation. The Custom Setpoint Equation:
Scaled Reference =
(M1 * V1) + B1
(M2 * V2) + B2
* V4 + (M3 * V3 + B3)
Max SP Cust (CP-146)
Maximum Setpoint Custom (CP-146) is the maximum value that will be allowed for the Custom Setpoint.
Min SP Cust (CP-147)
Minimum Setpoint Custom (CP-147) is the minimum value that will be allowed for the Custom Setpoint.
5 - 52
The Custom screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / Setpoints <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
CUSTOM
Custom SP
Min SP Cust
Max SP Cust
(CP-140)
Enter the variable.
Press the Enter key.
0.0
0
130000
(CP-147)
Enter a setpoint.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-146)
Enter a setpoint.
Press the Enter key.
P1/3
5 - 53
Custom
Constant 1 (CP-141)
Constant 1 can be the “V1” variable in the Custom Setpoint Equation (refer to (CP-140). It can also be a constant for
a Lead operation.
Constant 2 (CP-142)
Constant 2 can be the “V2” variable in the Custom Setpoint Equation (refer to (CP-140).
Constant 3 (CP-143)
Constant 3 can be the “V3” variable in the Custom Setpoint Equation (refer to (CP-140). It can also be a constant for
an Offset Operation.
Constant 4 (CP-144)
Constant 4 can be the “V4” variable in the Custom Setpoint Equation (refer to (CP-140).
Fb Source (CP-103)
Feedback Source (CP-103) identifies the source of the feedback signal. The Feedback signal is also used by some of
the Alarms as well as some of the Status Indications (e.g., Zero Speed). Feedback Source is ignored when RUN Loop
Mode (CP-220) is set to "Position Loop" (the Feedback signal defaults to "Frequency Input 2"). The feedback
sources are:
4 = Constant 2
3 = Analog Input 2
2 = Analog Input 1
1 = Frequency Input 2 (default)
V1 Source (CP-150)
V1 Source (CP-150) identifies the source of the signal (or constant) that can be used as the “V1” variable in the
Custom Setpoint Equation (refer to (CP-140). The V1 sources are:
6 = Frequency In 2
3 = Custom SP (default)
0 = the value of 0
5 = Analog In 2
2 = Analog In 1
4 = Constant 3
1 = Frequency In 1
V2 Source (CP-151)
V2 Source (CP-151) identifies the source of the signal (or constant) that can be used as the “V2” variable in the
Custom Setpoint Equation (refer to (CP-140). The V2 sources are:
6 = Frequency In 2
3 = Custom SP (default)
0 = the value of 0
5 = Analog In 2
2 = Analog In 1
4 = Constant 3
1 = Frequency In 1
V3 Source (CP-152)
V3 Source (CP-152) identifies the source of the signal (or constant) that can be used as the “V3” variable in the
Custom Setpoint Equation (refer to (CP-140). The V3 sources are:
6 = Frequency In 2
3 = Custom SP (default)
0 = the value of 0
5 = Analog In 2
2 = Analog In 1
4 = Constant 3
1 = Frequency In 1
V4 Source (CP-153)
V4 Source (CP-153) identifies the source of the signal (or constant) that can be used as the “V4” variable in the
Custom Setpoint Equation (refer to (CP-140). The V4 sources are:
6 = Frequency In 2
3 = Custom SP (default)
0 = the value of 0
5 - 54
5 = Analog In 2
2 = Analog In 1
4 = Constant 3
1 = Frequency In 1
The Custom screen (page 2).
(CP-141)
Enter a constant.
Press the Enter key.
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-142)
Enter a constant.
Press the Enter key.
CUSTOM
Constant 1
Constant 2
Constant 3
Constant 4
0
1.0
0
1.0
Fb Source
V1 Source
V2 Source
V3 Source
V4 Source
FI2
CustSP
Const2
Const3
Const4
(CP-143)
Enter a constant.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-144)
Enter a constant.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-103)
Enter feedback signal
source.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-150)
Enter a code.
Press the Enter key.
P2/3
(CP-151)
Enter a code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-152)
Enter a code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-153)
Enter a code.
Press the Enter key.
5 - 55
Custom
M1 (CP-154)
M1 (CP-154) is the slope constant that multiplies the “V1” variable in the Custom Setpoint (CP-140) equation.
B1 (CP-155)
B1 (CP-155) is the (y-intercept) constant that is added to the product of “M1xV1” in the Custom Setpoint (CP-140)
equation.
M2 (CP-156)
M2 (CP-156) is the (slope) constant that multiplies the “V2” variable in the Custom Setpoint (CP-140) equation.
B2 (CP-157)
B2 (CP-157) is the (y-intercept) constant that is added to the product of “M2xV2” in the Custom Setpoint (CP-140)
equation.
M3 (CP-158)
M3 (CP-158) is the (slope) constant that multiplies the “V3” variable in the Custom Setpoint (CP-140) equation.
B3 (CP-159)
B3 (CP-159) is the (y-intercept) constant that is added to the product of “M3xV3” in the Custom Setpoint (CP-140)
equation.
5 - 56
The Custom screen (page 3).
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-154)
Enter a constant.
Press the Enter key.
CUSTOM
(CP-155)
Enter a constant.
Press the Enter key.
M1
B1
1.0
0
M2
B2
1.0
0
M3
B3
1.0
0
(CP-157)
Enter a constant.
Press the Enter key.
P3/3
(CP-158)
Enter a constant.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-156)
Enter a constant.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-159)
Enter a constant.
Press the Enter key.
5 - 57
—NOTES—
5 - 58
DIRECT
Direct mode puts a voltage on the CO SIG (Control Signal) output. The Direct SP (CP-130) sets this voltage
directly. Setpoint Mode (CP-102) must be set to “3” (Direct) and the CX-1010 must be in “Run”. The RUN
Loop Mode (CP-220) is ignored in Direct Setpoint Mode.
The Max SP Drct (CP-131) and Min SP Drct (CP-132) determine the maximum and minimum value that can
be entered into Direct SP (CP-120). They define the range for both positive and negative values (i.e., they
are magnitude limits). Restrictions to the polarity of the output signal can be done with the CO mode (CP180) on page 3 of the Scaling / Standard Signals screen.
Direct Setpoint Mode is used to directly control the voltage on the CO SIG output , which connects to the
drive. It is typically used as a diagnostic tool, but could be as a a pot replacement for indirectly setting the
operating speed of the drive. When using Direct Setpoint Mode, the CO SIG voltage will be fixed at the
value you enter into the Direct SP (CP-130). It is an open loop operation and there is no attempt at
controlling the Feedback speed. There is only one format available to Direct mode operation. There are
separate ramp parameters associated with Direct Mode.
The defining equation for Direct Setpoint Mode:
CO Volts (MP-21) volts = Direct SP (CP-130) volts
The following pages display a graphic of the Direct screen as well as a synopsis of the Direct mode
parameters.
5 - 59
Direct
Direct SP (CP-130)
Direct Setpoint (CP-130) is used to output a constant value on the CO_SIG Analog Output (J3, pin 1) signal (while in
Run) when the Setpoint Mode (CP-102) is set to "3” (Direct Mode). The Direct Setpoint value is entered in Volts.
Min SP Drct (CP-132)
Minimum Setpoint Direct (CP-131) is the minimum value that will be allowed for the Direct Setpoint.
Max SP Drct (CP-131)
Maximum Setpoint Direct (CP-131) is the maximum value that will be allowed for the Direct Setpoint.
Fb Source (CP-103)
Feedback Source (CP-103) identifies the source of the feedback signal. The Feedback signal is also used by some of
the Alarms as well as some of the Status Indications (e.g., Zero Speed). Feedback Source is ignored when RUN Loop
Mode (CP-220) is set to "Position Loop" (the Feedback signal defaults to "Frequency Input 2"). The feedback
sources are:
2 = Analog Input 2
1 = Frequency Input 2 (default)
Fb EU/Tm (MP-39)
Feedback EU/Tm (MP-39) displays the feedback, in engineering units per time, that was scaled for the feedback
signal that was selected in Fb Source (CP-103). The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of
the decimal point in Master SP (CP-110).
FI2 Hz (MP-06)
Frequency Input 2 Hz (MP-06) displays the present frequency of the Frequency Input 2, in Hertz.
CO Volts (MP-21)
Control Output Volts (MP-21) displays the present value, in volts, of the CO_SIG Analog Output signal.
State (MP-50)
State (MP-50) displays the present operating state of the CX-1010 (see list below). Only one operating state may be
active at a time. To access either the “Run” or the “Jog” operating state, the “F-Stop”, “H-Stop” and “R-Stop” inputs
must be closed.
7 = Diagnostics
6 = Not used - reserved
5 = JOG (Rvs)
4 = JOG (Fwd)
3 = RUN
2 = H-Stop
1 = R-Stop
0 = F-Stop
5 - 60
The Direct screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / Setpoints <—
(CP-130)
Enter the desired volts.
Press the Enter key.
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-132)
Enter the minimum volts.
Press the Enter key.
DIRECT
Direct SP
Min SP Drct
Max SP Drct
Fb Source
Fb EU/Tm
FI2 Hz
CO Volts
State
(CP-131)
Enter the maximum volts.
Press the Enter key.
0.0
0.0
15.0
FI2
0
0
0.0
F-STOP
(CP-103)
Enter feedback signal
source.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-39)
Displays the feedback,
in EU/Tm.
(MP-06)
Displays the Frequency
Input 2 frequency, in Hertz.
P1/1
(MP-21)
Displays CO_SIG Analog
Output signal value in volts.
(MP- 50)
Displays the active operating
state of the CX-1010.
5 - 61
—NOTES—
5 - 62
ALARMS*RAMPS*LIMITS
Alarms*Ramps*Limits includes setting alarms, acceleration and deceleration ramps, various operating limits
and jog setpoint.
Caution: To avoid damage to your system, the CX-1010 must be calibrated and the motor drive set up before
you operate your system. Refer to Drive Setup / Calibration: Calibration.
The CX-1010 Alarms*Ramps*Limits parameters are found in the following screens:
• Alarms
• Run Ramps
• R-Stop/H-Stop Setup
• Jog Setpoint
• Direct Sp Ramps
• Limits
5 - 63
ALARMS
There are several monitored alarms built-in to the CX-1010. These alarms are included in the PLC BitMap and can be used together or separately to activate an output or any other function that is available to
the PLC. To customize the alarms for your system, modify the PLC program to include the alarm bit. In
the PLC, Fb@0Spd (Bit 44) is defaulted to DO-O, which functions as a indicator for a “stop” condition.
The PLC program defaults the MaxFB Spd (PLC Bit 48) to Digital Output 1 (DO-1) to serve as an OverSpeed indicator. The remaining alarms are not included in the default PLC program.
The PLC Bits that are influenced by the alarm Control Parameters are:
PLC
Bit Name
43 RR @ 0Spd
44 Fb @ 0 Spd
Description
Ramped Reference < Zero Speed (CP-270) FB EU/Tm
Fb EU/Tm <= Zero Speed (CP-270) FB EU/Tm DO-O
48 MaxFbSpd
49 MaxAclDcl
50 MtrNResp
51 MaxFI2Psn
Fb EU/Tm >= Max Fb Alm (CP-271) FB EU/Tm
FB Accel/Decel > Max Acl/Dcl (CP-272) (EU/Tm)/Sec
Motor Drive NOT responding for No Resp Time (CP-273)
FI2 Position >= Max FI2 Psn (CP-274) FB EU
Since the CX-1010 uses the Fb @ 0Spd (PLC Bit 44) for internal control, it is critical that you enter a
valid value for Zero Speed (CP-270). “F-Stop”, “H-Stop” and “R-Stop” use the Fb @ 0Spd (PLC Bit 44)
to determine when to force the Drive En (PLC Bit 41) to “0” (Off). If the feedback does not reach zero
speed as indicated by Fb @ 0Spd (PLC Bit 44) within 1/2 second, then the Drive En (PLC Bit 41) is reset
to “0” (Off).
The CX-1010 has an internal 1/2 second timer that functions with “R-Stop” “H-Stop” and “F-Stop”.
During “R-Stop” or “H-Stop” the timer engages only when the “R-Stop” or “H-Stop” ramp is completed.
However, during “F-Stop” the timer engages immediately. If the feedback slows to zero speed before 1/2
second expires, the Drive En (PLC Bit 41) will immediately reset to “0” for “R-Stop” and “F-Stop”. For
“H-Stop”, the Drive En bit will remain enabled if the feedback is from a quadrature encoder and if it is
supposed to stop with the loop closed.
Use Max Fb Alm (CP-271) to determine the state of the MaxFbSpd (PLC Bit 48). The CX-1010 sets
MaxFbSpd (PLC Bit 48) to “1” when Fb EU/Tm (MP-39) is greater than Max Fb Alm (CP-271).
Otherwise the CX-1010 resets MaxFbSpd (PLC Bit 48) to “0”.
The change in the feedback speed is constantly being compared to MaxAcl/Dcl (CP-272). If the
magnitude of the change in Feedback speed is greater than Max Acl/Dcl, then set the MaxAclDcl
(PLC Bit 49) to “1”. Otherwise the CX-1010 resets the bit to “0”.
If the CX-1010 is in “Run” and the CO Volts (CP-21) is greater than 1/8 the CO Max Volts (CP-181), the
Ramped Reference (MP-42) is greater than the Zero Speed (CP-270) and the feedback speed is less than
Zero Speed (CP-270) in excess of the time specified in NO Resp Time (CP-273), then the CX-1010 sets
MtrNResp (bit 50) to “1”. Otherwise, the CX-1010 resets MtrNResp (bit 50) to “0”.
Any number of problems is can be indicated when the CX-1010 sets MTrNResp (bit 50) to “1”. For
example, it can indicate that neither the drive nor the motor is responding to a nonzero voltage input when
the CX-1010 has a nonzero speed reference while in “Run”. If this occurs when the motor is turning, it
5 - 64
may indicate a loss of feedback. The encoder or encoder wiring could be at fault. If this occurs and
Fb EU/Tm (MP-39) displays a nonzero value, then check the feedback scaling and the value for Zero Speed
(CP-270). If the motor is not moving, the drive may not be enabled. Check the enable logic and wiring. If
the motor is not moving, it could also indicate that the CO SIG signal is not getting to the drive. Check the
CO SIG wiring. In addition, there could be physical restrictions to motion or there could be a malfunction in
the motor or the drive.
To further customize the alarms there are Control Parameters that you can use to make comparisons, which
are reflected in the PLC. The four Control Parameters that compare the value of a user-selected Monitor
Parameter to a user-entered Control Parameter value are:
Cmpr1 Val (CP-292)
Cmpr2 Val (CP-293)
Cmpr3 Val (CP-294)
Cmpr4 Val (CP-295)
There are also four Control Parameters that establish the type of comparison between the Monitor Parameter
and corresponding Control Parameter. These four Control Parameters are:
Cmpr1 Parm (CP-280)
Cmpr2 Parm (CP-281)
Cmpr3 Parm (CP-282)
Cmpr4 Parm (CP-283)
In addition, there are four Control Parameters that establish the constant value (or threshold) that acts as the
trigger point of comparison between the Monitor Parameter and corresponding comparison type. These four
Control Parameters are:
Cmpr1 Type (CP-286)
Cmpr2 Type (CP-287
Cmpr3 Type (CP-288)
Cmpr4 Type (CP-289)
Enter the parameter number of the Monitor Parameter that you need for comparison, into one of the four
“Cmprl Parm” Control Parameters listed above. Enter the comparison type into the corresponding “Cmpr1
Type ” parameter.
For a “less than” comparison, use the ‘>=’ compare type and use the compliment of the Cmpr Out PLC Bit in
your PLC program.
For a “less than” or “equal to” comparison, use the ‘>’ compare type with the NOT of the Cmpr PLC Bit in
your PLC program.
NOTE: The compare type also determines if the comparison is performed with the signed value or with the
magnitudes of the values (absolute values).
Enter the constant value (or threshold) that you want as the trigger point of the comparison into the
corresponding “Cmpr1 Val” parameter.
There are four PLC bits that establish the “truth” of the comparison between the three corresponding
parameters: Cmpr Parm, Cmpr1 Type and Cmpr Val. These four Control Parameters are:
Cmpr1 Out (Bit 56)
Cmpr2 Out (Bit 57)
Cmpr3 Out (Bit 58)
Cmpr4 Out (Bit 59)
The result of each comparison is reflected in the corresponding PLC Bit; “1” displayed in the corresponding
bit indicates that the result of the corresponding comparison is “true”. Otherwise, the bit is cleared (“0”).
5 - 65
Standard
Zero Speed (CP-270)
When the magnitude of the Fb EU/Tm (MP-39) is less than or equal to Zero Speed (CP-270), the Fb @ 0Spd bit (44)
in the PLC is set to “1”. This value, as well as the PLC Fb @ 0Spd bit condition, is used in other transparent internal
calculations that are based on feedback information.
Max Fb Alm (CP-271)
Maximum Feedback Alarm (CP-271) signals an over-speed condition. When the magnitude of the Fb EU/Tm
(MP-39) is greater than or equal to Maximum Feedback Alarm (CP-271), then the MaxFb Spd bit (48) in the PLC is
set to “1”. You can output this alarm for indication or action, or you can use the alarm logically in the PLC.
Max Acl/Dcl (CP-272)
When either the feedback acceleration or the deceleration is greater than or equal to Max Acl/Dcl
(CP-272), then the MacAclDcl bit (49) in the PLC is set to “1” . You can output this alarm for indication or action,
or you can use the alarm logically in the PLC.
NO Resp Time (CP-273)
When the CO Signal output signal is greater than 1/16 CO Max Volts (CP-181) and the Fb EU/Tm (MP-39) is less
than Zero Spd (CP-270) for longer than the value in No Resp Time (CP-273), then the MtrNResp bit (50) in the PLC
is set to “1”. If this scenario occurs, it is generally an indication that the feedback has been lost. It can also indicate
that the drive is not enabled (or faulted out), that the CO_SIG Output signal is not getting to the drive or that there
may be a physical obstruction preventing motion.
Max FI2 Psn (CP-274)
Maximum FI2 Position (CP-274) signals an over-travel condition. When the FI2 Position (MP-10) is greater than or
equal to a positive Max FI2 Psn (CP-274) or less than or equal to a negative Max FI2 Psn, then the MaxFI2Psn bit
(51) in the PLC is set to “1” .
EstMaxFb (MP-49)
Estimated Maximum Feedback (MP-49) displays the estimated maximum feedback in EU/Tm, which the CX-1010
calculates during the Kff adjustment, by referencing the CO Max Volts (CP-181), the CO Volts (MP-21) and the Fb
EU/Tm (MP-39 ) . Use Estimated Maximum Feedback (MP-49) to determine if the drive and CO_SIG are scaled
correctly.
5 - 66
The Alarms screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / Alarms <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-270)
Enter the EU/Tm.
Press the Enter key.
ALARMS
STANDARD
Zero Speed
Max Fb Alm
Max Acl/Dcl
NO Resp Time
Max F12 Psn
EstMaxFb
(CP-271)
Enter the EU/Tm.
Press the Enter key.
10.0
2000
2000
1.000
10
0
(CP-272)
Enter the EU/Tm/sec.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-273)
Enter the seconds.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-274)
Enter the EU.
Press the Enter key.
P1/3
(MP-49)
Displays the estimated
maximum RPM.
5 - 67
Custom
Cmpr1 Parm (CP-280)
Enter a Monitor Parameter code in Compare 1 Parameter (CP-280) that will act on the value in Cmpr1 Val (CP-292),
by using the comparison type that you entered in Cmp1 Type (CP-286). If the comparison that is established by these
three parameters is “true”, then the PLC sets the Cmpr1 Out bit (56) in the PLC to “1”, which can be used to trigger
a user defined indicator.
NOTE: See Appendices: Appendix C for the Monitor Parameters that are not available for the Compare 1
Parameter (CP-280).
Cmpr1 Type (CP-286)
Use Cmpr1 Type (CP-286) to establish the type of comparison (see list below) that will compare the Monitor Parameter that you entered in Cmpr1 Parm (CP-280) to the value that you entered in Cmpr1 Val (CP-292). If you require a
comparison that is not listed, then set the Cmpr1 Out bit in the PLC to “Ld Not”. This programs the comparison type
to become a “Not” statement For example, to program “Magnitude Less Than” (<) use “NOT” Magnitude greater
than or equal to (>=).
6 = ‘mag =’
if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr1 Parm = Cmpr1 Val, Cmpr1 Out = 1
5 = ‘mag >=’ if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr1 Parm >= Cmpr1 Val, Cmpr1 Out = 1
4 = ‘mag >’
if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr1 Parm > Cmpr1 Val, Cmpr1 Out = 1
3 = ‘=’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr1 Parm = Cmpr1 Val, Cmpr1 Out = 1
2 = ‘>=’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr1 Parm >= Cmpr1 Val, Cmpr1 Out = 1
1 = ‘>’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr1 Parm > Cmpr1 Val, Cmpr1 Out = 1
Cmpr1 Val (CP-292)
Enter a value in Cmpr1 Val (CP-292) that will be compared to the Monitor Parameter in Cmpr1 Parm (CP-280),
using the comparison type that you entered in Cmpr1 Type (CP-286). If the comparison that is established by these
three parameters is “true”, then the PLC sets the Cmpr1 Out bit (56) in the PLC to “1” .
Cmpr2 Parm (CP-281)
Enter a Monitor Parameter code in Compare 2 Parameter (CP-281) that will act on the value in Cmpr2 Val (CP-293),
by using the comparison type that you entered in Cmp2 Type (CP-287). If the comparison that is established by these
three parameters is “true”, then the PLC sets the Cmpr2 Out bit (57) in the PLC to “1”, which can be used to trigger
a user defined indicator.
NOTE: See Appendices: Appendix C for the Monitor Parameters that are not available for the Compare 2
Parameter (CP-281).
Cmpr2 Type (CP-287)
Use Cmpr2 Type (CP-287) to establish the type of comparison (see list below) that will compare the Monitor Parameter that you entered in Cmpr2 Parm, (CP-281) to the value that you entered in Cmpr2 Val (CP-293). If you require a
comparison that is not listed, then set the Cmpr2 Out bit in the PLC to “Ld Not”. This programs the comparison type
to become a “Not” statement For example, to program “Magnitude Less Than ” (<) use “NOT ” Magnitude greater
than or equal to (>=).
6 = ‘mag =’
if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr2 Parm) = Cmpr2 Val, Cmpr2 Out = 1
5 = ‘mag >=’ if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr2 Parm) >= Cmpr2 Val, Cmpr2 Out = 1
4 = ‘mag >’
if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr2 Parm) > Cmpr2 Val, Cmpr2 Out = 1
3 = ‘=’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr2 Parm) = Cmpr2 Val, Cmpr2 Out = 1
2 = ‘>=’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr2 Parm) >= Cmpr2 Val, Cmpr2 Out = 1
1 = ‘>’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr2 Parm) > Cmpr2 Val, Cmpr2 Out = 1
Cmpr2 Val (CP-293)
Enter a value in Cmpr2 Val (CP-293) that will compared to the Monitor Parameter in Cmpr2 Parm (CP-281), using
the comparison type that you entered in Cmpr2 Type (CP-287). If the comparison that is established by these three
parameters is “true”, then the PLC sets the Cmpr2 Out bit (57) in the PLC screen to “1”.
5 - 68
The Alarms / Custom screen (page 2).
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-280)
Enter a parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
ALARMS
CUSTOM
(CP-286)
Enter a code (1-6).
Press the Enter key.
Cmpr1 Parm
Cmpr1 Type
Cmpr1 Val
39
mag >
2000
Cmpr2 Parm
Cmpr2 Type
Cmpr2 Val
39
mag >=
0
(CP-292)
Enter a parameter value.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-281)
Enter a parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-287)
Enter a code (1-6).
Press the Enter key.
P2/3
(CP-293)
Enter a parameter value.
Press the Enter key.
5 - 69
Custom
Cmpr3 Parm (CP-282)
Enter a Monitor Parameter in Compare 3 Parameter (CP-282) that will act on the value in Cmpr3 Val (CP-294), by
using the comparison type that you entered in Cmp3 Type (CP-288). If the comparison that is established by these
three parameters is “true”, then the PLC sets the Cmpr3 Out bit (58) in the PLC to “1” , which can be used to trigger
a user defined indicator.
NOTE: See Appendices: Appendix C for the Monitor Parameters that are not available for the Compare 3
Parameter (CP-282).
Cmpr3 Type (CP-288)
Use Cmpr3 Type (CP-288) to establish the type of comparison (see list below) that will compare the Monitor Parameter that you entered in Cmpr3 Parm (CP-282) to the value that you entered in Cmpr3 Val (CP-294). If you require a
comparison that is not listed, then set the Cmpr3 Out bit in the PLC to “Ld Not”. This programs the comparison type
to become a “Not” statement For example, to program “Magnitude Less Than” (<) use “NOT” Magnitude greater
than or equal to(>=).
6 = ‘mag =’
if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr3 Parm) = Cmpr3 Val, Cmpr3 Out = 1
5 = ‘mag >=’ if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr3 Parm) >= Cmpr3 Val, Cmpr3 Out = 1
4 = ‘mag >’
if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr3 Parm) > Cmpr3 Val, Cmpr3 Out = 1
3 = ‘=’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr3 Parm) = Cmpr3 Val, Cmpr3 Out = 1
2 = ‘>=’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr3 Parm) >= Cmpr3 Val, Cmpr3 Out = 1
1 = ‘>’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr3 Parm) > Cmpr3 Val, Cmpr3 Out = 1
Cmpr3 Val (CP-294)
Enter a value in Cmpr3 Val (CP-294) that will be compared to the Monitor Parameter in Cmpr3 Parm (CP-282), using
the comparison type that you entered in Cmpr3 Type (CP-288). If the comparison that is established by these three
parameters is “true”, then the PLC sets the Cmpr3 Out bit (58) in the PLC to “1”.
Cmpr4 Parm (CP-283)
Enter a Monitor Parameter in Compare 4 Parameter (CP-283) that will act on the value in Cmpr4 Val (CP-295), by
using the comparison type that you entered in Cmpr4 Type (CP-289). If the comparison that is established by these
three parameters is “true”, then the PLC sets the Cmpr4 Out bit (59) in the PLC Programming screen to “1”, which
can be used to trigger a user defined indicator.
NOTE: See Appendices: Appendix C for the Monitor Parameters that are not available for the Compare 4
Parameter (CP-283).
Cmpr4 Type (CP-289)
Use Cmpr4 Type (CP-289) to establish the type of comparison (see list below) that will compare the Monitor Parameter that you entered in Cmpr4 Parm (CP-283) to the value that you entered in Cmpr4 Val (CP-295). If you require a
comparison that is not listed, then set the Cmpr4 Out bit in the PLC to “Ld Not”. This programs the comparison type
to become a “Not” statement For example, to program “Magnitude Less Then ” (<) use “NOT ” Magnitude greater
than or equal to (>=).
6 = ‘mag =’
if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr4 Parm) = Cmpr4 Val, Cmpr4 Out = 1
5 = ‘mag >=’ if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr4 Parm) >= Cmpr4 Val, Cmpr4 Out = 1
4 = ‘mag >’
if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr4 Parm) > Cmpr4 Val, Cmpr4 Out = 1
3 = ‘=’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr4 Parm) = Cmpr4 Val, Cmpr4 Out = 1
2 = ‘>=’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr4 Parm) >= Cmpr4 Val, Cmpr4 Out = 1
1 = ‘>’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr4 Parm) > Cmpr4 Val, Cmpr4 Out = 1
Cmpr4 Val (CP-295)
Enter a value in Cmpr4 Val (CP-295) that will be compared to the Monitor Parameter in Cmpr4 Parm (CP-283), using
the boundary type that you entered in Cmpr4 Type (CP-289). If the comparison that is established by these three
parameters is “true”, then the PLC sets the Cmpr4 Out bit (59) in the PLC to “1” .
5 - 70
The Alarms / Custom screen (page 3).
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-282)
Enter a parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
ALARMS
CUSTOM
(CP-288)
Enter a code (1-6).
Press the Enter key.
Cmpr3 Parm
Cmpr3 Type
Cmpr3 Val
44
mag >
20
Cmpr4 Parm
Cmpr4 Type
Cmpr4 Val
43
mag >
10
(CP-294)
Enter a parameter value.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-283)
Enter a parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-289)
Enter a code (1-6).
Press the Enter key.
P3/3
(CP-295)
Enter a parameter value.
Press the Enter key.
5 - 71
—NOTES—
5 - 72
RUN RAMPS
Since the ramp generator controls the rate of change of the velocity command, the velocity command is
referred to as the ramped reference speed. The ramped reference speed is displayed in Ramped Ref (MP-42).
When the Scaled Ref (MP-41) speed changes, the rate of change in the Ramped Ref (MP-42) speed is limited
by the acceleration and deceleration rates that you specify. You can specify the rates for “Run”,“ “H-Stop””,
“R-Stop” and “Jog” independently. Because the Direct Setpoint mode involves voltage rather than EU/Tm,
the ramps for the Direct Setpoint mode are specified separately from the other Setpoint modes. In addition,
since the Direct Setpoint mode controls the CO SIG directly, the Scaled Ref (MP-41) and the Ramped Ref
(MP-42) equal “0”.
Ramps may be used in each of the following situations:
1.
The application requires slow starting and stopping to prevent product damage.
2.
Minimize stress on your system during starting and stopping.
3.
Minimize the overshoot of the response to step changes in the Scaled Ref (MP-41).
4.
Filter out high frequency components of the Scaled Ref (MP-41) signal.
5.
Keep the drive out of current limit (saturation) and thus maintain the linear properties of the
drive. The control loop will perform better and operate more predictably.
Your drive's capacity should not be exceeded under normal operating loads. If you use acceleration rates in
excess of your drive’s potential, then overshoot can occur. However, if the Lead in follower applications
provides adequate ramps, you can set the Acl Tm RUN (CP-201) or Dcl Tm RUN (CP-203) to “0”or use
Ramp Thd (CP-255). The Ramp Thd (CP-255) allows the ramp for large changes in the Scaled Ref (MP-41)
and bypasses the ramp for small or gradual changes. The ramp generator can be stopped in progress or
bypassed through the PLC or by Cntrl Latch (CP-240).
Set the acceleration rate for the ramps by defining a reference speed for the ramps in Ref RUN Rmp (CP200). This reference speed is generally a convenient number for calculating the rates. Set the “Run” ramps
equal to a Master SP (CP-110) in order to specify the Setpoint's value in units of time. The acceleration rate
can also be entered directly in Acl Rate RUN (CP-202), although you must also enter a valid reference speed
in Ref RUN Rmp (CP-200). This reference speed is generally the operating speed. When you enter an
acceleration time in Acl Tm RUN (CP-201), the CX-1010 automatically calculates the acceleration rate.
Inversely, if you enter the acceleration rate in Acl Rt RUN (CP-202), the CX-1010 automatically calculates
the acceleration time. The deceleration time and deceleration rate operate in the same way. When you enter
a new reference speed, the CX-1010 automatically calculates the acceleration and deceleration times and
preserves the given rates. The acceleration rate is defined by:
acceleration rate = reference speed (EU/Tm)
acceleration time (Seconds)
Likewise, the deceleration rate is defined by:
deceleration rate = reference speed (EU/Tm)
deceleration time (Seconds)
5 - 73
Run Ramps
The Run Ramps parameters determine the acceleration and deceleration rates that are used during Master
Setpoint Mode, Follower Setpoint Mode and Custom SP Setpoint mode. The Ref RUN Rmp (CP-200) is the
reference speed in EU/Tm used to define the RUN ramps. Acl Tm RUN (CP-201) is the time it would take
to accelerate from “0” to the Ref RUN Rmp (CP-200) speed. The Acl Rt RUN (CP-202) is the acceleration
rate in EU/Tm. Dcl Tm RUN (CP-203) is the time it would take to decelerate from the reference speed to
“0” speed. The Dcl Rt RUN (CP-204) is the deceleration rate in EU/Tm. Note that there are separate
parameters that define the deceleration rates that are used for “H-Stop” and “R-Stop”. The Dcl Rt RUN is
used when the magnitude of the Scaled Reference speed is decreased.
Acl Tm RUN (CP-201)
Acceleration Time Run (CP-201) is the time, in seconds, that it takes to accelerate from “0” to the Ref RUN Ramp
(CP-20), while operating in the Master, Follower or Custom Setpoint Equation modes.
Acl Rt RUN (CP-202)
Acceleration Rate Run (CP-202) is the acceleration rate that is used (while in Run) for the Master, Follower and
Custom Setpoints when the magnitude of the Scaled Reference increases.
Dcl Tm RUN (CP-203)
Deceleration Time Run (CP-203) is the time in Seconds, that it takes to decelerate from Ref RUN Ramp (CP-200)
speed to “0”, while operating in the Master, Follower or Custom Setpoint Equation modes.
Dcl Rt RUN (CP-204)
Deceleration Rate Run (CP-204) is the deceleration rate that is used (while in Run) for the Master, Follower and
Custom Setpoints when the magnitude of the Scaled Reference decreases.
Ref RUN Rmp (CP-200)
The acceleration rate for the Master Mode, the Follower Mode and the Custom Setpoint Mode are determined by the
Acl Tm RUN (CP-201) and the Reference Run Ramp (CP-200). The deceleration rate (from a faster speed to a
slower speed) for the Master Mode, the Follower Mode and the Custom Setpoint Mode, are determined by the
Dcl Tm RUN (CP-203) and the Reference Run Ramp (CP-200).
Ramp Thd (CP-255)
When the difference between the Scaled Reference Speed (MP-41) and the Ramped Reference Speed (MP-42) is
greater than Ramp Threshold (CP-255), the ramp will work normally. When the difference between the Scaled
Reference Speed (MP-41) and the Ramped Reference Speed (MP-42) is less than or equal to Ramp Threshold
(CP-255), the ramp will be bypassed. This avoids ramp delays for small Lead changes but still allows a ramp for
large Lead or for large Master Setpoint changes.
5 - 74
The Run Ramps screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / Alarms*Ramps*Limits <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-201)
Enter the accel time (secs).
Press the Enter key.
RUN RAMPS
(CP-202)
Enter accel rate (EU/Tm).
Press the Enter key.
Acl Tm RUN
Acl Rt RUN
Dcl Tm RUN
Dcl Rt RUN
1.000
1000
1.000
1000
Ref RUN Rmp
Ramp Thd
1000
1
(CP-203)
Enter decel time (secs).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-204)
Enter the decel rate (EU/Tm).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-200)
Enter EU/Tm.
Press the Enter key.
P1/1
(CP-255)
Enter EU/Tm.
Press the Enter key.
5 - 75
R-STOP AND H-STOP SETUP
There are separate parameters that define the deceleration rate that is used for “R-Stop” and “H-Stop”.
However, Ref StopRmp (CP-210) functions as the reference speed for both. Dcl Tm Rstp (CP-211) is the
time it would take to decelerate from the Ref StopRmp speed to “0” for an “R-Stop”. Dcl Rt RStp (CP-212)
is the deceleration rate for “R-Stop”. Dcl Tm HStp (CP-213) is the time it would take to decelerate from the
Ref StopRmp speed to 0 for an “H-Stop”. Dcl Rt HStp (CP-214) is the deceleration rate for “H-Stop”.
Dcl Tm RStp (CP-211)
Deceleration Time R-Stop (CP-211) is the time, in seconds, that it takes to decelerate from the Ref StopRmp
(CP-210) speed to “0”, during “R-Stop”, while operating in “Jog”, Master Mode, Follower Mode or the Custom
Setpoint Equation Mode.
Dcl Rt RStp (CP-212)
Deceleration Rate R-Stop (CP-212) is the deceleration rate that is used for “R-Stop”, while operating in Jog, Master
Mode, Follower Mode or the Custom Setpoint Equation Mode.
Dec Tm Hstp (CP-213)
Deceleration Time R-Stop (CP-213) is the time, in seconds, that it takes to decelerate from the Ref StopRmp
(CP-210) speed to “0”, during “R-Stop”, while operating in “Jog”, Master Mode, Follower Mode or the Custom
Setpoint Equation Mode.
Dcl Rt HStp (CP-214)
Deceleration Rate R-Stop (CP-214) is the deceleration rate that is used for “H-Stop”, while operating in “Jog”,
Master Mode, Follower Mode or the Custom Setpoint Equation Mode.
Hstp LoopMode (CP-230)
Use R-Stop Loop Mode (CP-230) to select the control-loop type that will be used after coming to a stop in “H-Stop”.
3 = Position Loop
2 = Zero Error (ZE) Loop
1 = Velocity Mode Loop (default)
0 = Open Loop
Ref Stop Rmp (CP-210)
The deceleration rate that is used for “R-Stop” (Master Mode, Follower Mode or Custom Setpoint Mode), is
determined by the Dcl Tm RStp (CP-211) and the Reference Stop Ramp (CP-210). The deceleration rate that is used
for “H-Stop” (Master Mode, Follower Mode or Custom Setpoint Mode), is determined by the Dcl Tm HStp
(CP-213) and the Reference Stop Ramp (CP-210).
5 - 76
The R-Stop and H-Stop Setup screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / Alarms*Ramps*Limits <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-211)
Enter decel time (secs).
Press the Enter key.
R-STOP/H-STOP SETUP
Dcl Tm RStp
Dcl Rt RStp
1.000
1000
Dcl Tm HStp
Dcl Rt HStp
HStp LoopMode
1.000
1000
Vel
Ref StopRmp
1000
(CP-212)
Enter decel rate (EU/Tmsec).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-213)
Enter decel time (secs).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-214)
Enter decel rate (EU/Tm sec).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-230)
Enter a code (0-3).
Press the Enter key.
P1/1
(CP-210)
Enter a speed (EU/Tm)
Press the Enter key.
5 - 77
DIRECT SETPOINT RAMPS
Since the Direct Setpoint Mode is used to directly output a given voltage rather than command a speed, it
must have separate parameters to define the ‘voltage’ ramp. The Ref Drct Rmp (CP-1205) is the reference
voltage to define the Direct ramp. The Acl Tm Drct (CP-206) is the time it would take to increase the CO
SIG voltage from “0” volts to the Ref Drct Rmp voltage. The Dcl Tm Drct (CP-208) is the time it would
take to decrease the CO Volts from Ref Drct Rmp voltage to “0” volts.
Acl Tm Drct (CP-206)
Acceleration Time Direct (CP-206) is the time, in seconds, that it takes to accelerate from “0” to the Ref Direct
Ramp (CP-205) voltage, while operating in the Direct Mode.
Dcl Tm Drct (CP-208)
Deceleration Time Direct (CP-208) is time, in seconds, that it takes to decelerate from the Ref DRCT Ramp
(CP-205) voltage to “0” volts, while operating in the Direct Mode.
Ref Drct Rmp (CP-205)
The acceleration rate for the Direct Mode is determined by the Reference Direct Ramp (CP-205) and the Accel Time
Direct (CP-206). The deceleration rate for the Direct Mode, as well as for “H-Stop” (while operating in the Direct
Mode) is determined by Decel Time Direct (CP-208) and Ref Dirct Rmp (CP-205).
5 - 78
The Direct Setpoint screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / Alarms*Ramps*Limits <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-206)
Enter the accel time (secs).
Press the Enter key.
DIRECT SP RAMPS
Acl Tm Drct
Dcl Tm Drct
1.000
1.000
Ref Drct Rmp
10.0
(CP-208)
Enter decel time (secs).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-205)
Enter a voltage.
Press the Enter key.
P1/1
5 - 79
JOG SETUP
The JOG screen includes the parameters that are related to “Jog” operation. The Jog Setpoint as well as the
accel and decel rates can be set in this screen. The loop type selection for the “Jog” mode of operation is
also available on this screen. You can “Jog” in open loop mode, which uses Kff to generate the CO SIG
based on the desired Jog Setpoint You can also “Jog” in closed velocity loop which uses Kff and the PID
loop to generate the CO SIG based on the desired Jog Setpoint. The closed loop operation requires
Feedback, but should result in more accurate operating speed and better speed regulation.
There are also parameters to define the ramps used for “Jog”. The Jog SP (CP-215) in EU/Tm functions as
the reference speed. The Acl Tm Jog (CP-216) is the that time it will take to accelerate from “0” speed to
the Jog SP. The Acl Rt Jog (CP-217) is the acceleration rate for “Jog”. Dcl Tm Jog (CP-218) is the time it
should take to decelerate from the Jog SP to “0” speed. The Dcl Rt Jog (CP-219) is the deceleration rate
used when the Jog SP is changed to a lower value as well as when both the Jog-Forward and the Jog Reverse
Inputs are deactivated and the speed is decreased to “0” speed before the state is changed to “R-Stop”.
Jog SP (CP-215)
The Jog Setpoint (CP-215) is the speed, in EU/Tm, at which Jog ramps when it is activated. The Jog ramp rates are
referenced to this speed.
Jog Loop Mode (CP-221)
Jog Loop Mode (CP-221) identifies the type of control loop (see list below) that is used during Jog.
1=Velocity Loop *
0=Open Loop
Acl Tm Jog (CP-216)
Acceleration Time Jog (CP-216) is the time, in seconds, that it takes to accelerate from “0” to the Jog SP (CP-215).
Acl Rt Jog (CP-217)
Acceleration Rate Jog (CP-217) is the rate, in EU/Tm per second, that it takes to accelerate when Jog is activated.
Dcl Tm Jog (CP-218)
Deceleration Time Jog (CP-218) is the time, in seconds, that it takes to decelerate from Jog SP (CP-215) to “0”, when
the Jog Input is deactivated or when switching between “Jog Fwd” and “Jog Rvs”.
Dcl Rt Jog (CP-219)
Deceleration Rate Jog (CP-219) is the rate, in EU/Tm per second, that is used when the Jog Input is deactivated or
when switching between “Jog Fwd” and “Jog Rvs”.
5 - 80
The Jog Setup screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / Alarms*Ramps*Limits <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-215)
Enter the speed (EU/Tm).
Press the Enter key.
JOG SETUP
Jog SP
Jog Loop Mode
Acl Tm Jog
Acl Rt Jog
Dcl Tm Jog
Dcl Rt Jog
250
Vel
1.000
250
1.000
250
P1/1
(CP-221)
Enter a code (0-1)
Press the Enter key.
(CP-216)
Enter the accel time (secs).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-217)
Enter accel rate (EU/Tm sec).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-218)
Enter decel time (secs).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-219)
Enter decel rate (EU/Tm sec)
Press the Enter key.
5 - 81
LIMITS
The Limits screen includes the parameters that limit certain operating conditions. Some appear on other
screens that are more relevant to their function. The Max Spd Lmt (CP-250) and the Min Spd Lmt (CP-251)
limit the magnitude of the Scaled Reference speed to this range. If the Scaled Reference speed calls for a
speed less than the Min Spd Lmt, the Scaled Reference is immediately set equal to the Min Spd Lmt.
However, the Ramped Reference speed will proceed through the ramp.
Max Spd Lmt (CP-250)
The Scaled Reference (CP-41) is limited to the positive and negative Maximum Speed Limit (CP-250) while operating in "Run".
Min Spd Lmt (CP-251)
The Scaled Reference (CP-41) is limited to the positive and negative Minimum Speed Limit (CP-251) while operating in "Run". The ramp accelerates to the Minimum Speed Limit (CP-251) if the reference speed is less than the
Minimum Speed Limit .
Trim Authority (CP-258)
The trim contribution to the DAC output is limited to positive and negative Trim Authority (CP-258).
Integral Limit (CP-259)
The integral contribution to the trim term is limited to the positive and negative Integral Limit (CP-259). Integral
Limit (CP-259) can decrease the effects of integral windup or it can limit the maximum effect of the integral term.
ZE Limit (CP-253)
ZE Limit (CP-253) is the maximum authority for the zero error term. The excess speed that is required to recover
large position errors is limited to this value. Enter the EU's that are required to recover the Time Base (CP-109)
PsnErr+ (CP-260)
The maximum positive value of the accumulated position error is limited to Positive Position Error (CP-260). Use
Positive Position Error (CP-260) when the Lead is in motion, but the Follower is stopped since the Follower does not
have to recover its former position relative to the lead, the Positive Position Error (CP-260) can be used to limit the
amount of position error that accumulates while the lead continues to move. In Positive Position Error (CP-260), the
follower lags behind the lead when both are moving in the positive direction.
PsnErr- (CP-261)
The maximum negative value of the accumulated position error is limited to Negative Position Error (CP-261). In
Negative Position Error (CP-261), the follower is ahead of the lead when both are moving in the positive direction.
If both are moving in the negative direction in Negative Position Error (CP-261), the follower lags behind the lead.
Zero Speed (CP-270)
When the magnitude of the Fb EU/Tm (MP-39) is less than Zero Speed (CP-270), the Fb @ 0Spd bit (44) in the PLC
is set to “1”. This value, as well as the PLC Fb @ 0Spd bit condition, is used in other transparent internal calculations
that are based on feedback information.
5 - 82
The Limits screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / Alarms*Ramps*Limits <—
(CP-250)
Enter the EU/Tm.
Press the Enter key.
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-251)
Enter the EU/Tm.
Press the Enter key.
LIMITS
Max Spd Lmt
Min Spd Lmt
Trim Authority
Integral Limit
ZE Limit
PsnErr+
PsnErrZero Speed
2000
0
8191
8191
2000
1.0
1.0
10.0
P1/1
(CP-258)
Enter the Bits.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-259)
Enter the Bits.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-253)
Enter the EU/Tm.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-260)
Enter the EU.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-261)
Enter the EU.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-270)
Enter the EU/Tm.
Press the Enter key.
5 - 83
—NOTES—
5 - 84
TUNING
Tuning includes setting the PID and Feedforward tuning parameters.
Caution: To avoid damage to your system, the CX-1010 must be calibrated and the motor drive set up before
you operate your system. Refer to Drive Setup / Calibration: Calibration.
The CX-1010 Tuning parameters are found in the following screens:
• Velocity Loop
• Velocity Loop/ZE
• Position Loop
• Feedforward
• Related Items
5 - 85
—NOTES—
5 - 86
Tuning
Use the tuning screens to determine the parameter values that are related to the Control Loop and the
Feedforward. The main objective in tuning is to maintain stability under the entire range of operating
conditions. In addition, you may have specific requirements for your system's response to load changes or
to Setpoint changes. There are also tuning parameters that determine the proper modes of operation. These
parameters deal with the position data and signal conditioning.
Use the Drive Type (CP-222) to identify your drive as either a velocity mode drive or a torque mode drive.
Use the RUN Loop Mode (CP-220) to determine the Control Loop structure that is used during Run (either
closed or open loop). Use the Jog Loop Mode (CP-221) to determine the Control Loop structure that is used
during Jog. Use the HStp LoopMode (CP-230) to determine the Control Loop structure that is used during
“H-Stop”.
The Control Loop has three closed loop structures and one open loop structure. The closed loop structures
are: Velocity Loop, Position Loop, and Zero Error Loop. The Zero Error Loop has a subcategory called
Zero Error Hold (ZE Hld), which is only used during “H-Stop”. The Position Loop has a subcategory called
Position Hold (Psn Hld), which is only used during “H-Stop”.
Using the Closed Loop Structures:
Use Velocity Loop to control the velocity of the feedback. Velocity Loop is used for the majority of
applications. It must be used for the Custom Setpoint, the Master Setpoint mode, the Follower plus Offset
and the Follower Setpoint mode (with the Lead something other than FI1). It must be used when the
Feedback is not FI2. The Velocity Loop parameters are Kp VL (CP-225), Ki VL (CP-226), Kd VL
(CP-227).
Use the Position Loop (single loop ) to control the position of the feedback (FI2) relative to the after-ratio
position of the Lead (FI1). This works only in follower mode with FI2 as Feedback and FI1 as the Lead
frequency and position. The Position Loop parameters are Kp PL (CP-235), Ki PL (CP-236), Kd PL
(CP-237). The decision to use the Position Loop depends on the application. The Position Loop allows
abrupt recovery. If there is no compelling reason to use the Position Loop, try the Zero Error Loop first and
determine if it will provide adequate position control.
Use the Zero Error Loop to control the position of the feedback (FI2) relative to the after-ratio position of
the Lead (FI1). Zero Error Loop is a dual (2) loop structure; the position loop is added as an outer loop to
the velocity loop. Zero Error Loop is only used in the Follower mode with FI2 as Feedback and FI1 as the
lead frequency and position. The operating speed is increased when the follower lags behind the lead or is
decreased when the follower leads the lead. The velocity loop (zero error) parameters are Kp VL (CP-225),
Ki VL (CP-226), Kd VL (CP-227). The position loop (zero error) parameters are Kp ZE (CP-229) and ZE
Limit (CP-253). The integral term of the Velocity Loop should be used (Ki VL not equal to “0”) to
guarantee a zero position error. The position error is multiplied by Kp ZE (CP-229) to determine how much
faster (or slower) the operating speed must be modified. Increasing the Kp ZE will more greatly effect the
over-speed or under-speed and therefore reduce the position error more quickly. A value that is too large
will cause instability. The ZE Limit (CP-253) is used to limit the amount of over-speed or under-speed the
Zero Error Position Loop can request. The units are in EU/Tm.
The decision to use the Zero Error Loop depends on the application. In general, the Zero Error Loop should
be used when the rate of convergence to zero position error needs to be controlled. It may be necessary to
use the zero error structure with torque mode drives, in effect closing the Velocity Loop in the CX-1010 to
provide damping action. There may be some processes where an additional Velocity Loop will cause
instability. In this case, the Zero Error Loop may not be used.
5 - 87
The closed loop structures are a type of PID Loop; they employ the standard Proportional plus Derivative
plus Integral (PID) algorithm. Different configurations of the PID are used, depending on the Drive Type
(CP-222) and the loop mode: RUN Loop Mode (CP-220), Jog Loop Mode (CP-221), HStp Mode (CP-230).
In a closed loop, the feedback is used to generate the CO SIG output which in turn causes the feedback to
respond. The PID terms operate on the error, either velocity or position. In the case of the Velocity Loop, the
error is the difference between the ramped reference speed (MP-42) and the feedback speed in EU/Tm; Fb
EU/Tm (MP-39). In the case of the Position Loop, the error is the difference between the lead position
(multiplied by the ratio) and the feedback position in counts (edges if x4 Quad, pulses if x1 non-quad).
The Proportional term is the result of the error multiplied by the Kp VL (CP-225) or Kp PL (CP-235)
constant. This is sometimes referred to as the ‘gain’ term. Increasing the proportional constant, Kp VL
(CP-225) should result in a faster response and a smaller error. However, a value that is too large may cause
instability. The entered value has a logarithmic influence. If you add 7 to your entered value, you would in
effect increase the gain by a factor of 2.
The Integral term is the accumulated sum of the error times the Ki VL (CP-226) or Ki PL (CP-236) constant.
Integral is used to ensure zero error in the steady state - constant speed operation. Increasing the integral
constant, Ki VL (CP-226), should result in a faster convergence to “0” error. However, you may have to
compromise between the convergence rate and overshoot in the response. A value that is too large may cause
instability.
The derivative term is the difference between the current error and the previous error times the Kd VL
(CP-227) or Kd PL (CP-237) constant. The derivative term is used to damp out overshoot in the response.
Its influence is limited and is dependent on the values for Kp VL and Ki VL (Kp PL and Ki PL). A value that
is too large may cause instability.
The Integral term is added to the Proportional. The Derivative term is added to the result to form the ‘Trim’.
The ‘Trim’ is added to the Feedforward term to produce the CO SIG output. If the Feedforward term is
accurate, the Trim Term (MP-47) should be near “0”. In general, this is the desired operation, but there may
be reasons to use an inaccurate Kff (CP-224) value.
Using the Open Loop Structure:
You can also run in Open Loop mode. This mode does not act on the error. In Open Loop mode, the CO SIG
output is based entirely on the Feedforward.
Additional Parameters that Affect the Loop Operation:
Ramp Thd (CP-255) is the threshold that defines the level which the difference between the Scaled
Reference speed and the Ramped Reference speed must exceed for the ramp to function as normal. If the
difference is less than Ramp Thd, then the ramp is bypassed and the Ramped Reference speed is set equal to
the new Scaled Reference speed. Use Ramp Thd to avoid ramp delays for small changes in the lead, but still
ramp for large changes (e.g. start-up).
Deriv Thd VL (CP-228) and Deriv Thd PL (CP-238) are the thresholds that define the level at which the
change in the error (velocity and position respectively) must exceed for the derivative to operate. If the
change in the error is less than the threshold, then set the derivative term has no effect. The CX-1010 will
ignore low-level noise while acting on large signal changes.
If a signal exhibits a good deal of noise (high-frequency low-level fluctuation), you can introduce a low-pass
filter to smooth the signal prior to its use in the control algorithms. Use Signal Filter Select (CP-248) to
select the signal. Use Signal Fltr Tau (CP-249) to set the time constant of the low-pass filter (5 Milliseconds
to 50 Milliseconds).
5 - 88
Tuning the Closed Loop Structures:
To control the response to load disturbances, simulate conditions by changing operating speeds with the
ramps disabled (set to minimum accel/decel time) or set Kff (CP-224) to “0” To control the response to
changes in the Setpoint/operating speed, use the ramps and Kff (CP-224). If you can not use the lead during
the tuning procedure, then temporarily set the ramps to the accel/decel time that the lead would provide.
Refer to the following sections to tune the (1) Velocity Loop, (2) Position Loop and (3) Zero Error Loop.
(1) Tuning the Velocity Loop:
If your system can withstand occilation, then use the following procedure (Part A), If your system can not
withstand occilation, the go to “Part B” of Tuning the Velocity Loop
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
DANGER
When you send the drive into oscillations, the system
may react with abrupt or violent operation.
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
Part A / Tuning with Oscillations:
Go to the MAIN MENU.
Go to TUNING \ VELOCITY LOOP\ page 2.
Enter “1” (Vel) in RUN Loop Mode (CP-220).
Go to page 1.
Enter “0” in Ki VL (CP-226) and Kd VL (CP-227).
Enter “100” in Kp VL (CP-225) if your maximum operating speed in less than 8000 EU/Tm.
Enter “50” in Kp VL (CP-225) if the maximum speed is greater than 8000 EU/Tm.
Use the Code key and enter “102” (Setpoint Mode). Scroll to “Mstr” (Master Mode).
Use the Code key and enter “110” (Master SP). Enter a normal operating speed (EU/Tm).
Enter “Run” by activating the Run input.
Go to Kp VL (CP-225) and use the increment key to slowly increment Kp VL until oscillations begin.
Use the decrement key to decrease the Kp VL (CP-225) value until the oscillations stop.
Subtract 20 from this value and enter the new value in Kp VL (CP-225).
Enter “50” in Ki VL (CP-226) and increment Ki VL until oscillations begin.
Decrease the Ki VL (CP-226) value until the oscillations stop.
Subtract 10 from this value and enter the new value in Ki VL (CP-226). The operation should be stable, with
satisfactory response.
Use the Code key and enter “110” (Master SP).
Change the Master SP (CP-110) from a low speed to a high speed.
Observe the Scaled Fb (MP-40) or Fb EU/Tm (MP-39) to see if there is unacceptable overshoot.
Either decrease Ki VL (CP-226) or increase Kd VL (CP-227) to decrease the overshoot. However, using Kd
VL (CP-227) can introduce a jittery operation at constant speed. You may not be able to completely
eliminate the overshoot.
If you have an auxiliary analog card, you can assign the Fb EU/Tm (CP-39) to the Analog Output and
observe the response to step changes with an oscilloscope.
Part B / Tuning without Oscillations:
Put the CX-1010 into either “F-Stop” or “R-Stop”.
Enter “50” in Kp VL (CP-225)
Enter “50 ” in Ki VL (CP-226).
Use the Code key and enter “102” (Setpoint Mode). Scroll to “Mstr” (Master Mode).
5 - 89
Use the Code key and enter “110” (Master SP). Enter a Master SP.
Use the Code key and enter “39” (Fb EU/Tm).
Put the CX-1010 in “Run”
Observe the Fb EU/Tm (CP-39) as it matches the Master SP (CP-110).
If there is excessive overshoot (the Fb EU/Tm goes beyond the Master SP), then decrease Ki VL (CP-226).
If there is minimal overshoot, but it takes a long time for the Fb EU/Tm to converge to the Master SP, then
increase Ki VL (CP-226) by 10.
Put the CX-1010 into either “F-Stop” or “R-Stop”.
Put the CX-1010 into “Run” and observe the overshoot and convergence rate.
Increase Kp VL by 10 (CP-225).
Repeat this procedure until the convergence rate is acceptable or until oscillations start.
If oscillations occur, back off Ki VL (CP-226) by 10 and then back off Kp VL (CP-225) by 10. This may not
result in optimum performance, however, it should stabilize the system.
(2) Tuning the Position Loop:
Go to the MAIN MENU.
Go to TUNING \ POSITION LOOP\ page 2.
Set PsnErr+ (CP-260) and PsnErr- (CP-261) to the maximum position that you want the CX-1010 to make
up if the Follower should fall behind.
Use the Code key and enter “268” (FI1PsnRo). FI1PsnRO (CP-268) should be larger than PsnErr+ (CP260).
Use the Code key and enter “269” (FI2PsnRo). FI2PsnRO (CP-269) should be larger than PsnErr- (CP261).
If there is no gear reduction between the motor and the encoder:
enter the encoder Pulse per Revolution (PPR) in PPR Mtr (CP-239).
If there is not a one to one correspondence between motor revolutions and encoder Pulse per Revolution
(PPR) then calculate the number of encoder Pulse per Revolution (PPR) that will occur for every
revolution of the motor:
Enter the number of encoder Pulse per Revolution (PPR) that occur for every revolution of the motor in
PPR Mtr (CP-239).
Go to the MAIN MENU.
Go to TUNING \ POSITION LOOP\ page 1.
Enter “50” in Kp PL (CP-235)
Enter “0” in Ki PL (CP-236).
Enter “0” in Kd PL (CP-237).
Use the Code key and enter “102” (Setpoint Mode). Enter “Fol” for Follower.
Put the CX-1010 in “Run”
Start the Lead moving.
The Feedback should follow the Lead speed however, it may lag behind in position.
Monitor the position error in PsnErr (MP-34).
The resolution given for PsnErr is set by the resolution of EU FI2 (CP-168).
Increase Kp PL (CP-235) until the PsnErr (CP-34) begins to converge on “0”.
Continue to Increase Kp PL (CP-235) until the error either reaches “0” or oscillations (instability) occurs.
If instability is reached before the error reaches “0”, then quickly decrease Kp PL (CP-235) until the
oscillations cease and then subtract an additional “5” .
5 - 90
Enter “50” in Ki PL (CP-236).
Increase Ki PL (CP-236) until the error is reduced to “0”.
Stop the Lead and then start it again
Observe the rate at which the position error converges on “0”.
If the convergence is too slow, increase Ki PL (CP-236) and try again.
Continue until the convergence and overshoot is acceptable.
You can also use Kd PL (CP-237) to decrease the overshoot, however, it may not be possible to completely
eliminate the overshoot.
If the response is too abrupt, use Trim Authority (CP-258) or Integral Limit (CP-259.
(3) Tuning the Zero Error Loop:
Tune the Velocity Loop (see Tuning the Velocity Loop)
Go to the MAIN MENU.
Go to TUNING \ POSITION LOOP\ page 2.
Set PsnErr+ (CP-260) and PsnErr- (CP-261) to the maximum position that you want the CX-1010 to make
up if the Follower should fall behind.
Use the Code key and enter “268” (FI1PsnRo). FI1PsnRO (CP-268) should be larger than PsnErr+(CP260).
Use the Code key and enter “269” (FI2PsnRo). FI2PsnRO (CP-269) should be larger than PsnErr- (CP261).
If there is no gear reduction between the motor and the encoder:
Enter the encoder Pulse per Revolution (PPR) in PPR Mtr (CP-239).
If there is not a one to one correspondence between motor revolutions and encoder Pulse per Revolution
(PPR) then calculate the number of encoder Pulse per Revolution (PPR) that will occur for every
revolution of the motor:
Enter the number of encoder Pulse per Revolution (PPR) that occur for every revolution of the motor in
PPR Mtr (CP-239).
Go to the MAIN MENU.
Go to TUNING \ VELOCITY LOOP/ZE\ page 1.
Enter “50” in Kp ZE (CP-229)
Use the Code key and enter “102” (Setpoint Mode). Enter “Fol” for Follower.
Put the CX-1010 in “Run”
Start the Lead moving.
The Feedback should follow the Lead speed however, it may lag behind in position.
Monitor the position error in PsnErr (MP-34).
The resolution given for PsnErr is set by the resolution of EU FI2 (CP-168).
Increase Kp ZE (CP-229) until the PsnErr (CP-34) begins to converge on “0”.
Stop the Lead and then start it again
If the convergence is too slow, increase Kp ZE (CP-239) and try again.
Continue until the convergence and overshoot is acceptable.
If large errors accumulate (with large values in PsnErr+ and PsnErr-), then use ZE Limit (CP-253) to control
the rate at which the position is recovered.
Go to page 2 of Velocity Loop/ZE.
The ZE Limit (CP-253) limits the amount of speed that the CX-1010 will command in excess of the Lead to
compensate for large position errors. The effect is equivalent to specifying the number of EU’s to make
up in the given Time Base (CP-109).
5 - 91
Using the Feedforward:
The Feedforward provides the majority of the CO SIG output and the PID adds a small amount of trim . The
combination produces the CO SIG output for the operating speed at which you want your system to run. The
value of the signal (usually Ramped Reference) in Ff Source (CP-106) is multiplied by Kff (CP-224) in order
to produce the feedforward term. The feedforward term is proportional to the desired operating speed and is
only used in conjunction with velocity mode drives. The Kff (CP-224) constant is given in terms of volts/
(1000 EU/Tm).
Kff (CP-224) is recalculated by the CX-1010 at each time interval that has been entered in KffAdjUpdt (CP242). Kff (CP-224) is used for closed loop and open loop operation.
Kff Auto EN (CP-245) enables or disables the Kff and allows the Kff to be automatically adjusted by the
CX-1010.
5 - 92
Automatic Feedforward Adjustment:
Go to the MAIN MENU.
Go to TUNING \ FEEDFORWARD\ page 1.
Enter MaxFb (CP-233).
Put the CX-1010 in either “Run” or “Jog”
Enter “1” (enabled) in Kff Auto En (CP-244).
Enter a time interval in KffAdjUpdt (CP-242).
The CX-1010 will calculate the Kff CL according the time interval in KffAdjUpdt (CP-242).
5 - 93
VELOCITY LOOP
The Velocity Loop screen includes parameters for the loop-type selection, the PID parameters for the
Velocity Loop (Kp VL,Ki VL,Kd), and four tuning monitor parameters
CNTRL LOOP (MP-45)
Control Loop (MP-45) displays the type of loop (see list below) that is in current use. Only one type of loop can be
active at a time.
5 = Psn Hld (“H-Stop” Position Loop)
4 = ZE Hld (“H-Stop” ZE Position Loop)
3 = Psn (Position Loop)
2 = ZE Psn (Zero Error Loop)
1 = Vel (Velocity Loop)
0 = OL (Open Loop)
KP VL (CP-225)
Kp Velocity Loop (CP-225) is the proportional gain constant for the PID velocity loop. An increase in Kp VL
(CP-225) creates a quicker response and a smaller error. However, a value that is too large will cause instability. If
the integral term is used, (i.e., Ki VL not equal to zero) then a nonzero Kp VL can actually improve the loop
response and decrease the overshoot to some extent.
KI VL (CP-226)
Ki Velocity Loop (CP-226) is the Integral constant for the PID velocity loop. Integral action provides for zero
steady state error. Increase Ki VL (CP-226) for a faster convergence to zero error. However, a value that is too
large will cause instability.
KD VL (CP-227)
Kd Velocity Loop (CP-227) is the derivative constant for the PID velocity loop. Derivative action attempts to damp
out overshoot. Its effect is highly dependent on Kp VL and Ki VL, but, generally, too large a value causes instability
Trim Out (MP-47)
Trim Out (MP-47) displays the value of the output of the PID compensator. Trim Out is displayed in CO DAC bits.
CO BITS (MP-20)
Control Output Bits (MP-20) displays the present value, in DAC bits, of the CO_SIG Analog Output signal.
RAMPED REF (MP-42)
Ramped Reference (MP-42) displays the speed command, in feedback Engineering Units per Time. This is the
output of the ramp calculations. When the ramp has been completed, the Ramped Reference (MP-42) should equal
the Scaled Reference (MP-41).
RR ERROR (MP-44)
Ramped Reference Error (CP-44) displays the speed error in engineering units per time. This is the Ramped Reference (MP-42) minus the Fb EU/Tm (MP39). The Ramped Reference is the current speed command.
5 - 94
The Velocity Loop screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / Tuning <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(MP-45)
Displays the type of loop
that is active.
(CP-225)
Enter the Kp constant.
Press the Enter key.
VELOCITY LOOP
Cntrl Loop
Kp VL
Ki VL
Kd VL
OL
100
100
0
Trim Out
CO Bits
Ramped Ref
RR Error
0
-67
0
0
P1/2
(CP-226)
Enter the Ki constant.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-227)
Enter the Kd constant.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-47)
Displays the value of the
PID compensator output.
(MP-20)
Displays CO_SIG Analog
Output signal value in
DAC bits.
(MP-42)
Displays the speed
command, in feedback
EU/Tm.
(MP-44)
Displays the speed error
in EU/Tm.
5 - 95
Velocity Loop
Kff Auto En (CP-244)
Kff Automatic Enable (CP-244) enables the CX-1010 automatic adjustment of Kff (CP-224) at the specified KffAdjUpdt
interval (CP-242) in “Run” or “Jog” with the loop closed.
1 = ON = Enabled
0 = OFF = Disabled (default)
RUN Loop Mode (CP-220)
RUN Loop Mode (CP-220) identifies the type of control loop (see list below) that is used during Run.
3=Position Loop
2=ZE Loop (Psn + Vel)
1=Velocity Loop *
0=Open Loop
Trim Authority (CP-258)
The trim contribution to the DAC output is limited to positive and negative Trim Authority (CP-258).
Integral Limit (CP-259)
The integral contribution to the trim term is limited to the positive and negative Integral Limit (CP-259). Integral
Limit (CP-259) can decrease the effects of integral windup or it can limit the maximum effect of the integral term.
Deriv Thd VL (CP-228)
Derivative Threshold Velocity Loop (CP-228) is the minimum speed error that is required before the derivative term
in the PID velocity algorithm gains influence. Increase the derivative threshold to prevent the derivative term from
acting on either signal noise from the Lead.
5 - 96
The Velocity Loop screen (page 2).
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-244)
Enter a code (0-1)
Press the Enter key.
VELOCITY LOOP
Kff Auto En
RUN Loop Mode
Trim Authority
Integral Limit
Deriv Thd VL
OFF
Vel
8191
8191
0
(CP-220)
Enter a code (0-3)
Press the Enter key.
(CP-258)
Enter the Bits.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-259)
Enter the Bits.
Press the Enter key.
P2/2
(CP-228)
Enter the constant.
Press the Enter key.
5 - 97
VELOCITY LOOP / ZE
The Velocity Loop / ZE screen includes the relevant parameters for the zero error loop.
CNTRL LOOP (MP-45)
Control Loop (MP-45) displays the type of loop (see list below) that is in current use. Only one type of loop can be
active at a time.
5 = Psn Hld (“H-Stop” Position Loop)
4 = ZE Hld (“H-Stop” ZE Position Loop)
3 = Psn (Position Loop)
2 = ZE Psn (Zero Error Loop)
1 = Vel (Velocity Loop)
0 = OL (Open Loop)
KP VL (CP-225)
Kp Velocity Loop (CP-225) is the proportional gain constant for the PID velocity loop. An increase in Kp VL (CP225) creates a quicker response and a smaller error. However, a value that is too large will cause instability. If the
integral term is used, (i.e., Ki VL not equal to zero) then a nonzero Kp VL can actually improve the loop response and
decrease the overshoot to some extent.
KI VL (CP-226)
Ki Velocity Loop (CP-226) is the Integral constant for the PID velocity loop. Integral action provides for zero steady
state error. Increase Ki VL (CP-226) for a faster convergence to zero error. However, a value that is too large will
cause instability.
KD VL (CP-227)
Kd Velocity Loop (CP-227) is the derivative constant for the PID velocity loop. Derivative action attempts to damp
out overshoot. Its effect is highly dependent on Kp VL and Ki VL, but, generally, too large a value causes instability.
Kp ZE (CP-229)
Kp ZE (CP-229) is the proportional gain constant that is used for the zero error loop. Increase the value to reduce the
time that is required to converge to zero position error. A large value can cause instability.
Trim Out (MP-47)
Trim Out (MP-47) displays the value of the output of the PID compensator. Trim Out is displayed in CO DAC bits.
CO BITS (MP-20)
Control Output Bits (MP-20) displays the present value, in DAC bits, of the CO_SIG Analog Output signal.
RAMPED REF (MP-42)
Ramped Reference (MP-42) displays the speed command, in feedback Engineering Units per Time. This is the output
of the ramp calculations. When the ramp has been completed, the Ramped Reference (MP-42) should equal the
Scaled Reference (MP-41).
RR ERROR (MP-44)
Ramped Reference Error (CP-44) displays the speed error in engineering units per time. This is the Ramped Reference (MP-42) minus the Fb EU/Tm (MP39). The Ramped Reference is the current speed command.
PsnErr (MP-34)
Position Error (MP-34) displays the value, in engineering units, of the accumulated position error between the Lead
(FI1) and the Feedback (FI2) input signals. The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of the
decimal point in EU FI2 (CP-168).
5 - 98
The Velocity Loop / ZE screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / Tuning <—
(MP-45)
Displays the type of loop
that is active.
(CP-225)
Enter the KD constant.
Press the Enter key.
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-226)
Enter the Ki VL constant.
Press the Enter key.
VELOCITY LOOP/ZE
Cntrl Loop
Kp VL
Ki VL
Kd VL
Kp ZE
Trim Out
CO Bits
Ramped Ref
RR Error
PsnErr
OL
100
100
0
100
0
-67
0
0
0.0
(CP-227)
Enter the Kd constant.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-229)
Enter the constant.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-47)
Displays the value of the
PID compensator output.
(MP-20)
Displays CO_SIG Analog
Output signal value in
DAC bits.
P1/2
(MP-42)
Displays the speed
command, in feedback
EU/Tm.
(MP-44)
Displays the speed error
in EU/Tm.
(MP-34)
Displays the accumulated
position error in E.U.
5 - 99
Velocity Loop / ZE
Kff Auto En (CP-244)
Kff Automatic Enable (CP-244) enables the CX-1010 automatic adjustment of Kff (CP-224) at the specified
KffAdjUpdt interval (CP-242) in “Run” or “Jog” with the loop closed.
1 = ON = Enabled
0 = OFF = Disabled (default)
RUN Loop Mode (CP-220)
RUN Loop Mode (CP-220) identifies the type of control loop (see list below) that is used during Run.
3=Position Loop
2=ZE Loop (Psn + Vel)
1=Velocity Loop *
0=Open Loop
ZE Limit (CP-253)
ZE Limit (CP-253) is the maximum authority for the zero error term. The excess speed that is required to recover
large position errors is limited to this value. Enter the EU's that are required to recover the Time Base (CP-109).
Trim Authority (CP-258)
The trim contribution to the DAC output is limited to positive and negative Trim Authority (CP-258).
Integral Limit (CP-259)
The integral contribution to the trim term is limited to the positive and negative Integral Limit (CP-259). Integral
Limit (CP-259) can decrease the effects of integral windup or it can limit the maximum effect of the integral term.
Deriv Thd VL (CP-228)
Derivative Threshold Velocity Loop (CP-228) is the minimum speed error that is required before the derivative term
in the PID velocity algorithm gains influence. Increase the derivative threshold to prevent the derivative term from
acting on either signal noise from the lead.
5 - 100
The Velocity Loop / ZE screen (page 2).
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-244)
Enter a code (0-1)
Press the Enter key.
VELOCITY LOOP/ZE
Kff Auto En
RUN Loop Mode
ZE Limit
Trim Authority
Integral Limit
Deriv Thd VL
OFF
Vel
2000
8191
8191
0
(CP-220)
Enter a code (0-3)
Press the Enter key.
(CP-253)
Enter the EU/Tm.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-258)
Enter the Bits.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-259)
Enter the Bits.
Press the Enter key.
P2/2
(CP-228)
Enter the constant.
Press the Enter key.
5 - 101
POSITION LOOP
The Position Loop screen includes the parameters for Kp PL, Ki PL, Kd PL for the standard Position Loop.
The Position Loop screen also includes the relevant parameters for the position and the position error
counters. The Position Loop screen includes other miscellaneous parameters related to the control loop and
the signal conditioning.
CNTRL LOOP (MP-45)
Control Loop (MP-45) displays the type of loop (see list below) that is in current use. Only one type of loop can be
active at a time.
5 = Psn Hld (“H-Stop” Position Loop)
4 = ZE Hld (“H-Stop” ZE Position Loop)
3 = Psn (Position Loop)
2 = ZE Psn (Zero Error Loop)
1 = Vel (Velocity Loop)
0 = OL (Open Loop)
Kp PL (CP-235)
Kp PL (CP-235) is the proportional gain constant for the PID position loop. Increasing Kp PL (CP-235) will have a
quicker the response and a smaller position error. However, a value that is too large could result in overshoot and
instability. You can eliminate most or all of the error in the position loop with the proportional term (Kp PL). Use an
integral only if Kp PL (CP-235) alone can not eliminate the error to your specification.
Ki PL (CP-236)
Ki PL (CP-236) is the integral constant for the PID position loop. Integral action provides for zero steady state error.
Increase Ki PL (CP-236) for a faster convergence to zero error. However, a value that is too large will cause instability. Use Ki PL (CP-236) first to eliminate the error to your specification. If this produces unacceptable results, then
decrease Kp PL (CP-235) and introduce the integral by gradually increasing Ki PL (CP-236).
Kd PL (CP-237)
Kd PL (CP-237) is the derivative constant for the PID position loop. Derivative action damps out overshoots,
however, its effect is limited and is highly dependent on Kp PL (CP- 235), Ki PL (CP- 236) and the given process
dynamics. A value that is too large can cause instability.
Trim Out (MP-47)
Trim Out (MP-47) displays the value of the output of the PID compensator. Trim Out is displayed in CO DAC bits.
CO BITS (MP-20)
Control Output Bits (MP-20) displays the present value, in DAC bits, of the CO_SIG Analog Output signal.
RAMPED REF (MP-42)
Ramped Reference (MP-42) displays the speed command, in feedback Engineering Units per Time. This is the output
of the ramp calculations. When the ramp has been completed, the Ramped Reference (MP-42) should equal the Scaled
Reference (MP-41).
PsnErr (MP-34)
Position Error (MP-34) displays the value, in engineering units, of the accumulated position error between the Lead
(FI1) and the Feedback (FI2) input signals. The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of the
decimal point in EU FI2 (CP-168).
5 - 102
The Position Loop screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / Tuning <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(MP-45)
Displays the type of loop
that is active.
(CP-235)
Enter the constant.
Press the Enter key.
POSITION LOOP
Cntrl Loop
Kp PL
Ki PL
Kd PL
OL
100
0
0
Trim Out
CO Bits
Ramped Ref
PsnErr
0
-67
0
0.0
P1/2
(CP-236)
Enter the constant.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-237)
Enter the constant.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-47)
Displays the value of the
PID compensator output.
(MP-20)
Displays CO_SIG Analog
Output signal value in
DAC bits.
(MP-42)
Displays the speed
command, in feedback
EU/Tm.
(MP-34)
Displays the accumulated
position error in E.U.
5 - 103
Position Loop
Kff Auto En (CP-244)
Kff Automatic Enable (CP-244) enables the CX-1010 automatic adjustment of Kff (CP-224) at the specified
KffAdjUpdt interval (CP-242) in “Run” or “Jog” with the loop closed.
1 = ON = Enabled
0 = OFF = Disabled (default)
RUN Loop Mode (CP-220)
RUN Loop Mode (CP-220) identifies the type of control loop (see list below) that is used during Run.
3=Position Loop
2=ZE Loop (Psn + Vel)
1=Velocity Loop *
0=Open Loop
Trim Authority (CP-258)
The trim contribution to the DAC output is limited to positive and negative Trim Authority (CP-258).
Integral Limit (CP-259)
The integral contribution to the trim term is limited to the positive and negative Integral Limit (CP-259). Integral
Limit (CP-259) can decrease the effects of integral windup or it can limit the maximum effect of the integral term.
Deriv Thd PL (CP-238)
Derivative Threshold Position Loop (CP-238) is the minimum position error that is required before the derivative
term in the PID velocity algorithm gains influence. Increase the derivative threshold to prevent the derivative term
from acting on either signal noise from the lead.
PsnErr+ (CP-260)
The maximum positive value of the accumulated position error is limited to Positive Position Error (CP-260). Use
Positive Position Error (CP-260) when the lead is in motion, but the follower is stopped. Since the follower does not
have to recover its former position relative to the lead, the Positive Position Error (CP-260) can be used to limit the
amount of position error that accumulates while the lead continues to move. In Positive Position Error
(CP-260), the follower lags behind the lead when both are moving in the positive direction.
PsnErr- (CP-261)
The maximum negative value of the accumulated position error is limited to Negative Position Error (CP-261). In
Negative Position Error (CP-261), the follower is ahead of the lead when both are moving in the positive direction.
If both are moving in the negative direction in Negative Position Error (CP-261), the follower lags behind the lead.
Psn Offset (CP-262)
Add Position Offset (CP-262) to the PsnErr (CP-34) to offset the feedback position by the amount of EU’s that are
specified in Psn Offset (CP-262). The position loop must be active for the offset to occur.
5 - 104
The Position Loop screen (page 2).
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-244)
Enter a code (0-1)
Press the Enter key.
(CP-220)
Enter a code (0-3)
Press the Enter key.
POSITION LOOP
Kff Auto En
RUN Loop Mode
Trim Authority
Integral Limit
Deriv Thd PL
OFF
Vel
8191
8191
1
PsnErr+
PsnErrPsn Offset
1.0
1.0
0
P2/2
(CP-258)
Enter the Bits.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-259)
Enter the Bits.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-238)
Enter the constant.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-260)
Enter the E.U.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-261)
Enter the E.U.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-262)
Enter the E.U.
Press the Enter key.
5 - 105
FEEDFORWARD
Kff Auto En (CP-244)
Kff Automatic Enable (CP-244) enables the CX-1010 automatic adjustment of Kff (CP-224) at the specified KffAdjUpdt
interval (CP-242) in “Run” or “Jog” with the loop closed.
1 = ON = Enabled
0 = OFF = Disabled (default)
KffAdjUpdt (CP-242)
Kff Adjust Update (CP-242) sets the sampling period for the Kff calculation, when it is enabled, as well as for the
EstMaxFb (CP-49) calculation. KffAdjUpdt (CP-242) is the time interval between each new Kff calculation and the
automatic store to the Kff parameters depending on whether Kff Auto En (CP-244) is enabled.
5 = 10 Min Update
2 = 1 Sec Update (default)
4 = 1 Min Update
1 = 250 Msec Update
3 = 10 Sec Update
Ff Source (CP-106)
Feedforward Source (CP-106) identifies the source of the Feedforward signal. Feedforward's default setting is "0”
(Ramped-Reference) which is also the Velocity Command. The default setting is used most frequently.
WARNING: To insure proper operation, set Feedforward Source (CP-106) to "0” (Ramped Reference) when RUN
Loop Mode (CP-220) is set to “2” (Position loop).
2=Analog In 1
1=Frequency In 1
0=Ramped Reference (default)
Kff (CP-224)
Kff (CP-224) scales the velocity feedforward that is selected in Ff Source (CP-106) to the CO_SIG Analog Output
(J3, pin 1). Use Kff when operating in closed loop with velocity mode drives. You can either enter a value or you can
have the CX-1010 calculate a value for you. The CX-1010 will automatically calculate a more accurate value for Kff
(CP-224) at periodic intervals (which is based on KffAdjUpdt, CP-242), if you enable Kff Auto En (CP-244) when
your system is in “Run”.
Max Fb (CP-233)
Maximum Feedback (CP-233) and CO Max Volts (CP-181) are used to calculate a rough approximation for Kff (CP224). When a new Maximum Feedback (CP-233) value is entered, then Kff (CP-224) reflects a new value also .
MaxFB also helps determine the limits used in the automatic adjustment of Kff when it is enabled.
EstMaxFb (MP-49)
Estimated Maximum Feedback (MP-49) displays the estimated maximum RPM, which the CX-1010 calculates during the Kff adjustment, by referencing the CO Max Volts (CP-181), the CO Volts (MP-31) and the Fb EU/Tm (MP39 ) . Use Estimated Maximum Feedback (MP-49) to determine if the drive and CO_SIG are scaled correctly.
Trim Out (MP-47)
Trim Out (MP-47) displays the value of the output of the PID compensator. Trim Out is displayed in CO DAC bits.
Feedforward (MP-46)
Feedforward (MP-46) displays the value of the feedforward term in CO DAC bits.
Cntrl Loop (MP-45)
Control Loop (MP-45) displays the type of loop (see list below) that is in current use. Only one type of loop can be
active at a time.
5 = Psn Hld (“H-Stop” Position Loop)
2 = ZE Psn (Zero Error Loop)
5 - 106
4 = ZE Hld (“H-Stop” ZE Position Loop)
1 = Vel (Velocity Loop)
3 = Psn (Position Loop)
0 = OL (Open Loop)
The Feedforward screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / Tuning <—
(CP-244)
Enter a code (0-1)
Press the Enter key.
(CP-242)
Enter a code (1-5)
Press the Enter key.
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-106)
Enter a code (0-2)
Press the Enter key.
FEEDFORWARD
Kff Auto En
KffAdjUpdt
Ff Source
Kff
MaxFb
OFF
1 Sec
RR
5.0
2000
EstMaxFb
Trim Out
Feedforward
Cntrl Loop
0
0
0
OL
P1/1
(CP-224)
Enter the Volts/EU/Tm.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-233)
Enter the EU/Tm.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-49)
Displays the value of the
estimated max RPM.
(MP-47)
Displays the value of the
PID compensator output.
(MP-46)
Displays the value of the
Feedforward term.
(MP-45)
Displays the type of loop
that is active.
5 - 107
RELATED ITEMS
The Related Items screen includes
Drive Type (CP-222)
Drive Type (CP-222) allows you to choose either the torque or the velocity type (see list below) for the drive so you
can give meaning to the CO_SIG. The velocity feedforward is disabled for the ”Torque Type” (2) drives.
2=Torque Type
1=Velocity Type *
Loop Update (CP-241)
Loop Update (CP-241) is the time interval between the CO_SIG output calculations. This interval sets the sampling
rate of the PID control loop.
3 = 100 Msec Update
2 = 10 Msec Update
1 = 1 Msec Update (default)
Signal Fltr Sel (CP-248)
Signal Filter Select (CP-248) selects the signal to route through a low pass filter. The effect is visible on the speed
value.
4 = Analog In 2
1 = Frequency In 1
3 = Frequency In 2
0 = Not Used (default)
2 = Analog In 1
Signal Fltr Tau (CP-249)
Signal Fltr Tau sets the time constant in milliseconds for the signal filter.
5 - 108
The Related Items screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / Tuning <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-222)
Enter a code (1-2)
Press the Enter key.
RELATED ITEMS
Drive Type
Vel
Loop Update
1 Msec
Signal Fltr Sel
Signal Fltr Tau
OFF
10
(CP-241)
Enter a code (1-3)
Press the Enter key.
(CP-248)
Enter a code (0-4)
Press the Enter key.
P1/1
(CP-249)
Enter the Milliseconds.
Press the Enter key.
5 - 109
—NOTES—
5 - 110
—NOTES—
5 - 111
—NOTES—
5 - 112
BLOCK SETUP
The blocks are used as a quick access to a group of Control Parameters whose values will need to be changed
over the course of your system's operation. For example, the Blocks could be used to switch between speed
setpoints and ratio setpoints. You can assign up to sixteen Control Parameters to the blocks. There are eight
blocks that allow you to assign eight values to each of the sixteen Control Parameters. The blocks can be set
up so that the active block (the block currently in use) can be selected through a switch.
Caution: To avoid damage to your system, the CX-1010 must be calibrated and the motor drive set up before you
operate your system. Refer to Drive Setup / Calibration: Calibration.
The Block Setup screens are:
• Edit Block Parms
• Edit Blk 0
• Edit Blk 1
• Edit Blk 2
• Edit Blk 3
• Edit Blk 4
• Edit Blk 5
• Edit Blk 6
• Edit Blk 7
5 - 113
—NOTES—
5 - 114
Block Setup
Use the blocks to assign eight different values to a single Control Parameter. Up to sixteen Control
Parameters can each be assigned to each of the eight different blocks.
BLOCK SETUP
Up to sixteen Control Parameters are
assigned to the blocks in Edit Block Parms.
Edit Block Parms
Edit Block 0
Edit Block 1
Edit Block 2
Edit Block 3
Edit Block 4
Edit Block 5
Edit Block 6
Edit Block 7
Each one of the Control Parameters that was
assigned in Edit Blocks Parms (above) can be
assigned eight different parameter values in the
.
Edit Block (0-7) screens.
Menu
The block (Edit Block 0-7) that is active
determines which of the eight values is used.
You can use either the PLC or the Keypad to change the active block.
To use the PLC to change the active block:
There are 3 PLC bits that are associated with the block selection: Block Select A, Block Select B and Block
Select C. Make bits active by setting the bit equal to “1”. Select the active block in a binary (octal). The
following table represents the PLC Bit logic:
BlkSel C
BlkSel B
BlkSel A
Active Block
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
To use the Keypad to change the active block:
Transfer control to the keypad by entering “2” (kypd) in Blk Sel Source (CP-378). To make a block active,
enter the block's number in Keypad Blk Sel (CP-379). The active block is displayed in Active Block
(MP-51).
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
DANGER
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
When
you
change
the
active
block,
the
new
values
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
are loaded and can operate the system immediately.
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
This
can
cause
abrupt
operation.
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
For more information on selecting and monitoring the active block, refer to System Monitoring (MP) /
System Monitor / Control Overrides.
5 - 115
EDIT BLOCK PARMS
Block Parm 1 - Block Parm 16 (CP-400 to CP-415)
The Edit Block Parms screens (pages 1-4) contain sixteen lines (Block Parm 1- 16) that allow you to assign sixteen
Control Parameters to Block Parms 1 through Block Parms 16 (CP-400 to CP-415). In turn, these Control Parameter assignments are reflected in corresponding lines in the Edit Blocks (0-7) screens (where the Control Parameter
values are selected). When you enter a Parameter Code for a specific Control Parameter in a Block Parameter line
(Block Parm 1-16) , the parameter's name will appear immediately below that Block Parameter line. Enter a “0” in
the Block Parameter line(s) that you do not want to assigned Control Parameter. The line immediately below will
display “Not Used”. Master Setpoint (CP-110) is the default Control Parameter that is assigned to Block Parm 1.
You can not assign Monitor Parameters to Edit Block Params.
The graphic matrix below displays the interaction between the Edit Block Parms screens and the Edit Block 0-7
screens:
EDIT BLOCK 0
<Active Block>
Assign (up to 16) Control Parameters
in the Edit Block Parms screens
The assigned
Control
Parameter's
name appears
on the line
below —>
EDIT BLOCK PARMS
Block Parm 1
→Master SP
Block Parm 2
→NOT USED
Block Parm 3
→NOT USED
Block Parm 4
→NOT USED
110
*
0
*
0
*
0
*
<—
P1/4
<—
Blk0 Val 1
5
<—
→Master SP
*
Parameter Values
Blk0 Val 2
0
will be entered in
*
→NOT EDIT
USED BLOCK 1
the Edit Block (0-7)
Blk0 Val 3
0
screens
*
→NOT USED
Blk0
Val
4 1
010
Blk1
Val
<—
* *
→NOT
USED SP
→Master
Blk1 Val 2
0
*
→NOTEDIT
USED BLOCK 2
Blk1 Val 3
P1/4 0
*
→NOT USED
Blk1
015
Blk2Val
Val4 1
<—
* *
→NOT
USEDSP
→Master
Blk2 Val 2
0
*
→NOT EDIT
USED BLOCK 3
Blk2 Val 3
P1/4 0
*
→NOT USED
Blk2
Val
4 1
020
<—
Blk3
Val
* *
→NOT
USEDSP
→Master
Blk3 Val 2
0
*
→NOT EDIT
USED BLOCK 4
Blk3 Val 3
P1/4 0
*
→NOT USED
Blk3
025
Blk4Val
Val4 1
<—
* *
→NOT
USEDSP
→Master
The assignment is reflected on the
corresponding value line in all eight
of the Edit Block screens —>
NOTE: In this example, the blocks are used to assign
eight different values to the Master Setpoint.
Master Setpoint (CP-110) is assigned to the blocks
in the Edit Block Parms screen. Then the eight values
for Master Setpoint are assigned in the Edit Block
Screens. The block (0-7) that is active determines
which of the eight Master Setpoint values is used.
5 - 116
Blk4 Val 2
0
*
→NOT EDIT
USED BLOCK 5
Blk4 Val 3
P1/4 0
*
→NOT USED
Blk4
030
Blk5Val
Val4 1
<—
* 0
→NOT
USED
→Master SP
Blk5 Val 2
*
0
→NOTEDIT
USED BLOCK 6
Blk5 Val 3
P1/4 *
0
→NOT USED
Blk5
*35
<—
Blk6Val
Val4 1
→NOT
USEDSP
→Master
0
Blk6 Val 2
*
0
→NOT EDIT
USED BLOCK 7
Blk6 Val 3
P1/4 *
0
→NOT USED
Blk6
Val
4 1
*40
Blk7
Val
<—
→NOT
USEDSP
→Master
0
Blk7 Val 2
*
0
→NOT USED
Blk7 Val 3
P1/4 *
0
→NOT USED
Blk7 Val 4
*
→NOT USED
P1/4
The Edit Block Parms screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / Block Setup <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-400)
Enter a Parameter Code.
Press the Enter key.
(Master Setpoint, CP-110
is the default entry)
EDIT BLOCK PARMS
Block Parm 1
→Master SP
Block Parm 2
→NOT USED
Block Parm 3
→NOT USED
Block Parm 4
→NOT USED
110
*
0
*
0
*
0
*
P1/4
(CP-401)
Enter a Parameter Code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-402)
Enter a Parameter Code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP403)
Enter a Parameter Code.
Press the Enter key.
Displays the name of the
Control Parameter that
you assigned to the line
above. This assignment
will also be reflected in the
Edit Block screens (0-7).
5 - 117
Use the Page keys to scroll through pages 2 through 4 of the Edit Block Parms screens. These
screens are similar to each other and to the page one screen that is displayed on the previous page.
Enter Control Parameter codes in these screens, as noted below.
If you enter a Control Parameter code that is already in use, then the “Not Allowed“ messages will
flash briefly in the error message bar. If you enter a code that does not exist, the “Not Used” designation (or Parameter Name if the line is in use) beneath the Block Parm line will change to “Not
Defined”. However, if you enter a code that does not exist and the code number is higher than “350“,
then the error message “Max Error” will flash briefly in the error message bar.
If you accidently enter too many digits for a code (e.g., 1022), the error message “Field Full” will
flash briefly.
EDIT BLOCK PARMS
Block Parm 5
→NOT USED
Block Parm 6
→NOT USED
Block Parm 7
→NOT USED
Block Parm 8
→NOT USED
0
*
0
*
0
*
0
*
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
P2/4
EDIT BLOCK PARMS
Block Parm 9
→NOT USED
Block Parm 10
→NOT USED
Block Parm 11
→NOT USED
Block Parm 12
→NOT USED
0
*
0
*
0
*
0
*
P3/4
EDIT BLOCK PARMS
Block Parm 13
→NOT USED
Block Parm 14
→NOT USED
Block Parm 15
→NOT USED
Block Parm 16
→NOT USED
0
*
0
*
0
*
0
*
P4/4
5 - 118
(CP-412)
Enter a parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
Displays the name of the
Control Parameter that
you assigned to the line
above. This assignment
will also be reflected in the
Edit Block screens (0-7).
Edit Block Parms / Save
Press the Menu key from any of the Edit Block Parms screens to exit. If you have made changes in
any of the screens, a dialog box will pop up and give you the opportunity to either save or to discard
your changes.
If you have entered Control Parameters that can not be used in the blocks, then the code for each
Control Parameter that can not be used are highlighted, one by one, and the error message “Invalid
Parm” will flash five times in the error bar. Change all Control Parameter codes that are highlighted
and exit Edit Block Parms again. You can not save changes unless all fo the“Invalid Parm” codes
have been changed. Control Parameters that can be used are in the range of CP-102 through CP-106
and CP-109 through CP-349.
If you have entered a combination of 16 Control Parameters that create more internal variables than
the CX-1010 can execute, then the error message“Parm Mem Lmt” will flash twice in the error bar.
Any new Control Parameter codes that you entered will default back to “zero”. Although this
scenario is rare, it can occur. Either use different Control Parameters or use fewer Control Parameters.
Press the Enter key to
save your changes or
press the Clear key to
discard your changes.
BLOCK PARMS EDITOR
Block Parm 1
—>Master SP
BlockSave
ParmChanges?
2
—>NOTPress...
USED
ENTER
Block Parm 3to Save
CLEARUSED
to Discard
—>NOT
Block Parm 4
—>NOT USED
110
*
0
*
0
*
0
*
P1/4
5 - 119
EDIT BLOCK 0 THROUGH 7
Blk0 Val 1 - Blk7 Val 16 (CP-440 to CP-567)
Use the Block Values (CP-440 to CP-567) to assign Parameter Values to the Control Parameters that were designated
by name in the Edit Block Parms screens (CP-400 to CP-415). Edit Blocks 0-7 allow you to assign up to eight different
values to a single Control Parameter by entering a different Parameter Value in each of the Edit Block screens (0-7).
The graphic matrix below displays the interaction between the Edit Block Parms screens and the Edit Block 0-7
screens.
The block of Control Parameters and corresponding values that is in current use, is called the “active” block. The
active block is selected in either the Keypad Block Select (CP-379) or in the PLC (in combination with the Digital
inputs). The active block is monitored by Active Block (MP-51). For more information on selecting and monitoring
the active block, refer to System Monitoring (MP) / System Monitor / Control Overrides.
The default setting in the Val 1 line for Blocks 0-7 (Page 1), is Master Setpoint. This line can be reassigned in the Edit
Block Parms screens.
EDIT BLOCK 0
<Active Block>
Assign (up to 16) Control Parameters
in the Edit Block Parms screens
The assigned
Control
Parameter's
name appears
on the line
below —>
Blk0 Val 1
5
<—
→Master SP
*
Parameter Values
Blk0 Val 2
0
will be entered in
*
→NOT EDIT
USED BLOCK 1
the Edit Block (0-7)
Blk0 Val 3
0
screens
*
→NOT USED
Blk0
Val
4 1
010
Blk1
Val
<—
EDIT BLOCK PARMS
* *
→NOT
USED SP
→Master
Blk1 Val 2
0
*
→NOTEDIT
USED BLOCK 2
Blk1 Val 3
<—
Block Parm 1
110
P1/4 0
*
→NOT USED
*
→Master SP
Blk1
015
Blk2Val
Val4 1
<—
Block Parm 2
0
* *
→NOT
USED
→Master SP
*
→NOT USED
Blk2 Val 2
0
Block Parm 3
0
*
→NOT EDIT
USED BLOCK 3
*
→NOT USED
Blk2 Val 3
P1/4 0
*
Block Parm 4
→NOT USED
0
Blk2
Val
4 1
020
<—
Blk3
Val
*
→NOT USED
* *
→NOT
USED
→Master SP
Blk3 Val 2
0
*
→NOT EDIT
USED BLOCK 4
Blk3 Val 3
<—
P1/4
P1/4 0
*
→NOT USED
Blk3
025
Blk4Val
Val4 1
<—
* *
→NOT
USEDSP
→Master
Blk4 Val 2
0
*
→NOT EDIT
USED BLOCK 5
Blk4 Val 3
P1/4 0
The assignment is reflected on the
*
→NOT USED
corresponding value line in all eight
Blk4
030
Blk5Val
Val4 1
<—
* 0
→NOT
USEDSP
→Master
of the Edit Block screens —>
NOTE: In this example, the blocks are used to assign
eight different values to the Master Setpoint.
Master Setpoint (CP-110) is assigned to the blocks
in the Edit Block Parms screen. Then the eight values
for Master Setpoint are assigned in the Edit Block
Screens. The block (0-7) that is active determines
which of the eight Master Setpoint values is used.
5 - 120
Blk5 Val 2
*
0
→NOTEDIT
USED BLOCK 6
Blk5 Val 3
P1/4 *
0
→NOT USED
Blk5
*35
Blk6Val
Val4 1
→NOT
USEDSP
→Master
0
Blk6 Val 2
*
0
→NOT EDIT
USED BLOCK 7
Blk6 Val 3
P1/4 *
0
→NOT USED
Blk6
Val
4 1
*40
Blk7
Val
→NOT
USEDSP
→Master
0
Blk7 Val 2
*
0
→NOT USED
Blk7 Val 3
P1/4 *
0
→NOT USED
Blk7 Val 4
*
→NOT USED
P1/4
<—
<—
The Edit Block 0-7 screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / Block Setup <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
EDIT BLOCK 0
<Active Block>
Blk0 Val 1
→Master SP
Blk0 Val 2
→NOT USED
Blk0 Val 3
→NOT USED
Blk0 Val 4
→NOT USED
(CP-440)
Enter a parameter value.
Press the Enter key.
0
*
0
*
0
*
0
*
P1/4
(CP-441)
Enter a parameter value.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-442)
Enter a parameter value.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-443)
Enter a parameter value.
Press the Enter key.
Displays the name of the
Control Parameter that has
been assigned to the prior
line. This Control
Parameter is assigned in
the Edit Block Parms
screens.
5 - 121
Use the Page keys to go scroll through pages 2 through 4 of the Block 0 Data Edit screens. The setup
for these screens is identical to the page one screen that is displayed on the previous page. Enter the
relevant information in these screens.
EDIT BLOCK 0
<Active Block>
Blk0 Val 5
→NOT USED
Blk0 Val 6
→NOT USED
Blk0 Val 7
→NOT USED
Blk0 Val 8
→NOT USED
0
*
0
*
0
*
0
*
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
P2/4
EDIT BLOCK 0
<Active Block>
Blk0 Val 9
→NOT USED
Blk0 Val10
→NOT USED
Blk0 Val11
→NOT USED
Blk0 Val12
→NOT USED
0
*
0
*
0
*
0
*
P3/4
EDIT BLOCK 0
<Active Block>
Blk0 Val13
→NOT USED
Blk0 Val14
→NOT USED
Blk0 Val15
→NOT USED
Blk0 Val16
→NOT USED
0
*
0
*
0
*
0
*
P4/4
5 - 122
(CP-452)
Enter a parameter value.
Press the Enter key.
Displays the name of the
Control Parameter that has
been assigned to the prior
line. This Control
Parameter is assigned in
the Edit Block Parms
screens.
Use the Par keys to go scroll through the Block Setup menu and access the additional Edit Block
screens (1-7). The set up for these screens is identical to the Block 0 Edit Block screens that are
displayed on the previous pages. Enter the relevant Control Parameter values in these screens.
EDIT BLOCK 1
Blk1 Val 1
→Master SP
Blk1 Val 2
→NOT USED
Blk1 Val 3
→NOT USED
Blk1 Val 4
→NOT USED
0
*
EDIT
BLOCK 2
0
*
Blk2 Val0 1
* SP
→Master
Blk2 Val0 2
→NOT *
USED
Blk2 Val 3
→NOT USED
Blk2 P1/4
Val 4
→NOT USED
0
*
EDIT
BLOCK 3
0
*
0
Blk3 Val
* 1
→Master
0 SP
Blk3 Val
* 2
→NOT USED
Blk3 Val 3
→NOT USED
Blk3P1/4
Val 4
→NOT USED
EDIT
Blk5 Val 1
Blk6 Val 1
Blk7 Val 1
→Master SP
Blk7 Val 2
→NOT USED
Blk7 Val 3
→NOT USED
Blk7 Val 4
→NOT USED
Blk6 Val 2
→NOT USED
Blk6 Val 3
0
→NOT USED
*
Blk6 Val 4
0
→NOT USED
*
0
*
0
*
Blk5 Val 2
→NOT USED
Blk5 Val
0 3
→NOT* USED
Blk5 Val
0 4
→NOT *USED
0
*
0
*
BLOCK 4
Blk4 Val 1
P1/4SP
→Master
Blk4 Val 2
→NOT USED
Blk4 Val 3
→NOT USED
BLOCKBlk4
5 Val 4
→NOT USED
EDIT BLOCK 6 →Master SP
EDIT BLOCK 7→Master SP
0
*
0
*
0
*
EDIT0
*
0
*
0
*
0
*
0
*
0
*
0
*
0
*
0
*
P1/4
P1/4
P1/4
P1/4
5 - 123
Edit Block / Save
Press the Menu key from any of the Edit Block screens to exit. If you have made changes in any of
the screens (pages 1-4), a dialog box will popup and give you the opportunity to either save or to
discard your changes.
NOTE: Once you have exited the Edit Block screen, if you change the value of a Control Parameter
in any other screen (that is not a block screen) and that change can create problems with that Control
Parameter when the block is put into use, then the error message “Invalid Blk” will flash briefly in the
error message bar. Generally this scenario would only happen if a math error or an undefined
operation were created in the block which houses the Control Parameter that changed. For example,
If you change the value of a scaling parameter which is also used in a block and the affect that the
change has on the block would create an overflow (e.g., a setpoint is too large in relationship to
CP-108) then the block would become unusable or an “invalid block.”
Press the Enter key to
save your changes or
press the Clear key to
discard your changes.
EDIT BLOCK 0
<Active Block>
Blk0 Val 1
—>Master SP
Blk0 Save
Val 2Changes?
—>NOTPress...
USED
ENTER
Blk0 Val 3 to Save
CLEARUSED
to Discard
—>NOT
Blk0 Val 4
—>NOT USED
0
*
0
*
0
*
0
*
P1/4
5 - 124
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER
(PLC)
This section discusses the setup procedures for the PLC (Programmable Logic Controller). The CX-1010
provides a basic PLC to compliment the motion control operation with I/O flexibility. The PLC allows you
to redirect or redefine the eight digital outputs and eight (of the 16) digital inputs. You can also use the PLC
to initiate a number of internal functions, or to test the state of status indicators. The PLC includes four
timers, four event counters, four latches, and four numerical comparators. The alarms are generated by the
PLC. The CX-1010 provides an editor for changing the PLC program without the need of a portable
computer or proprietary pendant. The program is presented as a text-based list of commands (instructions)
and operands (I/O, contacts, coils).
Caution: To avoid damage to your system, the CX-1010 must be calibrated and the motor drive set up before you
operate your system. Refer to Drive Setup / Calibration: Calibration.
The PLC screens are:
• PLC Monitor
• PLC Timers
• PLC Event Counters
• PLC Position Counters
• PLC Data Copy
• PLC Digital I/O
• PLC Programming
5 - 125
—NOTES—
5 - 126
PLC
The PLC adds functionality to the CX-1010. There are default settings for the PLC, which are generally
sufficient for most applications, and whose operations are transparent to the user. There are also PLC
screens which allow the user additional access to the PLC in order to expand on the CX-1010's functionality.
The PLC has a “scan time” of 2 milliseconds. The scan is divided into two parts:
• The state of the status indicators is determined (this includes the alarms and the results of the Custom
alarms) and the PLC-dedicated digital inputs are captured.
• The PLC program is executed and the digital outputs are updated with the results.
Since there is only one copy of the PLC bit map in memory when the PLC program executes, it uses the
most current state of the PLC bits. Therefore, if a rung changes the state of a PLC bit value, the new value is
then used in subsequent rungs. Though this rule is not violated in the case of the latches, the state of the
latches is not determined until after the PLC program has completed. This means that the set and reset PLC
bits can change, but only their state at the end of the PLC program will determine the state of the Latch
throughout the entire next scan. Likewise, the event counters are not incremented/decremented until after
the PLC porgram is completed, and their associated outputs will not change state during the execution of the
program.
The PLC program performs the logic on the PLC bits as dictated by the user-entered program. The state of
these PLC bits is determined before hand via internal calculations. These bits are PLC bit 2 through PLC bit
99. These bits are consider status information that are set or reset based on their function, current data and
the state (or change thereof) of other PLC bits. These bits should never be operands of an OUT command,
and therefore the state of these ‘status’ bits should remain constant throughout the execution of the PLC
program.
The scan is summarized as follows:
1. The digital output (from last scan) are output to the actual outputs, the digital inputs are captured as a
group and saved for later use.
2. Status bits are setup - state, block select, RUN mode, loop type, event counter maintenance, position
counter maintenance, alarms, compares, set/reset latches.
The Timers are maintained (status bits set/reset if necessary). This ends the first 1 millisecond part of
the scan.
3. The digital inputs (stamped at top of 2 millisecond boundary) are copied to PLC bits (while OR’ing
in the DI Set (CP-303), and performing One-shot operation on the DI 1 Shot bits, (CP-302), set PLC
Bit Set (CP-307) bit, reset PLC Bit Clear (CP-308) bit.
4. Execute the PLC program. This performs only the logic as given by the program. No functions
called out by setting a bit to “1” in the execution of the program will get executed at this time.
Counters are not incremented at this time, and therefore, the counter outputs remain unchanged
during the execution. The state of the latches are not determined at this time.
5. The digital out PLC bits are saved, but not sent to the actual outputs at this time. The saved digital
output data is output at the top of the next 2 millisecond boundary. This maintains a fixed time
interval between the reading of the digital inputs and the writing of the digital outputs.
5 - 127
6. Misc. functions: Block Select A,B,C decoded to select current block, PLC bits FrzIntgrl, OPEN
LOOP, Frz Ramp, BypRmp, Negate SR are OR’ed in with the Cntrl Latch (CP-240). The result will
be used in the next Scaled and Ramped Reference determination, or Control Loop calculation.
The Data Trace enable is maintained.
The Timers are maintained (status bits set/reset if necessary). This ends the 2nd 1 millisecond part of
the scan.
The PLC mimics the operation of Relay Logic. In this context, the relay “Coils” can be either energized
(ON) or inactive (OFF). Likewise, the relay contacts, whether “open” or “closed”, assume only one of the
two states at any given time. Therefore, relays are binary devices. The state of a coil or contact can be
represented as a “1” (ON”) or a “0” (OFF). This is the basis for the PLC; it treats everything as binary
entities with each assigned a particular function and it realizes only one state at any given time. The virtual
“contacts” and “coils” that are available to the PLC program are defined in the PLC bit map. The PLC bit
map assigns the function of the contacts and coils to a bit (single binary digit) memory location. The PLC
program has access to the PLC bit map to logically combine the “contacts” (status) bits to activate
(or deactivate), a “coil” bit. For example; the Block Selection default program routes the Digital Inputs DI8, DI-9 and DI-10 to the Blk Sel A, B, C PLC Bits (coils) respectively. Note that the Digital Inputs are
active low - so a closed contact to common (which would be “0” voltage on the input) would produce a “1 ”
(true = active) in the corresponding Bit in the PLC bit map. Refer to the PLC Bit-Map Reference Table in
Appendices: Appendix J.
The status bits can be based on a binary condition (e.g., the Drive Enable /PLC bit 41) or they can be based
on the result of a comparison between two nonbinary numbers (e.g., the MaxFb Spd /PLC Bit 48). The
MaxFb Spd bit (48) is set (active = normally-open contact closed) when the value of the Feedback signal is
greater than the value that you entered into Max Fb Alm (CP-271). Most of the numerical comparisons that
are associated with the PLC status bits involve one (or more) Control Parameters. Some of the Control
Parameters are used to setup the PLC operation. In addition, there are Monitor Parameters to monitor the
state of the PLC bits.
The PLC uses a stack-based environment for moving bit data and computing boolean expressions. Your PLC
program must conform to this format. Each rung of your ladder-logic program would be programmed as a
group of commands (along with their operands) starting with a “LOAD” (or “LD NOT”) command and
ending with an “OUT” command. The stack allows you to enter a complicated logical combination (rung)
without having to separate it into smaller groups (rungs) with temporary coils.
These are the commands:
LOAD
LD NOT (Load Not)
AND
AND NOT
OR
OR NOT
XOR (Exclusive OR)
XOR NOT
NOT
OUT
<END>
5 - 128
There are three parts to the stack: the Result Register (R); a bit mapped location named “S0” (bit location
“0”); and a bit mapped location named “S1” (bit location “1”). When the stack is lifted with the “LOAD”
and “LOAD NOT” commands, the contents of “S0” is copied to “S1” (the contents of “S1” is overwritten)
and the contents of the Result Register (R), is copied to “S0” and the contents of the operand (or the
complement of) is copied to the Result Register, “R”. When the Stack is dropped as in the “AND 0”, the
“OR 0”, the “AND NOT 0” and the “OR NOT 0” commands, then the contents of “S0” (or its complement)
is “AND’ed” or “OR’ed” with the Result Register (R) and the result is left in (R). The contents of “S1” is
copied to “S0” (the contents of “S0” is overwritten), and the contents of “S1” remains the same. The
following example shows the stack before and after the “LOAD” and “AND 0” commands.
Location 08 (DI_8): 1
Before “LOAD 8 DI_8”:
After “LOAD 8 DI_8”:
S1: 0
S0: 1
R: 0
S1: 1
S0: 0
R: 1
Before “AND 0 S0”:
After “AND 0 S0”:
S1: 1
S0: 0
R: 1
S1: 1
S0: 1
R: 0
For commands other than “LOAD” and “LD NOT” with an operand other than “0” (S0), there is no stack
movement. For example; the “AND 9 DI_9” results in an “AND”s of the contents of Bit Location 09
(DI_9) with the Result Register (R) and the result of the operation stays in the Result Register (R). There is
no stack movement and “S0” and “S1” remain the same. The “LOAD” and “LD NOT ”commands always
lift the stack. The stack drops only when the operand is “0” (S0) for the “AND”, “OR”, “XOR”, “AND
NOT”, “OR NOT ” and “XOR NOT ” commands.
THE COMMANDS
1. LOAD
This starts a new Rung (group of commands). The stack is lifted and the contents of the operand bit is loaded
into the Result Register (R).
2. LD NOT
Same as “LOAD” but the Result Register is complemented after the load. This is used for starting the rung
with a normally-closed contact.
3. AND
The contents (the bit value) of the operand bit is AND’ed with the Result Register (R). The operand is
unaffected. The result is retained in the Result Register. If the operand is “0” (i.e., the “S0” register), then
the stack is dropped.
4. AND NOT
The complement of the operand bit is AND’ed with the Result Register (R). The operand is unaffected. The
result is retained in the Result Register. If the operand is “0” (i.e., the "S0" register), then the stack is
dropped. This is typically used to “AND” in a normally-closed contact.
5 - 129
5. OR
The contents (the bit value) of the operand bit is OR’ed with the Result Register (R). The operand is
unaffected. The result is retained in the Result Register. If the operand is “0” (i.e., the "S0" register), then the
stack is dropped.
6. OR NOT
The complement of the operand bit is OR’ed with the Result Register. The operand is unaffected. The result
is retained in the Result Register. If the operand is “0” (i.e., the "S0" register), then the stack is dropped. This
is typically used to “OR” in a normally-closed contact.
7. XOR
The contents (the bit value) of the operand bit is Exclusively OR’ed with the Result Register. The operand is
unaffected. The result is retained in the Result Register. If the operand is “0” (i.e., the "S0" register), then the
stack is dropped.
8. XOR NOT
The complement of the operand bit is Exclusively OR’ed with the Result Register. The operand is unaffected.
The result is retained in the Result Register. If the operand is “0” (i.e., the "S0" register), then the stack is
dropped. This is typically used to XOR in a normally-closed contact.
9. NOT
The contents of the Result Register is complemented. The operand is ignored but must be included in the
program - use one of the temporary coil locations or the No Opnd (171). This is typically used to complement
the result before an “OUT” command. This could be the case if the rung is controlling an active-high output.
10. NOP
This is a No Operation Command. The command is ignored by the compiler. This can be used to temporarily
remove a command.
11. OUT
This copies the contents of the Result Register (R), into the operand location. This terminates the rung.
12. <End>
This ends the PLC program. It signals the compiler that there are no more valid commands to follow. Every
program must be terminated with an “<END>”. The operand is ignored but it must be included in the
program . Use the No Opnd (171).
The OPERANDS
The operands are divided into two main areas: the status bits (contacts); and the function bits (coils). The
status bits range from bit 2 through bit 95. Do not use these bits as operands for the “OUT” command, as the
results could be unpredictable. The function bits range from bit 100 to bit 170. These are used in conjunction
with the “OUT” command to activate the indicated function. Activation of the indicated function occurs when
the “OUT” command moves a “1” into the bit location (the Result Register contains a “1” just prior the
“OUT” command). All of the bits that are not defined, are “Reserved” for future expansion. Refer to
Appendices: Appendix H for a complete list of the PLC Bit-map (operands).
5 - 130
Descriptions of the groups of operands and discussion of the associated Control Parameters follow:
Bit 0 is the top of the stack, S0 (first entry point).
Bit 1 is the bottom of the stack, S1, (lowest level).
Bit 2 is fixed at the value of 0.
Bit 3 is fixed at the value of 1.
Bit 4 is set to a 1 for the first PLC scan after power-up.
Bits 8 through 15 reflect the values captured on the Digital Inputs 8 through 15, respectively. DI Set (CP-303)
can be used to set one or all of these bits even when the corresponding input is not active. This is typically
used to test your program without having to actuate the input. DI 1 shot (CP-302) can be used to set one or
more of the Inputs (DI- 8 through DI-15) to automatically generate a one shot in the PLC bit location (bit 8-15)
from an open to closed transition on the input.
Bits 16 through 19 are the output of the latches. This would be the equivalent of the normally-open contact of
a latching relay.
Bits 24 through 27 are the outputs of the timers. The running time for each timer is compared against the
Timer Delay and Timer On- time CP’s (CP-310, CP-317) to determine if these output bits should be active (1).
Bits 32 through 36 are the outputs of the event counters. When the count for each counter reaches the Trigger
Count (CP-320, CP-322, CP-324, CP-326, CP-328), the corresponding counter output will be active (1).
Bits 38 and 39 are set for one scan time when the corresponding position counter reaches or exceeds the
Rollover value (CP-268, CP-269). The bit is set for one scan when the rollover occurs and the counter is reset
to the “0” plus the amount the count is over the rollover value.
Bits 40 through 47 are basic status indicator bits. Bit 40 (CO Sign) indicates the sign of the CO SIG. If CO
Polarity is set to NEG (2), Bit 40 operates opposite of the actual voltage convention - if the voltage is negative,
this is consider normal for CO Polarity set to NEG and the Bit 40 will be “0”.
Bits 48 through 55 are alarm conditions.
Bits 56 through 59 indicate if the corresponding compare result is true (1) or not (“0”).
Bits 64 through 67 reflect the value of Setpoint Mode (CP-102).
Bits 68 through 71 indicate the current control-loop structure that is in use. They reflect the value of Cntrl1
Loop (MV-45).
Bits 72 through 79 indicate the operating state of the controller. Only one of these bits can be active at a time.
These bits are monitor (status) bits only. Do Not use these bits as operands for the “OUT” command. You can
not request a state change with these bits.
Bits 80 through 87 indicate the active block. Only one of these bits can be active at a time. These bits are for
monitoring status only. Do not use these bits as operands for the “OUT” command. You can not request a new
block with these bits. You can do this only through the Blk Sel A,B,C bits. Bits 88 through 95 are reserved.
Bits 100 through 107 are used to activate the Digital Outputs 0 - 7 respectively. The outputs are active low.
Therefore, when the “OUT” command moves a 1 into one of these bits, the corresponding output will become
active and pull the connected device to common, sinking current as dictated.
Bits 108 through 115 are used for temporary storage. They can be used to store the intermediate results of
relatively complicated rungs. They could be referred to as virtual “Control Relays” and they can be used in the
logic of several rungs
Bits 116 through 123 are used to set and reset the latches.
5 - 131
BIts 124 through 127 are used to enable the timers.
Bit 128 is used to reset Timer 4 since it retains its state when the Tmr4 En bit (PLC bit 127) is “0”.
Bits 130 through 133 are used to increment the corresponding counters. Bit 134 is used to decrement the
Counter 4 count. The count is incremented on the transition from a “0” to a 1 in the increment or decrement
bit.
Bits 135 through 137 are used to reset the corresponding counters. These are level activated; as long as the
reset bit remains active (1), the count will remain at “0”
Bit 139 is used to preset the Counter 4 count to the Cntr4 Preset value (CP-329). This is also a level
activated function - as long as the reset bit is active, the count will remain at the preset value for Counter 4
even if transitions occur on the increment (or decrement) bits.
Bits 140 through 142 are used to select the active block. This is accomplished in a binary (octal) fashion.
The following table represents the logic:
PLC Bit 142
BlkSel C
PLC Bit 141
BlkSel B
PLC Bit 140
BlkSel A
Active Block
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Bits 148 is used to reset the integral term of the PID.
Bits 149 through 151 are used to reset the position counters and the error. The error is the critical value that
drives the zero-error and the position control loops. The counters are preset with the FI1PsnPrst and
FI2PsnPrst values when the corresponding bits are active (level).
Bits 152 through 155 are used to control some control loop and ramp operations.
Bits 158 and 159 are used to negate the CO SIG signal and the Scaled Reference signal, respectively. The
Negate CO bit is ignored when operating in Unipolar mode. You can not reverse the polarity of the output
in this case. The Negate SR bit is used to reverse the direction of the commanded speed, the Scaled
Reference.
Bits 168 and 169 are used as the “Remote” scroll up and scroll down controls. The parameter that will be
incremented or decremented is selected by Remote Scroll (CP-300). The Rmt Scroll Rate (CP-301)
determines the rate at which the select parameter is incremented or decremented when the corresponding bit
is active.
5 - 132
PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES
The Basic Rung - Moving Bit Data
Since the PLC is based on bit data, a bit value is moved from one location to another. The most basic rung
(a normally open contact energizing a coil) is implemented in the PLC program by moving bit data.
LOAD
OUT
48
101
MaxFb Spd
DO_1
48
101
Max FB Spd
DO-1
The value of MaxFb Spd bit (contact) is loaded into the Result Register (R) with the “LOAD 48 MaxFb
Spd” command and copied to the Digital Output DO-1 bit location (coil) with the “OUT” command. When
the MaxFb Spd bit is set (1), the DO-1 bit will get set also. As a result, the actual DO-1 pin will be active pulled low to sink current and possibly energize an external-relay coil. All rungs (groups of commands)
must start with a “LOAD” or “LD NOT” command and end with an “OUT” command. “LD NOT” starts
the rung with a normally-closed contact.
Since the “OUT” command does not change the value of the Result Register (R), you can move the result of
a rung to more than one Bit location without starting a new rung.
LOAD
OUT
OUT
OUT
8
149
150
151
DI_8
RstFI1Psn
RstFI2Psn
RstPsnErr
DI_8
RstFI1Psn
8
149
RstFI2Psn
150
RstPsnErr
151
5 - 133
Series and Parallel Contacts - Operating on Bit Data
Often it is necessary to combine the state of more than one PLC bit (contact) to determine if another bit (coil)
should be energized. The series connection of two contacts represents the “ANDing” of the states; both
contacts need to be closed in order for energy to flow. The “AND” command is used to “AND” two PLC
bits (contacts) together. The following example shows how to program a simple series connected rung.
LOAD
AND
OUT
48
24
101
MaxFb Spd
Tmrl Out
DO-1
MaxFb Spd
Tmr1 Out
DO_1
48
24
101
Similarly, the “OR” command is used to “OR” two PLC bits (contacts) together. This implements the ladder
logic of parallel connected contacts as the following example illustrates.
LOAD
OR
OUT
48
50
101
MaxFb Spd
MtrNResp
DO-1
MaxFb Spd
DO_1
48
MtrNRespt
101
50
This can be expanded to include more bits.
LOAD
OR
OR
OUT
48
49
50
101
MaxFb Spd
Max Acl Dcl
MtrNResp
DO-1
MaxFb Spd
DO_1
48
MaxAclDcl
101
49
MtrNResp
50
5 - 134
You can combine “AND’s” and “OR’s” to implement both the series and parallel connections.
LOAD
OR
AND
OUT
48
50
24
101
MaxFb Spd
MtrNResp
Tmr1 Out
DO-1
MaxFb Spd
Tmr1 Out
DO_1
48
24
101
MaxFb Spd
Tmr1 Out
DO_1
48
24
101
MtrNResp
50
LOAD
AND
OR
OUT
48
24
50
101
MaxFb Spd
Tmr1 Out
MtrNResp
DO-1
MtrNResp
50
The order of the program commands effect the outcome. The result of each command is placed in the Result
Register (R), which is then used in the next operation.
The exclusive “OR” command (“XOR”, “XOR NOT”) can be used to act on one of two true conditions, but
not if both are true at the same time. The truth table for the “XOR” and “XOR NOT” is given by (1 = true):
R
Operand
XOR
XOR NOT
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
5 - 135
The following example implements an exclusive “OR” between Cntr1 Out and Cntr2 Out using ladder logic.
The program commands use standard “AND” and “OR” logic.
Cntr1 Out
LOAD
AND NOT
LOAD
AND NOT
OR
OUT
32
33
33
32
0
101
Cntr1 Out
Cntr2 Out
Cntr2 Out
Cntr1 Out
S0
DO-1
Cntr2 Out
DO_1
101
32
33
Cntr2 Out
Cntr1 Out
33
32
This programming can be greatly simplified with the “XOR” command as follows.
LOAD
XOR
OUT
32
33
101
Cntr1 Out
Cntr2 Out
DO-1
Cntr1 Out
Cntr2 Out
DO_1
32
33
101
Cntr2 Out
Cntr1 Out
33
32
The “AND/OR” programming of the exclusive “OR” function above illustrates more complicated logic than
we have seen thus far. It involves not only the use of normally-closed contacts, but the use of a second
“LOAD” command to start the second branch, or sub-rung. If you understand the stack movement, the
programming should seem quite obvious. Consider the following example:
DI_8
LOAD
OR
LOAD
OR
AND
OUT
8
9
10
11
0
101
DI_8
DI_9
DI_10
DI_11
S0
DO_1
DI_10
DO_1
101
8
10
DI_ 9
DI_11
9
11
Assume the values of the Digital Input Bits DI_8,9,10,11 are 1,0,0,0 respectively. The “S1” and “S0” Bits
are “0” to start. The Result Register is also “0” to start.
5 - 136
The stack movement proceeds as follows:
Before “LOAD 8 DI_8”:
S1: 0
S0: 0
R: 0
After “LOAD 8 DI_8” (stack is lifted)
S1: 0
S0: 0
R: 1
After “OR 9 DI_9”:
S1: 0
S0: 0
R: 1
After “LOAD 10 DI_10” (stack is lifted):
S1: 0
S0: 1
R: 0
After “OR 11 DI_11”:
S1: 0
S0: 1
R: 0
After “AND 0 S0” (stack falls):
S1: 0
S0: 0
R: 0
After “OUT 101 D0-101”:
S1: 0
S0: 0
R: 0
Another example:
LOAD
AND
LOAD
LOAD
OR
AND
OR
OUT
8
9
10
11
12
0
0
101
DI_8
DI_9
DI_10
DI_11
DI_12
S0
S0
DO_1
DI_8
DI_9
DO_1
8
9
101
DI_10
DI_11
10
11
DI_12
12
Assume DI_8,9,10,11,12 have values of 1,1,0,1,1
5 - 137
Before “LOAD 8 DI_8”:
S1: 0
S0: 0
R: 0
After “LOAD 8 DI_8” (stack is lifted)
S1: 0
S0: 0
R: 1
After “AND 9 DI_9”:
S1: 0
S0: 0
R: 1
After “LOAD 10 DI_10” (stack is lifted):
S1: 0
S0: 1
R: 0
After “LOAD 11 DI_11” (stack is lifted):
S1: 1
S0: 0
R: 1
After “OR 12 DI_12”:
S1: 1
S0: 0
R: 1
After “AND 0 S0” (stack falls):
S1: 1
(S1 remains the same after the shift down)
S0: 1
R: 0
After “OR 0 S0” (stack falls):
S1: 1
S0: 1
R: 1
After “OUT 101 D0_1”:
S1: 1
S0: 1
R: 1
5 - 138
The ladder diagram can be constructed differently to simplify the programming.
LOAD
AND
LOAD
OR
AND
OR
OUT
8
9
11
12
10
0
101
DI_8
DI_9
DI_11
DI_12
DI_10
S0
DO_1
DI_8
DI_9
DI_1
8
9
101
DI_11
DI_10
11
10
DI_12
12
In fact, most rungs can be simplified to require only one additional “LOAD” (other than the opening
“LOAD”) and one operation with the “S0” register (i.e., the “S1” register would not be needed).
The Latches
There are four latches that are available with the PLC. Each has two inputs and one output. The output
reflects the state of the latch, either “1” (ON) or “0” (Off). When the set input is “1” (true), the state of the
latch (the output) will be “1” (On). When the reset input is “1” (true), then the state of the Latch will be “O”
(Off). The set and reset inputs need only be true for one scan. The latch will retain its state (while the power
is “On”) until the opposite input becomes true. If both inputs are “1” (true) at the same time, the state of the
latch will be “0” (Off).
The set inputs (act as coils) are labelled:
Lch1 Set (PLC Bit 116)
Lch2 Set (PLC Bit 117)
Lch3 Set (PLC Bit 118)
Lch4 Set (PLC Bit 119)
The reset inputs (act as coils) are labelled:
Lch1 Rst (PLC Bit 120)
Lch2 Rst (PLC Bit 121)
Lch3 Rst (PLC Bit 122)
Lch4 Rst (PLC Bit 123)
The outputs (used as contacts or status) are labelled:
Lch1 Out (PLC Bit 16)
Lch2 Out (PLC Bit 17)
Lch3 Out (PLC Bit 18)
Lch4 Out (PLC Bit 19)
A latch can be used to reverse the direction of motion with two sensors, one for forward, one for reverse.
The sensors will only be active temporarily, so the latch retains the state until the opposite sensor is reached.
5 - 139
The forward sensor is connected to DI_10, the reverse input to DI_11.
DI_10
LOAD
OUT
10
120
(forward) Lch1 Rst
DI_10
Lch1 Rst
120
10
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
11
116
16
159
DI_11
(reverse) Lch1 Set
11
Lch1 Out
116
Negate SR
16
159
D_11
Lch1 Set
Lch1 Out
Negate SR
The Latch set and reset rungs should be placed next to each other. The output of the Latch is set at the
conclusion of the scan.
You can create your own custom latch using standard PLC logic.
LOAD
OR
AND NOT
OUT
8
108
9
108
DI_8
Tmp1
DI_9
Tmp1
DI_8
DI_9
Tmp1
8
Tmp1
9
108
108
Here DI_8 serves as the set input and DI_9 serves as the reset input. Tmp1 retains the state of the latch. If
the Latch Output is used as a digital output, you can use the digital output PLC bit directly (DO-0 through
DO-7, Bits 100-107) as the latch state. The state of this latch is determined in the sequence of the PLC
program .
LOAD
OR
AND NOT
OUT
8
101
9
101
DI_8
DO_1
DI_9
DO_1
D_8
DI_9
DO_1
8
DO_1
9
101
101
5 - 140
A Pulse Generator - One Shot
It may be necessary to create a logic true (1=on) condition for only one scan regardless of how long the
initiating condition remains active. In addition, it may be necessary to trigger an event on the falling (or
rising) edge of a digital input or on the transition of an internal PLC bit. Such a device can be created with
standard PLC logic.
LOAD
AND NOT
OUT
LOAD
OUT
8
109
108
8
109
DI_8
Tmp2
Tmp1
DI_8
Tmp2
DI_8
Tmp2
Tmp1
8
DI_8
109
108
Tmp2
8
109
Here Tmp1 serves as the on shot which is true (1) for one PLC scan after DI_8 changes from off (0 - input
open) to “On” (1 - input closed to common). If the one-shot is used to control only one function (PLC bit,
coil), you could use that PLC bit in place of Tmp1. You can chose to have any or all of the PLC Digital
Inputs function as one-shots without the need to create the one-shot with this logic. This is provided to
simplify your programming. Refer to the DI 1 Shot (CP-302) which is explained on page 1 of the PLC/
Digital I/O/ screen and in Appendices: Appendix C. If both the one-shot and the logic level are needed
internally, do not change or use the DI 1 Shot ; use the logic above for the one-shot version instead. The
following is another example of a one-shot.
LOAD
AND NOT
OUT
LOAD
OUT
56
108
101
56
108
Cmpr1 Out
Tmp1
DO-1
Cmpr1 Out
Tmp1
Cmpr1 Out
Tmp1
DO_1
56
Cmpr1 Out
108
101
Tmp1
56
108
5 - 141
–—NOTES—
5 - 142
PLC MONITOR
Use the PLC Monitor screens to monitor the state of all the PLC operands. Pages 2 and 3 of the screens
display the PLC bits in sequential order. Press the “help” key on each line to view the names for each bit.
The Help screen will highlight the bits that are active.
Page 1 of the PLC Monitor screens displays the parameters that select the PLC bits and monitor the PLC.
Use the Control Parameters Bit ; PLC Monitor 1 (CP-305) and PLC Monitor 2 (CP-306) to select a bit. The
name and value of the bit that you choose is displayed in the corresponding Monitor Parameters ; PLC Mon
1 Val (MP-58) and PLC Mon 2 Val (MP-59). The default names for these Monitor Parameters (PLC Mon 1
Val and PLC Mon 2 Val) are replaced by the name and value of the PLC Bits selected in PLC Monitor 1
(CP-305) and PLC Monitor 2 (CP-306). You can also use the Code key when you are in any parameter
screen to display the PLC Bit names and values of PLC Mon 1 Val (MP-58) or PLC Mon 2 Val (MP-59).
You can also customize the Status screen to display them.
DI Set (CP-303) simulates an active low condition on one of the digital inputs, DI-8 through DI-15, without
having to physically short the input connector to common. Enter a number with a “1” in the bit location
corresponding to the digital input you want to force active. The action will be reflected in PLC 15- 8
(MP-60), which displays the bit values for the digital inputs DI-8 through DI-15.
PLC Bit Set (CP-307) and PLC Bit Clear (CP-308) allow you to force a PLC Bit “On” (1) or “Off” (0). You
can set (or clear) one of the status bits (contacts), PLC Bits 8-95, but you can not control a PLC Bit (coil)
that is controlled by the PLC program (with the “OUT” command). Enter the number of the PLC Bit that
you want to set (1) into PLC Bit Set (CP-307) and the number that you want to clear (0) into PLC Bit Clear
(CP-308). When you are done testing, enter a “0” into PLC Bit Set (CP-307) and PLC Bit Clear (CP-308) .
They will automatically default back to PLC Bits 3 (ONE) and 2 (ZERO), respectively.
5 - 143
PLC Monitor
PLC Monitor 1 (CP-305)
PLC Monitor 1 (CP-305) determines which PLC bit will be monitored in PLC Mon 1 Val (MP-58). The PLC Mon 1
Val (MP-58) displays the name of the bit rather than “PLC Mon 1 Val”. To select a PLC bit to monitor, enter the
number of the bit or by use the ‘Scroll’ keys (^ or v) to scroll through the list. This bit can be monitored in any screen
when the code select line set to PLC Mon 1 Val (MP-58). For the bit list, refer to Appendices: Appendix H.
PLC Mon 1 Val (MP-58)
PLC Monitor 1 Value (MP-58) displays both the description and the value of the PLC bit that was selected in PLC
Monitor 1 (CP-305). Please note that a description of the PLC bit appears on the display line instead of the
parameter name (PLC Mon 1 Val).
PLC Monitor 2 (CP-306)
PLC Monitor 2 (CP-306) functions identically to PLC Monitor 1 (CP-305). See above.
PLC Mon 2 Val (MP-59)
PLC Monitor 2 Value (MP-59) functions identically toPLC Monitor 1 Value (MP-58). See above.
DI Set (CP-303)
Digital Input Set (CP-303) simulates an “ACTIVE” condition on any or all of the PLC dedicated Digital Inputs (DI
15-8). Digital Input Set (CP-303) is logically OR’ed with the actual DI 15..8 (MP-27) bits to form the PLC 15- 8
(MP-60) bits. The PLC 15- 8 (MP-60) bits are used by the PLC logic. The value of DI Set (CP-303) will not effect
the actual DI 15..8 (MP-27) value, rather, DI 15..8 (MP-27) reflects the present status of the actual inputs. Enter a
“1” in a bit location to simulate an active condition on the corresponding input. DI..15 to DI..8 get mapped into Bit
7 to Bit 0. Page two of the “Help” screen displays inputs 15-8. Refer to Appendices: Appendic C.
PLC 15-8 (MP-60)
PLC 15- 8 (MP-60) displays the status of PLC bits 15-8. A “1” in any bit indicates that the input is “active”. The
digital inputs are active low. Page one of the “Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 15-8 (CP-279). Also refer
to Appendices: Appendic C.
PLC Bit Set (CP-307)
PLC Bit Set (CP-307) forces a PLC bit to be set at “1”. Enter the number of the bit that you want to set at “1”. PLC
Bit Set (CP-307) tests your PLC program rather than commanding a direct operation. The bit is set prior to the PLC
program execution but after all the inputs, comparisons, timers and counters have had their status bits set up. However, the PLC could clear this bit and unpredictable results can occur. Do not attempt to set a PLC bit that is
controlled by an OUT instruction in the PLC program. If you need to force an output, use DIG I/O TEST in the
diagnostics screen. For the bit list, refer to Appendices: Appendix H.
PLC Bit Clear (CP-308)
PLC Bit Clear (CP-308) forces a PLC bit to be reset to “0”. Enter the number of the bit that you want to clear. PLC
Bit Clear (CP-308) tests your PLC rather than to commanding a direct operation. The bit is cleared prior to the PLC
program execution but after all the inputs, comparisons, timers and counters have set up their status bits. However,
the PLC could set this bit and unpredictable results can occur. Do not attempt to clear set a PLC bit that is controlled
by an OUT instruction in the PLC program. If you need to force an output, use DIG I/O TEST in the diagnostics
screen. For the bit list, refer to Appendices: Appendix H.
5 - 144
The PLC Monitoring screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / PLC <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-305)
Enter a bit number.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-58)
Displays the bit name and
value for the prior line.
PLC MONITOR
PLC Monitor 1
DI_8
PLC Monitor 2
DI_9
DI Set
PLC 15- 8
PLC Bit Set
PLC Bit Clear
8
0
9
0
00000000
00000000
3
2
P1/3
(CP-306)
Enter a bit number.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-59)
Displays the bit name and
value for the prior line.
(CP-303)
Enter a code “0” or 1).
Press the Enter key.
(MP-60)
Displays the bit status of
PLC bits 15-8.
(CP-307)
Enter a bit number.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-308)
Enter a bit number.
Press the Enter key.
5 - 145
PLC Monitor
PLC 15-8 (MP-60)
PLC 15- 8 (MP-60) displays the status of PLC bits 15-8 . A “1” in any bit indicates that the input is “active”. The
digital inputs are active low. Page one of the “Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 15-8. Also refer to Appendices: Appendic C.
PLC 23-16 (MP-61)
PLC 23-16 (MP-61) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 23-16 (See graphic below). A “1” in any bit
indicates that the bit is “active”. Page one of the “Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 23-16. Also refer to
Appendices: Appendic C.
PLC 31-24 (MP-62)
PLC 31-24 (MP-62) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 31-24 (See graphic below). A “1” in any bit
indicates that the bit is “active”. Page one of the “Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 31-24. Also refer to
Appendices: Appendic C.
PLC 39-32 (MP-63)
PLC 39-32 (MP-63) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 39-32 (See graphic below). A “1” in any bit
indicates that the bit is “active”. Page one of the “Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 39-32. Also refer to
Appendices: Appendic C.
PLC 47-40 (MP-64)
PLC 47-40 (MP-64) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 47-40 (See graphic below). A “1” in any bit
indicates that the bit is “active”. Page one of the “Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 47-40. Also refer to
Appendices: Appendic C.
PLC 55-48 (MP-65)
PLC 55-48 (MP-65) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 55-48 (See graphic below). A “1” in any bit
indicates that the bit is “active”. Page one of the “Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 55-48. Also refer to
Appendices: Appendic C.
PLC 63-56 (MP-66)
PLC 63-56 (MP-66) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 63-56 (See graphic below). A “1” in any bit
indicates that the bit is “active”. Page one of the “Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 63-56. Also refer to
Appendices: Appendic C.
PLC 71-64 (MP-67)
PLC 71-64 (MP-67) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 71-64. None of these bits are presently active.
They are reserved for future use. Page one of the “Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 71-64. Also refer to
Appendices: Appendic C.
PLC 79-72 (MP-68)
PLC 79-72 (MP-68) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 79-72 (See graphic below). A “1” in any bit
indicates that the bit is “active”. These bits are only used to monitor the operating state of the CX-1010. Page one of
the “Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 79-72. Also refer to Appendices: Appendic C
PLC 87-80 (MP-69)
PLC 87-80 (MP-69) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 87-80 (See graphic below). A “1” in any bit
indicates that the bit is “active”. These bits are only used to monitor the parameter block that is active. Page one of
the “Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 87-80. Also refer to Appendices: Appendic C.
5 - 146
The PLC Monitor screen (page 2).
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
PLC MONITOR
PLC 15- 8
PLC 23- 16
PLC 31- 24
PLC 39- 32
PLC 47- 40
PLC 55- 48
PLC 63- 56
PLC 71- 64
PLC 79- 72
PLC 87- 80
00000000
00000000
00000000
00010000
00011000
00000000
00000010
00010001
00000001
00000001
Displays the
status of the
PLC Bits in
Monitor
Parameters 60
through 69
P2/3
5 - 147
PLC Monitor
PLC 95-88 (MP-70)
PLC 95-88 (MP-70) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 95-88. None of these bits are presently active.
They are reserved for future use. Page one of the “Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 95-88. Also refer to
Appendices: Appendic C.
PLC 107- 100 (MP-71)
PLC 107- 100 (MP-71) displays the status of PLC bits 107-100. A “1” in any bit indicates that the output is “active”.
The digital outputs are active low (current sinking). Page one of the “Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 107100. Also refer to Appendices: Appendic C.
PLC 115-108 (MP-72)
PLC 115-108 (MP-72) displays the status of the internal PLC control bits 115-108. A “1” in any bit indicates that the
bit is “active”. These internal bits (control relays) can be used as global “control relays”. For example, they can be
used to create one-shots or latches. They can also be used to simplify programming. Page one of the “Help” screen
displays the bit map for PLC 115-108. Also refer to Appendices: Appendic C.
PLC 123-116 (MP-73)
PLC 123-116 (MP-73) displays the status of the internal PLC control bits 123-116. A “1” in any bit indicates that the
bit is “active”. Page one of the “Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 123-116. Also refer to Appendices:
Appendic C.
PLC 131-124 (MP-74)
PLC 131-124 (MP-74) displays the status of the internal PLC control bits 131-124. A “1” in any bit indicates that the
bit is “active”. Page one of the “Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 131-124. Also refer to Appendices:
Appendic C.
PLC 139-132 (MP-75)
PLC 139-132 (MP-75) displays the status of the internal PLC control bits 139-132. A “1” in any bit indicates that the
bit is “active”. Page one of the “Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 139-132. Also refer to Appendices:
Appendic C.
PLC 147-140 (MP-76)
PLC 147-140 (MP-76) displays the status of the internal PLC control bits 147-140. A “1” in any bit indicates that the
bit is “active”. Blk Sel A, B, C select the block that is active, if Blk Sel Source (CP-378) has been set to “1” (DgIn).
The chart below indicates which block has been selected, based on the Block Select A, B or C inputs. Page one of the
“Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 147-140. Also refer to Appendices: Appendic C.
PLC 155-148 (MP-77)
PLC 155-148 (MP-77) displays the status of the internal PLC control bits 155-148. A “1” in any bit indicates that the
bit is “active”. Page one of the “Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 155-148. Also refer to Appendices:
Appendic C.
PLC 163-156 (MP-78)
PLC 163-156 (MP-78) displays the status of the internal PLC control bits 163-156. A “1” in any bit indicates that the
bit is “active”. Page one of the “Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 163-156. Also refer to Appendices:
Appendic C.
PLC 171-164 (MP-79)
PLC 171-164 (MP-79) displays the status of the internal PLC control bits 171-164. A “1” in any bit indicates that the
bit is “active”. Page one of the “Help” screen displays the bit map for PLC 171-164. Also refer to Appendices:
Appendic C.
5 - 148
The PLC Monitor screen (page 3).
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
PLC MONITOR
PLC 95- 88
PLC 107- 100
PLC 115- 108
PLC 123- 116
PLC 131- 124
PLC 139- 132
PLC 147- 140
PLC 155- 148
PLC 163- 156
PLC 171- 164
00000000
00000001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00001000
00000000
00000000
Displays the
status of the
PLC Bits in
Monitor
Parameters 70
through 79
P3/3
5 - 149
—NOTES—
5 - 150
PLC TIMERS
The are four timers that work in conjunction with the PLC. Each timer can be set up to generate a pulse.
The timers operate with 1 millisecond resolution. However, when the timer times out and the timer output
becomes active, the PLC program may not react for another millisecond because of the two millisecond scan
time. Therefore, enter the time values at “1” or “2” milliseconds shorter than you actually need to
compensate. The timer outputs reflect the operation of an On-delay timer. If you need an Off-delay
operation, use the “NOT” (complement) of the output. Timer 4, retains the accumulated time even when the
Enable is deactivated.
The operation of each timer is dictated by their respective delay and on-time parameters. The following
shows a typical time-trace of the Tmr1 Out when Tmr1 En changes from “0 ”to “1”. Tmr1 Delay (CP-310)
equals “0.100” Seconds and Tmr1 on Tm (CP-311) equals “-1”.
1
Tmr1 EN
0
0.100 Sec
1
Tmr1 OUT
0
The following shows a time-trace of the Tmr1 Out when Tmr1 En changes from “0” to “1”. Tmr1 Delay
(CP-310) equals “0.100” Seconds and Tmr1 on Tm (CP-311) equals “0.050” Seconds.
1
Tmr1 EN
0
0.100 Sec
1
Tmr1 OUT
0
0.050 Sec
5 - 151
PLC Timers
Tmr1 Delay (CP-310)
Timer 1 Delay (CP-310) is the time, in seconds, from which Timer 1 becomes enabled (Tmr1 En bit going from “0”
to “1”) until Tmr1 Out bit (24) in the PLC is going active (1). When the Tmr1 En bit (124) returns to “0”, the Tmr1
Out bit (24) is reset to “0” and the delay-time is reset to “0”.
Tmr1 on Tm (CP-311)
Timer 1 on Time (CP-311) is the time, in seconds, from which Timer 1 is going active (= 1) until Tmr1 Out is going
inactive (back to “0”). When the Tmr1 En bit (124) returns to “0”, the Tmr1 Out bit (24) is reset = “0” and the ontime is reset to “0”. If you want Timer 1on-time to be infinite (“On” until Tmr1 is disabled with Tmr1 En = “0”), then
enter a value of "-1" into Tmr1 on Tm (CP-311).
Tmr2 Delay (CP-312)
Timer 2 Delay (CP-312) is the time in seconds from which Timer 2 becoming enabled (Tmr2 En bit going from “0”
to “1”) until Tmr2 Out bit (25) in the PLC going active (1). When the Tmr2 En bit (125) returns to “0”, the Tmr2 Out
bit (25) is reset to “0” and the delay-time is reset to “0”.
Tmr2 on Tm (CP-313)
Timer 2 on Time (CP-313) is the time, in seconds, from which Timer 2 is going active (= 1) until Tmr2 Out is going
inactive (back to “0”). When the Tmr2 En bit (125) returns to “0”, the Tmr2 Out bit (25) is reset = “0” and the ontime is reset to “0”. If you want Tmr2 on-time to be infinite (“On” until Tmr2 is disabled with Tmr2 En = “0”), then
enter a value of "-1" into Tmr2 on Tm (CP-313).
Tmr3 Delay (CP-314)
Timer 3 Delay (CP-314) is the time, in seconds, from which Timer 3 becomes enabled (Tmr3 En bit going from “0”
to “1”) until Tmr3 Out bit (26) in the PLC is going active (1). When the Tmr3 En bit (126) returns to “0”, the Tmr3
Out bit (26) is reset to “0” and the delay-time is reset to “0”.
Tmr3 on Tm (CP-315)
Timer 3 on Time (CP-315) is the time, in seconds, from which Timer 3 is going active (= 1) until Tmr3 Out is going
inactive (back to “0”). When the Tmr3 En bit (126) returns to “0”, the Tmr3 Out bit (26) is reset = “0” and the ontime is reset to “0”. If you want Timer 3 on-time to be infinite (“On” until Tmr3 is disabled with Tmr3 En = “0”),
then enter a value of "-1" into Timer 3 on Time (CP-315).
Tmr4 Delay (CP-316)
Timer 4 Delay (CP-316) is the time, in seconds, from Timer 4 becoming enabled (Tmr4 En bit going from “0” to “1”)
toTmr4 Out bit (27) in the PLC going active (1). If Tmr4 becomes disabled, the delay-time is retained so the timing
can continue when Tmr4 is re-enabled. The Tmr4Rst bit (128) in the PLC must be used to reset the delay time to “0”.
Tmr4 on Tm (CP-317)
Timer 4 on Tm (CP-317) is the time, in seconds, from Tmr4 Out going active (= 1) until Tmr4 Out going inactive
(back to “0”). When Tmr4 becomes disabled, the on-time is retained so the timing can continue when Tmr4 is reenabled. The Tmr4 Rst bit (128) in the PLC must be used to reset the on-time to “0”. If you want Tmr4 on-time to
be infinite (“On” until Tmr4 is reset with Tmr4 Rst = 1) then enter a value of “-1” in Tmr4 on Tm (CP-317).
Tmr4 Time (MP-57)
Timer 4 Time (MP-57) displays the elapsed time, in seconds, for Timer 4 during the delay part of it's operation.
5 - 152
The PLC Timers screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / PLC <—
(CP-310)
Enter the seconds.
Press the Enter key.
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-311)
Enter the seconds.
Press the Enter key.
PLC TIMERS
(CP-312)
Enter the seconds.
Press the Enter key.
Tmr1 Delay
Tmr1 on Tm
Tmr2 Delay
Tmr2 on Tm
Tmr3 Delay
Tmr3 on Tm
Tmr4 Delay
Tmr4 on Tm
Tmr4 Time
1.000
-1
1.000
-1
1.000
-1
1.000
-1
0.000
P1/1
(CP-313)
Enter the seconds.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-314)
Enter the seconds.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-315)
Enter the seconds.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-316)
Enter the seconds.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-317)
Enter the seconds.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-57)
Displays the elapsed
time in seconds.
5 - 153
—NOTES—
5 - 154
PLC Counters
There are four event counters that are associated with the PLC. One of these counters functions as an up/
down counter. The other three counters operate as up-counters. The maximum count rate is approximately
100 counts per second (100 Hz). The up-counters all have upper trigger values associated with them. When
the count reaches this trigger value, the counter output will be set automatically to “1”. The count will
continue past the trigger level when more transitions occur on the Increment PLC Bit. However, as long as
the count is equal to or greater than the (up-counter) trigger level, the counter output PLC Bit will be “1”.
Each up-counter has a reset PLC bit associated with it to reset the count to “0”. The up/down counter has a
preset value that is loaded into the counter when the counter reset PLC Bit is set to a “1”. Special Control
Parameters hold the current count of the counters. As a result, the values are retained during a power-down.
In addition, you can enter a new value into the count or increment/decrement the value with the scroll keys.
The up/down counter has a down count trigger value and an associated output to indicate when the count is
less than or equal to this trigger level.
The position counters that are associated with FI1 and FI2 are available for monitoring as well as for use in
the numerical comparators. These counters are also used to determine the position error, which in turn drives
the zero-error and position loops. These counters count pulses for non-quadrature (x1) encoders or count
edges for quadrature (x4) encoders. You can set the count at which the counters rollover (to “0”) with
FI1PsnRO (CP-268) and FI2PsnRO (CP-269). When the position-counter count reaches (or exceeds) the
rollover value, the counter is reset to “0” (plus any count over the rollover value) and the rollover bit in the
PLC is set (1) for one scan (one-shot). The rollover bits for FI1 and FI2 are FI1PsnRO (PLC Bit 38) and
FI2PsnRO (PLC Bit 39) respectively. The counters can be preset with the corresponding preset values.
5 - 155
PLC EVENT COUNTERS
Cntr1 Cnt (CP-321)
Counter 1 Count (CP-321) is the current count for “Counter 1”. The CX-1010 automatically increments it one count
for every “0” to “1” transition of the Cntr1 Inc bit (130). Counter 1 Count is the default batch counter. Either use the
“Scroll” keys or enter a new number to change this value. When the PLC program sets Cntr1 Rst bit (135) to “1”,
then the Counter 1 Count (CP-321) resets to “0” .
Cntr1 Trig (CP-320)
When Counter 1 Count (CP-321) is greater than or equal to Counter 1 Trigger (CP-320), then the Cntr1 Out bit (32)
in the PLC is set to “1”. If the count is less than, Cntr1 Out bit (32) will equal “0”.
Cntr2 Cnt (CP-323)
Counter 2 Count (CP-323) is the current count for “Counter 2”. The CX-1010 automatically increments it one count
for every “0” to “1” transition of the Cntr1 Inc bit (131). Counter 2 Count is the default batch counter. Either use the
“Scroll” keys or enter a new number to change this value. When the PLC program sets Cntr1 Rst bit (136) to “1”,
then the Counter 2 Count (CP-323) resets to “0” .
Cntr2 Trig (CP-322)
When Counter 2 Count (CP-323) is greater than or equal to Counter 2 Trigger (CP-322), then the Cntr2 Out bit (33)
in the PLC is set to “1”. If the count is less than, Cntr2 Out bit (33) will equal “0”.
Cntr3 Cnt (CP-325)
Counter 3 Count (CP-325) is the current count for “Counter 3”. The CX-1010 automatically increments it one count
for every “0” to “1” transition of the Cntr3 Inc bit (132). Counter 3 Count is the default batch counter. Either use the
“Scroll” keys or enter a new number to change this value. When the PLC program sets Cntr3 Rst bit (137) to “1”,
then the Counter 3 Count (CP-325) resets to “0” .
Cntr3 Trig (CP-324)
When Counter 3 Count (CP-325) is greater than or equal to Counter 3 Trigger (CP-324), then the Cntr3 Out bit (34)
in the PLC is set to “1”. If the count is less than, Cntr3Out bit (34) will equal “0”.
Cntr4 Cnt (CP-327)
Counter 4 Count (CP-327) is the current count for “Counter 4”. The CX-1010 automatically increments it one count
for every “0” to “1” transition of the Cntr4 Inc bit (133). Counter 4 Count is the default batch counter. Either use the
“Scroll” keys or enter a new number to change this value. When the PLC program sets Cntr4 Rst bit (138) to “1”,
then the Counter 4 Count (CP-327) resets to “0” .
Cntr4 Preset (CP-329)
When the Counter 4 Rst bit in the PLC Programming screen is set to “ 1”, then Counter 4 Cnt (CP-327) is set to and
held at the Counter 4 Preset (CP-329) value. If you need a transition preset , then create a one-shot or, when possible,
use the DI 1 Shot (CP-302) mask.
Cntr4 TrigUp (CP-326)
When Counter 4 Count (CP-327) is greater than or equal to Counter 4 Trigger Up (CP-326), then the Cntr4 UpOut
bit (35) in the PLC is set to “1”. If the count is less than, Cntr4UpO bit (35) will equal “0”.
Cntr4 TrigDn (CP-328)
When Counter 4 Count (CP-327) is less than or equal to Counter 4 Trigger Down (CP-328), then the Cntr4DnO bit
(36) in the PLC is set to “1”. If the count is greater than, Cntr4DnO bit (36) will equal “0”.
5 - 156
The PLC Event Counters screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / PLC <—
(CP-321)
Enter the counts.
Press the Enter key.
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-320)
Enter the counts.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-323)
Enter the counts.
Press the Enter key.
PLC EVENT CNTRS
Cntr1 Cnt
Cntr1 Trig
Cntr2 Cnt
Cntr2 Trig
Cntr3 Cnt
Cntr3 Trig
Cntr4 Cnt
Cntr4Preset
Cntr4TrigUp
Cntr4TrigDn
0
10
0
10
0
10
0
0
10
0
(CP-322)
Enter the counts.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-325)
Enter the counts.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-324)
Enter the counts.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-327)
Enter the counts.
Press the Enter key.
P1/1
(CP-329)
Enter the counts.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-326)
Enter the counts.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-328)
Enter the counts.
Press the Enter key.
5 - 157
PLC POSITION COUNTERS
FI1PsnPrst (CP-266)
When the RstFI1Pos bit (149) of the PLC is active (1) the value of FI1Position Prst (CP-266) is automatically
inserted into FI1Position (MP-05). If a transition preset is required, either create a one-shot with PLC logic or use
a Digital Input that is configured as a one-shot input by the DI 1 Shot (CP-302) mask.
FI2PsnPrst (CP-267)
When the RstFI2Pos bit (150) of the PLC is active (1) the value of FI2 Position Prst (CP-267) is automatically
inserted into FI1Position (MP-10). If a transition preset is required, either create a one-shot with PLC logic or use
a Digital Input that is configured as a one-shot input by the DI 1 Shot (CP-302) mask.
FI1PsnRO (CP-268)
When the FI1 position (MP-05) is equal to or greater than a positive FI1Position Roll Over (CP-268) or equal to or
less than a negative FI1Position Roll Over, then the FI1PsnRO bit (38) in the PLC is set to “1” (for 1 PLC scan or
one-shot). The FI1 position (MP-05) resets to “0”, plus the difference between FI1 position and FI1PsnRO (the
difference is not discarded).
FI2PsnRO (CP-269)
When the FI2 Position (MP-10) is equal to or greater than a positive FI2 Position Roll Over (CP-269) or equal to or
less than a negative FI2 Position Roll Over, then the FI2Psn RO bit (39) in the PLC is set to “1” (for 1 PLC scan or
one-shot). The FI2 Position (MP-10) resets to “0”, plus the difference between FI2 position and FI2PsnRO (the
difference is not discarded).
FI1 Psn (MP-05)
Frequency Input 1 Position (MP-05) displays the present value of the Frequency Input 1 Position (MP-05) in Engineering Units, as specified by FI1 Pulses (CP-162) and EU FI1 (CP-163). The placement of the decimal point is the
same as the placement of the decimal point in EU FI1 (CP-163)
FI2 Psn (MP-10)
Frequency Input 2 Position (MP-10) displays the present value of the Frequency Input 2 Position (CP-10) in Engineering Units, as specified by FI2 Pulses (CP-167) and EU FI2 (CP-168). The placement of the decimal point is the
same as the placement of the decimal point in EU FI2 (CP-168).
5 - 158
The PLC Position Counters screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / PLC <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-266)
Enter the E.U.
Press the Enter key.
PLC POSITION CNTRS
(CP-267)
Enter the E.U.
Press the Enter key.
FI1PsnPrst
FI2PsnPrst
0
0
FI1PsnRO
FI2PsnRO
10
10
FI1 Psn
FI2 Psn
0.0
0.0
(CP-268)
Enter the E.U.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-269)
Enter the E.U.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-05)
Displays the value of
the Frequency Input 1.
P1/1
(MP-10)
Displays the value of
the Frequency Input 2.
5 - 159
PLC DATA COPY
The PLC Data Copy function is used to copy CP or MP data (values) to a different CP (copy from source to
destination). When a 0 to 1 transition occurs in the DataCopy 1 PLC bit (160), the value of the CP or MP
selected by Copy Source 1 (CP-296) is copied to the CP selected by Copy Dest 1 (CP-297). When a 0 to 1
transition occurs in the DataCopy 2 PLC bit (161), the value of the CP or MP selected by Copy Source 2
(CP-298) is copied to the CP selected by Copy Dest 2 (CP-299). The values of the Copy Source CP or MP is
unaffected by the data copy function.
Copy Source 1 (CP-296)
Copy Source 1 (CP-296) identifies the CP or MP whose value is copied to Copy Dest 1 when a 0 to 1 transition occurs
in the DataCopy 1 PLC bit.
Copy Dest 1 (CP-297)
Copy Dest 1 (CP-297) identifies the CP that takes on the value of the CP or MP identified by Copy Source 1 when a
0 to 1 transition occurs in the DataCopy 1 PLC bit.
Copy Source 2 (CP-298)
Copy Source 2 (CP-298) identifies the CP or MP whose value is copied to Copy Dest 2 when a 0 to 1 transition occurs
in the DataCopy 2 PLC bit.
Copy Dest 2 (CP-299)
Copy Dest 2 (CP-299) identifies the CP that takes on the value of the CP or MP identified by Copy Source 2 when a
0 to 1 transition occurs in the DataCopy 2 PLC bit.
5 - 160
The PLC Data Copy screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / PLC <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-296)
Enter parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
PLC DATA COPY
(CP-297)
Enter parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
Copy Source 1
Copy Dest 1
999
999
Copy Source 2
Copy Dest 2
0
0
(CP-298)
Enter parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-299)
Enter parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
P1/1
5 - 161
—NOTES—
5 - 162
DIGITAL I/O
The PLC / Digital I/O, (page 1) screen displays parameters that are associated with the digital inputs for the
PLC (DI-8 through DI-15). The DI-14 and DI-15 are routed to the Scroll Up bit (168) and Scroll Dn bit
(169) respectively by the default PLC program. This allows these digital inputs to control the remote scrollup and remote scroll-down function. The remote- scroll function can be assigned to almost any of the
Control Parameters. Use Remote Scroll (CP-300) to select the Control Parameter that you want to assign to
the remote scroll function. The rate of change when the PLC Bit is “1” (On or Digital Input active with
default PLC program) is determined by Rmt Scroll Rate (CP-301). This is the number of increments/
decrements to the least significant digit every second that the PLC bit (input) is active. Use Table 5-1 for
the time-between increments or decrements of the various remote scroll rates.
DI 1 Shot (CP-302) determines which digital inputs will cause the corresponding PLC bit (8-15) to be “1”
(On) for one PLC scan (one- shot) when an open-to-closed (active) transition occurs on the input. This is
the default one-shot for the PLC.
Remote Scroll Rate
Increment Interval
(Time)
Number of 10 - Msec
Samples per Interval
1
1000 Msec = 1 Sec
100
2
500 Msec
50
3
333 Msec —> 330 Msec
33
4
250 Msec
25
5
200 Msec
20
10
100 Msec
10
11
91 Msec —> 90 Msec
9
12
83 Msec —> 80 Msec
8
14
71 Msec —> 70 Msec
7
15
67 Msec —> 60 Msec
6
20
50 Msec
5
25
40 Msec
4
30
33 Msec —> 30 Msec
3
50
20 Msec
2
100
10 Msec
1
Table 5-1 Remote Scroll Rates
5 - 163
Digital I/O
Remote Scroll (CP-300)
In Remote Scroll (CP-300), enter the number of the Control Parameter that you want the Remote Scroll Up bit (168)
or the Remote Scroll Dn bit (169) to increment or decrement by 1 least significant digit, at the Scroll Rate (CP-301).
To disable the function, set Remote Scroll (CP-300) to “0” .
Rmt Scroll Rate (CP-301)
Remote Scroll Rate (CP-301) is the number of times per second, that the Control Parameter that you entered in
Remote Scroll (CP-300) is either incremented or decremented 1 least significant digit , when the Remote Scroll Up
bit (168) or the Remote Scroll Dn bit (169) is active.
The Remote Scroll Up bit (168) and the Remote Scroll Dn bit (169) are monitored at a 10 millisecond (Msec) scan
rate. The input (internal PLC function) must hold the PLC active (“1” in the PLC) for a minimum of 12 Msec (10
Msec if activated internally) to guarantee the first count and the subsequent operation. The first increment or decrement of the Control Parameter that you entered in Remote Scroll (CP-300) occurs when the PLC bit is recognized as
active by the 10 Msec scan. If the PLC bit is low during the next 10 Msec scan when the next PLC bit is recognized
as active by the 10 Msec scan, then the function resets and increments the parameter again. This allows a debounce
of approximately 10 Msec, along with an additional 2 Msec hardware filtering. Once the PLC bit remains active, the
increment or decrement occurs at a periodic rate, which is determined by Rmt Scroll Rate (CP-301). This time is
given approximately by 1/(Rmt Scroll Rate {CP-301}). The increment or decrement is performed at integer multiples of 10 Msec (1-100), with some exceptions that are apparent on Table 5-1. If Rmt Scroll Rate (CP-301) is set to
“10” ( 10 times per second or 100 Msec per increment update) and the PLC bit is only active (1) for 1/2 second, then
the Control Parameter that was selected in Remote Scroll (CP-300) will increment by “5” (the least significant digit).
There is an upper limit to the actual scroll rate. It may not be possible to achieve a fast rate (e.g., 100 times per
second, 10 Msec counting) because of the computation time that is required to process the scroll rate that you entered
in Rmt Scroll Rate (CP-301). If the computation time to input the new value takes longer than the increment interval
(10 Msec in this example) then the actual rate will be slower than the scroll rate that you entered in Rmt Scroll Rate
(CP-301). Refer to the Table 5-1 for the time-between increment or decrement of the various remote scroll rates.
DI 1 Shot (CP-302)
Use the Digital Input 1 Shot (CP-302) to create a one scan pulse (one-shot) as the result of a high-to-low (open-toclosed) transition on any or all of the PLC dedicated inputs. To generate a 1- scan pulse for an inactive high to an
active low transition, enter a “1” in the bit location of corresponding digital input. In the example below, the “1”
has been entered in digital input 14.
DI 7..0 (MP-26)
Digital Input 7-0 displays the value of the “J6” digital inputs. A ‘1’ in the bit location indicates a “low voltage”
condition on the corresponding input (which is consistent with a contact closure to common). Refer to Appendices:
Appendix C for the DI 7..0 (MP-26) bit map list.
DI 15..8 (MP-27)
Digital Input 15-8 (MP-27) displays the value of the “J7” digital inputs. A ‘1’ in the bit location indicates a “low
voltage” condition on the corresponding input (which is consistent with a contact closure to common). These eight
inputs can be set up in the PLC Programming screen to generate a One-Shot Pulse on a high-to-low transition.
Refer to Appendices: Appendix C for the DI 15..0 (MP-27) bit map list.
DO 7..0 (MP-28)
Digital Output 7-0 displays the value of the “J2” digital outputs. A ‘1’ in the bit location indicates an active “low
voltage” condition on the corresponding open collector output (which would sink DC current). Refer to Appendices:
Appendix C for the DO 7...0 (MP-28) bit map list.
5 - 164
The Digital I/O screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / PLC <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-300)
Enter a Parameter Code.
Press the Enter key.
DIGITAL I/O
Remote Scroll
Rmt Scroll Rate
(CP-301)
Enter increments or
decrements.
Press the Enter key.
101
10
DI 1 Shot
00000000
DI 7..0
DI 15..8
DO 7..0
00000000
00000000
00000001
P1/1
(CP-302)
Enter a code (0 or 1).
Press the Enter key.
(MP-26)
Displays the value of
the “J6” digital inputs.
(MP-27)
Displays the value of
the “J7” digital inputs.
(MP-28)
Displays the value of
the “J2” digital outputs.
5 - 165
PLC PROGRAMMING
Editor and the Compiler:
The PLC program consists of a text-based list of commands (instructions) and operands that work on bit data
to produce the same result as a ladder-logic language. Each rung of a ladder logic program is implemented
as a group of commands/operands starting with the “LOAD” (or LD NOT) command and ending with the
“OUT ”command. A special series of screens that function as an editor allow you to change the PLC
program. You can add commands, delete commands or change a command or operand. This is done with
the keypad and screens; programming computer is not required.
Go to PLC / PLC Programming. This will bring up the current PLC program. There are five pages with a
total of 64 lines. Each line consists of one command and one operand. The simplest rung would require two
lines: one for the opening “LOAD” and one for the closing “OUT”. Scroll through the lines with the Par Up
or Par Down keys. The second line of the PLC Programming title block will display what line is active
(highlight) and if the command or operand on that line is active. Use the Page Up and Page Down keys
scroll quickly through the entire program. Any changes made to the PLC program will be compiled
immediately. The changes go into effect as soon as the PLC Program has been exited and saved.
Changing Commands:
Scroll the Par Up or Par Down keys to the command that you want to change (highlight). Use the Page Up
and Page Down keys scroll quickly through the entire program. The second line of the PLC Programming
title block will display what line is active (highlight) and the command on the line that is active. When an
command is active (highlight), it can be changed by using the “increment scroll up/down” keys to scroll
through the list of available commands. Stop scrolling when the correct command appears. Use the Clear
key to delete a the active line. The operand may need to be changed to be consistent with the new command.
Use the Par Down key to scroll to the operand (highlight).
Changing Operands:
Scroll the Par Up or Par Down keys to the to the operand that you want to change. Use the Page Up and
Page Down keys scroll quickly through the entire program. The second line of the PLC Programming title
block will display what line is active (highlight) and the operand on the line that is active. When a operands
is active, it can be changed either by entering the PLC Bit number or by scrolling through the list of operands
with the “increment scroll ▲ or ▼” keys. The name of the operand appears on the line to the right of the
PLC Bit number. Stop scrolling when the correct operand appears. Press the Enter key to enter operand.
Use the Clear key to delete a the active line.
Inserting a New Line:
To insert a new line at the active line (highlight), scroll to the command and press the Enter key. The new
line is now active and the prior active line, as well as the rest of the lines, move down one line. The new
line appears as a “NOP” (no operation) command and a “No Opnd” (NOP operand).
To Insert a new line below the active line (highlight), scroll to the operand and press the Enter key. A new
line is inserted on the next line and becomes the active line. The entire program, moves down one line. The
new line appears as a “NOP” (no operation) command and a “No Opnd” (NOP operand).
Delete a Line:
To delete a line, scroll to either the command or operand of the line and press the Clear key. A dialog box
appears and asks if you want to delete the line. Press the Enter key to delete the line or the Clear key to
cancel the request to delete.
5 - 166
Status and Help screens:
Press the Help key to go to the help screen for a description of the PLC Programming. Press the Status key
to access the status screen. Press the Status key again to return to the PLC Programming screen. The Code
is still functional in the status screen. However, if you access the status screen from the PLC programming
screen, then you can not access the menu screens from the status screen. You must exit the PLC
Programming screen in order to access the menu screens.
Closing and Saving the PLC Programming screen:
To return to the menu screen, press the Menu key. If you made any changes, a dialog box will appear to
confirm the changes. To keep the changes, press the Enter key. Pressing the Enter key to accept the changes
does not alter the PLC backup or the PLC default program. To discard the current changes, press the Clear
key.
DANGER
When you exit the PLC Programming screen
and press the Enter key, the changes will take effect
immediately.
The new program could cause a digital output to
change state, and cause an actuator to engage or
disengage.
Creating a Customized Backup Program:
To save the changes that you have made to the PLC Program as a customized backup PLC program, go to
the Device Configuration/Load & Save Parms screen (page 1) and enter “1” in Save PLC Parm (CP-399).
Loading the Backup Program or the Default Program:
The last page (page 5) of the PLC programming help screens (accessed from any line) allows you to choose
between loading the backup PLC program (that you have customized) or loading the default PLC program
that was shipped from the factory. “Load Default Program” is the default. You can also access the PLC
backup or the PLC default programs from the Device Configuration/Load & Save Parms screen (page 1). For
the list of the factory default PLC Program Logic, see Appendices: Appendix I.
NOTE: The backup PLC Program is identical to the default PLC Program until you customize the PLC and
then save the backup in the Device Configuration/Load & Save Parms screen. In addition, if you
perform a “Clear 9” power -up, your customized backup PLC Program will revert back to the
default PLC Program.
5 - 167
The PLC Programing screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / PLC <—
Use the Par keys to
scroll the highlight bar
and make either a
“Command” or a
“Operand” active.
PLC PROGRAMMING
Line: 1 <Command>
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
8
140
9
141
10
142
11
159
12
130
13
DI_8
Blk Sel A
DI_9
Blk Sel B
DI_10
Blk Sel C
DI_11
Negate SR
DI_12
Cntr1 Inc
DI 13
The second line in the title
block line indicates when
the cursor is highlighting a
“Command” or a
"Operand”. It also
displays the line number.
Use the Enter key to insert
a new line, either in place
of or below the active line.
The name of the Operand.
Choose a
Command:
“Or”,
“And Not”,
“And”,
“LD Not”,
“Load”,
“NOP”,
“End”,
“Out”,
“Not”,
“x or Not”,
“x or”,
“Or Not”.
5 - 168
Choose an Operand
between 0–171.
Use the Page keys to go scroll through the 64 command lines, a page at a time.
The screens below display the default sttings for lines 12 through 64.
PLC PROGRAMMING
Line: 12 <Command>
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OR
OR
OUT
LD NOT
OUT
135 Cntr 1 RST
14 DI_IN 14
168 Scroll UP
15 DI_IN 15
169 Scroll DN
68 Loop Open
69 Loop Vel
74 H-Stop
151 RstPsnErr1
44 Fb @ 0Spd
100 DO_0
PLC PROGRAMMING
Line: 34 <Command>
OUT
LOAD
OUT
<END>
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
106
41
107
171
171
171
171
171
171
171
171
DO_6
Drive En
DO_7
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
PLC PROGRAMMING
Line: 56 <Command>
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
171
171
171
171
171
171
171
171
171
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
PLC PROGRAMMING
Line: 23 <Command>
LOAD
OUT
LD NOT
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
48 MAx Fb Spd
101 DO_1
57 Cmpr2 Out
102 DO_2
58 Cmpr3 Out
103 DO_3
59 Cmpr4 Out
104 DO_4
32 Cntrl1 Out
105 DO_5
40 CO Sign
PLC PROGRAMMING
Line: 45 <Command>
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
171
171
171
171
171
171
171
171
171
171
171
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
PLC PROGRAMMING
Line: 64 <Command>
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
171
171
171
171
171
171
171
171
171
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
No Opnd
5 - 169
PLC Programming / Help Screen Option and Save Screen
The last page of the Help screens (page 5) allows you to choose between
creating a backup of the changes that you have entered or loading the default
bit program that was shipped from the factory. “Load Default Program” is the
default choice.
HELP
Help
Make
press
For
PLC
Selection
enter
to
Editor:
below
load.
To change to “Load Backup
Program”, use the “par” key to
scroll the highlight bar.
Load Default Program
Load Backup Program
P5/5
Press the Menu key from any of the
PLC Proramming screens to exit. If
you have made changes in any of the
screens, a dialog box will popup and
give you the opportunity to save or to
discard your changes.
Press the Enter key to save
your changes or press the
Clear key to discard your
changes.
5 - 170
PLC PROGRAMMING
Line: 1 <Command>
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
8
DI_8
140
Blk Sel A
9
DI_9
Save Changes?
141
Blk Sel B
Press...
10
DI_10
ENTER to Save
142
Blk Sel C
CLEAR to Discard
11
DI_11
159
Negate SR
12
DI_12
130
Cntr1 Inc
13
DI 13
DEVICE CONFIGURE
The Device Configure screens allow you to perform a varitey of load, save and setup functions, The “Load”
parameters allow you to load Control Parameter values and the PLC program from either the backup or from
the factory default. The “Save” parameters allow you to save the Control Parameter values and the PLC
program to a backup copy. You can customize the Status screen for your specific requirements. The Serial
Communications Setup screen includes parameters that configure the serial communications port. When
Keypad Lock Input is active, Control Parameter values can not be changed. The Keypad Lockout Setup
screens allow you to specify which Control Parameters will be exempt from the lockout when the Keypad
Lockout Input is active.The Video Setup screen includes the parameters that control the screen operation.
Display Setup contrast and adjust the pixel intensity of the screen display. The Alarm Indicator Mask
screen includes the parameters that determine which alarms and which numerical comparator outcomes will
cause the ‘alm’ to flash in the lower-left corner of the screen. The DeviceNet setup includes Control
Parameters for DeviceNet network communications.
Caution: To avoid damage to your system, the CX-1010 must be calibrated and the motor drive set up
before you operate your system. Refer to Drive Setup / Calibration: Calibration.
The Device Configure screens are:
• Status Screen Setup
• Load and Save Parms
• Keypad Lock Setup
• Serial Comm Setup
• DeviceNet Setup
• Video Setup
• Alm Indicator Mask
5 - 171
STATUS SCREEN SETUP
You can customize the six status lines, as well as the large number display and the E.U. line on the Status
screen. To customize the large number display, enter this code of the parameter that you want displayed in
Lg Number Parm (CP-340). Use Large Number Units (CP-199) to select and customize the E.U. line that
appears immediately below the large number display. For each of the status lines (CP-341 through
(CP-346), enter the code of the parameter that you want to appear on the corresponding line. You can enter a
“0” in status lines 2 - 6 if you want them to remain blank. You can also access and change Control
Parameters 341 through 346 while you are in the Status screen by using the Code key. For details on the
Code key, refer to the Status screen in Operator Interface: Screen Operation.
Lg Number Parm (CP-340)
Use Large Number Parameter (CP-340) to select the parameter that displays in the Large Number Display in the
Status screen (refer to the status screen in Operator Interface: Screen Operation. You can also use the Code key to
access and change CP-340 in the Status Screen.
Lg Number Units (CP-199)
Use Large Number Units (CP-199) to select the E.U. text that displays immediately below the Large Number
Display in the Status screen (refer to the status screen in Operator Interface: Screen Operation). Enter the numeric
code that identifies the E.U. for the Control Parameter displayed in the Large Number Parameter (CP-340). Refer to
CP-199 in Appendices: Appendix C for the numeric code list. The Help screen for CP-199 also contains a partial list
of numeric code options. In addition, you can also scroll through the numeric code options by accessing CP-199 with
the Code key while you are in the in the Status screen.
Status Line 1 (CP-341)
Use Status Line 1 (CP-341) to select the parameter that displays on the first line, under the Large Number Display, of
the Status screen (refer to the status screen in Operator Interface: Screen Operation). You can also use the Code key
to access and change CP-341 in the Status screen.
Status Line 2 (CP-342)
Use Status Line 2 (CP-342) to select the parameter that displays on the second line (under the Large Number Display)
of the Status screen (refer to the status screen in Operator Interface: Screen Operation). If you want this line to
remain blank, enter a “0” in CP- 342. You can also use the Code key to access and change CP-342 in the Status
screen.
Status Line 3 (CP-343)
Use Status Line 3 (CP-343) to select the parameter that displays on the third line (under the Large Number Display)
of the Status screen (refer to the status screen in Operator Interface: Screen Operation). If you want this line to
remain blank, enter a “0” in CP- 343. You can also use the Code key to access and change CP-343 in the Status
screen.
Status Line 4 (CP-344)
Use Status Line 4 (CP-344) to select the parameter that displays on the fourth line (under the Large Number Display)
of the Status screen (refer to the status screen in Operator Interface: Screen Operation). If you want this line to
remain blank, enter a “0” in CP- 344. You can also use the “Code key to access and change CP-344 in the Status
screen.
Status Line 5 (CP-345)
Use Status Line 5 (CP-345) to select the parameter that displays on the fifth line (under the Large Number Display)
of the Status screen (refer to the status screen in Operator Interface: Screen Operation). If you want this line to
remain blank, enter a “0” in CP- 345. You can also use the “Code key to access and change CP-345 in the Status
screen.
Status Line 6 (CP-346)
Use Status Line 6 (CP-346) to select the parameter that displays sixth line (under the Large Number Display) of the
Status screen (refer to the status screen in Operator Interface: Screen Operation). If you want this line to remain
blank, enter a “0” in CP- 346. You can also use the “Code key to access and change CP-346 in the Status screen.
5 - 172
The Status Screen Setup screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / Device Configure <—
(CP-340)
Enter a parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-199)
Enter a code (0-80).
Press the Enter key.
STATUS SCREEN SETUP
Lg Number Parm
Lg Number Units
Status Line 1
Status Line 2
Status Line 3
Status Line 4
Status Line 5
Status Line 6
40
1
101
39
50
51
53
54
(CP-341)
Enter a parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-342 through
CP- 346)
Enter a either a
parameter code or a “0”.
Press the Enter key.
P1/1
5 - 173
LOAD & SAVE PARMS
The Load and Store Parameters screen includes four parameters. The “Load” parameters allow you to load
Control Parameter values and the PLC program from either the backup or from the factory default. The
“Save” parameters allow you to save the Control Parameter values and the PLC program to a backup copy.
The Control Parameters are located in two sections: the Main List CPs and the Block CPs. The Main List
CPs are (CP-101 through CP-394). The Block CP’s are (CP-400 through CP-567). You can load and save
each section separately, or you can load and save both sections together .
Load Parms (CP-396)
Use Load Parameters (CP-396) to retrieve (load) parameter values from either the factory or the default backup list.
You can specify which parameter values to load form the back up, per the list below. It is easier to select the Load
Parameters values through the Help screen, however, you can enter the corresponding number directly into the
Load Parameters (CP-396). A message will flash in the error and message status bar at the bottom of the screen to
indicate the completion of the operation . The Load Parameters operation will not function while the CX-1010 is in
“RUN”.
6 = Load Dflts BlockCP
5 = Load Dflts Main CP
4 = Load Dflts All Cp
3 = Load Backup BlockCP
2 = Load Backup Main CP
1 = Load Backup All Cps
0 = No Change
Load Factory Defaults into CP-400 through CP-567
Load Factory Defaults into CP-101 through CP-394
Load Factory Defaults into CP-101 through CP-567
Load Backup into CP-400 through CP-567
Load Backup into CP-101 through CP-394
Load Backup into CP-101 through CP-567
Load PLC Prgm (CP-397)
Use Load PLC Program (CP-397) to retrieve (load) either the backup for the PLC program which you have saved
or the factory default PLC program. Enter “1” to load the backup PLC program or enter “2 ” to load the factory
default PLC program. You can also select the one of the two values through the “Help” screen. The loaded program
is compiled and a message will flash in the error and message status bar at the bottom of the screen to indicate the
completion of the operation. The Load PLC Program operation will not function while the CX-1010 is in “RUN”.
2 = Load Dflt PLC Prg
1 = Load Backup PLC Prg
0 = No Change
Load Factory Default PLC program
Load Backup PLC program
Save Parms (CP-398)
Use Save Parameters (CP-398) to save the current parameter values to the backup. You can specify which parameter values to save as backup, per the list below Either enter the corresponding number directly into the Save
Parameters (see list below) or select the Save Parameters values through the “Help” screen. A message (Saved2
BkUp) will flash in the error and message status bar at the bottom of the screen to indicate the completion of the
operation.
3 = Save Block CP’s
2 = Save Main CP’s
1 = Save All CP’s
0 = No Change
Save CP-400 through CP-567 to Backup
Save CP-101 through CP-394 to Backup
Save CP-101 through CP-567 to Backup
Save PLC Prgm (CP-399)
Enter a “1” in Save PLC Program (CP-399) to save the current PLC program to the backup. A message (Saved2
BkUp) will flash in the error and message status bar at the bottom of the screen to indicate the completion of the
operation.
1 = Save PLC Program to Backup
0 = No Change
5 - 174
The Load & Store Parms screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / Device Configure <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
LOAD & SAVE PARMS
(CP-396)
Enter a code (0-6).
Press the Enter key.
Load Parms
Load PLC Prgm
0
0
Save Parms
Save PLC Prgm
0
0
(CP-397)
Enter a code (0-2).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-398)
Enter a code (0-3).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-399)
Enter a code (0-1).
Press the Enter key.
P1/1
5 - 175
KEYPAD LOCKOUT SETUP
When Keypad Lock Input is active, Control Parameter values can not be changed. The Keypad Lockout Setup
screens allow you to specify which Control Parameters, or blocks of Control Parameters, will be exempt from the
lockout when the Keypad Lockout Input is active. Use KyPdLk Mask (CP-380) in conjunction with the Unlock
Control Parameters 381 - 388 to specify which Control Parameters are exempt from the lockout.
KyPdLk Mask (CP-380)
When the keypad lockout input is active (low), and Key Pad Lock Mask (CP-380) is set to either "0",“1”, “2”, “3”,
or “4”, then certain groupings (see list below) of Control Parameters can be exempted (masked out) from the lockout.
In addition, the individual Control Parameters that are specified in CPs 381 through 388 are also exempt. When Key
Pad Lock Mask (CP-380) is set to “4”, then entire blocks of Control Parameters can be exempted in Unlock Block
(CP-389). If Key Pad Lock Mask (CP-380) is set to “0”, then all of the Control Parameters are locked out and non are
exempt, including CPs 318-389.
4 = UnLckBlk = Block Values of the Block Selected by Unlock Block (CP-389) and the Unlocked CP’s.
3 = Blk Vals = All BlockValues (CP-440-567) and the Unlocked CP’s are allowed to change.
2 = Setpnts = Setpoints (CP-110, 120, 130, 140) and the Unlocked CP’s are allowed to change.
1 = UnlckCP = CP’s selected by the Unlock CP A - F are allowed to changed.
0 = Total Lockout (default).
Unlock CP A (CP-381)
Unlock Control Parameter A (CP-381) determines which Control Parameter can change, even when the keypadlockout is active. For the Unlock Control Parameter A (CP-381) to function, KyPdLk Mask (CP-380) must be set to
a value other than “0” (All Lock). Enter “0” in Unlock Control Parameter A (CP-381) to disable it from selecting
any Control Parameter.
Unlock CP B (CP-382)
Unlock CP C (CP-383)
Unlock CP D (CP-384)
Unlock CP E (CP-385)
Unlock CP F (CP-386)
Unlock CP G (CP-387)
Unlock CP H (CP-388)
Control Parameters 381 - 388 are identical to each other. Refer to the description for
Unlock CP A (CP-381).
KeyPad Lockout (MP-29)
Keypad Lockout (MP-29) displays the Keypad Lockout status. “On” indicates that the Keypad Lockout is active.
When Keypad Lockout is active, Control Parameter values can not be changed. With the exception of the Control
Parameters that are exempted by CP’s 380-389, the “OFF” indicates that the Keypad Lockout is not active. When
the Keypad Lockout is not active, any Control Parameter can be changed.
5 - 176
The Keypad Lockout Setup screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / Device Configure <—
(CP-380)
Enter a code (0-4).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-381)
Enter a parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
KEYPAD LOCK SETUP
KyPdLk Mask
Unlock CP A
Unlock CP B
Unlock CP C
Unlock CP D
Unlock CP E
Unlock CP F
Unlock CP G
Unlock CP H
KeyPad Lockout
All Lock
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
OFF
(CP-382)
Enter a parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-383)
Enter a parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-384)
Enter a parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-385)
Enter a parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-386)
Enter a parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
P1/2
(CP-387)
Enter a parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-388)
Enter a parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-29)
Displays the status of the
Keypad Lockout input.
5 - 177
Keypad Lockout Setup
KyPdLk Mask (CP-380)
When the keypad Lockout input is active (low), and Key Pad Lock Mask (CP-380) is set to either "0", “1”, “2”, “3”,
or “4”, then certain groupings (see list below) of Control Parameters can be exempted (masked out) from the lockout.
In addition, the individual Control Parameters that are specified in CPs 381 through 388 are also exempt. When Key
Pad Lock Mask (CP-380) is set to “4”, then entire blocks of Control Parameters can be exempted in Unlock Block
(CP-389). If Key Pad Lock Mask (CP-380) is set to “0”, then all of the Control Parameters are locked out and non are
exempt, including CPs 318-389.
4 = UnLckBlk = Block Values of the Block Selected by Unlock Block (CP-389) and the Unlocked CP’s.
3 = Blk Vals = All BlockValues (CP-440-567) and the Unlocked CP’s are allowed to change.
2 = Setpnts = Setpoints (CP-110, 120, 130, 140) and the Unlocked CP’s are allowed to change.
1 = UnlckCP = CP’s selected by the Unlock CP A - F are allowed to changed.
0 = Total Lockout.
UnlockBlock (CP-389)
Use Unlock Block (CP-389) to choose which block of Control Parameters are exempt from the lockout, even when
Keypad-lockout is active. Unlock Block (CP-389) is used in conjunction with KyPdLk Mask (CP-380), which must
be set to “4” . Control Parameters 381 - 388 are also exempt when KyPdLk Mask (CP-380) is set to “4” . If Key
Pad Lock Mask (CP-380) is set to “0”, all of the Control Parameters are locked out and none are exempt, including
CPs 318-389.
KeyPad Lockout (MP-29)
Keypad Lockout (MP-29) displays the Keypad Lockout status. The Keypad Lockout is active when “On” is displayed. When Keypad Lockout is active, Control Parameter values can not be changed. With the exception of the
Control Parameters that are exempted by CP’s 380-389. The Keypad Lockout is not active when “OFF” is displayed.
When the Keypad Lockout is not active, any Control Parameter can be changed.
5 - 178
The Keypad Lockout Setup screen (page 2).
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
KEYPAD LOCK SETUP
KyPdLk Mask
Unlock Block
All Lock
7
(CP-380)
Enter a code (0-4).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-389)
Enter the block number.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-29)
Displays the status of
the Keypad Lockout
input.
KeyPad Lockout
OFF
P2/2
5 - 179
SERIAL COM SETUP
The Serial Communications Setup screen includes parameters that configure the serial communications port.
Each CX-1010 that is connected on the same communications link, must have a unique Device Address
(CP-370). The baud rate, frame format and record format must be consistent with other devices are
communicating with the CX-1010.
Device Address (CP-370)
Device Address (CP-370) assigns the serial communications address for the CX-1010. This number should be different from any other units that are on the serial link.
Baud Rate (CP-371)
The Baud Rate (CP-371) determines the serial communications data transfer rate (see list below) in Bits/Sec. With
a 10 bit frame length, the number of Frame/Sec would be 1/10 the Baud Rate.
1 = 300 bps = 300 Baud
2 = 600 bps = 600 Baud
3 = 1200 bps = 1200 Baud
4 = 2400 bps = 2400 Baud
5 = 4800 bps = 4800 Baud
6 = 9600 bps = 9600 Baud (default)
7 = 19200 bps = 19.2 Kbaud
Frame Format (CP-372)
Frame Format (CP-372) determines the parity, the number of data bits and the number of stop bits for the serial
communications.
1 = N,8,1 = No Parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit (10 bit frame - ASCII or Binary)
2 = E,7,1 = Even Parity, 7 data bits, 1 stop bit (10 bit frame-ASCII only)
Record Format (CP-369)
Record Format (CP-369) determines which type of data format (see list below) will be used for the serial communication.
3 = ASCII2
2 = ASCII
1 = BINARY
CRC Enable (CP-368)
If CRC Enable (CP-368) is set to “ON” (1), you must append a CRC value to all serial communications messages that
are received by the CX-1010 (See Serial Communications: Using Serial Communications). The CX-1010 checks the
CRC value against the the message contents (excluding the “STX”), then calculates a CRC value and appends it to all
serial communications responses. If CRC Enable (CP-368) is set to “OFF” (0), the CX-1010 will ignore any CRC
value that is appended to a message and will not append a CRC value to any serial communications responses.
1 = On (Enabled)
5 - 180
0 = Off (Disabled)
The Serial Com Setup screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / Device Configure <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
SERIAL COMM SETUP
(CP-370)
Enter a number (1-99).
Press the Enter key.
Device Address
Baud Rate
Frame Format
Record Format
CRC Enable
1
9600bps
N,8,1
BINARY
ON
(CP-371)
Enter a code (1-7).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-372)
Enter a code (1-2).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-369)
Enter a code (1-2).
Press the Enter key.
P1/1
(CP-368)
Enter a code (0-1).
Press the Enter key.
5 - 181
DEVICENET SETUP
The DeviceNet Setup screens include parameters to configure the DeviceNet option card for network
communications. Page 1 of the DeviceNet Setup screens includes the Serial Number attribute of the Identity
Object and the MAC ID and Baud Rate attributes from the DeviceNet Object. Page 2 is used to enter the
eight Parameter Codes for the Assembly Queue. Refer to "CX-1010 DeviceNet Card Technical Manual" for
more detailed information on CX-1010 DeviceNet operations.
DN MAC ID (CP-376)
DN MAC ID is the DeviceNet Media Access Control Identifier. The MAC ID is used to assign a unique identifier or
address to each node on the network. Assign a different MAC ID to each CX-1010 device on the network from 0 to
63.
DN Baud Rate (CP-377)
The DN Baud Rate is the network data or transfer rate. Enter the number from the listing below that corresponds to
the desired baud rate:
1 = 125 Kbps
2 = 250 Kbps
3 = 500 Kbps
Serial Number (CP-395)
Serial Number is the serial number from the DeviceNet card in this CX-1010 controller. If the card was factory
installed, the Serial Number should already be entered. If the card is being field installed, enter the Serial Number
from the label on the card or recorded in the DeviceNet Card Technical Manual.
5 - 182
The DeviceNet Setup screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / Device Configure <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
DEVICENET SETUP
(CP-376)
Enter ID number.
Press the Enter key.
DN MAC ID
DN Baud Rate
63
125Kbps
Serial Number
0
(CP-377)
Enter a code (1-3).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-395)
Enter serial number.
Press the Enter key.
P1/2
5 - 183
DeviceNet Setup
The following parameters are used to identify the eight parameters for the I/O Assembly Queue.
DN Write Parm 1 (CP-330)
Enter the number of a Control Parameter to be written to with the DeviceNet poll command in the I/O Assembly
Queue.
DN Write Parm 2 (CP-331)
Enter the number of a Control Parameter to be written to with the DeviceNet poll command in the I/O Assembly
Queue.
DN Write Parm 3 (CP-332)
Enter the number of a Control Parameter to be written to with the DeviceNet poll command in the I/O Assembly
Queue.
DN Write Parm 4 (CP-333)
Enter the number of a Control Parameter to be written to with the DeviceNet poll command in the I/O Assembly
Queue.
DN Read Parm 1 (CP-334)
Enter the number of a Control Parameter or Monitor Parameter to be read with the DeviceNet poll command in the
I/O Assembly Queue.
DN Read Parm 2 (CP-335)
Enter the number of a Control Parameter or Monitor Parameter to be read with the DeviceNet poll command in the
I/O Assembly Queue.
DN Read Parm 3 (CP-336)
Enter the number of a Control Parameter or Monitor Parameter to be read with the DeviceNet poll command in the
I/O Assembly Queue.
DN Read Parm 4 (CP-337)
Enter the number of a Control Parameter or Monitor Parameter to be read with the DeviceNet poll Command in the
I/O Assembly Queue.
5 - 184
The DeviceNet Setup screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / Device Configure <—
(CP-330)
Enter parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
(CP-331)
Enter parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
DEVICENET SETUP
IO ASSEMBLY QUEUE
DN Write Parm 1
DN Write Parm 2
DN Write Parm 3
DN Write Parm 4
DN Read Parm 1
DN Read Parm 2
DN Read Parm 3
DN Read Parm 4
(CP-332)
Enter parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
P2/2
(CP-333)
Enter parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-334)
Enter parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-335)
Enter parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-336)
Enter parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-337)
Enter parameter code.
Press the Enter key.
5 - 185
VIDEO SETUP
The Video Setup screen includes the parameters that control the screen operation. Video Mode (CP-374)
allows you to change the format. Contrast Value (CP-375) allows you to adjust the intensity of the pixels. If
the screen appears too light, increase the value in Contrast Value. If the screen appears too dark, decrease the
value. This may vary from screen to screen.
Video Mode (CP-374)
Video Mode (CP-374) determines how the LCD Screen Display will be displayed, per the list below:
3 = Standard w/Border
2 = Reverse Video
1 = Standard Video (default)
Contrast Value (CP-375)
Contrast Value (CP-375) determines the contrast for the LCD Screen Display. The higher values darken the pixels
and lower values lighten the pixels.
5 - 186
The Video Setup screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / Device Configure <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
VIDEO SETUP
(CP-374)
Enter a code (1-3).
Press the Enter key.
Video Mode
Contrast Value
Standard
18
(CP-375)
Enter a contrast value.
Press the Enter key.
P1/1
5 - 187
ALARM INDICATOR MASK
The Alarm Indicator Mask screen includes the parameters that determine which alarms and which numerical
comparator outcomes will cause the ‘alm’ to flash in the lower-left corner of the screen. The two
parameters are bit mapped for each condition. Place a ‘1’ in the bit position corresponding to the alarms or
compares that you want to activate the ‘alm’ indicator. In this case, a ‘0’ in the bit masks (or disables) the
condition from activating the ‘alm’ indicator. Refer to Appendices: Appendix C for the Std Alm Msk
(CP-278) and CustAlm Msk (CP-279) bit map list.
Std Alm Msk (CP-278)
The Standard Alarm Mask (CP-278) allows you to mask out specific alarms so that they will not cause the ‘alm’
indicator to flash (in the lower left-hand corner of the CX-1010 screen) by entering a “0” in the corresponding bit
position (see figure below). You can also activate any of these alarm conditions by entering a “1” in the corresponding bit position. Refer to (CP-278 in Appendices: Appendix C for the Alarm Mask bit map list.
CustAlm Msk (CP-279)
Custom Alarm Mask (CP-279) allows you to mask out the compare results so that they will not cause the ‘alm’
indicator to flash (in the lower left-hand corner of the CX-1010 screen) by entering a “0” in the corresponding bit
position (see figure below). You can also activate any of these compare conditions by entering a “1” in the corresponding bit position. Refer to CP-279 in Appendices: Appendix C for the Compare Mask bit map list.
5 - 188
The Alarm Indicator Mask screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / Device Configure <—
Use the Par keys to select
a line (make it active).
ALM INDICATOR MASK
(CP-278)
Enter a code (0-1).
Press the Enter key.
Std Alm Msk
CustAlm Msk
00000000
00000000
(CP-279)
Enter a code (0-1).
Press the Enter key.
P1/1
5 - 189
—NOTES—
5 - 190
System Monitoring/Monitor Parameters
Introduction to Monitor Parameters
System Monitor
Run Monitor
STD Signals Monitor
Limits and Alarms
DIG I/O Monitor
Control Override
6-1
6-2
INTRODUCTION TO
MONITOR PARAMETERS
Parameters are divided into two classifications; Control Parameters (CP) and Monitor Parameters (MP). This
section is about Monitor Parameters. Control Parameters are explained in System Setup/Control Parameters.
The parameters appear on the screens by a Parameter Name. The Help screens list the parameters by both
their name and by a numbered code, which is called the Parameter Code. The operational data is the
Parameter Value.
Parameter Name
Parameter Code
Parameter Value
Monitor Parameter
Scaled Feedback
MP-40
0.0 (default)
Control Parameter
Master Setpoint
CP-110
0 (default)
Parameters =
Note:
Monitor Parameters are status indicators only - you can not directly affect or change a Monitor Parameter.
When Monitor Parameters are displayed on the screens, they do not have a small indicator “dot” to the left
of the Parameter Name (unlike Control Parameters, which do have a small indicator “dot” to the left of the
Parameter Name).
Monitor Parameter (MP) screens allow you to monitor the performance of the CX-1010 and your system.
These screens also help you troubleshoot for problems as well as confirm the wiring and tuning. Monitor
Parameter screens can be accessed at any time during the CX-1010's operation, including during Run, Jog
and F–Stop. The Monitor Parameter screens are accessed through the System Monitor screen.
6-3
—NOTES—
6-4
SYSTEM MONITOR
Use the system monitor screens to access the Monitor Parameter screens that monitor the operation of the
CX-1010. In addition to their monitoring capability, the Control Override screens provide limited control of
the Run/Stop/Jog logic and the block selection.
The CX-1010 system monitor screens are:
• Run Monitor
• STD Signals Monitor
• Limits and Alarms Monitor
• Dig I/O Monitor
• Aux Analog Monitor
• Control Override
6-5
RUN MONITOR
Summary
The Run Monitor/Summary screen (page 1) contains monitor velocity data parameters. Setpoint X
(CP-101) is also included on this screen to allow convenient assess to your active setpoint.
STATE (MP-50)
State (MP-50) displays the present operating state of the CX-1010 (see list below). Only one operating state may be
active at a time. To access either the “Run” or the “Jog” operating state, the F-Stop, R-Stop and H-Stop inputs must
be closed.
7 = Diagnostics
4 = JOG (Fwd)
1 = R-Stop
6 = Not used - reserved
3 = RUN
0 = F-Stop
5 = JOG (Rvs)
2 = H-Stop
CNTRL LOOP (MP-45)
Control Loop (MP-45) displays the type of loop (see list below) that is in current use. Only one type of loop can be
active at a time.
5 = Psn Hld (H-Stop Position Loop)
3 = Psn (Position Loop)
1 = Vel (Velocity Loop)
4 = ZE Hld (H-Stop ZE Position Loop)
2 = ZE Psn (Zero Error Loop)
0 = OL (Open Loop)
SETPOINT X (CP-101)
Setpoint X displays the name and value of the setpoint that corresponds with the mode of operation selected in
Setpoint Mode (CP-102). The setpoint could be the Master Setpoint (CP-110), the Follower Setpoint (CP-120), the
Direct Setpoint (CP-130) or the Custom Setpoint (CP-140). Setpoint X acts as a quick access to the setpoint value.
In addition to changing a setpoint value in the setpoint screens, you can also change the value of the active setpoint
by entering a new value in Setpoint X (CP-101).
Ramped Ref (MP-42)
Ramped Reference (MP-42) displays the speed command in feedback engineering units per time. This is the output
of the ramp calculations. When the ramp has been completed, the Ramped Reference (MP-42) should equal the
Scaled Reference (MP-41).
RR ERROR (MP-44)
Ramped Reference Error (CP-44) displays the speed error in engineering units per time. This is the Ramped Reference (MP-42) minus the Fb EU/Tm (MP-39). The Ramped Reference is the current speed command.
CO VOLTS (MP-21)
Control Output Volts (MP-21) displays the present value, in volts, of the CO_SIG Analog Output signal.
6-6
The Run Monitor screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / System Monitor
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
(MP-50)
Displays the current
state of the CX-1010.
(MP-45)
Displays the current
active loop type.
RUN MONITOR
SUMMARY
State
Cntrl Loop
Master SPx
F-STOP
OL
0
Ramped Ref
RR Error
CO Volts
0
0
0.0
(CP-101)
Enter a setpoint value.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-42)
Displays the Ramped
Reference, in EU/Tm.
(MP-44)
Displays the Ramped
Reference error in
EU/Tm.
(MP-21)
Displays the CO SIG
Output value, in volts.
P1/3
6-7
Detail
The Run Monitor / Detail screen (page 2) monitor the parameters that are related to the control loop.
Setpoint X (CP-101) is also included on this screen, to allow you convenient assess to your active setpoint.
STATE (MP-50)
State (MP-50) displays the present operating state of the CX-1010 (see list below). Only one operating state may
be active at a time. To access either the “Run” or the “Jog” operating state, the F-Stop, R-Stop and H-Stop inputs
must be closed.
7 = Diagnostics
4 = JOG (Fwd)
1 = R-Stop
6 = Not used - reserved
3 = RUN
0 = F-Stop
5 = JOG (Rvs)
2 = H-Stop
SETPOINT X (CP-101)
Setpoint X displays the name and value of the setpoint that corresponds with the mode of operation selected in
Setpoint Mode (CP-102). The setpoint could be the Master Setpoint (CP-110), the Follower Setpoint (CP-120), the
Direct Setpoint (CP-130) or the Custom Setpoint (CP-140). Setpoint X acts as a quick access to the setpoint value.
In addition to changing a setpoint value in the setpoint screens, you can also change the value of the active setpoint
by entering a new value in Setpoint X (CP-101).
FI1 Hz (MP-01)
Frequency Input 1 Hertz (MP-01) displays the current frequency of the Frequency Input 1, in Hertz.
FI2 Hz (MP-06)
Frequency Input 2 Hz (MP-06) displays the present frequency of the Frequency Input 2, in Hertz.
Integral (MP-48)
Integral (MP-48) displays the value of the integral term (i.e., integrator error sum times the Ki VL constant) of the
PID compensator. Integral is displayed in CO DAC bits.
Trim Out (MP-47)
Trim Out (MP-47) displays the value of the output of the PID compensator. Trim Out is displayed in CO DAC bits.
Feedforward (MP-46)
Feedforward (MP-46) displays the value of the feedforward term in CO DAC bits.
CO BITS (MP-20)
Control Output Bits (MP-20) displays the present value, in DAC bits, of the CO_SIG Analog Output signal.
6-8
The Run Monitor / Detail screen (page 2).
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
(MP-50)
Displays the current
status of the CX-1010.
(CP-101)
Enter a setpoint value.
Press the Enter key.
RUN MONITOR
DETAIL
State
Master SPx
F-STOP
0
FI1 Hz
FI2 Hz
Integral
Trim Out
Feedforward
CO Bits
0
0
0
0
0
-67
(MP-01)
Displays the frequency of
the Frequency Input 1.
(MP-06)
Displays the frequency of
the Frequency Input 2.
(MP-48)
Displays the value of
the integral term.
(MP-47)
Displays the value of
the trim output.
P2/3
(MP-46)
Displays value of the
feedforward term.
(MP-20)
Displays the CO SIG
output signal, in DAC bits.
6-9
Errors
The Run Monitor / Errors screen (page 3) monitor speed and position error data. Setpoint X (CP-101) is
also included on this screen to allow you convenient assess to your active setpoint.
STATE (MP-50)
State (MP-50) displays the present operating state of the CX-1010 (see list below). Only one operating state may be
active at a time. To access either the “Run” or the “Jog” operating state, the F-Stop, R-Stop and H-Stop inputs must
be closed.
7 = Diagnostics
4 = JOG (Fwd)
1 = R-Stop
6 = Not used - reserved
3 = RUN
0 = F-Stop
5 = JOG (Rvs)
2 = H-Stop
SETPOINT X (CP-101)
Setpoint X displays the name and value of the setpoint that corresponds with the mode of operation selected in
Setpoint Mode (CP-102). The setpoint could be the Master Setpoint (CP-110), the Follower Setpoint (CP-120), the
Direct Setpoint (CP-130) or the Custom Setpoint (CP-140). Setpoint X acts as a quick access to the setpoint value.
In addition to changing a setpoint value in the setpoint screens, you can also change the value of the active setpoint by
entering a new value in Setpoint X (CP-101)
Scaled Fb (MP-40)
Scaled Feedback (MP-40) displays the scaled feedback , which is scaled per ScFb Eq (CP-190), ScFb EU (CP-191)
and Fb @ ScFb EU (CP-192). The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of the decimal point
in ScFb EU (CP-191).
SR Error (MP-43)
Scaled Reference Error (MP-43) displays the speed error between the Scaled Reference (MP-41) and the Fb EU/Tm
(MP-39).
RR ERROR (MP-44)
Ramped Reference Error (CP-44) displays the speed error in engineering units per time. This is the Ramped Reference (MP-42) minus the Fb EU/Tm (MP-39). The Ramped Reference is the current speed command.
PSNERR (MP-34)
Position Error (MP-34) displays the value, in engineering units, of the accumulated position error between the lead
(FI1) and the feedback (FI2) input signals. The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of the
decimal point in EU FI2 (CP-168).
PSNERRCNT (MP-35)
Position Error Count (MP-35) displays the value, in encoder counts, of the accumulated position error between the
lead (FI1) and feedback (FI2) input signals.
6 - 10
The Run Monitor / Errors screen (page 3).
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
(MP-50)
Displays the current
state of the CX-1010.
(CP-101)
Enter a setpoint value.
Press the Enter key.
RUN MONITOR
ERRORS
State
Master SPx
Scaled Fb
SR Error
RR Error
PsnErr
PsnErrCnt
F-STOP
0
0.0
0
0
0.0
0
P3/3
(MP-40)
Displays the Scaled
Feedback.
(MP-43)
Displays the Scaled
Reference error.
(MP-44)
Displays the Ramped
Reference error in
EU/Tm.
(MP-34)
Displays the accumulated
position error in EU.
(MP-35)
Displays the accumulated
position error in counts.
6 - 11
STD SIGNAL MONITOR
Frequency Input 1
The STD Signal Monitor / Frequency Input 1 screen (page 1) displays parameters that are related to the
Frequency Input 1 signal; velocity and position.
FI1 Hz (MP-01)
Frequency Input 1 Hertz (MP-01) displays the current frequency of the Frequency Input 1, in Hertz.
FI1 RPM (MP-02)
Frequency Input 1 RPM (MP-02) displays the current speed of the Frequency Input 1 encoder in RPM relative to PPR
FI1 (CP-161).
FI1 EU/Tm (MP-03)
Frequency Input 1 Engineering Units per Time (MP-03) displays the current speed of the Frequency Input 1 in the
Engineering Units per Time (EU/Tm) relative to the FI1 Pulses (CP-162), EU FI1 (CP-163) and Time Base (CP-109).
The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of the decimal point in Master SP (CP-110).
FI1 Psn (MP-05)
Frequency Input 1 Position (MP-05) displays the present value of the Frequency Input 1 Position (MP-05) in engineering units, as specified by FI1 Pulses (CP-162) and EU FI1 (CP-163). The placement of the decimal point is the
same as the placement of the decimal point in EU FI1 (CP-163).
FI1 Cnts (MP-04)
Frequency Input 1 Counts (MP-04) displays the present value of the Frequency Input 1 Position (MP-05) in encoder
edges (counts) if Count Mode FI1 (CP-160) is set to “Quad x 4”. Frequency Input 1 Counts (MP-04) displays the
present value of the Frequency Input 1 Position in pulses if Count Mode FI1 (CP-160) is set to “Incremental”.
PsnErrCnt (MP-35)
Position Error Count (MP-35) displays the value, in encoder counts, of the accumulated position error between the
lead (FI1) and feedback (FI2) input signals.
6 - 12
The STD Signal Monitor screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / System Monitor
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
(MP-01)
Displays the frequency of
the Frequency Input 1.
(MP-02)
Displays the speed (RPM)
of the Frequency Input 1.
STD SIGNALS MONITOR
FREQUENCY INPUT 1
FI1 Hz
FI1 RPM
FI1 EU/Tm
0
0
0
FI1 Psn
FI1 Cnts
0.0
0
PsnErrCnt
0
P1/3
(MP-03)
Displays the speed (EU/
Tm) of the Frequency
Input 1.
(MP-05)
Displays the Frequency
Input 1 position, in E.U.
(MP-04)
Displays the Frequency
Input 1 position, in counts.
(MP-35)
Displays the accumulated
position error in counts.
6 - 13
Frequency Input 2
The STD Signal Monitor / Frequency Input 2 screen (page 2) displays the parameters that are related to the
Frequency Input 2 signal; velocity and position.
FI2 Hz (MP-06)
Frequency Input 2 Hz (MP-06) displays the present frequency of the Frequency Input 2, in Hertz.
FI2 RPM (MP-07)
Frequency Input 2 RPM (MP-07) displays the current speed of the Frequency Input 2 encoder in RPM relative to PPR
FI2 (CP-166).
FI2 EU/Tm (MP-08)
Frequency Input 2 Engineering Units per Time (MP-08) displays the current speed of the Frequency Input 2 in the
Engineering Units per Time (EU/Tm) relative to the FI2 Pulses (CP-167), EU FI2 (CP-168) and Time Base (CP-109).
The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of the decimal point in Master SP (CP-110).
FI2 Psn (MP-10)
Frequency Input 2 Position (MP-10) displays the present value of the Frequency Input 2 Position (CP-10) in engineering units, as specified by FI2 Pulses (CP-167) and EU FI2 (CP-168). The placement of the decimal point is the same
as the placement of the decimal point in EU FI2 (CP-168).
FI2 Cnts (MP-09)
Frequency Input 2 Counts (MP-09) displays the present value of the Frequency Input 2 Position (CP-10) in encoder
edges (counts) if Count Mode FI2 (CP-165) is set to “Quad x4”. Frequency 2 Counts displays the present value of the
Frequency Input 2 Position (CP-10) in pulses if Count Mode FI2 (CP-165) is set to is set to “Incremental”.
PsnErrCnt (MP-35)
Position Error Count (MP-35) displays the value, in encoder counts, of the accumulated position error between the
lead (FI1) and feedback (FI2) input signals.
6 - 14
The STD Signal Monitor / Frequency Input 2 (page 2).
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
(MP-06)
Displays the frequency of
the Frequency Input 2.
(MP-07)
Displays the speed (RPM)
of the Frequency Input 2.
STD SIGNALS MONITOR
FREQUENCY INPUT 2
FI2 Hz
FI2 RPM
FI2 EU/Tm
0
0
0
FI2 Psn
FI2 Cnts
0.0
0
PsnErrCnt
0
P2/3
(MP-08)
Displays the speed(EU/
Tm) of the Frequency
Input 2.
(MP-10)
Displays the Frequency
Input 2 position, in E.U.
(MP-09)
Displays the Frequency
Input 2 position, in counts.
(MP-35)
Displays the accumulated
position error in counts.
6 - 15
Control Output
The STD Signal Monitor / Control Output screen (page 3) displays CO_SIG signal data. The CO_SIG is
the CX-1010 output signal that is input to the drive as a velocity (or torque) command.
CO Bits (MP-20)
Control Output Bits (MP-20) displays the present value, in DAC bits, of the CO_SIG Analog Output signal.
CO VOLTS (MP-21)
Control Output Volts (MP-21) displays he present value, in volts, of the CO_SIG Analog Output signal.
CO Max Bits (MP-22)
The Control Output Maximum Bits (MP-22) corresponds to the volt setting in Control Output Maximum Volts
(CP-181) for the CO_SIG Analog Output signal, relative to the Control Output DAC Range (MP-23). This is a
magnitude only.
6 - 16
The STD Signal Monitor / Control Output (page 3).
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
STD SIGNALS MONITOR
CONTROL OUTPUT
CO Bits
CO Volts
-67
0.0
CO Max Bits
8191
(MP-20)
Displays the CO SIG
output signal, in DAC bits.
(MP-21)
Displays the CO SIG
output signal, in volts.
(MP-22)
Displays the CO
Maximum Bits.
P3/3
6 - 17
LIMITS AND ALARMS
Active Alarms
The Limits & Alarms / Active Alarms screen (page 1) displays the status of the limits and alarms. This
screen displays a list of the Limits, General Alarms and Custom Alms. The active Limits, Alarms and
Custom Alms are highlighted.
6 - 18
The Limits and Alarms screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / System Monitor
The highlight bar indicates
the active alarm.
LIMITS & ALARMS
ACTIVE ALARMS
MinLmt
MaxLmt
0_Spd
The highlight bar indicates
the active alarm.
Cmpr1
Cmpr2
Cmpr3
Cmpr4
MaxFb
AclDcl
NoResp
MaxPsn
P1/2
6 - 19
Limits and Alarms
The Limits & Alarms screen (page 2) displays the bit-mapped Monitor Parameters that monitor the status of
the Limits, Alarms and Custom Alms. Use either the Appendices: Appendix C or the “Help” screen to
preview the bit map lists.
Misc Status (MP-53)
Miscellaneous Status (MP-53) displays various status conditions . A “1” in the CO Sign bit indicates a negative
command output. A “1” in any other bit location indicates an active condition. Refer to Appendices: Appendix C for
the Miscellaneous Status (MP-53) bit map list.
Std Alarms (MP-54)
Std Alarms (MP-54) displays various alarm conditions . A “1” in any bit location indicates an active condition.
Refer to Appendices: Appendix C for the Std Alarms (MP-54) bit map list.
Custom Alms (MP-55)
Custom Alarms (MP-55) displays the outputs of the PLC numerical comparators. A “1” in bit locations 0-3 indicates that the result of the compare (Cmprx Parm value vs. Cmprx Val) is true for the given Cmprx Type. A “1” in
bit locations 4-7 indicates that the result of the compare (Cmprx Parm value vs. Cmprx Val) is false for the given
Cmprx Type (the NOT is true). Refer to CP-280 through CP-295. Refer to Appendices: Appendix C for the Custom
Alarms (MP-55) bit map list.
Active Block (MP-51)
Active Block (MP-51) displays the active block (0-7). The block can be selected and made active by the Block select
bits (Blk Sel A,B,C), in the PLC Programming screen if Block Select Source (CP-378) is set to “1” (DigIn & PLC).
Or the block can be selected and made active by the keypad if Block Select Source (CP-378) is set to “2” (Keypad
Blk Sel).
InvalidBlks (MP-52)
Invalid Blocks (MP-52) displays the status of the blocks in the Block Setup screens. A “1” indicates that there is an
error with the corresponding block. Generally, this indicates that an overflow condition can occur if the corresponding block is activated. In addition, since other parameters are used in conjunction with the Block Parameters that
you selected, an error can result from a parameter that is not selected in Block Parameters. If a bad block is activated,
the CX-1010 will execute an F-Stop until either the block error is corrected or a another block is activated. Refer to
Appendices: Appendix C for the Invalid Blocks (MP-52) bit map list.
Device Alms (MP-82)
Device Alarms (MP-82) displays the status of microprocessor or other hardware related alarms. Notification of a bad
block selection is also included. Refer to Appendices: Appendix C for the Device Alarms (MP-82) bit map list.
DO 7..0 (MP-28)
Digital Output 7..0 displays the value of the “J2” digital outputs. A ‘1’ in the bit location indicates an active “low
voltage” condition on the corresponding open collector output (which would sink DC current). Refer to Appendices:
Appendix C for the Dig DO..7-0 (MP-28) bit map list.
6 - 20
The System Monitor / Limits and Alarms screen (page 2).
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
(MP-53)
Displays a variety of
status conditions.
(MP-54)
Displays a variety of
alarm conditions.
LIMITS & ALARMS
Misc Status
Std Alarms
Custom Alms
00011000
00000000
11010010
Active Block
InvalidBlks
Device Alms
0
00000000
00000000
DO
00000001
7..0
P2/2
(MP-55)
Displays the output of the
PLC numerical compare,
(MP-51)
Displays the active block.
(MP-52)
Displays the status of the
blocks in the Block Setup
screens.
(MP-82)
Displays the status of the
microprocessor alarms.
(MP-28)
Displays the status of the
J2 digital outputs.
6 - 21
DIG I/O MONITOR
The DIG I/O Monitor screen displays the status (state) of all the digital inputs and outputs.
DI 7..0 (MP-26)
Digital Input 7..0 displays the value of the “J6” digital inputs. A ‘1’ in the bit location indicates a “low voltage”
condition on the corresponding input (which is consistent with a contact closure to common). Refer to Appendices:
Appendix C for the Dig In 7-0 (MP-26) bit map list. The Help screen for DI 7..0 (MP-26) also contains a bit map list.
DI 15..8 (MP-27)
Digital Input 15..8 (MP-27) displays the value of the “J7” digital inputs. A ‘1’ in the bit location indicates a “low
voltage” condition on the corresponding input (which is consistent with a contact closure to common). These eight
inputs can be set up in the PLC Programming screen to generate a One-Shot -Pulse on a high-to-low transition.
Refer to Appendices: Appendix C for the DI 15..8 (MP-27).
DO 7..0 (MP-28)
Digital Output 7..0 displays the value of the “J2” digital outputs. A ‘1’ in the bit location indicates an active “low
voltage” condition on the corresponding open collector output (which would sink DC current). Refer to Appendices: Appendix C for the Dig Out 7-0 (MP-28) bit map list. The Help screen for DO 7..0 (MP-28) also contains a bit
map list.
6 - 22
The DIG I/O Monitor screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / Monitor and Control
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
(MP-27)
Displays the value of the
J6 digital inputs.
DIG I/O MONITOR
DI
DI
7..0
15..8
00000000
00000000
DO
7..0
00000001
(MP-26)
Displays the value of the
J7 digital inputs.
(MP-28)
Displays the value of the
J2 digital outputs.
P1/1
6 - 23
AUX ANALOG MONITOR
Inputs
The Aux Analog Monitor / Inputs screen (page 1) monitors the input signals and displays the parameters for
the auxiliary analog inputs (AI1 and AI2).
AI1 Bits (MP-11)
Analog Input 1 Bits (MP-11) displays the present value in ADC bits of Auxiliary Board Analog Input 1 signal.
AI1 Signal (MP-12)
Analog Input 1 Signal (MP-12) displays the present value of the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 1 signal in either volts
or milliamps relative to which setting (volts or current) has been entered in AI1 MODE (CP-170).
AI1 Eu/Tm (MP-13)
Analog Input 1 EU/Tm (MP-13) displays the present value of the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 1 signal in Engineering Units per Time (EU/Tm) as relative to the AI1 RA (CP-171), EU@AI1 RA (CP-172), AI1 RB (CP-173), EU@AI1
RB (CP-174) and Time Base (CP-109). The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of the
decimal point in EU@AI1 RA (CP-172).
AI1 Mode (CP-170)
Analog Input 1 Mode (CP-170) identifies the mode of operation that is used for the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 1
signal.
2 = Current
1 = Voltage (default)
AI2 Bits (MP-14)
AI2 Bits (MP-14) displays the present value in DAC bits of Auxiliary Board Analog Input 2 signal.
AI2 Signal (MP-15)
Analog Input 2 Signal (MP-15) displays the present value of the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 2 signal in either volts
or milliamps, relative to which setting (volts or current) has been entered in AI2 MODE (CP-175).
AI2 EU/Tm (MP-16)
Analog Input 2 EU/Tm (MP-16) displays the present value of the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 2 signal in Engineering Units per Time (EU/Tm) relative to the AI2 RA (CP-176), EU@AI2 RA (CP-177), AI2 RB (CP-178), EU@AI2
RB (CP-179) and Time Base (CP-109). The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of the
decimal point in EU@AI2 RA (CP-177).
AI2 Mode (CP-175)
Analog Input 2 Mode (CP-175) identifies the mode of operation that is used for the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 2
signal.
2=Current
1=Voltage (default)
6 - 24
The Aux Analog Monitor screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / System Monitor
(MP-11)
Displays the value of the
Aux Board Input 1 signal,
in bits
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
(MP-12)
Displays the Aux Board
Input 1 signal, in volts.
AUX ANALOG MONITOR
INPUTS
AI1 Bits
AI1 Signal
AI1 EU/Tm
AI1 Mode
0
0.00
0.0
Volts
AI2 Bits
AI2 Signal
AI2 EU/Tm
AI2 Mode
0
0.00
0.0
Volts
(MP-13)
Displays the Aux Board
Input 1 signal, in E.U.
(CP-170)
Enter “1” or “2”.
Press the Enter key..
(MP-14)
Displays the value of the
Aux Board Input 2 signal,
in bits
(MP-15)
Displays the Aux Board
Input 2 signal, in volts.
P1/2
(MP-16)
Displays the Aux Board
Input 2 signal, in E.U.
(CP-175)
Enter “1” or “2”
Press the Enter key.
6 - 25
Outputs
The Aux Analog Monitor / Outputs screen (page 2) monitors the output signals and displays the parameters
for the auxiliary analog output (AO).
AO Bits (MP-24)
Analog Output Bits (MP-24) displays the present value, in DAC Bits, of the Auxiliary Analog Output.
AO Signal (MP-25)
Analog Output Signal (MP-25) displays the present value, in either volts or milliamps of the Auxiliary Analog Output, relative to AO Mode (CP-185).
AO Mode (CP-185)
Analog Output Mode (CP-185) identifies the mode of operation that is used for the Auxiliary Board Analog Output
signal.
2 = Current
1 = Voltage (default)
6 - 26
The Aux Analog Monitor / Output (page 2).
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
AUX ANALOG MONITOR
OUTPUT
AO Bits
AO Signal
0
0.00
AO Mode
Volts
(MP-24)
Displays the Aux Analog
Output, in bits.
(MP-25)
Displays the Aux Analog
Output, in volts.
(CP-185)
Enter “1” or “2”
Press the Enter key.
P2/2
6 - 27
CONTROL OVERRIDES
State & Blocks
The Control Overrides / States & Blocks screen (page 1) allows you to select and monitor the operating state
for the CX-1010. The first line on the screen displays the current operating state. Scroll to either F-Stop,
Run, Jog Forward or Jog Reverse and then press the Enter key and make that line active. The corresponding
inputs must be wired properly for the CX-1010 to function in the operating state that you activate. To
change to a different operating state, scroll to that state, press Enter and the CX-1010 will change to the new
state. The F-Stop, R-Stop, and H-Stop inputs should be closed (shorted to common) for the CX-1010 to
enter “Run”. If the “Run” digital input is active, then a request for “F-Stop” or “R-Stop” will be ignored.
You can also use this screen to select the source from which active block will be selected, as well as to
monitor the active block. Use Blk Sel Source (CP-378) to determine the source (Digital Inputs & PLC,
Keypad Blk Sel, or Cntr 4 Cnt) from which the active block is will be selected. Enter “Keypad Blk Sel” (2)
in Blk Sel Source (CP-378) to control the selection of the blocks from Keypad Blk Sel (CP-379), using the
keyboard. Enter “DI & PLC” (1) in Blk Sel Source (CP-378) to control the selection of the blocks from
the inputs.
State (MP-50)
State (MP-50) displays the present operating state of the CX-1010 (see list below). Only one operating state may be
active at a time. To access either the “Run” or the “Jog” operating state, the F-Stop, R-Stop and H-Stop inputs must
be closed.
7 = Diagnostics
4 = JOG (Fwd)
1 = R-Stop
6 = Not used - reserved
3 = RUN
0 = F-Stop
5 = JOG (Rvs)
2 = H-Stop
Blk Sel Source (CP-378)
Block Select Source (CP-378) determines whether the active block will be selected by the Digital Inputs & PLC,
Keypad Blk Sel (CP-379) or Counter 4.
3 = Cntr 4 Cnt
2 = KyPd = Keypad Blk Sel
1 = DgIn = Digital Inputs & PLC (default)
Keypad Blk Sel (CP-379)
The Keypad Block Select (CP-379) determines which block will be active when Blk Sel Source (CP-378) is set to
“2” (KyPd).
Active Block (MP-51)
Active Block (MP-51) displays the active block. The block can be selected and made active by the Block Select bits
(Blk Sel A,B.C), in the PLC Programming screen if Block Select Source (CP-378) is set to “1” (DigIn & PLC). Or
the block can be selected and made active by the keypad if Block Select Source (CP-378) is set to “2” (Keypad Blk
Sel).
Cntrl Loop (MP-45)
Control Loop (MP-45) displays the type of loop (see list below) that is in current use. Only one type of loop can be
active at a time.
5 = Psn Hld (H-Stop Position Loop)
3 = Psn (Position Loop)
1 = Vel (Velocity Loop)
6 - 28
4 = ZE Hld (H-Stop ZE Position Loop)
2 = ZE Psn (Zero Error Loop)
0 = OL (Open Loop)
The Control Overrides screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / System Monitor
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
(MP-50)
Displays the current
status of the CX-1010.
CONTROL OVERRIDES
STATE & BLOCKS
State
F-STOP
RUN
JOG FWD
JOG REV
Blk Sel Source
Keypad Blk Sel
Active Block
Cntrl Loop
F-STOP
Make a line active
(highlight ) and press the
Enter key to select an
operating state from the
keypad.
DI
0
0
OL
P1/3
(CP-378)
Enter a code (1 to 3)
Press the Enter key.
(CP-379)
Select a block (0 to 7).
Press the Enter key.
(MP-51)
Displays the active block.
(MP-45)
Displays the current
active loop type.
6 - 29
Position & Error
Use the Control Overrides / Position & Error screen (page 2) to reset the position error or preset the position
counters. Scroll to the item that you want to preset and press the Enter key to activate that item. If you
activate either the “Reset Position Err” or the “Reset FI1, FI2 & Err”, then the position error will reset to
“0”. If you activate any of the items that include “FI1” or “FI2”, then the counters will preset to the
corresponding preset values; FI1PsnPrst (CP-266) and FI2PsnPrst (CP-267). Presetting the position
counters does not effect the Position Error.
6 - 30
The Control Overrides / Position & Error screen (page 2).
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
CONTROL OVERRIDES
POSITION & ERRORS
Preset FI2 Position
Preset FI1 Position
Reset Position Err
Make a line active
(highlight ) and press
the Enter key to reset
or preset the selected
parameter.
Preset FI1, FI2 Psn
Reset FI1,F12 & Err
P2/3
6 - 31
Control Overrides
Use the Control Overrides screen (page 3) to effect the following control functions:
Negate Setpoint (change direction),
Bypass the Ramp,
Stop the Ramp,
Reset Integral
Stop the Integral
Open Loop
Scroll the cursor to the item that you want to activate and press Enter. The highlighter will appear and will
remain on the function(s) that are active. If you want to deactivate a function, scroll the cursor to the
function that you want to deactivate and press Enter. The highlighter will disappear and that function is no
longer active.
The Cntrl Latch bits are OR'ed with the corresponding PLC Bits. Use either the PLC or the keypad to
activate these functions.
6 - 32
The Control Overrides screen (page 3).
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
CONTROL OVERRIDES
Negate Sc REF
Bypass Ramp
Stop Ramp
Make a line active
(highlight ) and press
the Enter key to either
set or reset the
functions.
Reset Integral
Stop Integral
Open Loop
P3/3
6 - 33
—NOTES—
6 - 34
Serial Communications
Introduction to Serial Communications
CX-1010 Serial Communications ASCII Data-Link Protocol
CX-1010 Serial Communications ASCII2 Data-Link Protocol
CX-1010 Serial Communications Binary Data-Link Protocol
7-1
7-2
INTRODUCTION TO
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
The CX-1010 can interface with a host computer through a RS485 Serial Communications Interface (refer to
Figure 2-30, CX-1010 Multidrop Installation, page 2-24). This interface allows the host computer to
perform remote control of the CX-1010, Control Parameter entry, and status or performance monitoring.
This following sections describe the three available interfaces for Serial Communications:
CX-1010 Serial Communications ASCII Data-Link Protocol
(Message Transmission / Response Structures)
CX-1010 Serial Communications ASCII2 Data-Link Protocol
(Message Transmission / Response Structures)
CX-1010 Serial Communications Binary Data-Link Protocol
(Message Transmission / Response Structures)
NOTE: Before you can apply Serial Communications, the CX-1010 must be interfaced with a host computer
through a RS485 Serial Communications Interface.
The CX-1010 comes factory pre-loaded with default Control Parameters for Serial Communications. These
Control Parameters set up the CX-1010 to accommodate the RS485 Serial Communications Interface.
Generally, the default settings are suitable for most applications and do not require modification, however,
these default parameters can be modified for your specific application.
All of the other Control Parameters can be modified as well, when communications have been established
through the host computer using the Serial Communications Interface. To configure for Serial
Communications, refer to System Setup - Control Parameters: Device Configure, Serial Communications
section, page 5-176.
7-3
CX-1010 Serial Communications ASCII Data-Link Protocol
(Message Transmission / Response Structures)
STX
Address
Function
Message Error
Data Field
ETX
CRC
1 Byte ^B Char(2)
2 ASCII Chars
2 ASCII Chars
2 ASCII Chars
Number of characters defined by Function
1 Byte ^C Char(3)
4 ASCII HEX Chars (0000 - FFFF)
Number of constant characters per Transmission = 10 characters (Minimum # of characters)
CX-1010 Serial Communications Buffer Size = 255 characters (Maximum # of characters)
(leaves a maximum of 245 characters for the data field)
Note: In this document pertaining to ASCII protocols, any reference to ASCII HEX or “0-F” refers to ASCII
representation of a HEX number using ASCII characters “0-9” & “A-F”.
Functions that are included in the ASCII Protocol:
01) Data Read Single Parameter
02) Data Write Single Parameter
03) Data Read Parm Block (14 parameter limit)
04) Data Write Parm Block (14 parameter limit)
05) Control Command Send
08) Data Read Custom Engineering Units
09) Data Write Custom Engineering Units
10) Data Read Constant Table (4 parameter limit)
Example:
Request Value for CP-110
Table 7-1 Data Read Single Parameter, Host Transmission
STX
^B
7-4
ADDR
0
1
FUNC
0
1
DATA
1
1
EXT
0
^C
CRC
F
4
4
6
Definition of Message Elements
“STX”
Signals the start of transmission. (Host/CX-1010) A single byte ASCII Char
(02) “^B”.
”Address”
Address of the CX-1010 that will recognize and interpret the message. A two
character ASCII number in the range of “01” - “99”. (“@0” = Global Transmission)
“Function”
The CX-1010 function requested which defines the data structure to follow.
It is a two character ASCII number in the range of “01”-”10" (accepted
functions are defined above).
“Message Error” (Msg Error) General transmission response from the CX-1010. This is a two character
ASCII HEX number, in the range of “00” - “FF”, which may indicate a
serial communications error has occurred upon receipt of a message transmission.
“Data Field”
A field of variable length which contains the data for the function requested.
The Data Field is defined for individual functions through out the following
section.
“ETX”
Signals the end of the message. (Host/CX-1010) A single byte ASCII Char
(03) “^C”.
“CRC”
(Cyclic Redundancy Check) If CRC Enable is “ON”, a CRC value is calculated and sent with each transmission. The CRC includes all message data
except the STX byte. The data stream is checked against the CRC at the
receiving end. The CRC is a four character ASCII HEX number in the range
of “0000” - “FFFF”.
“Format Character” (Fmt)
An ASCII character, in the range of “0-2”; where “0” indicates the value is
“OK” as is, “1” indicates the value is negative and “2” indicates the value is
in binary format.
“Resolution Character” (Res) An ASCII character, in the range of “0-9”, that indicates the number of digits
to the right of the decimal point for the value.
7-5
FUNCTION (01) DATA READ SINGLE PARAMETER
Table 7-2 Host Transmission
Character #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
DESC
STX
Address
Function
Parameter Number ETX
CRC (0000 - FFFF)
ASCII
^B
0-9
0
0-9
0-F
1-9
1
0-9
0-9
^C
0-F
13
0-F
0-F
23
24
Data Field - Parameter Number - 3 characters.
Message Length = 13 characters.
Table 7-3 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
2
DESC
STX
Address
Msg Error
Data Field ETX
ASCII
^B
0-9
0-F
0-F
<below>
10
11
12
3
4
1-9
5
6-19
20
21
22
CRC (0000 - FFFF)
^C
0-F
14
15
0-F
0-F
0-F
18
19
Data Field per Table 7-3 (14 characters)
Character #
6
7
8
9
DESC
Error Code Res Fmt
ASCII
0-3 0-9
0-9
0-2
13
16
Parameter Value (0000000000-9999999999)
0-9
0-9
0-9
0-9
0-9
0-9
0-9
Parameter Error Code - 2 characters.
Resolution
- 1 character (Number of digits to the right of the decimal point).
Format
- 1 character (0 = OK as is, 1 = Negative value, 2 = Binary value).
Parameter Value
- 10 character (Positive numeric value of the parameter).
Message Length = 24 characters.
7-6
17
0-9
0-9
0-9
FUNCTION (02) DATA WRITE SINGLE PARAMETER
Table 7-4 Host Transmission
Character #
1
2
DESC
STX
Address
Function
Data Field ETX
ASCII
^B
0-9
0
<below>
3
4
0-9
5
2
6-20
21
22
^C
23
24
25
CRC (0000 - FFFF)
0-F
0-F
16
17
0-F
0-F
Data Field per Table 7-4 (15 characters)
Character #
6
DESC
Parm Number Res Fmt
ASCII
0-9
Parameter Number
Resolution
Format
Parameter Value
7
8
0-9
9
0-9
10
0-9 0-9
11
12
13
14
15
18
19
20
Parameter Value (0000000000-9999999999)
0-9
0-9
0-9
0-9
0-9
0-9
0-9
0-9 0-9
0-9
11
12
- 3 characters.
- 1 character.
- 1 character.
- 10 characters.
Message Length = 25 characters.
Table 7-5 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
2
3
DESC
STX
Address
Msg Error
Error Code
ETX
ASCII
^B
0-9
0-F
0-3
^C
1-9
4
5
0-F
6
7
0-9
8
9
10
CRC (0000 - FFFF)
0-F
0-F
0-F
0-F
Data Field - Parameter Error Code - 2 characters.
Message Length = 12 characters
7-7
FUNCTION (03) DATA READ PARAMETER BLOCK
Table 7-6 Host Transmission
Character #
1
2
DESC
STX
Address
Function
Data Field ETX
ASCII
^B
0-9
0
<below>
3
4
1-9
5
3
6-8
9
^C
10
11
12
13
CRC (0000 - FFFF)
0-F
0-F
0-F
0-F
Data Field per Table 7-6
Number of Parameters x 3 characters/parameter (14 parameters max. = 42 characters)
Character #
6
7
8
DESC
Parameter Number 100's
Parameter Number 10's
ASCII
0-9
0-9
Parameter Number 1's
0-9
Parameter Number - 3 characters.
Message Length = 13 to 52 characters.
Data Field Example:
Data Read Block of 3 Parameters (MP-40, CP-101, CP-440)
Character #
6
7-8
8
9
Parameter 40
DESC
ASCII
7
0
4
10
11
12
Parameter 101
0
1
0
1
13
14
Parameter 440
4
4
0
Table 7-7 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
2
DESC
STX
Address
Msg Error
Data Field ETX
ASCII
^B
0-9
0-F
<below>
3
4
1-9
5
0-F
6-22
23
^C
24
25
26
27
CRC (0000 - FFFF)
0-F
0-F
0-F
0-F
Data Field per Table 7-7
Number of Parameters x 17 characters/parameter (14 parameters max. = 238 characters)
Character #
6
DESC
Parm Number Error Code Res Fmt
ASCII
0-9 0-9 0-9 0-3 0-9 0-9
Parameter Number
Parameter Error Code
Resolution
Format
Parameter Value
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Parameter Value (0000000000-9999999999
0-2 0-9 0-9 0-9 0-9 0-9 0-9 0-9 0-9 0-9 0-9
- 3 characters.
- 2 characters.
- 1 character.
- 1 character.
- 10 characters.
Message Length = 27 to 248 characters.
7-9
FUNCTION (04) DATA WRITE PARAMETER BLOCK
Table 7-8 Host Transmission
Character #
1
2
DESC
STX
Address
Function
Data Field ETX
ASCII
^B
0-9
0
<below>
3
0-9
4
5
6-20
4
21
22
^C
23
24
25
CRC (0000 - FFFF)
0-F
0-F
0-F
0-F
Data Field per Table 7-8
Number of Parameters x 15 characters/parameter (14 parameters max. = 210 characters)
Character #
6
DESC
Parm Number Res Fmt
ASCII
0-9
Parameter Number
Resolution
Format
Parameter Value
7
8
0-9
9
0-9
10
0-9 0-2
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Parameter Value (0000000000-9999999999)
0-9
0-9
0-9
0-9
0-9
0-9
0-9
0-9 0-9
0-9
12
13
14
15
- 3 characters.
- 1 characters.
- 1 characters.
- 10 characters.
Message Length = 25 to 220 characters.
Table 7-9 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
2
DESC
STX
Address
Msg Error
Data Field ETX
ASCII
^B
0-9
0-F
<below>
3
1-9
4
5
0-F
6-10
11
^C
CRC (0000 - FFFF)
0-F
0-F
0-F
Data Field per Table 7-9
Number of Parameters x 5 characters/parameter (14 parameters max. = 70 characters)
Character #
6
DESC
ASCII
7
Parameter Number
0-9
Parameter Number
- 3 characters.
Parameter Error Code - 2 characters.
Message Length = 15 to 80 characters.
7 - 10
8
0-9
9
10
Parameter Error Code
0-9
0-3
0-9
0-F
FUNCTION (05) CONTROL COMMAND SEND
Table 7-10 Host Transmission
Character #
1
2
3
DESC
STX
Address
Function
Command
ETX
ASCII
^B
0-9
0
0-2
^C
0-9
4
5
5
6
7
0-9
8
9
10
11
12
CRC (0000 - FFFF)
0-F
0-F
0-F
0-F
9
10
11
12
Data Field - Control Command - 2 characters
Valid Control Commands:
01 = F-Stop.
02 = R-Stop.
03 = H-Stop.
04 = Run.
05 = Jog Forward.
06 = Jog Reverse.
07 = Jog Stop.
09 = Reset Integral.
10 = Preset FB Position.
11 = Preset LD Position.
12 = Reset Position Error.
13 = Preset FB & LD Position.
14 = Preset FB, LD, & Reset Position Error.
17 = Negate Scaled Reference.
21 = Bypass Ramp.
22 = Stop Ramp.
23 = Open Loop.
24 = Stop Integral.
Message Length = 12 characters.
Table 7-11 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
2
3
DESC
STX
Address
Msg Error
Cmd Error
ETX
ASCII
^B
0-9
0-F
0-3
^C
1-9
4
5
0-F
6
7
0-9
8
CRC (0000 - FFFF)
0-F
0-F
0-F
0-F
Data Field - Command Error Code - 2 characters.
Message Length = 12 characters.
7 - 11
FUNCTION (08) DATA READ CUSTOM ENGINEERING UNITS
Table 7-12 Host Transmission
Character #
1
2
3
4
DESC
STX
Address
Function
ETX
ASCII
^B
0-9
0
^C
1-9
5
6
8
7
8
9
10
CRC (0000-FFFF)
0-F
0-F
0-F
0-F
23
24
25
Data Field - 0 characters.
Message Length = 10 characters.
Table 7-13 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
2
3
4
5
6-20
21
22
DESC
STX
Address
Msg Error
Data Field ETX
ASCII
^B
0-9
0-F
<below>
1-9
0-F
^C
CRC (0000 - FFFF)
0-F
0-F
0-F
0-F
15
16
17
18 19
20
!- ~
!- ~
!- ~
!- ~ !- ~
!- ~
Data Field per Table 7-13
Engineering Units Text - (1 to 15 characters)
Character #
6
7
8
9
10
12
13
14
Engineering Units Text
DESC
ASCII
11
!- ~
!- ~
!- ~
!- ~ !- ~
!- ~
!- ~
!- ~
!- ~
Message Length = 11 to 25 characters.
Note:
7 - 12
The Engineering Units Text string may be any string of printable ASCII characters of up to 15
characters long.
FUNCTION (09) DATA WRITE CUSTOM ENGINEERING UNITS
Table 7-14 Host Transmission
Character #
1
2
DESC
STX
Address
Function
Data Field ETX
ASCII
^B
0-9
0
<below>
3
4
0-9
5
9
6-20
21
22
^C
23
24
25
CRC (0000 - FFFF)
0-F
0-F
0-F
0-F
15
16
17
18
19
20
!- ~
!- ~
!- ~
!- ~ !- ~
!- ~
Data Field per Table 7-14
Engineering Units Text - (1 to 15 characters)
Character #
6
7
8
9
10
12
13
14
Engineering Units Text
DESC
ASCII
11
!- ~
!- ~
!- ~
!- ~ !- ~
!- ~
!- ~
!- ~
!- ~
Message Length = 11 to 25 characters.
Note:
The Engineering Units Text String may be any string of printable ASCII characters of up to 15
characters long.
Table 7-15 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
2
3
DESC
STX
Address
Msg Error
Error Code
ETX
ASCII
^B
0-9
0-F
0-3
^C
1-9
4
5
0-F
6
7
0-9
8
9
10
11
12
CRC (0000 - FFFF)
0-F
0-F
0-F
0-F
Data Field - EU Text Error Code - 2 characters.
Message Length = 12 characters.
7 - 13
FUNCTION (10) DATA READ PARAMETER CONSTANT TABLE
Table 7-16 Host Transmission
Character #
1
2
DESC
STX
Address
Function
Data Field ETX
ASCII
^B
0-9
1
<below>
3
4
1-9
5
0
6-8
9
^C
10
11
12
13
CRC (0000 - FFFF)
0-F
0-F
0-F
0-F
Data Field per Table 7-16
Number of Parameters x 3 characters/parameter (4 parameters max. = 12 characters)
Character #
6
7
8
DESC
Parameter Number 100's
Parameter Number 10's
ASCII
0-9
0-9
Parameter Number 1's
0-9
Parameter Number - 3 characters.
Message Length = 13 to 22 characters.
Table 7-17 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
2
DESC
STX
Address
Msg Error
Data Field ETX
ASCII
^B
0-9
0-F
<below>
3
1-9
4
5
0-F
6-241
242
^C
243
244
245
CRC (0000 - FFFF)
0-F
0-F
0-F
Data Field - Number of Parameters x 59 characters/parameter (4 parameters max. = 236 characters).
Parameter Number
- 3 characters (000 - 999).
Parameter Error Code
- 2 characters (00 - 32).
Title Text String
- 15 characters (String of 15 printable ASCII characters).
Minimum Value Format*
- 1 character
(0 - 2).
Minimum Value*
- 10 characters (0000000000 - 9999999999).
Maximum Value Format*
- 1 character
(0 - 2).
Maximum Value*
- 10 characters (0000000000 - 9999999999).
Default Value Format*
- 1 character
(0 - 2).
Default Value*
- 10 characters (0000000000 - 9999999999).
Minimum Resolution*
- 1 character
(0 - 9) Resolution for Minimum Value.
Maximum Resolution*
- 1 character
(0 - 9) Maximum Resolution for any value.
Default Resolution*
- 1 character
(0 - 9) Resolution for Default Value.
Parameter Control byte
- 2 characters (ASCII HEX Number, 00 - FF).
Field Length
- 1 character
(0 - 9) Length of parameter field.
* These fields will be filled with zeros for all Monitor Parameter requests.
Message Length = 69 to 246 characters
7 - 14
246
0-F
Message Error Bits Definitions:
Bit 7 = (1) CRC Failure
Bit 6 = (1) Buffer Overflow
Bit 5 = (1) ETX Not Received/Data Field Error
Bit 4 = (1) Invalid Function/Data Error
Bit 3 = (1) Over-Run Error
Bit 2 = (1) Noise Error
Bit 1 = (1) Framing Error
Bit 0 = (1) Parity Error
Example:
“86” = the number 10000110 (binary) would indicate a CRC failure with Noise errors and Framing
errors occurred when the transmission message was received.
Other Errors Returned From The Control Through Serial Communications:
00
= OK
01
= General Data Error
02
= Res Byte Error
03
= Invalid Parameter
04
= String too Long
05
= Out of Range
06
= Not Allowed
07
= Lockout During Run
08
= Not Ready
09
= Block Parameter Error
10
= Block Value Error
11
= Block Parameter Memory Limit
12
= MIN Error
13
= MAX Error
14
= Invalid Command (PLC/Control Command Send)
15
= Invalid Operand (PLC)
16
= <END> Statement Missing (PLC)
17
= PLC Program Memory Limit
18
= Defaults Loaded
19
= Backup Loaded
20
= Backup Saved
21
= Checksum Error
22
= Faults Cleared
23
= Test Passed
24
= Test Failed
25
= No Compare Parameter
26
= Divide by Zero
27
= Long Word Overflow
28
= Parameter Transfer Limit Overflow
29
= Memory Read request too long
30
= Data Field Length Error
31
= Message Function Request/Parameter NOT Processed
32
= Invalid Function Request
7 - 15
Parameter Control Byte Definitions:
Bit 7 = (1) Negative Numbers are Possible (0) Positive Numbers Only
Bit 6 = (1) Leading Zero’s OK (0) No Leading Zero’s
Bit 5 = (1) Restricted (0) Not Restricted
Bit 4 = (1) Parameter Defined (0) Parameter is NOT Defined
Bit 3 = Not Used (Reserved) always 0
Bit 2 = (1) Floating Point Number (0) Fixed Decimal Point Number
Bit 1 = (1) Binary Number (0) Decimal Number
Bit 0 = (1) Integer (0) Non-Integer
Example of CRC-16 Calculation (in C):
#define CRC16 0x8005
/* CRC-16 Generating Poly */
/* function returns the accumulated CRC value calculated for the Buffer */
/* this value can be transmitted or compared to a CRC value received */
/* “*data” is a pointer to the Buffer of data bytes to calculate the CRC for */
/* “len” is the number of data bytes to use for the calculation */
unsigned int do_crc(unsigned char *data, int len)
{
int i, j;
/* byte & bit counters */
unsigned int accum = 0xFFFF;
/* CRC value accumulator */
unsigned int dat;
/* holds data byte */
for(i = 0; i < len; ++i){
dat = *data++;
accum ^= (dat << 8);
j = 0;
while(j++ < 8){
if(accum & 0x8000)
accum ^= CRC16;
accum <<= 1;
}
}
return(accum);
}
Note:
7 - 16
/* for each byte of data */
/* get data byte & goto next */
/* put data into high byte */
/* clear bit counter */
/* for each bit */
/* if MSB set */
/* Modulus-2 math w/CRC 16 */
/* shift left 1 bit */
/* end for each bit */
/* end for each byte */
/* return the CRC value */
/* End do_crc function */
This “CRC” must be converted to 4 ASCII characters before transmission. (Chars 0 to 9 and A to F
should be used). For all “ASCII HEX” values the A through F characters must be in Upper Case
when Transmitted in order to keep the conversions consistent.
CX-1010 Serial Communications ASCII2 Data-Link Protocol
(Message Transmission / Response Structures)
STX
Address
Data Field
ETX
1 Byte ^B Char(2)
1 or 2 ASCII characters, normally followed by a comma
Flexible field of ASCII characters defined later in this document
1 Byte ^C Char(3)
Note: The “ETX” character may be followed by “CRC” characters if “CRC Enable” is “ON”. Any reference to ASCII HEX or “0-F” refers to ASCII representation of a HEX number using ASCII characters “0-9” & “A-F”.
Functions that are included in the ASCII2 Protocol:
1) Control Acknowledgment
2) Data Read Single Parameter
3) Data Write Single Parameter
4) Control Command Send
5) Data Read Custom Engineering Units
6) Data Write Custom Engineering units
7) Data Read Parameter Title
8) Data Read Maximum Parameter Value
9) Data Read Minimum Parameter Value
10) Data Read Default Parameter Value
11) Data Read Backup Parameter Value
12) Data Read Value of the Maximum Parameter Field length
13) Data Read Parameter Control Byte
7 - 17
Definition of Message Elements
“STX”
Signals the start of a transmission. (Host/CX-1010) A single byte ASCII Char (02) “^B”.
“Address”
Address of the CX-1010 to recognize and interpret the message. One or two ASCII
characters, followed by a comma, in the range of “0-99”. (“0” indicates a Global Transmission to be received by all controls on the serial link).
“Message Error” (Msg Error) General transmission response from the CX-1010. This is a two character
ASCII HEX number, in the range of “00” - “FF”, which may indicate a serial communications error has occurred upon receipt of a message transmission.
“Data Field”
A field of variable length which contains the data for the function requested. The Data
Field is defined for individual functions through out the following section.
“?”
Field terminator requesting response from the CX-1010.
“ ”
,
Address and Data Field separator.
“=”
Assignment operator indicating assignment of data to follow, or indicator of a parameter
value to follow.
“ ”
.
Indicates a Constant Table Read of type to follow.
“!”
Indicates a Control Command Send.
“ETX”
Signals the end of the message. (Host/CX-1010) A single byte ASCII Char (03) “^C”.
“CRC”
(Cyclic Redundancy Check) If CRC Enable is “ON”, a CRC value is calculated and sent
with each transmission. The CRC includes all message data except the STX byte. The
data stream is checked against the CRC at the receiving end. The CRC is a four character
ASCII HEX number in the range of “0000” - “FFFF”.
Note: To conserve space, the CRC field has been omitted on all of the following message definition tables.
If the CRC Enable is “ON”, then a CRC value must be appended to each message transmission
immediately following the ETX character.
7 - 18
FUNCTION (01) CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGMENT
Table 7-18 Host Transmission
Character #
1
2
3
4
DESC
STX
Address
Inquiry
ETX
ASCII
^B
1-99
?
^C
Address Field
This field may consist of one or two ASCII characters, depending on the address of the control. For
example, if the address is less than 10, then only one ASCII character is required in this field. If the
address is greater than 9, then two ASCII characters are required in this field to represent the address. Leading spaces in this field will be ignored.
Table 7-19 CX-1010 Response
Character #
\ DESC
ASCII
1
2
3
4
5
STX
Msg Error
Separator
ACK
ETX
^B
0-FF
,
^F
^C
Msg Error Field
This field may consist of one or two ASCII HEX characters that indicate any serial communications
errors that may have occurred when the message transmission was received.
ACK
This field acknowledges that the control exists (represented by ASCII character #6). If there is not a
control at the address indicated, there will not be a response.
7 - 19
FUNCTION (02) DATA READ SINGLE PARAMETER
Table 20 Host Transmission
Character #
1
2
3
4
5
6
DESC
STX
Address
Separator
Parm #
Inquiry
ETX
ASCII
^B
1-99
,
0-999
?
^C
Parm # Field
This field may consist of one or more ASCII characters representing the parameter number requested. If the parameter number is less than 10, then a single ASCII character may be used to
represent the parameter number. If the parameter number is in the range of 10 to 99, then two
characters are required to represent the parameter number. If the parameter number is 100 or greater,
then three characters are required to represent the parameter number. Any leading spaces will be
ignored.
Table 21 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DESC
STX
Msg Error
Separator
Parm #
Equals
Value
ETX
ASCII
^B
0-FF
,
0-999
=
<below>
^C
Value Field
This field will consist of an ASCII string representing the value for the parameter requested. If there
is an error retrieving the parameter value, this field will contain the error code number preceded by
an “E” (e.g., “E3”).
Examples with No Error:
decimal integer value of 1
decimal integer value of 1000
decimal integer value of -20
decimal value of 1234.56
decimal value of -15.00
Binary value of 89D
7 - 20
“1”
“1000”
“-20”
“1234.56”
“-15.00”
“01011001”
FUNCTION (03) DATA WRITE SINGLE PARAMETER
Table 22 Host Transmission
Character #
1
DESC
STX
Address Separator
ASCII
^B
0-99
2
3
,
4
5
6
7
8
Parm #
Assign
Value
Inquiry
ETX
0-999
=
<below>
?
^C
Value Field
This field will consist of an ASCII string representing the value to be assigned to the parameter.
Leading spaces in this field will be ignored.
Examples:
decimal integer value of 1
decimal integer value of 1
decimal integer value of 1000
decimal integer value of -20
decimal value of 1234.56
decimal value of -15.00
Binary value of 89D
“1”
“ 1”
“1000”
“-20”
“1234.56”
“-15.00”
“01011001”
Inquiry Field (Inq)
The inclusion of the inquiry designator is optional. If no response is required this character may be
omitted from the message. If this character field is not included in the message, the operation will be
performed, however the control will not respond.
Table 23 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DESC
STX
Msg Error
Separator
Parm #
Equals
Value
ETX
ASCII
^B
0-FF
,
0-999
=
<below
^C
Value Field
This field will consist of an ASCII string representing the value assigned to the parameter. If an error
occurred in the assignment operation, this field will contain the error code number preceded by an
“E” (e.g., “E3”).
Value Field Examples with No Error:
decimal integer value of 1
decimal integer value of 1000
decimal integer value of -20
decimal value of 1234.56
decimal value of -15.00
Binary value of 89D
“1”
“1000”
“-20”
“1234.56”
“-15.00”
“01011001”
7 - 21
FUNCTION (04) CONTROL COMMAND SEND
Table 24 Host Transmission
Character #
1
2
3
4
5
6
DESC
STX
Address
Separator
Command
Inquiry
ETX
ASCII
^B
0-99
,
ASCII2 Command String
?
^C
List of Valid ASCII2 Command Strings:
FST! = F-Stop
RST! = R-Stop
HST! = H-Stop
RUN! = Run
JGF! = Jog Forward
JGR! = Jog Reverse
JGS! = Jog Stop
RSI!
= Reset Integral
PFP! = Preset Feedback Position
PLP! = Preset Lead Position
RPE! = Reset Position Error
PFL! = Preset Feedback & Lead position
RAP! = Preset Feedback & Lead position, and Reset Position Error
NSR! = Negate Scaled Reference
BPR! = Bypass Ramp
STR! = Stop Ramp
OPL! = Open Loop
STI!
= Stop Integral
Command Field
Insert any of the valid ASCII2 command strings defined above.
Inquiry Field (Inquiry)
The inclusion of the inquiry designator is optional. If no response is required this character may be
omitted from the message. If this character field is not included in the message, the commanded
operation will be performed, however the control will not respond.
Table 25 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
2
3
4
5
DESC
STX
Msg Error
Separator
Command
ETX
ASCII
^B
0-FF
,
<below>
^C
Command Field
If the requested command is acted upon, this field will contain the command string that was sent. If
an error occurred, this field will contain an “E” followed immediately by an ASCII representation of
the error code number which occurred. (e.g., “E31”)
7 - 22
FUNCTION (05) DATA READ CUSTOM ENGINEERING UNITS
Table 26 Host Transmission
Character #
1
2
3
DESC
STX
Msg Error
Separator
ASCII
^B
1-99
,
4
5
EU Request
E
U
6
7
Inquiry
ETX
?
^C
Table 27 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
DESC
STX
ASCII
^B
2
3
Msg Error Separator
0-FF
,
4
5
EU Indicator
E
U
6
7
8
Equals
EU Text
ETX
=
<below>
^C
Engineering Unit Text Field
This field will contain the custom engineering units text string from the control’s memory. (Up to 15
printable ASCII characters long)
7 - 23
FUNCTION (06) DATA WRITE CUSTOM ENGINEERING UNITS
Table 28 Host Transmission
Character #
1
2
3
4
DESC
STX
Address Separator
ASCII
^B
0-99
5
EU Indicator
,
E
6
7
8
9
Assign
EU Text
Inquiry
ETX
=
<below>
?
^C
U
EU Text Field
This field should contain a string of up to 15 printable ASCII characters that are to be assigned to the
custom engineering units text for the control at the indicated address.
Inquiry Field (Inquiry)
The inclusion of the inquiry designator is optional. If no response is required this character may be
omitted from the message. If this character field is not included in the message, the commanded
operation will be performed, however the control will not respond.
Table 29 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
DESC
STX
ASCII
^B
2
3
Msg Error Separator
0-FF
,
4
5
EU Indicator
E
U
6
7
8
Equals
EU Text
ETX
=
<below>
^C
Engineering Unit Text Field
If the assignment is successful, this field will contain the custom engineering units text string
assigned. (Up to 15 printable ASCII characters long) If an error occurred in the assignment operation, this field will contain the error code number preceded by an “E” (e.g., “E4”).
7 - 24
Data Read Constant Table
7) Data Read Parameter Title
8) Data Read Maximum Parameter Value
9) Data Read Minimum Parameter Value
10) Data Read Default Parameter Value
11) Data Read Backup Parameter Value
12) Data Read Value of the Maximum Parameter Field length
13) Data Read Parameter Control Byte
Note:
For all constant table reads, the host transmission message structure is the same differing only by the
read command following the period.
Table 30 Host Transmission
Character #
1
2
3
DESC
STX
Address Separator
ASCII
^B
1-99
,
4
5
6
Parm Number
0-9
0-9
0-9
7
8
CTR
Type
.
<below>
9
10
Inquiry ETX
?
^C
Constant Table Read Type Strings:
TTL =
Parameter Title Text
MAX =
Maximum Parameter Value
MIN =
Minimum Parameter Value
DEF =
Default Parameter Value
BKU =
Backup Parameter Value
FLD =
Parameter Field length
CTB =
Parameter Control Byte
CTR Field
This field should always be a period designating a Constant Table Read of type to follow for the
indicated parameter.
Type Field
Insert the desired constant table read type string into this field. The control will respond with the
appropriate data for the type of read requested. This is a three character field.
7 - 25
FUNCTION (07) DATA READ PARAMETER TITLE
Table 31 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DESC
STX
Msg Error
Separator
Parm #
Equals
Parm Title Text
ETX
ASCII
^B
0-FF
,
1-999
=
<below>
^C
Parm Title Text Field
This field will contain an ASCII string of 15 characters for the title of the parameter requested. If
there is an error in the request, this field will contain the error code number preceded by an “E” (e.g.,
“E3”).
7 - 26
FUNCTION (08) DATA READ MAXIMUM PARAMETER VALUE
Table 32 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DESC
STX
Msg Error
Separator
Parm #
Equals
Max Parm Value
ETX
ASCII
^B
0-FF
,
1-999
=
<below>
^C
Max Parm Value Field
This field will contain an ASCII string Representation of the numeric maximum value for the parameter requested. If there is an error in the request, this field will contain the error code number preceded by an “E” (e.g., “E3”).
7 - 27
FUNCTION (09) DATA READ MINIMUM PARAMETER VALUE
Table 33 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DESC
STX
Msg Error
Separator
Parm #
Equals
Min Parm Value
ETX
ASCII
^B
0-FF
,
1-999
=
<below>
^C
Min Parm Value Field
This field will contain an ASCII string Representation of the numeric minimum value for the parameter requested. If there is an error in the request, this field will contain the error code number preceded by an “E” (e.g., “E3”).
7 - 28
FUNCTION (10) DATA READ DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUE
Table 34 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
2
3
4
DESC
STX
Msg Error
Separator
Parm #
ASCII
^B
0-FF
,
1-999
5
6
7
Equals Default Parm Value ETX
=
<below>
^C
Default Parm Value Field
This field will contain an ASCII string Representation of the numeric default value for the parameter
requested. If there is an error in the request, this field will contain the error code number preceded
by an “E” (e.g., “E3”).
7 - 29
FUNCTION (11) DATA READ BACKUP PARAMETER VALUE
Table 35 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
2
3
4
DESC
STX
Msg Error
Separator
Parm #
ASCII
^B
0-FF
,
1-999
5
6
7
Equals Backup Parm Value ETX
=
<below>
^C
Backup Parm Value Field
This field will contain an ASCII string Representation of the numeric backup value for the parameter
requested. If there is an error in the request, this field will contain the error code number preceded
by an “E” (e.g., “E3”).
7 - 30
FUNCTION (12) DATA READ VALUE OF THE MAXIMUM PARAMETER FIELD LENGTH
Table 36 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DESC
STX
Msg Error
Separator
Parm #
Equals
Parm Field Length
ETX
ASCII
^B
0-FF
,
1-999
=
0-9
^C
Parm Field Length Field
This field will contain an ASCII character, of the range 0 to 9, for the field length of the parameter
requested. If there is an error in the request, this field will contain the error code number preceded
by an “E” (e.g., “E3”).
7 - 31
FUNCTION (13) DATA READ PARAMETER CONTROL BYTE
Table 37 CX-1010 Response
Character #
1
2
3
4
5
6-13
14
DESC
STX
Msg Error
Separator
Parm #
Equals
Parm Control Byte
ETX
ASCII
^B
0-FF
,
1-999
=
0-1
^C
Parameter Control Byte Field
This field will contain an ASCII string of 8 characters, of the range 0 to 1, representing, in binary
format, the parameter control byte for the parameter requested. If there is an error in the request, this
field will contain the error code number preceded by an “E” (e.g., “E3”).
Parameter Control Byte field per Table 37
Character #
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
DESC
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
ASCII
0-1
0-1
0-1
0-1
0-1
0-1
0-1
0-1
Parameter Control Byte Definitions:
Bit 7 = (1) Negative Numbers are Possible (0) Positive Numbers Only
Bit 6 = (1) Leading Zero’s OK (0) No Leading Zero’s
Bit 5 = (1) Restricted (0) Not Restricted
Bit 4 = (1) Parameter Define (0) Parameter is NOT Defined
Bit 3 = Not Used (Reserved) always 0
Bit 2 = (1) Floating Decimal Point Number (0) Fixed Decimal Point Number
Bit 1 = (1) Binary Number (0) Decimal Number
Bit 0 = (1) Integer (0) Non-Integer
Message Error Response Field
Consists of 2 Bytes (ASCII “HEX”)
“ASCII HEX” means the numeric value in the field is NOT represented as a decimal (Base 10) Number. The
Number is represented by the characters: 0 through 9 and A through F for the HEX equivalent of the binary
number.
Message Error Bit Definitions:
Bit 7 = (1) CRC Failure
Bit 6 = (1) Buffer Overflow
Bit 5 = (1) ETX Not Received/Data Field Error
Bit 4 = (1) Invalid Function/Data Error
Bit 3 = (1) Over-Run Error
Bit 2 = (1) Noise Error
Bit 1 = (1) Framing Error
Bit 0 = (1) Parity Error
Example:
“86” = the number 10000110 (binary) would indicate a CRC failure with Noise errors and Framing
errors occurred when the transmission message was received.
7 - 32
Other Errors Returned From The Control Through Serial Communications:
00
= OK
01
= General Data Error
02
= Res Byte Error
03
= Invalid Parameter
04
= String too Long
05
= Out of Range
06
= Not Allowed
07
= Lockout During Run
08
= Not Ready
09
= Block Parameter Error
10
= Block Value Error
11
= Block Parameter Memory Limit
12
= MIN Error
13
= MAX Error
14
= Invalid Command (PLC/Control Command Send)
15
= Invalid Operand (PLC)
16
= <END> Statement Missing (PLC)
17
= PLC Program Memory Limit
18
= Defaults Loaded
19
= Backup Loaded
20
= Backup Saved
21
= Checksum Error
22
= Faults Cleared
23
= Test Passed
24
= Test Failed
25
= No Compare Parameter
26
= Divide by Zero
27
= Long Word Overflow
28
= Parameter Transfer Limit Overflow
29
= Memory Read request too long
30
= Data Field Length Error
31
= Message Function Request/Parameter NOT Processed
32
= Invalid Function Request
Note:
In the ASCII2 protocol the error codes listed above are preceded by an “E” (e.g., “E32” indicates an
Invalid Function Request)
7 - 33
Example of CRC-16 Calculation (in C):
#define CRC16 0x8005
/* CRC-16 Generating Poly */
/* function returns the accumulated CRC value calculated for the Buffer */
/* this value can be transmitted or compared to a CRC value received */
/* “*data” is a pointer to the Buffer of data bytes to calculate the CRC for */
/* “len” is the number of data bytes to use for the calculation */
unsigned int do_crc(unsigned char *data, int len)
{
int i, j;
/* byte & bit counters */
unsigned int accum = 0xFFFF;
/* CRC value accumulator */
unsigned int dat;
/* holds data byte */
for(i = 0; i < len; ++i){
dat = *data++;
accum ^= (dat << 8);
j = 0;
while(j++ < 8){
if(accum & 0x8000)
accum ^= CRC16;
accum <<= 1;
}
}
return(accum);
}
Note:
7 - 34
/* for each byte of data */
/* get data byte & goto next */
/* put data into high byte */
/* clear bit counter */
/* for each bit */
/* if MSB set */
/* Modulus-2 math w/CRC 16 */
/* shift left 1 bit */
/* end for each bit */
/* end for each byte */
/* return the CRC value */
/* End do_crc function */
This “CRC” must be converted to 4 ASCII characters before transmission. (Chars 0 to 9 and A to F
should be used). For all “ASCII HEX” values the A through F characters must be in Upper Case
when Transmitted in order to keep the conversions consistent.
CX-1010 Serial Communications Binary Data-Link Protocol
(Message Transmission / Response Structures)
STX
Length
Address
Function
Message Error
Data Field
ETX
CRC
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE
BYTE
Defined later for each function type
BYTE
WORD (2 BYTES)
Valid Binary Protocol Functions:
1) Data Read Single Parameter
2) Data Write Single Parameter
3) Data Read Parameter Block (Limit 16)
4) Data Write Parameter Block (Limit 16)
5) Control Commands
6) PLC Program Download from Control
7) PLC Program Upload to Control
8) Custom Engineering Units Download
9) Custom Engineering Units Upload
10) Data Read Constant Table (Limit 6)
11) Parameter Data Trace Enable/Disable (enables/disables the CX-1010's ability to collect data
traces)
12) Data Read Parameter Trace (read consecutive trace data from the CX-1010)
13) Data Read Trace Status Byte
Example:
Request for CP-110
Table 38
Data Read Single Parameter, Host Transmission
STX
LEN
ADDR
FUNC
DATA
ETX
CRC
02
09
01
01
006E
03
0C56
7 - 35
Definition of Message Elements
“STX”
Signals the start of a transmission (Host/CX-1010)
“Length”
Length of complete message in bytes including STX, ETX, & CRC
“Address”
Address of the CX-1010
“Function”
Defines the data structure that is expected to follow and what action the CX1010 will take.
“Message Error”
This is a general transmission error response from the CX-1010.
“Data Field”
A field of variable length which contains the data for the function requested.
The Data Field is defined for individual functions through out the following
section.
“ETX”
Signals the end of a data transmission (Host/CX-1010)
“CRC”
(Cyclic Redundancy Check) The CRC is calculated and sent with each
transmission. It includes all message data except the STX byte. The data
stream is checked against the CRC at the receiving end.
“Resolution Character” (Res) An ASCII character, in the range of “0-9”, that indicates the number of digits
to the right of the decimal point for the value.
7 - 36
FUNCTION (01) DATA READ SINGLE PARAMETER
Table 39 Host Transmission
Byte #
1
2
DESC
STX
Length
Decimal
2
9
1-99
Hex
02
09
01-63
3
4
Address Function
5
6
7
8
9
Parm Number
ETX
CRC
1
1-999
3
0-65535
01
0001-03E7
03
0000-FFFF
Message Length = 9 bytes
Table 40 CX-1010 Response
Byte #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
DESC
STX Length Address Msg Error Control Res
Error Code Byte
Parameter Value
ETX
CRC
Decimal
2
14
1-99 0-255 0-32 0-244 0-9
-2147483648
2147483647
3
0-65535
Hex
02
0E
01-63 00-FF 00-20 00-F4 00-09
80000000-7FFFFFFF
03
0000-FFFF
Data Field -(7 Bytes)
Parameter Error Code - 1 byte
Parameter Control byte - 1 byte
Resolution
- 1 byte
Parameter Value
- LONG (4 bytes)
Message Length = 14 bytes
7 - 37
FUNCTION (02) DATA WRITE SINGLE PARAMETER
Table 41 Host Transmission
Byte #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
DESC
STX Length Address Func Parm Number Res
Parameter Value
ETX
CRC
Decimal
2
14
0-99
2
101-999
0-9
-2147483648
2147483647
3
0-65535
Hex
02
0E
00-63
02
0065-03E7
00-09
80000000-7FFFFFFF
03
0000-FFFF
7
8
Data Field -(7 Bytes)
Parameter Number
Resolution
Parameter Value
- WORD (2 bytes)
- 1 byte
- LONG (4 bytes)
Message Length = 14 bytes
Table 42 CX-1010 Response
Byte #
1
DESC
STX
Length
Decimal
2
8
1-99
0-255
Hex
02
08
01-63
00-FF
Message Length = 8 bytes
7 - 38
2
3
4
5
Address Msg Error Error Code
6
ETX
CRC
0-32
3
0-65535
00-20
03
0000-FFFF
FUNCTION (03) DATA READ PARAMETER BLOCK
Table 43 Host Transmission
Byte #
1
2
DESC
STX
Length
Address Function
Decimal
2
9-39
1-99
Hex
02
09-27
01-63
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Parm Number
ETX
CRC
3
1-999
3
0-65535
03
0001-03E7
03
0000-FFFF
Data Field per Table 43
Number of parameters x 2 bytes/parameter (16 parameters max. = 32 bytes)
Parameter Number - WORD (2 bytes) for each parameter request
Message Length = 9 to 39 bytes
Table 44 CX-1010 Response
Byte #
1
DESC
STX
Length
Decimal
2
16-151
1-99
0-255
Hex
02
10-97
01-63
00-FF
2
3
4
5-13
14
Address Msg Error Data Field
15
16
ETX
CRC
<below>
3
0-65535
<below>
03
0000-FFFF
Data Field per Table 44
Number of parameters x 9 bytes/parameter (16 parameters max. = 144 bytes)
Byte #
5
6
7
8
Decimal
Error Parmameter Number Control
Code
Byte
0-32
1-999
0-244
Hex
00-20
DESC
0000-03E7
9
10
11
12
13
Res
Parameter Value
0-9
-2147483648-2147483647
00-F4 00-09
80000000-7FFFFFFF
Parameter Error Code - 1 byte
Parameter Number
- WORD (2 bytes)
Parameter Control byte - 1 byte
Resolution
- 1 byte
Parameter Value
- LONG (4 bytes)
Message Length = 16 to 151 bytes
7 - 39
FUNCTION (04) DATA WRITE PARAMETER BLOCK
Table 45 Host Transmission
Byte #
1
DESC
STX
Length
Address
Decimal
2
14-199
0-99
4
Hex
02
0E-77
00-63
04
2
3
4
5-11
12
Function Data Field
13
14
ETX
CRC
<below>
3
0-65535
<below>
03
0000-FFFF
Data Field per Table 45
Number of parameters x 7 bytes/parameter (16 parameters max. = 112 bytes)
Byte #
5
6
8
9
10
DESC
Parameter Number
Resolution
Parameter Value
Decimal
101-999
0-9
-2147483648 to 2147483647
Hex
0065-03E7
00-09
80000000-7FFFFFFF
Parameter Number
Resolution
Parameter Value
- WORD (2 bytes)
- 1 byte
- LONG (4 bytes)
Message Length = 14 to 119 bytes
7 - 40
7
11
Table 46 CX-1010 Response
Byte #
1
DESC
STX
Length
Decimal
2
10-55
1-99
0-255
Hex
02
0A-37
01-63
00-FF
2
3
4
5-7
8
Address Msg Error Data Field
9
10
ETX
CRC
<below>
3
0-65535
<below>
03
0000-FFFF
Data Field per Table 46
Number of Parameters x 3 bytes/parameter (16 parameters max. = 48 bytes)
Byte #
5
DESC
Error Code
Parameter Number
Decimal
0-32
1-999
Hex
00-20
001-03E7
6
7
Parameter Error Code - BYTE
Parameter Number
- WORD (2 Bytes)
Message Length = 10 to 55 bytes
7 - 41
FUNCTION (05) DATA WRITE CONTROL COMMAND
Table 47 Host Transmission
Byte #
1
DESC
STX
Length
Address
Decimal
2
8
0-99
5
Hex
02
08
00-63
05
2
3
4
5
Function Command
6
7
8
ETX
CRC
1-24
3
0-65535
01-18
03
0000-FFFF
Valid Control Commands:
01 (01) = F-Stop
02 (02) = R-Stop
03 (03) = H-Stop
04 (04) = Run
05 (05) = Jog Forward
06 (06) = Jog Reverse
07 (07) = Jog Stop
09 (09) = Reset Integral
10 (0A) = Preset Feedback Position
11 (0B) = Preset Lead Position
12 (0C) = Reset Position Error
13 (0D) = Preset Feedback & Lead Position
14 (0E) = Preset Feedback & Lead Position and Reset Position Error
17 (11) = Negate Scaled Reference
21 (15) = Bypass Ramp
22 (16) = Stop Ramp
23 (17) = Open Loop
24 (18) = Stop Integral
Message Length = 8 bytes
Table 48 CX-1010 Response
Byte #
1
DESC
STX
Length
Decimal
2
8
1-99
0-255
Hex
02
08
01-63
00-FF
Message Length = 8 bytes
7 - 42
2
3
4
5
Address Msg Error Error Code
6
7
8
ETX
CRC
0-32
3
0-65535
00-20
03
0000-FFFF
FUNCTION (06) DATA READ PLC PROGRAM
Table 49 Host Transmission
Byte #
1
DESC
STX
Length
Address
Decimal
2
8
1-99
6
Hex
02
08
01-63
06
2
3
4
5
Function PLC Type
6
7
8
ETX
CRC
0-1
3
0-65535
00-01
03
0000-FFFF
133
134
PLC Program Type:
00 = Default Program
01 = Current User Program
Message Length = 8 bytes
Table 50 CX-1010 Response
Byte #
1
2
DESC
STX
Length
Decimal
2
9-135
1-99
0-255
Hex
02
09-87
01-63
00-FF
3
4
5-132
Address Msg Error PLC Program
135
ETX
CRC
0-255
3
0-65535
00-FF
03
0000-FFFF
PLC Program Field - (2 to 128 Bytes)
This field will contain the PLC Program Requested, which may be any where from 2 to 128 bytes of data.
The format for this data will be in pairs of Commands & Operands:
PLC Command - 1 byte
PLC Operand - 1 byte
Refer to Appendices: Appendix K for the PLC Program Commands and Appendices: Appendix L for the PLC
Program Operands.
Message Length = 9 to 135 bytes
7 - 43
FUNCTION (07) DATA WRITE PLC PROGRAM
Table 51 Host Transmission
Byte #
1
2
DESC
STX
Length
Decimal
2
9-135
0-99
7
Hex
02
09-87
00-63
07
3
4
5-132
Address Function PLC Program
133
134
135
ETX
CRC
0-255
3
0-65535
00-FF
03
0000-FFFF
PLC Program Field - (2 to 128 Bytes)
This field should contain a PLC Program, which may be any where from 2 to 128 bytes of data. The format
for this data should be in pairs of Commands & Operands:
PLC Command - 1 byte
PLC Operand - 1 byte
Refer to Appendices: Appendix K for the PLC Program Commands and Appendices: Appendix L for the PLC
Program Operands.
Message Length = 9 to 135 bytes
Table 52 CX-1010 Response
Byte #
1
DESC
STX
Length
Decimal
2
8
1-99
0-255
Hex
02
08
01-63
00-FF
Message Length = 8 bytes
7 - 44
2
3
4
5
Address Msg Error Error Code
6
7
8
ETX
CRC
0-32
3
0-65535
00-20
03
0000-FFFF
FUNCTION (08) DATA READ CUSTOM ENGINEERING UNITS
Table 53 Host Transmission
Byte #
1
2
3
4
5
DESC
STX
Length
Address
Function
ETX
CRC
Decimal
2
7
1-99
8
3
0-65535
Hex
02
07
01-63
08
03
0000-FFFF
6
7
Message Length = 7 bytes
Table 54 CX-1010 Response
Byte #
1
2
DESC
STX
Length
Decimal
2
8-22
1-99
Hex
02
08-16
01-63
3
4
5-19
20
EU Text
ETX
CRC
0-255
<below>
3
0-65535
00-FF
<below>
03
0000-FFFF
Address Msg Error
21
22
EU Text Field - Engineering Units Text String (0 to 15 Printable ASCII characters)
Message Length = 7 to 22 bytes
7 - 45
FUNCTION (09) DATA WRITE CUSTOM ENGINEERING UNITS
Table 55 Host Transmission
Byte #
1
2
3
4
5-19
20
DESC
STX
Length
Address
Function
EU Text
ETX
CRC
Decimal
2
8-22
0-99
9
<below>
3
0-65535
Hex
02
08-16
00-63
09
<below>
03
0000-FFFF
21
22
EU Text Field - Engineering Units Text String (1 to 15 Printable ASCII characters)
Message Length = 8 to 22 bytes
Table 56 CX-1010 Response
Byte #
1
DESC
STX
Length
Decimal
2
8
1-99
0-255
Hex
02
08
01-63
00-FF
Message Length = 8 bytes
7 - 46
2
3
4
5
Address Msg Error Error Code
6
7
8
ETX
CRC
0-32
3
0-65535
00-20
03
0000-FFFF
FUNCTION (10) DATA READ CONSTANT TABLE
Table 57 Host Transmission
Byte #
1
2
DESC
STX
Length
Decimal
2
9-19
1-99
10
Hex
02
09-13
01-63
0A
3
4
5-6
Address Function Parameter #
7
8
9
ETX
CRC
1-999
3
0-65535
0001-03E7
03
0000-FFFF
Parameter Number Field - Number of parameters x 2 bytes/parameter (6 parameters max. = 12 bytes)
Message Length = 9 to 19 bytes
Table 58 CX-1010 Response
Byte #
1
DESC
STX
Length
Decimal
2
43-223
1-99
0-255
Hex
02
2B-DF
01-63
00-FF
2
3
4
5-220
Address Msg Error Data Field
221
222
223
ETX
CRC
<below>
3
0-65535
<below>
03
0000-FFFF
Data Field - Number of parameters x 36 bytes/parameter (6 parameters max. = 216 bytes)
Parameter Number
Parameter Error Code
Parameter Title
Minimum Value*
Maximum Value*
Default Value*
Resolution for Minimum*
Maximum Resolution*
Resolution for Default*
Parameter Control byte
Field Length
-WORD (2 bytes) (0000 - 03E7)
-1 byte (00 - 20)
-16 bytes (String of 16 Printable ASCII characters)
-LONG (4 bytes) (80000000 - 7FFFFFFF)
-LONG (4 bytes) (80000000 - 7FFFFFFF)
-LONG (4 bytes) (80000000 - 7FFFFFFF)
-1 byte (00 - 09)
-1 byte (00 - 09)
-1 byte (00 - 09)
-1 byte (00 - F4)
-1 byte (00 - 09)
* These fields will be filled with zeros for all Monitor Parameter requests.
Message Length = 43 to 223 bytes
7 - 47
FUNCTION (11) PARAMETER TRACE ENABLE/DISABLE
This function is used to setup and control the CX-1010 internal data collection feature: "Data Trace".
CX-1010 internal data collection feature
The CX-1010 control has the capability to record 1 millisecond samples of up to 4 monitor parameters. The
total size is 8192 samples (data points). The number of "Traces" (monitor parameters sampled) may be 1
(single trace), 2 (dual trace), or 4 (quad trace). The number of samples collected per trace are listed below:
Number of Samples per Trace
# of Trace Parameters
1
2
4
Description
Single Trace
Dual Trace
Quad Trace
Samples per Trace Parameter
8192
4096
2048
Total Sample Time
8.192 Sec
4.096 Sec
2.048 Sec
Configuration:
For a single trace, set the value for Trace Parameter 1 to the desired monitor parameter number, and
set the rest of the Trace Parameters to zero (0).
For a dual trace, set the values for Trace Parameter 1 and 2 to the desired monitor parameter numbers, and set the rest of the Trace Parameters to zero (0).
For a quad trace, set all of the values for Trace Parameters 1 thru 4 to the desired monitor parameter
numbers.
Trigger:
The trace sampling begins when a "trigger" is encountered, after the "data trace" has been enabled.
The trigger is signaled through the PLC program by the "start trace" bit (167) transition from 0 to 1.
The CX-1010 control has the capability to collect "pre-trigger" data samples. These are samples
collected prior to a "trigger". The "pre-trigger time" is variable from 0 seconds to 2.000 seconds, and
is setup by the pre-trigger time (Pre-Trig) value and resolution in a "Set Trace Configuration" message (defined later in this section).
Actions taken by the CX-1010 control in response to this function (11) are controlled by a "message control
byte" defined below.
Control Byte Definitions:
Bit 7 = Not Used (always 0)
Bit 6 = Not Used (always 0)
Bit 5 = Not Used (always 0)
Bit 4 = Not Used (always 0)
Bit 3 = Not Used (always 0)
Bit 2 = (1) Set Trace configuration (Pre-Trigger setting, and all Trace Parameter numbers)
Bit 1 = (1) Read Data Trace configuration (Pre-Trigger setting, and all Trace Parameter numbers)
Bit 0 = (1) Enable the Data Trace collection and wait for a trigger point (0) Disable the Trace
collection "stop"
7 - 48
Message Control byte definition description:
Value
CX-1010 Control actions
CX-1010 Response
00
Disable Trace, stop collecting data
Error code
01
Enable Trace, wait for trigger
Error code
02
Read Trace Configuration, ignore bit 0
Status Byte, Trace Configuration
03
Read Trace Configuration, ignore bit 0
Status Byte, Trace Configuration
04
Set Trace Config, Disable Trace, stop
Configuration Error Codes
05
Set Trace Config, Reset Trace, wait for trigger
Configuration Error Codes
06
Set & Read Trace Config & Disable Trace, stop
Error Codes & Trace Configuration
07
Set & Read Trace Config & Reset, wait for trigger Error Codes & Trace Configuration
Trace Status Byte Definitions:
Bit 7 = Not Used (always 0)
Bit 6 = Not Used (always 0)
Bit 5 = Not Used (always 0)
Bit 4 = Not Used (always 0)
Bit 3 = (1) Trace complete (0) Trace not complete
Bit 2 = (1) Trace active, trigger encountered, collecting data (0) No Trigger encountered
Bit 1 = (1) Trigger enabled, collecting data, waiting for trigger (0) Trigger disabled
Bit 0 = (1) Trace enabled (0) Trace disabled
Trace Status Byte values:
00 = Trace disabled
01 = Trace enabled
03 = Trace enabled, collecting pre-trigger data, waiting for trigger
05 = Trace enabled, trigger encountered, collecting data
08 = Trace complete, data collected
7 - 49
Set Trace Configuration, Read Trace Configuration, and enable or disable the internal trace data capture
Message Control byte value: 6 or 7
Table 59 Host Transmission
2
3
5
6 - 16
Byte #
1
DESC
STX
Decimal
2
19
1-99
11
6 or 7
Hex
02
13
01 - 63
4
Length Address Function Control Data Field
17
18
19
EXT
CRC
<below>
3
0 - 65535
0B
06 or 07 <below>
03
0000 - FFFF
10
11
14
Data Field per Table 59
Byte #
DESC
6
9
8
12
13
Trace Parm 1 Trace Parm 2 Trace Parm 3 Trace Parm 4
15
16
Pre-Trigger
Resolution
0 - 90
0 - 90
0 - 90
0 - 90
0.000 - 2.000
0-3
0000 - 005A
0000 - 005A
0000 - 005A
0000 - 005A
0000 - 07D0
00 - 03
Decimal
Hex
7
Message length = 19 bytes
Result: Trace parameters 1 to 4 and the pre-trigger time value are all set, and the Trace Data collection is
enabled or disabled. The values for the Trace Parameters are returned along with the Pre-Trigger setting.
Table 60 CX-1010 Response
Byte #
1
2
DESC
STX
Length
Decimal
2
23
1 - 99
0 - 255
Hex
02
17
01-63
00 - FF
3
4
5 - 20
Address Msg Error Data Field
21
22
23
ETX
CRC
<below>
3
0 - 65535
<below>
03
0000 - FFFF
Data Field per Table 60
Byte #
DESC
5
7
0-90
9 10
11
0-32
0-90
0-32
00-20 0000- 00-20 0000- 00-20
005A
005A
Message length = 23 bytes
7 - 50
8
12 13
15 16
19
20
Pre-Trigger
Res
0-32
0.000-2.000
0-3
0000- 00-20 0000- 00-20
005A
005A
0000-07D0
00-03
14
17
Error Trace Error Trace Error Trace Error Trace Error
Parm 2
Parm 3
Parm 1
Parm 4
Decimal 0-32
Hex
6
0-90
0-32
0-90
18
Response Data Field Definitions:
Byte #
5
6-7
8
9-10
11
12-13
14
15-16
17
18-19
20
Type
byte
UINT
byte
UINT
byte
UINT
byte
UINT
byte
UINT
byte
Description
Error code result from Setting Trace Parameter 1
Trace Parameter 1 value
Error code result from Setting Trace Parameter 2
Trace Parameter 2 value
Error code result from Setting Trace Parameter 3
Trace Parameter 3 value
Error code result from Setting Trace Parameter 4
Trace Parameter 4 value
Error code result from Setting Pre-Trigger Time
Pre-Trigger Time value setting (seconds)
Pre-Trigger Time value resolution byte
7 - 51
Set Trace Configuration and enable or disable the internal trace data capture.
Message Control byte value: 4 or 5
Table 61 Host Transmission
2
3
5
6 - 16
Byte #
1
DESC
STX
Decimal
2
19
1 - 99
11
4 or 5
Hex
02
13
01 - 63
9
4
17
Length Address Function Control Data Field
18
19
EXT
CRC
<below>
3
0 - 65535
0B
04 or 05 <below>
03
0000 - FFFF
10
11
14
Data Field per Table 61
Byte #
DESC
Decimal
Hex
6
7
8
12
13
Trace Parm 1 Trace Parm 2 Trace Parm 3 Trace Parm 4
15
16
Pre-Trigger
Resolution
0 - 90
0 - 90
0 - 90
0 - 90
0.000 - 2.000
0-3
0000 - 005A
0000 - 005A
0000 - 005A
0000 - 005A
0000 - 07D0
00 - 03
Message length = 19
Result: Trace parameters 1 to 4 and the pre-trigger time value are all set, and the Trace Data collection is
enabled or disabled.
Table 62 CX-1010 Response
Byte #
1
2
DESC
STX
Length
Decimal
2
12
1 - 99
0 - 255
Hex
02
0C
01-63
00 - FF
3
4
5-9
Address Msg Error Data Field
10
11
12
ETX
CRC
<below>
3
0 - 65535
<below>
03
0000 - FFFF
8
9
Data Field per Table 62
Byte #
DESC
5
7
TrcParm 1 Error TrcParm 2 Error TrcParm 3 Error TrcParm 4 Error Pre-Trigger Error
Decimal
0 - 32
0 - 32
0 - 32
0 - 32
0 - 32
Hex
00 - 20
00 - 20
00 - 20
00 - 20
00 - 20
Message length = 12 bytes
7 - 52
6
Read Trace Configuration
Message Control byte value: 2 or 3
Table 63 Host Transmission
2
3
Byte #
1
DESC
STX
Decimal
2
8
1 - 99
11
Hex
02
08
01 - 63
0B
5
4
6
Length Address Function Control
7
8
EXT
CRC
2 or 3
3
0 - 65535
02 or 03
03
0000 - FFFF
Message length = 8 bytes
Result: The Data Trace is neither enabled nor disabled. The Trace configuration is simply returned in the
response along with the Trace Status byte.
Table 64 CX-1010 Response
Byte #
1
2
DESC
STX
Length
Decimal
2
19
1 - 99
0 - 255
Hex
02
13
01-63
00 - FF
3
4
5 - 16
17
Address Msg Error Data Field
18
19
ETX
CRC
<below>
3
0 - 65535
<below>
03
0000 - FFFF
11
13
14
Data Field per Table 64
6
Byte #
DESC
7
8
9
10
12
15
16
Status Trace Parm 1 Trace Parm 2 Trace Parm 3 Trace Parm 4 Pre-Trigger
Res
Decimal
0-8
0 - 90
0 - 90
0 - 90
Hex
00-08
0000 - 005A
0000 - 005A
0000 - 005A
0 - 90
0 - 2.000
0-3
0000 - 005A 0000 - 07D0 00 - 03
Message length = 19 bytes
7 - 53
Table 65 Host Transmission
Byte #
1
DESC
STX
Decimal
2
8
1-99
Hex
02
08
01-63
2
3
4
5
6
Data
ETX
CRC
11
0-1
3
0-65535
0B
00-01
03
0000-FFFF
Length Address Function
7
8
Data Field:
00 = Disable Data Trace Collection
01 = Enable Data Trace Collection and reset data pointers to the beginning, start collecting new data
and wait for a trigger point.
Message Length = 8 bytes
Table 66 CX-1010 Response
Byte #
1
2
DESC
STX
Length
Decimal
2
8
1-99
0-255
Hex
02
08
01-63
00-FF
3
4
5
Address Msg Error Error Code
6
7
8
ETX
CRC
0-32
3
0-65535
00-20
03
0000-FFFF
An Error Code of “00” indicates that the action was taken and was completed. Refer to page 7-53 for other
error code responses.
Message Length = 8 bytes
7 - 54
FUNCTION (12) DATA READ PARAMETER TRACE
Use this function to read consecutive trace data from the control, re-read the last data set, or reset and re-read
the trace data from the beginning again.
Table 67 Host Transmission
Byte #
1
DESC
STX
Decimal
2
8
1-99
Hex
02
08
01-63
2
3
4
5
6
Control
ETX
CRC
12
0-2
3
0-65535
0C
00-02
03
0000-FFFF
246
247
Length Address Function
7
8
Control Byte (5) definition:
00 = Reset and re-read from beginning
01 = Continue reading from end of the last data point that was read
02 = Re-read the prior data segment
Message Length = 8 bytes
Table 68 CX-1010 Response
Byte #
1
DESC
STX
Length
Decimal
2
12-248
1-99
0-255
Hex
02
0C
01-63
00-FF
2
3
4
5-245
Address Msg Error Data Field
248
ETX
CRC
<below>
3
0-65535
<below>
03
0000-FFFF
Data Field per Table 68
Length = 1 + [ 4 x Number of data points ]
Byte #
5
DESC
Status/Error Code
Trace Data
Decimal
0-32
-2147483648-2147483647
Hex
00-20
80000000-7FFFFFFF
6
7
8
9
Trace Read Status/Error Code - 1 byte/response
Trace Data
- LONG (4 bytes/data point*)
*Maximum of 60 Data Points/Transmission ( 1 + [ 4 x 60] = 241 bytes )
Message Length = 12 to 248 bytes
7 - 55
FUNCTION (13) READ PARAMETER TRACE DATA/RE-READ PREVIOUS
Use this function to read the trace status byte.
Status Byte Definitions:
Bit 7 = Not Defined (always 0)
Bit 6 = Not Defined (always 0)
Bit 5 = Not Defined (always 0)
Bit 4 = Not Defined (always 0)
Bit 3 = (1) Trace Complete (0) Not Complete
Bit 2 = (1) Trace Active (trigger encountered, collecting data) (0) Not Active
Bit 1 = (1) Trace Enabled (waiting for trigger to occur) (0) Disabled
Bit 0 = (1) Trace Enabled (0) Disabled
Table 69 Host Transmission
Byte #
1
2
3
4
5
DESC
STX
Length
Address
Function
ETX
CRC
Decimal
2
8
1-99
13
3
0-65535
Hex
02
08
01-63
0D
03
0000-FFFF
6
7
Message Length = 7 bytes
Table 70 CX-1010 Response
Byte #
1
DESC
STX
Length
Decimal
2
8
1-99
Hex
02
08
01-63
2
3
4
5
6
Status
ETX
CRC
0-255
0-8
3
0-65535
00-FF
00-08
03
0000-FFFF
Address Msg Error
Status Bytes values:
Bits:
76543210
00000000
00000001
00000011
00000101
00001000
Decimal:
=0
=1
=3
=5
=8
Message Length = 8 bytes
7 - 56
Description
Trace Disabled, no data collected.
Trace Enabled.
Trace Enabled, waiting for trigger.
Trigger Encountered, collecting data.
Trigger Complete, collecting data.
7
8
Message Error Response Field
This field consists of one byte. Each bit in the byte may be set to 1 indicating a specific error has
occurred.
Message Error Bits Definitions:
Bit 7 = (1) CRC Failure
Bit 6 = (1) Buffer Overflow
Bit 5 = (1) ETX Not Received/Data Field Error
Bit 4 = (1) Invalid Function/Data Error
Bit 3 = (1) Over-Run Error
Bit 2 = (1) Noise Error
Bit 1 = (1) Framing Error
Bit 0 = (1) Parity Error
Example:
“86” = the number 10000110 (binary) would indicate a CRC failure with Noise errors and Framing
errors occurred when the transmission message was received.
Other Errors Returned From Control Through The Serial Communications
0 (00) = OK
1 (01) = General Data Error
2 (02) = Res Byte Error
3 (03) = Invalid Parameter
4 (04) = String too Long
5 (05) = Out of Range
6 (06) = Not Allowed
7 (07) = Lockout During Run
8 (08) = Not Ready
9 (09) = Block Parameter Error
10 (0A) = Block Value Error
11 (0B) = Block Parameter Memory Limit
12 (0C) = MIN Error
13 (0D) = MAX Error
14 (0E) = Invalid Command (PLC/Control Command Send)
15 (0F) = Invalid Operand (PLC)
16 (10) = <END> Statement Missing (PLC)
17 (11) = PLC Program Memory Limit
18 (12) = Defaults Loaded
19 (13) = Backup Loaded
20 (14) = Backup Saved
21 (15) = Checksum Error
22 (16) = Faults Cleared
23 (17) = Test Passed
24 (18) = Test Failed
25 (19) = No Compare Parameter
26 (1A) = Divide by Zero
27 (1B) = Long Word Overflow
28 (1C) = Parameter Transfer Limit Overflow
29 (1D) = Memory Read request too long
30 (1E) = Data Field Length Error
31 (1F) = Message Function Request/Parameter NOT Processed
32 (20) = Invalid Function Request
7 - 57
Control Byte Definitions:
Bit 7 =
(1) Negative Numbers Allowed (0) Positive Numbers only
Bit 6 =
(1) Leading Zero's (0) No Leading Zero's
Bit 5 =
(1) Restricted Parameter (0) Unrestricted Parameter
Bit 4 =
(1) Parameter Defined (0) Undefined Parameter
Bit 3 =
Not Used (always 0)
Bit 2 =
(1) Floating Decimal Point (0) Fixed Decimal Point
Bit 1 =
(1) Binary Number (0) Decimal Number
Bit 0 =
(1) Integer (0) Non-Integer
Note: Applies to Parameters & Parameter Values
Example of CRC-16 Calculation (in C):
#define CRC16 0x8005
/* CRC-16 Generating Poly */
/* function returns the accumulated CRC value calculated for the Buffer */
/* this value can be transmitted or compared to a CRC value received */
/* “*data” is a pointer to the Buffer of data bytes to calculate the CRC for */
/* “len” is the number of data bytes to use for the calculation */
unsigned int do_crc(unsigned char *data, int len)
{
int i, j;
/* byte & bit counters */
unsigned int accum = 0xFFFF;
/* CRC value accumulator */
unsigned int dat;
/* holds data byte */
for(i = 0; i < len; ++i){
dat = *data++;
accum ^= (dat << 8);
j = 0;
while(j++ < 8){
if(accum & 0x8000)
accum ^= CRC16;
accum <<= 1;
}
}
return(accum);
}
7 - 58
/* for each byte of data */
/* get data byte & goto next */
/* put data into high byte */
/* clear bit counter */
/* for each bit */
/* if MSB set */
/* Modulus-2 math w/CRC 16 */
/* shift left 1 bit */
/* end for each bit */
/* end for each byte */
/* return the CRC value */
/* End do_crc function */
Troubleshooting/Diagnostics
Device Tests
Hardware Tests
STD Signals Tests
DIG I/O Tests
Aux Analog Tests
Serial Comm Tests
Device Status
Device Model & Rev.
Troubleshooting
Parameter Load at Power-Up
EPROM
8-1
8-2
DEVICE TESTS
The Device Tests screens allow you to test the memory, keypad and display of the CX-1010. You can also
test the analog and digital I/O as well as the serial communications and calibrate the Auxiliary Analog.
Processor fault conditions and counters can be monitored. The software revision level, the model and the
release date is also available. If any test fails, contact Contrex Technical Support at (763) 424-7800 or
(800) 342-4411.
The CX-1010 Device Tests screens are:
• Hardware Tests
• STD Signal Tests
• Digital I/O Tests
• Aux Analog Tests
• Serial Communications Test
• Device Status
• Device Model & Revision
8-3
HARDWARE TESTS
Memory
Use the Hardware Tests / Memory (page 1) to test the CX-1010's memory. Enter the number in Memory Test
(CP-390) that corresponds to the section of memory that you want to test (see list below), then press the
Enter key. To test all three sections, enter a “4”, then press the Enter key.
4 = All Memory Test
3 = NVRAM Test
2 = SRAM Test
1 = ROM Test
0 = Test Done
You can also refer to page 1 of the Memory Test's (CP-390) Help screen for the test list and the
corresponding numeric codes. You can enter a test from the Help screen by scrolling the highlight bar to the
test and pressing the Enter key.
When the test(s) are complete, the ROM Test (MP-94), SCRAM Test (MP-95) and NVRAM Test ( MP-96)
will update and indicate whether the test passed or failed. A message will flash in the message bar, as well.
At the completion of the test, the value of Memory Test (CP-390) will automatically return to “0” (test done).
If any test fails, contact Contrex Technical Support at (763) 424-7800 or (800) 342-4411.
8-4
The Hardware Tests screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / Device Tests
(CP-390)
Enter a code (1-4).
Press the Enter key.
HARDWARE TESTS
MEMORY
Memory Test
0
ROM
Test
SRAM
Test
NV RAM Test
PASS
PASS
PASS
(MP-94, 95, 96)
Display the test results.
(“pass” or “fail”)
P1/3
A “passed” or “failed”
message will flash in the
message bar.
8-5
Keypad
Use the Hardware Tests / Keypad (page 2) to test the keypad. Press the Enter key to start the test. The
“START” text on the first line of screen will change to “EXIT” and you can begin testing the keys (with the
exception of the Enter key). Press each key individually. Each of the keys should register a number in the
Keypad Buffer line that corresponds with the numbers listed in Figure 8-1. A key has failed the test if its
number does not correspond with the numbers that are listed in Figure 8-1. Press the Enter key to exit the
test.
KeyPad Lockout (MP-29)
Keypad Lockout (MP-29) displays the Keypad Lockout status. The Keypad Lockout is active when “On”
is displayed. When Keypad Lockout is active, Control Parameter values can not be changed, with the
exception of the Control Parameters that are exempted by CP’s 380-389. The Keypad Lockout is not active
when “OFF” is displayed. When the Keypad Lockout is not active, any Control Parameter can be changed.
=15
MENU
=13
CODE
=19
STATUS
=14
HELP
=20
=16
8-6
=18
7=7
8=8
9=9
=21
4=4
5=5
6=6
=22
1=1
2=2
3=3
-
0=10
=11
Figure 8-1
=17
.
=12
CLEAR
=23
=13
ENTER
=24
The Hardware Tests Corresponding Keypad Numbers
The Device Test / Hardware Tests / Keypad screen (page 2).
Press the Enter key to
start the test.
The “Start” text will
change to ”Exit” while
the test is operational.
HARDWARE TESTS
KEYPAD
Hit <ENTER> to START
Keypad Diagnostics
Keypad Lockout
Last Key
Number of Keys
OFF
page dn
0
(MP-29)
Displays the status of
keypad lockout input.
Displays the test results.
0
KeyPad Buffer
0
0
0
0
0
P2/3
8-7
Video
Use the Hardware Tests / Video (page 3) to test the screen display. Either enter a “1 ”in Video Test (CP-292)
and press the Enter key to start the test. You can also use the increment scroll-up key, to start the test. The
Display Diagnostic instructional screen will appear. Use the Page Up or Page Down keys to step through
each test.
Each screen uses a different display combination to test the display hardware. The Contrast Test will
automatically scroll through a range of contrast. Refrain from pressing a key during this test and allow the
Contrast Test to complete its cycle. To exit the tests, and return to the Hardware Tests Display screen
(page 3), press the Menu key.
Video Test (CP-392)
To start the Video Test, enter “1” in Video Test (CP-392). Then use the Page Up/Down keys to page through tests.
Press the Menu key to exit the tests and return to the previous screen.
Video Mode (CP-374)
Video Mode (CP-374) determines how the LCD Screen Display will be displayed, per the list below:
3 = Standard Video w/Border
2 = Reverse Video
1 = Standard Video (default)
Contrast Value (CP-375)
Contrast Value (CP-375) determines the contrast for the LCD Screen Display. The higher values darken the pixels
and lower values lighten the pixels.
8-8
The Device Test / Hardware Tests / Video screen (page 3).
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
HARDWARE TESTS
VIDEO
Video Test
Video Mode
Contrast Value
OFF
Standard
18
(CP-392)
Enter a “1”.
Press the Enter key.
Use either the Page
Up or the Page Down
key to step through
each test.
(CP-374)
Enter a code (1-3)
Press the Enter key.
(CP-375)
Enter a contrast value
between 1 and 32.
Press the Enter key.
P3/3
8-9
—NOTES—
8 - 10
STD SIGNAL TESTS
The STD Signal Tests screens allow you to test the control output and the frequency inputs. The STD
Signals Tests / Frequency Inputs screen (page 1) displays the Monitor Parameters that are associated with
Frequency Input 1 (FI1) and the Frequency Input 2 (FI2). Input a known frequency and monitor the results
here.
Use the STD Signals Tests / Control Output screen (page 2) to test the CO_SIG. The CO_SIG is the
CX-1010 output signal that is input to the drive. Temporarily disconnect the signal from the drive and use a
scope or voltmeter to verify the CO_SIG operation.
NOTE: The CX-1010 must not be in “Run” or “Jog” when you begin the diagnostics. To start the diagnostics, enter a “1” in Diagnostics En (CP-350) and press the Enter key.
Select the type of output test in Diag DAC Test (CP-353). The output test types are:
4 = High Frequency Oscillation Output (a high-frequency ramp)
3 = Continuous Ramp (a continuous ramp to plus and minus voltage -if bipolar mode)
2 = Ramp to DAC & Hold (a ramp to a constant voltage)
1 = Immediate Output (an immediate step to a constant voltage)
0 = Disabled (default)
In ramp to a constant voltage (2) and continuous ramp (3), you can set the ramp time. The high-frequency
ramp exercises each bit individually (i.e. each samples’ output is two times the previous sample as the signal
increases). The high-frequency ramp will reach plus and minus 10 or 15 volts, depending on the value in
Diag DAC Volts (CP-354).
Diag DAC Volts (CP-354) determines the voltage that is output for the “Ramp to DAC & Hold” test (1) and
the “Immediate Output” (2) test that are found in the Diag DAC Test (CP-353). This is also the peak voltage
that the “Continuous Ramp” test (3) will reach. Diag DAC Bits (CP-355) also determines the voltage, but in
terms of the DAC bit value. Diag DAC Test (CP-353) is limited to +CO MAX Volts.
Diag Rmp Tm (CP-356) determines the slope of the ramp for the ramp-to-voltage and the continuous ramp.
This is the time in seconds that it takes to increase the voltage from 0 volts to the Diag DAC Volts (CP-354).
In order to get every possible bit combination, the continuous ramp must ramp at a time of 8.191 seconds or
more and the Diag DAC Volts (CP-354) must be equal to the CO Max Volts (CP-181). In this scenario, CO
Max Volts (CP-181) must be 10 to 15 volts. The ramp should appear without discontinuity, even at low
voltage.
The purpose of the CO_SIG Offset is to cancel any electrical offsets that may be present on the CO_SIG
when the CX-1010 is calling for “0” volts on the output. Set Diagnostics En (CP-350) to “1” (enabled) and
Diag DAC Test (CP-353) to “1” (DCout), then set the Diag DAC Volts (CP-354) to “0” and measure the
voltage on pin J3-1 relative to J3-2. Enter the negative of the voltage reading in CO Offset (CP-366) and
then verify that the voltage on the CO_SIG reads at or close to “0” volts.
8 - 11
Frequency Inputs
The STD Signals Tests / Frequency Inputs screen (page 1) displays the Monitor Parameters that are
associated with Frequency Input 1 (FI1) and the Frequency Input 2 (FI2). Input a known frequency and
monitor the results here.
FI1 Hz (MP-01)
Frequency Input 1 Hertz (MP-01) displays the current frequency of the Frequency Input 1, in Hertz.
FI1 RPM (MP-02)
Frequency Input 1 RPM (MP-02) displays the current speed of the Frequency Input 1 encoder in RPM relative to
PPR FI1 (Cp-161).
FI1 Cnts (MP-04)
Frequency Input 1 Counts (MP-04) displays the present value of the Frequency Input 1 Position (MP-05) in encoder
edges (counts) if Count Mode FI1 (CP-160) is set to “Quad x4”. Frequency Input 1 Counts (MP-04) displays the
present value of the Frequency Input 1 Position in pulses if Count Mode FI1 (CP-160) is set to “Incremental”.
FI2 Hz (MP-06)
Frequency Input 2 Hz (MP-06) displays the present frequency of the Frequency Input 2, in Hertz.
FI2 RPM (MP-07)
Frequency Input 2 RPM (MP-07) displays the current speed of the Frequency Input 2 encoder in RPM relative to
PPR FI2 (CP-166).
FI2 Cnts (MP-09)
Frequency Input 2 Counts (MP-09) displays the present value of the Frequency Input 2 Position (CP-10) in encoder
edges (counts) if Count Mode FI2 (CP-165) is set to “Quad x4”. Frequency 2 Counts displays the present value of
the Frequency Input 2 Position (CP-10) in pulses if Count Mode FI2 (CP-165) is set to is set to “Incremental”.
8 - 12
The STD Signal Tests screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / Device Tests
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
(MP-01)
Displays the frequency of
the Frequency Input 1.
STD SIGNALS TESTS
FREQUENCY INPUTS
FI1 Hz
FI1 RPM
0
0
(MP-02)
Displays the speed (RPM)
of the Frequency Input 1.
FI1 Cnts
0
(MP-04)
Displays the Frequency
Input 1 position, in counts.
FI2 Hz
FI2 RPM
0
0
(MP-06)
Displays the frequency of
the Frequency Input 2.
FI2 Cnts
0
(MP-07)
Displays the speed (RPM)
of the Frequency Input 2.
P1/2
(MP-09)
Displays the Frequency
Input 2 position, in counts.
8 - 13
Control Output
The STD Signals Tests / Control Output screen (page 2) displays the Control and Monitor Parameters that
are associated with the CO_SIG. Use this screen to perform a variety of tests that verify the operation of the
CO-SIG.
Diagnostics En (CP-350)
When Diagnostics Enable (CP-350) is set to “1” (enabled), the digital inputs will not recognize their normal function
and the digital outputs can be controlled by Diag DO (CP-352). The analog output can also be tested. When you enter
diagnostics, Diag DO (CP-352) is forced equal to the current Dig Out 7 - 0 (MP-28) so that there is no unexpected
change in the outputs. Change the outputs through Diag DO (CP-352) after performing the diagnostics.
1 = En
0 = OFF (default)
Warning: The actuator may energize if you change Diag DO (CP-352).
Diag DAC Test (CP-353)
Diagnostic DAC Test (CP-353) selects and enables the type of output control that is used for the diagnostic CO_SIG
DAC Test.
4 = High Frequency Oscillation Output
3 = Continuous Ramp
2 = Ramp to DAC & Hold
1 = Immediate Output
0 = Disabled (default)
Diag DAC Volts (CP-354)
Diagnostic DAC Volts (CP-354) is the maximum voltage output (either positive or negative) at the CO_SIG DAC
during a non zero Diagnostic DAC Test . The voltage corresponds to Diag DAC Bits (CP-355).
Diag DAC Bits (CP-355)
Diagnostic DAC Bits (CP-355) is the maximum value in bits written (either positive or negative) to the CO_SIG DAC
during a non zero Diagnostic DAC Test (CP-353) and when Diagnostics En (CP-350) is set to “1” (On or enabled).
The value corresponds to Diag DAC Volts (CP-354).
Diag Rmp Tm (CP-356)
Diagnostic Ramp Time (CP-356) is the time, in seconds, from 0 volts to either positive or negative Diag DAC Volts
(CP-354) during a Diagnostic DAC Test with a Ramp.
CO Offset (CP-366)
Control Output Offset (CP-366) is the value (in volts) that is added to the CO_SIG Analog Output (J3, pin 1) signal.
Control Output Offset (CP-366) can eliminate any voltage offset present on the DAC output circuitry or it can offset
a motor-creep problem (i.e., a digital balance pot). CO Offset (CP-366) is set at the factory, but can also be verified
with a voltmeter for a “0” volt output. If you change the value, make sure that it gets into the parameter backup.
CO Volts (MP-21)
Control Output Volts (MP-21) displays he present value, in volts, of the CO_SIG Analog Output signal.
State (MP-50)
State (MP-50) displays the present operating state of the CX-1010 (see list below). Only one operating state may be
active at a time. To access either the “Run” or the “Jog” operating state, the F-Stop, R-Stop and H-Stop inputs must
be closed.
7 = Diagnostics
4 = JOG (Fwd)
1 = R-Stop
8 - 14
6 = Not used - reserved
3 = RUN
0 = F-Stop
5 = JOG (Rvs)
2 = H-Stop
The STD Signal Tests / Control Output screen (page 2).
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
(CP-350)
Enter a code (0-1).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-353)
Enter a code (0-4).
Press the Enter key.
STD SIGNALS TESTS
CONTROL OUTPUT
Diagnostics EN
Diag DAC Test
Diag DAC Volts
Diag DAC Bits
OFF
OFF
0
0
Diag Rmp Tm
10.000
CO Offset
CO Volts
State
-.082
0.0
F-STOP
(CP-354)
Enter the volts.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-355)
Enter the bits.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-356)
Enter the seconds.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-366)
Enter the volts.
Press the Enter key.
P2/2
(MP-21)
Displays the CO SIG
Analog Output, in volts.
(MP-50)
Displays CX-1010's
operating state.
8 - 15
DIGITAL I/O TEST
Use the Digital I/O Test to activate the digital outputs and monitor the digital inputs without the inputs being
in actual operation. To enter the diagnostics state, enter a “1” in Diagnostics En (CP-350) or use the
increment scroll-up key. Danger: The CX-1010 should not be in “Run” or “Jog” when you begin the
diagnostics. The Diag DO (CP-352) will automatically set to the current state of the Digital Outputs. This
will prevent any unexpected change on the outputs. Determine the binary value for Diag DO (CP-352) that
places a “1” in the bits corresponding to the digital outputs that you want active and a “0” in the bits
corresponding to the outputs that you want inactive. Danger: Changing the digital outputs may cause
movement in your system. Enter this value into Diag DO (CP-352). Verify that the outputs are active (low).
The Digital Inputs can be monitored in DI 7..0 (MP-26) and DI 15..8 (MP-27). Short the corresponding pin
common of the inputs to make the output active. Monitor these MP’s to verify that the active pins are
recognized (a “1” appears in the corresponding bit).
Diagnostics En (CP-350)
When Diagnostics Enable (CP-350) is set to “1” (On or enabled), the digital inputs will not recognize their normal
function and the digital outputs can be controlled by Diag DO (CP-352). In addition, the CO_SIG analog output can
be tested. When you enter diagnostics, Diag DO (CP-352) is forced equal to the current DO 7..0 (MP-28) so that
there is no unexpected change in the outputs. Change the outputs through Diag DO (CP-352) while performing the
diagnostics.
1 = ON = Enabled
0 = OFF (default)
Warning: The actuator may energize if you change Diag DO (CP-352).
Diag DO (CP-352)
Diagnostic Digital Out (CP-352) controls the digital outputs when Diagnostics En (CP-350) is set to “1” (On or
enabled) during diagnostics. It is an 8 Bit Binary number with 1 bit per output. If the bit is a “1”, then the
corresponding output is pulled “low”. When you enter diagnostics, Diag DO (CP-352) is forced equal to the current
DO 7 ..0 (MP-28) so that there is no unexpected change in the outputs. Change the outputs through Diag DO (CP352) while performing the diagnostics.
Warning: The actuator may energize if you change Diag DO (CP-352).
DI 7..0 (MP-26)
Digital Input 7..0 displays the value of the “J6” digital inputs. A ‘1’ in the bit location indicates a “low voltage”
condition on the corresponding input (which is consistent with a contact closure to common). Refer to Appendices:
Appendix C for the DI 7..0 (MP-26) bit map list.
DI 15..8 (MP-27)
Digital Input 15..8 (MP-27) displays the value of the “J7” digital inputs. A ‘1’ in the bit location indicates a “low
voltage” condition on the corresponding input (which is consistent with a contact closure to common). These eight
inputs can be set up in the PLC Programming screen to generate a One-Shot -Pulse on a high-to-low transition.
Refer to Appendices: Appendix C for the DI 15..8 (MP-27) bit map list.
DO 7..0 (MP-28)
Digital Output 7..0 displays the value of the “J2” digital outputs. A ‘1’ in the bit location indicates an active “low
voltage” condition on the corresponding open collector output (which would sink DC current). Refer to Appendices: Appendix C for the DO 7..0 (MP-28) bit map list.
State (MP-50)
State (MP-50) displays the present operating state of the CX-1010 (see list below). Only one operating state may be
active at a time. To access either the “Run” or the “Jog” operating state, the F-Stop, R-Stop and H-Stop inputs must
be closed.
7 = Diagnostics
4 = JOG (Fwd)
1 = R-Stop
8 - 16
6 = Not used - reserved
3 = RUN
0 = F-Stop
5 = JOG (Rvs)
2 = H-Stop
The Digital I/O Test screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / Device Tests <—
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
(CP-350)
Enter a code (0-1).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-352)
Enter a binary code.
Press the Enter key.
DIGITAL I/O TEST
Diagnostics En
OFF
Diag DO
00000000
(MP-26)
Displays the value of the
J6 digital inputs.
DI
DI
7..0
15..8
00000000
00000000
(MP-27)
Displays the value of the
J7 digital inputs.
DO
7..0
State
00000001
F-STOP
P1/1
(MP-28)
Displays the value of the
J2 digital outputs.
(MP-50)
Displays the CX-1010's
active operating state.
DANGER
The CX-1010 should not be in “Run” or “Jog” when you
begin the diagnostics.
Changing the digital outputs may cause movement in
your system.
8 - 17
—NOTES—
8 - 18
AUXILIARY ANALOG TESTS
The Auxiliary Analog tests screens display the input screen (page 1), the output screen (page 2) and the
calibration screen (page 3). The Auxiliary Analog Input screen displays the Monitor Parameters that monitor
the results of inputing a voltage or current. The Auxiliary Analog Output screen displays the Monitor
Parameters that monitor the Auxiliary Analog Output. Use the Aux Analog Calibration screen (page 3) to
calibrate the Auxiliary Analog I/O; AI1, AI2 and AO. These boards are calibrated at the factory and are
adequate for most applications. However, you may need to re-calibrate if your application demands more
accuracy in a specific range or if you need to calibrate directly to EU/Tm with a known signal level on the
inputs. The following sections will explain the calibration for Analog Output (voltage), Analog Output
(current), Analog Input 1 (voltage), Analog Input 1 (current), Analog Input 2 (voltage), Analog Input 2
(current), and calibration together with scaling.
Analog Calibration / Analog Output (voltage):
1. Connect a voltmeter between pins 10 and 11 with the positive lead on pin 10 (pin 11 is common).
2. Set AO Mode (CP-185) to “Volts” (1).
3. Set Analog Cal Sel (CP-361) to “AO” (3) to select AO for calibration.
4. Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “A” (1) to select point A.
NOTE: The calibration data will be overwritten.
5. Set Analog Cal En to “On” (1) to start calibration.
6. Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the voltage that you want set for point A. This is
typically your smallest (or negative) voltage point. A -12 volts requires -29500 bits, -10 volts about
-24500 bits, 0 volts about 0 bits. For -12 volts, start with -29400 and use the incremental scroll “ ▼”
key.
7. Enter the voltage measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
8. Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “B” (2) to select point B.
9. Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the voltage you want use for point B. This is typically
your largest (or positive) voltage point. A +12 volts requires about 30100 bits, 10 volts about 25100 bits,
0 volts about 0 bits. For 12 volts, start with 30000 and use the incremental scroll “ ▲” key.
10. Enter the exact voltage measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
11. Set Analog Cal En to “Off” (0) to disable further calibration.
Analog Calibration / Analog Output (current):
1. Connect a current meter in series with a 250 Ohm resistor between pins 9 and 11 with the positive lead
on pin 9 (pin 11 is common). Connect the meter in series with the load.
2. Set AO Mode (CP-185) to “Current” (2).
8 - 19
3. Set Analog Cal Sel (CP-361) to “AO” (3) to select AO for calibration.
4. Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “A” (1) to select point A.
NOTE: The calibration data will be overwritten.
5. Set Analog Cal En to “On” (1) to start calibration.
6. Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the current you want to set for point A. This is
typically your smallest current point. A 4 milliamp setting requires about -14450 bits, 0.5 milliamps
about -24000 bits and 1.0 milliamps about -22600. For 4 milliamps, start with -14300 and use the
incremental scroll “ ▼” key.
7. Enter the exact current measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
8. Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “B” (2) to select point B.
9. Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the voltage you want to set for point B. This is
typically your largest current point. A 20 milliamp setting requires about 29300 bits, 10 milliamps about
1940. For 20 milliamps, start with 29200 and use the incremental scroll “ ▲” key.
10. Enter the exact current measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
11. Set Analog Cal En to “Off” (0) to disable further calibration.
8 - 20
Analog Calibration / Analog Input 1 (voltage):
1. Connect the Analog Output voltage pins to the Analog Input 1 voltage pins - pin 10 to pin 2, pin 11 to pin
4. Connect a voltmeter between pins 2 and 4 with the positive lead on pin 2 (pin 4 is at common).
2. Set AO Mode (CP-185) to “Volts” (1).
3.
Set AI1 Mode (CP-170) to “Volts” (1).
4. Set Analog Cal Sel (CP-361) to AI1 (1) to Select AI1 for calibration.
5. Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “A” (1) to select point A.
NOTE: The calibration data will be overwritten.
6. Set Analog Cal En to “On” (1) to start calibration.
7. Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the voltage you want set for point A. This is typically
your smallest (or negative) voltage point. A -12 volts requires about -29500 bits, -10 volts about -24500
bits, 0 volts about 0 bits. For -12 volts, start with -29400 and use the incremental scroll “ ▼” key.
8. Enter the exact voltage measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
9. Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “B” (2) to select point B.
10. Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the voltage you want use for point B. This is typically
your largest (or positive) voltage point. A +12 volts requires about 30100 bits, 10 volts about 25100 bits,
0 volts about 0 bits. For 12 volts, start with 30000 and use the incremental scroll “ ▲” key.
11. Enter the exact voltage measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
12. Set Analog Cal En to “Off” (0) to disable further calibration.
8 - 21
Analog Calibration / Analog Input 1 (current):
1. Connect a current meter between pin 9 and pin 2 with the positive lead on pin 9. Connect pin 3 to pin 4
and pin 4 to pin 11.
2. Set AO Mode (CP-185) to “Current” (2).
3. Set AI1 Mode (CP-170) to “Current” (2).
4. Set Analog Cal Sel (CP-361) to “AI1” (1) to Select AI1 for calibration.
5. Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “A” (1) to select point A.
NOTE: The calibration data will be overwritten.
6. Set Analog Cal En to “On” (1) to start calibration.
7. Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the current you want to set for point A. This is
typically your smallest current point. A 4 milliamp setting requires -14450 bits, 0.5 milliamps about
-24000 bits and 1.0 milliamps about -22600. For 4 milliamps, start with -14300 and use the incremental
scroll “ ▼” key.
8. Enter the exact current measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
9. Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “B” (2) to select point B.
10. Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the current you want to set for point B. This is
typically your largest current point. A 20 milliamp setting requires 29300 bits, 10 milliamps about 1940.
For 20 milliamps, start with 29200 and use the incremental scroll “ ▲” key.
11. Enter the exact current measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
12. Set Analog Cal En to “Off” (0) to disable further calibration.
8 - 22
Analog Calibration / Analog Input 2 (voltage):
1. Connect the Analog Output voltage pins to the Analog Input 2 voltage pins - pin 10 to pin 5, pin 11 to pin
7 Connect a voltmeter between pins 5 and 7 with the positive lead on pin 5 (pin 7 is at common).
2. Set AO Mode (CP-185) to “Volts” (1).
3.
Set AI2 Mode (CP-175) to “Volts” (1).
4. Set Analog Cal Sel (CP-361) to “AI2” (2) to Select AI2 for calibration.
5. Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “A” (1) to select point A.
NOTE: The calibration data will be overwritten.
6. Set Analog Cal En to “On” (1) to start calibration.
7. Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the voltage you want set for point A. This is typically
your smallest (or negative) voltage point. A -12 volts requires -29500 bits, -10 volts about -24500 bits, 0
volts about 0 bits. For -12 volts, start with -29400 and use the incremental scroll “ ▼” key.
8. Enter the exact voltage measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
9.
Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “B” (2) to select point B.
10. Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the voltage you want use for point B. This is typically
your largest (or positive) voltage point. A +12 volts requires about 30100 bits, 10 volts about 25100 bits,
0 volts about 0 bits. For 12 volts, start with 30000 and use the incremental scroll “ ▲” key.
11. Enter the exact voltage measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
12. Set Analog Cal En to “Off” (0) to disable further calibration.
8 - 23
Analog Calibration / Analog Input 2 (current):
1. Connect a current meter between pin 9 and pin 5 with the positive lead on pin 9. Connect pin 6 to pin 7
and pin 7 to pin 11.
2. Set AO Mode (CP-185) to “Current” (2).
3. Set AI2 Mode (CP-175) to “Current” (2).
4. Set Analog Cal Sel (CP-361) to “AI2” (2) to Select AI2 for calibration.
5. Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “A” (1) to select point A.
NOTE: The calibration data will be overwritten.
6. Set Analog Cal En to “On” (1) to start calibration.
7. Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the current you want to set for point A. This is
typically your smallest current point. A 4 milliamp setting requires -14450 bits, 0.5 milliamps about
-24000 bits and 1.0 milliamps about -22600. For 4 milliamps, start with -14300 and use the incremental
scroll “ ▼” key.
8. Enter the exact current measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
9. Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “B” (2) to select point B.
10. Adjust AO Bit Set (CP-364) until the meter reads the current you want to set for point B. This is
typically your largest current point. A 20 milliamp setting requires about 29300 bits, 10 milliamps about
1940. For 20 milliamps, start with 29200 and use the incremental scroll “ ▲” key.
11. Enter the exact current measured by the meter into AnalogRef Val (CP-363).
12. Set Analog Cal En to “Off” (0) to disable further calibration.
8 - 24
Calibrating and Scaling Together
In some applications the voltage (or current) to EU/Tm representation may not be known. For example,
that a flow meter operates from 0 to 10 gallons per minute may be a known factor, however, the voltage
produced by the meter at either end point may be unknown. Despite the unknown factor, the input signal can
be calibrated in terms of EU/Tm by setting the calibration references the same as the scaling references. To
do this, set the AI1 RA (CP-171) equal to the AnlgCal Ref A (MP-17) for the input signal and set the AI1 RB
(CP-173) equal to the AnlgCal Ref B (MP-18) fo the input signal. These two points should be discretely
different from each other and should be reasonable estimates for the actual voltage or current range. Set the
EU@ AI1 RA (CP-172) and EU@ AI1 RB (CP-174) to the sensor’s operating points that are used during the
calibration process for points A and B respectively.
1. Connect the sensor to the AI1 voltage (or current) pins. Connect pins 3 and 4 together if using current
mode.
2. Set AI1 Mode (CP-170) to “Volts” (1) or to “Current” (2).
3. Set Analog Cal Sel (CP-361) to AI1 (1) to Select AI1 for calibration.
4. Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “A” (1) to select point A.
There is no turning back after the next step, the old calibration data will be overwritten.
5. Set Analog Cal En to “On” (1) to start calibration.
6. Run the sensor at the operating point for calibration point A. This is typically your smallest (or negative)
voltage point (or smallest current point). Record the value of this operating point as sensor operating
point A in EU/Tm.
7. Enter an estimate of the voltage (or current) that the sensor is producing at this operating point into
AnalogRef Val (CP-363). Record this value as point A reference voltage (or current) along side the
sensor operating point A.
8. Set Analog Cal Ref (CP-362) to “B” (2) to select point B.
9. Run the sensor at the operating point for calibration point B. This is typically your Largest (or positive)
voltage point (or largest current point). Record the value of this operating point as point B EU/Tm.
10. Enter an estimate of the voltage (or current) that the sensor is producing at this operating point into
AnalogRef Val (CP-363). Record this value as point B reference voltage (or current) along side the
sensor operating point B.
11. Set Analog Cal En to “Off” (0) to disable further calibration.
12. Go to SCALING/SIGNAL SCALING/P1. Enter the voltage (or current) that you recorded as the point A
reference voltage (or current) into AI1 RA (CP-171). Enter the sensor operating point A (EU/Tm) that
the sensor was producing during the point A calibration into EU@AI1 RA (CP-172). This could be a
timeless unit, but is considered as EU/Tm scaling because it assumes speed representation for the
velocity loop. Enter voltage (or current) that you recorded as the point B reference voltage (or current)
into AI1 RB (CP-173). Enter the sensor operating point B (EU/Tm) that the sensor was producing during
the point B calibration into EU@AI1 RB (CP-174).
Repeat this procedure for AI2, if necessary. Calibrate AI2 and use the corresponding AI2 parameters.
8 - 25
Auxiliary Analog Input
The Auxiliary Analog Input screens display the Monitor Parameters that monitor the results of inputting a
voltage or current .
AI1 Bits (MP-11)
Analog Input 1 Bits (MP-11) displays the present value in ADC bits of Auxiliary Board Analog Input 1 signal.
AI1 Signal (MP-12)
Analog Input 1 Signal (MP-12) displays the present value of the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 1 signal in either volts
or milliamps relative to which setting (volts or current) has been entered in AI1 Mode (CP-170).
AI1 Mode (CP-170)
Analog Input 1 Mode (CP-170) identifies the mode of operation and the calibration that are used for the Auxiliary
Board Analog Input 1 signal.
AI2 Bits (MP-14)
AI2 Bits (MP-14) displays the present value in DAC bits of Auxiliary Board Analog Input 2 signal.
AI2 Signal (MP-15)
Analog Input 2 Signal (MP-15) displays the present value of the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 2 signal in either volts
or milliamps, relative to which setting (volts or current) has been entered in AI2 Mode (CP-175).
AI2 Mode (CP-175)
Analog Input 2 Mode (CP-175) identifies the mode of operation and the calibration that are used for the Auxiliary
Board Analog Input 2 signal.
2=Current
1=Voltage (default)
8 - 26
The Aux Analog Tests screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / Device Tests
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
(MP-11)
Displays the value of the
Aux Board Input 1 signal,
in bits
AUX ANALOG TESTS
INPUTS
AI1 Bits
AI1 Signal
0
0.00
AI1 Mode
Volts
AI2 Bits
AI2 Signal
0
0.00
AI2 Mode
Volts
P1/3
(MP-12)
Displays the Aux Board
Input 1 signal, in volts.
(CP-170)
Enter a code (1-2).
Press the Enter key.
(MP-14)
Displays the value of the
Aux Board Input 2 signal.
(MP-15)
Displays the Aux Board
Input 2 signal, in volts.
(CP-175)
Enter a code (1-2).
Press the Enter key.
8 - 27
Auxiliary Analog Output
The Auxiliary Analog Output screen displays the Monitor Parameters that monitor the Auxiliary Analog
Output. Set the AO Parameter (CP-184) to “0 ” and depending on the AO Mode (CP-185), either enter a
voltage or a current in AO Direct (CP-365). Measure the voltage or the current on the output to confirm the
setting. Be sure to return the AO Parameter to its previous value when the test is completed and set AO
Direct back to “0”.
AO Parameter (CP-184)
Analog Output Parameter (CP-184) identifies the Monitor Parameter that is used for the Auxiliary Analog Output
(JA, pins 9,10,11) . When the Analog Output Parameter (CP-184) is set to “0”, the value of AO Direct (CP-365) is
used as the output.
AO Direct (CP-365)
Analog Out Direct (CP-365) is the value output (in volts or milliamps) at the Auxiliary Analog Board's analog
output when the AO Parameter (CP-184) is set to a “0”.
AO Signal (MP-25)
Analog Output Signal (MP-25) displays the present value, in either volts or milliamps of the Auxiliary Analog
Output, relative to AO Mode (CP-185).
AO Bits (MP-24)
Analog Output Bits (MP-24) displays the present value, in DAC Bits, of the Auxiliary Analog Output.
AO Mode (CP-185)
Analog Output Mode (CP-185) identifies the mode of operation and calibration that are used for the Auxiliary
Board Analog Output signal.
2 = Current
1 = Voltage (default)
8 - 28
The Aux Analog Tests / Output screen (page 2).
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
(CP-184)
Enter a Parameter Code.
Press the Enter key.
AUX ANALOG TESTS
OUTPUT
AO Parameter
AO Direct
7
0.0
AO Signal
AO Bits
0.00
0
AO Mode
Volts
(CP-365)
Enter the output .
Press the Enter key.
(MP-25)
Displays the Auxiliary
Analog Output value.
(MP-24)
Displays the Auxiliary
Analog Output in bits.
P2/3
(CP-185)
Enter a code (1-2).
Press the Enter key.
8 - 29
Aux Analog Tests / Calibration
AI1 Mode (CP-170)
Analog Input 1 Mode (CP-170) identifies the mode of operation and the calibration that are used for the Auxiliary
Board Analog Input 1 signal.
2 = Current
1 = Voltage (default)
AI2 Mode (CP-175)
Analog Input 2 Mode (CP-175) identifies the mode of operation and the calibration that are used for the Auxiliary
Board Analog Input 2 signal.
2=Current
1=Voltage (default)
AO Mode (CP-185)
Analog Output Mode (CP-185) identifies the mode of operation and calibration that are used for the Auxiliary Board
Analog Output signal.
2 = Current
1 = Voltage (default)
Analog Cal En (CP-360)
Analog Calibration Enable (CP-356) enables the calibration process for the auxiliary analog board. When Analog
Calibration En (CP-360) is set to “1” (On) then the signal that is selected in Analog Cal Select (CP-361) will be
calibrated.
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled (default)
Analog Cal Sel (CP-361)
Analog Calibration Select (CP-361) selects the signal (AI1, AI2, AO) on the auxiliary analog board for calibration.
3 = Analog Out
2 = Analog In 2
1 = Analog In 1 (default)
Analog Cal Ref (CP-362)
Analog Calibration Reference (CP-362) determines which of the two calibration reference points (see list below) are
to be calibrated.
2 = point B
1 = point A (default)
Analog Ref Val (CP-363)
Analog Reference Value (CP-363) is the value of measured data for the signal at the specified reference point
(Analog Cal Ref, CP-362). Use a voltmeter for voltage mode operation (or a current meter for current mode of
operation) to measure the voltage (or current) on the analog signal selected for calibration at the specified reference
point. Enter the measured value in the Analog Reference Value (CP-363).
AO Bit Set (CP-364)
Analog Out Bit Set (CP-364) sets the output value in bits that are used to calibrate the Auxiliary Analog Board's
analog output. Change (tune) this value until the actual output matches the value that you entered for Analog Ref Val
(CP-363), for the selected point.
AnlgCal Ref A (MP-17)
Analog Calibration Reference A (MP-17) displays the Analog Reference Value (CP-363) for the signal (AI1, AI2,
AO), which was selected in Analog Calibration Select (CP-361) and which was stored during the calibration of point
A.
AnlgCal Ref B (MP-18)
Analog Calibration Reference B (MP-18) displays the Analog Reference Value (CP-363) for the signal (AI1, AI2,
AO), which was selected in Analog Calibration Select (CP-361) and which was stored during the calibration of point
B.
8 - 30
The Aux Analog Tests / Calibration screen (page 3).
(CP-170)
Enter a code (1-2).
Press the Enter key.
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
(CP-175)
Enter a code (1-2).
Press the Enter key.
AUX ANALOG TESTS
CALIBRATION
AI1 Mode
AI2 Mode
AO Mode
Analog Cal En
Analog Cal Sel
Analog Cal Ref
AnalogRef Val
AO Bit Set
AnlgCal Ref A
AnlgCal Ref B
Volts
Volts
Volts
OFF
AI1
A
0
0
0
0
(CP-185)
Enter a code (1-2).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-360)
Enter a code (0-1).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-361)
Enter a code (0-3).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-362)
Enter a code (1-2).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-363)
Enter the volts or mA.
Press the Enter key.
P3/3
(CP-364)
Enter the bits.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-17)
Displays the Analog
Reference Value.
(MP-18)
Displays the Analog
Reference Value.
8 - 31
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS TEST
Use the Serial Communications Test screen to set up the Baud Rate, Frame Format and Record Format that
will be used by the host computer. You can send a byte out and receive a byte on the RS485 port. These are
decimal numbers. If you want to send ASCII, you must use the decimal equivalent. Likewise, if an ASCII
character is received, it will be displayed as the decimal equivalent (e.g., ‘A’ = 65). Use the SerCom Errs
(MP-91) “help” screen to decipher any errors.
Device Address (CP-370)
Device Address (CP-370) assigns a serial communications address to the CX-1010. This number should be different
from any other units that are on the serial link.
Baud Rate (CP-371)
The Baud Rate (CP-371) determines the serial communications data transfer rate (see list below) in Bits/sec. With
a 10 bit frame length, the number of frame/sec would be 1/10 the Baud Rate.
1 = 300 bps = 300 Baud
4 = 2400 bps = 2400 Baud
7 = 19200 bps = 19.2 Kbaud
2 = 600 bps = 600 Baud
5 = 4800 bps = 4800 Baud
3 = 1200 bps = 1200 Baud
6 = 9600 bps = 9600 Baud (default)
Frame Format (CP-372)
Frame Format (CP-372) determines the parity, the number of data bits, and the number of stop bits for the serial
communications.
1 = N,8,1 = No Parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit (10 bit frame - ASCII or Binary)
2 = E,7,1 = Even Parity, 7 data bits, 1 stop bit (10 bit frame-ASCII only)
Record Format (CP-369)
Record Format (CP-369) determines which type of data format (see list below) will be used for the serial communication.
3 = ASCII2
2 = ASCII
1 = BINARY
CRC Enable (CP-368)
If CRC Enable (CP-368) is set to “ON” (1), you must append a CRC value to all serial communications messages that
are received by the CX-1010 (See Serial Communications: Using Serial Communications). The CX-1010 checks the
CRC value against the the message contents (excluding the “STX”), then calculates a CRC value and appends it to
all serial communications responses. If CRC Enable (CP-368) is set to “OFF” (0), the CX-1010 will ignore any
CRC value that is appended to a message and will not append a CRC value to any serial communications responses.
1 = On (Enabled)
0 = Off (Disabled)
SerCom Char Out (CP-373)
When a new value is entered in SerCom Char Out (CP-373), it is transmitted out the RS-485 serial port at the Baud
Rate (CP-371) and the Frame Format (CP-372). SerCom Char Out (CP-373) is a decimal number.
SerCom Char In (MP-90)
Serial Communications Character In (MP-90) displays the value of the last byte that was received by the Serial
Communications port. SerCom Char In (MP-90) is displayed in a decimal format. SerCom Char In (MP-90) is used
primarily for troubleshooting.
SerCom Errs (MP-91)
Serial Communications Errors (MP-91) displays all serial communications errors that occurred during the most
recent transmission.
8 - 32
The Serial Communications Test screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / Device Tests <—
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
(CP-370)
Enter an address.
Press the Enter key.
(CP-371)
Enter a code (1-7).
Press the Enter key.
SERIAL COMM TEST
(CP-372)
Enter a code (1-2).
Press the Enter key.
Device Address
Baud Rate
Frame Format
Record Format
CRC Enable
1
9600bps
N,8,1
BINARY
ON
SerCom Char Out
SerCom Char In
0
0
SerCom Errs
00000000
P1/1
(CP-369)
Enter a code (1-2).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-368)
Enter a code (0-1).
Press the Enter key.
(CP-373)
Enter a decimal number.
Press the Enter key.
(MP-90)
Displays the last value
received from the Serial
Communications port.
(MP-91)
Displays the Serial
Communications errors.
8 - 33
DEVICE STATUS
The Device Status screen displays the microprocessor related faults. Norm Pwr Ups (MP-84 ) indicates how
many times power has been applied to the CX-1010 since the last “Clear-7” power-up. The Low Pwr Cntr
(MP-85) shows the number of times the CX-1010 experienced low power before shutting down. If this
number is greater than Norm Pwr Ups (MP-84), it can indicate that the line-power input has dipped below
about 100 volts AC. However, this could also indicate that a “Clear-7” power-up was executed and the Low
Pwr had not been reset. Therefore, it is important to reset the Low Pwr Cntr (MP-85) after a “Clear-7”
power-up, to keep the numbers accurate. Use Clr Fault Cntrs (CP-391) to reset the Low Pwr Cntr (MP-85).
Last Reset (MP-80)
Last Reset (MP-80) displays a “1” in a bit to indicate the reason for the last reset. Refer to Appendices: Appendix C for
the Last Reset (MP-80) bit map list. The Help screen for Last Reset (MP-80) also contains a bit map list.
Misc Intrpt (MP-81)
Miscellaneous Interrupts (MP-81) displays a “1” in a bit to indicate which of the various system interrupts may have
caused the last reset. Refer to Appendices: Appendix C for the Miscellaneous Interrupts (MP-81) bit map list. The
Help screen for Miscellaneous Interrupts (MP-81) also contains a bit map list.
Device Alms (MP-82)
Device Alarms (MP-82) displays the status of microprocessor or other hardware related alarms. Notification of a bad
block selection is also included. Refer to Appendices: Appendix C for the Device Alarms (MP-82) bit map list. The
Help screen for Device Alarms (MP-82) also contains a bit map list.
Norm Pwr Ups (MP-84)
Normal Power Ups (MP-84) displays the number of normal power-ups since the most recent “Clear-7” power-up .
This value is reset only by a “Clear-7” power-up. Normal Power Ups (MP-84) is used primarily for troubleshooting.
Low Pwr Cntr (MP-85)
Low Power Counter (MP-85) displays the number of low power detections, including normal “Power Downs”. You
can reset this numeric value, but only in Clr Fault Cntrs (CP-391). Low Power Counter (MP-85) is used primarily for
troubleshooting.
Mem Err Cntr (MP-86)
Memory Error Counter (MP-86) displays the number of memory test failures that occurred during “Power Up”. You
can reset this numeric value, but only in Clr Fault Cntrs (CP-391). Memory Error Counter (MP-86) is used primarily
for troubleshooting.
WatchDogCntr (MP-87)
Watch Dog Counter (MP-87) displays the number of watch dog resets that were caused by Watchdog time-out. Watch
Dog Counter (MP-87) is used primarily for in troubleshooting. You can reset this numeric value, but only in ‘Clr Fault
Cntrs’ CP (CP-391).
Clr Fault Cntrs (CP-391)
To reset all the system-fault counters except Norm- Pwr-Ups (MP-84), enter a “1” in Clear Fault Counters (CP-391).
The error and message status bar at the bottom of the screen will flash “Flts Cleared” and the value will return to “0”.
8 - 34
The Device Status screens are accessed through
—> Main Menu / Device Tests <—
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
(MP-80)
Displays the reason
for the last reset.
(MP-81)
Displays the interrupt
for the last reset.
DEVICE STATUS
Last Reset
Misc Intrpt
Device Alms
10000000
00000000
00000000
Norm Pwr Ups
Low Pwr Cntr
Mem Err Cntr
WatchDogCntr
3
11
0
0
Clr Fault Cntrs
0
P1/2
(MP-82)
Displays the
micoprocessor alarm
status.
(MP-84)
Displays the number
of normal power-ups.
(MP-85)
Displays number of
low power detections.
(MP-86)
Displays the number of
memory test failures.
(MP-87)
Displays the number
of watchdog resets.
(CP-391)
Enter a code (0-1).
Press the Enter key.
8 - 35
Device Status
Last Reset (MP-80)
Last Reset (MP-80) displays a “1” in a bit to indicate the reason for the last reset. Refer to Appendices: Appendix C
for the Last Reset (MP-80) bit map list. The Help screen for Last Reset (MP-80) also contains a bit map list.
Misc Intrpt (MP-81)
Miscellaneous Interrupts (MP-81) displays a “1” in a bit to indicate which of the various system interrupts may have
caused the last reset. Refer to Appendices: Appendix C for the Misc Intrpt (MP-81) bit map list. The Help screen for
Misc Intrpt (MP-81) also contains a bit map list.
MiscIntrptCntr (MP-88)
Miscellaneous Interrupt Counter (MP-88) displays the number of miscellaneous interrupts that occurred as the result
of bus errors, address errors, divide-by-0 errors, unexecuted instruction errors, general exceptions, and unexecuted
and spurious interrupts. You can reset this numeric value, but only in Clr Fault Cntrs (CP-391). Miscellaneous
Interrupt Counter (MP-88) is used primarily for troubleshooting.
PC at Intrpt (MP-83)
Program Counter at Interrupt (MP-83) shows were the last interrupt of the microprocessor program counter occurred . If the CX-1010 repeatedly displays the “REST FAULT” error box, then record the “PC @Intrpt” value as
well as the line just above it (which indicates the cause of the reset), before you press the clear key to continue. The
program counter at interrupt is stored in the Program Counter at Interrupt (MP-83) Monitor Parameter for review. A
value of “2560” is normal.
Clr Fault Cntrs (CP-391)
To reset all the system-fault counters except Norm- Pwr-Ups (MP-84), enter a “1” in Clear Fault Counters (CP-391).
The error and message status bar at the bottom of the screen will flash “Flts Cleared” and the value will return to “0”.
8 - 36
The Device Tests / Device Status screen (page 2).
Use the Par keys to
select a line (make it
active).
(MP-80)
Displays the reason
for the last reset.
DEVICE STATUS
Last Reset
Misc Intrpt
MiscIntrptCntr
PC at Intrpt
10000000
00000000
0
2560
(MP-81)
Displays the interrupt
for the last reset.
(MP-88)
Displays the number
of interrupts.
(MP-83)
Displays the interrupt
for the last reset.
Clr Fault Cntrs
0
P2/2
(CP-391)
Enter a code (0-1).
Press the Enter key.
8 - 37
DEVICE MODEL & REVISION
The Device Model and Revision screen displays the model of the CX-1010, the software number, the
revision level of the software and the date that this software was released. The Contrex copyright is also
displayed on this screen. If you call technical support for assistance, you may be asked for this information.
8 - 38
The Device Model & Revision screen is accessed through
—> Main Menu / Device Tests <—
DEVICE MODEL & REV
MODEL
SOFTWARE #
REVISION
RELEASE
CX-1010
1000-8005
1.00
03-01-2001
Copyright (C) 2001
CONTREX INC.
Displays the model.
Displays the software
part number.
Displays the firmware
revision level.
Displays the software
release date.
P1/1
8 - 39
—NOTES—
8 - 40
TROUBLESHOOTING
This section contains four troubleshooting flowcharts to help you resolve four possible system operating
problems. The four scenarios that are addressed by the flowcharts are:
Motor Does Not Stop
Motor Runs Unstable
Motor Runs at Wrong Speed
Motor Does Not Run
If you need to verify the integrity of the CX-1010 independently, refer to the Troubleshooting/Diagnostics:
Device Tests section. If the information in this section does not solve your problem, consult technical
support:
Contrex Technical Support (763) 424-8700 or (800) 342-4411
8 - 41
Use the Menu key and go to:
Main Menu /
System Monitor /
Run Monitor / Page 1
Motor Does Not Stop
No
No
State (MP-50)=
H-Stop
NO
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
J6 Pin 4
at some time
No
was shorted to
common
Check Speed Command Out
Measure voltage at J3 Pin1
with respect to J3 Pin 2
Yes
No
Open J6 Pin 1
F-Stop
(feedback
problem)
Voltage = “0”
Yes
Wiring to
Motor Drive
is correct?
Yes
Drive
Calibration
is correct?
No
No
NO
State (MP-50)=
R–Stop
State (MP-50)=
F–Stop
No
No
Recalibrate
and check min
pot speed
Rewire
J6 Pin 5
at some time
was shorted to
common
Yes
Open J6 Pin 1
F-Stop
Yes
Problem
Corrected
No
Problem
Corrected
Consult Tech
Support
(800) 342-4411
No
Consult Drive
Manufacturer
Figure 8-2 Motor Does Not Stop Flowchart
8 - 42
Yes
Yes
No
No
State (MP-50)=
Jog
State (MP-50)=
Run
No
No
J6 Pin 6 or
J6 Pin 7
is shorted to
common
Yes
Open J6 Pin 6
and J6 Pin 7
Use the Menu key and go to:
Main Menu /
Setpoints /
Run Mode / Page 1
Motor Runs
Unstable
No
Cntrl Loop
(MP-45)
is “ZE Psn”
Yes
Reduce
the constant
value(s) in
Kp VL
(MP-225)
Ki VL
(MP-226)
Kd VL
(MP-227)
Kp ZE
(MP-229)
No
Cntrl Loop
(MP-45)
is “Psn”
No
Yes
Setpoint Mode
CP-102
is “Custom”
Setpoint Mode
(CP-102)
is “Follower”
Setpoint Mode
(CP-102)
is “Master”
Cntrl Loop
(MP-45)
is “Vel”
FI1 Hz
(MP-01)
is Stable?
Yes
Setpoint Mode
(CP-102)
is “Direct”
Check the
Drive
Calibration
Yes
Reduce
the constant
value(s)
in
Kp PL
(MP-235)
Ki PL
(MP-236)
Kd PL
(MP-237)
Reduce
the constant
value(s)
in
Kp VL
(MP-225)
Ki Vl
(MP-226)
Kd VL
(MP-227)
Stabilize
the Lead
Sensor
Stabilize
the speed
of the Lead
Problem
Corrected
No
Problem
Corrected
No
Enable auto
adjust by
setting Kff CL
Auto EN
(CP-244)
to “On”
for 5 sec.
Enable auto
adjust by
setting Kff CL
Auto EN
(CP-244)
to “On”
for 5 sec.
Enable auto
adjust by
setting Kff CL
Auto EN
(CP-244)
to “On”
for 5 sec.
Increase
the constant
values,
as required
Increase
the constant
values,
as required
Increase
the constant
values,
as required
Problem
Corrected
No
Consult Tech
Support
(800) 342-4411
Screens that you will access for the Figure 8-3 Flowchart are:
Cntrl Loop (MP-45) = System Monitor \ Run Monitor \ pg 1
FI1 Hz (MP-01) = System Monitor \ Run Monitor \ pg 2
Ki PL (CP-236) = Tuning \ Position Loop \ pg 1
Ki VL (CP-226) = Tuning \ Velocity Loop \ pg 1
Tuning \ Velocity Loop / ZE \ pg 1
Kd PL (CP-237) = Tuning \ Position Loop \ pg 1
Kd VL (CP-227) = Tuning \ Velocity Loop \ pg 1
Tuning \ Velocity Loop / ZE \ pg 1
Kff Auto En (CP-244) = Tuning \ Position Loop \ pg 1
Tuning \ Velocity Loop \ pg 1
Tuning \ Velocity Loop / ZE \ pg 1
Kp PL (CP-235) = Tuning \ Position Loop \ pg 1
Kp VL (CP-225) = Tuning \ Velocity Loop \ pg 1
Tuning \ Velocity Loop / ZE \ pg 1
Kp ZE (CP-229) = Tuning \ Velocity Loop / ZE \ pg 1
Setpoints:
Master (CP-110) = Setpoint \ Master \ pg 1
Follower (CP-120) = Setpoint \ Follower \ pg 1
Custom (CP-140) = Setpoint \ Custom \ pg 1
Direct (CP-130) = Setpoint \ Direct \ pg 1
Setpoint X (CP-101) = System Monitor \ Run Monitor \ pg 1
Figure 8-3 Motor Runs Unstable Flowchart
8 - 43
Use the Menu key and go to:
Main Menu /
System Monitor /
Run Monitor / Page 1
Motor Runs at
Wrong Speed
Change
Setpoint Mode
(CP-102)
to correct SP
Problem
Corrected
SPx
(CP-101)
is correct
No
Yes
CO Volt
(MP-21)
is at
maximum?
Yes
Recalibrate
the Drive
Problem
Corrected
No
Change
Run Loop
Mode (CP-220)
to “ZE Psn”
Problem
Corrected
No
EU FI2
(CP-168)
is Correct?
Yes
Consult
Drive
Manufacturer
No
RR Error
(MP-44)
is near
zero?
Integral
Limit (CP-259)
is Correct?
No
Min Spd
Limit (CP-251)
is Correct?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Max Spd
Limit (CP-250)
is Correct?
ZE
Limit (CP-253)
is Correct?
Yes
No
No
No
No
Scaled Ref
(MP-41)
is Correct?
No
Enter
the Correct
Limit
Yes
FI1 EU/Tm
(MP-03)
is correct?
Is this a
Follower
application?
No
No
Enter
the Correct
Value
EU FI1
(CP-163)
is Correct?
Yes
No
Yes
PPR FI1
(CP-161)
is Correct?
Yes
Cnt Mode
(CP-160)
is Correct?
Yes
No
Enter
the Correct
EU
Enter
the Correct
Pulses
Problem
Corrected
No
Setpoint Mode
(CP-102)
is Custom?
Yes
No
FI1 Pulse
(CP-162)
is Correct?
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
FI2 Pulses
(CP-167)
is Correct?
Consult Tech
Support
(800) 342-4411
No
Setpoint Mode
(CP-102)
is Follower?
No
Yes
No
Yes
The “V”
parameters
Yes
Yes
The “Constant”
parameters
(150, 151, 152, 153)
(141, 142, 143, 144)
are Correct?
are Correct?
No
Ratio
(CP-124)
is Correct?
No
No
No
Enter
the Correct
Value
Enter
the Correct
Value
RatioNorm
(CP-123)
is Correct?
Yes
No
Yes
Fol Eq
(CP-125)
is Correct?
Yes
Yes
Consult Tech
Support
(800) 342-4411
Problem
Corrected
Figure 8-4 Motor Runs at Wrong Speed Flowchart
8 - 44
Consult Tech
Support
(800) 342-4411
No
Screens that you will access for the Figure 8-4 Flowchart are:
Constant 1 (CP-141) = Setpoints \ Custom \ pg 2
Constant 2 (CP-142) = Setpoints \ Custom \ pg 2
Constant 3 (CP-143) = Setpoints \ Custom \ pg 2
Constant 4 (CP-144) = Setpoints \ Custom \ pg 2
CO Volt (MP-21) = Scaling \ Standard Signal \ pg 3
Cnt Mode (CP-160) = Scaling \ Standard Signal \ pg 1
FI1 EU/Tm (MP-03) = Scaling \ Standard Signal \ pg 1
FI1 Pulse (CP-162) = Scaling \ Standard Signal \ pg 1
FI2 Pulse (CP-167) = Scaling \ Standard Signal \ pg 2
EU FI1(CP-163) = Scaling \ Standard Signal \ pg 1
EU FI2 (CP-168) = Scaling \ Standard Signal \ pg 2
Follower Eq (CP-125) = Setpoints \ Follower \ pg 2
Integral Limit (CP-259) = Alarms*Ramps*Limits \ Limits \ pg 1
Max Speed Limit (CP-250) = Alarms*Ramps*Limits \ Limits \ pg 1
Min Speed Limit (CP-251) = Alarms*Ramps*Limits \ Limits \ pg 1
PPR FI1 (CP-161) = Scaling \ Standard Signal \ pg 1
Ratio (CP-124) = Setpoints \ Follower \ pg 2
Ratio Norm (CP-123) = Setpoints \ Follower \ pg 2
RR Error (MP-44) = System Monitor \ Run Monitor \ pg 1
Run Loop Mode (CP-220) = Setpoints \ Run Modes \ pg 1
Setpoint Mode (CP-102) = Setpoints \ Run Mode \ pg 1
Scaled Reference (MP-41) = System Monitor \ Run Monitor \ pg 1
V1 Source (CP-150) = Setpoints \ Custom \ pg 2
V2 Source (CP-151) = Setpoints \ Custom \ pg 2
V3 Source (CP-152) = Setpoints \ Custom \ pg 2
V4 Source (CP-153) = Setpoints \ Custom \ pg 2
ZE Limit (CP-253) = Alarms*Ramps*Limits \ Limits \ pg 1
8 - 45
Use the Menu key and go to:
Main Menu /
System Monitor /
Run Monitor / Page 1
Motor Does Not Run
No
No
J6 Pin 1
is shorted to
common
No
Short
J6 Pin 1
(F-Stop)
J6 Pin 4
at some time
was shorted to
common
J6 Pin 2
is shorted to
Yes
common
Short
J6 Pin 5
(Run)
No
Yes
No
Jog Setpoint
(CP-215)
is Correct?
Yes
Short
J6 Pin 4
(H-Stop) &
J6 Pin 5 (Run)
Short
J6 Pin 2
(R-Stop)
Problem
Corrected
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
State (MP-50)=
Jog
NO
No
No
Yes
No
No
NO
State (MP-50)=
H-Stop
State (MP-50)=
R–Stop
State (MP-50)=
F–Stop
Yes
No
Enter Correct
Jog Setpoint
No
Consult Tech
Support
(800) 342-4411
Screens that you will access for the Figure 8-5 Flowchart are:
Co Bits (MP-20) = System Monitor \ Run Monitor \ pg 2
Co Mode (CP-180) = Scaling \ Standard Signal \ pg 3
Co Volts (MP-21) = System Monitor \ Run Monitor \ pg 1
Cnt Mode FI1 (CP-160) = Scaling \ Standard Signals \ pg 1
FI1 Hz (MP-01) = System Monitor \ Run Monitor \ pg 2
Jog Setpoint (CP-215) = Alarms*Ramps*Limits \ Jog Setup \ pg 1
Ramped Reference (MP-42) = System Monitor \ Run Monitor \ pg 1
Scaled Reference (MP-41) = System Monitor \ Run Monitor \ pg 1
Setpoint Mode (CP- 102) = Setpoints \ Run Mode \ pg 1
Setpoints:
Master (CP-110) = Setpoint \ Master \ pg 1
Follower (CP-120) = Setpoint \ Follower \ pg 1
Custom (CP-140) = Setpoint \ Custom \ pg 1
Direct (CP-130) = Setpoint \ Direct \ pg 1
Setpoint X (CP-101) = System Monitor \ Run Monitor \ pg 1
Figure 8-5 Motor Does Not Run Flowchart
8 - 46
State (MP-50)=
Run
CO Bits and
COVolts
(MP-20, 21)
are Correct?
No
Check Speed Command Out
Measure voltage at J3 Pin1
with respect to J3 Pin 2
Yes
Ramped
Reference
(MP-42)
is Correct?
Are you using
a negative
No
Ramped
Reference?
Yes
Setpoint
(CP-101,110,
120,130, 140)
is Correct?
No
Voltage = “0”
Yes
Yes
Setpoint Mode
(CP-102)
is correct?
No
No
Yes
Yes
Scaled
Reference
(MP-41)
is Correct?
Choose One:
Wiring to
Motor Drive
is correct?
Yes
Drive
Calibration
is correct?
No
No
No
No
Enter Correct
Setpoint Mode
Enter Correct
Setpoint
Problem
Corrected
Yes
No
Do you want
Reverse
Speed?
Make
Reverse Jog
Active
Yes
No
Yes
Problem
Corrected
Enter Bipolar
In CO Mode
(CP-180)
No
FI1 HZ
(MP-01)
is “0”
Recalibrate
and check min
pot speed
Rewire
Enter Correct
Value
No
Consult Drive
Manufacturer
Choose One:
Is FI1 Hz
(MP-01)
negative?
Yes
Are you using
Incremental
Lead Sensor
Are you using
Quadrature
Lead Sensor
Enter
Incremental in
Cnt Mode FI1
(CP-160)
Verify
Lead Sensor
wiring, signal
and power
No
Problem
Corrected
No
Swirch wires
“A”& “B”
on Lead
Frequency
Consult Tech
Support
(800) 342-4411
8 - 47
PARAMETER LOAD AT POWER-UP
This section contains instructions to restore either the default Control Parameter values or the back-up
Control Parameter values. The procedures are:
Clear-7
Clear-8
Clear-9
CLEAR-7
Use the Clear-7 procedure to restore the Control Parameter's factory default settings, with the exception of
these three Control Parameters: Contrast Value (CP-375), CO Offset (CP-366) and Serial Number (CP-395).
The back-up settings for the Control Parameters are not altered.
NOTE: Clear-7 also restores the PLC to the factory default. The back-up for the PLC is not altered.
The fault counters are not reset.
Norm Pwr Ups (MP-84) is reset to “1” (normal power-up) or “0” (if CPU reset occurs during
power-up).
EstMaxFb (MP-49) is reset to “0”.
The Code Select line and the Large Number units in the “Status” screen are cleared.
To do the Clear-7 Procedure:
Press the Clear key and the “7” key, then continue to press the keys while you apply power to the
CX-1010.
CLEAR-8
Use the Clear-8 procedure to restore the Control Parameters to the back-up settings, with the exception of
these two Control Parameters: CO Offset (CP-366) and Serial Number (CP-395). This procedure uses the
back-up settings which you have entered; the back-up settings are not reset to the factory default.
NOTE: Clear-8 also restores the PLC to the back-up settings which you have entered; the PLC back-up
settings are not reset to the factory default.
The fault counters are not reset.
To do the Clear-8 Procedure:
Press the Clear key and the “8” key, then continue to press the keys while you apply power to the
CX-1010.
8 - 48
CLEAR-9
Use the Clear-9 procedure to restore the Control Parameter's factory default settings. The back-up settings
for the Control Parameters are also restored to the factory default.
NOTE: Clear-9 restores the PLC to the factory default. The back-up for the PLC is also restored to the
factory default.
The fault counters are reset to “0”.
Norm Pwr Ups (MP-84) is reset to “1” (normal power-up) or “0” (if CPU reset occurs during
power-up).
EstMaxFb (MP-49) is reset to “0”.
The Code Select line and the Large Number units in the “Status” screen are cleared.
To do the Clear-9 Procedure:
Press the Clear key and the “9” key, then continue to press the keys while you apply power to the
CX-1010.
MENU
CODE
STATUS
HELP
Numeric “7” key
7
8
9
Numeric “8” key
4
5
6
Numeric “9” key
1
2
3
-
0
.
CLEAR
=13
ENTER
“Clear” key
Figure 8-6
Parameter Load at Power-up Corresponding Keypad Numbers
8 - 49
EEPROM CHIP REPLACEMENT
The EEPROM (Electrical Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) chip, which is also referred to as the
“Flash Memory”, is the software for the CX-1010. See Figure 8-7 for the EEPROM's location on the CPU
Board and specific details for its replacement.
To replace the EEPROM chip:
• Make a record of your current Control Parameter values; the replacement chip contains default
values that will replace your current values when you perform the Clear/7 step.
• Turn off the power to the CX-1010 and remove the back panel.
• Pull out the CPU board and locate the eeprom Socket that houses the EEPROM chip.
• Ground yourself - Static electricity can damage the EEPROM chip.
• Gently press the notch on the EEPROM Socket and the spring loaded doors will pop open.
Open the doors fully to reveal the EEPROM chip.
• Gently place the palm of your hand over the EEPROM chip and invert the board so that the
EEPROM falls into your hand.
• Position the CPU board with the pin connectors to your left. Grasp the replacement EEPROM
by the top and bottom edges; take great care not to touch the delicate IC pins.
• Align the EEPROM chip so that the Pin 1 indicator (round indentation) on its corner is aligned
with the upper left corner (north west quadrant) of the EEPROM Socket. Gently insert the
replacement EEPROM in the socket.
• Keep the CPU board positioned so that the pin connectors are to your left. Check the larger
door on the socket and make certain that the sliding panel is as far down (towards you) as it will
go.
• Gently close the smaller door on the socket (positioned on your right) and then close the larger
door over the smaller door. Press firmly on the door panel, however, be careful not to force the
door. If the door will not fit, make certain that the EEPROM is seated properly in the socket.
Hold the door closed and press the sliding panel up and into a locking position.
• Replace the CPU board and the back panel.
• Press the Clear key and the “7” key, then continue to press the keys while you apply power to
the CX-1010.
• The “Clear 7” procedure restores the factory default settings and automatically performs the
Power Up diagnostic routines.
• Reenter the values for your Code Parameters.
8 - 50
EEPROM
Location
To open the EEPROM Surface
Mount Socket
To close the EEPROM Surface Mount Socket (4 steps)
2. Close the large door - keep
the sliding panel down.
3. Hold the
doors closed.
2
.0
v2
Re 96
01 19
80 PR. , Inc
COntrex
Co
Press the notch.
The panel slides
down and the doors
pop open.
1. Close the small door.
4. Press the sliding panel
up, into a locking position.
Figure 8-7 EEPROM Replacement
8 - 51
—NOTES—
8 - 52
Glossaries
Acronym Glossary
Glossary
Glossary - 1
Glossary - 2
ACRONYM GLOSSARY
Symbols
2 ------------------------ to
@ ----------------------- at
0Spd -------------------- Zero Speed
A
Acl --------------------- Acceleration
Actv -------------------- Active
Adj --------------------- Adjust
Adrs -------------------- Address
AI ----------------------- Analog Input
AIx --------------------- Analog Input x
AIx RA ---------------- Analog Input x Reference A
AIx RB ---------------- Analog Input x Reference B
Alm -------------------- Alarm
Amp -------------------- Amplifier
Anlg -------------------- Analog
AO --------------------- Analog Output
AO RA----------------- Analog Output Reference A
AO RB ----------------- Analog Output Reference B
Auto -------------------- Automatic
Aux --------------------- Auxiliary
B
BIN --------------------- Binary
BiPolAbs -------------- Bipolar Absolute
BkUp ------------------- Backup
Blk --------------------- Block
bps ---------------------- Bits per second
BypRmp --------------- Bypass Ramp
C
Cal ---------------------- Calibrate/Calibration
Calc -------------------- Calculation
Char -------------------- Character
ChkSum --------------- Check Sum
CL ---------------------- Closed Loop
Clr ---------------------- Clear
CM --------------------- Centimeter(s)
Cmd -------------------- Command
Cmpr ------------------- Compare
Cmprx ----------------- Compare x
Cnt --------------------- Count
Cntr -------------------- Counter
Cntrx ------------------- Counter x
CntrxDnO ------------- Counter x Down Output
CntrxUpO ------------- Counter x Up Output
CO ---------------------- Command Output Signal
Comm ------------------ Communications
ContR ------------------ Continuous Ramp
CP ---------------------- Control Parameter
Glossary - 3
Cust -------------------- Custom
D
DAC ------------------- Digital to Analog Converter
DC ---------------------- Direct Current
Dcl --------------------- Deceleration
DCOut ----------------- DC Out
Dec --------------------- Decrement
Deriv ------------------- Derivative
Dflt --------------------- Default
DI ----------------------- Digital Input
DI_x -------------------- Digital Input x
Diag -------------------- Diagnostics
Diag St ----------------- Diagnostic State
Dn ---------------------- Down
DO --------------------- Digital Out
DO_x ------------------ Digital Output x
DP ---------------------- Decimal Point
Drct -------------------- Direct
Dspl -------------------- Display
E
En ---------------------- Enable
Eq ---------------------- Equation
Err ---------------------- Error
EstMaxFb ------------- Estimated Maximum Feedback
EU ---------------------- Engineering Unit
EU/Tm ----------------- Engineering Units per Time
EU@AIx RA --------- Engineering Units at Analog Input x Reference A
EU@AIx RB ---------- Engineering Units at Analog Input x Reference B
EUs --------------------- Engineering Units
Exc --------------------- Exception
F
Fb ----------------------- Feedback
Ff ----------------------- Feedforward
FI ----------------------- Frequency Input
FIx ---------------------- Frequency Input x
Flt ---------------------- Fault
Fltr --------------------- Filter
Fol ---------------------- Follower
Frz ---------------------- Freeze
G
Gal --------------------- Gallon(s)
Gen --------------------- General
H
Hi ----------------------- High
HiFrO ------------------ High Frequency Oscillation Output
hr & Hr ---------------- Hour (Time)
Hz ---------------------- Hertz
I
I/O ---------------------- Input/Output
Inc ---------------------- Increment/Incremental
Inst --------------------- Instruction
Intgrl ------------------- Integral
Glossary - 4
Intrpt ------------------- Interrupt
Inv ---------------------- Inverse
Inv F ------------------- Inverse Follower
Inv M ------------------ Inverse Master
Invx -------------------- Inverse x
K
Kbps ------------------- Kilo-Bits per second
KHz -------------------- KiloHertz
kiloEU ----------------- Kilo-Engineering Units
KyPd ------------------- Keypad
KyPdLk ---------------- Keypad Lock
L
lb ----------------------- Pound
Lchx -------------------- Latch x
Ld ---------------------- Lead
Lg ---------------------- Large
LgWd ------------------ Long Word
Lmt --------------------- Limit
Lo ---------------------- Low
M
mag --------------------- Magnitude
Max -------------------- Maximum
Mem ------------------- Memory
Mid --------------------- Middle
Min --------------------- Minimum
min & Min ------------ Minute (Time)
Misc -------------------- Miscellaneous
MP --------------------- Monitor Parameter
Msec ------------------- Millisecond(s)
Msk -------------------- Mask
Mstr -------------------- Master
Mtr --------------------- Motor
MtrNResp ------------- Motor Drive Not Responding
N
Neg --------------------- Negative
Norm ------------------- Normal
NVRAM --------------- Non-Volatile RAM
O
Ofs --------------------- Offset
OL ---------------------- Open Loop
Opnd ------------------- Operand
Out --------------------- Output
Ovfl -------------------- Overflow
oz ----------------------- ounce(s)
P
Parm ------------------- Parameter
PC ---------------------- Program Counter
PL ---------------------- Position Loop
PLC -------------------- Programmable Logic Controller
PPR -------------------- Pulses Per Revolution
PPR Mtr --------------- Pulses Per Motor Revolution
Prgm ------------------- Program
Glossary - 5
Prst --------------------- Preset
psi ---------------------- Pounds per square inch
Psn --------------------- Position
Pwr --------------------- Power
Q
Quad ------------------- Quadrature
R
R2D&H ---------------- Ramp to DAC and Hold
RAM ------------------- Random Access Memory
Ref --------------------- Reference
Res --------------------- Resolution
Rev(s) ------------------ Revolution(s)
Rmp -------------------- Ramp
Rmt --------------------- Remote
RO ---------------------- Roll Over
ROM ------------------- Read Only Memory
RPM ------------------- Revolutions Per Minute
RR ---------------------- Ramped Reference
Rst ---------------------- Reset
RStp -------------------- R-Stop
Rt ----------------------- Rate
Rvs --------------------- Reverse
S
Sc ----------------------- Scaled
ScFb -------------------- Scaled Feedback
sec & Sec -------------- Second (Time)
Sel ---------------------- Select
SerCom ---------------- Serial Communications
SP ---------------------- Setpoint
Spd --------------------- Speed
spec -------------------- Specification
SR ---------------------- Scaled Reference
SRAM ----------------- Static RAM
Std ---------------------- Standard
Std&Brdr -------------- Standard Display and Border
T
Thd --------------------- Threshold
thru --------------------- Through
Tm ---------------------- Time
Tmpx ------------------- Temporary x
Tmr --------------------- Timer
Tmrx ------------------- Timer x
Trig --------------------- Trigger
TrigDn ----------------- Trigger Down
TrigUp ----------------- Trigger Up
Trq ---------------------- Torque
U
UImpd ----------------- Unimplemented
ULckBlk --------------- Unlock Block
ULckCPs -------------- Unlock CP’s Only
Updt -------------------- Update
Glossary - 6
UPolBk ---------------- Unipolar Brake
V
Val ---------------------- Value
Val@AO RA ---------- Value at Analog Output Reference A
Val@AO RB ---------- Value at Analog Output Reference B
Var ---------------------- Variable
VO --------------------- Voltage Out
VL ---------------------- Velocity Loop
Z
ZE ---------------------- Zero Error
ZE PHld --------------- ZE Position Hold
Glossary - 7
—NOTES—
Glossary - 8
GLOSSARY
Acceleration/Deceleration
Acceleration/Deceleration controls the rate of the speed's change in response to setpoint
changes. These parameters apply to both the Master and Follower modes of operation.
Acceleration Time
See Appendix C, CP-201
Alarms
See System Setup - Control Parameters: Alarms/Ramps/Limits.
Auxiliary Analog Tests
See Troubleshooting/Diagnostics: Device Tests, Auxiliary Analog Tests.
Calibration
Calibration matches the analog output of the CX-1010 with the analog input of the
motor drive
Closed Loop
A system that is controlled by manipulating the output based on error (setpoint feedback).
Closed Loop Compensation
(PI) Software
A mathematical term for a control algorithm that resolves
the control error (feedback - setpoint) to zero.
PID represents Proportional + Integral + Deviation
CO Sig
Control Output Signal (CO Sig) is the analog output signal from the CX-1010 that is
input to the drive’s signal input (velocity or torque command).
Code Key
Use the Code key in the Status screen and in the parameter screens to display a “Parameter Code” line. When the "Parameter Code" line appears, you can use it to access a
parameter and its value. Enter a Parameter Code, then press the Enter key and the
parameter and its value will be displayed. You can change a Control Parameter value
by entering a new value or by scrolling with the Increment Up/Down keys. Use the
Clear key to delete the entry and clear the parameter value to zero.
Control Command Send
The Control Command Send allows the host computer to control the operating functions of the CX-1010 that are associated with the Logic inputs (Run, Stop, Setpoint
Select and Master/Follower).
Glossary - 9
Control Parameters
Control Parameters allow you to enter data that is unique to your system (e.g., encoder
resolution, Lead to Follower ratios) and modify the CX-1010 for your specific needs
(e.g., maximum RPMs, setpoints, acceleration/deceleration ramp rates). Control
Parameters are identified by a Parameter Name and a Parameter Code. The operational
data that you enter into a Control Parameter is the Parameter Value. The CX-1010
comes factory pre-loaded with a complete set of default Control Parameter Values. See
also Parameter Code, Parameter Name, Parameter Value, Control Parameters or
Monitor Parameters.
Parameter Name
Parameter Code
Parameter Value
Monitor Parameter
Scaled Feedback
MP-40
0.0 (default)
Control Parameter
Master Setpoint
CP-110
0 (default)
Parameters =
CRC
Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) is an error checking mechanism that is used in
serial communications to ensure the accuracy of a transmitted block of data. The CRC
check option is enabled through CRC Enable (CP-368). CRC is based on the 16-bit
polynomial division (8005H represents the generating polynomial).
Deceleration Time
See Appendix C, CP-203, CP-204, CP-208, CP-211, CP-212, CP-213, CP-214, CP218, and CP-219.
Digital I/O Tests
See Troubleshooting/Diagnostics: Device Tests, Digital I/O Test.
Digital Motor Controller
A precision motor controller that uses digital compensation technology.
Direct Enable
See Appendix C, CP-130.
Direct Mode
In the Direct mode of operation, the analog output from the CX-1010 that is connected
to the motor drive can be set directly. Direct mode is an open-loop mode of operation.
Scaling, Acceleration/Deceleration, and closed loop compensation (PID) software are
not involved in the Direct mode. The Direct mode is used in conjunction with the Run
and Stop controls.
Direct Setpoint
See Appendix C, CP-130.
Drive Enable
Drive Enable activates the motor drive based on the Ramped Reference (MP-42) and
the feedback. The Ramped Reference is the calculated setpoint that is output from the
Acceleration/Deceleration routine.
EEPROM Chip
The EEPROM (Electrical Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) chip, which is
also referred to as the “Flash Memory” is the software for the CX-1010.
Glossary - 10
Engineering Units (E.U.)
Engineering units are the units of measure that your system operates at, such as: RPMs,
gallons per hour, feet per minute.
F–Stop
One of four logic inputs. F–Stop brings the CX-1010's speed command (analog output)
to an immediate zero. F–Stop has priority over the all if the other operating states.
Follower Mode
A complex multi-drive system. The scaling format can be structured to allow you to
enter the setpoint as a ratio. The CX-1010 compares the setpoint ratio or percentage to
the follower sensor shaft feedback and lead sensor shaft to calculate any speed error.
When the CX-1010 finds speed error, the control algorithm adjusts the motor drive's
Speed Command analog output and reduces the error to zero.
Gain
KP PL (CP-235) is the proportional gain constant for the PID position loop. Increasing
KP PL (CP-235) will have a quicker response and a smaller position error. However, a
value that is too large could result in overshoot and instability. You can eliminate most
or all of the error in the position loop with the proportional term (KP PL). Use an
integral only if KP PL (CP-235) alone can not eliminate the error to your specification.
Hardwired
Inputs that are wire shorted rather than using push buttons or switches.
Help Screen Key
The Help key accesses the Help screen and gives you a brief description of the parameter or subject that is highlighted (active). The Help screen also functions as an options
screen, where you can select Control Parameter data. You can access help from any
screen. Press the Help key again to return to the previous screen.
Increment Scroll/ Up/Down
Use these keys in the parameter screens to change the active value. Each time you press
the Increment Scroll Up key, the active value will increase by one increment. Each time
you press the Increment Scroll Down key, the active value will decrease by one decrement. It will also automatically scroll through the increments or decrements if you hold
the key down.
Input Monitoring
FI1 Hz (MP-01)
FI2 Hz (MP-06)
DI7...0 (MP-26)
DI15...8 (MP-27)
DO7...0 (MP-28)
Inputs
AC Power Input (J4 pins 1, 2,3)
Lead Frequency (J5 pins 2, 3, 4, 5, 6)
Frequency Input 1
Feedback Frequency (J5 pins 7, 8, 9, 10, 11)
Frequency Input 2
F–Stop (J6 pins 1,3)
Digital Input 0
R–Stop (J6 pins 2, 3)
Digital Input 1
H–Stop (J6 pins 3, 4)
Digital Input 2
Run(J6 pins 3, 5)
Digital Input 3
Glossary - 11
Jog Forward (J6 pins 6, 8)
Digital Input 4
Jog Reverse (J6 pins 7, 8)
Digital Input 5
Keypad Lockout (J6 pins 8, 9)
Digital Input 6
Block Select A (J7 pins 1, 3)
Digital Input 8
Block Select B (J7 pins 2,3)
Digital Input 9
Block Select C (J7 pins 3,4)
Digital Input 10
Setpoint Direction (J7 pins 3,5)
Digital Input 11
Increment Batch Count (J7 pins 6, 8)
Digital Input 12
Reset Batch Count (J7 pins 7, 8)
Digital Input 13
Remote Scroll Up (J7 pins 8, 9)
Digital Input 14
Remote Scroll Down (J7 pins 8,10)
Digital Input 15
Integral
See Appendix C, MP-48.
Jog
One of four logic inputs. Jog increases the RPMs at the acceleration rate that is
specified in Acceleration Time Run (CP-201) until the Jog Setpoint (CP-215) is
achieved. When Jog is terminated, there is no deceleration time; the drive motor comes
to an immediate stop. This feature is used for brief bursts of speed to align the lead and
follower or other fast forward advances.
Keypad Test
See Troubleshooting/Diagnostics: Hardware Tests, Keypad.
LCD Screen Display
The screens are displayed on the LCD Display.
Master Mode
A stand-alone control of a single motor. The scaling format allows the operator to enter
a setpoint in Engineering Units. The CX-1010 compares the sensor shaft feedback to
the scaled setpoint and calculates any speed error. When the CX-1010 finds speed
error, the control algorithm adjusts the motor drive's Speed Command Out and reduces
the error to zero.
Master Setpoints
See Appendix C, CP-110.
Glossary - 12
Menu Key
The Menu key accesses the main menu from a sub-menu or status screen, and a submenu from a parameter screen.
Mode of Operation
The method used to operate your system, for example, Master mode, Follower mode or
Custom Mode.
Monitor Parameters
Monitor Parameters (MP) monitor the performance of the CX-1010 and the system
which the CX-1010 is controlling. Monitor Parameters also confirm the wiring, the
tuning and perform troubleshooting. Monitor Parameters can be accessed at any time
during the CX-1010's operation, including during Run, Jog, R–Stop and F–Stop. See
also Parameter Code, Parameter Name, Parameter Value or Control Parameters.
Parameter Name
Parameter Code
Parameter Value
Monitor Parameter
Scaled Feedback
MP-40
0.0 (default)
Control Parameter
Master Setpoint
CP-110
0 (default)
Parameters =
Numeric Keys
Use the Numeric keys to enter the Parameter Code of either a Control Parameter (CP)
or a Monitor Parameter (MP) or to enter a parameter value for a Control Parameter.
Use the Enter key to activate the entry. Use the Clear key to delete the entry and clear
the parameter value to zero.
NV RAM Test
See Troubleshooting/Diagnostics: Hardware Tests, Memory.
Open Loop
A system that is controlled only by inputs without feedback.
Operating State
The systems status within a mode of operation, such as Run, R–Stop, F–Stop or Jog.
Output Monitoring
DO 7..0 (MP-28)
Outputs
Speed Command Out (J3 pins 1, 2)
Zero Speed (J2 pin 2)
Digital Output 0
Hi Speed Alarm (J2 pin 3)
Digital Output 1
Lo Speed Alarm (J2 pin 4)
Digital Output 2
Dev Alarm 1 (J2 pin 5)
Digital Output 3
Glossary - 13
Dev Alarm 2 (J2 pin 6)
Digital Output 4
Batch Done (J2 pin 7)
Digital Output 5
Control Output Dir (J2 pin 8)
Digital Output 6
Drive Enable (J2 pin 9)
Digital Output 7
Page Up/Down Keys
Some screens have multiple pages. The Page Up/Down keys allow you to scroll
through, one page at a time.
Parameter
Parameters are divided into two classifications; Control Parameters (CP) and Monitor
Parameters (MP). See also Control Parameters or Monitor Parameters.
Parameter Code
A numbered code, by which Control Parameters and Monitor Parameters are referenced, The Code Parameter is cross referenced to its Parameter Name, in the Help
screen. Parameters can be accessed by the Code key only by using the Parameter Code.
See also Parameter Name, Parameter Value, Control Parameters or Monitor Parameters.
Parameter Name
Control Parameters and Monitor Parameters are displayed on the parameter screens by a
Parameter Name. They are cross referenced in the Help screens by a Parameter Code.
The Parameter Code is required to find a parameter using the Code key. See also
Parameter Code, Parameter Value, Control Parameters or Monitor Parameters.
Parameter Value
The Parameter Value is the operational data. The CX-1010 comes factory pre-loaded
with a complete set of default Parameter Values. When you enter a Parameter Value in
the Control Parameter, you enter data that is unique to your system (e.g., encoder
resolution, lead to follower ratios) and modify the CX-1010 for your specific needs
(e.g., maximum RPMs, setpoints, acceleration/deceleration ramp rates). However, the
Parameter Value for Monitor Parameters is only for monitoring; the Parameter Value of
a Monitor Parameter can no be changed. Monitor Parameters monitor the performance
of the CX-1010 and the system which the CX-1010 is controlling. Monitor Parameters
also confirm the wiring, the tuning and perform troubleshooting. See also Parameter
Code, Parameter Name, Control Parameters or Monitor Parameters.
Parameter Up/Down Keys
Each time you press the Par Up key, the cursor and highlight bar will move up by one
line. Each time you press the Par Down key, the cursor will move down by one line. It
will also automatically scroll through the lines if you hold the key down.
Ring Kits
Ring Kits are flange motor mounted sensors that measure the pulses per revolution
(PPR) of the motor shaft.
RPM Feedback
The operating speed of the follower.
RPM Lead
The operating speed of the lead.
Glossary - 14
ROM Test
See Troubleshooting/Diagnostics: Hardware Tests, Memory.
Run
One of four Logic inputs. Run ramps to the scaled setpoint speed. Run can be activated when the CX-1010 is in R–Stop or F–Stop, however Run cannot be activated
when the CX-1010 is in Jog. Run has the third highest operating priority.
R–Stop
One of four Logic inputs. R–Stop decelerates the speed command (analog output) to
Zero. R–Stop has the second highest operating priority.
Scaling
Scaling Control Parameters supply the CX-1010 with the information that it needs to
calculate the ratio of RPM's to Engineering Units and run at the entered setpoint.
SRAM Test
See Troubleshooting/Diagnostics: Hardware Tests, Memory.
Serial Communications
The CX-1010 can interface with a host computer through a RS485 Serial Communications Interface This interface allows the host computer to perform remote computer
parameter entry, status or performance monitoring, and remote control of the CX-1010.
Status Screen Key
The Status key will immediately pop-up the status screen from any other screen. To
return to the previous screen, press the Status key again.
STD Signal Tests
See Troubleshooting/Diagnostics: Device Tests, STD Signals Tests.
Tuning
Tuning stabilizes speed error differences between the setpoint and feedback.
Video Test
See Troubleshooting/Diagnostics: Hardware Tests, Video.
Glossary - 15
—NOTES—
Glossary - 16
Appendices
Appendix A - CX-1010 Specifications
Appendix B - Formulas
Appendix C - Parameter Summary - Numeric Quick Reference
Appendix D - Control Parameter Reference
Appendix E - Monitor Parameter Reference
Appendix F - Control Parameter Screen Locator
Appendix G - Monitor Parameter Screen Locator
Appendix H - Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference
Appendix I - Default PLC Program Logic
Appendix J - Bit Map Reference
Appendix K - Error Code Definitions
Appendix L - Serial Communications Error Code Definitions
Appendix M - PLC Program Commands/Serial Communications
Appendix N - PLC Program Operands/Serial Communications
Appendix O - Wiring Diagram Examples
Appendix P - Fax Cover Sheet
Appendix Q - Revision Log
A-1
A-2
APPENDIX A: CX-1010 SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical
AC Power Input:
115 VAC +15% -10%
48 to 62 Hertz
0.250 Amps Maximum
30 Watts Maximum
or (switch selectable)
230 VAC +15% -10%
48 to 62 Hertz
0.125 Amps Maximum
30 Watts Maximum
Frequency Inputs(2):
Differential Mode (26LS32):
5 to 15 VDC Operating Voltage
200 mV Differential Input Voltage
100 mV Hysteresis Typical
2.0 kOhm, 1/8 W to 5 V Internal Pullup
0 to 180 kHertz Operating Frequency
Quadrature or Single-Channel
Optically Isolated (Dig_Com)
Single-Ended Mode:
Current Sinking
5 to 15 VDC Operating Voltage
2.5 V Switching Threshold
100 mV Hysteresis Typical
2.0 kOhm, 1/8 W to 5 V Internal Pullup
0 to 180 kHertz Operating Frequency
Quadrature or Single-Channel
Optically Isolated (Dig_Com)
Digital Inputs(16):
Single-Ended (74HC14)
Current Sinking
5 to 24 VDC Operating Voltage
3.15 V Rising Edge Threshold Maximum
0.90 V Falling Edge Threshold Minimum
1.0 V Hysteresis Typical
10.0 kOhm, 1/8 W to 5 V Internal Pullup
1 mSec Response Time (DI0 - DI7)
2 mSec Response Time (DI8 - DI15)
Optically Isolated (Dig_Com)
Digital Outputs(8):
NPN Darlington (ULN2003)
Current Sinking
50 VDC Maximum Operating Voltage
1.0 V Saturation at 200 mA Typical
0.6 V Saturation at 1 mA Typical
200 mA Continuous/Channel
500 mA Peak/Channel (50% Duty Cycle)
750 mA Continuous Total All Channels
Internal Freewheeling Diodes
2 mSec Update Rate
Optically Isolated (Dig_Com)
(Continued)
A-3
Appendix A: CX-1010 Specifications (continued)
Speed Command Output:
±5 V to ±15 V Bipolar Analog
Zero/Span Software Calibration
16 Bits Bipolar Resolution (15+Sign)
18 mA Maximum Drive Current
Optically Isolated (CO-Com)
Aux. Power Output:
+12 VDC ±5%
150 mA Maximum
Optically Isolated (Dig_Com)
Serial Communications:
RS485 Compatible
5 VDC Differential Operation
300 to 19200 Baud Rate
Selectable Character Format
Half Duplex
Optically Isolated (Dig_Com)
Optional Analog I/O:
2 Input Channels/1 Output Channel
0 to 20 mA or ±12 VDC
80 kOhm Input Resistance Voltage Mode
243 Ohm Input Resistance Current Mode
500 Ohm Max Resistance Current Output
15 mA Max Current Voltage Output
16 Bits Resolution
±0.1% Drift Error Typical (50C Range)
Zero Monotonic Error
Software Calibration
NOVRAM Calibration Storage
Optically Isolated (Dig_Com)
Physical
Construction:
NEMA4, 4X, 12, 13 IP65 Compatible Frontpanel
14 Line by 21 Character LCD Display
Sealed Membrane Keypad
Polycarbonate ABS Front Bezel
Paint over Zync Plate CRS Enclosure
Overall Dimensions:
19.6 cm (7.7 in) Bezel Height
10.2 cm (4.0 in) Bezel Width
17.8 cm (7.0 in) Total Depth
Panel Dimensions:
18.41 cm (7.25 in) Panel Height Cutout
9.27 cm (3.65 in) Panel Width Cutout
14.50 cm (5.70 in) Panel Inside Depth
Weight:
2.3 kilograms (5.1 Pounds)
(Continued)
A-4
Appendix A: CX-1010 Specifications (continued)
Environmental
Operating Temperature:
0 to 55C (32 to 131F) Int. Enclosure
0 to 40C (32 to 104F) Ext. Enclosure
Storage Temperature:
-25 to 70C (-13 to 158F)
Environment:
The CX-1010 shall be installed in a pollution degree 2
macro-environment.
Relative Humidity:
0 to 95% Non-condensing
Altitude:
To 3,300 Feet (1000 Meters)
Performance
Setpoint Resolution:
6 Digits in Engineering Units
Speed Regulation:
0.01% Error in Master Modes (>10Hz)
0.00% Error in Follower Modes (>10Hz)
(Zero Error Loop Enabled)
Accel/Decel Ramps:
Settable in Time or Rate
0.1 to 3600.0 Seconds
0.001 to 999,999 EUs/T/Second
Separate for Run, Direct, Jog,
H-Stop and R-Stop
Limits:
Maximum Speed
Minimum Speed
Trim Authority
Integral Limit
Positive Position Error
Negative Position Error
Alarms:
Zero Speed
Maximum Feedback
Maximum Accel/Decel
No Response
Maximum Feedback Position
Programmable Custom Alms (6)
(Continued)
A-5
Appendix A: CX-1010 Specifications (continued)
PLC:
64 Program Instructions Total
9 Instruction Types
8 Digital Inputs (DI8-DI15)
8 Digital Outputs (DO0-DO7)
4 Timers
4 Counters
4 Latches
Setpoint Scaling Modes:
Direct
Master
Inverse Master
Offset Master
Follower
Inverse Follower
Offset Follower
Custom Setpoint Equation
Digital Inputs:
F-Stop
R-Stop
H-Stop
Run
Jog Forward
Jog Reverse
Keypad Lockout
Block Select A
Block Select B
Block Select C
Setpoint Direction (Scaled Ref. Sign)
Increment Batch Counter
Reset Batch Counter
Remote Scroll Up
Remote Scroll Down
Digital Outputs:
Zero Speed
Hi Speed Alarm
Low Speed Alarm
Dev Alarm 1 (Ramped Ref-Feedback)
Dev Alarm 2 (Scaled Ref-Feedback)
Batch Done
Control Output Direction
Drive Enable
Control Loop Formats:
Velocity
Zero Error Loop
Position
Open Loop
Closed Loop Algorithm:
PID + FF
Adaptive or Self-Adjust Feedforward
(Continued)
A-6
Appendix A: CX-1010 Specifications (continued)
Control Loop Response:
1mSec Speed and Position Loop
2mSec PLC Functions
Block Parameters:
8 Switch Selectable Parameter Blocks
Permissible Setpoint Mode Switching
16 Parameters per Block
Full Control Parameter Selection
Device Configuration:
Parameter Load and Store
PLC Program Load and Store
Status Screen Configuration
Serial Communications Format
Selectable Keypad Lockout
Normal/Reverse Video
Video Contrast Adjust
Annunciator Enable
Std Alm Msk
Diagnostics:
Memory Test
Keypad Test
Video Test
I/O Signal Tests
Serial Communications Test
Annunciator Test
Help Screens:
Help Screen for all Parameters
Displays Minimum, Maximum and Default
Summary of Parameter Operation
Retrieve Default or Backup Values
Decode/Select of Bit Mapped Parameters
A-7
—NOTES—
A-8
APPENDIX B: FORMULAS
The equations used to scale the Frequency Input 2 signal are given by:
MP-8 EU/T = MP-6 Pulses * CP-168 EU’s s *
X Seconds
s
Second CP-167 Pulses
CP-109 , ,Sec, Min, Hour
written with parameter text:
FI2 EU/Tm = FI2 Hz
where
*
EU FI2 * X Seconds
FI2 Pulses
Time Base
X = 1 for CP-109 = 0, None
X = 1 for CP-109 = 1, Second
X = 60 for CP-109 = 2, Minute
X = 3600 for CP-109 = 3, Hour
FI2 EU/Tm (MP-08) given in EU/T is routed to Fb EU/Tm (MP-39) when the Fb Source (CP-103) is set equal to FI2
(1). Fb EU/Tm (MP-39) is subsequently used as feedback under control.
1 Rev
*
MP-7 RPM = MP-6 Pulses *
Second
CP-166 Pulses
60 Seconds
Minute
written with parameter text:
FI2 RPM = FI2 Hz
*
1
* 60 Seconds
PPR FI2
Minute
MP-10 EUs’ = MP-9 Counts * X Pulses (CP-165) * CP-168 EU U
Count
CP-167 Pulse
written with parameter text:
FI2 Psn = FI2 Cnts * X Pulses (CP-165) * EU FI2 2
Count
FI2 Pulses
where
X = 4 for CP-165 = 1, Quad (quadrature mode)
X = 1 for CP-165 = 2, Incr (incremental mode)
Keep in mind that FI2 Psn is not used directly in follower mode position loop control. The scaling is included in the
ratio calculation for more accurate results. This further justifies using integers when possible for the scaling numbers.
(Continued)
B-1
Appendix B: Formulas (continued)
The equations used to scale the Frequency Input 1 signal are given by:
MP-3 EU/T = MP-1 Pulses * CP-163 EU’s *
X Seconds
s
Second
CP-162 Pulses CP-109, Sec, Min, Hour
written with parameter text:
FI1 EU/Tm = FI1 Hz *
where X = 1
EU FI1 1 * X Seconds
FI1 Pulsees
Time Base
for CP-109 = 0, None
X = 1 for CP-109 = 1, Second
X = 60 for CP-109 = 2, Minute
X = 3600 for CP-109 = 3, Hour
FI1 EU/Tm (MP-03) given in EU/T is multiplied by the ratio (given by CP-124) to obtain the desired speed in follower
applications with the Ld Source (CP-104) is set equal to FI1 (1).
1 Rev
* 60 Seconds
MP-2 RPM = MP-1 Pulses *
Second
CP-161 Pulses
Minute
written with parameter text:
FI1 RPM = FI1 Hz *
1
* 60 Seconds
PPR FI1
Minute
MP-5 EUs’ = MP-4 Counts * X Pulses (CP-160) * CP-163 EU U
Count
CP-162 Pulse
written with parameter text:
FI1 Psn = FI1 Cnts * X Pulses (CP-160) * EU FI1 1
Count
FI1 Pulses
where
X = 4 for CP-160 = 1, Quad (quadrature mode)
X = 1 for CP-160 = 2, Incr (incremental mode)
Keep in mind that FI1 Psn is not used directly in follower mode position loop control. The scaling is included in the
ratio calculation for more accurate results. This further justifies using integers when possible for the scaling numbers.
(Continued)
B-2
Appendix B: Formulas (continued)
The equations used to scale the Auxiliary Analog Input 1 signal are given by:
MP-13 EU/T = SS_AIN1 * MP-12 volts(or mA) + SI_AIN1
written with parameter text:
AI1 Eu/Tm = SS_AIN1 * AI1 Signal + SI_AIN1
where
SS_AIN1 =
CP-174 - CP-172 EU/T
is the Scaling Slope
CP-173 - CP-171 volts(or mA)
written with parameter text:
SS_AIN1 = EU@AI1 RB - EU@AI1 RA
AI1 RB - AI1 RA
SI_AIN1 = CP-172 * CP-173 - CP-174 * CP-171 EU/T is the Scaling Intercept
CP-173 - CP-171
written with parameter text:
SI_AIN1 = EU@AI1 RA * AI1 RB - EU@AI1 RB * AI1 RA
AI1 RB - AI1 RA
and AI1 Signal (MP-12) is assumed to be a calibrated value.
(Continued)
B-3
Appendix B: Formulas (continued)
The equations used to scale the Auxiliary Analog Input 2 signal are given by:
MP-16 EU/T = SS_AIN2 * MP-15 volts(or mA) + SI_AIN2
written with parameter text:
AI2 Speed = SS_AIN2 * AI2 Signal + SI_AIN2
where
SS_AIN2 = CP-179 - CP-177 EU/T
is the Scaling Slope
CP-178 - CP-176 volts(or mA)
written with parameter text:
SS_AIN2 = EU@AI2 RB - EU@AI2 RA
AI2 RB - AI2 RA
SI_AIN2 = CP-177 * CP-178 - CP-179 * CP-176 EU/T the Scaling Intercept
CP-178 - CP-176
written with parameter text:
SI_AIN2 = EU@AI2 RA * AI2 RB - EU@AI2 RB * AI2 RA
AI2 RB - AI2 RA
and AI2 Signal (MP-15) is assumed to be a calibrated value.
(Continued)
B-4
Appendix B: Formulas (continued)
The equations used to scale the Auxiliary Analog output signal are given by:
MP-25 volts(or mA) = SS_AO * MP (selected by CP-184) + SI_AO
written with parameter text:
AO Signal = SS_AO * MP (selected by CP-184) + SI_AO
where
SS_AO = CP-188 - CP-186 volts (or mA) is the Scaling Slope
CP-189 - CP-187 in selected MP units
written with parameter text:
SS_AO =
AO RB - AO RA
A
Val@AO RB - Val@AO RA
SI_AO = CP-186 * CP-189 - CP-188 * CP-187 is the Scaling Intercept
CP-189 - CP-187
written with parameter text:
SI_AO = AO RA * Val@AO RB - AO RB * Val@AO RA
Val@AO RB - Val@AO RA
The AO is assumed calibrated so that the actual voltage (or current) is reflected by AO Signal (MP-25).
B-5
—NOTES—
B-6
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
APPENDIX C: PARAMETER SUMMARY
NUMERIC QUICK REFERENCE
MP-01 FI1 HZ
Frequency Input 1 Hertz (MP-01) displays the current frequency of the Frequency Input 1, in Hertz.
Minimum Value: -120000
Units: Hertz
Maximum Value: 120000
MP-02 FI1 RPM
Frequency Input 1 RPM (MP-02) displays the current speed of the Frequency Input 1 encoder in RPM relative to PPR
FI1 (CP-161).
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: RPM
Maximum Value: 999999
MP-03 FI1 EU/TM
Frequency Input 1 Engineering Units per Time (MP-03) displays the current speed of the Frequency Input 1 in the
Engineering Units per Time (EU/Tm) relative to the FI1 Pulses (CP-162), EU FI1 (CP-163) and Time Base (CP-109).
The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of the decimal point in Master SP (CP-110).
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: EU/Tm
Maximum Value: 999999
MP-04 FI1 CNTS
Frequency Input 1 Counts (MP-04) displays the present value of the Frequency Input 1 Position (MP-05) in encoder
edges (counts) if Count Mode FI1 (CP-160) is set to “Quad x4”. Frequency Input 1 Counts (MP-04) displays the
present value of the Frequency Input 1 Position in pulses if Count Mode FI1 (CP-160) is set to “Incremental”.
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: Counts
Maximum Value: 999999
MP-05 FI1 PSN
Frequency Input 1 Position (MP-05) displays the present value of the Frequency Input 1 Position (MP-05) in
Engineering Units, as specified by FI1 Pulses (CP-162) and EU FI1 (CP-163). The placement of the decimal point is
the same as the placement of the decimal point in EU FI1 (CP-163).
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: EU
Maximum Value: 999999
(Continued)
C-1
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-06 FI2 HZ
Frequency Input 2 Hz (MP-06) displays the present frequency of the Frequency Input 2, in Hertz.
Minimum Value: -120000
Units: Hertz
Maximum Value: 120000
MP-07 FI2 RPM
Frequency Input 2 RPM (MP-07) displays the current speed of the Frequency Input 2 encoder in RPM relative to PPR
FI2 (CP-166).
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: RPM
Maximum Value: 999999
MP-08 FI2 EU/TM
Frequency Input 2 Engineering Units per Time (MP-08) displays the current speed of the Frequency Input 2 in the
Engineering Units per Time (EU/Tm) relative to the FI2 Pulses (CP-167), EU FI2 (CP-168) and Time Base (CP-109).
The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of the decimal point in Master SP (CP-110).
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: Counts
Maximum Value: 999999
MP-09 FI2 CNTS
Frequency Input 2 Counts (MP-09) displays the present value of the Frequency Input 2 Position (CP-10) in encoder
edges (counts) if Count Mode FI2 (CP-165) is set to “Quad x4”. Frequency 2 Counts displays the present value of the
Frequency Input 2 Position (CP-10) in pulses if Count Mode FI2 (CP-165) is set to is set to “Incremental”.
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: Counts
Maximum Value: 999999
MP-10 FI2 PSN
Frequency Input 2 Position (MP-10) displays the present value of the Frequency Input 2 Position (CP-10) in
Engineering Units, as specified by FI2 Pulses (CP-167) and EU FI2 (CP-168). The placement of the decimal point is
the same as the placement of the decimal point in EU FI2 (CP-168).
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: EU
Maximum Value: 999999
MP-11 AI1 BITS
Analog Input 1 Bits (MP-11) displays the present value in ADC bits of Auxiliary Board Analog Input 1 signal.
Minimum Value: -8192
Units: Bits
Maximum Value: 8192
(Continued)
C-2
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-12 AI1 SIGNAL
Analog Input 1 Signal (MP-12) displays the present value of the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 1 signal in either volts
or milliamps relative to which setting (volts or current) has been entered in AI1 MODE (CP-170).
Minimum Value: -12
Units: Volt or Milliamps
Maximum Value: 20
MP-13 AI1 EU/TM
Analog Input 1 EU/Tm (MP-13) displays the present value of the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 1 signal in
Engineering Units per Time (EU/Tm) as relative to the AI1 RA (CP-171), EU@AI1 RA (CP-172), AI1 RB (CP-173),
EU@AI1 RB (CP-174) and Time Base (CP-109). The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of
the decimal point in EU@AI1 RA (CP-172).
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: EU/Tm
Maximum Value: 999999
MP-14 AI2 BITS
AI2 Bits (MP-14) displays the present value in ADC bits of Auxiliary Board Analog Input 2 signal.
Minimum Value: -8192
Units: Bits
Maximum Value: 8191
MP-15 AI2 SIGNAL
Analog Input 2 Signal (MP-15) displays the present value of the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 2 signal in either volts
or milliamps, relative to which setting (volts or current) has been entered in AI2 MODE (CP-175).
Minimum Value: -12
Units: Volt or Milliamps
Maximum Value: 20
MP-16 AI2 EU/TM
Analog Input 2 EU/Tm (MP-16) displays the present value of the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 2 signal in
Engineering Units per Time (EU/Tm) relative to the AI2 RA (CP-176), EU@AI2 RA (CP-177), AI2 RB (CP-178),
EU@AI2 RB (CP-179) and Time Base (CP-109). The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of
the decimal point in EU@AI2 RA (CP-176).
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: EU/Tm
Maximum Value: 999999
MP-17 ANLGCAL REF A
Analog Calibration Reference A (MP-17) displays the Analog Reference Value (CP-363) for the signal (AI1, AI2, AO),
which was selected in Analog Calibration Select (CP-361) and which was stored during the calibration of point A.
Minimum Value: -15
Units: Volt or Milliamps
Maximum Value: 25
(Continued)
C-3
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-18 ANLGCAL REF B
Analog Calibration Reference B (MP-18) displays the Analog Reference Value (CP-363) for the signal (AI1, AI2,
AO), which was selected in Analog Calibration Select (CP-361) and which was stored during the calibration of point B.
Minimum Value: -15
Units: Volt or Milliamps
Maximum Value: 25
MP-20 CO BITS
Control Output Bits (MP-20) displays the present value, in DAC bits, of the CO_SIG Analog Output signal.
Minimum Value: -32768
Units: Bits
Maximum Value: 32767
MP-21 CO VOLTS
Control Output Volts (MP-21) displays the present value, in volts, of the CO_SIG Analog Output signal.
Minimum Value: -15
Units: Volt or Milliamps
Maximum Value: 25
MP-22 CO MAX BITS
The Control Output Maximum Bits (MP-22) corresponds to the voltage setting in Control Output Maximum Volts (CP181) for the CO_SIG Analog Output signal, relative to the Control Output DAC Range (MP-23). This is a
magnitude only.
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Bits
Maximum Value: 32767
MP-24 AO BITS
Analog Output Bits (MP-24) displays the present value, in DAC Bits, of the Auxiliary Analog Output.
Minimum Value: -32768
Units: Bits
Maximum Value: 32767
(Continued)
C-4
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-25 AO SIGNAL
Analog Output Signal (MP-25) displays the present value, in either volts or milliamps of the Auxiliary Analog Output,
relative to AO Mode (CP-185).
Minimum Value: -12
Units: Volt or Milliamps
Maximum Value: 20
MP-26 DI 7..0
Digital Input 7..0 displays the value of the “J6” digital inputs. A ‘1’ in the bit location (see graphic below) indicates
a “low voltage” condition on the corresponding input (which is consistent with a contact closure to common).
F-Stop
R-Stop
H-Stop
Run
Jog Forward
Jog Reverse
Keypad Lockout
Not In Use
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 01111111
MP-27 DI 15..8
Digital Input 15..8 (MP-27) displays the value of the “J7” digital inputs. A ‘1’ in the bit location (see graphic below)
indicates a “low voltage” condition on the corresponding input (which is consistent with a contact closure to
common). These eight Inputs can be set up in the PLC Programming screen to generate a One-Shot -Pulse on a highto-low transition.
Block Select A
Block Select B
Block Select C
Negate Setpoint
Inc Batch Cntr1
Batch RST Cntr1
Rmt Scroll Up
Rmt Scroll Down
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 11111111
(Continued)
C-5
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-28 DO 7..0
Digital Output 7..0 displays the value of the “J2” digital outputs. A ‘1’ in the bit location (see graphic below)
indicates an active “low voltage” condition on the corresponding open collector output (which would sink DC
current).
Zero Speed
Hi Speed Alarm
Lo Speed Alarm
Rmp Ref Dev Error
Scl Ref Dev Error
Batch Done Cnt1
CO Sig Sign
Drive Enable
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 11111111
MP-29 KEYPAD LOCKOUT
Keypad Lockout (MP-29) displays the Keypad Lockout status. The Keypad Lockout is active when “On” is displayed.
When Keypad Lockout is active, Control Parameter values can not be changed, with the exception of the Control
Parameters that are exempted by CP’s 380-389. The Keypad Lockout is not active when “OFF” is displayed. When
the Keypad Lockout is not active, any Control Parameter can be changed.
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 1
MP-30 SCPARM VAL
Scaled Parameter Value (MP-30) displays the value of the Scaled Parameter (CP-193). The placement of the decimal
point is the same as the placement of the decimal point in Sc Parm B (CP-196).
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: User Scaled
Maximum Value: 999999
MP-34 PSNERR
Position Error (MP-34) displays the value, in engineering units, of the accumulated position error between the lead
(FI1) and the feedback (FI2) input signals. The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of the
decimal point in EU FI2 (CP-168).
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: EU
Maximum Value: 999999
(Continued)
C-6
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-35 PSNERRCNT
Position Error Count (MP-35) displays the value, in encoder counts, of the accumulated position error between the lead
(FI1) and feedback (FI2) input signals.
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: Counts
Maximum Value: 999999
MP-38 LD EU/TM
Lead EU/Tm (MP-38) displays the current lead, in engineering units per time, as determined by the signal scaling for
the selected lead signal (refer to CP -104). The resolution is set the same as that of Master SP (CP-110).
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: EU/Tm
Maximum Value: 999999
MP-39 FB EU/TM
Feedback EU/Tm (MP-39) displays the feedback, in engineering units per time, that was scaled for the feedback
signal that was selected in Fb Source (CP -103). The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of
the decimal point in Master SP (CP-110).
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: EU/Tm
Maximum Value: 999999
MP-40 SCALED FB
Scaled Feedback (MP-40) displays the scaled feedback , which is scaled per ScFb Eq(CP-190), ScFb EU (CP-191) and
Fb @ ScFb EU (CP-192). The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of the decimal point in ScFb
EU (CP-191).
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: User Scaled
Maximum Value: 999999
MP-41 SCALED REF
Scaled Reference (MP-41) displays the reference speed, in feedback Engineering Units per Time. This is the calculated
setpoint before the accel/decel ramps are applied. The placement of the decimal point is the same as the placement of
the decimal point in Master SP (CP-110).
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: EU/Tm
Maximum Value: 999999
MP-42 RAMPED REF
Ramped Reference (MP-42) displays the speed command, in feedback Engineering Units per Time. This is the output of
the ramp calculations. When the ramp has been completed, the Ramped Reference (MP-42) should equal the Scaled
Reference (MP-41).
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: EU/Tm
Maximum Value: 999999
(Continued)
C-7
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-43 SR ERROR
Scaled Reference Error (MP-43) displays the speed error between the Scaled Reference (MP-41) and the Fb EU/Tm
(MP-39).
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: EU/Tm
Maximum Value: 999999
MP-44 RR ERROR
Ramped Reference Error (CP-44) displays the speed error in engineering units per time. This is the Ramped Reference
(MP-42) minus the Fb EU/Tm (MP-39). The Ramped Reference is the current speed command.
Minimum Value: -999999
Units: EU/Tm
Maximum Value: 999999
MP-45 CNTRL LOOP
Control Loop (MP-45) displays the type of loop (see list below) that is in current use. Only one type of loop can be
active at a time.
5 = Psn Hld (H-Stop Position Loop)
4 = ZE Hld (H-Stop ZE Position Loop)
3 = Psn (Position Loop)
2 = ZE Psn (Zero Error Loop)
1 = Vel (Velocity Loop)
0 = OL (Open Loop)
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 5
MP-46 FEEDFORWARD
Feedforward (MP-46) displays the value of the feedforward term in CO DAC bits.
Minimum Value: -32768
Units: Bits
Maximum Value: 32767
MP-47 TRIM OUT
Trim Out (MP-47) displays the value of the output of the PID compensator. Trim Out is displayed in CO DAC bits.
Minimum Value: -32768
Units: Bits
Maximum Value: 32767
MP-48 INTEGRAL
Integral (MP-48) displays the value of the integral term (i.e., integrator error sum times the Ki VL constant) of the
PID compensator. Integral is displayed in CO DAC bits.
Minimum Value: -32768
Units: Bits
Maximum Value: 32767
(Continued)
C-8
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-49 ESTMAXFB
Estimated Maximum Feedback (MP-49) displays the estimated maximum RPM, which the CX-1010 calculates during
the Kff adjustment, by referencing the CO Max Volts (CP-181), the CO Volts (MP-31) and the Fb EU/Tm (MP-39).
Use Estimated Maximum Feedback (MP-49) to determine if the drive and CO_SIG are scaled correctly.
Minimum Value: 0
Units: RPM
Maximum Value: 999999
MP-50 STATE
State (MP-50) displays the present operating state of the CX-1010 (see list below). Only one operating state may be
active at a time. To access either the “Run” or the “Jog” operating state, the F-Stop, R-Stop and H-Stop inputs must be
closed.
7 = Diagnostics
6 = Not used - reserved
5 = JOG (Rvs)
4 = JOG (Fwd)
3 = RUN
2 = H-Stop
1 = R-Stop
0 = F-Stop
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 7
MP-51 ACTIVE BLOCK
Active Block (MP-51) displays the active block (0-7). The block can be selected and made active by the Block select
bits (Blk Sel A,B.C), in the PLC Programming screen if Block Select Source (CP-378) is set to “1” (DigIn & PLC). Or
the block can be selected and made active by the keypad if Block Select Source (CP-378) is set to “2” (Keypad Blk
Sel).
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 7
(Continued)
C-9
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-52 INVALIDBLKS
InvalidBlks (MP-52) displays the status of the blocks in the Block Setup screens. A “1” indicates that there is an error
with the corresponding block (see graphic below). Generally, this indicates that an overflow condition can occur if the
corresponding block is activated. In addition, since other parameters are used in conjunction with the Block Parameters
that you selected, an error can result from a parameter that is not selected in Block Parameters. If a bad block is
activated, the CX-1010 will execute an F-Stop until either the block error is corrected or a another block is activated.
Block 0
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
Block 5
Block 6
Block 7
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 11111111
MP-53 MISC STATUS
Miscellaneous Status (MP-53) displays various status conditions (see graphic below). A “1” in the CO Sign bit indicates
a negative command output. A “1” in any other bit location indicates an active condition.
CO Sign
Drive Enable
Ramp Active
RR@0Speed
FB@0Speed
Not In Use
Min Speed Limit
Max Speed Limit
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 11011111
(Continued)
C - 10
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-54 STD ALARMS
Std Alarms (MP-54) displays various alarm conditions (see graphic below). A “1” in any bit location indicates an
active condition.
Max FB Alm
Max ACC/DEC
No Resp Time
Max FI2 Pos
Lo Pwr Alm
Max FI1 Hz
Max FI2 Hz
At Max CO_Sig
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 11111111
MP-55 CUSTOM ALMS
Custom Alarms (MP-55) displays the outputs of the PLC numerical comparators. A “1” in bit locations 0-3 indicates
that the result of the compare (Cmprx Parm value vs. Cmprx Val) is true for the given Cmprx Type. A “1” in bit
locations 4-7 indicates that the result of the compare (Cmprx Parm value vs. Cmprx Val) is false for the given Cmprx
Type (the NOT is true). Refer to CP-280 through CP-295.
Cmpr1 Out - True
Cmpr2 Out - True
Cmpr3 Out - True
Cmpr4 Out - True
Cmpr1 Out - False
Cmpr2 Out - False
Cmpr3 Out - False
Cmpr4 Out - False
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 11111111
MP-57 TMR4 TIME
Timer 4 Time (MP-57) displays the elapsed time, in seconds, for Timer 4 during the delay part of its operation.
(Continued)
C - 11
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-58 PLC MON 1 VAL
PLC Monitor 1 Value (MP-58) displays both the description and the value of the PLC bit that was selected in PLC
Monitor 1 (CP-305). Please note that a description of the PLC bit appears on the display line instead of the parameter
name (PLC Mon 1 Val).
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 1
MP-59 PLC MON 2 VAL
PLC Monitor 2 Value (MP-59) displays both the description and the value of the PLC bit that was selected in PLC
Monitor 2 (CP-306). Please note that a description of the PLC bit appears on the display line instead of the parameter
name (PLC Mon 2 Val).
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 1
MP-60 PLC 15-8
PLC 15- 8 (MP-60) displays the status of PLC bits 15-8 (See graphic and list below). A “1” in any bit indicates that
the input is “active”. The digital inputs are active low.
Digital Input 8
Digital Input 9
Digital Input 10
Digital Input 11
Digital Input 12
Digital Input 13
Digital Input 14
Digital Input 15
Description
Digital Input 8
Digital Input 9
Digital Input 10
Digital Input 11
Digital Input 12
Digital Input 13
Digital Input 14
Digital Input 15
Default Function
Block Select A (CP-378, MP-51)
Block Select B (CP-378, MP-51)
Block Select C (CP-378, MP-51)
Negate Scaled Reference (MP-41)
Increment Batch Count (Counter 1, CP-320, 321)
Batch Reset (Counter 1, CP-321)
Remote Scroll Up (CP-300, 301)
Remote Scroll Down (CP-300, 301)
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 11111111
(Continued)
C - 12
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-61 PLC 23-16
PLC 23-16 (MP-61) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 23-16 (See graphic below). A “1” in any bit
indicates that the bit is “active”.
Latch 1 Output
Latch 2 Output
Latch 3 Output
Latch 4 Output
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not In Use
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 00001111
MP-62 PLC 31-24
PLC 31-24 (MP-62) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 31-24 (See graphic below). . A “1” in any bit
indicates that the bit is “active”
Timer 1 Output
Timer 2 Output
Timer 3 Output
Timer 4 Output
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not In Use
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 00001111
(Continued)
C - 13
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-63 PLC 39-32
PLC 39-32 (MP-63) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 39-32 (See graphic below). A “1” in any bit
indicates that the bit is “active”
Cntr 1 Out
Cntr 2 Out
Cntr 3 Out
Cntr 4 Up Out
Cntr 4 Dn Out
Not In Use
FI1 Pos RO
FI2 Pos RO
Bit Name
Cntr1 Out
Cntr2 Out
Cntr3 Out
Cntr4UpO
Cntr4DnO
Not In Use
FI1PsnRO
FI2PsnRO
Description
Counter 1 Output
Counter 2 Output
Counter 3 Output
Counter 4 Up counter Output
Couter 4 Down counter Output
FI1 reached FI1PsnRO (CP-268) = FI1 Rollover Position (one-shot)
FI2 reached FI2PsnRO (CP-269) = FI2 Rollover Position (one-shot)
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 11011111
(Continued)
C - 14
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-64 PLC 47-40
PLC 47-40 (MP-61) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 47-40 (See graphic below). A “1” in any bit
indicates that the bit is “active”
CO Sign
Drive EN
Ramp Active
RR@ 0 Spd
FB@ 0 Spd
Not In Use
MinSpdLmt
MaxSpdLmt
Bit Name
CO Sign
Drive En
Ramp Active
RR @ 0 Spd
Fb @ 0 Spd
Not In Use
MinSpdLmt
MaxSpdLmt
Description
Command Output sign
Drive Enable
Ramp is active
Ramp Reference (MP-42) less than Zero Speed (CP-270)
Feedback (MP-39) less than Zero Speed (CP-270)
Scaled Reference is clamped at Min Spd Lmt (CP-251)
Scaled Reference is clamped at Max Spd Lmt (CP-250)
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 11011111
(Continued)
C - 15
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-65 PLC 55-48
PLC 55-48 (MP-61) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 55-48 (See graphic below). A “1” in any bit
indicates that the bit is “active”.
Max FB Spd
Max Acc/Dec
MtDrv Not Resp
Max FI2 Pos
Low Power Alarm
Max FI1 HZ
Max FI2 HZ
Ay Max CO Sig
Bit Name
MaxFb Spd
Max Acl/Dcl
MtrNResp
Max FI2 Psn
Low Power Alm
Max FI1 Hz
Max FI2 Hz
At Max CO
Description
Fb EU/Tm (MP-39) greater than Max Fb Alm (CP-271)
Fb Ac/Dcl greater than Max Acl/Dcl (CP-272)
Fb @ 0 Speed & CO-Sig Volts > (CO Max Volts/16) in Run or Jog
Magnitude (FI2 Position) > Max FI2 Psn (CP-274)
Low Power-supply voltage Detected
FI1 Frequency > Max allowed Frequency = 120 KHz
FI2 Frequency > Max allowed Frequency = 120 KHz
CO_SIG Volt railed at + or - CO Max volts
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 11111111
MP-66 PLC 63-56
PLC 63-56 (MP-66) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 63-56 (See graphic below). A “1” in any bit
indicates that the bit is “active”.
Comparator 1 Output
Comparator 2 Output
Comparator 3 Output
Comparator 4 Output
Not in Use
Not in Use
Not in Use
Not in Use
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 00001111
(Continued)
C - 16
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-67 PLC 71-64
PLC 71-64 (MP-66) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 71-64.
Master
Follower
Direct
Custom Sp
Loop Open
Loop Val
Loop ZE
Loop Psn
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 11111111
MP-68 PLC 79-72
PLC 79-72 (MP-68) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 79-72 (See graphic below). A “1” in any bit
indicates that the bit is “active”. These bits are only used to monitor the operating state of the CX-1010.
F-Stop
R-Stop
H-Stop
Run
Jog Forward
Jog Reverse
Not in Use
Diagnostics
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 10111111
(Continued)
C - 17
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-69 PLC 87- 80
PLC 87-80 (MP-69) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 87-80 (See graphic below). A “1” in any bit
indicates that the bit is “active”. These bits are only used to monitor the parameter block that is active.
Block 0 Selected
Block 1 Selected
Block 2 Selected
Block 3 Selected
Block 4 Selected
Block 5 Selected
Block 6 Selected
Block 7 Selected
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 11111111
MP-70 PLC 95- 88
PLC 95-88 (MP-70) displays the status of the internal PLC status bits 95-88. None of these bits are presently active.
They are reserved for future use.
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not in Use
Not in Use
Not in Use
Not in Use
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 00000000
(Continued)
C - 18
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-71 PLC 107-100
PLC 107- 100 (MP-71) displays the status of PLC bits 107-100 (See graphic and list below). A “1” in any bit
indicates that the output is “active”. The digital outputs are active low (current sinking).
Digital Output 0
Digital Output 1
Digital Output 2
Digital Output 3
Digital Output 4
Digital Output 5
Digital Output 6
Digital Output 7
Bit Name
DO_0
DO_1
DO_2
DO_3
DO_4
DO_5
DO_6
DO_7
Description
Digital Output 0
Digital Output 1
Digital Output 2
Digital Output 3
Digital Output 4
Digital Output 5
Digital Output 6
Digital Output 7
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Default Function
/Zero Speed (CP-270)
/Hi Speed Alarm (cmpr1, CP-292)
/Lo Speed Alarm (cmpr2, CP-293)
/Ramp Ref Dev Error (cmpr3, CP294)
/Scaled Ref Dev Error (cmpr4, CP-295)
/Batch Done (Counter1, CP-320,321)
/CO_SIG Sign (Active Low = Negative)
/Drive Enable
Maximum Value: 11111111
MP-72 PLC 115-108
PLC 115-08 (MP-72) displays the status of the internal PLC control bits 115-108 (See graphic below). A “1” in any
bit indicates that the bit is “active”. These internal bits (control relays) can be used as global “control relays”. For
example, they can be used to create one-shots or latches. They can also be used to simplify programming.
Temporary Bit 1
Temporary Bit 2
Temporary Bit 3
Temporary Bit 4
Temporary Bit 5
Temporary Bit 6
Temporary Bit 7
Temporary Bit 8
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 11111111
(Continued)
C - 19
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-73 PLC 123-116
PLC 123-116 (MP-73) displays the status of the internal PLC control bits 123-116 (See graphic below). A “1” in any
bit indicates that the bit is “active”.
Latch 1 Set
Latch 2 Set
Latch 3 Set
Latch 4 Set
Latch 1 Set Reset
Latch 2 Set Reset
Latch 3 Set Reset
Latch 4 Set Reset
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 11111111
MP-74 PLC 131-124
PLC 131-124 (MP-74) displays the status of the internal PLC control bits 131-124 (See graphic below). A “1” in any
bit indicates that the bit is “active”.
Trimer 1 Enable
Trimer 2 Enable
Trimer 3 Enable
Trimer 4 Enable
Trimer 4 Reset
Not In Use
Counter 1 Increment
Counter 2 Increment
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 11011111
(Continued)
C - 20
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-75 PLC 139-132
PLC 139-132 (MP-75) displays the status of the internal PLC control bits 139-132 (See graphic below). A “1” in any
bit indicates that the bit is “active”.
Counter 3 Increment
Counter 4 Increment
Counter 4 Decrement
Counter 1 Reset
Counter 2 Reset
Counter 3 Reset
Counter 4 Reset
Not In Use
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 01111111
MP-76 PLC 147-140
PLC 147-140 (MP-76) displays the status of the internal PLC control bits 147-140 (See graphic below). A “1” in any
bit indicates that the bit is “active”. Blk Sel A, B, C select the block that is active, if Blk Sel Source (CP-378) has
been set to “1” (DgIn). The chart below indicates which block has been selected, based on the Block Select A, B or C
inputs.
Block Select A
Block Select B
Block Select C
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not In Use
Blk Sel
C B A
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Block Selected
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Maximum Value: 00000111
(Continued)
C - 21
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-77 PLC 155-148
PLC 155-148 (MP-77) displays the status of the internal PLC control bits 155-148 (See graphic below). A “1” in any
bit indicates that the bit is “active”.
RST INTGL
RST FI1 Pos
RST FI2 Pos
RST Pos Error
FRZ INTGL
OPEN LOOP
FRZ RAMP
ByPassRMP
Bit Name
RstIntgrl
RstFI1Psn
RstFI2Psn
RstPsnErr
FrzIntgrl
OPEN LOOP
Frz Ramp
BypRmp
Description
Reset the Integral term
Reset FI1Position = FI1PsnPrst (CP-266, FI1 Position Preset)
Reset FI2 Position = FI2PsnPrst (CP-267, FI2 Position Preset)
Reset Position Error = 0
Freeze (stop) integral term
Open the Loop (position or velocity, CP-220, 221)
Freeze (stop) Ramp, keep Ramp Reference (MP-42) at current value
Bypass the Ramp, go immediately to Scaled Reference (MP-41 = MP-42)
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 11111111
(Continued)
C - 22
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-78 PLC 163-156
PLC 163-156 (MP-78) displays the status of the internal PLC control bits 163-156 (See graphic below). A “1” in any
bit indicates that the bit is “active”.
Not In Use
Not In Use
Negate CO Sig
Negate SP
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not In Use
Bit Name
Not In Use
Not In Use
Negate CO
Negate SR
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not In Use
Description
Negate CO_SIG voltage (not for setup, see CP-182)
Negate SR, change sign of Scaled Reference, MP-41
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 00001100
(Continued)
C - 23
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-79 PLC 171-164
PLC 171-164 (MP-79) displays the status of the internal PLC control bits 171-164. (See graphic below). A “1” in any
bit indicates that the bit is “active”.
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not In Use
Scroll Up
Scroll Down
Piezo EN
NOP OPERAND
Bit Name
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not In Use
Scroll Up
Scroll Down
Not In Use
NOP OPERAND
Description
Remote Scroll Up (CP-300, 301)
Remote Scroll Down (CP-300, 301)
dummy operand
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 10110000
MP-80 LAST RESET
Last Reset (MP-80) displays a “1” in a bit to indicate the reason for the last reset.
Test Submodule
RST Instruction
Loss of Clock
Not In Use
Halt Monitor
Watch Dog
Normal Power-Up
Ext Rst - Normal Power-Up
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 11110111
(Continued)
C - 24
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-81 MISC INTRPT
Miscellaneous Interrupts (MP-81) displays a “1” in a bit to indicate which of the various system interrupts may have
caused the last reset.
Bus Error
Address Error
Illegal Instruction
Div by 0
Unimplemented Interrupt
General Exception
Not In Use
Not In Use
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 00111111
MP-82 DEVICE ALMS
Device Alarms (MP-82) displays the status of microprocessor or other hardware related alarms. Notification of a bad
block selection is also included .
TPU FREQ1 Not Responding
TPU FREQ2 Not Responding
Low Power Alarm (per PLC and MP-54)
Bad Block Selected
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not In Use
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 00001111
MP-83 PC AT INTRPT
Program Counter at Interrupt (MP-83) shows where the last interrupt of the microprocessor occurred . If the CX-1010
repeatedly displays the “RESET FAULT” error box, then record the “PC @Intrpt” value as well as the line just above it
(which indicates the cause of the reset), before you press the clear key to continue. The program counter at interupt is
stored in the Program Counter at Interrupt (MP-83) Monitor Parameter for review. A value of “2560” is normal.
Minimum Value: 2560
Units: Address
Maximum Value: 16777215
(Continued)
C - 25
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-84 NORM PWR UPS
Normal Power Ups (MP-84) displays the number of normal power-ups since the most recent “Clear-7” power-up .
This value is reset only by a “Clear-7” power-up. Normal Power Ups (MP-84) is used primarily for troubleshooting.
Minimum Value: 1
Units: Counts
Maximum Value: 65535
MP-85 LOW PWR CNTR
Low Power Counter (MP-85) displays the number of low power detections, including normal “Power Downs”. You
can reset this numeric value, but only in Clr Fault Cntrs (CP-391). Low Power Counter (MP-85) is used primarily for
troubleshooting.
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Counts
Maximum Value: 65535
MP-86 MEM ERR CNTR
Memory Error Counter (MP-86) displays the number of memory test failures that occurred during “Power Up”. You
can reset this numeric value, but only in Clr Fault Cntrs (CP-391). Memory Error Counter (MP-86) is used primarily
for troubleshooting.
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Counts
Maximum Value: 65535
MP-87 WATCHDOGCNTR
Watch Dog Counter (MP-87) displays the number of watch dog resets that were caused by watchdog time-out. Watch
Dog Counter (MP-87) is used primarily for troubleshooting. You can reset this numeric value, but only in ‘Clr Fault
Cntrs’ CP (CP-391).
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Counts
Maximum Value: 65535
MP-88 MISCINTRPTCNTR
Miscellaneous Interrupt Counter (MP-88) displays the number of miscellaneous interrupts that occurred as the result of
bus errors, address errors, divide-by-0 errors, unexecuted instruction errors, general exceptions, and unexecuted and
spurious interrupts. You can reset this numeric value, but only in Clr Fault Cntrs (CP-391). Miscellaneous Interupt
Counter (MP-88) is used primarily for troubleshooting.
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Counts
Maximum Value: 65535
MP-90 SERCOM CHAR IN
Serial Communications Character In (MP-90) displays the value of the last byte that was received by the Serial
Communications port. SerCom Char In (MP-90) is displayed in a decimal format. SerCom Char In (MP-90) is used
primarily for troubleshooting.
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Binary Character
Maximum Value: 255
(Continued)
C - 26
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-91 SERCOM ERRS
Serial Communications Errors (MP-91) displays all serial communications errors that occurred during the most recent
transmission.
Parity Error
Framing Error
Noise Error
Overrun Error
Invalid Function
ETX Not Received
Buffer Overflow
CRC Error
Minimum Value: 00000000
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 11111111
MP-94 ROM TEST
ROM Test (MP-94) displays the result of the most recent ROM Test . ROM Test runs a checksum test on the CX1010 program memory.
1 = Memory Test Fail
0 = Memory Test Pass
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 1
MP-95 SRAM TEST
SRAM Test (MP-95) displays the result of the most recent SRAM Test . SRAM Test runs a read/write test on the
scratch-pad memory.
1 = Memory Test Fail
0 = Memory Test Pass
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 1
MP-96 NV RAM TEST
Non Volatile RAM Test (MP-96) displays the result of the most recent Non Volatile RAM Test . The test runs both a
read/write and a checksum test on the nonvolatile memory. The parameter values, the PLC program and the backups
are all stored in this memory.
1 = Memory Test Fail
0 = Memory Test Pass
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Coded
Maximum Value: 1
(Continued)
C - 27
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-97 MODEL #
MODEL # (MP-97) displays the model number for this CX-1010. This model number is unique to the CX-1010 series
of controllers.
Minimum Value: 1000
Units: Model Number
Maximum Value: 60000
MP-98 RELEASE DATE
Release Date (MP-98) is the date that the software for this individual CX-1010 was released. The numeric, six digit
format is: month, day, year
Minimum Value: 090396
Units: Date
Maximum Value: 123199
MP-99 REVISION
REVISION (MP-99) is the revision level of the software for this individual CX-1010.
Minimum Value: 1.00
Units: Rev Level
Maximum Value: 99.99
CP-101 SETPOINT X
Setpoint X displays the name and value of the setpoint that corresponds with the mode of operation selected in
Setpoint Mode (CP-102). The setpoint could be the Master Setpoint (CP-110), the Follower Setpoint (CP-120), the
Direct Setpoint (CP-130) or the Custom Setpoint (CP-140). Setpoint X acts as a quick access to the setpoint value. In
addition to changing a setpoint value in the setpoint screens, you can also change the value of the active setpoint by
entering a new value in Setpoint X (CP-101).
Minimum Value: -999999
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: EU/Tm
CP-102 SETPOINT MODE
Setpoint Mode sets the mode of operation and the subsequent Setpoint, that are used when your system is in “Run”.
The Setpoint and mode of operation combined, determine the Reference Speed and, if applicable, the Reference
Position. The modes of operation are:
4 = Custom Mode
3 = Direct Mode
2 = Follower Mode
1 = Master Mode
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1 (Master)
Maximum Value: 4 (General)
Units: Coded
(Continued)
C - 28
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-103 FB SOURCE
Feedback Source (CP-103) identifies the source of the feedback signal. The feedback signal is also used by some of the
alarms as well as some of the status indications (e.g., Zero Speed). Feedback Source is ignored when RUN Loop Mode
(CP-220) is set to "Position Loop" (the Feedback signal defaults to "Frequency Input 2"). The feedback sources are:
4 = Constant 2
3 = Analog Input 2
2 = Analog Input 1
1 = Frequency Input 2 (default)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 4
Units: Coded
CP-104 LD SOURCE
Lead Source (CP-104) identifies the source of the lead in follower applications. This is the signal that the follower will
follow. The Lead Source is ignored when RUN Loop Mode (CP-220) is set to "Position Loop" (the lead signal defaults
to "Frequency Input 1"). The lead sources are:
4 = Constant 1
3 = Custom SP
2 = Analog Input 1
1 = Frequency Input 1 (default)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 4
Units: Coded
CP-105 OFS SOURCE
Offset Source (CP-105) identifies the source of the offset in both the Master plus Offset and the Follower plus Offset
applications. The offset is added to the Master Setpoint (CP-110) when Master Equation (CP-113) is set to "Master
plus Offset” and Setpoint Mode (CP-102) is set to "Master". The offset is added to the result of the lead signal
multiplied by the Ratio (CP-124) when Follower Equation (CP-125) is set to "Follower Plus Offset" and Setpoint Mode
(CP-102) is set to "Follower". The Ofs Sources are:
6 = Frequency Input 2
5 = Analog Input 2
4 = Constant 3
3 = Custom Setpoint (constant)
2 = Analog Input 1
1 = Frequency Input 1 (default)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 4
Maximum Value: 6
Units: Coded
(Continued)
C - 29
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-106 FF SOURCE
Feedforward Source (CP-106) identifies the source of the feedforward signal. Feedforward's default setting is "0”
(Ramped-Reference) which is also the velocity command. The default setting is used most frequently.
WARNING: To insure proper operation, set Feedforward Source (CP-106) to "0” (Ramped Reference) when RUN
Loop Mode (CP-220) is set to “2” (Position loop).
2=Analog In 1
1=Frequency In 1
0=Ramped Reference (default)
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 2
Units: Coded
CP-108 EU/TM RANGE
Engineering Units per Time Range (CP-108) identifies the range and resolution (see list below) of your feedback in
Engineering Units per Time (EU/Tm). For the most precise resolution, choose the range that your maximum EU/Tm
falls within. If you need to change the current EU/Tm Range to a lower range, all of your setpoints, limits, and alarms
will also need to be changed to fall within the new range. Position parameters may also be affected when you change to
a lower range.
4 = Max:
3 = Hi:
2 = Mid:
1 = Lo:
range to 999,999
range to 130,000
range to 16,000
range to 1,000
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 2
resolution to 0.001
resolution to 0.0001 (default)
resolution to 0.00001
resolution to 0.000001
Maximum Value: 4
Units: EU/Tm
CP-109 TIME BASE
Time Base (CP-109) is the denominator, which represents the time (Tm) in the EU/Tm equation. The equation scales
the frequency inputs (FI1 and FI2) to EU/Tm.
3 = per Hour
2 = per Minute (default)
1 = per Second
0 = Timeless EU/Tm
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 2
Maximum Value: 3
Units: Coded
(Continued)
C - 30
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-110 MASTER SP
Master Setpoint (CP-110) is the speed at which you want your system to operate (while in Run) when the Setpoint
Mode (CP-102) is set to "1” (Master Mode). How the Master SP (CP-110) is interpreted (i.e., how the scaled Reference
Speed is derived from the Master SP) is determined by the Master Equation (CP-113). When Master Equation (CP113) is set to "1" (Standard), then the Master SP is the desired operating speed in EU/Tm . When Master Equation (CP113) is set to the "2 ” (Inverse Master), then the Master Setpoint (CP-110) is given in time (e.g., minutes) and the
operating speed in inversely proportional to Master SP (Tm/EU). When Master Equation (CP-113) is set to the "3 ”
(Offset) then the operating speed is the Master SP plus the current value of the offset signal (which is selected in CP105).
Minimum Value: -999999
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: EU/Tm or Tm/EU
CP-111 MAX SP MSTR
Maximum Setpoint Master (CP-111) is the maximum value that will be allowed for the Master Setpoint (CP-110).
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 2000
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: EU/Tm or Tm/EU
CP-112 MIN SP MSTR
Minimum Setpoint Master (CP-112) is the minimum value that will be allowed for the Master Setpoint (CP-110).
Minimum Value: 0
Maximum Value: 999999
Default Value: 0
Units: EU/Tm or Tm/EU
CP-113 MASTER EQUATION
Master Equation (CP-113) allows you to choose a variable (see list below) that will affect the Master setpoint
operation.
3 = Master + Offset
2 = Inverse Master
1 = Standard (default)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 3
Units: Coded
CP-114 INV M NORM
Use the Inverse Master Norm (CP-114) to define the travel distance (EU) in the time specified in Master Setpoint (CP110). Use Inverse Master Norm (CP-114) only in the Inverse Master Mode. In this mode, the setpoint speed is
determined by the INV M Norm (CP-114) over the Master Setpoint (CP-110).
Minimum Value: -999999
Default Value: 1.000
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: EU
(Continued)
C - 31
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-120 FOLLOWER SP
Follower Setpoint (CP-120) sets the ratio at which the follower will follow the lead signal (when in Run) when the
Setpoint Mode (CP-102) is set to "2” (Follower Mode). If Follower Equation (CP-125) is set to either "1” (Standard)
or "3” (Follower plus Offset), then the Follower SP is the numerator of the ratio. If the Follower Equation (CP-125)
is set to "2” (Inverse Follower), then the Follower Setpoint is the denominator of the ratio.
Minimum Value: -999999
Default Value: 1.000
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: Ratio
CP-121 MAX SP FOL
Maximum Setpoint Follower (CP-121) is the maximum value that will be allowed for the Follower Setpoint (CP-120).
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1.000
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: Ratio
CP-122 MIN SP FOL
Minimum Setpoint Follower (CP-122) is the minimum value that will be allowed for the Follower Setpoint (CP-120).
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: Ratio
CP-123 RATIO NORM
In the Standard and Offset Follower mode, Ratio Norm (CP-123) is the denominator of the ratio at which your system
follows the lead signal. In the Inverse Follower mode, Ratio Norm is the numerator of the ratio at which your system
follows the lead signal.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1.000
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: Ratio
CP-124 RATIO
Ratio (CP-124) is the ratio at which the follower will follow the lead (while in Run) when the Setpoint Mode (CP-102)
is set to "2 ” (Follower Mode).
Minimum Value: -1000
Default Value: 1.000
Maximum Value: 1000
Units: Ratio
CP-125 FOL EQUATION
Follower Equation (CP-125) allows you to choose a variable (see list below) that will affect the follower setpoint
operation.
3=Follower + Offset
2=Inverse Follower
1=Standard (default)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 3
Units: Coded
(Continued)
C - 32
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-130 DIRECT SP
Direct Setpoint (CP-130) is used to output a constant value on the CO_SIG Analog Output (J3, pin 1) signal (while in
Run) when the Setpoint Mode (CP-102) is set to "3” (Direct Mode). The Direct Setpoint value is entered in volts.
Minimum Value: -15
Default Value: 0.0
Maximum Value: 15
Units: Volts
CP-131 MAX SP DRCT
Maximum Setpoint Direct (CP-131) is the maximum value that will be allowed for the Direct Setpoint.
Minimum Value: -15
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 15
Units: Volts
CP-132 MIN SP DRCT
Minimum Setpoint Direct (CP-131) is the minimum value that will be allowed for the Direct Setpoint.
Minimum Value: -15
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 15
Units: Volts
CP-140 CUSTOM SP
Custom Setpoint can be any or all of the “V” variables in the Custom Setpoint Equation below and Custom Setpoint
can also be a constant for a lead or an offset operation. The Custom Setpoint Equation:
Scaled Reference =
(M1 * V1) + B1
(M2 * V2) + B2
Minimum Value: -999999
Default Value: 0.0
* V4 + (M3 * V3 + B3)
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: EU/Tm
CP-141 CONSTANT 1
Constant 1 can be the “V1” variable in the Custom Setpoint Equation (refer to CP-140). It can also be a constant for a
lead operation.
Minimum Value: -999999
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: Constant
CP-142 CONSTANT 2
Constant 2 can be the “V2” variable in the Custom Setpoint Equation (refer to CP-140).
Minimum Value: -999999
Default Value: 1.0
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: Constant
(Continued)
C - 33
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-143 CONSTANT 3
Constant 3 can be the “V3” variable in the Custom Setpoint Equation (refer to CP-140). It can also be a constant for
an offset operation.
Minimum Value: -999999
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: Constant
CP-144 CONSTANT 4
Constant 4 can be the “V4” variable in the Custom Setpoint Equation (refer to CP-140).
Minimum Value: -999999
Default Value: 1.0
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: Constant
CP-146 MAX SP CUST
Maximum Setpoint Custom (CP-146) is the maximum value that will be allowed for the Custom Setpoint.
Minimum Value: -32768
Default Value: 2000
Maximum Value: 32767
Units: EU/Tm
CP-147 MIN SP CUST
Minimum Setpoint Custom (CP-147) is the minimum value that will be allowed for the Custom Setpoint.
Minimum Value: -32768
Default Value: 130000
Maximum Value: 32767
Units: EU/Tm
CP-150 V1 SOURCE
V1 Source (CP-150) identifies the source of the signal (or constant) that can be used as the “V1” variable in the
Custom Setpoint Equation (refer to CP-140). The V1 sources are:
6 = Frequency In 2
5 = Analog In 2
4 = Constant 1
3 = Custom SP (default)
2 = Analog In 1
1 = Frequency In 1
0 = the value of 0
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 3
Maximum Value: 6
Units: Coded
(Continued)
C - 34
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-151 V2 SOURCE
V2 Source (CP-151) identifies the source of the signal (or constant) that can be used as the “V2” variable in the
Custom Setpoint Equation (refer to CP-140). The V2 sources are:
6 = Frequency In 2
5 = Analog In 2
4 = Constant 2 (default)
3 = Custom SP
2 = Analog In 1
1 = Frequency In 1
0 = the value of 0
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 4
Maximum Value: 6
Units: Coded
CP-152 V3 SOURCE
V3 Source (CP-152) identifies the source of the signal (or constant) that can be used as the “V3” variable in the
Custom Setpoint Equation (refer to CP-140). The V3 sources are:
6 = Frequency In 2
5 = Analog In 2
4 = Constant 3 (default)
3 = Custom SP
2 = Analog In 1
1 = Frequency In 1
0 = the value of 0
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 4
Maximum Value: 6
Units: Coded
CP-153 V4 SOURCE
V4 Source (CP-153) identifies the source of the signal (or constant) that can be used as the “V4” variable in the
Custom Setpoint Equation (refer to CP-140). The V4 sources are:
6 = Frequency In 2
5 = Analog In 2
4 = Constant 4 (default)
3 = Custom SP
2 = Analog In 1
1 = Frequency In 1
0 = the value of 0
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 4
Maximum Value: 6
Units: Coded
CP-154 M1
M1 (CP-154) is the slope constant that multiplies the “V1” variable in the Custom Setpoint (CP-140) equation.
Minimum Value: -32768
Default Value: 1.0
Maximum Value: 32767
Units: Constant
(Continued)
C - 35
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-155 B1
B1 (CP-155) is the (y-intercept) constant that is added to the product of “M1xV1” in the Custom Setpoint (CP-140)
equation.
Minimum Value: -999999
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: Constant
CP-156 M2
M2 (CP-156) is the (slope) constant that multiplies the “V2” variable in the Custom Setpoint (CP-140) equation.
Minimum Value: -32768
Default Value: 1.0
Maximum Value: 32767
Units: Constant
CP-157 B2
B2 (CP-157) is the (y-intercept) constant that is added to the product of “M2xV2” in the Custom Setpoint (CP-140)
equation.
Minimum Value: -999999
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: Constant
CP-158 M3
M3 (CP-158) is the (slope) constant that multiplies the “V3” variable in the Custom Setpoint (CP-140) equation.
Minimum Value: -32768
Default Value: 1.0
Maximum Value: 32767
Units: Constant
CP-159 B3
B3 (CP-159) is the (y-intercept) constant that is added to the product of “M3xV3” in the Custom Setpoint (CP-140)
equation.
Minimum Value: -999999
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: Coded
CP-160 CNT MODE FI1
Count Mode FI1 (CP-160) identifies the type of encoder that is connected to Frequency Input 1. The “Quad x4”
setting is for a quadrature encoder that gives 4 counts per pulse and also gives direction information. The Incremental
selection is for a single channel encoder, which gives 1 count per pulse but does not give direction information.
2 = Incremental
1 = Quad x4 (default)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 2
Units: Coded
(Continued)
C - 36
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-161 PPR FI1
Pulses Per Revolution FI1 (CP-161) is the number of pulses that are produced during one revolution of the encoder (or
motor or any other rotating part of your machine) that is connected to Frequency Input 1. This value is only used to
calculate RPM information for FI1 RPM (MP-02).
Minimum Value: 1
Maximum Value: 60000
Default Value: 60
Units: Pulses/Rev
CP-162 FI1 PULSES
FI1 Pulses (CP-162) is used to scale the Frequency Input 1 in EU’s and EU/Tm. Enter the number of pulses that
corresponds to the number of EU’s that are entered in EU FI1 (CP-163).
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 60
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: Pulses
CP-163 EU FI1
EU FI1 (CP-163) is used to scale the Frequency Input 1 in EU’s and EU/Tm. Enter the number of EU's that
corresponds to the number of pulses that are entered in FI1 Pulses (CP-162).
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1.0
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: EU (F11)
CP-165 CNT MODE FI2
Count Mode FI2 (CP-165) identifies the type of encoder that is connected to Frequency Input 2. The “Quad x4”
setting is a for quadrature encoder that gives 4 counts per pulse and also gives direction information. The Incremental
selection is for a single channel encoder which gives 1 count per pulse but does not give direction information.
2 = Incremental
1 = Quad x4 (default)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 2
Units: Coded
CP-166 PPR FI2
Pulses Per Revolution FI2 (CP-166) is the number of pulses that are produced during one revolution of the encoder (or
motor or any other rotating part of your machine) that is connected to Frequency Input 2. This value is only used to
calculate RPM information for FI2 RPM (MP-07).
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 60
Maximum Value: 60000
Units: Pulses/Rev
CP-167 FI2 PULSES
Frequency Input 2 Pulses (CP-167) is used to scale the Frequency Input 2 in EU’s and EU/Tm. Enter the number of
pulses that corresponds to the number of EU’s that are entered in EU FI2 (CP-168).
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 2000
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: Pulses
(Continued)
C - 37
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-168 EU FI2
EU Frequency Input 2 (CP-168) is used to scale the Frequency Input 2 in EU’s and EU/Tm. Enter the number of EU's
that corresponds to the number of pulses that are entered in FI2 Pulses (CP-167).
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1.00
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: EU (F2)
CP-170 AI1 MODE
Analog Input 1 Mode (CP-170) identifies the mode of operation and the calibration that are used for the Auxiliary
Board Analog Input 1 signal.
2 = Current
1 = Voltage (default)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 2
Units: Coded
CP-171 AI1 RA
Analog Input 1 Reference A (CP-171) is used to scale the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 1 in EU/Tm. Enter the value
for reference point A that corresponds to the EU/Tm that are entered in EU@AI1 RA (CP-172).
Minimum Value: -15.0
Default Value: 0.0
Maximum Value: 25
Units: Volts or milliamps
CP-172 EU@AI1 RA
EU at Analog Input 1 Reference A (CP-172) is used to scale the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 1 in EU/Tm. Enter the
number of EU/Tm for point A that corresponds to the reference value that is entered in AI1 RA (CP-171).
Minimum Value: -9999999
Default Value: 0.0
Maximum Value: 9999999
Units: EU/Tm
CP-173 AI1 RB
Analog Input 1 Reference B (CP-173) is used to scale the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 1 in EU/Tm. Enter the value
for reference point B that corresponds to the EU/Tm that are entered in EU@AI1 RB (CP-174).
Minimum Value: -15.0
Default Value: 10.0
Maximum Value: 25
Units: Volts or milliampere
CP-174 EU@AI1 RB
EU@Analog Input 1 Reference B (CP-174) is used to scale the Auxiliary Board Analg Input 1 in EU/Tm. Enter the
number of EU/T’s for point A that corresponds to the reference value that is entered in AI1 RB (CP-173).
Minimum Value: -9999999
Default Value: 100.0
Maximum Value: 9999999
Units: EU/Tm
(Continued)
C - 38
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-175 AI2 MODE
Analog Input 2 Mode (CP-175) identifies the mode of operation and the calibration that are used for the Auxiliary
Board Analog Input 2 signal.
2=Current
1=Voltage (default)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 2
Units: Coded
CP-176 AI2 RA
Analog Input 2 Reference A (CP-176) is used to scale the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 2 in EU/Tm. Enter the
Analog Input 2 signal value for reference point A that corresponds to the EU/Tm that are entered in EU@AI2 RA (CP177).
Minimum Value: -15.0
Default Value: 0.0
Maximum Value: 25
Units: Volts or milliamperes
CP-177 EU@AI2 RA
EU at Analog Input 2 Reference A (CP-177) is used to scale the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 2 in EU/Tm. Enter the
number of EU/T’s for point A that corresponds to the reference value that is entered in AI2 RA (CP-176).
Minimum Value: -9999999
Default Value: 0.0
Maximum Value: 9999999
Units: EU/Tm
CP-178 AI2 RB
Analog Input 2 Reference B (CP-178) is used to scale the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 2 in EU/Tm. Enter the
Analog Input 2 signal value for reference point B that corresponds to the EU/T’s that are entered in EU@AI2 RB (CP179).
Minimum Value: -15.0
Maximum Value: 25
Default Value: 10.0
Units: Volts or milliamps
CP-179 EU@AI2 RB
EU at Analog Input 2 Reference B (CP-179) is used to scale the Auxiliary Board Analog Input 2 in EU/Tm. Enter the
number of EU/Tm for point B that corresponds to the reference value that is entered in AI2 RB (CP-178).
Minimum Value: -9999999
Default Value: 100.0
Maximum Value: 9999999
Units: EU/Tm
CP-180 CO MODE
Control Output Mode (CP-180) controls the format (see list below) of the CO_SIG Analog Output (J3, pin 1) signal.
This is the control output signal that is input to your drive.
4 = UniBrake = Unipolar Brake ( CO Max Volts - Vout )
3 = BiPolAbs = Bipolar Absolute ( Absolute Value - Vout )
2 = Bipolar (+ Vout)
1 = Unipolar (0 to +Vout) (default)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 4
Units: Coded
(Continued)
C - 39
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-181 CO MAX VOLTS
The control signal output is limited to plus or minus Control Output Maximum Volts (CP-181). This value should be
less than or equal to the input spec of the drive or any other device that is connected to this output.
Minimum Value: 0.1
Default Value: 10.0
Maximum Value: 15
Units: Volts
CP-182 CO POLARITY
Control Output Polarity (CP-182) sets the polarity of the CO_SIG Analog Output (J3, pin 1) signal (see list below).
An absolute value is established for the BiPolAbs CO Mode (CP-180) after the negation has been determined by the
PLC bit ‘Negate CO’.
2 = Negate Output
1 = Normal Output (default)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 2
Units: Coded
CP-184 AO PARAMETER
Analog Output Parameter (CP-184) identifies the Monitor or Control Parameter that is used for the Auxiliary Analog
Output (JA, pins 9,10,11) . When the Analog Output Parameter (CP-184) is set to “0”, the value of AO DIRECT (CP365) is used as the output .
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 7
Maximum Value: 48
Units: Parameter Code
NOTE: The following Monitor and Control Parameters are not available for the Analog Output Parameter (CP-184):
MP-17 ..... AnlgCal Ref A
MP-18 ..... AnlgCal Ref B
MP-22 ........ CO Max Bits
MP-23 ... CO DAC Range
MP-24 ................ AO Bits
MP-25 ............ AO Signal
MP-26 .................. DI 7..0
MP-27 ................ DI 15..8
MP-29 .. KeyPad Lockout
MP-38 ............ Ld EU/Tm
MP-45 ........... Cntrl Loop
CP-184 ..... AO Parameter
(Continued)
C - 40
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-185 AO MODE
Analog Output Mode (CP-185) identifies the mode of operation and calibration that are used for the Auxiliary Board
Analog Output signal.
2 = Current
1 = Voltage (default)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 2
Units: Coded
CP-186 AO RA
Analog Output Reference A (CP-186) scales the Auxiliary Board Analog Output from the units of the selected
parameter to the units of the output, generally measured in volts or milliamps.
Minimum Value: -15.0
Default Value: 10.0
Maximum Value: 20
Units: Volts or Milliamps
CP-187 VAL@AO RA
Value at Analog Output Reference A (CP-187) scales the Auxiliary Board Analog Output from the units of the
selected parameter to the units of the output; generally measured in volts or milliamps. Enter the parameter value that
corresponds to AO RA (CP-186).
Minimum Value: -9999999
Default Value: 2000
Maximum Value: 9999999
Units: Parameter Value
CP-188 AO RB
Analog Output Reference B (CP-188) scales the Auxiliary Board Analog Output from the units of the selected
parameter to the units of the output; generally measured in volts or milliamps. Enter the parameter value that
corresponds to VAL@AO RB (CP-189).
Minimum Value: -15.0
Default Value: 10.0
Maximum Value: 20
Units: Volts or Milliamps
CP-189 VAL@AO RB
Value at Analog Output Reference B (CP-189) scales the Auxiliary Board Analog Output from the units of the selected
parameter to the units of the output, (generally measured in volts or milliampere). Enter the parameter value that
corresponds to AO RB (CP-188).
Minimum Value: -9999999
Default Value: 2000
Maximum Value: 9999999
Units: Parameter Value
(Continued)
C - 41
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-190 SCFB EQ
Scaled Feedback Equation (CP-190) identifies the scaling format (see list below) for the Scaled Fb (MP-40).
4 = Inverse Follower
3 = Inverse Master
2 = Standard Follower
1 = Standard Master (default)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 4
Units: Coded
CP-191 SCFB EU
Scaled Feedback EU (CP-191) is used to scale the Scaled Fb (MP-40) in conjunction with the Fb @ ScFb EU (CP192) and the ScFb Eq (CP-190).
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1.0
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: EU
CP-192 FB @ SCFB EU
Feedback@ Scaled Feedback EU (CP-192) is used to scale the Scaled Fb (MP-40) in conjunction with ScFb EU (CP191) and ScFb Eq (CP-190).
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: Fb EU/Tm
CP-193 SC PARM
Use Scaled Parameter (CP-193) to select the Monitor Parameter that is used in the Scaled Parameter Equation (CP194). The results of the equation are displayed in ScParm Val (MP-30).
Minimum Value: 1
Maximum Value: 49
Default Value: 7 (MP-07, FI2 RPM) Units: Parameter Code
CP-194 SC PARM EQ
Scaled Parameter Equation (CP-194) identifies the scaling format equation (see list below) for ScParm Val (MP-30):
3 = Inverse2:
2 = Inverse1:
1 = Standard:
(M/x) + b
where x = value of selected monitor parameter
1/(M x + b)
M = SC Parm M (CP-195)
M x + b (default)
b = SC Parm B (CP-196)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 3
Units: Coded
(Continued)
C - 42
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-195 SC PARM M
Scaled Parameter M (CP-195) is the slope constant that multiplies the Sc Parm (CP-193) by “M” as specified by the Sc
Parm Eq (CP-194).
Minimum Value: -999999
Default Value: 1.00
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: Constant
CP-196 SC PARM B
Scaled Parameter B is the y-intercept constant that is added to the product term as specified by the Sc Parm Eq (CP194). The resolution of Scaled Parameter B (CP-196) dictates the resolution of the ScParm Val (MP-30).
Minimum Value: -999999
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: Constant
CP-199 LG NUMBER UNITS
Use Large Number Units (CP-199) to select the EU text that displays immediately below the Large Number Display
on the Status screen (refer to the status screen in Operation: Screen Operation). Enter a numeric code that identifies
the EU for the Control Parameter displayed in the Large Number Parameter (CP-340). Refer to the numeric code list
below. The Help screen for CP-199 also contains a partial list of numeric code options. In addition, you can also
scroll through the numeric code options by accessing CP-199 with the Code key while you are in the in the
Status screen.
0 = <BLANK>
27 = Sec/unit
54 = EU/Tm
1 = RPM (default)
28 = Sec/inch
55 = EU/Tm/sec
2 = Hertz
29 = Sec/foot
56 = Units
3 = KHtz
30 = Sec/CM
57 = Inches
4 = EU/sec
31 = Sec/gal
58 = Feet
5 = EU/min
32 = Sec/liter
59 = Yards
6 = EU/hr
33 = Min/unit
60 = Centimeters
7 = Units/sec
34 = Min/inch
61 = Meters
8 = Units/min
35 = Min/foot
62 = Gallons
9 = Units/hr
36 = Min/yard
63 = Liters
10 = Inches/sec
37 = Min/CM
64 = lb
11 = Inches/min
38 = Min/meter
65 = Counts
12 = Feet/sec
39 = Min/gal
66 = Pulses
13 = Feet/min
40 = Min/liter
67 = Lines
14 = Feet/hr
41 = Hr/unit
68 = Revs
15 = Yards/min
42 = Hr/foot
69 = Degrees
16 = Yards/hr
43 = Hr/yard
70 = Pulses/Rev
17 = CM/sec
44 = Hr/meter
71 = Pulses/EU
18 = CM/min
45 = Hr/gal
72 = Volts
19 = Meters/min
46 = Hr/liter
73 = Milliamps
20 = Meters/hr
47 = Feet/foot
74 = Bits
21 = Gal/sec
48 = Ratio
75 = Bits/sec
22 = Gal/min
49 = Percent (%)
76 = Volts/kiloEU
23 = Gal/hr
50 = Seconds
77 = oz
24 = Liters/sec
51 = Minutes
78 = psi
25 = Liters/min
52 = Hours
79 = newton
26 = Liters/hr
53 = EU
80 = Custom (user defined through he serial com)
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 80
Units: Coded
(Continued)
C - 43
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-200 REF RUN RMP
The acceleration rate for the Master Mode, the Follower Mode and the Custom Setpoint Mode are determined by the
Acl Tm RUN (CP-201) and the Reference Run Ramp (CP-200) The deceleration rate (from a faster speed to a slower
speed) for the Master Mode, the Follower Mode and the Custom Setpoint Mode, are determined by the Dcl Tm RUN
(CP-203) and the Reference Run Ramp (CP-200).
Minimum Value: 0.001
Default Value: 1000
Maximum Value: 10000
Units: EU/Tm
CP-201 ACL TM RUN
Acceleration Time Run (CP-201) is the time, in seconds, that it takes to accelerate from 0 to the Ref RUN Ramp
(CP-200), while operating in the Master, Follower or Custom Setpoint Equation modes.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1.000
Maximum Value: 3600
Units: Seconds
CP-202 ACL RT RUN
Acceleration Rate Run (CP-202) is the acceleration rate that is used (while in Run) for the Master, Follower and
Custom Setpoints when the magnitude of the Scaled Reference increases.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1000
Maximum Value: 9999999
Units: EU/Tm/sec
CP-203 DCL TM RUN
Deceleration Time Run (CP-203) is the time in seconds, that it takes to decelerate from Ref RUN Ramp (CP-200)
speed to 0, while operating in the Master, Follower or Custom Setpoint Equation modes.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1.000
Maximum Value: 3600
Units: Seconds
CP-204 DCL RT RUN
Deceleration Rate Run (CP-204) is the deceleration rate that is used (while in Run) for the Master, Follower and
Custom Setpoints when the magnitude of the Scaled Reference decreases.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1000
Maximum Value: 9999999
Units: EU/Tm/sec
(Continued)
C - 44
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-205 REF DRCT RMP
The acceleration rate for the Direct Mode is determined by the Reference Direct Ramp (CP-205) and the Accel Time
Direct (CP-206). The deceleration rate for the Direct Mode, as well as for H-Stop (while operating in the Direct Mode)
is determined by Decel Time Direct (CP-208) and Ref Dirct Rmp (CP-205).
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 10.0
Maximum Value: 15
Units: Volts
CP-206 ACL TM DRCT
Acceleration Time Direct (CP-206) is the time, in seconds, that it takes to accelerate from 0 to the Ref Direct Ramp
(CP-205) voltage, while operating in the Direct Mode.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1.000
Maximum Value: 3600
Units: Seconds
CP-208 DCL TM DRCT
Deceleration Time Direct (CP-208) is time, in seconds, that it takes to decelerate from the Ref DRCT Ramp (CP-205)
voltage to 0 volts, while operating in the Direct Mode.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1.000
Maximum Value: 3600
Units: Seconds
CP-210 REF STOP RMP
The deceleration rate that is used for R-Stop (Master Mode, Follower Mode or Custom Setpoint Mode), is determined
by the Dcl Tm RStp (CP-211) and the Reference Stop Ramp (CP-210). The deceleration rate that is used for H-Stop
(Master Mode, Follower Mode or Custom Setpoint Mode), is determined by the Dcl Tm HStp (CP-213) and the
Reference Stop Ramp (CP-210).
Minimum Value: 0.001
Default Value: 1000
Maximum Value: 10000
Units: Fb EU/Tm
CP-211 DCL TM RSTP
Deceleration Time R-Stop (CP-211) is the time, in seconds, that it takes to decelerate from the Ref STOP Ramp (CP210) speed to 0, during R-Stop, while operating in Jog, or the Master Mode, the Follower Mode or the Custom
Setpoint Equation Mode.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1.000
Maximum Value: 3600
Units: Seconds
CP-212 DCL RT RSTP
Deceleration Rate R-Stop (CP-212) is the deceleration rate that is used for R-Stop, while operating in Jog, or the
Master Mode, the Follower Mode or the Custom Setpoint Equation Mode.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1000
Maximum Value: 9999999
Units: EU/Tm/sec
(Continued)
C - 45
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-213 DEC TM HSTP
Deceleration Time H-Stop (CP-213) is the time, in seconds, that it takes to decelerate from the Ref StopRmp (CP-210)
speed to 0, during H-Stop, while operating in Jog, or the Master Mode, the Follower Mode or the Custom Setpoint
Equation Mode.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1.000
Maximum Value: 3600
Units: Seconds
CP-214 DCL RT HSTP
Deceleration Rate H-Stop (CP-214) is the deceleration rate that is used for H-Stop, while operating in Jog, or the
Master Mode, the Follower Mode or the Custom Setpoint Equation Mode.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1000
Maximum Value: 9999999
Units: EU/Tm/sec
CP-215 JOG SP
The Jog Setpoint (CP-215) is the speed, in EU/Tm, at which Jog ramps when it is activated. The Jog ramp rates are
referenced to this speed.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 250
Maximum Value: 10000
Units: EU/Tm
CP-216 ACL TM JOG
Acceleration Time Jog (CP-216) is the time, in seconds, that it takes to accelerate from 0 to the Jog SP (CP-215).
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1.000
Maximum Value: 3600
Units: Seconds
CP-217 ACL RT JOG
Acceleration Rate Jog (CP-217) is the rate, in EU/Tm per second, that it takes to accelerate when Jog is activated.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 250
Maximum Value: 9999999
Units: EU/Tm/sec
CP-218 DCL TM JOG
Deceleration Time Jog (CP-218) is the time, in seconds, that it takes to decelerate from Jog SP (CP-215) to 0, when the
Jog Input is deactivated or when switching between “Jog Fwd” and “Jog Rvs”.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1.000
Maximum Value: 3600
Units: Seconds
(Continued)
C - 46
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-219 DCL RT JOG
Deceleration Rate Jog (CP-219) is the rate, in EU/Tm per second, that is used when the Jog input is deactivated or
when switching between “Jog Fwd” and “Jog Rvs”.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 250
Maximum Value: 9999999
Units: EU/Tm/sec
CP-220 RUN LOOP MODE
RUN Loop Mode (CP-220) identifies the type of control loop (see list below) that is used during Run.
3=Position Loop
2=ZE Loop (Psn + Vel)
1=Velocity Loop *
0=Open Loop
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 3
Units: Coded
CP-221 JOG LOOP MODE
Jog Loop Mode (CP-221) identifies the type of control loop (see list below) that is used during Jog.
1=Velocity Loop *
0=Open Loop
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 1
Units: Coded
CP-222 DRIVE TYPE
Drive Type (CP-222) allows you to choose either the torque or the velocity type (see list below) for the drive so you
can give meaning to the CO_SIG. The velocity feedforward is disabled for the ”Torque Type” (2) drives.
2=Torque Type
1=Velocity Type *
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 2
Units: Coded
CP-224 KFF
Kff (CP-224) scales the velocity feedforward that is selected in Ff Source (CP-106) to the CO_SIG Analog Output (J3,
pin 1). Use Kff when operating in closed loop with velocity mode drives. You can either enter a value or you can have
the CX-1010 calculate a value for you. The CX-1010 will automatically calculate a value for Kff (CP-224) at periodic
intervals (which is based on KffAdjUpdt, CP-242), if you enable Kff Auto En (CP-244) when your system is in “Run”.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 5.0
Maximum Value: 9999999
Units: Volts/kiloEU/Tm
(Continued)
C - 47
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-225 KP VL
Kp Velocity Loop (CP-225) is the proportional gain constant for the PID velocity loop. An increase in Kp VL (CP-225)
creates a quicker response and a smaller error. However, a value that is too large will cause instability. If the integral
term is used, (i.e., Ki VL not equal to zero) then a nonzero Kp VL can actually improve the loop response and decrease
the overshoot to some extent.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 100
Maximum Value: 200
Units: Constant
CP-226 KI VL
Ki Velocity Loop (CP-226) is the Integral constant for the PID velocity loop. Integral action provides for zero steady
state error. Increase Ki VL (CP-226) for a faster convergence to zero error. However, a value that is too large will
cause instability.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 100
Maximum Value: 200
Units: Constant
CP-227 KD VL
Kd Velocity Loop (CP-227) is the derivative constant for the PID velocity loop. Derivative action attempts to damp out
overshoot. Its effect is highly dependent on Kp VL and Ki VL, but, generally, too large a value causes instability.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 200
Units: Constant
CP-228 DERIV THD VL
Derivative Threshold Velocity Loop (CP-228) is the minimum speed error that is required before the derivative term in
the PID velocity algorithm gains influence. Increase the derivative threshold to prevent the derivative term from acting
on signal noise from the lead.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 99999
Units: Constant
CP-229 KP ZE
Kp ZE (CP-229) is the proportional gain constant that is used for the zero error loop. Increase the value to reduce the
time that is required to converge to zero position error. A large value can cause instability.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 100
Maximum Value: 200
Units: Constant
(Continued)
C - 48
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-230 HSTP LOOPMODE
Use H-Stop Loopmode (CP-230) to select the control-loop type that will be used after coming to a stop in H-Stop.
3 = Position Loop
2 = Zero Error (ZE) Loop
1 = Velocity Mode Loop (default)
0 = Open Loop
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 2
Units: Coded
CP-233 MAX FB
Maximum Feedback (CP-233) and CO Max Volts (CP-181) are used to calculate a rough approximation for Kff (CP224). When a new Maximum Feedback (CP-233) value is entered, then Kff reflects a new value also .
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 2000
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: EU/Tm
CP-235 KP PL
KP PL (CP-235) is the proportional gain constant for the PID position loop. Increasing KP PL (CP-235) will have a
quicker the response and a smaller position error. However, a value that is too large could result in overshoot and
instability. You can eliminate most or all of the error in the position loop with the proportional term (KP PL). Use an
integral only if KP PL (CP-235) alone can not eliminate the error to your specification.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 100
Maximum Value: 200
Units: Constant
CP-236 KI PL
Ki PL (CP-236) is the integral constant for the PID position loop. Integral action provides for zero steady state error.
Increase Ki PL (CP-236) for a faster convergence to zero error. However, a value that is too large will cause instability.
Use Ki PL (CP-236) first to eliminate the error to your specification. If this produces unacceptable results, then
decrease KP PL (CP-235) and introduce the integral by gradually increasing Ki PL (CP-236).
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 200
Units: Constant
(Continued)
C - 49
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-237 KD PL
Kd PL (CP-237) is the derivative constant for the PID position loop. Derivative action damps out overshoots,
however, its effect is limited and is highly dependent on KP PL (CP- 235), Ki PL (CP- 236) and the given process
dynamics. A value that is too large can cause instability.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 200
Units: Constant
CP-238 DERIV THD PL
Derivative Threshold Position Loop (CP-238) is the minimum amount of position error that is needed for the derivative
term of the position loop. You can increase the value to prevent the derivative from acting on noise from the lead.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 100
Maximum Value: 9999
Units: Constant
CP-239 PPR MTR
PPR Mtr (CP-239) is the pulses per motor revolution for the FI2 signal. Use PPR Mtr to scale the PID parameters of
the position loop: Kp, PL, Ki PL, Kd PL and Kp ZE.
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 60
Maximum Value: 60000
Units: Pulses per Rev
CP-240 CNTRL LATCH
Control Latch (CP-240) allows you to set or "latch in" certain operating conditions that are specific to the CX-1010.
Enter "1" in the bit that corresponds to the control condition(s) that you want active (see graphic below). The
condition(s) will remain active till the bit is reset to 0. These requests are logically OR’d with the PLC bits that set the
same condition. In the sample below, "Open Loop" is active:
Stop Integral
Open Loop
Stop Ramp
Bypass Ramp
Not In Use
Not In Use
Not in Use
Negate Setpoint
Minimum Value: 00000000
Default Value: 00000000
Maximum Value: 10001111
Units: Coded
(Continued)
C - 50
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-241 LOOP UPDATE
Loop Update (CP-241) is the time interval between the CO_SIG output calculations. This interval sets the sampling
rate of the PID control loop.
3 = 100 Msec Update
2 = 10 Msec Update
1 = 1 Msec Update (default)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 3
Units: Coded
CP-242 KFFADJUPDT
Kff Adjust Update (CP-242) sets the sampling period for the Kff calculation when it is enabled. KffAdjUpdt (CP-242)
is the time interval between each new Kff calculation and the automatic store to the Kff parameters depending on
whether Kff Auto En (CP-244) is enabled.
5 = 10 Min Update
4 = 1 Min Update
3 = 10 Sec Update
2 = 1 Sec Update (default)
1 = 250 Msec Update
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 2
Maximum Value: 5
Units: Coded
CP-244 KFF AUTO EN
Kff Automatic Enable (CP-244) enables the CX-1010 automatic adjustment of Kff (CP-224) at the specified
KffAdjUpdt interval (CP-242) in RUN or JOG with the loop closed.
1 = ON = Enabled
0 = OFF = Disabled (default)
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value:
Maximum Value: 1
Units: Coded
(Continued)
C - 51
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-248 SIGNAL FLTR SEL
Signal Filter Select (CP-248) selects the signal to route through a low pass filter. The effect is visible on the speed
value.
4 = Analog In 2
3 = Frequency In 2
2 = Analog In 1
1 = Frequency In 1
0 = Not Used (default)
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 4
Units: Coded
CP-249 SIGNAL FLTR TAU
Signal Fltr Tau sets the time constant in milliseconds for the signal filter.
Minimum Value: 5
Default Value: 10
Maximum Value: 50
Units: Milliseconds
CP-250 MAX SPD LMT
The Scaled Reference (CP-41) is limited to the positive and negative Maximum Speed Limit (CP-250) while operating
in "Run".
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 2000
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: EU/Tm
CP-251 MIN SPD LMT
The Scaled Reference (CP-41) is limited to the positive and negative Minimum Speed Limit (CP-251) while operating
in "Run". The ramp accelerates to the Minimum Speed Limit (CP-251) if the reference speed is less than the
Minimum Speed Limit .
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: EU/Tm
(Continued)
C - 52
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-253 ZE LIMIT
ZE Limit (CP-253) is the maximum authority for the zero error term. The excess speed that is required to recover large
position errors is limited to this value. Enter the EU's that are required to recover the Time Base (CP-109).
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 2000
Maximum Value: 99999
CP-255 RAMP THD
When the difference between the Scaled Reference Speed (MP-41) and the Ramped Reference Speed (MP-42) is
greater than Ramp Threshold (CP-255), the ramp will work normally. When the difference between the Scaled
Reference Speed (MP-41) and the Ramped Reference Speed (MP-42) is less than or equal to Ramp Threshold (CP255), the ramp will be bypassed. This avoids ramp delays for small lead changes but still allows a ramp for large lead
or for large Master Setpoint changes.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 10.0
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: EU/Tm
CP-258 TRIM AUTHORITY
The trim contribution to the DAC output is limited to positive and negative Trim Authority (CP-258).
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 16383
Maximum Value: 32767
Units: Bits
CP-259 INTEGRAL LIMIT
The integral contribution to the trim term is limited to the positive and negative Integral Limit (CP-259). Integral Limit
(CP-259) can decrease the effects of integral windup or it can limit the maximum effect of the integral term.
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 16383
Maximum Value: 32767
Units: Bits
(Continued)
C - 53
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-260 PSNERR +
The maximum positive value of the accumulated position error is limited to Positive Position Error (CP-260). Use
Positive Position Error (CP-260) when the lead is in motion, but the follower is stopped since the follower does not
have to recover its former position relative to the lead, the Positive Position Error (CP-260) can be used to limit the
amount of position error that accumulates while the lead continues to move. In Positive Position Error (CP-260), the
follower lags behind the lead when both are moving in the positive direction.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 10000
Maximum Value: 10000000
Units: EU (FI2 position EU)
CP-261 PSNERRThe maximum negative value of the accumulated position error is limited to Negative Position Error (CP-261). In
Negative Position Error (CP-261), the follower is ahead of the lead when both are moving in the positive direction. If
both are moving in the negative direction in Negative Position Error (CP-261), the follower lags behind the lead.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 10000
Maximum Value: 10000000
Units: EU (FI2 position EU)
CP-262 PSN OFFSET
Add Position Offset (CP-262) to the PsnErr (MP-34) to offset the feedback position by the amount of EU’s that are
specified in Psn Offset (CP-262). The position loop or zero error loop must be active for the offset to occur.
Minimum Value: -8000000
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 8000000
Units: EU (FI2 position EU)
CP-266 FI1PSNPRST
When the RstFI1Pos bit (149) of the PLC is active (1) the value of FI1Position Prst (CP-266) is automatically inserted
into FI1Position (MP-05). If a transition preset is required, either create a one-shot with PLC logic or use a digital
input that is configured as a one-shot input by the DI 1 Shot (CP-302) mask.
Minimum Value: -99999999
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 99999999
Units: EU (FI1 position EU)
CP-267 FI2PSNPRST
When the RstFI2Pos bit (150) of the PLC is active (1) the value of FI2 Position Prst (CP-267) is automatically inserted
into FI2Position (MP-10). If a transition preset is required, either create a one-shot with PLC logic or use a digital
input that is configured as a one-shot input by the DI 1 Shot (CP-302) mask.
Minimum Value: -99999999
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 99999999
Units: EU (FI2 position EU)
(Continued)
C - 54
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-268 FI1PSNRO
When the FI1 position (MP-05) is equal to or greater than a positive FI1Position Roll Over (CP-268), or equal to or
less than a negative FI1Position Roll Over, then the FI1PsnRO bit (38) in the PLC is set to “1” (for 1 PLC scan or
one-shot). The FI1 position (MP-05) resets to 0 plus the difference between FI1 position and FI1PsnRO (the
difference is not discarded).
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 100000
Maximum Value: 99999999
Units: EU (FI1 position EU)
CP-269 FI2PSNRO
When the FI2 Position (MP-10) is equal to or greater than a positive FI2 Position Roll Over (CP-269), or equal to or
less than a negative FI2 Position Roll Over, then the FI2Psn RO bit (39) in the PLC is set to “1” (for 1 PLC scan or
one-shot). The FI2 Position (MP-10) resets to 0 plus the difference between FI2 position and FI2PsnRO (the difference
is not discarded).
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 100000
Maximum Value: 99999999
Units: EU (FI2 position EU)
CP-270 ZERO SPEED
When the magnitude of the Fb EU/Tm (MP-39) is less than or equal to Zero Speed (CP-270), the Fb @ 0Spd bit (44)
in the PLC is set to “1”. This value, as well as the PLC Fb @ 0Spd bit condition, is used in other transparent internal
calculations that are based on feedback information.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1.00
Maximum Value: 100000
Units: EU/Tm
CP-271 MAX FB ALM
Maximum Feedback Alarm (CP-271) signals an over-speed condition. When the magnitude of the Fb EU/Tm (MP-39)
is greater than or equal to Maximum Feedback Alarm (CP-271), then the MaxFb Spd bit (48) in the PLC is set to “1”.
You can output this alarm for indication or action, or you can use the alarm logically in the PLC.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 10000
Maximum Value: 999999
Units: EU/Tm
CP-272 MAX ACL/DCL
When either the feedback acceleration or the deceleration is greater than or equal to Max Acl/Dcl (CP-272), then the
MacAclDcl bit (49) in the PLC is set to “1” . You can output this alarm for indication or action, or you can use the
alarm logically in the PLC.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 10000
Maximum Value: 9999999
Units: EU/Tm/sec
(Continued)
C - 55
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-273 NO RESP TIME
When the CO Signal output signal is greater than 1/16 Co Max Volts (CP-181) and the Fb EU/Tm (MP-39) is less than
Zero Spd (CP-270) for longer than the No Resp Time (CP-273), then the MtrNResp bit (50) is set to “1”. If this
scenario occurs, it is generally an indication that the feedback has been lost. It can also indicate that the drive is not
enabled (or faulted out), that the CO_SIG Output signal is not getting to the drive or that there may be a physical
obstruction preventing motion.
Minimum Value: 0.010
Default Value: 1.000
Maximum Value: 600
Units: Seconds
CP-274 MAX FI2 PSN
Maximum FI2 Position (CP-274) signals an over-travel condition. When the FI2 Position (MP-10) is greater than or
equal to a positive Max FI2 Psn (CP-274) or less than or equal to a negative Max FI2 Psn, then the MaxFI2Psn bit
(51) in the PLC is set to “1” .
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 100000
Maximum Value: 99999999
Units: EU
CP-278 STD ALM MSK
The Standard Alarm Mask (CP-278) allows you to mask out specific alarms so that they will not cause the ‘Alm’
indicator to flash (in the lower left-hand corner of the CX-1010 screen) by entering a “0” in the corresponding bit
position (see figure below). You can also activate any of these alarm conditions by entering a “1” in the corresponding
bit position.
Max FB ALm
Max ACC/DEC
No Resp Time
Max FI2 Pos
Low Pwr Alm
Max FI1 Hz
Max FI2 Hz
At Max CO_Sig
Minimum Value: 00000000
Default Value: 00000000
Maximum Value: 11111111
Units: Coded
(Continued)
C - 56
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-279 CUSTALM MSK
Custom Alarm Mask (CP-279) allows you to mask out the compare results so that they will not cause the ‘Alm’
indicator to flash (in the lower left-hand corner of the CX-1010 screen) by entering a “0” in the corresponding bit
position (see figure below). You can also activate any of these compare conditions by entering a “1” in the
corresponding bit position.
Cmpr1 Out
Cmpr2 Out
Cmpr3 Out
Cmpr4 Out
Cmpr1 Out (Not)
Cmpr2 Out (Not)
Cmpr3 Out (Not)
Cmpr4 Out (Not)
Minimum Value: 00000000
Default Value: 00000000
Maximum Value: 11111111
Units: Coded
CP-280 CMPR1 PARM
Enter a Monitor Parameter code in Compare 1 Parameter (CP-280) that will act on the value in Cmpr1 Val (CP-292), by
using the comparison type that you entered in Cmp1 Type (CP-286). If the comparison that is established by these
three parameters is “true”, then the PLC sets the Cmpr1 Out bit (56) in the PLC to “1”, which can be used to trigger a
user defined indicator.
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 39 (Fb EU/Tm)
Maximum Value: 85
Units: Parameter Code
NOTE: The following Monitor Parameters are not available for the Compare1 Parameter (CP-280), Compare 2
Parameter (CP-281), Compare 3 Parameter (CP-282) or Compare 4 Parameter (CP-283):
MP-17 ..... AnlgCal Ref A
MP-18 ..... AnlgCal Ref B
MP-22 ........ CO Max Bits
MP-23 ... CO DAC Range
MP-29 .. KeyPad Lockout
MP-30 .......... ScParm Val
MP-38 ............ Ld EU/Tm
MP-40 ............. Scaled Fb
MP-45 ........... Cntrl Loop
MP-49 ............ EstMaxFb
MP-52 .......... InvalidBlks
MP-53 .......... Misc Status
MP-54 ........... Std Alarms
MP-55 ....... Custom Alms
MP-58 .... PLC Mon 1 Val
(Continued)
C - 57
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
MP-59 .... PLC Mon 2 Val
MP-60 .......... PLC 15- 8
MP-61 ......... PLC 23- 16
MP-62 ......... PLC 31- 24
MP-63 ......... PLC 39- 32
MP-64 ......... PLC 47- 40
MP-65 ......... PLC 55- 48
MP-66 ......... PLC 63- 56
MP-67 ......... PLC 71- 64
MP-68 ......... PLC 79- 72
MP-69 ......... PLC 87- 80
MP-70 ......... PLC 95- 88
MP-71 ....... PLC 107-100
MP-72 ....... PLC 115-108
MP-73 ....... PLC 123-116
MP-74 ....... PLC 131-124
MP-75 ....... PLC 139-132
MP-76 ....... PLC 147-140
MP-77 ....... PLC 155-148
MP-78 ....... PLC 163-156
MP-79 ....... PLC 171-164
MP-80 ............ Last Reset
MP-81 .......... Misc Intrpts
MP-82 ........ Device Alms
MP-83 .......... PC at Intrpt
CP-281 CMPR2 PARM
Enter a Monitor Parameter code in Compare 2 Parameter (CP-281) that will act on the value in Cmpr2 Val (CP-293), by
using the comparison type that you entered in Cmp2 Type (CP-287). If the comparison that is established by these three
parameters is “true”, then the PLC sets the Cmpr2 Out bit (57) in the PLC to “1”, which can be used to trigger a user
defined indicator.
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 39 (Fb EU/Tm)
Maximum Value: 85
Units: Parameter Code
NOTE: Refer to the "NOTE" in CP-280.
(Continued)
C - 58
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-282 CMPR3 PARM
Enter a Monitor Parameter in Compare 3 Parameter (CP-282) that will act on the value in Cmpr3 Val (CP-294), by
using the comparison type that you entered in Cmp3 Type (CP-288). If the comparison that is established by these
three parameters is “true”, then the PLC sets the Cmpr3 Out bit (58) in the PLC to “1” , which can be used to trigger a
user defined indicator.
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 44 (RR Error)
Maximum Value: 85
Units: Parameter Code
NOTE: Refer to the "NOTE" in CP-280.
CP-283 CMPR4 PARM
Enter a Monitor Parameter in Compare 4 Parameter (CP-282) that will act on the value in Cmpr4 Val (CP-295), by
using the comparison type that you entered in Cmpr4 Type (CP-289). If the comparison that is established by these
three parameters is “true”, then the PLC sets the Cmpr4 Out bit (59) in the PLC Programming screen to “1”, which
can be used to trigger a user defined indicator.
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 43 (SR Error)
Maximum Value: 85
Units: Parameter Code
NOTE: Refer to the "NOTE" in CP-280.
CP-286 CMPR1 TYPE
Use Cmpr1 Type (CP-286) to establish the type of comparison (see list below) that will compare the Monitor
Parameter that you entered in Cmpr1 Parm (CP-280) to the value that you entered in Cmpr1 Val (CP-292). If you
require a comparison that is not listed, then set the Cmpr1 Out bit in the PLC to “Ld Not”. This programs the
comparison type to become a “Not” statement For example, to program “Magnitude Less Than” (<) use “NOT”
Magnitude greater than or equal to (>=).
6 = ‘mag =’
if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr1 Parm = Cmpr1 Val, Cmpr1 Out = 1
5 = ‘mag >=’ if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr1 Parm >= Cmpr1 Val, Cmpr1 Out = 1
4 = ‘mag >’
if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr1 Parm > Cmpr1 Val, Cmpr1 Out = 1
3 = ‘=’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr1 Parm = Cmpr1 Val, Cmpr1 Out = 1
2 = ‘>=’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr1 Parm >= Cmpr1 Val, Cmpr1 Out = 1
1 = ‘>’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr1 Parm > Cmpr1 Val, Cmpr1 Out = 1
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 4
Maximum Value: 6
Units: Coded
(Continued)
C - 59
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-287 CMPR2 TYPE
Use Cmpr2 Type (CP-287) to establish the type of comparison (see list below) that will compare the Monitor
Parameter that you entered in Cmpr2 Parm, (CP-281) to the value that you entered in Cmpr2 Val (CP-293). If you
require a comparison that is not listed, then set the Cmpr2 Out bit in the PLC to “Ld Not”. This programs the
comparison type to become a “Not” statement For example, to program “Magnitude Less Than ” (<) use “NOT ”
Magnitude greater than or equal to (>=).
6 = ‘mag =’
if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr2 Parm) = Cmpr2 Val, Cmpr2 Out = 1
5 = ‘mag >=’ if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr2 Parm) >= Cmpr2 Val, Cmpr2 Out = 1
4 = ‘mag >’
if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr2 Parm) > Cmpr2 Val, Cmpr2 Out = 1
3 = ‘=’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr2 Parm) = Cmpr2 Val, Cmpr2 Out = 1
2 = ‘>=’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr2 Parm) >= Cmpr2 Val, Cmpr2 Out = 1
1 = ‘>’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr2 Parm) > Cmpr2 Val, Cmpr2 Out = 1
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 5
Maximum Value: 6
Units: Coded
CP-288 CMPR3 TYPE
Use Cmpr3 Type (CP-288) to establish the type of comparison (see list below) that will compare the Monitor
Parameter that you entered in Cmpr3 Parm (CP-282) to the value that you entered in Cmpr3 Val (CP-294). If you
require a comparison that is not listed, then set the Cmpr3 Out bit in the PLC to “Ld Not”. This programs the
comparison type to become a “Not” statement For example, to program “Magnitude Less Than” (<) use “NOT”
Magnitude greater than or equal to(>=).
6 = ‘mag =’
if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr3 Parm) = Cmpr3 Val, Cmpr3 Out = 1
5 = ‘mag >=’ if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr3 Parm) >= Cmpr3 Val, Cmpr3 Out = 1
4 = ‘mag >’
if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr3 Parm) > Cmpr3 Val, Cmpr3 Out = 1
3 = ‘=’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr3 Parm) = Cmpr3 Val, Cmpr3 Out = 1
2 = ‘>=’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr3 Parm) >= Cmpr3 Val, Cmpr3 Out = 1
1 = ‘>’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr3 Parm) > Cmpr3 Val, Cmpr3 Out = 1
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 4
Maximum Value: 6
Units: Coded
CP-289 CMPR4 TYPE
Use Cmpr4 ype (CP-288) to establish the type of comparison (see list below) that will compare the Monitor Parameter
that you entered in Cmpr4 Parm (CP-283) to the value that you entered in Cmpr4 Val (CP-295). If you require a
comparison that is not listed, then set the Cmpr4 Out bit in the PLC to “Ld Not”. This programs the comparison type
to become a “Not” statement For example, to program “Magnitude Less Then ” (<) use “NOT ” Magnitude greater
than or equal to (>=).
6 = ‘mag =’
if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr4 Parm) = Cmpr4 Val, Cmpr4 Out = 1
5 = ‘mag >=’ if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr4 Parm) >= Cmpr4 Val, Cmpr4 Out = 1
4 = ‘mag >’
if Magnitude of parm selected by Cmpr4 Parm) > Cmpr4 Val, Cmpr4 Out = 1
3 = ‘=’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr4 Parm) = Cmpr4 Val, Cmpr4 Out = 1
2 = ‘>=’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr4 Parm) >= Cmpr4 Val, Cmpr4 Out = 1
1 = ‘>’
if value of parm selected by Cmpr4 Parm) > Cmpr4 Val, Cmpr4 Out = 1
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 4
Maximum Value: 6
Units: Coded
(Continued)
C - 60
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-292 CMPR1 VAL
Enter a value in Cmpr1 Val (CP-292) that will be compared to the Monitor Parameter in Cmpr1 Parm (CP-280), using
the comparison type that you entered in Cmpr1 Type (CP-286). If the comparison that is established by these three
parameters is “true”, then the PLC sets the Cmpr1 Out bit (56) in the PLC to “1” .
Minimum Value: -9999999
Default Value: 2000
Maximum Value: 9999999
Units: same as the selected MP
CP-293 CMPR2 VAL
Enter a value in Cmpr2 Val (CP-293) that will compared to the Monitor Parameter in Cmpr2 Parm (CP-281), using the
comparison type that you entered in Cmpr2 Type (CP-287). If the comparison that is established by these three
parameters is “true”, then the PLC sets the Cmpr2 Out bit (57) in the PLC screen to “1”.
Minimum Value: -9999999
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 9999999
Units: same as the selected MP
CP-294 CMPR3 VAL
Enter a value in Cmpr3 Val (CP-294) that will be compared to the Monitor Parameter in Cmpr3 Parm (CP-282), using
the comparison type that you entered in Cmpr3 Type (CP-288). If the comparison that is established by these three
parameters is “true”, then the PLC sets the Cmpr3 Out bit (58) in the PLC to “1”.
Minimum Value: -9999999
Default Value: 10
Maximum Value: 9999999
Units: same as the selected MP
CP-295 CMPR4 VAL
Enter a value in Cmpr4 Val (CP-295) that will be compared to the Monitor Parameter in Cmpr4 Parm (CP-283), using
the boundary type that you entered in Cmpr4 Type (CP-289). If the comparison that is established by these three
parameters is “true”, then the PLC sets the Cmpr4 Out bit (59) in the PLC to “1” .
Minimum Value: -9999999
Default Value: 5
Maximum Value: 9999999
Units: same as the selected Monitor Parameter
CP-296 COPY SOURCE 1
Copy Source 1 (CP-296) identifies the CP or MP whose value is copied to Copy Dest 1 when a 0 to 1 transition occurs
in the DataCopy 1 PLC bit.
CP-297 COPY DEST 1
Copy Dest 1 (CP-297) identifies the CP that takes on the value of the CP or MP identified by Copy Source 1 when a 0
to 1 transition occurs in the DataCopy 1 PLC bit.
(Continued)
C - 61
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-298 COPY SOURCE 2
Copy Source 2 (CP-298) identifies the CP or MP whose value is copied to Copy Dest 2 when a 0 to 1 transition occurs
in the DataCopy 2 PLC bit.
CP-299 COPY DEST 2
Copy Dest 2 (CP-299) identifies the CP that takes on the value of the CP or MP identified by Copy Source 2 when a 0
to 1 transition occurs in the DataCopy 2 PLC bit.
CP-300 REMOTE SCROLL
In Remote Scroll (CP-300), enter the number of the Control Parameter that you want the Remote Scroll Up PLC Bit
(168) or the Remote Scroll Dn PLC bit (169) to increment or decrement by 1 least significant digit, at the Scroll Rate
(CP-301). To disable the function, set Remote Scroll (CP-300) to “0” .
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 101
Maximum Value: 349
Units: Parameter Code
CP-301 RMT SCROLL RATE
Remote Scroll Rate (CP-301) is the number of times per second, that the Control Parameter that you entered in
Remote Scroll (CP-300) is either incremented or decremented by 1 least significant digit , when the Remote Scroll Up
PLC Bit (168) or the Remote Scroll Dn PLC bit (169) is active.
Minimum Value: 1
Units: Increments/Decrements
Maximum Value: 100
(Continued)
C - 62
Default Value: 10
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-302 DI 1 SHOT
Use the Digital Input 1 Shot (CP-302) to create a one scan pulse (one-shot) as the result of a high-to-low (open-toclosed) transition on any or all of the PLC dedicated inputs. To generate a 1- scan pulse for an inactive high to an
active low transition, enter a “1” in the bit location of corresponding digital input. In the example below, the “1”
has been entered in digital input 9.
Digital Input 8
Digital Input 9
Digital Input 10
Digital Input 11
Digital Input 12
Digital Input 13
Digital Input 14
Digital Input 15
Minimum Value: 00000000
Default Value: 00000000
Maximum Value: 11111111
Units: Coded
CP-303 DI SET
Digital Input Set (CP-303) simulates an “ACTIVE” condition on any or all of the PLC dedicated Digital Inputs (DI
15-8). Digital Input Set (CP-303) is logically OR’ed with the actual DI 15..8 (MP-27) bits to form the PLC 15- 8
(MP-60) bits. The PLC 15- 8 (MP-60) bits are used by the PLC logic. The value of DI Set (CP-303) will not effect
the actual DI 15..8 (MP-27) value, rather, DI 15..8 (MP-27) reflects the present status of the actual inputs. Enter a “1”
in a bit location to simulate an active condition on the corresponding input. DI..15 to DI..8 get mapped into Bit 7 to
Bit 0. Refer to the graphic below.
DI-8/Block Select A
DI-9/Block Select B
DI-10/Block Select C
DI-11/Negate Setpoint
DI-12/Inc Batch Cntr 1
DI-13/Batch RST Cntr1
DI-14/Rmt Scroll Up
DI-15/Rmt Scroll Down
Minimum Value: 00000000
Default Value: 00000000
Maximum Value: 11111111
Units: Coded
(Continued)
C - 63
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-305 PLC MONITOR 1
PLC Monitor 1 (CP-305) determines which PLC bit will be monitored in PLC Mon 1 Val (MP-58). The PLC Mon 1
Val (MP-58) displays the name of the bit rather than “PLC Mon 1 Val”. To select a PLC bit to monitor, enter the
number of the bit or by use the Scroll keys (^ or v) to scroll through the list. This bit can be monitored in any screen
when the code select line set to PLC Mon 1 Val (MP-58).
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Bits
Maximum Value: 171
Default Value: 8
CP-306 PLC MONITOR 2
PLC Monitor 2 (CP-306) determines which PLC bit will be monitored in PLC Mon 2 Val (MP-59). The PLC Mon 2
Val (MP-59) displays the name of the bit rather than “PLC Mon 2 Val”. To select a PLC bit to monitor, enter the
number of the bit or by use the Scroll keys (^ or v) to scroll through the list. This bit can be monitored in any screen
when the code select line set to PLC Mon 2 Val (CP-590).
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Bits
Maximum Value: 171
Default Value: 8
CP-307 PLC BIT SET
PLC Bit Set (CP-307) forces a PLC bit to be set to “1”. Enter the number of the bit that you want to set to “1”. PLC
Bit Set (CP-307) tests your PLC program rather than commanding a direct operation. The bit is set prior to the PLC
program execution but after all the inputs, comparisons, timers and counters have had their status bits set up.
However, the PLC could clear this bit and unpredictable results can occur. Do not attempt to set a PLC bit that is
controlled by an OUT instruction in the PLC program. If you need to force an output, use Diag DO in the diagnostics
screen.
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Bits
Maximum Value: 171
Default Value: 3
CP-308 PLC BIT CLEAR
PLC Bit Clear (CP-308) forces a PLC bit to be reset to “0”. Enter the number of the bit that you want to clear. PLC
Bit Clear (CP-308) tests your PLC program rather than commanding a direct operation. The bit is cleared prior to the
PLC program execution but after all the inputs, comparisons, timers and counters have set up their status bits.
However, the PLC could set this bit and unpredictable results can occur. Do not attempt to clear a PLC bit that is
controlled by an OUT instruction in the PLC program. If you need to force an output, use Diag DO in the DIG I/O
Test diagnostics screen.
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Bits
Maximum Value: 171
Default Value: 2
CP-310 TMR1 DELAY
Timer 1 Delay (CP-310) is the time, in seconds, from which Timer 1 becomes enabled (Tmr1 En bit going from 0 to 1)
until the Tmr1 Out bit (24) in the PLC is activated = 1. When the Tmr1 En bit (124) returns to “0”, the Tmr1 Out bit
(24) is reset to “0” and the delay-time is reset to “0”.
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Seconds
Maximum Value: 86400
(Continued)
C - 64
Default Value: 1.000
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-311 TMR1 ON TM
Timer 1 on Time (CP-311) is the time, in seconds, from which Tmr 1 Out is activated (= 1) until Tmr1 Out is
deactivated (back to 0). When the Tmr1 En bit (124) returns to “0”, the Tmr1 Out bit (24) is reset = 0 and the on- time
is reset to “0”. If you want Timer 1 on-time to be infinite (“On” until Tmr1 is disabled with Tmr1 En = 0), then enter a
value of -1 into Tmr1 on Tm (CP-311).
Minimum Value: -1
Default Value: -1
Maximum Value: 86400
Units: Seconds
CP-312 TMR2 DELAY
Timer 2 Delay (CP-312) is the time in seconds from which Timer 2 becomes enabled (Tmr2 En bit going from 0 to 1)
until the Tmr2 Out bit (25) in the PLC activated = 1. When the Tmr2 En bit (125) returns to “0”, the Tmr2 Out bit (25)
is reset to “0” and the delay-time is reset to “0”.
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Seconds
Maximum Value: 86400
Default Value: 1.000
CP-313 TMR2 ON TM
Timer 2 on Time (CP-313) is the time, in seconds, from which Tmr 2 Out is activated (= 1) until Tmr2 Out is deactivated (back to 0). When the Tmr2 En bit (125) returns to “0”, the Tmr2 Out bit (25) is reset = 0 and the on- time is
reset to “0”. If you want Tmr2 on-time to be infinite (“On” until Tmr2 is disabled with Tmr2 En = 0), then enter a
value of -1 into Tmr2 on Tm (CP-313).
Minimum Value: -1
Default Value: -1
Maximum Value: 86400
Units: Seconds
CP-314 TMR3 DELAY
Timer 3 Delay (CP-314) is the time, in seconds, from which Timer 3 becomes enabled (Tmr3 En bit going from 0 to 1)
until the Tmr3 Out bit (26) in the PLC is activated = 1. When the Tmr3 En bit (126) returns to “0”, the Tmr3 Out bit
(26) is reset to “0” and the delay-time is reset to “0”.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1.000
Maximum Value: 86400
Units: Seconds
CP-315 TMR3 ON TM
Timer 3 on Time (CP-315) is the time, in seconds, from which Tmr3 Out is activated (= 1) until Tmr3 Out is
deactivated (back to 0). When the Tmr3 En bit (126) returns to “0”, the Tmr3 Out bit (24) is reset = 0 and the on- time
is reset to “0”. If you want Timer 3 on-time to be infinite (“On” until Tmr3 is disabled with Tmr3 En = 0), then enter a
value of -1 into Timer 3 on Time (CP-315).
Minimum Value: -1
Default Value: -1
Maximum Value: 86400
Units: Seconds
(Continued)
C - 65
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-316 TMR4 DELAY
Timer 4 Delay (CP-316) is the time, in seconds, from Timer 4 becoming enabled (Tmr4 En bit going from “0” to “1”)
toTmr4 Out bit (27) in the PLC going active = 1. If Tmr4 becomes disabled, the delay-time is retained so the timing
can continue when Tmr4 is re-enabled. The Tmr4Rst bit (128) in the PLC must be used to reset the delay time to “0”.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1.000
Maximum Value: 86400
Units: Seconds
CP-317 TMR4 ON TM
Timer 4 on Tm (CP-317) is the time, in seconds, from Tmr4 Out going active (= 1) until Tmr4 Out going inactive (back
to “0”). When Tmr4 becomes disabled, the on-time is retained so the timing can continue when Tmr4 is re-enabled.
The Tmr4 Rst bit (128) in the PLC must be used to reset the on-time to “0”. If you want Tmr4 on-time to be infinite
(“On” until Tmr4 is reset with Tmr4 Rst = 1), then enter a value of “-1” in Tmr4 on Tm (CP-317).
Minimum Value: -1
Default Value: -1
Maximum Value: 86400
Units: Seconds
CP-320 CNTR1 TRIG
When the Counter 1 Count (CP-321) is greater than or equal to Counter 1 Trigger (CP-320), then the Cntr1 Out bit
(32) in the PLC is set to “1”. If the count is less than Counter 1 Trigger, then Cntr1 Out bit (32) will be “0”.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 10
Maximum Value: 10000000
Units: Counts
CP-321 CNTR1 CNT
Counter 1 Count (CP-321) is the current count for “Counter 1”. The CX-1010 automatically increments it one count
for every “0” to “1” transition of the Cntr1 Inc bit (130). Counter 1 Count is the default batch counter. Either use the
Scroll keys or enter a new number to change this value. When the PLC program sets Cntr1 Rst bit (135) to “1”, then
the Counter 1 Count (CP-321) resets to “0” .
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 10000000
Units: Counts
CP-322 CNTR2 TRIG
When the Counter 2 Count (CP-323) is greater than or equal to Counter 2 Trigger (CP-322), then the Cntr2 Out bit
(33) in the PLC is set to “1”. If the count is less than, the Counter 2 Trigger, the Cntr2 Out bit (33) will be “0”.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 10
Maximum Value: 10000000
Units: Counts
CP-323 CNTR2 CNT
Counter 2 Count (CP-323) is the current count for “Counter 2”. The CX-1010 automatically increments it one count
for every “0” to “1” transition of the Cntr2 Inc bit (131). Either use the Scroll keys or enter a new number to change
this value. When the PLC program sets Cntr2 Rst bit (136) to “1”, then the Counter 2 Count (CP-323) resets to “0” .
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 10000000
Units: Counts
(Continued)
C - 66
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-324 CNTR3 TRIG
When the Counter 3 Count (CP-325) is greater than or equal to Counter 3 Trigger (CP-324), then the Cntr3 Out bit
(34) in the PLC is set to “1”. If the count is less than, the Counter 3 Trigger, the Cntr3 Out bit (34) will be “0”.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 10
Maximum Value: 10000000
Units: Counts
CP-325 CNTR3 CNT
Counter 3 Count (CP-325) is the current count for “Counter 3”. The CX-1010 automatically increments it one count
for every “0” to “1” transition of the Cntr3 Inc bit (132). Either use the Scroll keys or enter a new number to change
this value. When the PLC program sets Cntr3 Rst bit (137) to “1”, then the Counter 3 Count (CP-325) resets to “0” .
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 10000000
Units: Counts
CP-326 CNTR4TRIGUP
When Counter 4 Count (CP-327) is greater than or equal to Counter 4 Trigger Up (CP-326), then the Cntr4 UpOut bit
(35) in the PLC is set to “1”. If the count is less than, the Counter 4 Trigger Up, the Cntr4UpO bit (35) will be “0”.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 10
Maximum Value: 10000000
Units: Counts
CP-327 CNTR4CNT
Counter 4 Count (CP-327) is the current count for “Counter 4”. The CX-1010 automatically increments it one count for
every “0” to “1” transition of the Cntr4 Inc bit (133). The CX-1010 automatically decrements it one count for every
“0” to “1” transition of the Cntr Dec bit (134). Either use the Scroll keys or enter a new number to change this value.
When the PLC program sets Cntr4 Rst bit (138) to “1”, then the Counter 4 Count (CP-327) resets to the value of
CNTR4PRESET, CP-329.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 10000000
Units: Counts
CP-328 CNTR4TRIGDN
When Counter 4 Count (CP-327) is less than or equal to Counter 4 Trigger Down (CP-328), then the Cntr4DnO bit
(36) in the PLC is set to “1”. If the count is less than, the Counter 4 Trigger Down, the Cntr4 DnO bit (36) will be “0”.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 10000000
Units: Counts
CP-329 CNTR4PRESET
When the Cntr4 Rst bit in the PLC Programming screen is set to “ 1”, then Cntr4 Cnt (CP-227) is set to and held at the
Counter 4 Preset (CP-329) value. If you need a transition preset , then create a one-shot or, when possible, use the DI
1 Shot (CP-302) mask.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 10000000
Units: Counts
(Continued)
C - 67
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-330 DN WRITE PARM 1
Enter the number of a Control Parameter to be written to with the DeviceNet poll command in the I/O Assembly
Queue.
CP-331 DN WRITE PARM 2
Enter the number of a Control Parameter to be written to with the DeviceNet poll command in the I/O Assembly
Queue.
CP-332 DN WRITE PARM 3
Enter the number of a Control Parameter to be written to with the DeviceNet poll command in the I/O Assembly
Queue.
CP-333 DN WRITE PARM 4
Enter the number of a Control Parameter to be written to with the DeviceNet poll command in the I/O Assembly
Queue.
CP-334 DN READ PARM 1
Enter the number of a Control Parameter or Monitor Parameter to be read with the DeviceNet poll command in the I/O
Assembly Queue.
CP-335 DN READ PARM 2
Enter the number of a Control Parameter or Monitor Parameter to be read with the DeviceNet poll command in the I/O
Assembly Queue.
CP-336 DN READ PARM 3
Enter the number of a Control Parameter or Monitor Parameter to be read with the DeviceNet poll command in the I/O
Assembly Queue.
CP-337 DN READ PARM 4
Enter the number of a Control Parameter or Monitor Parameter to be read with the DeviceNet poll Command in the I/O
Assembly Queue.
(Continued)
C - 68
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-340 LG NUMBER PARM
Use Large Number Parameter (CP-340) to select the parameter that displays in the large number display in the Status
screen (refer to the status screen in Operation: Screen Operation). You can also use the Code key to access and change
CP-340 in the Status screen.
Minimum Value: 1
Units: Parameter Code
Maximum Value: 567 (restricted)
Default Value: 40
CP-341 STATUS LINE 1
Use Status Line 1 (CP-341) to select the parameter that displays on the first line (under the Large Number Display) of
the Status screen (refer to the status screen in Operation: Screen Operation). You can also use the Code key to access
and change CP-341 in the Status screen.
Minimum Value: 1
Units: Parameter Code
Maximum Value: 567
Default Value: 101
CP-342 STATUS LINE 2
Use Status Line 2 (CP-342) to select the parameter that displays on the second line (under the Large Number Display)
of the Status screen (refer to the status screen in Operation: Screen Operation). If you want this line to remain blank,
enter a “0” in CP-342. You can also use the Code key to access and change CP-342 in the Status screen.
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Parameter Code
Maximum Value: 567
Default Value: 39
CP-343 STATUS LINE 3
Use Status Line 3 (CP-343) to select the parameter that displays on the third line (under the Large Number Display) of
the Status screen (refer to the status screen in Operation: Screen Operation). If you want this line to remain blank,
enter a “0” in CP- 343. You can also use the Code key to access and change CP-343 in the Status screen.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 50
Maximum Value: 567
Units: Parameter Code
CP-344 STATUS LINE 4
Use Status Line 4 (CP-344) to select the parameter that displays on the fourth line (under the Large Number Display) of
the Status screen (refer to the status screen in Operation: Screen Operation). If you want this line to remain blank,
enter a “0” in CP-344. You can also use the Code key to access and change CP-344 in the Status screen.
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Parameter Code
Maximum Value: 567
Default Value: 51
CP-345 STATUS LINE 5
Use Status Line 5 (CP-345) to select the parameter that displays on the fifth line (under the Large Number Display) of
the Status screen (refer to the status screen in Operation: Screen Operation). If you want this line to remain blank,
enter a “0” in CP-345. You can also use the Code key to access and change CP-345 in the Status screen.
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Parameter Code
Maximum Value: 567
Default Value: 53
(Continued)
C - 69
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-346 STATUS LINE 6
Use Status Line 6 (CP-346) to select the parameter that displays sixth line (under the Large Number Display) of the
Status screen (refer to the status screen in Operation: Screen Operation). If you want this line to remain blank, enter a
“0” in CP-346. You can also use the Code key to access and change CP-346 in the Status screen.
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Parameter Code
Maximum Value: 567
Default Value: 54
CP-350 DIAGNOSTICS EN
When Diagnostics Enable (CP-350) is set to “1” (On or enabled), the digital inputs will not recognize their normal
function and the digital outputs can be controlled by Diag DO (CP-352). In addition, the CO_SIG analog output can be
tested. When you enter diagnostics, Diag DO (CP-352) is forced equal to the current DO 7..0 (MP-28) so that there is
no unexpected change in the outputs. Change the outputs through Diag DO (CP-352) while performing the diagnostics.
Warning: The actuator may energize if you change Diag DO (CP-352). Stand clear of the system.
1 = ON = Enabled
0 = OFF (default)
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 1
Units: Coded
CP-352 DIAG DO
Diagnostic Digital Out (CP-352) controls the digital outputs when Diagnostics En (CP-350) is set to “1” (On or
enabled) during diagnostics. It is an 8 Bit Binary number with 1 bit per output. If the bit is a “1”, then the
corresponding output is pulled “low”. When you enter diagnostics, Diag DO (CP-352) is forced equal to the current
DO 7 ..0 (MP-28) so that there is no unexpected change in the outputs. Change the outputs through Diag DO (CP-352)
while performing the diagnostics.
Warning: The actuator may energize if you change Diag DO (CP-352). Stand clear of the system.
DO-0/Zero Speed
DO-1/Hi Speed Alarm
DO-2/Lo Speed Alarm
DO-3/Rmp Ref Dev Error
DO-4/Scl Ref Dev Error
DI-5/Batch Done Cnt1
DO-6/CO-Sig Sign
D-7/Drive Enable
Minimum Value: 00000000
Default Value: 00000000
Maximum Value: 11111111
Units: Coded
(Continued)
C - 70
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-353 DIAG DAC TEST
Diagnostic DAC Test (CP-353) selects and enables the type of output control that is used for the diagnostic CO_SIG
DAC test.
4 = High Frequency Oscillation Output
3 = Continuous Ramp
2 = Ramp to DAC & Hold
1 = Immediate Output
0 = Disabled (default)
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 4
Units: Coded
CP-354 DIAG DAC VOLTS
Diagnostic DAC Volts (CP-354) is the maximum voltage output (either positive or negative) at the CO_SIG DAC
during a non zero diagnostic DAC test . The voltage corresponds to Diag DAC Bits (CP-355).
Minimum Value: -15
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 15
Units: Volts
CP-355 DIAG DAC BITS
Diagnostic DAC Bits (CP-355) is the maximum value in bits written (either positive or negative) to the CO_SIG DAC
during a non zero diagnostic DAC test (CP-353) and when Diagnostics En (CP-350) is set to “1” (On or enabled).
The value corresponds to Diag DAC Volts (CP-354).
Minimum Value: -32768
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 32767
Units: Bits
CP-356 DIAG RMP TM
Diagnostic Ramp Time (CP-356) is the time, in seconds, from 0 volts to either positive or negative Diag DAC Volts
(CP-354) during a diagnostic DAC test with a ramp.
Minimum Value: 0
Units: Seconds
Maximum Value: 600
Default Value: 10.000
CP-360 ANALOG CAL EN
Analog Calibration Enable (CP-356) enables the calibration process for the auxiliary analog board. When Analog
Calibration En (CP-360) is set to “1” (On), the signal that is selected in Analog Cal Select (CP-361) will be calibrated.
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled (default)
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 1
Units: Coded
(Continued)
C - 71
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-361 ANALOG CAL SEL
Analog Calibration Select (CP-361) selects the signal (AI1, AI2, AO) on the auxiliary analog board for calibration.
3 = Analog Out
2 = Analog In 2
1 = Analog In 1 (default)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 3
Units: Coded
CP-362 ANALOG CAL REF
Analog Calibration Reference (CP-362) determines which of the two calibration reference points (see list below) are to
be calibrated.
2 = point B
1 = point A (default)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 2
Units: Coded
CP-363 ANALOG REF VAL
Analog Reference Value (CP-363) is the value of measured data for the signal at the specified reference point (Analog
Cal Ref, CP-362). Use a voltmeter for voltage mode operation (or a current meter for current mode of operation) to
measure the voltage (or current) on the analog signal selected for calibration at the specified reference point. Enter the
measured value in the Analog Reference Value (CP-363).
Minimum Value: -15.0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 25
Units: Volts or Milliamps
CP-364 AO BIT SET
Analog Out Bit Set (CP-364) sets the output value in bits that are used to calibrate the Auxiliary Analog Board's analog
output. Change (tune) this value until the actual output matches the value that you entered for Analog Ref Val (CP363), for the selected point.
Minimum Value: -32768
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 32767
Units: Bits
CP-365 AO DIRECT
Analog Out Direct (CP-365) is the value output (in volts or milliamps) at the Auxiliary Analog Board's analog output
when the AO Parameter (CP-184) is set to a “0”.
Minimum Value: -15.0
Default Value: 0.0
Maximum Value: 20
Units: Volts or Milliamps
(Continued)
C - 72
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-366 CO OFFSET
Control Output Offset (CP-366) is the value (in volts) that is added to the CO_SIG Analog Output (J3, pin 1) signal.
Control Output Offset (CP-366) can eliminate any voltage offset present on the DAC output circuitry or it can offset a
motor-creep problem (i.e., a digital balance pot). CO Offset (CP-366) is set at the factory, but can also be verified with
a voltmeter for a “0” volt output. If you change the value, make sure that it gets into the parameter backup.
Minimum Value: -1.00
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 1
Units: Volts
CP-368 CRC ENABLE
If CRC Enable (CP-368) is set to “ON” (1), you must append a CRC value to all serial communications messages that
are received by the CX-1010 (See Serial Communications: Using Serial Communications). The CX-1010 checks the
CRC value against the the message contents (excluding the “STX”), then calculates a CRC value and appends it to all
serial communications responses. If CRC Enable (CP-368) is set to “OFF” (0), the CX-1010 will ignore any CRC
value that is appended to a message and will not append a CRC value to any serial communications responses.
1 = On (Enabled)
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 1
0 = Off (Disabled)
Maximum Value: 1
Units: None
CP-369 RECORD FORMAT
Record Format (CP-369) determines which type of data format (see list below) will be used for the serial
communication.
3 = ASCII2
2 = ASCII
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
1 = BINARY
Maximum Value: 2
Units: Coded
CP-370 DEVICE ADDRESS
Device Address (CP-370) assigns a serial communications address to the CX-1010. This number should be different
from any other units that are on the serial link.
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 99
Units: Address
(Continued)
C - 73
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-371 BAUD RATE
The Baud Rate (CP-371) determines the serial communications data transfer rate (see list below) in Bits/sec. With a
10 bit frame length, the number of frame/sec would be 1/10 the Baud Rate.
1 = 300 bps = 300 Baud
2 = 600 bps = 600 Baud
3 = 1200 bps = 1200 Baud
4 = 2400 bps = 2400 Baud
5 = 4800 bps = 4800 Baud
6 = 9600 bps = 9600 Baud (default)
7 = 19200 bps = 19.2 Kbaud
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 6
Maximum Value: 7
Units: Coded
CP-372 FRAME FORMAT
Frame Format (CP-372) determines the parity, the number of data bits, and the number of stop bits for the serial
communications.
1 = N,8,1 = No Parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit (10 bit frame - ASCII or Binary)
2 = E,7,1 = Even Parity, 7 data bits, 1 stop bit (10 bit frame-ASCII only)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 2
Units: Coded
CP-373 SERCOM CHAR OUT
When a new value is entered in SerCom Char Out (CP-373), it is transmitted out the RS-485 serial port at the Baud
Rate (CP-371) and the Frame Format (CP-372). SerCom Char Out (CP-373) is a decimal number.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 255
Units: Decimal Character
CP-374 VIDEO MODE
Video Mode (CP-374) determines how the LCD Screen Display will be dispalyed, per the list below:
3 = Standard Video w/Border
2 = Reverse Video
1 = Standard Video(default)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 3
Units: Coded
CP-375 CONTRAST VALUE
Contrast Value (CP-375) determines the contrast for the LCD Screen Display. The higher values darken the pixels and
lower values lighten the pixels.
Minimum Value: 8
Default Value: 18
Maximum Value: 32
Units: Contrast Integer
(Continued)
C - 74
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-376 DN MAC ID
DN MAC ID is the DeviceNet Media Access Control Identifier. The MAC ID is used to assign a uniqe identifier or
address to each node on the network. Assign a different MAC ID to each CX-1010 device on the network from 0 to
63.
CP-377 DN BAUD RATE
The DN Baud Rate is the network data or transfer rate. Enter the number from the listing below that corresponds to the
desired baud rate:
1 = 125 Kbps
2 = 250 Kbps
3 = 500 Kbps
CP-378 BLK SEL SOURCE
Block Select Source (CP-378) determines whether the active block will be selected by the digital inputs and PLC, by
Keypad Blk Sel (CP-379) or by Cntr4 Cnt.
3 = Cntr4 Cnt
2 = KyPd = Keypad Blk Sel
1 = DgIn = Digital Inputs/PLC (default)
Minimum Value: 1
Default Value: 1
Maximum Value: 2
Units: Coded
CP-379 KEYPAD BLK SEL
The Keypad Block Select (CP-379) determines which block will be active when Blk Sel Source (CP-378) is set to “2”
(KyPd).
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 7
Units: Parameter Code
CP-380 KYPDLK MASK
Key Pad Lock Mask (CP-380) sets the level of keypad lockout when the Keypad Lockout input is active (low). Each
level allows certain Control Parameters to be changed (or masked out from the lockout) even though keypad lockout is
active. A value of “1” or higher allows the Control Parameters that are selected by Unlock CP A-H (CP-381 to CP-388)
to be changed, with the keypad lockout active. When set to “3” (Blk Vals), the block values can be changed as well as
the Main LIst Block Parameter Values and the unlocked Control Parameters. When set to “4” (UnLckBlk), the block
values of the block selected by Unlock Block (CP-389) can be changed as well as the main list block parameter values
and the unlocked Control Parameters, when the selected block is active.
4 = UnLckBlk = Block Values of the Block Selected by Unlock Block (CP-389) and the Unlocked CP’s.
3 = Blk Vals = All BlockValues (CP-440-567) and the Unlocked CP’s are allowed to change.
2 = Setpnts = Setpoints (CP-110, 120, 130, 140) and the Unlocked CP’s are allowed to change.
1 = UnlckCP = CP’s selected by the Unlock CP A - F are allowed to changed.
0 = Total Lockout (default).
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 4
Units: Coded
(Continued)
C - 75
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-381 UNLOCK CP A
Unlock Control Parameter A (CP-381) determines which Control Parameter can change, even when the keypad lockout
is active. For the Unlock Control Parameter A (CP-381) to function, KyPdLk Mask (CP-380) must be set to something
other than “0” (All Lock). Enter “0” in Unlock Control Parameter A (CP-381) to disable it from selecting any
Control Parameter.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 567
Units: Parameter Code
CP-382 UNLOCK CP B
Unlock Control Parameter B (CP-382) determines which Control Parameter can change, even when the keypad lockout
is active. For the Unlock Control Parameter B (CP-382) to function, KyPdLk Mask (CP-380) must be set to something
other than “0” (All Lock). Enter “0” in Unlock Control Parameter B (CP-382) to disable it from selecting any
Control Parameter.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 567
Units: Parameter Code
CP-383 UNLOCK CP C
Unlock Control Parameter C (CP-383) determines which Control Parameter can change, even when the keypad lockout
is active. For the Unlock Control Parameter C (CP-383) to function, KyPdLk Mask (CP-380) must be set to something
other than “0” (All Lock). Enter “0” in Unlock Control Parameter C (CP-383) to disable it from selecting any
Control Parameter.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 567
Units: Parameter Code
CP-384 UNLOCK CP D
Unlock Control Parameter D (CP-384) determines which Control Parameter can change, even when the keypad lockout
is active. For the Unlock Control Parameter D (CP-384) to function, KyPdLk Mask (CP-380) must be set to
something other than “0” (All Lock). Enter “0” in Unlock Control Parameter D (CP-384) to disable it from selecting
any Control Parameter.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 567
Units: Parameter Code
CP-385 UNLOCK CP E
Unlock Control Parameter E (CP-385) determines which Control Parameter can change, even when the keypad lockout
is active. For the Unlock Control Parameter E (CP-385) to function, KyPdLk Mask (CP-380) must be set to something
other than “0” (All Lock). Enter “0” in Unlock Control Parameter E (CP-385) to disable it from selecting any
Control Parameter.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 567
Units: Parameter Code
(Continued)
C - 76
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-386 UNLOCK CP F
Unlock Control Parameter F (CP-386) determines which Control Parameter can change, even when the keypad lockout
is active. For the Unlock Control Parameter F (CP-386) to function, KyPdLk Mask (CP-380) must be set to something
other than “0” (All Lock). Enter “0” in Unlock Control Parameter F (CP-386) to disable it from selecting any Control
Parameter.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 567
Units: Parameter Code
CP-387 UNLOCK CP G
Unlock Control Parameter G (CP-387) determines which Control Parameter can change, even when the keypad lockout
is active. For the Unlock Control Parameter G (CP-387) to function, KyPdLk Mask (CP-380) must be set to
something other than “0” (All Lock). Enter “0” in Unlock Control Parameter G (CP-387) to disable it from selecting
any Control Parameter.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 567
Units: Parameter Code
CP-388 UNLOCK CP H
Unlock Control Parameter H (CP-388) determines which Control Parameter can change, even when the keypad lockout
is active. For the Unlock Control Parameter H (CP-388) to function, KyPdLk Mask (CP-380) must be set to
something other than “0” (All Lock). Enter “0” in Unlock Control Parameter H (CP-388) to disable it from selecting
any Control Parameter.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 567
Units: Parameter Code
CP-389 UNLOCK BLOCK
Unlock Block (CP-389) determines which block of Control Parameters can change values, even though keypad lockout
is active. The main list block parameter values are also allowed to be changed when the selected Unlock Block is
active and KyPdLk Mask (CP-380) is set to ‘UnlckBlk’ (4). For the Unlock Block (CP-389) to function, KyPdLk Mask
(CP-380) must be set to “4”
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 7
Maximum Value: 7
Units: Block Number
(Continued)
C - 77
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-390 MEMORY TEST
To test the physical memory, either enter the number associated with the test (see list below) in Memory Test (CP-390)
or go to the Help screen for Memory Test (CP-390) and choose the test. The test result will flash in the error and
message status bar at the bottom of the screen and is also summarized in the Diagnostics/Device Tests Memory screen.
The test results are also available through Monitor Parameters MP-94, MP-95, MP-96.
4 = Test ALL MEMORY
3 = Test NVRAM
2 = Test SRAM
1 = Test ROM
0 = Test Done *
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 4
Units: Coded
CP-391 CLR FAULT CNTRS
To reset all the system-fault counters except Norm- Pwr-Ups (MP-84), enter a “1” in Clear Fault Counters (CP-391).
The error and message status bar at the bottom of the screen will flash “Flts Cleared” and the value will return to “0”.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 1
Units: Coded
CP-392 VIDEO TEST
To start the Video Test, enter “1” in Video Test (CP-392). Then use the page up/down keys to page through tests.
Press the Menu key to exit the tests and return to the previous screen.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 1
Units: Coded
CP-395 SERIAL NUMBER
Serial Number is the serial number from the DeviceNet card in this CX-1010 controller. If the card was factory
installed, the Serial Number should already be entered. If the card is being field installed, enter the Serial Number from
the label on the card or recorded in the DeviceNet Card Technical Manual.
CP-396 LOAD PARMS
Use Load Parameters (CP-396) to retrieve (load) parameter values from either the factory or the default backup list.
You can specify which parameter values to load form the back up, per the list below. It is easier to select the Load
Parameters values through the “Help” screen, however, you can enter the corresponding number directly into the Load
Parameters (CP-396). A message will flash in the error and message status bar at the bottom of the screen to indicate
the completion of the operation . The Load Parameters operation will not function while the CX-1010 is in “RUN”.
6 = Load Dflts BlockCP
5 = Load Dflts Main CP
4 = Load Dflts All Cp
3 = Load Backup BlockCP
2 = Load Backup Main CP
1 = Load Backup All Cps
0 = No Change
Load Factory Defaults into CP-400 through CP-567
Load Factory Defaults into CP-101 through CP-394
Load Factory Defaults into CP-101 through CP-567
Load Backup into CP-400 through CP-567
Load Backup into CP-101 through CP-394
Load Backup into CP-101 through CP-567
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 6
Units: Coded
(Continued)
C - 78
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-397 LOAD PLC PRGM
Use Load PLC Program (CP-397) to retrieve (load) either the backup for the PLC program which you have saved or
the factory default PLC program. Enter “1” to load the backup PLC program or enter “2 ” to load the factory default
PLC program. You can also select the one of the two values through the Help screen. The loaded program is compiled
and a message will flash in the error and message status bar at the bottom of the screen to indicate the completion of the
operation. The Load PLC Program operation will not function while the CX-1010 is in “RUN”.
2 = Load Dflt PLC Prg
1 = Load Backup PLC Prg
0 = No Change
Load Factory Default PLC program
Load Backup PLC program
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 2
Units: Coded
CP-398 SAVE PARMS
Use Save Parameters (CP-398) to save the current parameter values to the backup. You can specify which parameter
values to save as back up, per the list below Either enter the corresponding number directly into the Save Parameters
(see list below) or select the Save Parameters values through the Help screen. A message (Saved2 BkUp) will flash in
the error and message status bar at the bottom of the screen to indicate the completion of the operation.
3 = Save Block CP’s
2 = Save Main CP’s
1 = Save All CP’s
0 = No Change
Save CP-400 through CP-567 to Backup
Save CP-101 through CP-394 to Backup
Save CP-101 through CP-567 to Backup
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 3
Units: Coded
CP-399 SAVE PLC PRGM
Enter a “1” in Save PLC Program (CP-399) to save the current PLC program to the backup. A message (Saved2
BkUp) will flash in the error and message status bar at the bottom of the screen to indicate the completion of the
operation.
1 = Save PLC Program to Backup
0 = No Change
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 0
CP-400 TO CP-415
Maximum Value: 1
Units: Coded
BLOCK PARM 1 - BLOCK PARM 16
Use the Block Parameters 1-16 (CP-400 to CP-415 ) to select the Control Parameters that will be controlled by the
BLK0 Val1 - BLK7 Val 16 values (CP-440 to CP-567 ). When you enter a new parameter number in a block parameter,
the text that appears immediately below the block parameter will change accordingly. Enter a “0” to clear the block
parameters that are not in use. There are eight blocks; each contains up to sixteen Control Parameters.
Minimum Value: 0
Default Value: 110
Maximum Value: 349
Units: Parameter Code
(Continued)
C - 79
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
CP-440 TO CP-567
BLK0 VAL 1 - BLK7 VAL 16
Use the Block Values (CP-440 to CP-567 ) to define or change the values of the Control Parameters that you assigned
to the Block Parameters (CP-400 to CP-415 ). This allows you to assign up to eight different values to a single
parameter, which you can select. The active Block Value is selected by the PLC and monitored by Active Block (CP51).
Minimum Value: -99999999
Default Value: 0
Maximum Value: 99999999
Units: Parameter Value
(Continued)
C - 80
APPENDIX D: CONTROL PARAMETER REFERENCE
CODE DESCRIPTION
CP-101
CP-102
CP-103
CP-104
CP-105
CP-106
CP-108
CP-109
CP-110
CP-111
CP-112
CP-113
CP-114
CP-120
CP-121
CP-122
CP-123
CP-124
CP-125
CP-130
CP-131
CP-132
CP-140
CP-141
CP-142
CP-143
CP-144
CP-146
CP-147
CP-150
Setpoint x
Setpoint Mode
Fb Source
Ld Source
Ofs Source
Ff Source
EU/Tm Range
Time Base
Master SP
Max SP Mstr
Min SP Mstr
Master Equation
Inv M Norm
Follower SP
Max SP Fol
Min SP Fol
Ratio Norm
Ratio
Fol Equation
Direct SP
Max SP Drct
Min SP Drct
Custom SP
Constant 1
Constant 2
Constant 3
Constant 4
Max SP Cust
Min SP Cust
V1 Source
MIN
-999999
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
-999999
0
0
1
-999999
-999999
0
0
0
-1000
1
-15
0
0
-999999
-999999
-999999
-999999
-999999
-999999
-999999
0
USER
MAX DEFAULT RECORD
UNITS
999999
4
4
4
6
2
4
3
999999
999999
999999
3
999999
999999
999999
999999
999999
1000
3
15
15
15
999999
999999
999999
999999
999999
999999
999999
6
EU/Tm
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
EU/Tm
Coded
EU/Tm
EU/Tm
EU/Tm
Coded
EU
Ratio
Ratio
Ratio
Ratio
Ratio
Coded
Volts
Volts
Volts
EU/Tm
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
EU/Tm
EU/Tm
Coded
0
1
1
1
4
0
2
2
0
999999
0
1
0
1.000
999999
0
1.000
1.000
1
0.0
15.0
0.0
0.0
0
1.0
0
1.0
130000
0
3
(Continued)
D-1
Appendix D: Control Parameter Reference (continued)
CODE DESCRIPTION
MIN
USER
MAX DEFAULT RECORD
CP-151
CP-152
CP-153
CP-154
CP-155
CP-156
CP-157
CP-158
V2 Source
V3 Source
V4 Source
M1
B1
M2
B2
M3
0
0
0
-32768
-999999
-32768
-999999
-32768
6
6
6
32767
999999
32767
999999
32767
4
4
4
1.0
0
1.0
0
1.0
Coded
Coded
Coded
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
CP-159
CP-160
CP-161
CP-162
CP-163
CP-165
CP-166
CP-167
CP-168
CP-170
CP-171
CP-172
CP-173
CP-174
CP-175
CP-176
CP-177
CP-178
CP-179
CP-180
CP-181
CP-182
B3
Cnt Mode FI1
PPR FI1
FI1 Pulses
EU FI1
Cnt Mode FI2
PPR FI2
FI2 Pulses
EU FI2
AI1 Mode
AI1 RA
EU@AI1 RA
AI1 RB
EU@AI1 RB
AI2 Mode
AI2 RA
EU@AI2 RA
AI2 RB
EU@AI2 RB
CO Mode
CO Max Volts
CO Polarity
-999999
1
1
0
0.0
1
1
0
0.0
1
-15.0
-9999999
-15.0
-9999999
1
-15.0
-9999999
-15.0
-9999999
1
0.1
1
999999
2
60000
999999
999999
2
60000
999999
999999
2
25
9999999
25
9999999
2
25
9999999
25
9999999
4
15
2
0
1
60
60
1.0
1
60
60
1.0
1
0.0
0.0
10.0
100.0
1
0.0
0.0
10.0
100.0
1
10.0
1
Constant
Coded
Pls/Rev
Pulses
EU
Coded
Pls/Rev
Pulses
EU
Coded
V or ma
EU/Tm
V or ma
EU/Tm
Coded
V or ma
EU/Tm
V or ma
EU/Tm
Coded
Volts
Coded
(Continued)
D-2
UNITS
Appendix D: Control Parameter Reference (continued)
CODE DESCRIPTION
MIN
USER
MAX DEFAULT RECORD
UNITS
CP-184
CP-185
CP-186
CP-187
CP-188
AO Parameter
AO Mode
AO RA
Val@AO RA
AO RB
0
1
-15.0
-9999999
-15.0
567
2
20
9999999
20
7
1
-10.0
-2000
10.0
MP/CP
Coded
V or ma
Parm Val
V or ma
CP-189
CP-190
CP-191
CP-192
CP-193
CP-194
CP-195
CP-196
CP-199
CP-200
CP-201
CP-202
CP-203
CP-204
CP-205
CP-206
CP-208
CP-210
CP-211
CP-212
CP-213
CP-214
CP-215
CP-216
CP-217
Val@AO RB
ScFb Eq
ScFb EU
Fb @ ScFb EU
Sc Parm
Sc Parm Eq
Sc Parm M
Sc Parm B
Lg Number Units
Ref RUN Rmp
Acl Tm RUN
Acl Rt RUN
Dcl Tm RUN
Dcl Rt RUN
Ref Drct Rmp
Acl Tm Drct
Dcl Tm Drct
Ref StopRmp
Dcl Tm Rstp
Dcl Rt RStp
Dcl Tm HStp
Dcl Rt HStp
Jog SP
Acl Tm Jog
Acl Rt Jog
-9999999
1
0
0
1
1
-999999
-999999
0
0.001
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.001
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
9999999
4
999999
999999
99
3
999999
999999
80
999999
3600
9999999
3600
9999999
15
3600
3600
999999
3600
9999999
3600
9999999
999999
3600
9999999
2000
1
1.0
1
7
1
1.0
0.0
1
1000
1.000
1000
1.000
1000
10.0
1.000
1.000
1000
1.000
1000
1.000
1000
250
1.000
250
Parm Val
Coded
EU
Fb EU/Tm
MP
Coded
Constant
Constant
Coded
EU/Tm
Seconds
EU/Tm/S
Seconds
EU/Tm/S
Volts
Seconds
Seconds
EU/Tm
Seconds
EU/Tm/S
Seconds
EU/Tm/S
EU/Tm
Seconds
EU/Tm/S
(Continued)
D-3
Appendix D: Control Parameter Reference (continued)
CODE DESCRIPTION
CP-218
CP-219
CP-220
CP-221
CP-222
CP-224
CP-225
CP-226
CP-227
CP-228
CP-229
CP-230
CP-233
CP-235
CP-236
CP-237
CP-238
CP-239
CP-240
CP-241
CP-242
CP-244
CP-248
CP-249
CP-250
CP-251
CP-253
CP-255
CP-258
CP-259
Dcl Tm Jog
Dcl Rt Jog
RUN Loop Mode
Jog Loop Mode
Drive Type
Kff
Kp VL
Ki VL
Kd VL
Deriv Thd VL
Kp ZE
HStp LoopMode
Max Fb
KP PL
Ki PL
Kd PL
Deriv Thd PL
PPR Mtr
Cntrl Latch
Loop Update
KffAdjUpdt
Kff Auto En
Signal Fltr Sel
Signal Fltr Tau
Max Spd Lmt
Min Spd Lmt
ZE Limit
Ramp Thd
Trim Ath
Intgrl Lmt
MIN
0
0
0
0
1
–9999999
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
00000000
1
1
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
1
1
USER
MAX DEFAULT RECORD
3600
1.000
9999999
250
3
1
1
1
2
1
9999999
5.0
200
100
200
100
200
0
99999
0
200
100
3
1
999999
2000
200
100
200
0
200
0
9999
1
60000
60
11111111 00000000
3
1
5
2
1
0
4
0
50
10
999999
2000
999999
0
99999
2000
999999
10.0
32767
16383
32767
16383
(Continued)
D-4
UNITS
Seconds
EU/Tm/S
Coded
Coded
Coded
V/kiloEU
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Coded
EU/Tm
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Pls/Rev
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Msec
EU/Tm
EU/Tm
EU/Tm
EU/Tm
Bits
Bits
Appendix D: Control Parameter Reference (continued)
CODE DESCRIPTION
CP-260
CP-261
CP-262
CP-266
CP-267
CP-268
CP-269
CP-270
CP-271
CP-272
CP-273
CP-274
CP-278
CP-279
CP-280
CP-281
CP-282
CP-283
CP-286
CP-287
CP-288
CP-289
CP-292
CP-293
CP-294
CP-295
CP-296
CP-297
CP-298
CP-299
PsnErr+
PsnErrPsn Offset
FI1PsnPrst
FI2PsnPrst
FI1PsnRO
FI2PsnRO
Zero Speed
Max Fb Alm
Max Acl/Dcl
NO Resp Time
Max FI2 Psn
Std Alm Msk
CustAlm Msk
Cmpr1 Parm
Cmpr2 Parm
Cmpr3 Parm
Cmpr4 Parm
Cmpr1 Type
Cmpr2 Type
Cmpr3 Type
Cmpr4 Type
Cmpr1 Val
Cmpr2 Val
Cmpr3 Val
Cmpr4 Val
Copy Source 1
Copy Dest 1
Copy Source 2
Copy Dest 2
MIN
0
0
-8000000
-99999999
-99999999
0
0
0
0
0
0.010
0
00000000
00000000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-9999999
-9999999
-9999999
-9999999
1
101
1
101
USER
MAX DEFAULT RECORD
10000000
1.0
10000000
1.0
8000000
0
99999999
0
99999999
0
99999999
10
99999999
10
100000
10.0
999999
2000
9999999
2000
600
1.000
99999999
10
11111111 00000000
11111111 00000000
99
39
99
39
99
44
99
43
6
4
6
5
6
4
6
4
9999999
2000
9999999
0
9999999
20
9999999
10
567
143
567
143
567
144
567
144
UNITS
EU
EU
EU
EU
EU
EU
EU
EU/Tm
EU/Tm
EU/Tm/S
Seconds
EU
Coded
Coded
MP
MP
MP
MP
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
CP or MP
CP or MP
CP or MP
CP or MP
(Continued)
D-5
Appendix D: Control Parameter Reference (continued)
CODE DESCRIPTION
CP-300
CP-301
CP-302
CP-303
CP-305
CP-306
CP-307
CP-308
CP-310
CP-311
CP-312
CP-313
CP-314
CP-315
CP-316
CP-317
CP-320
CP-321
CP-322
CP-323
CP-324
CP-325
CP-326
CP-327
CP-328
CP-329
CP-330
CP-331
CP-332
CP-333
Remote Scroll
Rmt Scroll Rate
DI 1 Shot
DI Set
PLC Monitor 1
PLC Monitor 2
PLC Bit Set
PLC Bit Clear
Tmr1 Delay
Tmr1 on Tm
Tmr2 Delay
Tmr2 on Tm
Tmr3 Delay
Tmr3 on Tm
Tmr4 Delay
Tmr4 on Tm
Cntr1 Trig
Cntr1 Cnt
Cntr2 Trig
Cntr2 Cnt
Cntr3 Trig
Cntr3 Cnt
Cntr4 TrigUp
Cntr4 Cnt
Cntr4 TrigDn
Cntr4 Preset
DN Write Parm 1
DN Write Parm 2
DN Write Parm 3
DN Write Parm 4
MIN
0
1
00000000
00000000
0
0
0
0
0
-1
0
-1
0
-1
0
-1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
USER
MAX DEFAULT RECORD
349
101
100
10
11111111 00000000
11111111 00000000
171
8
171
9
171
3
171
2
86400
1.000
86400
-1
86400
1.000
86400
-1
86400
1.000
86400
-1
86400
1.000
86400
-1
10000000
10
10000000
0
10000000
10
10000000
0
10000000
10
10000000
0
10000000
10
10000000
0
10000000
0
10000000
0
567
0
567
0
567
0
567
0
(Continued)
D-6
UNITS
CP
Inc/Sec
Coded
Coded
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Counts
Counts
Counts
Counts
Counts
Counts
Counts
Counts
Counts
Counts
CP
CP
CP
CP
Appendix D: Control Parameter Reference (continued)
CODE DESCRIPTION
CP-334
CP-335
CP-336
CP-337
CP-340
CP-341
CP-342
CP-343
CP-344
CP-345
CP-346
CP-350
CP-352
CP-353
CP-354
CP-355
CP-356
CP-360
CP-361
CP-362
CP-363
CP-364
CP-365
CP-366
CP-368
CP-369
CP-370
CP-371
CP-372
CP-373
DN Read Parm 1
DN Read Parm 2
DN Read Parm 3
DN Read Parm 4
Lg Number Parm
Status Line 1
Status Line 2
Status Line 3
Status Line 4
Status Line 5
Status Line 6
Diagnostics En
Diag DO
Diag DAC Test
Diag DAC Volts
Diag DAC Bits
Diag Rmp Tm
Analog Cal En
Analog Cal Sel
Analog Cal Ref
AnalogRef Val
AO Bit Set
AO Direct
CO Offset
CRC Enable
Record Format
Device Address
Baud Rate
Frame Format
SerCom Char Out
MIN
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
00000000
0
-15
-32768
0
0
1
1
-15.0
-32768
-15.0
-1.00
0
1
1
1
1
0
USER
MAX DEFAULT RECORD
567
0
567
0
567
0
567
0
567
40
567
101
567
39
567
50
567
51
567
53
567
54
1
0
11111111 00000000
4
0
15
0
32767
0
600
10.000
1
0
3
1
2
1
25
0
32767
0
20
0.0
1
0
1
1
2
1
99
1
7
6
2
1
255
0
UNITS
CP or MP
CP or MP
CP or MP
CP or MP
CP or MP
CP or MP
CP or MP
CP or MP
CP or MP
CP or MP
CP or MP
Coded
Coded
Coded
Volts
Bits
Seconds
Coded
Coded
Coded
V or ma
Bits
V or ma
Volts
Coded
Coded
Address
Coded
Coded
Decimal
(Continued)
D-7
Appendix D: Control Parameter Reference (continued)
CODE DESCRIPTION
CP-374
CP-375
CP-376
CP-377
CP-378
CP-379
CP-380
CP-381
CP-382
CP-383
CP-384
CP-385
CP-386
CP-387
CP-388
CP-389
CP-390
CP-391
CP-392
CP-395
CP-396
CP-397
CP-398
CP-399
CP-400
CP-401
CP-402
CP-403
CP-404
CP-405
Video Mode
Contrast Value
DN MAC ID
DN Buad Rate
Blk Sel Source
Keypad Blk Sel
KyPdLk Mask
Unlock CP A
Unlock CP B
Unlock CP C
Unlock CP D
Unlock CP E
Unlock CP F
Unlock CP G
Unlock CP H
Unlock Block
Memory Test
Clr Fault Cntrs
Video Test
Serial Number
Load Parms
Load PLC Prgm
Save Parms
Save PLC Prgm
Block Parm 1
Block Parm 2
Block Parm 3
Block Parm 4
Block Parm 5
Block Parm 6
MIN
1
8
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
USER
MAX DEFAULT RECORD
UNITS
3
32
63
3
3
7
4
567
567
567
567
567
567
567
567
7
4
1
1
999999
6
2
3
1
349
349
349
349
349
349
Coded
Contrast
ID
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
Block #
Coded
Coded
Coded
Serial #
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
(Continued)
D-8
1
18
63
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
110
0
0
0
0
0
Appendix D: Control Parameter Reference (continued)
CODE DESCRIPTION
MIN
USER
MAX DEFAULT RECORD
UNITS
CP-406
CP-407
CP-408
CP-409
CP-410
CP-411
CP-412
CP-413
CP-414
CP-415
CP-440
CP-441
CP-442
CP-443
CP-444
Block Parm 7
Block Parm 8
Block Parm 9
Block Parm 10
Block Parm 11
Block Parm 12
Block Parm 13
Block Parm 14
Block Parm 15
Block Parm 16
Blk0 Val 1
Blk0 Val 2
Blk0 Val 3
Blk0 Val 4
Blk0 Val 5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
349
349
349
349
349
349
349
349
349
349
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
CP-445
CP-446
CP-447
CP-448
CP-449
CP-450
CP-451
CP-452
CP-453
CP-454
CP-455
CP-456
CP-457
CP-458
CP-459
Blk0 Val 6
Blk0 Val 7
Blk0 Val 8
Blk0 Val 9
Blk0 Val10
Blk0 Val11
Blk0 Val12
Blk0 Val13
Blk0 Val14
Blk0 Val15
Blk0 Val16
Blk1 Val 1
Blk1 Val 2
Blk1 Val 3
Blk1 Val 4
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
(Continued)
D-9
Appendix D: Control Parameter Reference (continued)
CODE DESCRIPTION
MIN
USER
MAX DEFAULT RECORD
CP-460
CP-461
CP-462
CP-463
CP-464
CP-465
CP-466
CP-467
CP-468
CP-469
CP-470
CP-471
CP-472
CP-473
CP-474
Blk1 Val 5
Blk1 Val 6
Blk1 Val 7
Blk1 Val 8
Blk1 Val 9
Blk1 Val10
Blk1 Val11
Blk1 Val12
Blk1 Val13
Blk1 Val14
Blk1 Val15
Blk1 Val16
Blk2 Val 1
Blk2 Val 2
Blk2 Val 3
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
CP-475
CP-476
CP-477
CP-478
CP-479
CP-480
CP-481
CP-482
CP-483
CP-484
CP-485
CP-486
CP-487
CP-488
CP-489
Blk2 Val 4
Blk2 Val 5
Blk2 Val 6
Blk2 Val 7
Blk2 Val 8
Blk2 Val 9
Blk2 Val10
Blk2 Val11
Blk2 Val12
Blk2 Val13
Blk2 Val14
Blk2 Val15
Blk2 Val16
Blk3 Val 1
Blk3 Val 2
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
(Continued)
D - 10
UNITS
Appendix D: Control Parameter Reference (continued)
CODE DESCRIPTION
CP-490
CP-491
CP-492
CP-493
CP-494
CP-495
CP-496
CP-497
CP-498
CP-499
CP-500
CP-501
CP-502
CP-503
CP-504
CP-505
CP-506
CP-507
CP-508
CP-509
CP-510
CP-511
CP-512
CP-513
CP-514
CP-515
CP-516
CP-517
CP-518
CP-519
Blk3 Val 3
Blk3 Val 4
Blk3 Val 5
Blk3 Val 6
Blk3 Val 7
Blk3 Val 8
Blk3 Val 9
Blk3 Val10
Blk3 Val11
Blk3 Val12
Blk3 Val13
Blk3 Val14
Blk3 Val15
Blk3 Val16
Blk4 Val 1
Blk4 Val 2
Blk4 Val 3
Blk4 Val 4
Blk4 Val 5
Blk4 Val 6
Blk4 Val 7
Blk4 Val 8
Blk4 Val 9
Blk4 Val10
Blk4 Val11
Blk4 Val12
Blk4 Val13
Blk4 Val14
Blk4 Val15
Blk4 Val16
MIN
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
USER
MAX DEFAULT RECORD
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
UNITS
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Vall
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
(Continued)
D - 11
Appendix D: Control Parameter Reference (continued)
CODE DESCRIPTION
CP-520
CP-521
CP-522
CP-523
CP-524
CP-525
CP-526
CP-527
CP-528
CP-529
CP-530
CP-531
CP-532
CP-533
CP-534
CP-535
CP-536
CP-537
CP-538
CP-539
CP-540
CP-541
CP-542
CP-543
CP-544
CP-545
CP-546
CP-547
CP-548
CP-549
Blk5 Val 1
Blk5 Val 2
Blk5 Val 3
Blk5 Val 4
Blk5 Val 5
Blk5 Val 6
Blk5 Val 7
Blk5 Val 8
Blk5 Val 9
Blk5 Val10
Blk5 Val11
Blk5 Val12
Blk5 Val13
Blk5 Val14
Blk5 Val15
Blk5 Val16
Blk6 Val 1
Blk6 Val 2
Blk6 Val 3
Blk6 Val 4
Blk6 Val 5
Blk6 Val 6
Blk6 Val 7
Blk6 Val 8
Blk6 Val 9
Blk6 Val10
Blk6 Val11
Blk6 Val12
Blk6 Val13
Blk6 Val14
MIN
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
USER
MAX DEFAULT RECORD
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
(Continued)
D - 12
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
UNITS
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Appendix D: Control Parameter Reference (continued)
CODE DESCRIPTION
CP-550
CP-551
CP-552
CP-553
CP-554
CP-555
CP-556
CP-557
CP-558
CP-559
CP-560
CP-561
CP-562
CP-563
CP-564
CP-565
CP-566
CP-567
Blk6 Val15
Blk6 Val16
Blk7 Val 1
Blk7 Val 2
Blk7 Val 3
Blk7 Val 4
Blk7 Val 5
Blk7 Val 6
Blk7 Val 7
Blk7 Val 8
Blk7 Val 9
Blk7 Val10
Blk7 Val11
Blk7 Val12
Blk7 Val13
Blk7 Val14
Blk7 Val15
Blk7 Val16
MIN
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
-99999999
USER
MAX DEFAULT RECORD
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
UNITS
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
Parm Val
D - 13
—NOTES—
D - 14
APPENDIX E: MONITOR PARAMETER REFERENCE
CODE
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNITS
MP-01
MP-02
MP-03
MP-04
MP-05
MP-06
MP-07
MP-08
MP-09
MP-10
MP-11
MP-12
MP-13
MP-14
MP-15
MP-16
MP-17
MP-18
MP-20
MP-21
MP-22
MP-24
MP-25
MP-26
MP-27
MP-28
MP-29
MP-30
MP-34
MP-35
FI1 Hz
FI1 RPM
FI1 EU/Tm
FI1 Cnts
FI1 Psn
FI2 Hz
FI2 RPM
FI2 EU/Tm
FI2 Cnts
FI2 Psn
AI1 Bits
AI1 Signal
AI1 Eu/Tm
AI2 Bits
AI2 Signal
AI2 EU/Tm
AnlgCal Ref A
AnlgCal Ref B
CO Bits
CO Volts
CO Max Bits
AO Bits
AO Signal
DI 7..0
DI 15..8
DO 7..0
KeyPad Lockout
ScParm Val
PsnErr
PsnErrCnt
–120000
–99999
–999999
–9999999
–9999999
–120000
–99999
–999999
–9999999
–9999999
–8192
–12.0
–999999
–8192
–12.0
–999999
–15.0
–15.0
–32768
–15.0
0
–32768
–12.0
00000000
00000000
00000000
0
–9999999
–9999999
–9999999
120000
99999
999999
99999999
99999999
120000
99999
999999
99999999
99999999
8192
20
999999
8191
20
999999
25
25
32767
15
32767
32767
20
01111111
11111111
11111111
1
99999999
99999999
99999999
Hertz
RPM
EU/Tm
Counts
EU
Hertz
RPM
EU/Tm
Counts
EU
Bits
V or ma
EU/Tm
Bits
V or ma
EU/Tm
V or ma
V or ma
Bits
Volts
Bits
Bits
V or ma
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
User
EU
Counts
(Continued)
E-1
Appendix E: Monitor Parameter Reference (continued)
CODE
DESCRIPTION
MIN
MAX
UNITS
MP-38
MP-39
MP-40
MP-41
MP-42
MP-43
MP-44
MP-45
MP-46
MP-47
MP-48
MP-49
MP-50
MP-51
MP-52
MP-53
MP-54
MP-55
MP-57
MP-58
MP-59
MP-60
MP-61
MP-62
MP-63
MP-64
MP-65
MP-66
MP-67
MP-68
Ld EU/Tm
Fb EU/Tm
Scaled Fb
Scaled Ref
Ramped Ref
SR Error
RR Error
Cntrl Loop
Feedforward
Trim Out
Integral
EstMaxFb
State
Active Block
InvalidBlks
Misc Status
Std Alarms
Custom Alms
Tmr4 Time
PLC Mon 1 Val
PLC Mon 2 Val
PLC 15- 8
PLC 23- 16
PLC 31- 24
PLC 39- 32
PLC 47- 40
PLC 55- 48
PLC 63- 56
PLC 71- 64
PLC 79- 72
–999999
–999999
–9999999
–999999
–999999
–999999
–999999
0
–32768
–32768
–32768
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
0
0
0
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
999999
999999
99999999
999999
999999
999999
999999
5
32767
32767
32767
999999
10000000
00000111
11111111
11011111
11111111
11111111
86400
1
1
11111111
00001111
00001111
11011111
11011111
11111111
00001111
11111111
10111111
EU/Tm
EU/Tm
User
EU/Tm
EU/Tm
EU/Tm
EU/Tm
Coded
Bits
Bits
Bits
EU/Tm
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Seconds
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
(Continued)
E-2
Appendix E: Monitor Parameter Reference (continued)
CODE
DESCRIPTION
MP-69
MP-70
MP-71
MP-72
MP-73
MP-74
MP-75
MP-76
MP-77
MP-78
MP-79
MP-80
MP-81
MP-82
MP-83
MP-84
MP-85
MP-86
MP-87
MP-88
MP-90
MP-91
MP-94
MP-95
MP-96
MP-97
MP-98
MP-99
PLC 87- 80
PLC 95- 88
PLC 107-100
PLC 115-108
PLC 123-116
PLC 131-124
PLC 139-132
PLC 147-140
PLC 155-148
PLC 163-156
PLC 171-164
Last Reset
Misc Intrpts
Device Alms
PC at Intrpt
Norm Pwr Ups
Low Pwr Cntr
Mem Err Cntr
WatchDogCntr
MiscIntrptCntr
SerCom Char In
SerCom Errs
ROM Test
SRAM Test
NV RAM Test
MODEL
RELEASE DATE
REVISION
MIN
MAX
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
2560
1
0
0
0
0
0
00000000
0
0
0
1000
090396
0.5
11111111
00000000
11111111
11111111
11111111
11011111
01111111
00000111
11111111
00001100
10110000
11110111
00111111
00001111
1677215
65535
65535
65535
65535
65535
255
11111111
1
1
1
6000
123199
99.99
UNITS
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Address
Counts
Counts
Counts
Counts
Counts
Binary
Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Model #
Date
Rev Level
E-3
—NOTES—
E-4
APPENDIX F: CONTROL PARAMETER
SCREEN LOCATOR
CP#
CP Name
CP-101
Setpoint x ................ System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 2
................................. System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 3
Setpoint Mode ......... Setpoints\Run Modes\pg 1
Fb Source ................ Setpoints\Master\pg 2
................................. Setpoints\Follower\pg 2
................................. Setpoints\Custom\pg 2
................................. Setpoints\Direct\pg 1
Ld Source ................ Setpoints\Follower\pg 2
Ofs Source ............... Setpoints\Master\pg 2
................................. Setpoints\Follower\pg 2
Ff Source ................. Tuning\Feedforward\pg 1
................................. Tuning\Feedforward\pg 1
EU/Tm Range ......... Scaling\Standard Signals\pg 2
Time Base ............... Scaling\Standard Signals\pg 2
................................. Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 2
Master SP ................ Setpoints\Master\pg 1
................................. Setpoints\Master\pg 2
Max SP Mstr ........... Setpoints\Master\pg 1
Min SP Mstr ............ Setpoints\Master\pg 1
Master Equation ...... Setpoints\Master\pg 2
Inv M Norm ............ Setpoints\Master\pg 2
Follower SP ............. Setpoints\Follower\pg 1
................................. Setpoints\Follower\pg 2
Max SP Fol.............. Setpoints\Follower\pg 1
Min SP Fol .............. Setpoints\Follower\pg 1
Ratio Norm ............. Setpoints\Follower\pg 2
Ratio ........................ Setpoints\Follower\pg 2
Fol Equation ............ Setpoints\Follower\pg 2
Direct SP ................. Setpoints\Direct\pg 1
CP-102
CP-103
CP-104
CP-105
CP-106
CP-108
CP-109
CP-110
CP-111
CP-112
CP-113
CP-114
CP-120
CP-121
CP-122
CP-123
CP-124
CP-125
CP-130
Screen
(Continued)
F- 1
Appendix F: Control Parameter Screen Locator (continued)
CP#
CP Name
CP-131
CP-132
CP-140
CP-141
CP-142
CP-143
CP-144
CP-146
CP-147
CP-150
CP-151
CP-152
CP-153
CP-154
CP-155
CP-156
CP-157
CP-158
CP-159
CP-160
CP-161
CP-162
CP-163
CP-165
CP-166
CP-167
CP-168
CP-170
Max SP Drct ............ Setpoints\Direct\pg 1
Min SP Drct ............ Setpoints\Direct\pg 1
Custom SP ............... Setpoints\Custom\pg 1
Constant 1 ............... Setpoints\Custom\pg 2
Constant 2 ............... Setpoints\Custom\pg 2
Constant 3 ............... Setpoints\Custom\pg 2
Constant 4 ............... Setpoints\Custom\pg 2
Max SP Cust ........... Setpoints\Custom\pg 1
Min SP Cust ............ Setpoints\Custom\pg 1
V1 Source ............... Setpoints\Custom\pg 2
V2 Source ............... Setpoints\Custom\pg 2
V3 Source ............... Setpoints\Custom\pg 2
V4 Source ............... Setpoints\Custom\pg 2
M1 ........................... Setpoints\Custom\pg 3
B1 ............................ Setpoints\Custom\pg 3
M2 ........................... Setpoints\Custom\pg 3
B2 ............................ Setpoints\Custom\pg 3
M3 ........................... Setpoints\Custom\pg 3
B3 ............................ Setpoints\Custom\pg 3
Cnt Mode FI1 .......... Scaling\Standard Signals\pg 1
PPR FI1 ................... Scaling\Standard Signals Monitor\pg 1
FI1 Pulses ................ Scaling\Standard Signals\pg 1
EU FI1 ..................... Scaling\Standard Signals\pg 1
Cnt Mode FI2 .......... Scaling\Standard Signals\pg 2
PPR FI2 ................... Scaling\Standard Signals Monitor\pg 2
FI2 Pulses ................ Scaling\Standard Signals\pg 2
EU FI2 ..................... Scaling\Standard Signals\pg 2
AI1 Mode ................ Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 1
................................. Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 1
................................. Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 3
................................. System Monitor\Aux Analog Monitor\pg 1
AI1 RA .................... Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 1
CP-171
Screen
(Continued)
F-2
Appendix F: Control Parameter Screen Locator (continued)
CP#
CP Name
CP-172
CP-173
CP-174
CP-175
EU@AI1 RA ........... Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 1
AI1 RB .................... Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 1
EU@AI1 RB ........... Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 1
AI2 Mode ................ Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 2
................................. Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 1
................................. Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 3
................................. System Monitor\Aux Analog Monitor\pg 1
AI2 RA .................... Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 2
EU@AI2 RA ........... Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 2
AI2 RB .................... Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 2
EU@AI2 RB ........... Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 2
CO Mode ................. Scaling\Standard Signals\pg 3
CO Max Volts ......... Scaling\Standard Signals\pg 3
CO Polarity ............. Scaling\Standard Signals\pg 3
AO Parameter ......... Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 3
................................. Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 2
AO Mode ................ Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 3
................................. Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 2
................................. Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 3
................................. System Monitor\Aux Analog Monitor\pg 2
AO RA .................... Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 3
Val@AO RA ........... Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 3
AO RB .................... Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 3
Val@AO RB ........... Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 3
ScFb Eq ................... Scaling\Monitor Parameters\pg 1
ScFb EU .................. Scaling\Monitor Parameters\pg 1
Fb @ ScFb EU ........ Scaling\Monitor Parameters\pg 1
Sc Parm ................... Scaling\Monitor Parameters\pg 2
Sc Parm Eq .............. Scaling\Monitor Parameters\pg 2
Sc Parm M .............. Scaling\Monitor Parameters\pg 2
Sc Parm B ............... Scaling\Monitor Parameters\pg 2
Lg Number Units .... Device Configure\Status Screen Setup\pg 1
CP-176
CP-177
CP-178
CP-179
CP-180
CP-181
CP-182
CP-184
CP-185
CP-186
CP-187
CP-188
CP-189
CP-190
CP-191
CP-192
CP-193
CP-194
CP-195
CP-196
CP-199
Screen
(Continued)
F- 3
Appendix F: Control Parameter Screen Locator (continued)
CP#
CP Name
CP-200
CP-201
CP-202
CP-203
CP-204
CP-205
CP-206
CP-208
CP-210
CP-211
CP-212
CP-213
CP-214
CP-215
CP-216
CP-217
CP-218
CP-219
CP-220
Ref RUN Rmp ........ Alarms Ramps Limits\Run Ramps\pg 1
Acl Tm RUN ........... Alarms Ramps Limits\Run Ramps\pg 1
Acl Rt RUN ............ Alarms Ramps Limits\Run Ramps\pg 1
Dcl Tm RUN ........... Alarms Ramps Limits\Run Ramps\pg 1
Dcl Rt RUN ............ Alarms Ramps Limits\Run Ramps\pg 1
Ref Drct Rmp .......... Alarms Ramps Limits\Direct SP Ramps\pg 1
Acl Tm Drct ............ Alarms Ramps Limits\Direct SP Ramps\pg 1
Dcl Tm Drct ............ Alarms Ramps Limits\Direct SP Ramps\pg 1
Ref StopRmp ........... Alarms Ramps Limits\R-Stop/H-Stop Setup\pg 1
Dcl Tm RStp ........... Alarms Ramps Limits\R-Stop/H-Stop Setup\pg 1
Dcl Rt RStp ............. Alarms Ramps Limits\R-Stop/H-Stop Setup\pg 1
Dcl Tm HStp ........... Alarms Ramps Limits\R-Stop/H-Stop Setup\pg 1
Dcl Rt HStp ............. Alarms Ramps Limits\R-Stop/H-Stop Setup\pg 1
Jog SP...................... Alarms Ramps Limits\Jog Setup\pg 1
Acl Tm Jog .............. Alarms Ramps Limits\Jog Setup\pg 1
Acl Rt Jog ............... Alarms Ramps Limits\Jog Setup\pg 1
Dcl Tm Jog .............. Alarms Ramps Limits\Jog Setup\pg 1
Dcl Rt Jog ............... Alarms Ramps Limits\Jog Setup\pg 1
RUN Loop Mode .... Tuning\Velocity Loop\pg 2
................................. Tuning\Velocity Loop/ZE\pg 2
................................. Tuning\Position Loop\pg 2
................................. Setpoints\Run Modes\pg 1
Jog Loop Mode ....... Alarms Ramps Limits\Jog Setup\pg 1
Drive Type .............. Tuning\Related Items\pg 1
Kff ........................... Tuning\Feedforward\pg 1
Kp VL .................... Tuning\Velocity Loop\pg 1
................................. Tuning\Velocity Loop/ZE\pg 1
Ki VL ..................... Tuning\Velocity Loop\pg 1
................................. Tuning\Velocity Loop/ZE\pg 1
Kd VL .................... Tuning\Velocity Loop\pg 1
................................. Tuning\Velocity Loop/ZE\pg 1
Deriv Thd VL .......... Tuning\Velocity Loop\pg 2
CP-221
CP-222
CP-224
CP-225
CP-226
CP-227
CP-228
Screen
(Continued)
F-4
Appendix F: Control Parameter Screen Locator (continued)
CP#
CP Name
CP-228
(continued) .............. Tuning\Velocity Loop/ZE\pg 2
................................. Tuning\Position Loop\pg 2
Kp ZE ...................... Tuning\Velocity Loop/ZE\pg 1
HStp LoopMode ..... Alarms Ramps Limits\R-Stop/H-Stop Setup\pg 1
Max Fb .................... Tuning\Feedforward\pg 1
Kp PL ...................... Tuning\Position Loop\pg 1
Ki PL ....................... Tuning\Position Loop\pg 1
Kd PL ...................... Tuning\Position Loop\pg 1
Deriv Thd PL .......... Tuning\Position Loop\pg 2
PPR Mtr .................. Tuning\Position Loop\pg 1
Cntrl Latch .............. Available through the Code key
Loop Update ........... Tuning\Related Items\pg 1
KffAdjUpdt ............. Tuning\Feedforward\pg 1
Kff Auto En ............. Tuning\Velocity Loop\pg 2
................................. Tuning\Velocity Loop/ZE\pg 2
................................. Tuning\Position Loop\pg 2
................................. Tuning\Feedforward\pg 1
Signal Fltr Sel ......... Tuning\Related Items\pg 1
Signal Fltr Tau ......... Tuning\Related Items\pg 1
Max Spd Lmt .......... Alarms Ramps Limits\Limits\pg 1
Min Spd Lmt ........... Alarms Ramps Limits\Limits\pg 1
ZE Limit .................. Tuning\Velocity Loop/ZE\pg 2
................................. Alarms Ramps Limits\Limits\pg 1
Ramp Thd ................ Alarms Ramps Limits\Run Ramps\pg 1
Trim Authority ........ Tuning\Velocity Loop\pg 2
................................. Tuning\Velocity Loop/ZE\pg 2
................................. Tuning\Position Loop\pg 2
................................. Alarms Ramps Limits\Limits\pg 1
Integral Limit .......... Tuning\Velocity Loop\pg 2
................................. Tuning\Velocity Loop/ZE\pg 2
................................. Tuning\Position Loop\pg 2
................................. Alarms Ramps Limits\Limits\pg 1
CP-229
CP-230
CP-233
CP-235
CP-236
CP-237
CP-238
CP-239
CP-240
CP-241
CP-242
CP-244
CP-248
CP-249
CP-250
CP-251
CP-253
CP-255
CP-258
CP-259
Screen
(Continued)
F- 5
Appendix F: Control Parameter Screen Locator (continued)
CP#
CP Name
CP-260
PsnErr+ ................... Tuning\Position Loop\pg 2
................................. Alarms Ramps Limits\Limits\pg 1
PsnErr- .................... Tuning\Position Loop\pg 2
................................. Alarms Ramps Limits\Limits\pg 1
Psn Offset ................ Tuning\Position Loop\pg 2
FI1PsnPrst ............... PLC\PLC Position Cntrs\pg 1
FI2PsnPrst ............... PLC\PLC Position Cntrs\pg 1
FI1PsnRO ................ PLC\PLC Position Cntrs\pg 1
FI2PsnRO ................ PLC\PLC Position Cntrs\pg 1
Zero Speed .............. Alarms Ramps Limits\Alarms\pg 1
................................. Alarms Ramps Limits\Limits\pg 1
Max Fb Alm ............ Alarms Ramps Limits\Alarms\pg 1
Max Acl/Dcl ............ Alarms Ramps Limits\Alarms\pg 1
NO Resp Time ........ Alarms Ramps Limits\Alarms\pg 1
Max FI2 Psn ............ Alarms Ramps Limits\Alarms\pg 1
Std Alm Msk ........... Device Configure\Alm Indicator Mask\pg 1
CustAlm Msk .......... Device Configure\Alm Indicator Mask\pg 1
Cmpr1 Parm ............ Alarms Ramps Limits\Alarms\pg 2
Cmpr2 Parm ............ Alarms Ramps Limits\Alarms\pg 2
Cmpr3 Parm ............ Alarms Ramps Limits\Alarms\pg 3
Cmpr4 Parm ............ Alarms Ramps Limits\Alarms\pg 3
Cmpr1 Type ............ Alarms Ramps Limits\Alarms\pg 2
Cmpr2 Type ............ Alarms Ramps Limits\Alarms\pg 2
Cmpr3 Type ............ Alarms Ramps Limits\Alarms\pg 3
Cmpr4 Type ............ Alarms Ramps Limits\Alarms\pg 3
Cmpr1 Val ............... Alarms Ramps Limits\Alarms\pg 2
Cmpr2 Val ............... Alarms Ramps Limits\Alarms\pg 2
Cmpr3 Val ............... Alarms Ramps Limits\Alarms\pg 3
Cmpr4 Val ............... Alarms Ramps Limits\Alarms\pg 3
Copy Source 1 ......... PLC\PLC Data Copy\pg 1
Copy Dest 1 ............ PLC\PLC Data Copy\pg 1
Copy Source 2 ......... PLC\PLC Data Copy\pg 1
CP-261
CP-262
CP-266
CP-267
CP-268
CP-269
CP-270
CP-271
CP-272
CP-273
CP-274
CP-278
CP-279
CP-280
CP-281
CP-282
CP-283
CP-286
CP-287
CP-288
CP-289
CP-292
CP-293
CP-294
CP-295
CP-296
CP-297
CP-298
Screen
(Continued)
F-6
Appendix F: Control Parameter Screen Locator (continued)
CP#
CP Name
Screen
CP-299
CP-300
CP-301
CP-302
CP-303
CP-305
CP-306
CP-307
CP-308
CP-310
CP-311
CP-312
CP-313
CP-314
CP-315
CP-316
CP-317
CP-320
CP-321
CP-322
CP-323
CP-324
CP-325
CP-326
CP-327
CP-328
CP-329
CP-330
CP-331
CP-332
CP-333
CP-334
Copy Dest 2 ............ PLC\PLC Data Copy\pg 1
Remote Scroll ......... PLC\Digital I/O\pg 1
Rmt Scroll Rate ....... PLC\Digital I/O\pg 1
DI 1 Shot ................. PLC\Digital I/O\pg 1
DI Set ...................... PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 1
PLC Monitor 1 ........ PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 1
PLC Monitor 2 ........ PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 1
PLC Bit Set ............. PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 1
PLC Bit Clear .......... PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 1
Tmr1 Delay ............. PLC\PLC Timers\pg 1
Tmr1 on Tm ............ PLC\PLC Timers\pg 1
Tmr2 Delay ............. PLC\PLC Timers\pg 1
Tmr2 on Tm ............ PLC\PLC Timers\pg 1
Tmr3 Delay ............. PLC\PLC Timers\pg 1
Tmr3 on Tm ............ PLC\PLC Timers\pg 1
Tmr4 Delay ............. PLC\PLC Timers\pg 1
Tmr4 on Tm ............ PLC\PLC Timers\pg 1
Cntr1 Trig ................ PLC\PLC Event Cntrs\pg 1
Cntr1 Cnt ................. PLC\PLC Event Cntrs\pg 1
Cntr2 Trig ................ PLC\PLC Event Cntrs\pg 1
Cntr2 Cnt ................. PLC\PLC Event Cntrs\pg 1
Cntr3 Trig ................ PLC\PLC Event Cntrs\pg 1
Cntr3 Cnt ................. PLC\PLC Event Cntrs\pg 1
Cntr4TrigUp ............ PLC\PLC Event Cntrs\pg 1
Cntr4 Cnt ................. PLC\PLC Event Cntrs\pg 1
Cntr4TrigDn ............ PLC\PLC Event Cntrs\pg 1
Cntr4Preset .............. PLC\PLC Event Cntrs\pg 1
DN Write Parm 1 .... Device Configure\DeviceNet Setup\pg 2
DN Write Parm 2 .... Device Configure\DeviceNet Setup\pg 2
DN Write Parm 3 .... Device Configure\DeviceNet Setup\pg 2
DN Write Parm 4 .... Device Configure\DeviceNet Setup\pg 2
DN Read Parm 1 ..... Device Configure\DeviceNet Setup\pg 2
(Continued)
F- 7
Appendix F: Control Parameter Screen Locator (continued)
CP#
CP Name
Screen
CP-335
DN Read Parm 2 ..... Device Configure\DeviceNet Setup\pg 2
Control Parameters
CP-336
DN Read Parm 3 ..... Device Configure\DeviceNet Setup\pg 2
CP-337
DN Read Parm 4 ..... Device Configure\DeviceNet Setup\pg 2
CP-340
Lg Number Parm .... Device Configure\Status Screen Setup\pg 1
CP-341
Status Line 1 ........... Device Configure\Status Screen Setup\pg 1
CP-342
Status Line 2 ........... Device Configure\Status Screen Setup\pg 1
CP-343
Status Line 3 ........... Device Configure\Status Screen Setup\pg 1
CP-344
Status Line 4 ........... Device Configure\Status Screen Setup\pg 1
CP-345
Status Line 5 ........... Device Configure\Status Screen Setup\pg 1
CP-346
Status Line 6 ........... Device Configure\Status Screen Setup\pg 1
CP-350
Diagnostics En ........ Device Tests\Std Signals Tests\pg 2
................................. Device Tests\Digital I/O Test\pg 1
CP-352
Diag DO .................. Device Tests\Digital I/O Test\pg 1
CP-353
Diag DAC Test ........ Device Tests\Std Signals Tests\pg 2
CP-354
Diag DAC Volts ...... Device Tests\Std Signals Tests\pg 2
CP-355
Diag DAC Bits ........ Device Tests\Std Signals Tests\pg 2
CP-356
Diag Rmp Tm ......... Device Tests\Std Signals Tests\pg 2
CP-360
Analog Cal En ......... Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 3
CP-361
Analog Cal Sel ........ Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 3
CP-362
Analog Cal Ref ....... Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 3
CP-363
AnalogRef Val ......... Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 3
CP-364
AO Bit Set ............... Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 3
CP-365
AO Direct ................ Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 3
................................. Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 2
CP-366
CO Offset ................ Scaling\Standard Signals\pg 3
................................. Device Tests\Std Signals Tests\pg 2
CP-368
CRC Enable ............ Device Configure\Serial Comm Setup\pg 1
................................. Device Tests\Serial Comm Test\pg 1
CP-369
Record Format ........ Device Configure\Serial Comm Setup\pg 1
................................. Device Tests\Serial Comm Test\pg 1
CP-370
Device Address ....... Device Configure\Serial Comm Setup\pg 1
(Continued)
F-8
Appendix F: Control Parameter Screen Locator (continued)
CP#
CP-371
CP-372
CP-373
CP-374
CP-374
CP-375
CP-376
CP-377
CP-378
CP-379
CP-380
CP-381
CP-382
CP-383
CP-384
CP-385
CP-386
CP-387
CP-388
CP-389
CP-390
CP-391
CP-392
CP-395
CP-396
CP-397
CP Name
Screen
................................. Device Tests\Serial Comm Test\pg 1
Baud Rate ................ Device Configure\Serial Comm Setup\pg 1
................................. Device Tests\Serial Comm Test\pg 1
Frame Format .......... Device Configure\Serial Comm Setup\pg 1
................................. Device Tests\Serial Comm Test\pg 1
SerCom Char Out .... Device Tests\Serial Comm Test\pg 1
Video Mode ............. Device Configure\Video Setup\pg 1
(continued) .............. Device Tests\Hardware Tests\pg 3
Contrast Value ......... Device Configure\Video Setup\pg 1
................................. Device Tests\Hardware Tests\pg 3
DN MAC ID ........... Device Configure\DeviceNet Setup\pg 1
DN Baud Rate ......... Device Configure\DeviceNet Setup\pg 1
Blk Sel Source ........ System Monitor\Control Overrides\pg 1
Keypad Blk Sel ....... System Monitor\Control Overrides\pg 1
KyPdLk Mask ......... Device Configure\Keypad Lock Setup\pg 1
................................. Device Configure\Keypad Lock Setup\pg 2
Unlock CP A ........... Device Configure\Keypad Lock Setup\pg 1
Unlock CP B ........... Device Configure\Keypad Lock Setup\pg 1
Unlock CP C ........... Device Configure\Keypad Lock Setup\pg 1
Unlock CP D ........... Device Configure\Keypad Lock Setup\pg 1
Unlock CP E ........... Device Configure\Keypad Lock Setup\pg 1
Unlock CP F ............ Device Configure\Keypad Lock Setup\pg 1
Unlock CP G ........... Device Configure\Keypad Lock Setup\pg 1
Unlock CP H ........... Device Configure\Keypad Lock Setup\pg 1
Unlock Block .......... Device Configure\Keypad Lock Setup\pg 2
Memory Test ........... Device Tests\Hardware Tests\pg 1
Clr Fault Cntrs ........ Device Tests\Device Status\pg 1
................................. Device Tests\Device Status\pg 2
Video Test ............... Device Tests\Hardware Tests\pg 3
Serial Number ......... Device Configure\DeviceNet Setup\pg 1
Load Parms ............. Device Configure\Load & Save Parms\pg 1
Load PLC Prgm ...... Device Configure\Load & Save Parms\pg 1
(Continued)
F- 9
Appendix F: Control Parameter Screen Locator (continued)
CP#
CP Name
Screen
CP-398
CP-399
CP-400
CP-401
CP-402
CP-403
CP-404
CP-405
CP-406
CP-407
CP-408
CP-409
CP-410
CP-411
CP-412
CP-413
CP-414
CP-415
CP-440
CP-441
CP-442
CP-443
CP-444
CP-445
CP-446
CP-447
CP-448
CP-449
CP-450
CP-451
CP-452
CP-453
Save Parms .............. Device Configure\Load & Save Parms\pg 1
Save PLC Prgm ....... Device Configure\Load & Save Parms\pg 1
Block Parm 1 ......... Block Setup\Edit Block Parms\pg 1
Block Parm 2 ......... Block Setup\Edit Block Parms\pg 1
Block Parm 3 ......... Block Setup\Edit Block Parms\pg 1
Block Parm 4 ......... Block Setup\Edit Block Parms\pg 1
Block Parm 5 ......... Block Setup\Edit Block Parms\pg 2
Block Parm 6 ......... Block Setup\Edit Block Parms\pg 2
Block Parm 7 ......... Block Setup\Edit Block Parms\pg 2
Block Parm 8 ......... Block Setup\Edit Block Parms\pg 2
Block Parm 9 ......... Block Setup\Edit Block Parms\pg 3
Block Parm 10 ........ Block Setup\Edit Block Parms\pg 3
Block Parm 11 ......... Block Setup\Edit Block Parms\pg 3
Block Parm 12 ........ Block Setup\Edit Block Parms\pg 3
Block Parm 13 ........ Block Setup\Edit Block Parms\pg 4
Block Parm 14 ........ Block Setup\Edit Block Parms\pg 4
Block Parm 15 ........ Block Setup\Edit Block Parms\pg 4
Block Parm 16 ........ Block Setup\Edit Block Parms\pg 4
Blk0 Val 1 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 0\pg 1
Blk0 Val 2 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 0\pg 1
Blk0 Val 3 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 0\pg 1
Blk0 Val 4 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 0\pg 1
Blk0 Val 5 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 0\pg 2
Blk0 Val 6 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 0\pg 2
Blk0 Val 7 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 0\pg 2
Blk0 Val 8 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 0\pg 2
Blk0 Val 9 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 0\pg 3
Blk0 Val10 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 0\pg 3
Blk0 Val11 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 0\pg 3
Blk0 Val12 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 0\pg 3
Blk0 Val13 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 0\pg 4
Blk0 Val14 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 0\pg 4
(Continued)
F - 10
Appendix F: Control Parameter Screen Locator (continued)
CP#
CP Name
Screen
CP-454
CP-455
CP-456
CP-457
CP-458
CP-459
CP-460
CP-461
CP-462
CP-463
CP-464
CP-465
CP-466
CP-467
CP-468
CP-469
CP-470
CP-471
CP-472
CP-473
CP-474
CP-475
CP-476
CP-477
CP-478
CP-479
CP-480
CP-481
CP-482
CP-483
CP-484
CP-485
Blk0 Val15 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 0\pg 4
Blk0 Val16 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 0\pg 4
Blk1 Val 1 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 1\pg 1
Blk1 Val 2 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 1\pg 1
Blk1 Val 3 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 1\pg 1
Blk1 Val 4 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 1\pg 1
Blk1 Val 5 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 1\pg 2
Blk1 Val 6 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 1\pg 2
Blk1 Val 7 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 1\pg 2
Blk1 Val 8 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 1\pg 2
Blk1 Val 9 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 1\pg 3
Blk1 Val10 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 1\pg 3
Blk1 Val11 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 1\pg 3
Blk1 Val12 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 1\pg 3
Blk1 Val13 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 1\pg 4
Blk1 Val14 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 1\pg 4
Blk1 Val15 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 1\pg 4
Blk1 Val16 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 1\pg 4
Blk2 Val 1 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 2\pg 1
Blk2 Val 2 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 2\pg 1
Blk2 Val 3 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 2\pg 1
Blk2 Val 4 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 2\pg 1
Blk2 Val 5 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 2\pg 2
Blk2 Val 6 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 2\pg 2
Blk2 Val 7 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 2\pg 2
Blk2 Val 8 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 2\pg 2
Blk2 Val 9 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 2\pg 3
Blk2 Val10 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 2\pg 3
Blk2 Val11 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 2\pg 3
Blk2 Val12 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 2\pg 3
Blk2 Val13 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 2\pg 4
Blk2 Val14 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 2\pg 4
(Continued)
F- 11
Appendix F: Control Parameter Screen Locator (continued)
CP#
CP Name
Screen
CP-486
CP-487
CP-488
CP-489
CP-490
CP-491
CP-492
CP-493
CP-494
CP-495
CP-496
CP-497
CP-498
CP-499
CP-500
CP-501
CP-502
CP-503
CP-504
CP-505
CP-506
CP-507
CP-508
CP-509
CP-510
CP-511
CP-512
CP-513
CP-514
CP-515
CP-516
CP-517
Blk2 Val15 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 2\pg 4
Blk2 Val16 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 2\pg 4
Blk3 Val 1 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 3\pg 1
Blk3 Val 2 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 3\pg 1
Blk3 Val 3 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 3\pg 1
Blk3 Val 4 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 3\pg 1
Blk3 Val 5 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 3\pg 2
Blk3 Val 6 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 3\pg 2
Blk3 Val 7 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 3\pg 2
Blk3 Val 8 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 3\pg 2
Blk3 Val 9 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 3\pg 3
Blk3 Val10 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 3\pg 3
Blk3 Val11 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 3\pg 3
Blk3 Val12 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 3\pg 3
Blk3 Val13 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 3\pg 4
Blk3 Val14 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 3\pg 4
Blk3 Val15 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 3\pg 4
Blk3 Val16 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 3\pg 4
Blk4 Val 1 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 4\pg 1
Blk4 Val 2 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 4\pg 1
Blk4 Val 3 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 4\pg 1
Blk4 Val 4 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 4\pg 1
Blk4 Val 5 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 4\pg 2
Blk4 Val 6 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 4\pg 2
Blk4 Val 7 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 4\pg 2
Blk4 Val 8 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 4\pg 2
Blk4 Val 9 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 4\pg 3
Blk4 Val10 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 4\pg 3
Blk4 Val11 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 4\pg 3
Blk4 Val12 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 4\pg 3
Blk4 Val13 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 4\pg 4
Blk4 Val14 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 4\pg 4
(Continued)
F - 12
Appendix F: Control Parameter Screen Locator (continued)
CP#
CP Name
Screen
CP-518
CP-519
CP-520
CP-521
CP-522
CP-523
CP-524
CP-525
CP-526
CP-527
CP-528
CP-529
CP-530
CP-531
CP-532
CP-533
CP-534
CP-535
CP-536
CP-537
CP-538
CP-539
CP-540
CP-541
CP-542
CP-543
CP-544
CP-545
CP-546
CP-547
CP-548
CP-549
Blk4 Val15 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 4\pg 4
Blk4 Val16 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 4\pg 4
Blk5 Val 1 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 5\pg 1
Blk5 Val 2 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 5\pg 1
Blk5 Val 3 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 5\pg 1
Blk5 Val 4 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 5\pg 1
Blk5 Val 5 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 5\pg 2
Blk5 Val 6 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 5\pg 2
Blk5 Val 7 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 5\pg 2
Blk5 Val 8 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 5\pg 2
Blk5 Val 9 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 5\pg 3
Blk5 Val10 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 5\pg 3
Blk5 Val11 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 5\pg 3
Blk5 Val12 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 5\pg 3
Blk5 Val13 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 5\pg 4
Blk5 Val14 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 5\pg 4
Blk5 Val15 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 5\pg 4
Blk5 Val16 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 5\pg 4
Blk6 Val 1 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 6\pg 1
Blk6 Val 2 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 6\pg 1
Blk6 Val 3 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 6\pg 1
Blk6 Val 4 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 6\pg 1
Blk6 Val 5 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 6\pg 2
Blk6 Val 6 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 6\pg 2
Blk6 Val 7 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 6\pg 2
Blk6 Val 8 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 6\pg 2
Blk6 Val 9 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 6\pg 3
Blk6 Val10 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 6\pg 3
Blk6 Val11 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 6\pg 3
Blk6 Val12 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 6\pg 3
Blk6 Val13 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 6\pg 4
Blk6 Val14 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 6\pg 4
(Continued)
F- 13
Appendix F: Control Parameter Screen Locator (continued)
F - 14
CP#
CP Name
Screen
CP-550
CP-551
CP-552
CP-553
CP-554
CP-555
CP-556
CP-557
CP-558
CP-559
CP-560
CP-561
CP-562
CP-563
CP-564
CP-565
CP-566
CP-567
Blk6 Val15 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 6\pg 4
Blk6 Val16 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 6\pg 4
Blk7 Val 1 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 7\pg 1
Blk7 Val 2 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 7\pg 1
Blk7 Val 3 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 7\pg 1
Blk7 Val 4 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 7\pg 1
Blk7 Val 5 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 7\pg 2
Blk7 Val 6 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 7\pg 2
Blk7 Val 7 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 7\pg 2
Blk7 Val 8 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 7\pg 2
Blk7 Val 9 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 7\pg 3
Blk7 Val10 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 7\pg 3
Blk7 Val11 ............... Block Setup\Edit Block 7\pg 3
Blk7 Val12 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 7\pg 3
Blk7 Val13 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 7\pg 4
Blk7 Val14 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 7\pg 4
Blk7 Val15 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 7\pg 4
Blk7 Val16 .............. Block Setup\Edit Block 7\pg 4
APPENDIX G: MONITOR PARAMETER
SCREEN LOCATOR
MP#
MP Name
MP-01
FI1 Hz ..................... Scaling\Standard Signals\pg 1
................................. Device Tests\Std Signals Tests\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 2
................................. System Monitor\Std Signals Monitor\pg 1
FI1 RPM.................. Device Tests\Std Signals Tests\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Std Signals Monitor\pg 1
FI1 EU/Tm .............. Scaling\Standard Signals\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Std Signals Monitor\pg 1
FI1 Cnts ................... Device Tests\Std Signals Tests\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Std Signals Monitor\pg 1
FI1 Psn .................... PLC\PLC Position Cntrs\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Std Signals Monitor\pg 1
FI2 Hz ..................... Setpoints\Direct\pg 1
................................. Scaling\Standard Signals\pg 2
................................. Device Tests\Std Signals Tests\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 2
................................. System Monitor\Std Signals Monitor\pg 2
FI2 RPM.................. Device Tests\Std Signals Tests\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Std Signals Monitor\pg 2
FI2 EU/Tm .............. Scaling\Standard Signals\pg 2
................................. System Monitor\Std Signals Monitor\pg 2
FI2 Cnts ................... Device Tests\Std Signals Tests\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Std Signals Monitor\pg 2
FI2 Psn .................... PLC\PLC Position Cntrs\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Std Signals Monitor\pg 2
AI1 Bits ................... Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 1
................................. Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Aux Analog Monitor\pg 1
AI1 Signal ............... Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 1
................................. Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Aux Analog Monitor\pg 1
MP-02
MP-03
MP-04
MP-05
MP-06
MP-07
MP-08
MP-09
MP-10
MP-11
MP-12
Screen
(Continued)
G- 1
Appendix G: Monitor Parameter Screen Locator (continued)
MP#
MP Name
MP-13
AI1 EU/Tm ............. Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Aux Analog Monitor\pg 1
AI2 Bits ................... Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 2
................................. Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Aux Analog Monitor\pg 1
AI2 Signal ............... Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 2
................................. Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Aux Analog Monitor\pg 1
AI2 EU/Tm ............. Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 2
................................. System Monitor\Aux Analog Monitor\pg 1
AnlgCal Ref A ........ Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 3
AnlgCal Ref B ........ Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 3
CO Bits.................... Tuning\Velocity Loop\pg 1
................................. Tuning\Velocity Loop/ZE\pg 1
................................. Tuning\Position Loop\pg 1
................................. Scaling\Standard Signals\pg 3
................................. System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 2
................................. System Monitor\Std Signals Monitor\pg 3
CO Volts .................. Setpoints\Direct\pg 1
................................. Scaling\Standard Signals\pg 3
................................. Device Tests\Std Signals Tests\pg 2
................................. System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Std Signals Monitor\pg 3
CO Max Bits ........... Scaling\Standard Signals\pg 3
................................. System Monitor\Std Signals Monitor\pg 3
AO Bits ................... Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 3
................................. Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 2
................................. System Monitor\Aux Analog Monitor\pg 2
AO Signal ............... Scaling\Aux Analog Signals\pg 3
................................. Device Tests\Aux Analog Tests\pg 2
MP-14
MP-15
MP-16
MP-17
MP-18
MP-20
MP-21
MP-22
MP-24
MP-25
Screen
(Continued)
G-2
Appendix G: Monitor Parameter Screen Locator (continued)
MP#
MP-26
MP-27
MP-28
MP-29
MP-30
MP-34
MP-35
MP-38
MP-39
MP-40
MP-41
MP-42
MP Name
Screen
................................. System Monitor\Aux Analog Monitor\pg 2
DI 7..0 .................... PLC\Digital I/O\pg 1
................................. Device Tests\Digital I/O Test\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Dig I/O Monitor\pg 1
DI 15..8 ................... PLC\Digital I/O\pg 1
................................. Device Tests\Digital I/O Test\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Dig I/O Monitor\pg 1
DO 7..0 ................... PLC\Digital I/O\pg 1
................................. Device Tests\Digital I/O Test\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Limits & Alarms\pg 2
................................. System Monitor\Dig I/O Monitor\pg 1
KeyPad Lockout ..... Device Configure\Keypad Lock Setup\pg 1
................................. Device Configure\Keypad Lock Setup\pg 2
................................. Device Tests\Hardware Tests\pg 2
ScParm Val .............. Scaling\Monitor Parameters\pg 2
PsnErr ...................... Tuning\Velocity Loop/ZE\pg 1
................................. Tuning\Position Loop\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 3
PsnErrCnt ................ System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 3
................................. System Monitor\Std Signals Monitor\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Std Signals Monitor\pg 2
Ld EU/Tm ............... Scaling\Monitor Parameters\pg 1
Fb EU/Tm ............... Setpoints\Direct\pg 1
................................. Scaling\Monitor Parameters\pg 1
Scaled Fb ................. Scaling\Monitor Parameters\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 3
Scaled Ref ............... System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 1
Ramped Ref ............ Tuning\Velocity Loop\pg 1
................................. Tuning\Velocity Loop/ZE\pg 1
(Continued)
G- 3
Appendix G: Monitor Parameter Screen Locator (continued)
MP#
MP-43
MP-44
MP-45
MP-46
MP-47
MP-48
MP-49
MP-50
MP-50
MP-51
MP Name
Screen
................................. Tuning\Position Loop\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 1
SR Error .................. System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 3
RR Error .................. Tuning\Velocity Loop\pg 1
................................. Tuning\Velocity Loop/ZE\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 3
Cntrl Loop ............... Tuning\Velocity Loop\pg 1
................................. Tuning\Velocity Loop/ZE\pg 1
................................. Tuning\Position Loop\pg 1
................................. Tuning\Feedforward\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Control Overrides\pg 1
Feedforward ............ Tuning\Feedforward\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 2
Trim Out .................. Tuning\Velocity Loop\pg 1
................................. Tuning\Velocity Loop/ZE\pg 1
................................. Tuning\Position Loop\pg 1
................................. Tuning\Feedforward\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 2
Integral .................... System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 2
EstMaxFb ................ Tuning\Feedforward\pg 1
................................. Alarms Ramps Limits\Alarms\pg 1
State ......................... Setpoints\Direct\pg 1
................................. Device Tests\Std Signals Tests\pg 2
................................. Device Tests\Digital I/O Test\pg 1
(continued) .............. System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 2
................................. System Monitor\Run Monitor\pg 3
................................. System Monitor\Control Overrides\pg 1
Active Block ........... System Monitor\Limits & Alarms\pg 2
................................. System Monitor\Control Overrides\pg 1
(Continued)
G-4
Appendix G: Monitor Parameter Screen Locator (continued)
MP#
MP Name
MP-52
MP-53
MP-54
MP-55
MP-57
MP-58
MP-59
MP-60
InvalidBlks .............. System Monitor\Limits & Alarms\pg 2
Misc Status .............. System Monitor\Limits & Alarms\pg 2
Std Alarms ............... System Monitor\Limits & Alarms\pg 2
Custom Alms ........... System Monitor\Limits & Alarms\pg 2
Tmr4 Time .............. PLC\PLC Timers\pg 1
PLC Mon 1 Val ....... PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 1
PLC Mon 2 Val ....... PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 1
PLC 15- 8 .............. PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 1
................................. PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 2
PLC 23- 16 ............. PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 2
PLC 31- 24 ............. PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 2
PLC 39- 32 ............. PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 2
PLC 47- 40 ............. PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 2
PLC 55- 48 ............. PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 2
PLC 63- 56 ............. PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 2
PLC 71- 64 ............. PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 2
PLC 79- 72 ............. PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 2
PLC 87- 80 ............. PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 2
PLC 95- 88 ............. PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 3
PLC 107-100 ........... PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 3
PLC 115-108 ........... PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 3
PLC 123-116 ........... PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 3
PLC 131-124 ........... PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 3
PLC 139-132 ........... PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 3
PLC 147-140 ........... PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 3
PLC 155-148 ........... PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 3
PLC 163-156 ........... PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 3
PLC 171-164 ........... PLC\PLC Monitor\pg 3
Last Reset ................ Device Tests\Device Status\pg 1
................................. Device Tests\Device Status\pg 2
Misc Intrpt ............... Device Tests\Device Status\pg 1
MP-61
MP-62
MP-63
MP-64
MP-65
MP-66
MP-67
MP-68
MP-69
MP-70
MP-71
MP-72
MP-73
MP-74
MP-75
MP-76
MP-77
MP-78
MP-79
MP-80
MP-81
Screen
(Continued)
G- 5
Appendix G: Monitor Parameter Screen Locator (continued)
MP#
MP-82
MP-83
MP-84
MP-85
MP-86
MP-87
MP-88
MP-90
MP-91
MP-94
MP-95
MP-96
MP-97
MP-98
MP-99
G-6
MP Name
Screen
................................. Device Tests\Device Status\pg 2
Device Alms ............ Device Tests\Device Status\pg 1
................................. System Monitor\Limits & Alarms\pg 2
PC at Intrpt .............. Device Tests\Device Status\pg 2
Norm Pwr Ups ........ Device Tests\Device Status\pg 1
Low Pwr Cntr .......... Device Tests\Device Status\pg 1
Mem Err Cntr .......... Device Tests\Device Status\pg 1
WatchDogCntr ........ Device Tests\Device Status\pg 1
MiscIntrptCntr ........ Device Tests\Device Status\pg 2
SerCom Char In ...... Device Tests\Serial Comm Test\pg 1
SerCom Errs ............ Device Tests\Serial Comm Test\pg 1
ROM Test ................ Device Tests\Hardware Tests\pg 1
SRAM Test .............. Device Tests\Hardware Tests\pg 1
NV RAM Test ......... Device Tests\Hardware Tests\pg 1
Model # ................... Device Tests\Device Model & Rev\pg1
Release Date ........... Device Tests\Device Model & Rev\pg1
Revision .................. Device Tests\Device Model & Rev\pg1
APPENDIX H: ALPHA TO NUMERIC
QUICK REFERENCE
Code Parameter Name
Code Parameter
Acl Rt Jog ........................................................................................... CP-217
Acl Rt RUN ........................................................................................ CP-202
Acl Tm Drct ....................................................................................... CP-206
Acl Tm Jog ......................................................................................... CP-216
Acl Tm RUN ...................................................................................... CP-201
Active Block....................................................................................... MP-51
AI1 Bits .............................................................................................. MP-11
AI1 EU/Tm ......................................................................................... MP-13
AI1 Mode ........................................................................................... CP-170
AI1 RA ............................................................................................... CP-171
AI1 RB ............................................................................................... CP-173
AI1 Signal .......................................................................................... MP-12
AI2 Bits .............................................................................................. MP-14
AI2 EU/Tm ......................................................................................... MP-16
AI2 Mode ........................................................................................... CP-175
AI2 RA ............................................................................................... CP-176
AI2 RB ............................................................................................... CP-178
AI2 Signal .......................................................................................... MP-15
Analog Cal En .................................................................................... CP-360
Analog Cal Ref ................................................................................... CP-362
Analog Cal Sel ................................................................................... CP-361
AnalogRef Val .................................................................................... CP-363
AnlgCal Ref A .................................................................................... MP-17
AnlgCal Ref B .................................................................................... MP-18
AO Bit Set .......................................................................................... CP-364
AO Bits ............................................................................................... MP-24
AO Direct ........................................................................................... CP-365
AO Mode ............................................................................................ CP-185
AO Parameter ..................................................................................... CP-184
(Continued)
H-1
Appendix H: Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
Code Parameter Name
Code Parameter
AO RA ............................................................................................... CP-186
AO RB ................................................................................................ CP-188
AO Signal ........................................................................................... MP-25
B1 ................................................................................................... CP-155
B2 ................................................................................................... CP-157
B3 ................................................................................................... CP-159
Baud Rate ........................................................................................... CP-371
Blk Sel Source .................................................................................... CP-378
Blk0 Val 1 ........................................................................................... CP-440
Blk0 Val 2 ........................................................................................... CP-441
Blk0 Val 3 ........................................................................................... CP-442
Blk0 Val 4 ........................................................................................... CP-443
Blk0 Val 5 ........................................................................................... CP-444
Blk0 Val 6 ........................................................................................... CP-445
Blk0 Val 7 ........................................................................................... CP-446
Blk0 Val 8 ........................................................................................... CP-447
Blk0 Val 9 ........................................................................................... CP-448
Blk0 Val10 .......................................................................................... CP-449
Blk0 Val11 .......................................................................................... CP-450
Blk0 Val12 .......................................................................................... CP-451
Blk0 Val13 .......................................................................................... CP-452
Blk0 Val14 .......................................................................................... CP-453
Blk0 Val15 .......................................................................................... CP-454
Blk0 Val16 .......................................................................................... CP-455
Blk1 Val 1 ........................................................................................... CP-456
Blk1 Val 2 ........................................................................................... CP-457
Blk1 Val 3 ........................................................................................... CP-458
Blk1 Val 4 ........................................................................................... CP-459
Blk1 Val 5 ........................................................................................... CP-460
(Continued)
H-2
Appendix H: Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
Code Parameter Name
Code Parameter
Blk1 Val 6 ........................................................................................... CP-461
Blk1 Val 7 ........................................................................................... CP-462
Blk1 Val 8 ........................................................................................... CP-463
Blk1 Val 9 ........................................................................................... CP-464
Blk1 Val10 .......................................................................................... CP-465
Blk1 Val11 .......................................................................................... CP-466
Blk1 Val12 .......................................................................................... CP-467
Blk1 Val13 .......................................................................................... CP-468
Blk1 Val14 .......................................................................................... CP-469
Blk1 Val15 .......................................................................................... CP-470
Blk1 Val16 .......................................................................................... CP-471
Blk2 Val 1 ........................................................................................... CP-472
Blk2 Val 2 ........................................................................................... CP-473
Blk2 Val 3 ........................................................................................... CP-474
Blk2 Val 4 ........................................................................................... CP-475
Blk2 Val 5 ........................................................................................... CP-476
Blk2 Val 6 ........................................................................................... CP-477
Blk2 Val 7 ........................................................................................... CP-478
Blk2 Val 8 ........................................................................................... CP-479
Blk2 Val 9 ........................................................................................... CP-480
Blk2 Val10 .......................................................................................... CP-481
Blk2 Val11 .......................................................................................... CP-482
Blk2 Val12 .......................................................................................... CP-483
Blk2 Val13 .......................................................................................... CP-484
Blk2 Val14 .......................................................................................... CP-485
Blk2 Val15 .......................................................................................... CP-486
Blk2 Val16 .......................................................................................... CP-487
Blk3 Val 1 ........................................................................................... CP-488
Blk3 Val 2 ........................................................................................... CP-489
(Continued)
H-3
Appendix H: Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
Code Parameter Name
Code Parameter
Blk3 Val 3 ........................................................................................... CP-490
Blk3 Val 4 ........................................................................................... CP-491
Blk3 Val 5 ........................................................................................... CP-492
Blk3 Val 6 ........................................................................................... CP-493
Blk3 Val 7 ........................................................................................... CP-494
Blk3 Val 8 ........................................................................................... CP-495
Blk3 Val 9 ........................................................................................... CP-496
Blk3 Val10 .......................................................................................... CP-497
Blk3 Val11 .......................................................................................... CP-498
Blk3 Val12 .......................................................................................... CP-499
Blk3 Val13 .......................................................................................... CP-500
Blk3 Val14 .......................................................................................... CP-501
Blk3 Val15 .......................................................................................... CP-502
Blk3 Val16 .......................................................................................... CP-503
Blk4 Val 1 ........................................................................................... CP-504
Blk4 Val 2 ........................................................................................... CP-505
Blk4 Val 3 ........................................................................................... CP-506
Blk4 Val 4 ........................................................................................... CP-507
Blk4 Val 5 ........................................................................................... CP-508
Blk4 Val 6 ........................................................................................... CP-509
Blk4 Val 7 ........................................................................................... CP-510
Blk4 Val 8 ........................................................................................... CP-511
Blk4 Val 9 ........................................................................................... CP-512
Blk4 Val10 .......................................................................................... CP-513
Blk4 Val11 .......................................................................................... CP-514
Blk4 Val12 .......................................................................................... CP-515
Blk4 Val13 .......................................................................................... CP-516
Blk4 Val14 .......................................................................................... CP-517
Blk4 Val15 .......................................................................................... CP-518
(Continued)
H-4
Appendix H: Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
Code Parameter Name
Code Parameter
Blk4 Val16 .......................................................................................... CP-519
Blk5 Val 1 ........................................................................................... CP-520
Blk5 Val 2 ........................................................................................... CP-521
Blk5 Val 3 ........................................................................................... CP-522
Blk5 Val 4 ........................................................................................... CP-523
Blk5 Val 5 ........................................................................................... CP-524
Blk5 Val 6 ........................................................................................... CP-525
Blk5 Val 7 ........................................................................................... CP-526
Blk5 Val 8 ........................................................................................... CP-527
Blk5 Val 9 ........................................................................................... CP-528
Blk5 Val10 .......................................................................................... CP-529
Blk5 Val11 .......................................................................................... CP-530
Blk5 Val12 .......................................................................................... CP-531
Blk5 Val13 .......................................................................................... CP-532
Blk5 Val14 .......................................................................................... CP-533
Blk5 Val15 .......................................................................................... CP-534
Blk5 Val16 .......................................................................................... CP-535
Blk6 Val 1 ........................................................................................... CP-536
Blk6 Val 2 ........................................................................................... CP-537
Blk6 Val 3 ........................................................................................... CP-538
Blk6 Val 4 ........................................................................................... CP-539
Blk6 Val 5 ........................................................................................... CP-540
Blk6 Val 6 ........................................................................................... CP-541
Blk6 Val 7 ........................................................................................... CP-542
Blk6 Val 8 ........................................................................................... CP-543
Blk6 Val 9 ........................................................................................... CP-544
Blk6 Val10 .......................................................................................... CP-545
Blk6 Val11 .......................................................................................... CP-546
Blk6 Val12 .......................................................................................... CP-547
(Continued)
H-5
Appendix H: Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
Code Parameter Name
Code Parameter
Blk6 Val13 .......................................................................................... CP-548
Blk6 Val14 .......................................................................................... CP-549
Blk6 Val15 .......................................................................................... CP-550
Blk6 Val16 .......................................................................................... CP-551
Blk7 Val 1 ........................................................................................... CP-552
Blk7 Val 2 ........................................................................................... CP-553
Blk7 Val 3 ........................................................................................... CP-554
Blk7 Val 4 ........................................................................................... CP-555
Blk7 Val 5 ........................................................................................... CP-556
Blk7 Val 6 ........................................................................................... CP-557
Blk7 Val 7 ........................................................................................... CP-558
Blk7 Val 8 ........................................................................................... CP-559
Blk7 Val 9 ........................................................................................... CP-560
Blk7 Val10 .......................................................................................... CP-561
Blk7 Val11 .......................................................................................... CP-562
Blk7 Val12 .......................................................................................... CP-563
Blk7 Val13 .......................................................................................... CP-564
Blk7 Val14 .......................................................................................... CP-565
Blk7 Val15 .......................................................................................... CP-566
Blk7 Val16 .......................................................................................... CP-567
Block Parm 1 ..................................................................................... CP-400
Block Parm 2 ..................................................................................... CP-401
Block Parm 3 ..................................................................................... CP-402
Block Parm 4 ..................................................................................... CP-403
Block Parm 5 ..................................................................................... CP-404
Block Parm 6 ..................................................................................... CP-405
Block Parm 7 ..................................................................................... CP-406
Block Parm 8 ..................................................................................... CP-407
Block Parm 9 ..................................................................................... CP-408
(Continued)
H-6
Appendix H: Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
Code Parameter Name
Code Parameter
Block Parm 10 .................................................................................... CP-409
Block Parm 11 .................................................................................... CP-410
Block Parm 12 .................................................................................... CP-411
Block Parm 13 .................................................................................... CP-412
Block Parm 14 .................................................................................... CP-413
Block Parm 15 .................................................................................... CP-414
Block Parm 16 .................................................................................... CP-415
Clr Fault Cntrs .................................................................................... CP-391
Cmpr1 Parm ....................................................................................... CP-280
Cmpr1 Type ........................................................................................ CP-286
Cmpr1 Val .......................................................................................... CP-292
Cmpr2 Parm ....................................................................................... CP-281
Cmpr2 Type ........................................................................................ CP-287
Cmpr2 Val .......................................................................................... CP-293
Cmpr3 Parm ....................................................................................... CP-282
Cmpr3 Type ........................................................................................ CP-288
Cmpr3 Val .......................................................................................... CP-294
Cmpr4 Parm ....................................................................................... CP-283
Cmpr4 Type ........................................................................................ CP-289
Cmpr4 Val .......................................................................................... CP-295
Cnt Mode FI1 ..................................................................................... CP-160
Cnt Mode FI2 ..................................................................................... CP-165
Cntr1 Cnt ............................................................................................ CP-321
Cntr1 Trig ........................................................................................... CP-320
Cntr2 Cnt ............................................................................................ CP-323
Cntr2 Trig ........................................................................................... CP-322
Cntr3 Cnt ............................................................................................ CP-325
Cntr3 Trig ........................................................................................... CP-324
Cntr4 Cnt ............................................................................................ CP-327
(Continued)
H-7
Appendix H: Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
Code Parameter Name
Code Parameter
Cntr4Preset ......................................................................................... CP-329
Cntr4TrigDn ....................................................................................... CP-328
Cntr4TrigUp ....................................................................................... CP-326
Cntrl Latch ......................................................................................... CP-240
Cntrl Loop .......................................................................................... MP-45
CO Bits ............................................................................................... MP-20
CO Max Bits ...................................................................................... MP-22
CO Max Volts ..................................................................................... CP-181
CO Mode ............................................................................................ CP-180
CO Offset ........................................................................................... CP-366
CO Polarity......................................................................................... CP-182
CO Volts ............................................................................................. MP-21
Constant 1 ........................................................................................... CP-141
Constant 2 ........................................................................................... CP-142
Constant 3 ........................................................................................... CP-143
Constant 4 ........................................................................................... CP-144
Contrast Value .................................................................................... CP-375
Copy Dest 1 ........................................................................................ CP-297
Copy Dest 2 ........................................................................................ CP-299
Copy Source 1 .................................................................................... CP-296
Copy Source 2 .................................................................................... CP-298
CRC Enable ........................................................................................ CP-368
CustAlm Msk ..................................................................................... CP-279
Custom Alms ...................................................................................... MP-55
Custom SP .......................................................................................... CP-140
Dcl Rt HStp ........................................................................................ CP-214
Dcl Rt Jog ........................................................................................... CP-219
Dcl Rt RStp ........................................................................................ CP-212
Dcl Rt RUN ........................................................................................ CP-204
(Continued)
H-8
Appendix H: Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
Code Parameter Name
Code Parameter
Dcl Tm Drct ....................................................................................... CP-208
Dcl Tm HStp ...................................................................................... CP-213
Dcl Tm Jog ......................................................................................... CP-218
Dcl Tm RStp ...................................................................................... CP-211
Dcl Tm RUN ...................................................................................... CP-203
Deriv Thd PL ...................................................................................... CP-238
Deriv Thd VL ..................................................................................... CP-228
Device Address .................................................................................. CP-370
Device Alms ....................................................................................... MP-82
DI 7..0 ................................................................................................ MP-26
DI 1 Shot ............................................................................................ CP-302
DI 15..8 ............................................................................................... MP-27
DI Set ................................................................................................. CP-303
Diag DAC Bits ................................................................................... CP-355
Diag DAC Test ................................................................................... CP-353
Diag DAC Volts ................................................................................. CP-354
Diag DO ............................................................................................. CP-352
Diag Rmp Tm ..................................................................................... CP-356
Diagnostics En ................................................................................... CP-350
Direct SP ............................................................................................ CP-130
DN Baud Rate .................................................................................... CP-377
DN MAC ID ....................................................................................... CP-376
DN Read Parm 1 ................................................................................ CP-334
DN Read Parm 2 ................................................................................ CP-335
DN Read Parm 3 ................................................................................ CP-336
DN Read Parm 4 ................................................................................ CP-337
DN Write Parm 1 ................................................................................ CP-330
DN Write Parm 2 ................................................................................ CP-331
DN Write Parm 3 ................................................................................ CP-332
(Continued)
H-9
Appendix H: Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
Code Parameter Name
Code Parameter
DN Write Parm 4 ................................................................................ CP-333
DO 7..0 .............................................................................................. MP-28
Drive Type .......................................................................................... CP-222
EstMaxFb ........................................................................................... MP-49
EU FI1 ................................................................................................ CP-163
EU FI2 ................................................................................................ CP-168
EU/Tm Range..................................................................................... CP-108
EU@AI1 RA ...................................................................................... CP-172
EU@AI1 RB ...................................................................................... CP-174
EU@AI2 RA ...................................................................................... CP-177
EU@AI2 RB ...................................................................................... CP-179
Fb @ ScFb EU ................................................................................... CP-192
Fb EU/Tm ........................................................................................... MP-39
Fb Source ........................................................................................... CP-103
Feedforward ....................................................................................... MP-46
Ff Source ............................................................................................ CP-106
FI1 Cnts .............................................................................................. MP-04
FI1 EU/Tm ......................................................................................... MP-03
FI1 Hz ................................................................................................. MP-01
FI1 Psn ............................................................................................... MP-05
FI1 Pulses ........................................................................................... CP-162
FI1 RPM ............................................................................................. MP-02
FI1PsnPrst .......................................................................................... CP-266
FI1PsnRO ........................................................................................... CP-268
FI2 Cnts .............................................................................................. MP-09
FI2 EU/Tm ......................................................................................... MP-08
FI2 Hz ................................................................................................. MP-06
FI2 Psn ............................................................................................... MP-10
FI2 Pulses ........................................................................................... CP-167
(Continued)
H - 10
Appendix H: Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
Code Parameter Name
Code Parameter
FI2 RPM ............................................................................................. MP-07
FI2PsnPrst .......................................................................................... CP-267
FI2PsnRO ........................................................................................... CP-269
Fol Equation ....................................................................................... CP-125
Follower SP ........................................................................................ CP-120
Frame Format ..................................................................................... CP-372
HStp LoopMode ................................................................................. CP-230
Integral ............................................................................................... MP-48
Integral Limit ..................................................................................... CP-259
Inv M Norm ........................................................................................ CP-114
InvalidBlks ......................................................................................... MP-52
Jog Loop Mode .................................................................................. CP-221
Jog SP ................................................................................................. CP-215
Kd VL ................................................................................................ CP-227
Kd PL ................................................................................................. CP-237
Keypad Blk Sel .................................................................................. CP-379
KeyPad Lockout ................................................................................. MP-29
Kff ................................................................................................... CP-224
Kff Auto En ........................................................................................ CP-244
KffAdjUpdt ........................................................................................ CP-242
Ki VL ................................................................................................. CP-226
Ki PL .................................................................................................. CP-236
Kp VL ................................................................................................ CP-225
Kp PL ................................................................................................. CP-235
Kp ZE ................................................................................................. CP-229
KyPdLk Mask .................................................................................... CP-380
Last Reset ........................................................................................... MP-80
Ld EU/Tm .......................................................................................... MP-38
Ld Source ........................................................................................... CP-104
(Continued)
H - 11
Appendix H: Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
Code Parameter Name
Code Parameter
Lg Number Parm ................................................................................ CP-340
Lg Number Units ............................................................................... CP-199
Load Parms......................................................................................... CP-396
Load PLC Prgm .................................................................................. CP-397
Loop Update ....................................................................................... CP-241
Low Pwr Cntr ..................................................................................... MP-85
M1 ................................................................................................... CP-154
M2 ................................................................................................... CP-156
M3 ................................................................................................... CP-158
Master Equation ................................................................................. CP-113
Master SP ........................................................................................... CP-110
Max Acl/Dcl ....................................................................................... CP-272
Max Fb ............................................................................................... CP-233
Max Fb Alm ....................................................................................... CP-271
Max FI2 Psn ....................................................................................... CP-274
Max SP Cust ....................................................................................... CP-146
Max SP Drct ....................................................................................... CP-131
Max SP Fol ......................................................................................... CP-121
Max SP Mstr....................................................................................... CP-111
Max Spd Lmt...................................................................................... CP-250
Mem Err Cntr ..................................................................................... MP-86
Memory Test ...................................................................................... CP-390
Min SP Cust ....................................................................................... CP-147
Min SP Drct ........................................................................................ CP-132
Min SP Fol ......................................................................................... CP-122
Min SP Mstr ....................................................................................... CP-112
Min Spd Lmt ...................................................................................... CP-251
Misc Intrpt .......................................................................................... MP-81
Misc Status ......................................................................................... MP-53
(Continued)
H - 12
Appendix H: Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
Code Parameter Name
Code Parameter
MiscIntrptCntr .................................................................................... MP-88
Model # .............................................................................................. MP-97
NO Resp Time .................................................................................... CP-273
Norm Pwr Ups ................................................................................... MP-84
NV RAM Test .................................................................................... MP-96
Ofs Source .......................................................................................... CP-105
PC at Intrpt ......................................................................................... MP-83
PLC 15- 8 ......................................................................................... MP-60
PLC 23- 16 ........................................................................................ MP-61
PLC 31- 24 ........................................................................................ MP-62
PLC 39- 32 ........................................................................................ MP-63
PLC 47- 40 ........................................................................................ MP-64
PLC 55- 48 ........................................................................................ MP-65
PLC 63- 56 ........................................................................................ MP-66
PLC 71- 64 ........................................................................................ MP-67
PLC 79- 72 ........................................................................................ MP-68
PLC 87- 80 ........................................................................................ MP-69
PLC 95- 88 ........................................................................................ MP-70
PLC 107-100 ...................................................................................... MP-71
PLC 115-108 ...................................................................................... MP-72
PLC 123-116 ...................................................................................... MP-73
PLC 131-124 ...................................................................................... MP-74
PLC 139-132 ...................................................................................... MP-75
PLC 147-140 ...................................................................................... MP-76
PLC 155-148 ...................................................................................... MP-77
PLC 163-156 ...................................................................................... MP-78
PLC 171-164 ...................................................................................... MP-79
PLC Bit Clear ..................................................................................... CP-308
PLC Bit Set ........................................................................................ CP-307
(Continued)
H - 13
Appendix H: Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
Code Parameter Name
Code Parameter
PLC Mon 1 Val ................................................................................... MP-58
PLC Mon 2 Val ................................................................................... MP-59
PLC Monitor 1 ................................................................................... CP-305
PLC Monitor 2 ................................................................................... CP-306
PPR FI1 .............................................................................................. CP-161
PPR FI2 .............................................................................................. CP-166
PPR Mtr .............................................................................................. CP-239
Psn Offset ........................................................................................... CP-262
PsnErr ................................................................................................. MP-34
PsnErr- ................................................................................................ CP-261
PsnErr+ ............................................................................................... CP-260
PsnErrCnt ........................................................................................... MP-35
Ramped Ref ........................................................................................ MP-42
Ratio ................................................................................................... CP-124
Ratio Norm ......................................................................................... CP-123
Record Format .................................................................................... CP-369
Ref Drct Rmp ..................................................................................... CP-205
Ref RUN Rmp .................................................................................... CP-200
Ref StopRmp ...................................................................................... CP-210
Release Date ....................................................................................... MP-98
Remote Scroll ..................................................................................... CP-300
Revision .............................................................................................. MP-99
Rmt Scroll Rate .................................................................................. CP-301
ROM Test ........................................................................................ MP-94
RR Error ............................................................................................. MP-44
RUN Loop Mode ............................................................................... CP-220
Save Parms ......................................................................................... CP-398
Save PLC Prgm .................................................................................. CP-399
Sc Parm .............................................................................................. CP-193
(Continued)
H - 14
Appendix H: Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
Code Parameter Name
Code Parameter
Sc Parm B ........................................................................................... CP-196
Sc Parm Eq ......................................................................................... CP-194
Sc Parm M .......................................................................................... CP-195
Scaled Fb ............................................................................................ MP-40
Scaled Ref .......................................................................................... MP-41
ScFb Eq .............................................................................................. CP-190
ScFb EU ............................................................................................. CP-191
ScParm Val ......................................................................................... MP-30
SerCom Char In ................................................................................. MP-90
SerCom Char Out ............................................................................... CP-373
SerCom Errs ....................................................................................... MP-91
Serial Number .................................................................................... CP-395
Setpoint Mode .................................................................................... CP-102
Setpoint x ........................................................................................... CP-101
Signal Fltr Sel ..................................................................................... CP-248
Signal Fltr Tau .................................................................................... CP-249
SR Error ............................................................................................. MP-43
SRAM Test ....................................................................................... MP-95
State ................................................................................................... MP-50
Status Line 1 ....................................................................................... CP-341
Status Line 2 ....................................................................................... CP-342
Status Line 3 ....................................................................................... CP-343
Status Line 4 ....................................................................................... CP-344
Status Line 5 ....................................................................................... CP-345
Status Line 6 ....................................................................................... CP-346
Std Alarms .......................................................................................... MP-54
Std Alm Msk ...................................................................................... CP-278
Time Base ........................................................................................... CP-109
Tmr1 Delay ........................................................................................ CP-310
(Continued)
H - 15
Appendix H: Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
Code Parameter Name
Code Parameter
Tmr1 on Tm ....................................................................................... CP-311
Tmr2 Delay ........................................................................................ CP-312
Tmr2 on Tm ....................................................................................... CP-313
Tmr3 Delay ........................................................................................ CP-314
Tmr3 on Tm ....................................................................................... CP-315
Tmr4 Delay ........................................................................................ CP-316
Tmr4 on Tm ....................................................................................... CP-317
Tmr4 Time .......................................................................................... CP-57
Trim Authority .................................................................................... CP-258
Trim Out ............................................................................................. MP-47
Unlock Block ..................................................................................... CP-389
Unlock CP A ....................................................................................... CP-381
Unlock CP B ....................................................................................... CP-382
Unlock CP C ....................................................................................... CP-383
Unlock CP D ...................................................................................... CP-384
Unlock CP E ....................................................................................... CP-385
Unlock CP F ....................................................................................... CP-386
Unlock CP G ...................................................................................... CP-387
Unlock CP H ...................................................................................... CP-388
V1 Source ........................................................................................... CP-150
V2 Source ........................................................................................... CP-151
V3 Source ........................................................................................... CP-152
V4 Source ........................................................................................... CP-153
Val@A0 RB ........................................................................................ CP-189
Val@AO RA ...................................................................................... CP-187
Video Mode ........................................................................................ CP-374
Video Test ........................................................................................... CP-392
WatchDogCntr .................................................................................... MP-87
ZE Limit ............................................................................................. CP-253
(Continued)
H - 16
Appendix H: Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference (continued)
Code Parameter Name
Code Parameter
Zero Speed ......................................................................................... CP-270
H - 17
—NOTES—
H - 18
APPENDIX I: DEFAULT PLC PROGRAM
LOGIC
PLC Command
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OR
OR
OUT
8
140
9
141
10
142
11
159
12
130
13
135
14
168
15
169
68
69
74
151
Equivalent Logic Ladder
DI- 8
Blk Sel A
8
140
DI- 9
Blk Sel B
9
141
DI-10
Blk Sel C
10
142
DI-11
Negate SP
11
159
DI-12
Cntr1 Inc
12
130
DI-13
Cntr1 Rst
13
135
DI-14
Scroll Up
DI_8
Blk Sel A
DI_9
Blk Sel B
DI_10
Blk Sel C
DI_11
Negate SP
DI_12
Cntr1 Inc
DI_13
Cntr1 Rst
DI_14
Scroll Up
14
168
DI-15
Scroll Dn
DI_15
Scroll Dn
Loop Open
Loop Vel
H-STOP
RstPsnErr
15
169
Loop Open
RstPsnErr
68
151
Loop Vel
69
H-STOP
74
(Continued)
I-1
Appendix I: Default PLC Program Logic (continued)
PLC Command
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
44
100
48
101
* LD NOT 57
OUT
102
** LOAD
OUT
*** LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
*
**
***
I-2
58
103
59
104
32
105
40
106
41
107
Equivalent Logic Ladder
Fb @ 0Spd
DO_0
44
100
MaxFb Spd
DO_1
48
101
Cmpr2 Out
DO_2
57
102
Cmpr3 Out
DO_3
58
103
Cmpr4 Out
DO_4
59
104
Cntrl Out
DO_5
32
105
CO Sign
DO_6
40
106
Drive En
DO_7
41
107
Fb @ Spd
DO_0
MaxFb Spd
DO_1
Cmpr2 Out
DO_2
Cmpr3 Out
DO_3
Cmpr4 Out
DO_4
Cntrl Out
DO_5
CO Sign
DO_6
Drive En
DO_7
Cmpr2 is setup as a L0 Speed Alarm (Fb EU/Tm <Cmpr2 Val)
Cmpr3 is setup as a Deviation Alarm 1 (RR-FB <Cmpr3 Val)
Cmpr2 is setup as a Deviation Alarm 2 (SR-FB <Cmpr4 Val)
APPENDIX J: PLC BIT-MAP REFERENCE
Bit
Name
Related CP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
S0
S1
ZERO = 0, off state
ONE = 1, on state
Pwr-Up 1 (on) for 1st PLC Scan
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
DI_8, Digital Input 8
DI_9, Digital Input 9
DI_10, Digital Input 10
DI_11, Digital Input 11
DI_12, Digital Input 12
DI_13, Digital Input 13
DI_14, Digital Input 14
DI_15, Digital Input 15
Lch1 Out, Latch 1 Output
Lch2 Out, Latch 2 Output
Lch3 Out, Latch 3 Output
Lch4 Out, Latch 4 Output
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Tmr1 Out, Timer 1 Output ........................................................ CP-310,CP-311
Tmr2 Out, Timer 2 Output ........................................................ CP-312,CP-313
Tmr3 Out, Timer 3 Output ........................................................ CP-314,CP-315
Tmr4 Out, Timer 4 Output ........................................................ CP-316,CP-317
Reserved
Reserved
(Continued)
J-1
Appendix J: PLC Bit-map Reference (continued)
Bit
Name
Related CP
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Reserved
Reserved
Cntr1 Out, Counter 1 Output .................................................... CP-320,CP-321
Cntr2 Out, Counter 2 Output .................................................... CP-322,CP-323
Cntr3 Out, Counter 3 Output .................................................... CP-324,CP-325
Cntr4UpO, Counter 4 Up Counter Output ................................ CP-326,CP-327
Cntr4DnO, Counter 4 Down Counter Output ........................... CP-328,CP-327
Reserved
FI1Psn RO, FI1 Position >= FI1PsnRO ................................... CP-268
FI2Psn RO, FI2 Position >= FI2PsnRO ................................... CP-269
CO Sign, Control Output Signal Sign (1 = Negative)
Drive En, Drive Enable
Ramp Actv, Ramp Active
RR @ 0Spd, Ramped Reference at ‘0’ Speed ........................... CP-270
Fb @ 0 Spd, Feedback at ‘0’ Speed .......................................... CP-270
Reserved
MinSpdLmt, Scaled Ref Speed < Min Spd Lmt ....................... CP-251
MaxSpdLmt, Scaled Ref Speed > Max Spd Lmt ..................... CP-250
MaxFb Spd, Fb EU/Tm > Max Fb Alm EU/T .......................... CP-271
MaxAclDcl, Fb Accel/Decel > Max Acl/Dcl ............................ CP-272
MtrNResp, Motor/Drive NOT responding ............................... CP-273
MaxFI2Psn, /FI2 Position/ >= Max FI2Psn .............................. CP-274
LoPwr Alm, Low Power Alarm
Max FI1Hz, FI1 Hz > Max Hz (120 Khz)
Max FI2Hz, FI2 Hz > Max Hz (120 KHz)
At Max CO, CO SIG Railed at Max Volts ................................ CP-181,MP-22
Cmpr1 Out, Numerical Comparator 1 result ............................ CP-280,286,292
Cmpr2 Out, Numerical Comparator 2 result ............................ CP-281,287,293
Cmpr3 Out, Numerical Comparator 3 result ............................ CP-282,288,294
Cmpr4 Out, Numerical Comparator 4 result ............................ CP-283,289,295
(Continued)
J-2
Appendix J: PLC Bit-map Reference (continued)
Bit
Name
Related CP
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Master (Monitor Only)
Follower (Monitor Only)
Direct (Monitor Only)
Custom SP (Monitor Only)
Loop Open (Monitor Only)
Loop Vel (Monitor Only)
Loop ZE (Monitor Only)
Loop Psn (Monitor Only)
F-STOP, F-Stop State (Monitor Only)
R-STOP, R-Stop State (Monitor Only)
H-STOP, H-Stop State (Monitor Only)
RUN, RUN State (Monitor Only)
Jog Fwd, JOG Forward State (Monitor Only)
Jog Rvs, JOG Reverse State (Monitor Only)
Reserved
Diag St, Diagnostics State (Monitor Only)
Blk Sel 0, Block 0 Selected (Active) - Monitor Only
Blk Sel 1, Block 1 Selected (Active)
Blk Sel 2, Block 2 Selected (Active)
Blk Sel 3, Block 3 Selected (Active)
Blk Sel 4, Block 4 Selected (Active)
Blk Sel 5, Block 5 Selected (Active)
Blk Sel 6, Block 6 Selected (Active)
Bkl Sel 7, Block 7 Selected (Active)
Reserved
Reserved
(Continued)
J-3
Appendix J: PLC Bit-map Reference (continued)
Bit
Name
Related CP
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved (Not accessible)
Reserved (Not accessible)
Reserved (Not accessible)
Reserved (Not accessible)
DO-0, Digital Output 0
DO-1, Digital Output 1
DO-2, Digital Output 2
DO-3, Digital Output 3
DO-4, Digital Output 4
DO-5, Digital Output 5
DO-6, Digital Output 6
DO-7, Digital Output 7
Tmp1, Temporary Control Relay 1, CR1
Tmp2, Temporary Control Relay 2, CR2
Tmp3, Temporary Control Relay 3, CR3
Tmp4, Temporary Control Relay 4, CR4
Tmp5, Temporary Control Relay 5, CR5
Tmp6, Temporary Control Relay 6, CR6
Tmp7, Temporary Control Relay 7, CR7
Tmp8, Temporary Control Relay 8, CR8
Lch1 Set, Latch 1 Set
Lch2 Set, Latch 2 Set
Lch3 Set, Latch 3 Set
Lch4 Set, Latch 4 Set
(Continued)
J-4
Appendix J: PLC Bit-map Reference (continued)
Bit
Name
Related CP
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
Lch1 Rst, Latch 1 Reset
Lch2 Rst, Latch 2 Reset
Lch3 Rst, Latch 3 Reset
Lch4 Rst, Latch 4 Reset
Tmr1 En, Timer 1 Enable .......................................................... CP-310,CP-311
Tmr2 En, Timer 2 Enable .......................................................... CP-312,CP-313
Tmr3 En, Timer 3 Enable .......................................................... CP-314,CP-315
Tmr4 En, Timer 4 Enable .......................................................... CP-316,CP-317
Tmr4 Rst, Timer 4 Reset ........................................................... CP-316,CP-317
Reserved
Cntr1 Inc, Counter 1 Increment ................................................ CP-320,CP-321
Cntr2 Inc, Counter 2 Increment ................................................ CP-322,CP-323
Cntr3 Inc, Counter 3 Increment ................................................ CP-324,CP-325
Cntr4 Inc, Counter 4 Increment ................................................ CP-326,CP-327
Cntr4 Dec, Counter 4 Decrement.............................................. CP-328,CP-327
Cntr1 Rst, Counter 1 Reset ....................................................... CP-321
Cntr2 Rst, Counter 2 Reset ....................................................... CP-323
Cntr3 Rst, Counter 3 Reset ....................................................... CP-325
Cntr4 Rst,, Counter 4 Reset ...................................................... CP-329,CP-327
Reserved
Blk Sel A, Block Select A ........................................................ CP-378,MP-51
Blk Sel B, Block Select B ........................................................ CP-378,MP-51
Blk Sel C, Block Select C ........................................................ CP-378,MP-51
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
RstIntgrl, Reset Integral ............................................................ MP-48
RstFI1Psn, Reset FI1 Position to FI1PsnPrst ........................... CP-266
(Continued)
J-5
Appendix J: PLC Bit-map Reference (continued)
J-6
Bit
Name
Related CP
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
RstFI2Psn, Reset FI2 Position to FI2PsnPrst ........................... CP-267
RstPsnErr, Reset Position Error to 0 ......................................... MP-34, MP-35
FrzIntgrl, Stop Integral (Freeze at Current Value)
OPEN LOOP, Open Loop (Vel or Position) ............................. CP-220,CP-221
Frz Ramp, Stop Ramp (Freeze Ramped Reference speed)....... MP-42
BypRmp, Bypass Ramp (No Ramp)
Reserved
Reserved
Negate CO, Negate CO-SIG Output
Negate SR, Negate SetPoint (Scaled-Reference)
Data Copy 1
Data Copy 2
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Scroll Up, Remote Scroll Up .................................................... CP-300,CP-301
Scroll Dn, Remote Scroll Down ............................................... CP-300,CP-301
Reserved
No Opnd, Nop Operand
APPENDIX K: ERROR CODE DEFINITIONS
Error
Definition
Acl Tm High
Acl too Hi
Adrs Error
Bad Blk Calc
Acceleration time is too high.
Acceleration rate is too high.
Address Error, there is an internal address conflict with the CPU.
During calculations for one of the parameter blocks, an error was
encountered causing the block to be marked as bad. The block
parameter value(s) in error should be corrected.
Bad Blk Sel
An attempt was made to switch to a bad parameter block.
Binary Only
The number is Binary, only “1’s” and “0’s” may be entered.
BkUp Loaded Prompt which displays on completion of loading a code parameter
backup into main CP list.
Blk Parm Err
An error was encountered in the block parameters.
Blk Val Err
An error was encountered in the block values of a block.
Buss Error
There is an internal buss conflict with the CPU.
ChkSm Error
Checksum Error, the checksum calculated for memory data is not
correct.
Dcl Tm High
Deceleration time is too high.
Default Set
Prompt after resetting a parameter back to its default value.
Defaults Set
Prompt after resetting all parameters back to their default values.
Divide By 0
Math error has occurred internal resulting in divide by zero.
DP Present
Decimal point already present in the number you are entering.
Dspl Error
Display Error, an error has occurred when attempting to display a
parameter (e.g., the parameter does not exist).
EstMax<MaxFb Estimated maximum feedback value (MP-49) less than maximum
feedback entry (CP-233).
Field Full
The maximum number of characters (digits, decimal point,
negative sign) allowed for parameter entry has been reached while
entering a number via the keypad. You tried to enter more
numbers/characters than will fit into the space allotted for the
parameter value entry.
(Continued)
K-1
Appendix K: Error Code Definitions (continued)
Error
Definition
Flts Cleared
Prompt to indicate that the faults have been cleared, as a result of
entering a 1 into Clr Fault Cntrs (CP-391)
Some error occurred during the controls program execution to
cause a General Interrupt.
Reset caused by microprocessor or double bus fault.
Illegal Instruction.
An invalid command was encountered during compilation of the
PLC program.
An invalid operand was encountered during compilation of the
PLC program.
The parameter requested is not defined and therefore is invalid.
The keypad is locked out, disallowing entry for this parameter
through the keypad.
There was a Long Word Overflow as a result of some internal
calculation.
There is no clock signal. Last reset caused by the detection of no
clock signal.
The device’s AC input voltage level is low (below the required
specification).
The parameter value just entered is above the maximum allowed
for the parameter.
The maximum number of digits to the right of the decimal point
for the parameter being entered has already been met (an attempt
was made to exceed this limit).
The value just entered for the setpoint exceeds the value set in its
corresponding Max SP (111,121,131,146).
Indicates that a memory test has failed.
Indicates that the memory test has passed.
An internal memory error was encountered.
Gen Intrpt
Halt Monitor
Illegal Inst
Invalid Cmd
Invalid Opnd
Invalid Parm
KyPd Lockout
LgWd Ovfl
LossOf Clock
Low Power
Max Error
Max Res Met
Max SP error
Memory Fail
Memory Pass
Memory Error
(Continued)
K-2
Appendix K: Error Code Definitions (continued)
Error
Definition
Min Error
The parameter value last entered exceeded the minimum value
allowed for the parameter.
Min SP error
The value just entered for the setpoint exceeds the value set in its
corresponding Min SP (112,122,132,147).
Minus First
When entering the value for this parameter the minus sign (-) must
be entered first.
No <END>
During compilation of the PLC program, no END command was
found.
No Cmpr Parm Invalid comparison parameter entered.
Not Allowed
The last action attempted is not allowed.
Not Processd
The request for a parameter value change was not processed due to
a “combo” check error that occurred as a result of some calculation
for a related parameter value or a parameter in a block of
parameters. May be the result of a block parameter transfer to the
control via serial communications.
Not Ready
The control was “not ready” to process the last request.
NVRAM Failed The memory test for the nonvolatile RAM has failed.
NVRAM Passed The memory test for the nonvolatile RAM has passed.
Only 1 Page
Occurs when the page up or page down key is pressed and there is
only one page to display.
Parm Mem Lmt Indicates that the internal memory limit for parameters in block
parameters has been exceeded, and therefore the number of
parameters defined in block parameters must be reduced.
PLC BkUp set Prompt to indicate that the PLC program has been changed to be the
same as the backup PLC program that was saved to backup.
PLC Dflt set
Prompt to indicate that the PLC program has been changed to be the
same as the default PLC program.
(Continued)
K-3
Appendix K: Error Code Definitions (continued)
Error
Definition
PLC Mem Lmt
During compilation of the PLC program, the internal memory limit
set for the PLC program has been exceeded. The PLC program
should be reduced.
Indicates that a momentary loss of AC power was detected.
The position is too high.
The ratio is too high.
The resolution for the last parameter value exceeded the limits for
that parameter (result of a parameter value change using serial
communications).
Indicates that the memory test for the internal ROM part has failed.
Indicates that the memory test for the internal ROM part has passed.
Indicates that the parameter entry is locked out during run. An
attempt was made to enter a parameter value into a parameter that is
locked out during run while the control is in run.
Prompt to indicate that the data has been saved to backup storage
for later use.
The setpoint is too high.
The setpoint is too low.
The speed is too high.
Indicates that the memory test for the internal RAM part has failed.
Indicates that the memory test for the internal RAM part has passed.
Reset caused by microprocessor's test sub-module.
An error has occurred while the CPU was processing to cause an
unimplemented interrupt.
The internal CPU watch dog timer has timed out. CPU is out of
time and is not able to function correctly.
Power Loss
Psn too Hi
Ratio too Hi
Res Error
ROM Failed
ROM Passed
RUN Lockout
Saved 2 BkUp
SP too High
SP too Low
Speed too Hi
SRAM Failed
SRAM Passed
Test Module
UImpd Intrpt
Watch Dog
K-4
–NOTES—
K-5
APPENDIX L: SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS ERROR
CODE DEFINITIONS
# Name
Definition
0 OK
1 General Data Error
Request processed
A non-specified error occurred as a result of the last
serial communications transmission. Check the
contents of the last message transmission against
the protocol definition.
The resolution for the Control Parameter value
exceeds the minimum or maximum that is allowed.
The requested parameter does not exist.
The custom engineering units string that was sent
exceeds the 15 character limit and was truncated to
15 characters.
The parameter requested is above or below the
available number of parameters, or the address
requested for a memory read is not within the
memory address range.
The request is not allowed.
An attempt was made to change a parameter value
for a parameter that is locked out during run, while
the control is in run (state).
The CX-1010 was “not ready” to receive the last
request.
An error was encountered while processing a block
parameter request.
An error was encountered while processing a block
value request.
The internal memory limit for block parameters was
exceeded during processing of a block parameter
change.
There was an attempt to exceed the minimum value
allowed for a parameter value.
2 Res Error
3 Invalid Parm
4 String too long
5 Out of Range
6 Not Allowed
7 Lockout During RUN
8 Not Ready
9 Block Parm Error
10 Block Value Error
11 Parm Memory Limit
12 MIN Error
(Continued)
L-1
Appendix L: Serial CommunicationsError Code Definitions (continued)
# Name
Definition
13 Max Error
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
There was an attempt to exceed the maximum value
allowed for a parameter value.
Invalid Command PLC
An invalid command was encountered during
compilation of the PLC program.
Invalid Operand PLC
An invalid operand was encountered during
compilation of the PLC program.
No <END> PLC
No END command was found during compilation of
the PLC program.
PLC Memory Limit
The internal memory limit for the PLC program was
reached while compiling the PLC program. The PLC
program should be reduced in size.
Defaults Loaded
The default parameter values have been loaded into
the Control Parameters.
Backup Loaded
The backup parameter values have been loaded into
the Control Parameters.
Backup Saved
The Control Parameter values have been saved to
backup storage.
Checksum Error
A checksum calculation error has occurred as a result
of the last request.
Faults Cleared
The fault counters have been cleared.
Passed
The requested memory test passed.
Failed
The requested memory test failed.
No Compare Parm
No compare parameter.
Divide by Zero
The last request caused a “divide by zero” in an
internal calculation.
Long Word Overflow
The last request caused a “long word overflow” in an
internal calculation.
Parm Transfer Limit Error An attempt was made to exceed the maximum number
of parameters allowed for a request.
(Continued)
L-2
Appendix L: Serial Communications Error Code Definitions (continued)
# Name
Definition
29 Memory Read too Long
An attempt was made to read too many bytes of
memory at one time.
The “data field” length did not match the length
expected for the specific serial communications
function request.
The last serial communications function request was
not processed due to a combinational check error.
One or more of the parameters in the block of
parameters sent caused an error.
The serial communications function that was
requested, is not defined in the list of allowed
functions. Check the protocol definition.
30 Data Length Error
31 Not Processed Msg
32 Invalid Serial Comm
L-3
–NOTES—
L-4
APPENDIX M: PLC PROGRAM COMMANDS /
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
Command Description
Decimal:
Hexidecimal:
END Command
224
E0
LOAD Command
225
E1
AND Command
226
E2
OR Command
228
E4
Exclusive OR Command (XOR)
229
E5
NOT Command
232
E8
LOAD NOT Command
233
E9
AND NOT Command
234
EA
OR NOT Command
236
EC
Exclusive OR NOT Command
237
ED
OUT Command
240
F0
NOP Command
255
FF
M-1
—NOTES—
M-2
APPENDIX N: PLC PROGRAM OPERANDS /
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
Operand:
0
1
2
3
4
DESC:
S0
S1
Zero
ONE
Pwr-up
Operand:
5
6
7
Reserved Reserved Trace Done
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
DESC:
DI_8
DI_9
DI_10
DI_11
DI_12
DI_13
DI_14
DI_16
Operand:
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Lch1 Out
Lch2 Out
Lch3 Out
Lch4 Out
24
25
26
27
DESC:
Operand:
DESC:
Operand:
DESC:
Operand:
DESC:
Operand:
DESC:
Operand:
DESC:
Operand:
DESC:
Operand:
DESC:
Operand:
DESC:
Operand:
DESC:
Operand:
DESC:
Tmr1 Out Tmr2 Out
32
33
Cntr1 Out Cntr2 Out
40
41
CO Sign
Drive En
48
49
MaxFbSpd MaxAclDcl
56
Cmpr1 Out
57
Tmr3 Out Tmr4 Out
34
35
Cntr3 Out Cntr4 Out
42
43
Ramp Actv RR@0Spd
50
51
MtrNResp MaxF12Psn
58
59
Cmpr2 Out Cmpr3 Out Cmpr4 Out
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
28
29
30
31
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
36
37
38
39
Cntr5 Out Cntr6 Out Cntr7 Out Cntr8 Out
44
45
46
47
Fb@0Spd Reserved MinSpdLmt MaxSpdLmt
52
LoPwrAlm
60
53
54
55
MaxFI1Hz Max FI2Hz At Max Co
61
62
63
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
Master
Follower
Direct
Custom SP
Loop Open
Loop Vel
Loop ZE
Loop Psn
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
F-STOP
R-STOP
H-STOP
RUN
Jog Fwd
Jog Rvs
Reserved
Diag St
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
Blk Sel 0
Blk Sel 1
Blk Sel 2
Blk Sel 3
Blk Sel 4
Blk Sel 5
Blk Sel 6
Blk Sel 7
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
Reserved Reserved
96
97
Reserved Reserved
Reserved Reserved
98
99
Reserved Reserved
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
100
101
102
103
DO_0
DO_1
DO_2
DO_3
Operand:
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
DESC:
DO_4
DO_5
DO_6
DO_7
Tmp1
Tmp2
Tmp3
Tmp4
117
118
119
Operand:
112
113
114
115
116
DESC:
Tmp5
Tmp6
Tmp7
Tmp8
Lch 1 Set
Operand:
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
Tmr1 En
Tmr2 En
Tmr3 En
Tmr4 En
133
134
135
DESC:
Operand:
DESC:
Operand:
DESC:
Operand:
DESC:
Lch 1 Rst Lch 2 Rst
128
Tmr4 Rst Reserved
136
144
Operand:
160
DESC:
145
130
131
132
Cntr1 Inc
Cntr2 Inc
Cntr3 Inc
138
139
140
Cntr4 Rst Reserved
146
Reserved Reserved Reserved
FrzIntgrl
Operand:
137
Cntr2 Rst Cntr3 Rst
Operand:
1
DESC:
DESC:
129
Lch 3 Rst Lch 4 Rst
152
153
154
Open Loop Frz Ramp
161
162
147
148
Reserved
RstIngrl
155
156
BypRmp
163
DataCopy1 DataCopy2 Reserved Reserved
168
Scroll Up
169
170
Scroll Dn Reserved
Blk Sel A
Lch 2 Set Lch 3 Set Lch 4 Set
Cntr4 Inc Cntr4 Dec Cntr1 Rst
141
142
143
Blk Sel B Blk Sel C Reserved
149
150
151
RstFI1Psn RstFI2Psn RstPsn Err
157
158
159
Reserved Reserved Negate CO Negate SR
164
165
166
167
Reserved Reserved Reserved StrtTrace
171
No Opnd
N-1
—NOTES—
N-2
APPENDIX O: WIRING DIAGRAM EXAMPLES
—>NEED wiring example!!!<—
J5
1
TD / RD +
2
TD/ RD –
3
COM
RS485
SERIAL COMM
J1
FREQUENCY INPUTS
J2
2
DO_0
3
DO_1
4
DO_2
5
DO_3
6
DO_4
7
DO_5
8
DO_6
9
DO_7
10
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
+V_DO
1
FI_1A
2
FI_1A
3
FI_1B
4
FI_1B
5
COM
6
FI_2A
7
FI_2A
8
FI_2B
9
FI-2B
10
COM
11
RI_1
12
RI_2
13
J6
DI_0
1
F-Stop
DI_1
2
R-Stop
COM
3
DI_2
4
H-Stop
DI_3
5
Run
DI_4
6
DI_5
7
Jog
Fwd
COM
8
COM
1
CO_SIG
2
CO_COM
CONTROL
OUTPUT
TO DRIVE
J3
DIGITAL INPUTS
DI_6
9
DI_7
10
J7
DI_8
1
DI_9
2
J4
COM
3
11
22
L1
DI_10
4
DI_11
5
33
GND/PE
DI_12
6
DI_13
7
COM
8
L2/NEUT
AC POWER
INPUT
THIS DIAGRAM IS FOR CONCEPTUAL PURPOSES ONLY !
USE SAFETY EQUIPMENT.
MAKE WIRING CONNECTIONS CAREFULLY.
INCORRECT USE OF EQUIPMENT OR CONNECTIONS CAN CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH.
DANGER
1
+ 12V_AUX
DI_14
9
DI_15
10
CX-1010
Figure O-1 CX-1010 Wiring Connections without Relays
O- 1
Neut
Line
R-Stop
F-Stop
Start
K-R
K-R
Run
K-R
Jog
K-FS
K-FS
J5
1
TD / RD +
2
TD/ RD –
3
COM
RS485
SERIAL COMM
J1
FREQUENCY INPUTS
2
DO_0
3
DO_1
4
DO_2
5
DO_3
6
DO_4
7
DO_5
8
DO_6
9
DO_7
10
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
+V_DO
+ 12V_AUX
1
FI_1A
2
FI_1A
3
FI_1B
4
FI_1B
5
COM
6
FI_2A
7
FI_2A
8
FI_2B
9
FI-2B
10
COM
11
RI_1
12
RI_2
13
J6
DI_0
COM
1
CO_SIG
2
CO_COM
CONTROL
OUTPUT
TO DRIVE
J3
DIGITAL INPUTS
1
DI_1
2
COM
3
DI_2
4
DI_3
H-Stop
K-J
Run
DI_4
6
K-J
DI_5
7
COM
8
DI_6
9
DI_7
10
J7
1
2
J4
COM
3
11
22
L1
DI_10
4
DI_11
5
33
GND/PE
DI_12
6
DI_13
7
COM
8
DI_14
9
DI_15
10
CX-1010
Figure O-2 Relay Start/Stop Wiring Connections
O-2
K-R
F-Stop
R-Stop
5
DI_9
L2/NEUT
K-FS
K-J
DI_8
AC POWER
INPUT
THIS DIAGRAM IS FOR CONCEPTUAL PURPOSES ONLY !
USE SAFETY EQUIPMENT.
MAKE WIRING CONNECTIONS CAREFULLY.
INCORRECT USE OF EQUIPMENT OR CONNECTIONS CAN CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH.
DANGER
J2
1
Armature
Contactor
K-J
K-J
Jog
Fwd
K-R
M1
Line
Neut
Armature
Contactor
12 Volt
Power
Supply
—
+
J5
1
TD / RD +
2
TD/ RD –
3
COM
RS485
SERIAL COMM
J1
2
K-R
+V_DO
DO_0
3
DO_1
4
DO_2
5
DO_3
6
DO_4
7
DO_5
8
DO_6
9
DO_7
10
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
1
4
FI_1B
5
COM
6
FI_2A
7
FI_2A
8
FI_2B
9
FI-2B
10
COM
11
RI_1
12
RI_2
13
DI_0
1
F-Stop
DI_1
2
R-Stop
COM
3
DI_2
4
H-Stop
DI_3
5
Run
DI_4
6
DI_5
7
Jog
Fwd
COM
8
COM
CO_SIG
2
CO_COM
CONTROL
OUTPUT
TO DRIVE
1
DIGITAL INPUTS
V+
K-R
M1 M1
DI_6
9
DI_7
10
J7
1
DI_9
2
J4
COM
3
11
22
L1
DI_10
4
DI_11
5
33
GND/PE
DI_12
6
DI_13
7
COM
8
DI_14
9
DI_15
10
L2/NEUT
AC POWER
INPUT
DI_8
A1
A2
3
FI_1B
DANGER
SPD
2
FI_1A
J6
J3
Regen
Drive
1
FI_1A
THIS DIAGRAM IS FOR CONCEPTUAL PURPOSES ONLY !
USE SAFETY EQUIPMENT.
MAKE WIRING CONNECTIONS CAREFULLY.
INCORRECT USE OF EQUIPMENT OR CONNECTIONS CAN CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH.
FREQUENCY INPUTS
J2
+ 12V_AUX
CX-1010
Figure O-3 Start/Stop for Regen with Armature Contactor
O- 3
—NOTES—
O-4
APPENDIX P: FAX COVER SHEET
Date: ______________________
Atten: Contrex Technical Support
From:
Name _____________________________ Company Name _____________________________________
Telephone # _______________________ Ext # _______________________ Fax # _________________
We have ______ CX-1010(s) that are used for: ________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Serial Communication Hookup: _____Yes _____No
Brief Description of the Problem: __________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Contrex Fax # = (763) 424-8734
We are transmitting _____ pages, including:
This Cover Sheet,
A copy of Appendix D w/ the User Record completed,
P- 1
—NOTES—
P-2
APPENDIX Q: REVISION LOG
Manual
Revision
ECO
Number
A
—
Revision Corresponding *
Date
Software Rev.
03/01
1000-8005
Rev. 1.0
Pages Changed
New Manual Release
* Software revisions may not mandate manual changes. If your software revision is more recent than what is reflected here,
use the the most current revision of the manual.
Q-1
—NOTES—
Q-2
Warranty/Service
Service Policy
Warranty
Service - 1
Warranty - 2
SERVICE POLICY
Contrex, Inc., recognizes that with each sale of its
product there are certain product obligations. This
document defines the limits of such obligations and
provides guidelines for the performance of related
services.
Spare Parts
Contrex, Inc., will usually have an adequate
inventory of spare parts and circuit boards for all
standard products. However, purchasers are
encouraged to maintain a nominal supply of spare
parts to insure immediate on-site accessibility.
Applicability
This Service Policy shall apply to all product sales
of Contrex, Inc. However, it may be modified by
mutual consent. Thus, whenever an accepted
proposal contains wording inconsistent with this
policy, the proposal will prevail with respect to
specific sale or series of sales involved.
Applicability of this policy is also somewhat limited
in cases where products are sold to an OEM for
resale to user. See paragraph below entitled OEM
Service.
Service Personnel
Contrex, Inc., has a staff whose primary
responsibility is service - both factory service and
field (on-site) service. Personnel of this department
are usually available for service on a 24 hour
notice. To facilitate quicker handling of service
requests, either written or by phone, such requests
should be directed to the Contrex, Inc., Technical
Services Department.
Service Charges
Contrex, Inc., reserves the right to charge for all
services performed at the customers request with the
exception of factory service performed under
warranty. All on-site service is charged at flat-rate
per diem rates plus expenses. Any Contrex, Inc.,
product developing defects as defined in the
warranty during its effective period will be repaired
or replaced without charge, providing it is shipped,
prepaid, to Contrex, Inc., 8900 Zachary Lane North,
Maple Grove, Minnesota 55369.
Instruction Manuals
Instructions for installation, maintenance and
troubleshooting are included in manuals that are
provided with the equipment. Repairs may be
performed in the field by competent customer
personnel; but in order to not invalidate the
warranty they must be made in strict accordance
with published instructions, and ONLY AFTER
obtaining approval of the Technical Service
Department (such repairs are usually limited to the
replacement of circuit boards and major
subassemblies, not the repair of these items).
OEM Service
In many instances Contrex, Inc., products are sold
to the original equipment manufactures or
integrators for inclusion in larger systems. In such
cases the obligations of Contrex, Inc., extend only
to that original purchaser. It is the latter's
responsibility to handle any service required by his
customer, the end user. Such problems can usually
be solved by field replacement of complete units.
OEM's are encouraged to buy and maintain a
supply of “loaners” for this purpose. Contrex, Inc.,
will provide factory overhaul service at nominal
charges to support that OEM. Users of Contrex,
Inc., products that were acquired as components of
larger systems may buy service or spare parts
directly from Contrex, Inc., at standard prices, but
they must appeal through the OEM for warranty
service.
If Contrex, Inc., encounters trouble in the field
which appears to be the result of fault or inadequacy
of the system, Contrex, Inc., reserves the right to
recover service charges from the party that
authorized the service activity.
Service - 3
WARRANTY
Contrex, Inc., guarantees this device against defects
in workmanship and materials for a period of one (1)
year from the date of purchase. Any parts or
components that fail during the warranty period will
be replaced or repaired without charge. This
guarantee is void if the device has been damaged by
improper installation or operation, tampering,
careless handling or accident.
When a device fails to function in accordance with
standards set forth in the instruction manual, the
purchaser should contact an authorized
representative of Contrex, Inc., 8900 Zachary Lane
North, Maple Grove, Minnesota 55369. Whether
repairs will take place in the field or at the factory
will be solely the prerogative of Contrex, Inc.
If inspection reveals defects that are caused by faulty
materials or workmanship, Contrex, Inc., reserves
the right to either replace the device or rebuild the
device using new or refurbished warranted parts and
components. In either instance, the device that is
returned to the purchaser meets full factory standards
for new device performance. If there is less than 90
days remaining on the warranty period at the time of
the repair, the warranty will extend to 90 days after
the repair.
Warranty - 4
Parts and services outside the scope of this warranty
will be available at Contrex, Inc., current market
price.
Contrex's liability for a device or it's use, whether
in warranty or not, shall not in any instance exceed
the cost of correcting the defects of the device.
Contrex, Inc., assumes no responsibility for damage
to property or injuries to persons from improper use
of this device.
No express warranties and no implied warranties
whether of merchantability or otherwise (except as
to title), other than those set forth above , which are
expressly made in lieu of all other warranties, shall
apply to any devise sold by Contrex, Inc.
Contrex, Inc., reserves the right to change or
improve its devices without imposing any
obligation upon Contrex, Inc., to make changes or
improvements in previously manufactured devices.
This warranty statement is a summary of Contrex,
Inc's policy. Further limits of liability are contained
in the Contrex, Inc's purchase order
acknowledgments and invoices.
Index
Symbols
43 RR @ 0 Spd page 5-64
44 Fb @ 0 Spd page 5-64
48 MaxFB Spd page 5-64
49 MacAclDcl page 5-64
50 MtrNResp page 5-64
51 MaxFI2Psn page 5-64
A
AC Power Input Voltage Switch page 2-3, 2-5
Acceleration
Ramps. See Alarms*Ramps*Limits; Tuning: Acceleration:
Ramps
Acceleration Rate
Jog page 5-80
Run page 5-74
Acceleration Time
Direct page 5-78
Jog page 5-80
Run page 5-74
Acceleration/Deceleration page Glossary- 9
Accumulated Position Error page 5-102
Acl RT Jog page D-3
Acl Rt Jog page 5-80, C-46, F-4
Acl Rt RUN page 5-74, C-44, D-3, F-4
Acl Tm Drct page 5-78, 5-80, C-45, D-3, F-4
Acl Tm Jog page C-46, D-3, F-4
Acl Tm RUN page 5-74, C-44, D-3, F-4
Acronym Glossary page Glossary- 3
Active Block page 5-115, 6-20, C-9, E-2, G-4
How to Change page 5-115
AI1 page 5-25
Bits page 5-28, 6-24, C-2, E-1, G-1
EU/Tm page 5-28, C-3, E-1, G-2
Eu/Tm page 6-24
Mode page 5-28, 6-24, C-38, D-2, F-2
RA page 5-28, C-38, D-2, F-2
RB page 5-28, C-38, D-2, F-3
Signal page 5-28, 6-24, C-3, E-1, G-1
AI2 page 5-27
Bits page 5-30, 6-24, C-3, E-1, G-2
EU/Tm page 5-30, 6-24, C-3, E-1, G-2
Mode page 5-30, 6-24, C-39, D-2, F-3
RA page 5-30, C-39, D-2, F-3
RB page 5-30, C-39, D-2, F-3
Signal page 5-30, 6-24, C-3, E-1, G-2
Alarms. See Alarms*Ramps*Limits
Alarms*Ramps*Limits page 5-63
Alarms page 5-64
Custom page 5-68, 5-70
Standard page 5-66
Direct Setpoint Ramps page 5-78
Direct page 5-78
Voltage page 5-78
H-Stop Setup page 5-76
Jog Setup page 5-80
Limits page 5-82
R-Stop and H-Stop Setup page 5-76
Run Ramps page 5-73, 5-74
Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference, Appendix H page H-1
Analog
Cal En page C-71, D-7, F-8
Cal Ref page C-72, D-7, F-8
Cal Sel page C-72, D-7, F-8
Calibration page 4-8
I/O Card page 2-27, 2-35
Mounting page 2-29
Input 1 page 2-37, 2-38, 2-39
Input 2 page 2-37, 2-38, 2-39
Inputs page 2-37
Outputs page 2-40
Process Signals page 2-27
Analog I/O Card
Wiring the page 2-35
Analog Input
Input 1 Bits page 5-28
Input 1 EU/Tm page 5-28
Input 1 Mode page 5-28
Input 1 Reference A page 5-28
Input 1 Reference B page 5-28
Input 1 Signal page 5-28
Input 2 EU/Tm page 5-30
Input 2 Mode page 5-30
Input 2 Reference A page 5-30
Input 2 Reference B page 5-30
Input 2 Signal page 5-30
Analog Out
Direct page 5-32
Analog Output
Current Output Wiring page 2-40
Output Bits page 5-32
Output Mode page 5-32
Output Parameter page 5-32
Output Reference A page 5-32
Output Reference B page 5-32
Output Signal page 5-32
Voltage Output Wiring page 2-40
AnalogRef Val page C-72, D-7, F-8
AnlgCal Ref A page C-3, C-40, C-57, E-1, G-2
AnlgCal Ref B page C-4, C-40, C-57, E-1, G-2
AO
Bit Set page C-72, D-7, F-8
Bits page 5-32, 6-26, C-4, C-40, E-1, G-2
Direct page 5-32, C-72, D-7, F-8
Mode page 5-32, 6-26, C-41, D-3, F-3
Parameter page 5-32, C-40, D-3, F-3
RA page 5-32, C-41, D-3, F-3
RB page 5-32, C-41, D-3, F-3
Signal page 5-32, 6-26, C-5, C-40, E-1
Appendices
Appendix A: CX-1010 Specifications page A-3
Appendix B: Formulas page B-1
Appendix C: Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Refere
page C-1
INDEX-1
Appendix D: Control Parameter Reference page D-1
Appendix E: Monitor Parameter Reference page E-1
Appendix F: Control Parameter Scre page F-1
Appendix G: Monitor Parameter Screen page G-1
Appendix H: Alpha to Numeric Quick Reference page H-1
Appendix I: Default PLC program Logic page I-1
Appendix J: PLC Bit-Map Reference page J-1
Appendix K: Error Code Definitions page K-1
Appendix L: Serial Communications Error Code Defi page L1
Appendix M: PLC Program Commands / Serial Comm page
M-1
Appendix N: PLC Programing Operands / Serial Comm page
N-1
Appendix O: Wiring Diagram Examples page O-1
Appendix P: Fax Cover Sheet page P-1
Appendix Q: Revision Log page Q-1
Applications
Constant Speed Windup page 1-5
Continuous Process Fluid Mixing page 1-4
Windup with Dancer page 1-6
Auxiliary
Analog Input 1 page 5-25
Analog Input 1 Equations page B-3
Analog Input 2 page 5-27
Analog Input 2 Equations page B-4
Analog Output Equations page B-5
Aux Analog Signals page 5-25
B
B1 page 5-56, C-36, D-2, F-2
B2 page 5-56, C-36, D-2, F-2
B3 page 5-56, C-36, D-2, F-2
Baud Rate page 5-180, 5-182, 5-184, C-68, C-74, C-75, D7, F-9
Blk Sel Source page 6-28, D-8, F-9
Blk0Val 1-Blk7Val 16 page 5-120, C-80
BlkSel A page 5-115
BlkSel B page 5-115
BlkSel C page 5-115
Block, Active page 5-115
Block Parameters
Block Parm 1 page F-10
Block Parm 2 page D-8, F-10
Block Parm 3 page D-8, F-10
Block Parm 4 page D-8, F-10
Block Parm 5 page D-8, F-10
Block Parm 6 page D-8, F-10
Block Parm 7 page D-9, F-10
Block Parm 8 page D-9, F-10
Block Parm 9 page D-9, F-10
Block Parm 10 page D-9, F-10
Block Parm 11 page D-9, F-10
Block Parm 12 page D-9, F-10
Block Parm 13 page D-9, F-10
Block Parm 14 page D-9, F-10
Block Parm 15 page D-9, F-10
Block Parm 16 page D-9, F-10
Block Parm1- BlockParm 16 page C-79
Block Setup page 5-113, 5-115
Active Block page 5-115
BlkSel A page 5-115
INDEX-2
BlkSel B page 5-115
BlkSel C page 5-115
Edit Block
0-7 page 5-120
Edit Block Parms page 5-116
Save page 5-119
Block Values
Blk0 Val 1 page D-9, F-10
Blk0 Val 2 page D-9, F-10
Blk0 Val 3 page D-9, F-10
Blk0 Val 4 page D-9, F-10
Blk0 Val 5 page D-9, F-10
Blk0 Val 6 page D-9, F-10
Blk0 Val 7 page D-9, F-10
Blk0 Val 8 page D-9, F-10
Blk0 Val 9 page D-9, F-10
Blk0 Val10 page D-9, F-10
Blk0 Val11 page D-9, F-10
Blk0 Val12 page D-9, F-10
Blk0 Val13 page D-9, F-10
Blk0 Val14 page D-9, F-10
Blk0 Val15 page D-9, F-11
Blk0 Val16 page D-9, F-11
Blk1 Val 1 page D-9, F-11
Blk1 Val 2 page D-9, F-11
Blk1 Val 3 page D-9, F-11
Blk1 Val 4 page D-9, F-11
Blk1 Val 5 page D-10, F-11
Blk1 Val 6 page D-10, F-11
Blk1 Val 7 page D-10, F-11
Blk1 Val 8 page D-10, F-11
Blk1 Val 9 page D-10, F-11
Blk1 Val10 page D-10, F-11
Blk1 Val11 page D-10, F-11
Blk1 Val12 page D-10, F-11
Blk1 Val13 page D-10, F-11
Blk1 Val14 page D-10, F-11
Blk1 Val15 page D-10, F-11
Blk1 Val16 page D-10, F-11
Blk2 Val 1 page D-10, F-11
Blk2 Val 2 page D-10, F-11
Blk2 Val 3 page D-10, F-11
Blk2 Val 4 page D-10, F-11
Blk2 Val 5 page D-10, F-11
Blk2 Val 6 page D-10, F-11
Blk2 Val 7 page D-10, F-11
Blk2 Val 8 page D-10, F-11
Blk2 Val 9 page D-10, F-11
Blk2 Val10 page D-10, F-11
Blk2 Val11 page D-10, F-11
Blk2 Val12 page D-10, F-11
Blk2 Val13 page D-10, F-11
Blk2 Val14 page D-10, F-11
Blk2 Val15 page D-10, F-12
Blk2 Val16 page D-10, F-12
Blk3 Val 1 page D-10, F-12
Blk3 Val 2 page D-10, F-12
Blk3 Val 3 page D-11, F-12
Blk3 Val 4 page D-11, F-12
Blk3 Val 5 page D-11, F-12
Blk3 Val 6 page D-11, F-12
Blk3 Val 7 page D-11, F-12
Blk3 Val 8 page D-11, F-12
Blk3 Val 9 page D-11, F-12
Blk3 Val10 page D-11, F-12
Blk3 Val11 page D-11, F-12
Blk3 Val12 page D-11, F-12
Blk3 Val13 page D-11, F-12
Blk3 Val14 page D-11, F-12
Blk3 Val15 page D-11, F-12
Blk3 Val16 page D-11, F-12
Blk4 Val 1 page D-11, F-12
Blk4 Val 2 page D-11, F-12
Blk4 Val 3 page D-11, F-12
Blk4 Val 4 page D-11, F-12
Blk4 Val 5 page D-11, F-12
Blk4 Val 6 page D-11, F-12
Blk4 Val 7 page D-11, F-12
Blk4 Val 8 page D-11, F-12
Blk4 Val 9 page D-11, F-12
Blk4 Val10 page D-11, F-12
Blk4 Val11 page D-11, F-12
Blk4 Val12 page F-12
Blk4 Val13 page D-11, F-12
Blk4 Val14 page D-11, F-12
Blk4 Val15 page D-11, F-13
Blk4 Val16 page D-11, F-13
Blk5 Val 1 page D-12, F-13
Blk5 Val 2 page D-12, F-13
Blk5 Val 3 page D-12, F-13
Blk5 Val 4 page D-12, F-13
Blk5 Val 5 page D-12, F-13
Blk5 Val 6 page D-12, F-13
Blk5 Val 7 page D-12, F-13
Blk5 Val 8 page D-12, F-13
Blk5 Val 9 page D-12, F-13
Blk5 Val10 page D-12, F-13
Blk5 Val11 page D-12, F-13
Blk5 Val12 page D-12, F-13
Blk5 Val13 page D-12, F-13
Blk5 Val14 page D-12, F-13
Blk5 Val15 page D-12, F-13
Blk5 Val16 page D-12, F-13
Blk6 Val 1 page D-12, F-13
Blk6 Val 2 page D-12, F-13
Blk6 Val 3 page D-12, F-13
Blk6 Val 4 page D-12, F-13
Blk6 Val 5 page D-12, F-13
Blk6 Val 6 page D-12, F-13
Blk6 Val 7 page D-12, F-13
Blk6 Val 8 page D-12, F-13
Blk6 Val 9 page D-12, F-13
Blk6 Val10 page D-12, F-13
Blk6 Val11 page D-12, F-13
Blk6 Val12 page D-12, F-13
Blk6 Val13 page D-12, F-13
Blk6 Val14 page D-12, F-13
Blk6 Val15 page D-13, F-14
Blk6 Val16 page D-13, F-14
Blk7 Val 1 page D-13, F-14
Blk7 Val 2 page D-13, F-14
Blk7 Val 3 page D-13, F-14
Blk7 Val 4 page D-13, F-14
Blk7 Val 5 page D-13, F-14
Blk7 Val 6 page D-13, F-14
Blk7 Val 7 page D-13, F-14
Blk7 Val 8 page D-13, F-14
Blk7 Val 9 page D-13, F-14
Blk7 Val10 page D-13, F-14
Blk7 Val11 page D-13, F-14
Blk7 Val12 page D-13, F-14
Blk7 Val13 page D-13, F-14
Blk7 Val14 page D-13, F-14
Blk7 Val15 page D-13, F-14
Blk7 Val16 page D-13, F-14
Block Parm 1 page D-8
Blocks 0-7 page 5-120
Blocks
Blk Sel Source page C-75
Block Setup page 5-113, 5-115
Block Values page 5-120
C
Calculations
CO_SIG Analog Output page 5-106
Kff Adjustment page 5-106
Calibration page 4-3, Glossary- 9
Analog page 4-8
Analog Input 1
Current page 4-11
Voltage page 4-10
Analog Input 2
Current page 4-13
Voltage page 4-12
Analog Output page 4-9
And Scaling AI1 Together page 4-14
Clear Key page 3-3
Clear-7 page 8-48
Clear-8 page 8-48
Clear-9 page 8-48
Closed Loop page Glossary- 9. See also Tuning: Closed Loop
Automatic Feedforward Adjustment page 5-93
Closed Loop Compensation page Glossary- 9
Closed Loop Structures
Tuning page 5-87, 5-89
Clr Fault Cntrs page C-78, D-8, F-9
Cmpr1
Parm page 5-68, C-57, D-5, F-6
Type page 5-68, C-59, D-5, F-6
Val page 5-68, C-61, D-5, F-6
Cmpr2
Parm page 5-68, C-58, D-5, F-6
Type page 5-68, C-60, D-5, F-6
Val page 5-68, C-61, D-5, F-6
Cmpr3
Parm page 5-70, C-59, D-5, F-6
Type page 5-70, C-60, D-5, F-6
Val page 5-70, C-61, D-5, F-6
Cmpr4
Parm page 5-70, C-59, D-5, F-6
Type page 5-70, C-60, D-5, F-6
Val page 5-70, C-61, D-5, F-6
Cnt Mode
FI1 page 5-10, C-36, D-2, F-2
FI2 page 5-12, C-37, D-2, F-2
Cntr1
Cnt page 5-156, C-66, D-6, F-7
Trig page 5-156, C-66, D-6, F-7
INDEX-3
Cntr2
Cnt page 5-156, C-66, D-6, F-7
Trig page 5-156, C-66, D-6, F-7
Cntr3
Cnt page 5-156, C-67, D-6, F-7
Trig page 5-156, C-67, D-6, F-7
Cntr4
Cnt page 5-156, C-67, D-6, F-7
Preset page 5-156, C-67, D-6, F-7
TrigDn page 5-156, C-67, D-6, F-7
TrigUp page 5-156
Cntrl
Latch page C-50, D-4, F-5
Loop page 5-94, 5-98, 5-102, 5-106, 6-6, C-8, C-40, C57, E-2, G-4
CO
Bits page 5-14, 5-94, 5-98, 5-102, 6-8, 6-16, C-4, E1, G-2
DAC Range page C-40, C-57
Max Bits page 5-14, 6-16, C-4, C-40, C-57, E-1, G-2
Max Volts page 5-14, C-40, D-2, F-3
Mode page 5-14, C-39, D-2, F-3
Offset page 5-14, C-73, D-7, F-8
Polarity page 5-14, C-40, D-2, F-3
SIG page 5-59, 5-88, Glossary- 9
Volts page 5-14, 5-60, 6-6, 6-16, C-4, E-1, G-2
CO_SIG
Analog Output Signal page 5-102
Output page 5-108
Code Key page 3-3, Glossary- 9
Code Select Line. See Status Screen: Code Select Line
Configuration page 2-3
Constant
1 page 5-50, 5-54, C-33, D-1, F-2
2 page 5-50, 5-54, C-33, D-1, F-2
3 page 5-51, 5-54, C-34, D-1, F-2
4 page 5-51, 5-54, C-34, D-1, F-2
Contrast Value page 5-186, C-74, D-8, F-9
Control
Command Send page Glossary- 9
Loop page 5-94, 5-98, 5-102, 5-106. See also
Alarms*Ramps*Limits
Output Bits page 5-14, 5-94, 5-98, 5-102
Output Maximum Bit page 5-14
Output Maximum Volts page 5-14
Output Mode page 5-14
Output Offset page 5-14
Output Polarity page 5-14
Output Signal page Glossary- 9
Output Volts page 5-14, 5-60
Signal page 5-59
Control Parameters page 5-3, Glossary- 10, C-75
CP-101 page 6-6, 6-8, 6-10, C-28, D-1, F-1
CP-102 page 5-36, C-28, D-1, F-1
CP-103 page 5-42, 5-48, 5-54, 5-60, C-29, D-1, F-1
CP-104 page 5-48, C-29, D-1, F-1
CP-105 page 5-42, 5-48, C-29, D-1, F-1
CP-106 page 5-106, C-30, D-1, F-1
CP-108 page 5-12, C-30, D-1, F-1
CP-109 page 5-12, 5-30, C-30, D-1, F-1
CP-110 page 5-38, 5-40, 5-42, C-31, D-1, F-1
CP-111 page 5-40, C-31, D-1, F-1
CP-112 page 5-40, C-31, D-1, F-1
INDEX-4
CP-113 page 5-38, 5-42, C-31, D-1, F-1
CP-114 page 5-42, C-31, D-1, F-1
CP-120 page 5-46, 5-48, C-32, D-1, F-1
CP-121 page 5-46, C-32, D-1, F-1
CP-122 page 5-46, C-32, D-1, F-1
CP-123 page 5-48, C-32, D-1, F-1
CP-124 page 5-48, C-32, D-1, F-1
CP-125 page 5-48, C-32, D-1, F-1
CP-130 page 5-59, 5-60, C-33, D-1, F-1
CP-131 page 5-60, C-33, D-1, F-2
CP-132 page 5-60, C-33, D-1, F-2
CP-140 page 5-52, C-33, D-1, F-2
CP-141 page 5-50, 5-54, C-33, D-1, F-2
CP-142 page 5-50, 5-54, C-33, D-1, F-2
CP-143 page 5-51, 5-54, C-34, D-1, F-2
CP-144 page 5-51, 5-54, C-34, D-1, F-2
CP-146 page 5-52, C-34, D-1, F-2
CP-147 page 5-52, C-34, D-1, F-2
CP-150 page 5-51, 5-54, C-34, D-1, F-2
CP-151 page 5-51, C-35, D-2, F-2
CP-152 page 5-51, 5-54, C-35, D-2, F-2
CP-153 page 5-51, 5-54, C-35, D-2, F-2
CP-154 page 5-56, C-35, D-2, F-2
CP-155 page 5-56, C-36, D-2, F-2
CP-156 page 5-56, C-36, D-2, F-2
CP-157 page 5-56, C-36, D-2, F-2
CP-158 page 5-56, C-36, D-2, F-2
CP-159 page 5-56, C-36, D-2, F-2
CP-160 page 5-10, C-36, D-2, F-2
CP-161 page 5-10, C-37, D-2, F-2
CP-162 page 5-10, C-37, D-2, F-2
CP-163 page 5-10, C-37, D-2, F-2
CP-165 page 5-12, C-37, D-2, F-2
CP-166 page 5-12, C-37, D-2, F-2
CP-167 page 5-12, C-37, D-2, F-2
CP-168 page 5-12, C-38, D-2, F-2
CP-170 page 5-28, 6-24, C-38, D-2, F-2
CP-171 page 5-28, C-38, D-2, F-2
CP-172 page 5-28, C-38, D-2, F-3
CP-173 page 5-28, C-38, D-2, F-3
CP-174 page 5-28, C-38, D-2, F-3
CP-175 page 5-30, 6-24, C-39, D-2, F-3
CP-176 page 5-30, C-39, D-2, F-3
CP-177 page 5-30, C-39, D-2, F-3
CP-178 page 5-30, C-39, D-2, F-3
CP-179 page 5-30, C-39, D-2, F-3
CP-180 page 5-14, C-39, D-2, F-3
CP-181 page 5-14, C-40, D-2, F-3
CP-182 page 5-14, C-40, D-2, F-3
CP-184 page 5-32, C-40, D-3, F-3
CP-185 page 5-32, 6-26, C-41, D-3, F-3
CP-186 page 5-32, C-41, D-3, F-3
CP-187 page 5-32, C-41, D-3, F-3
CP-188 page 5-32, C-41, D-3, F-3
CP-189 page 5-32, C-41, D-3, F-3
CP-190 page 5-20, C-42, D-3, F-3
CP-191 page 5-20, C-42, D-3, F-3
CP-192 page 5-20, C-42, D-3, F-3
CP-193 page 5-22, C-42, D-3, F-3
CP-194 page 5-22, C-42, D-3, F-3
CP-195 page 5-22, C-43, D-3, F-3
CP-196 page 5-22, C-43, D-3, F-3
CP-199 page 5-172, C-43, D-3, F-3
CP-200 page 5-74, C-44, D-3, F-4
CP-201 page 5-74, C-44, D-3, F-4
CP-202 page 5-74, C-44, D-3, F-4
CP-203 page 5-74, C-44, D-3, F-4
CP-204 page 5-74, C-44, D-3, F-4
CP-205 page 5-78, C-45, D-3, F-4
CP-206 page 5-78, C-45, D-3, F-4
CP-208 page 5-78, C-45, D-3, F-4
CP-210 page 5-76, C-45, D-3, F-4
CP-211 page 5-76, C-45, D-3, F-4
CP-212 page 5-76, C-45, D-3, F-4
CP-213 page 5-76, C-46, D-3, F-4
CP-214 page 5-76, C-46, D-3, F-4
CP-215 page 5-80, C-46, D-3, F-4
CP-216 page 5-80, C-46, D-3, F-4
CP-217 page 5-80, C-46, D-3, F-4
CP-218 page 5-80, C-46, D-4, F-4
CP-219 page 5-80, C-47, D-4, F-4
CP-220 page 5-36, 5-96, 5-100, 5-104, C-47, D-4, F-4
CP-221 page 5-80, C-47, D-4, F-4
CP-222 page 5-108, C-47, D-4, F-4
CP-224 page 5-106, C-47, D-4, F-4
CP-225 page 5-94, 5-98, C-48, D-4, F-4
CP-226 page 5-94, 5-98, C-48, D-4, F-4
CP-227 page 5-94, 5-98, C-48, D-4, F-4
CP-228 page 5-96, 5-100, 5-104, C-48, D-4, F-4, F-5
CP-229 page 5-98, C-48, D-4, F-5
CP-230 page 5-76, C-49, D-4, F-5
CP-233 page 5-106, C-49, D-4
CP-235 page 5-102, C-49, D-4, F-5
CP-236 page 5-102, C-49, D-4, F-5
CP-237 page 5-102, C-50, D-4, F-5
CP-238 page C-50, D-4, F-5
CP-239 page 5-12, C-50, D-4, F-5
CP-240 page C-50, D-4, F-5
CP-241 page 5-108, C-51, D-4, F-5
CP-242 page 5-106, C-51, D-4, F-5
CP-244 page 5-96, 5-100, 5-104, 5-106, C-51, D-4, F-5
CP-248 page 5-108, C-52, D-4, F-5
CP-249 page 5-108, C-52, D-4, F-5
CP-250 page 5-82, C-52, D-4, F-5
CP-251 page 5-82, C-52, D-4, F-5
CP-253 page 5-82, 5-100, C-53, F-5
CP-255 page 5-74, C-53, D-4, F-5
CP-258 page 5-82, 5-96, 5-100, 5-104, C-53, D-4, F-5
CP-259 page 5-82, 5-96, 5-100, 5-104, C-53, D-4, F-5
CP-260 page 5-82, 5-104, C-54, D-5, F-6
CP-261 page 5-82, 5-104, C-54, D-5, F-6
CP-262 page 5-104, C-54, D-5, F-6
CP-266 page 5-158, C-54, D-5, F-6
CP-267 page 5-158, 5-160, C-54, D-5, F-6
CP-268 page 5-158, C-55, D-5, F-6
CP-269 page 5-158, C-55, D-5, F-6
CP-270 page 5-66, 5-82, C-55, D-5, F-6
CP-271 page 5-66, C-55, D-5, F-6
CP-272 page 5-66, C-55, D-5, F-6
CP-273 page 5-66, C-56, D-5, F-6
CP-274 page 5-66, C-56, D-5, F-6
CP-278 page 5-188, C-56, D-5, F-6
CP-279 page 5-188, C-57, D-5, F-6
CP-280 page 5-68, C-57, D-5, F-6
CP-281 page 5-68, C-58, D-5, F-6
CP-282 page 5-70, C-59, D-5, F-6
CP-283 page 5-70, C-59, D-5, F-6
CP-286 page 5-68, C-59, D-5, F-6
CP-287 page C-60, D-5, F-6
CP-288 page 5-70, C-60, D-5, F-6
CP-289 page 5-70, C-60, D-5, F-6
CP-292 page 5-68, C-61, D-5, F-6
CP-293 page 5-68, C-61, D-5, F-6
CP-294 page 5-70, C-61, D-5, F-6
CP-295 page 5-70, C-61, D-5, F-6
CP-296 page 5-160, C-61, D-5, F-6
CP-297 page 5-160, C-61, D-5, F-6
CP-298 page 5-160, C-62, D-5, F-6
CP-299 page 5-160, C-62, D-5, F-7
CP-300 page 5-164, C-62, D-6, F-7
CP-301 page 5-164, C-62, D-6, F-7
CP-302 page 5-164, C-63, D-6, F-7
CP-303 page 5-144, C-63, D-6, F-7
CP-305 page 5-144, C-64, D-6, F-7
CP-306 page 5-144, C-64, D-6, F-7
CP-307 page 5-144, C-64, D-6, F-7
CP-308 page 5-144, C-64, D-6, F-7
CP-310 page 5-152, C-64, D-6, F-7
CP-311 page 5-152, C-65, D-6, F-7
CP-312 page 5-152, C-65, D-6, F-7
CP-313 page 5-152, C-65, D-6, F-7
CP-314 page 5-152, C-65, D-6, F-7
CP-315 page 5-152, C-65, D-6, F-7
CP-316 page 5-152, C-66, D-6, F-7
CP-317 page 5-152, C-66, D-6, F-7
CP-320 page 5-156, C-66, D-6, F-7
CP-321 page 5-156, C-66, D-6, F-7
CP-322 page 5-156, C-66, D-6, F-7
CP-323 page 5-156, C-66, D-6, F-7
CP-324 page 5-156, C-67, D-6, F-7
CP-325 page 5-156, C-67, D-6, F-7
CP-326 page 5-156, C-67, D-6, F-7
CP-327 page 5-156, C-67, D-6, F-7
CP-328 page 5-156, C-67, D-6, F-7
CP-329 page 5-156, C-67, D-6, F-7
CP-330 page 5-184, C-68, D-6, F-7
CP-331 page 5-184, C-68, D-6, F-7
CP-332 page 5-184, C-68, D-6, F-7
CP-333 page 5-184, C-68, D-6, F-7
CP-334 page 5-184, C-68, D-7, F-7
CP-335 page 5-184, C-68, D-7, F-8
CP-336 page 5-184, C-68, D-7
CP-337 page 5-184, C-68, D-7, F-8
CP-340 page 5-172, C-69, D-7, F-8
CP-341 page 5-172, C-69, D-7, F-8
CP-342 page 5-172, C-69, D-7, F-8
CP-343 page 5-172, C-69, D-7, F-8
CP-344 page 5-172, C-69, D-7, F-8
CP-345 page 5-172, C-69, D-7, F-8
CP-346 page 5-172, C-70, D-7, F-8
CP-350 page C-70, D-7, F-8
CP-352 page C-70, D-7, F-8
CP-353 page C-71, D-7, F-8
CP-354 page C-71, D-7, F-8
CP-355 page C-71, D-7, F-8
CP-356 page C-71, D-7, F-8
CP-360 page C-71, D-7, F-8
CP-361 page C-72, D-7, F-8
CP-362 page C-72, D-7, F-8
INDEX-5
CP-363 page C-72, D-7, F-8
CP-364 page C-72, D-7, F-8
CP-365 page 5-32, C-72, D-7, F-8
CP-366 page 5-14, C-73, D-7, F-8
CP-368 page 5-180, C-73, D-7, F-8
CP-369 page 5-180, C-73, D-7, F-8
CP-370 page 5-180, 5-182, 5-184, C-73, D-7, F-8
CP-371 page 5-180, 5-182, C-74, D-7, F-9
CP-372 page 5-180, 5-182, C-74, D-7, F-9
CP-373 page C-74, D-7, F-9
CP-374 page 5-186, C-74, D-8, F-9
CP-375 page 5-186, C-74, D-8, F-9
CP-376 page 5-182, C-75, F-9
CP-377 page 5-182, C-75, F-9
CP-378 page 6-28, C-75, D-8, F-9
CP-379 page 5-120, 6-28, C-75, D-8, F-9
CP-380 page 5-176, 5-178, C-75, D-8, F-9
CP-381 page 5-176, C-76, D-8, F-9
CP-382 page 5-176, C-76, D-8, F-9
CP-383 page 5-176, C-76, D-8, F-9
CP-384 page 5-176, C-76, D-8, F-9
CP-385 page 5-176, C-76, D-8, F-9
CP-386 page 5-176, C-77, D-8, F-9
CP-387 page 5-176, C-77, D-8, F-9
CP-388 page 5-176, C-77, D-8, F-9
CP-389 page 5-178, C-77, D-8, F-9
CP-390 page C-78, D-8, F-9
CP-391 page C-78, D-8, F-9
CP-392 page C-78, D-8, F-9
CP-395 page 5-182, C-78, F-9
CP-396 page 5-174, C-78, D-8, F-9
CP-397 page 5-174, C-79, D-8, F-9
CP-398 page 5-174, C-79, D-8, F-10
CP-399 page 5-174, C-79, D-8
CP-400 page C-79, D-8, F-10
CP-401 page D-8, F-10
CP-402 page D-8, F-10
CP-403 page D-8, F-10
CP-404 page D-8, F-10
CP-405 page D-8, F-10
CP-406 page D-9, F-10
CP-407 page D-9, F-10
CP-408 page D-9, F-10
CP-409 page D-9, F-10
CP-410 page D-9, F-10
CP-411 page D-9, F-10
CP-412 page D-9, F-10
CP-413 page D-9, F-10
CP-414 page D-9, F-10
CP-415 page C-79, D-9, F-10
CP-440 page C-80, D-9, F-10
CP-440 to CP-567 page 5-120
CP-441 page D-9, F-10
CP-442 page D-9, F-10
CP-443 page D-9, F-10
CP-444 page D-9, F-10
CP-445 page D-9, F-10
CP-446 page D-9, F-10
CP-447 page D-9, F-10
CP-448 page D-9, F-10
CP-449 page D-9, F-10
CP-450 page D-9, F-10
CP-451 page D-9, F-10
INDEX-6
CP-452 page D-9, F-10
CP-453 page D-9, F-10
CP-454 page D-9, F-11
CP-455 page D-9, F-11
CP-456 page D-9, F-11
CP-457 page D-9, F-11
CP-458 page D-9, F-11
CP-459 page D-9, F-11
CP-460 page D-10, F-11
CP-461 page D-10, F-11
CP-462 page D-10, F-11
CP-463 page D-10, F-11
CP-464 page D-10, F-11
CP-465 page D-10, F-11
CP-466 page D-10, F-11
CP-467 page D-10, F-11
CP-468 page D-10, F-11
CP-469 page D-10, F-11
CP-470 page D-10, F-11
CP-471 page D-10, F-11
CP-472 page D-10, F-11
CP-473 page D-10, F-11
CP-474 page D-10, F-11
CP-475 page D-10, F-11
CP-476 page D-10, F-11
CP-477 page D-10, F-11
CP-478 page D-10, F-11
CP-479 page D-10, F-11
CP-480 page D-10, F-11
CP-481 page D-10, F-11
CP-482 page D-10, F-11
CP-483 page D-10, F-11
CP-484 page D-10, F-11
CP-485 page D-10, F-11
CP-486 page D-10, F-12
CP-487 page D-10, F-12
CP-488 page D-10, F-12
CP-489 page D-10, F-12
CP-490 page D-11, F-12
CP-491 page F-12
CP-492 page D-11, F-12
CP-493 page D-11, F-12
CP-494 page D-11, F-12
CP-495 page D-11, F-12
CP-496 page D-11, F-12
CP-497 page D-11, F-12
CP-498 page D-11, F-12
CP-499 page D-11, F-12
CP-500 page D-11, F-12
CP-501 page D-11, F-12
CP-502 page D-11, F-12
CP-503 page D-11, F-12
CP-504 page D-11, F-12
CP-505 page D-11, F-12
CP-506 page D-11, F-12
CP-507 page D-11, F-12
CP-508 page D-11, F-12
CP-509 page D-11, F-12
CP-510 page D-11, F-12
CP-511 page D-11, F-12
CP-512 page D-11, F-12
CP-513 page D-11, F-12
CP-514 page D-11, F-12
CP-515 page D-11, F-12
CP-516 page D-11, F-12
CP-517 page D-11, F-12
CP-518 page D-11, F-13
CP-519 page D-11, F-13
CP-520 page D-12, F-13
CP-521 page D-12, F-13
CP-522 page D-12, F-13
CP-523 page D-12, F-13
CP-524 page D-12, F-13
CP-525 page D-12, F-13
CP-526 page D-12, F-13
CP-527 page D-12, F-13
CP-528 page D-12, F-13
CP-529 page D-12, F-13
CP-530 page D-12, F-13
CP-531 page D-12, F-13
CP-532 page D-12, F-13
CP-533 page D-12, F-13
CP-534 page D-12, F-13
CP-535 page D-12, F-13
CP-536 page D-12, F-13
CP-537 page D-12, F-13
CP-538 page D-12, F-13
CP-539 page D-12, F-13
CP-540 page D-12, F-13
CP-541 page D-12, F-13
CP-542 page D-12, F-13
CP-543 page D-12, F-13
CP-544 page D-12, F-13
CP-545 page D-12, F-13
CP-546 page D-12, F-13
CP-547 page D-12, F-13
CP-548 page D-12, F-13
CP-549 page D-12, F-13
CP-550 page D-13, F-14
CP-551 page D-13, F-14
CP-552 page D-13, F-14
CP-553 page D-13, F-14
CP-554 page D-13, F-14
CP-555 page D-13, F-14
CP-556 page D-13, F-14
CP-557 page D-13, F-14
CP-558 page D-13, F-14
CP-559 page D-13, F-14
CP-560 page D-13, F-14
CP-561 page D-13, F-14
CP-562 page D-13, F-14
CP-563 page D-13, F-14
CP-564 page D-13, F-14
CP-565 page D-13, F-14
CP-566 page D-13, F-14
CP-567 page C-80, D-13, F-14
Default to back-up
Clear-9 page 8-48
Default to factory settings
Clear-7 page 8-48
Clear-8 page 8-48
Reference page D-1
Screen Locator page F-1
Control-loop. See Tuning: Control: Loop
Copy Dest 1 page 5-160
Copy Dest 2 page 5-160
Copy Source 1 page 5-160
Copy Source 2 page 5-160
CRC page Glossary- 10
CRC Enable page 5-180, C-73, D-7, F-8
CustAlm Msk page 5-188, C-57, D-5, F-6
Custom. See Alarms*Ramps*Limits: Alarms: Custom
Setpoints. See Setpoints: Custom
Custom mode page 5-50
Custom Alms page 6-20, C-11, C-57, E-2, G-5
Custom Setpoint page 5-52
Custom Setpoint equation page 5-50
Custom Setpoint Mod page 5-36
Custom SP page 5-52, C-33, D-1, F-2
CX–1010
Application
Constant Speed Windup page 1-5
Continuous Process Fluid Mixing page 1-4, 5-163
Windup with Dancer page 1-6
Digital Inputs. See Inputs: Digital
Digital Outputs page 2-23. See also Digital Outputs
Inputs page 2-10
Introducing the page 1-3
Multidrop Installation page 2-24
Outputs page 2-21
Serial Communications page 2-24
Serial Communications Connections page 2-25
Wiring page 2-8
Cyclical Redundancy Check page Glossary- 10
D
Dcl Rt HStp page 5-76, C-46, D-3, F-4
Dcl Rt Jog page 5-80, C-47, D-4, F-4
Dcl Rt RStp page 5-76, C-45, D-3, F-4
Dcl Rt RUN page 5-74, C-44, D-3, F-4
Dcl Tm Drct page 5-78, C-45, D-3, F-4
Dcl Tm HStp page 5-76, C-46, D-3, F-4
Dcl Tm Jog page 5-80, C-46, D-4, F-4
Dcl Tm RStp page 5-76, C-45, D-3, F-4
Dcl Tm RUN page 5-74, C-44, D-3, F-4
Deceleration Rate page 5-74
H-Stop page 5-76
Jog page 5-80
R-Stop page 5-76
Run page 5-74
Deceleration Time
Direct page 5-78
H-Stop page 5-76
Jog page 5-80
R-Stop page 5-76
Run page 5-74
Default PLC Program Logic, Appendix I page I-1
Default to factory settings
Reference page D-1
Screen Locator page F-1
Deriv Thd PL page C-50, D-4, F-5
Deriv Thd VL page 5-96, 5-100, 5-104, C-48, D-4, F-4
Derivative Constant page 5-102
Derivative Term page 5-88
Derivative Threshold Velocity Loop page 5-96, 5-100, 5-104
Device Address page 5-180, 5-182, 5-184, C-68, C-73, D7, F-8
Device Alms page 6-20, C-25, C-58, E-3, G-6
INDEX-7
Device Configure page 5-171
Alarm Indicator Mask page 5-188
DeviceNet Setup page 5-182
Keypad Lockout Setup page 5-176, 5-178
Load & Save Parms page 5-174
Serial Com Setup page 5-180
Status Screen Setup page 5-172
Video Setup page 5-186
DeviceNet page 2-41
DeviceNet Setup page 5-182
DI 7..0 page G-3
DI 1 Shot page 5-164, C-63, D-6, F-7
DI 15..8 page 5-164, 6-22, C-5, C-40, E-1, G-3
DI 7..0 page 5-164, 6-22, C-5, C-40, E-1
DI Set page 5-144, C-63, D-6, F-7
Diag DAC Bits page C-71, D-7, F-8
Diag DAC Test page C-71, D-7, F-8
Diag DAC Volts page C-71, D-7, F-8
Diag DO page C-70, D-7, F-8
Diag Rmp Tm page C-71, D-7, F-8
Diagnostics En page C-70, D-7, F-8
Digital Inputs. See Inputs: Digital
Digital Motor Controller page Glossary- 10
Digital Outputs page 2-23. See also Output: Digital
Direct
Setpoints. See Setpoints: Direct
Direct Mode page 5-36, 5-59, Glossary- 10
Direct Setpoint page 5-60
Direct SP page 5-59, 5-60, C-33, D-1, F-1
DN Baud Rate page 5-182
DN MAC ID page 5-182
DN Read Parm 1 page 5-184
DN Read Parm 2 page 5-184
DN Read Parm 3 page 5-184
DN Read Parm 4 page 5-184
DN Write Parm 1 page 5-184
DN Write Parm 2 page 5-184
DN Write Parm 3 page 5-184
DN Write Parm 4 page 5-184
DO 7..0 page G-3
DO 7..0 page 5-164, 6-20, 6-22, C-6, E-1
Drive Enable page Glossary- 10
Drive Setup/Calibration page 4-1
Drive Type page 5-108, C-47, D-4, F-4
E
Edit Block
0-7 page 5-120
Edit Block / Save page 5-124
Edit Block 0-7 page 5-116
Edit Block Parms
1-16 page 5-116
Save page 5-119
EEPROM Chip page Glossary- 10
Electrical Compatibility page 2-3
Enclosure
For the CX-1010 page 2-7
Engineering Units page 5-5
Engineering Units (E.U.) page Glossary- 11
Engineering Units per Time Range page 5-12
Enter Key page 3-3
Error Message Bar page 5-118
INDEX-8
Estimated Maximum Feedback page 5-66, 5-106
EstMaxFb page 5-66, 5-106, C-9, C-57, E-2, G-4
EU at Analog Input 1 Reference A page 5-28
EU FI1 page 5-10, C-37, D-2, F-2
EU FI2 page 5-12, C-38, D-2, F-2
EU Frequency Input 1 page 5-10
EU/Tm Range page 5-12, C-30, D-1, F-1
EU@AI1 RA page 5-28, C-38, D-2, F-3
EU@AI1 RB page 5-28, C-38, D-2, F-3
EU@AI2 RA page 5-30, C-39, D-2, F-3
EU@AI2 RB page 5-30, C-39, D-2, F-3
EU@Analog Input 1 Reference B page 5-28
EU@Analog Input 2 Reference A page 5-30
EU@Analog Input 2 Reference B page 5-30
F
F–Stop page 2-44, Glossary- 11
Wiring page 2-15
Fax Cover Sheet, Appendix P page P-1
Fb @ 0 Spd page 5-64
Fb @ ScFb EU page 5-20, C-42, D-3, F-3
Fb EU/Tm page 5-20, 5-60, C-7, E-2, G-3
Fb Source page 5-42, 5-48, 5-54, 5-60, C-29, D-1, F-1
Feedback. See Scaling: Monitor Parameters
Feedback EU/Tm page 5-20, 5-60
Feedback Source page 5-42, 5-48, 5-54, 5-60
Feedback@ Scaled Feedback EU page 5-20
Feedforward page 5-106, 6-8, C-8, E-2, G-4. See also
Alarms*Ramps*Limits
Automatic Adjustment page 5-93
Feedforward Source page 5-106
Ff Source page 5-106, C-30, D-1, F-1
FI1 Cnts page 6-12, C-1, E-1, G-1
FI1 EU/Tm page 5-10, 6-12, C-1, E-1, G-1
FI1 Hz page 5-10, 6-8, 6-12, C-1, E-1, G-1
FI1 Psn page 5-158, 6-12, C-1, E-1, G-1
FI1 PsnPrst page 5-158, 5-160, C-54, D-5, F-6
FI1 PsnRO page 5-158, C-55, D-5, F-6
FI1 Pulses page 5-10, C-37, D-2, F-2
FI1 RPM page 6-12, C-1, E-1, G-1
FI2 Cnts page 6-14, C-2, E-1, G-1
FI2 EU/Tm page 5-12, 6-14, C-2, E-1, G-1
FI2 Hz page 5-12, 5-60, 6-8, 6-14, C-2, E-1, G-1
FI2 Psn page 5-158, 6-14, C-2, E-1, G-1
FI2 PsnPrst page 5-158, C-54, D-5, F-6
FI2 PsnRO page 5-158, C-55, D-5, F-6
FI2 Pulses page 5-12, C-37, D-2, F-2
FI2 RPM page 6-14, C-2, E-1, G-1
Fol Equation page 5-48, C-32, D-1, F-1
Follower. See Setpoints: Follower
Follower Mode page 5-36, Glossary- 11
Follower plus Offset page 5-45
Follower Setpoint page 5-46, 5-48
Follower SP page 5-46, 5-48, C-32, D-1, F-1
Formulas, Appendix B page B-1
Frame Format page 5-180, 5-182, C-74, C-78, D-7, F-9
Frequency Input 1 page 5-7
Frequency Input 1 Engineering Units per Time page 5-10
Frequency Input 1 Equations page B-2
Frequency Input 1 Hertz page 5-10
Frequency Input 1 Pulses page 5-10
Frequency Input 2 page 5-7
Frequency Input 2 Engineering Units per Time page 5-12
Frequency Input 2 Equations page B-1
Frequency Input 2 Hz page 5-12, 5-60
Frequency Input 2 Pulses page 5-12
Inv M Norm page 5-42, C-31, D-1, F-1
InvalidBlks page 6-20, C-10, C-57, E-2, G-5
Inverse Follower Mode page 5-45
Inverse Master Norm page 5-42
G
J
Gain page Glossary- 11
General Wiring page 2-8
Glossary page Glossary- 9
J2 pin 2 page 2-21
J2 pin 3 page 2-21
J2 pin 4 page 2-21
J2 pin 5 page 2-22
J2 pin 6 page 2-22
J2 pin 7 page 2-22
J2 pin 8 page 2-22
J2 pin 9 page 2-22
J3 pins 1, 2 page 2-21
J4 pins 1, 2, 3 page 2-10
J5 pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 page 2-11
J5 pins 1, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 page 2-13
J6 pins 1, 3 page 2-15
J6 pins 2, 3 page 2-15
J6 pins 3, 4 page 2-15
J6 pins 3, 5 page 2-16
J6 pins 6, 8 page 2-16
J6 pins 7, 8 page 2-16
J6 pins 8, 9 page 2-17
J7 pins 1, 3 page 2-17
J7 pins 2, 3 page 2-17
J7 pins 3, 4 page 2-18
J7 pins 3, 5 page 2-18
J7 pins 6, 8 page 2-19
J7 pins 7, 8 page 2-19
J7 pins 8, 10 page 2-20
J7 pins 8, 9 page 2-20
JA, Pins 2, 3, 4 page 2-38
JA, Pins 2, 4 page 2-37, 2-39
JA, Pins 5, 6, 7 page 2-38, 2-39
JA, Pins 5, 7 page 2-37
JA, Pins 9, 10, 11 page 2-40
Jog page Glossary- 12
Wiring page 2-16
Jog Forward page 2-48
Jog Loop Mode page 5-80, C-47, D-4, F-4
Jog Reverse page 2-49
Jog Setpoint page 5-80. See also
Alarms*Ramps*Limits; Tuning: Jog Setpoint
Jog SP page 5-80, C-46, D-3, F-4
H
H–Stop page 2-46
Wiring page 2-15
H-Stop
Quadrature FB and Loop Type H-S set to OL page 2-50
Quadrature FB and Loop Type H-S set to Pos page 2-50
Quadrature FB and Loop Type H-S set to Vel page 2-50
Quadrature FB and Loop Type H-S set to ZE Pos page 2-50
With Non-Quadrature page 2-50
H-Stop Loop Mode page 5-76
Hardwired page Glossary- 11
Help Screen page 3-5, 3-9
Help Screen Key page 3-3, Glossary- 11
Help Screens
Samples page 3-10
Housing
The CX-1010 page 2-7
HStp LoopMode page 5-76, C-49, D-4, F-5
I
Increment Scroll Up/Down page 3-3, Glossary- 11
Input 1. See Scaling: Aux Analog Signals
Input 2. See Scaling: Aux Analog Signals
Input Monitoring page Glossary- 11
Inputs page Glossary- 11
Analog page 2-37
Digital
Digital Input 0 page 2-15
Digital Input 1 page 2-15
Digital Input 10 page 2-18
Digital Input 11 page 2-18
Digital Input 12 page 2-19
Digital Input 13 page 2-19
Digital Input 14 page 2-20
Digital Input 15 page 2-20
Digital Input 2 page 2-15
Digital Input 3 page 2-16
Digital Input 4 page 2-16
Digital Input 5 page 2-16
Digital Input 6 page 2-17
Digital Input 8 page 2-17
Digital Input 9 page 2-17
Frequency Input 1 page 2-11
Frequency Input 2 page 2-13
Wiring page 2-10
Inputs, analog. See Analog Input 1 or 2
Integral page 6-8, Glossary- 12, C-8, E-2, G-4
Integral Constant page 5-102
Integral Limit page 5-82, 5-96, 5-100, 5-104, C-53, F-5
Integral term page 5-88
Intgrl Lmt page D-4
K
Kd PL page 5-102, C-50, D-4, F-5
Kd Velocity Loop page 5-94, 5-98
Kd VL page 5-94, 5-98, C-48, D-4, F-4
Keypad Blk Sel page 6-28, C-75, D-8
Keypad Block Select page 5-120
KeyPad Lockout page 5-176, 5-178, 8-6, C-6, C-40, C57, E-1, G-3
Keypad Operation page 3-3
Clear Key page 3-3
Code Key page 3-3
Enter Key page 3-3
Help Screen Key page 3-3
Increment Scroll Up/Down page 3-3
LCD Screen Display page 3-3
INDEX-9
Menu Key page 3-3
Numeric Keys page 3-3
Page Up/Down Keys page 3-3
Parameter Up/Down Keys page 3-3
Status Screen Key page 3-3
Keypad Test page Glossary- 12
Keys
Clear Key page 3-3
Code Key page 3-3
Enter Key page 3-3
Help Screen Key page 3-3
Increment Scroll Up/Down page 3-3
Menu Key page 3-3
Numeric Keys page 3-3
Page Up/Down Keys page 3-3
Parameter Up/Down Keys page 3-3
Status Screen Key page 3-3
Keys, location of page 3-3
Kff page 5-106, C-47, D-4, F-4
Kff Adj Mode page 5-106
Kff Adjust Update page 5-106
Kff Adjustment
Calculations page 5-106
Kff Auto En page 5-96, 5-100, 5-104, 5-106, D-4, F-5
Kff Automatic Enable page 5-96, 5-100, 5-104, 5-106
KffAdjUpdt page 5-106, C-51, D-4, F-5
Ki PL page 5-102, C-49, D-4, F-5
Ki Velocity Loop page 5-94, 5-98
Ki VL page 5-94, 5-98, C-48, D-4, F-4
Kp PL page 5-102, C-49, D-4, F-5
Kp Velocity Loop page 5-94, 5-98
Kp VL page 5-94, 5-98, C-48, D-4, F-4
Kp ZE page 5-98, C-48, D-4, F-5
KyPdLk Mask page 5-176, 5-178, C-75, D-8
L
Large Number Display. See Status Screen: Large Number
Display
Last Reset page C-24, C-58, E-3, G-5
LCD Screen Display page 3-3, Glossary- 12
Ld EU/Tm page 5-20, C-7, C-40, C-57, E-2, G-3
Ld Source page 5-48, C-29, D-1, F-1
Lead EU/Tm page 5-20
Lead Source page 5-48
Lg Number Parm page 5-172, C-69, D-7, F-8
Lg Number Units page 5-172, C-43, D-3, F-3
Load Parms page 5-174, C-78, D-8, F-9
Load PLC Prgm page 5-174, C-79, D-8, F-9
Logic Control page 2-43
H–Stop page 2-46. See also H–Stop
Jog Forward page 2-48
Jog Reverse page 2-49
R–Stop page 2-45
Run page 2-47
Logic Inputs page 2-44
Loop
Loop
Tuning page 5-88
Open page 5-88
Position page 5-87, 5-90. See also Tuning: Position Loop
Velocity page 5-87. See also Tuning: Velocity Loop
Velocity Loop / ZE page 5-98
INDEX-10
Velocity PID page 5-89
Zero Error. See Tuning: Position Loop
Zero Error Position page 5-91
Zero Loop page 5-87
Loop Update page 5-108, C-51, D-4, F-5
Loop-Type Selection page 5-94
Low Pwr Cntr page C-26, E-3, G-6
M
M1 page 5-56, C-35, D-2, F-2
M2 page 5-56, C-36, D-2, F-2
M3 page 5-56, C-36, D-2, F-2
Main Menu page 3-5
Main Menu Screen page 3-7
Master page 5-42. See also Setpoints: Master
Master Equation page 5-38, 5-42, C-31, D-1, F-1
Master Mode page 5-36, Glossary- 12
Master Setpoint page 5-40, 5-42
Master SP page 5-38, 5-40, 5-42, C-31, D-1, F-1
Max Acl/Dcl page 5-64, 5-66, C-55, D-5, F-6
Max Error page 5-118
Max Fb page 5-106, C-49
Max Fb Alm page 5-66, C-55, D-5, F-6
Max FI2 Psn page 5-66, C-56, D-5, F-6
Max SP Cust page 5-52, C-34, D-1, F-2
Max SP Drct page 5-60, C-33, D-1, F-2
Max SP Fol page 5-46, C-32, D-1, F-1
Max SP Mstr page 5-40, C-31, D-1, F-1
Max Spd Lmt page 5-82, C-52, D-4, F-5
MaxFB Spd page 5-64
MaxFI2Psn page 5-64
Maximum Feedback page 5-106
Maximum Feedback Alarm page 5-66
Maximum FI2 Position page 5-66
Maximum Setpoint Custom page 5-52
Maximum Setpoint Follower page 5-46
Maximum Setpoint Master page 5-40
Maximum Speed Limit page 5-82
Mem Err Cntr page C-26, E-3, G-6
Memory Test page C-78, D-8, F-9
Menu Key page 3-3, Glossary- 13
Min SP Cust page 5-52, C-34, D-1, F-2
Min SP Drct page 5-60, C-33, D-1, F-2
Min SP Fol page 5-46, C-32, D-1, F-1
Min SP Mstr page 5-40, C-31, D-1, F-1
Min Spd Lmt page 5-82, C-52, D-4, F-5
Minimum Setpoint Custom page 5-52
Minimum Setpoint Direct page 5-60
Minimum Setpoint Follower page 5-46
Minimum Setpoint Master page 5-40
Minimum Speed Limit page 5-82
Misc Intrpt page C-25, G-5
Misc Intrpts page C-58, E-3
Misc Status page 6-20, C-10, C-57, E-2, G-5
MiscIntrptCntr page C-26, E-3, G-6
Mode of Operation page Glossary- 13
MODEL page E-3
MODEL # page C-28, G-6
Monitor
The Performance of the CX-1010 page 6-3
Monitor Parameter Reference, Appendix E page E-1
Monitor Parameter Screen Locator, Appendix G page G-1
Monitor Parameters page 6-3, Glossary- 13
Monitor Parameters, Scaling page 5-17
Monitor Screens page 6-5
Motor Does Not Run page 8-41
Motor Does Not Stop page 8-41
Motor Runs at Wrong Speed page 8-41
Motor Runs Unstable page 8-41
Mounting
The CX-1010 page 2-7
Mounting the Analog I/O Card page 2-29
MP-01 page 5-10, 6-8, 6-12, C-1, E-1, G-1
MP-02 page 6-12, C-1, E-1, G-1
MP-03 page 5-10, 6-12, C-1, E-1, G-1
MP-04 page 6-12, C-1, E-1, G-1
MP-05 page 5-158, 6-12, C-1, E-1, G-1
MP-06 page 5-12, 5-60, 6-8, 6-14, C-2, E-1, G-1
MP-07 page 6-14, C-2, E-1, G-1
MP-08 page 5-12, 6-14, C-2, E-1, G-1
MP-09 page 6-14, C-2, E-1, G-1
MP-10 page 5-158, 6-14, C-2, E-1, G-1
MP-11 page 5-28, 6-24, C-2, E-1, G-1
MP-12 page 5-28, 6-24, C-3, E-1, G-1
MP-13 page 5-28, 6-24, C-3, E-1, G-2
MP-14 page 5-30, 6-24, C-3, E-1, G-2
MP-15 page 5-30, 6-24, C-3, E-1, G-2
MP-16 page 5-30, 6-24, C-3, E-1, G-2
MP-17 page C-3, C-40, C-57, E-1, G-2
MP-18 page C-4, C-40, C-57, E-1, G-2
MP-20 page 5-14, 5-94, 5-98, 5-102, 6-8, 6-16, C-4, E1, G-2
MP-21 page 5-14, 5-60, 6-6, 6-16, C-4, E-1, G-2
MP-22 page 5-14, 6-16, C-4, C-40, C-57, E-1, G-2
MP-23 page C-4, C-40, C-57, E-1
MP-24 page 5-32, 6-26, C-4, C-40, E-1, G-2
MP-25 page 5-32, 6-26, C-5, C-40, E-1, G-2
MP-26 page 5-164, 6-22, C-5, C-40, E-1, G-3
MP-27 page 5-164, 6-22, C-5, C-40, E-1, G-3
MP-28 page 5-164, 6-20, 6-22, C-6, E-1, G-3
MP-29 page 5-176, 5-178, 8-6, C-6, C-40, C-57, E-1, G-3
MP-30 page 5-22, C-6, C-57, E-1, G-3
MP-34 page 5-98, 5-102, 6-10, C-6, E-1, G-3
MP-35 page 6-10, 6-12, 6-14, C-7, E-1, G-3
MP-38 page 5-20, C-7, C-40, C-57, E-2, G-3
MP-39 page 5-20, 5-60, C-7, E-2, G-3
MP-40 page 5-20, 6-10, C-7, C-57, E-2, G-3
MP-41 page C-7, E-2, G-3
MP-42 page 5-94, 5-98, 5-102, 6-6, C-7, E-2, G-3
MP-43 page 6-10, C-8, E-2, G-4
MP-44 page 5-94, 5-98, 6-6, 6-10, C-8, E-2, G-4
MP-45 page 5-94, 5-98, 5-102, 5-106, 6-6, C-8, C-57, E2, G-4
MP-46 page 6-8, C-8, E-2, G-4
MP-47 page 5-94, 5-98, 5-102, 5-106, 6-8, C-8, E-2, G-4
MP-48 page 6-8, C-8, E-2, G-4
MP-49 page 5-66, 5-106, C-9, C-57, E-2, G-4
MP-50 page 5-60, 6-6, 6-8, 6-10, 6-28, C-9, E-2, G-4
MP-51 page 6-20, C-9, E-2, G-4
MP-52 page 6-20, C-10, C-57, E-2, G-5
MP-53 page 6-20, C-10, C-57, E-2, G-5
MP-54 page 6-20, C-11, C-57, E-2, G-5
MP-55 page 6-20, C-11, C-57, E-2, G-5
MP-57 page 5-152, E-2, G-5
MP-58 page 5-144, C-12, C-57, E-2, G-5
MP-59 page 5-144, C-12, C-58, E-2, G-5
MP-60 page 5-144, 5-146, C-12, C-58, E-2, G-5
MP-61 page 5-146, C-13, C-58, E-2, G-5
MP-62 page 5-146, C-13, C-58, E-2, G-5
MP-63 page 5-146, C-14, C-58, E-2, G-5
MP-64 page 5-146, C-15, C-58, E-2, G-5
MP-65 page C-16, C-58, E-2, G-5
MP-66 page 5-146, C-16, C-58, E-2, G-5
MP-67 page 5-146, C-17, C-58, E-2, G-5
MP-68 page 5-146, C-17, C-58, E-2, G-5
MP-69 page 5-146, C-18, C-58, E-3, G-5
MP-70 page 5-148, C-18, C-58, E-3, G-5
MP-71 page 5-148, C-19, C-58, E-3, G-5
MP-72 page 5-148, C-19, C-58, E-3, G-5
MP-73 page 5-148, C-20, C-58, E-3, G-5
MP-74 page 5-148, C-20, C-58, E-3, G-5
MP-75 page 5-148, C-21, C-58, E-3, G-5
MP-76 page 5-148, C-21, C-58, E-3, G-5
MP-77 page 5-148, C-22, C-58, E-3, G-5
MP-78 page 5-148, C-23, C-58, E-3, G-5
MP-79 page 5-148, C-24, C-58, E-3, G-5
MP-80 page C-24, C-58, E-3, G-5
MP-81 page C-25, C-58, E-3, G-5
MP-82 page 6-20, C-25, C-58, E-3, G-6
MP-83 page C-25, C-58, E-3, G-6
MP-84 page C-26, E-3, G-6
MP-85 page C-26, E-3, G-6
MP-86 page C-26, E-3, G-6
MP-87 page C-26, E-3, G-6
MP-88 page C-26, E-3, G-6
MP-90 page C-26, E-3, G-6
MP-91 page C-27, E-3, G-6
MP-94 page C-27, E-3, G-6
MP-95 page C-27, E-3, G-6
MP-96 page C-27, E-3, G-6
MP-97 page C-28, E-3, G-6
MP-98 page C-28, E-3, G-6
MP-99 page C-28, E-3, G-6
MtrNResp page 5-64
Multidrop Installation page 2-24
N
Negative Position Error page 5-82, 5-104
NO Resp Time page 5-66, C-56, D-5, F-6
Norm Pwr Ups page C-26, E-3, G-6
Not Allowed page 5-118
Not Defined page 5-118
Not Used page 5-118
Numeric Keys page 3-3, Glossary- 13
NV RAM Test page C-27, E-3, G-6
O
Offset Source page 5-42, 5-48
Ofs Source page 5-42, 5-48, C-29, D-1, F-1
Open Loop page Glossary- 13
Open Loop Structure
Tuning page 5-88
operating limits. See Alarms*Ramps*Limits
Operation
Keypad page 3-3
Screen Operation page 3-5
Help Screens page 3-9
INDEX-11
Main Menu Screen page 3-7
Status Screen page 3-6
Sub-Menu Screen page 3-8
Setpoints page 5-35
Operator Interface page 3-1
Output. See Scaling: Aux Analog Signals
Output Monitoring page Glossary- 13
Outputs page Glossary- 13
Analog page 2-40
Digital
Digital Output 0 page 2-21
Digital Output 1 page 2-21
Digital Output 2 page 2-21
Digital Output 3 page 2-22
Digital Output 4 page 2-22
Digital Output 5 page 2-22
Digital Output 6 page 2-22
Digital Output 7 page 2-22
Wiring page 2-21
Outputs, analog. See Analog Output:Current or Voltage
P
Page Up/Down Keys page 3-3, Glossary- 14
Parameter page Glossary- 14
Parameter Code page 5-3, Glossary- 14
Parameter Name page 5-3, Glossary- 14
Parameter Summary Numeric Quick Reference page C-1
Parameter Up/Down Keys page 3-3, Glossary- 14
Parameter Value page 5-3, Glossary- 14
PC at Intrpt page C-25, C-58, E-3, G-6
PI Software page Glossary- 9
PID page 5-88
PID / position loop page 5-102
PID compensator page 5-102
PLC page 5-120, 5-127
Commands page 5-128
Counters page 5-155
Digital I/O page 5-163
Event Counters page 5-156
Latches page 5-139
Operands page 5-130
PLC Monitor page 5-143, 5-144, 5-146, 5-148
PLC Timers page 5-152
Position Counters page 5-158, 5-160
Programmable Logic Controller Controller page 5-125
Programming Examples page 5-133
Pulse Generator - One Shot page 5-141
Timers page 5-151
PLC 15-8 page 5-144, 5-146, C-12, C-58, E-2, G-5
PLC 23-16 page 5-146, C-13, C-58, E-2, G-5
PLC 31-24 page 5-146, C-13, C-58, E-2, G-5
PLC 39-32 page 5-146, C-14, C-58, E-2, G-5
PLC 47-40 page 5-146, C-15, C-58, E-2, G-5
PLC 55-48 page 5-146, C-16, C-58, E-2, G-5
PLC 63-56 page 5-146, C-16, C-58, E-2, G-5
PLC 71-64 page 5-146, C-17, C-58, E-2, G-5
PLC 79-72 page 5-146, C-17, C-58, E-2, G-5
PLC 87-80 page 5-146, C-18, C-58, E-3, G-5
PLC 95-88 page 5-148, C-18, C-58, E-3, G-5
PLC 107-100 page 5-148, C-19, C-58, E-3, G-5
PLC 115-108 page 5-148, C-19, C-58, E-3, G-5
PLC 123-116 page 5-148, C-20, C-58, E-3, G-5
INDEX-12
PLC 131-124 page 5-148, C-20, C-58, E-3, G-5
PLC 139-132 page 5-148, C-21, C-58, E-3, G-5
PLC 147-140 page 5-148, C-21, C-58, E-3, G-5
PLC 155-148 page 5-148, C-22, C-58, E-3, G-5
PLC 163-156 page 5-148, C-23, C-58, E-3, G-5
PLC 171-164 page 5-148, C-24, C-58, E-3, G-5
PLC Bit Clear page 5-144, C-64, D-6, F-7
PLC Bit Set page 5-144, C-64, D-6, F-7
PLC Bit-Map Reference, Appendix J page J-1
PLC Bits page 5-64
PLC Data Copy page 5-160
PLC Mon 1 Val page 5-144, C-12, C-57, E-2, G-5
PLC Mon 2 Val page 5-144, C-12, C-58, E-2, G-5
PLC Monitor 1 page 5-144, C-64, D-6, F-7
PLC Monitor 2 page 5-144, C-64, D-6, F-7
PLC Program Commands / Serial Communications page M-1
PLC Program Operands / Serial Communications page N-1
Position Error page 5-98
Position error, accumulated page 5-102
Position Loop / PID page 5-102
Position Offset page 5-104
Positive Position Error page 5-82, 5-104
PPR FI1 page 5-10, C-37, D-2, F-2
PPR FI2 page 5-12, C-37, D-2, F-2
PPR Mtr page 5-12, C-50, D-4, F-5
Programmable Logic Controller. See PLC
PLC page 5-125
Programming
PLC page 5-166
Proportional Gain Constant page 5-102
Proportional plus Derivative plus Integral (PID) page 5-88
Proportional term page 5-88
Psn Offset page 5-104, C-54, D-5, F-6
PsnErr page 5-98, 5-102, 6-10, C-6, E-1, G-3
PsnErr+ page 5-82, 5-104, C-54, D-5, F-6
PsnErr- page 5-82, 5-104, C-54, D-5, F-6
PsnErrCnt page 6-10, 6-12, 6-14, C-7, E-1, G-3
Pulses Per Revolution page 5-10
R
R–Stop page 2-45, Glossary- 15
Wiring page 2-15
Ramp Thd page 5-74, C-53, D-4, F-5
Ramped Ref page 5-94, 5-98, 5-102, 6-6, C-7, E-2, G-3
Ramped Reference page 5-94, 5-98, 5-102
Ramped Reference Error page 5-94, 5-98
Ratio page 5-48, C-32, D-1, F-1
Ratio Norm page 5-48, C-32, D-1, F-1
Record Format page 5-180, C-73, D-7, F-8
Ref Drct Rmp page 5-78, C-45, D-3, F-4
Ref RUN Rmp page 5-74, C-44, D-3, F-4
Ref Stop Rmp page 5-76, C-45, D-3, F-4
Reference page D-1
Reference Direct Ramp page 5-78
Reference Run Ramp page 5-74
Reference Stop Ramp page 5-76
Related Items page 5-108
RELEASE DATE page C-28, E-3, G-6
Remote Scroll page 5-164, C-62, D-6, F-7
REVISION page C-28, E-3, G-6
Revision Log, Appendix Q page Q-1
Ring Kits page Glossary- 14
Rmt Scroll Rate page 5-164, C-62, D-6
ROM Test page C-27, E-3, G-6
RPM Feedback page Glossary- 14
RPM Lead page Glossary- 14
RR @ 0Spd page 5-64
RR Error page 5-94, 5-98, 6-6, 6-10, C-8, E-2, G-4
RS–485-A page 2-24
Run page 2-47, Glossary- 15
Wiring page 2-16
RUN Loop Mode page 5-36, 5-96, 5-100, 5-104, C-47, D4, F-4
Run Modes. See Setpoints: Run Mode
Run Ramps. See Alarms*Ramps*Limits
S
Save page 5-119
Edit Block page 5-124
Edit Block Parms page 5-119
Save Parms page 5-174, C-79, D-8, F-10
Save PLC Prgm page 5-174, C-79, D-8, F-10
Sc Parm page 5-22, C-42, D-3, F-3
Sc Parm B page 5-22, C-43, D-3, F-3
Sc Parm Eq page 5-22, C-42, D-3, F-3
Sc Parm M page 5-22, C-43, D-3, F-3
Scaled Fb page 5-20, 6-10, C-7, C-57, E-2, G-3
Scaled Feedback page 5-20
Scaled Feedback Equation page 5-20
Scaled Feedback EU page 5-20
Scaled Parameter page 5-22
Scaled Parameter B page 5-22
Scaled Parameter Equation page 5-22
Scaled Parameter M page 5-22
Scaled Parameter Value page 5-22
Scaled Ref page C-7, E-2, G-3
Scaling page 5-5, Glossary- 15
Aux Analog Signals
Input 1 page 5-25, 5-28
Input 2 page 5-27, 5-30
Output page 5-32
Monitor Parameters
Feedback page 5-17
Selectable page 5-22
Standard Signals
Control Output page 5-14
Frequency Input 1 page 5-7, 5-10
Frequency Input 2 page 5-7, 5-12
ScFb Eq page 5-20, C-42, D-3, F-3
ScFb EU page 5-20, C-42, D-3, F-3
ScParm Val page 5-22, C-6, C-57, E-1, G-3
Screen Matrix page 3-5
Screen Operation page 3-5
Selectable. See Scaling: Monitor Parameters
SerCom Char In page C-26, E-3, G-6
SerCom Char Out page C-74, D-7, F-9
SerCom Errs page C-27, E-3, G-6
Serial Communications page 2-24, Glossary- 15
Connections page 2-25
Serial Number page 5-182
Setpoint Mode page 5-36, C-28, D-1, F-1
Setpoint x page 6-6, 6-8, 6-10, C-28, D-1, F-1
Setpoints page 5-35
Custom page 5-50, 5-52, 5-54, 5-56
Direct page 5-59, 5-60
Follower page 5-44, 5-46, 5-48
Master page 5-38, 5-40
Run Modes page 5-36
Signal Filter Select page 5-108
Signal Fltr Sel page 5-108, C-52, D-4, F-5
Signal Fltr Tau page 5-108, C-52, D-4, F-5
Specifications for the CX-1010 page A-3
Speed Command page 5-102
SR Error page 6-10, C-8, E-2, G-4
SRAM Test page C-27, E-3, G-6
Standard Signals. See Scaling: Standard Signals
State page 5-60, 6-6, 6-8, 6-10, 6-28, C-9, E-2, G-4
Status Line 1 page 5-172, C-69, D-7, F-8
Status Line 2 page 5-172, C-69, D-7, F-8
Status Line 3 page 5-172, C-69, D-7, F-8
Status Line 4 page 5-172, C-69, D-7, F-8
Status Line 5 page 5-172, C-69, D-7, F-8
Status Line 6 page 5-172, C-70, D-7, F-8
Status Screen page 3-5, 3-6
Code Select Line page 3-6
Large Number Display page 3-6
Status Screen Key page 3-3, Glossary- 15
Std Alarms page 6-20, C-11, C-57, E-2, G-5
Std Alm Msk page 5-188, C-56, D-5, F-6
Sub-Menu Screen
Samples page 3-8
Sub-Menus page 3-5
System Monitor page 6-5
Aux Analog Monitor
Inputs page 6-24
Outputs page 6-26
Control Overrides page 6-32
Bypass the Ramp page 6-32
Negate Setpoint page 6-32
Open Loop page 6-32
Position & Error page 6-30
Reset Integral page 6-32
State & Blocks page 6-28
Stop the Integral page 6-32
Stop the Ramp page 6-32
DIG I/O Monitor page 6-22
Limits and Alarms
Active Alarms page 6-18
Run Monitor
Detail page 6-8
Errors page 6-10
Summary page 6-6
STD Signal Monitor
Control Output page 6-16
Frequency Input 1 page 6-12
Frequency Input 2 page 6-14
T
Technical Support page ii, 8-41
Term, Derivative page 5-88
Term, Integral page 5-88
Term, Proportional page 5-88
Time Base page 5-12, 5-30, C-30, D-1, F-1
Time Constant page 5-108
Tmr1 Delay page 5-152, C-64, D-6, F-7
Tmr1 on Tm page 5-152, C-65, D-6, F-7
INDEX-13
Tmr2 Delay page 5-152, C-65, D-6, F-7
Tmr2 on Tm page 5-152, C-65, D-6, F-7
Tmr3 Delay page 5-152, C-65, D-6, F-7
Tmr3 on Tm page 5-152, C-65, D-6, F-7
Tmr4 Delay page 5-152, C-66, D-6, F-7
Tmr4 on Tm page 5-152, C-66, D-6, F-7
Trim Ath page D-4
Trim Authority page 5-82, 5-96, 5-100, 5-104, C-53, F-5
Trim Out page 5-94, 5-98, 5-102, 5-106, 6-8, C-8, E-2, G-4
Tuning page 5-85, 5-87, Glossary- 15
Acceleration
Ramps page 5-85
Active Block page 5-115
Automatic Feedforward Adjustment page 5-93
Closed Loop page 5-87
Derivative Term page 5-88
Feedforward page 5-92, 5-106
Integral page 5-88
Kff Adjustment page 5-106
Loop Operation page 5-88
Open Loop page 5-88
Position Loop page 5-87, 5-90, 5-102, 5-104
Proportional Term page 5-88
Related Items page 5-108
Tuning the Closed Loop Structures page 5-89
Using the Closed Loop Structures page 5-87
Using the Open Loop Structure page 5-88
Velocity Loop page 5-87, 5-89, 5-94, 5-96
Velocity Loop / ZE page 5-98, 5-100
Zero Error Loop page 5-87
Tuning Parameters page 5-89
U
Unlock Block page 5-178, C-77, D-8, F-9
Unlock CP A page 5-176, C-76, D-8, F-9
Unlock CP B page 5-176, C-76, D-8, F-9
Unlock CP C page 5-176, C-76, D-8, F-9
Unlock CP D page 5-176, C-76, D-8, F-9
Unlock CP E page 5-176, C-76, D-8, F-9
Unlock CP F page 5-176, C-77, D-8, F-9
Unlock CP G page 5-176, C-77, D-8, F-9
Unlock CP H page 5-176, C-77, D-8, F-9
V
V1 Source page 5-51, 5-54, C-34, D-1, F-2
V2 Source page 5-51, 5-54, C-35, D-2, F-2
V3 Source page 5-51, 5-54, C-35, D-2, F-2
V4 Source page 5-51, 5-54, C-35, D-2, F-2
Val@AO RA page 5-32, C-41, D-3, F-3
Val@AO RB page 5-32, C-41, D-3, F-3
Value@Analog Output Reference A page 5-32
Value@Analog Output Reference B page 5-32
Video Mode page 5-186, C-74, D-8, F-9
Video Test page C-78, D-8, F-9
W
WatchDogCntr page C-26, E-3, G-6
Wiring page 2-9
AC Power page 2-9
AC Power Input page 2-10
Batch Done page 2-22
INDEX-14
Block Select A page 2-17
Block Select B page 2-17
Block Select C page 2-18
Control Output Dir page 2-22
Dev Alarm 1 page 2-22
Dev Alarm 2 page 2-22
Drive Enable page 2-22
F–Stop page 2-15
Feedback Frequency page 2-13
General page 2-8
H–Stop page 2-15
Hi Speed Alarm page 2-21
Increment Batch Count page 2-19
Inputs page 2-10
Jog Forward page 2-16
Jog Reverse page 2-16
Keypad Lockout page 2-17
Lead Frequency page 2-11
Lo Speed Alarm page 2-21
Outputs page 2-21
R–Stop page 2-15
Remote Scroll Down page 2-20
Remote Scroll Up page 2-20
Reset Batch Count page 2-19
Run page 2-16
Setpoint Direction page 2-18
Speed Command Out page 2-21
Zero Speed page 2-21
Wiring Diagram Examples page O-1
Wiring the Analog I/O Card page 2-35
Z
ZE Limit page 5-82, 5-100, C-53, F-5
Zero Error Position Loop
Tuning page 5-91
Zero Speed page 5-66, 5-82, C-55, D-5, F-6
">